—

R E L I O N ® 670 SERIES

Transformer protection RET670

Version 2.2 IEC
Technical manual
 Document ID: 1MRK 504 164-UEN
Issued: November 2017
Revision: B
Product version: 2.2

© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third
party, nor used for any unauthorized purpose.

The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license
and may be used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/) This product includes cryptographic
software written/developed by: Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) and Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).

Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or
product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.

Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept
or product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed
properties. All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this
manual must satisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable and
acceptable, including that any applicable safety or other operational requirements
are complied with. In particular, any risks in applications where a system failure
and/or product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons
(including but not limited to personal injuries or death) shall be the sole
responsibility of the person or entity applying the equipment, and those so
responsible are hereby requested to ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or
mitigate such risks.

This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be
completely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested
to notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in
no event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from
the use of this manual or the application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European
Communities on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning
electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive
2006/95/EC). This conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in
accordance with the product standard EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and
with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage
directive. The product is designed in accordance with the international standards of
the IEC 60255 series.
 Table of contents

Table of contents

Section 1 Introduction.....................................................................47
This manual...................................................................................... 47
Presumptions for Technical Data................................................ 47
Intended audience............................................................................ 48
Product documentation.....................................................................48
Product documentation set..........................................................48
Document revision history........................................................... 50
Related documents......................................................................50
Document symbols and conventions................................................51
Symbols.......................................................................................51
Document conventions................................................................ 52
IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping...........................................52

Section 2 Available functions......................................................... 61

Main protection functions..................................................................61
Back-up protection functions............................................................ 63
Control and monitoring functions......................................................65
Communication.................................................................................71
Basic IED functions.......................................................................... 74

Section 3 Analog inputs..................................................................77

Introduction.......................................................................................77
Function block.................................................................................. 77
Signals..............................................................................................78
Settings.............................................................................................80
Monitored data..................................................................................88
Operation principle........................................................................... 89
Technical data.................................................................................. 90

Section 4 Binary input and output modules....................................93

Binary input.......................................................................................93
Binary input debounce filter......................................................... 93
Oscillation filter............................................................................ 93
Settings........................................................................................93
Setting parameters for binary input modules..........................94
Setting parameters for binary input/output module................ 94

Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI ..........................95

Local HMI screen behaviour.............................................................95
Identification................................................................................ 95

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1

Technical manual
Table of contents

Settings........................................................................................95
Local HMI signals............................................................................. 95
Identification................................................................................ 95
Function block............................................................................. 96
Signals.........................................................................................96
Basic part for LED indication module............................................... 97
Identification................................................................................ 97
Function block............................................................................. 97
Signals.........................................................................................97
Settings........................................................................................98
LCD part for HMI function keys control module................................99
Identification................................................................................ 99
Function block............................................................................. 99
Signals.........................................................................................99
Settings........................................................................................99
Operation principle......................................................................... 101
Local HMI.................................................................................. 101
Keypad................................................................................. 102
Display..................................................................................104
LEDs.....................................................................................107
LED configuration alternatives...................................................109
Functionality ........................................................................ 109
Status LEDs......................................................................... 109
Indication LEDs.................................................................... 109
Function keys............................................................................ 118
Functionality ........................................................................ 118
Operation principle............................................................... 118

Section 6 Wide area measurement system..................................121

C37.118 Phasor Measurement Data Streaming Protocol
Configuration PMUCONF............................................................... 121
Identification.............................................................................. 121
Functionality.............................................................................. 121
Operation principle.................................................................... 121
IEEE C37.118 Message Framework.................................... 122
Short guidance for use of TCP............................................. 123
Short guidance for use of UDP.............................................124
Settings......................................................................................126
Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and C37.118 PMUREPORT......128
Identification.............................................................................. 128
Functionality.............................................................................. 128
Function block........................................................................... 131
Signals.......................................................................................133
Settings......................................................................................137

2 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Monitored data...........................................................................149
Operation principle.................................................................... 153
Frequency reporting............................................................. 154
Reporting filters.................................................................... 156
Scaling Factors for ANALOGREPORT channels................. 157
Technical data........................................................................... 159

Section 7 Differential protection................................................... 161

Transformer differential protection T2WPDIF and T3WPDIF ........ 161
Identification.............................................................................. 161
Functionality ............................................................................. 161
Function block........................................................................... 163
Signals.......................................................................................164
Settings......................................................................................168
Monitored data...........................................................................172
Operation principle.................................................................... 173
Function calculation principles............................................. 175
Logic diagram.......................................................................197
Technical data........................................................................... 201
High impedance differential protection, single phase HZPDIF ...... 202
Identification.............................................................................. 202
Functionality.............................................................................. 202
Function block........................................................................... 203
Signals.......................................................................................203
Settings......................................................................................204
Monitored data...........................................................................204
Operation principle.................................................................... 204
Logic diagram.......................................................................206
Technical data........................................................................... 207
Low impedance restricted earth fault protection REFPDIF ........... 207
Identification.............................................................................. 207
Functionality.............................................................................. 207
Function block........................................................................... 208
Signals.......................................................................................209
Settings......................................................................................209
Monitored data...........................................................................210
Operation principle.................................................................... 210
Fundamental principles of the restricted earth fault
protection..............................................................................210
Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance
differential protection............................................................ 213
Calculation of differential current and bias current............... 214
Detection of external earth faults..........................................215
Algorithm of the restricted earth fault protection...................217

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 3

Technical manual
Table of contents

Technical data........................................................................... 218

Additional security logic for differential protection LDRGFC ..........218
Identification.............................................................................. 218
Functionality.............................................................................. 219
Function block........................................................................... 220
Signals.......................................................................................220
Settings......................................................................................221
Monitored data...........................................................................222
Operation principle.................................................................... 222
Technical data........................................................................... 226

Section 8 Impedance protection...................................................227

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic
ZMQPDIS, ZMQAPDIS, ZDRDIR................................................... 227
Identification.............................................................................. 227
Functionality.............................................................................. 227
Function block........................................................................... 228
Signals.......................................................................................229
Settings......................................................................................231
Monitored data...........................................................................233
Operation principle.................................................................... 234
Full scheme measurement................................................... 234
Impedance characteristic..................................................... 234
Minimum operating current...................................................238
Measuring principles............................................................ 239
Directional impedance element for quadrilateral
characteristics...................................................................... 241
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................244
Technical data........................................................................... 247
Phase selection, quad, fixed angle, load encroachment
FDPSPDIS......................................................................................248
Identification.............................................................................. 248
Identification......................................................................... 248
Functionality.............................................................................. 248
Function block........................................................................... 249
Signals.......................................................................................249
Settings......................................................................................250
Operation principle.................................................................... 251
Phase-to-earth fault..............................................................253
Phase-to-phase fault............................................................ 255
Three-phase faults............................................................... 257
Load encroachment..............................................................257
Minimum operate currents....................................................262
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................262

4 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Technical data........................................................................... 268

Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for
series compensated lines ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS, ZDSRDIR....... 268
Identification.............................................................................. 268
Functionality.............................................................................. 269
Function block........................................................................... 270
Signals.......................................................................................270
Settings......................................................................................272
Monitored data...........................................................................276
Operation principle.................................................................... 276
Full scheme measurement................................................... 276
Impedance characteristic..................................................... 277
Minimum operating current...................................................281
Measuring principles............................................................ 282
Directionality for series compensation..................................284
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................286
Technical data........................................................................... 289
Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic ZMHPDIS .. 290
Identification.............................................................................. 290
Functionality.............................................................................. 290
Function block........................................................................... 291
Signals.......................................................................................291
Settings......................................................................................292
Operation principle.................................................................... 293
Full scheme measurement................................................... 293
Impedance characteristic..................................................... 294
Basic operation characteristics.............................................295
Theory of operation.............................................................. 297
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................306
Technical data........................................................................... 310
Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults
ZMMPDIS, ZMMAPDIS.................................................................. 310
Identification.............................................................................. 310
Functionality.............................................................................. 311
Function block........................................................................... 312
Signals.......................................................................................312
Settings......................................................................................314
Operation principle.................................................................... 315
Full scheme measurement................................................... 315
Impedance characteristic..................................................... 315
Minimum operating current...................................................317
Measuring principles............................................................ 318
Directionality.........................................................................320
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................322

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 5

Technical manual
Table of contents

Technical data........................................................................... 325

Directional impedance element for mho characteristic and
additional distance protection directional function for earth
faults ZDMRDIR, ZDARDIR........................................................... 325
Identification.............................................................................. 325
Functionality.............................................................................. 326
Function block........................................................................... 326
Signals.......................................................................................326
Settings......................................................................................327
Monitored data...........................................................................328
Operation principle.................................................................... 329
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic
ZDMRDIR.............................................................................329
Additional distance protection directional function for
earth faults ZDARDIR...........................................................331
Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC................................334
Identification.............................................................................. 334
Functionality.............................................................................. 334
Function block........................................................................... 334
Signals.......................................................................................334
Settings......................................................................................335
Operation principle.................................................................... 336
Fault inception detection...................................................... 336
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS....337
Identification.............................................................................. 337
Functionality.............................................................................. 337
Function block........................................................................... 338
Signals.......................................................................................338
Settings......................................................................................339
Operation principle.................................................................... 339
The phase selection function................................................339
Technical data........................................................................... 350
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic, separate
settings ZMRPDIS, ZMRAPDIS and ZDRDIR................................ 351
Identification.............................................................................. 351
Functionality.............................................................................. 351
Function block........................................................................... 352
Signals.......................................................................................352
Settings......................................................................................354
Operation principle.................................................................... 356
Full scheme measurement................................................... 356
Impedance characteristic..................................................... 357
Minimum operating current...................................................361
Measuring principles............................................................ 362

6 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Directional impedance element for quadrilateral

characteristics...................................................................... 364
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................367
Technical data........................................................................... 370
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable
angle FRPSPDIS............................................................................371
Identification.............................................................................. 371
Functionality.............................................................................. 371
Function block........................................................................... 372
Signals.......................................................................................372
Settings......................................................................................373
Operation principle.................................................................... 374
Phase-to-earth fault..............................................................376
Phase-to-phase fault............................................................ 378
Three-phase faults............................................................... 380
Load encroachment..............................................................380
Minimum operate currents....................................................385
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................386
Technical data........................................................................... 390
High speed distance protection ZMFPDIS..................................... 391
Identification.............................................................................. 391
Functionality.............................................................................. 391
Function block........................................................................... 392
Signals.......................................................................................393
Settings......................................................................................395
Monitored data...........................................................................401
Operation principle.................................................................... 402
Filtering.................................................................................403
Distance measuring zones................................................... 403
Phase-selection element...................................................... 404
Directional criteria.................................................................405
Fuse failure...........................................................................406
Power swings....................................................................... 406
Measuring principles............................................................ 406
Load encroachment..............................................................417
Simplified logic schemes...................................................... 418
Measurement....................................................................... 425
Technical data........................................................................... 430
High speed distance protection for series compensated lines
ZMFCPDIS .................................................................................... 431
Identification.............................................................................. 431
Functionality.............................................................................. 431
Function block........................................................................... 432
Signals.......................................................................................433

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 7

Technical manual
Table of contents

Settings......................................................................................435
Monitored data...........................................................................442
Operation principle.................................................................... 444
Filtering.................................................................................444
Distance measuring zones................................................... 444
Phase-selection element...................................................... 445
Directional criteria.................................................................446
Fuse failure...........................................................................447
Power swings....................................................................... 447
Measurement principles....................................................... 447
Load encroachment..............................................................459
Simplified logic schemes...................................................... 460
Measurement....................................................................... 466
Technical data........................................................................... 471
Power swing detection ZMRPSB ...................................................472
Identification.............................................................................. 472
Functionality.............................................................................. 472
Function block........................................................................... 472
Signals.......................................................................................472
Settings......................................................................................473
Operation principle.................................................................... 474
Resistive reach in forward direction..................................... 475
Resistive reach in reverse direction..................................... 476
Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction.................. 477
Basic detection logic.............................................................477
Operating and inhibit conditions........................................... 479
Technical data........................................................................... 480
Automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF ................................. 480
Identification.............................................................................. 480
Functionality.............................................................................. 481
Function block........................................................................... 481
Signals.......................................................................................481
Settings......................................................................................482
Monitored data...........................................................................482
Operation principle.................................................................... 483
Technical data........................................................................... 484
Power swing logic PSLPSCH ........................................................ 484
Identification.............................................................................. 485
Functionality.............................................................................. 485
Function block........................................................................... 485
Signals.......................................................................................485
Settings......................................................................................486
Operation principle.................................................................... 487

8 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Communication and tripping logic........................................ 487

Blocking logic....................................................................... 488
Pole slip protection PSPPPAM ......................................................489
Identification.............................................................................. 489
Functionality.............................................................................. 489
Function block........................................................................... 490
Signals.......................................................................................490
Settings......................................................................................491
Monitored data...........................................................................492
Operation principle.................................................................... 492
Technical data........................................................................... 496
Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM..................................................496
Identification.............................................................................. 496
Functionality.............................................................................. 496
Function block........................................................................... 497
Signals.......................................................................................497
Settings......................................................................................498
Monitored data...........................................................................499
Operation principle.................................................................... 499
Lens characteristic............................................................... 502
Detecting an out-of-step condition........................................504
Maximum slip frequency.......................................................505
Taking care of the circuit breaker ........................................ 506
Design.................................................................................. 508
Technical data........................................................................... 509
Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ...................................................509
Identification.............................................................................. 509
Functionality.............................................................................. 509
Function block........................................................................... 510
Signals.......................................................................................510
Settings......................................................................................511
Operation principle.................................................................... 511
Residual current criteria....................................................... 512
Phase selection.................................................................... 513
Preference logic................................................................... 514
Output...................................................................................517
Phase preference logic PPL2PHIZ.................................................518
Identification.............................................................................. 518
Functionality.............................................................................. 518
Function block........................................................................... 519
Signals.......................................................................................519
Settings......................................................................................520
Operation principle.................................................................... 520

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 9

Technical manual
Table of contents

Residual current criteria....................................................... 521

Phase selection.................................................................... 522
Preference logic................................................................... 523
Output...................................................................................526
Technical data........................................................................... 527
Under impedance protection for generators and transformers
ZGVPDIS........................................................................................527
Identification.............................................................................. 527
Functionality.............................................................................. 528
Function block........................................................................... 528
Signals.......................................................................................528
Settings......................................................................................529
Monitored data...........................................................................530
Operation principle.................................................................... 530
Operation principle of zone 1............................................... 532
Operation principle of zone 2............................................... 534
Operation principle of zone 3............................................... 538
Load encroachment..............................................................538
Under voltage seal-in........................................................... 539
Technical data........................................................................... 540

Section 9 Current protection.........................................................541

Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC .................. 541
Identification.............................................................................. 541
Functionality.............................................................................. 541
Function block........................................................................... 541
Signals.......................................................................................541
Settings......................................................................................542
Monitored data...........................................................................542
Operation principle.................................................................... 543
Technical data........................................................................... 544
Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps OC4PTOC....544
Identification.............................................................................. 544
Functionality.............................................................................. 544
Function block........................................................................... 545
Signals.......................................................................................546
Settings......................................................................................547
Monitored data...........................................................................553
Operation principle.................................................................... 553
Technical data........................................................................... 560
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC ................ 561
Identification.............................................................................. 561
Functionality.............................................................................. 561
Function block........................................................................... 561

10 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Signals.......................................................................................561
Settings......................................................................................562
Monitored data...........................................................................562
Operation principle.................................................................... 562
Technical data........................................................................... 563
Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps EF4PTOC .564
Identification.............................................................................. 564
Functionality.............................................................................. 564
Function block........................................................................... 565
Signals.......................................................................................565
Settings......................................................................................566
Monitored data...........................................................................572
Operation principle.................................................................... 573
Operating quantity within the function.................................. 573
Internal polarizing................................................................. 574
External polarizing for earth-fault function............................576
Directional detection for earth fault function......................... 576
Base quantities within the protection....................................576
Internal earth-fault protection structure................................ 577
Four residual overcurrent steps............................................577
Directional supervision element with integrated
directional comparison function............................................578
Second harmonic blocking element..................................... 581
Switch on to fault feature......................................................583
Technical data........................................................................... 585
Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent
protection NS4PTOC .....................................................................586
Identification.............................................................................. 586
Functionality.............................................................................. 586
Function block........................................................................... 587
Signals.......................................................................................587
Settings......................................................................................588
Monitored data...........................................................................593
Operation principle.................................................................... 593
Operating quantity within the function.................................. 593
Internal polarizing facility of the function.............................. 594
External polarizing for negative sequence function..............595
Internal negative sequence protection structure.................. 595
Four negative sequence overcurrent stages........................ 595
Directional supervision element with integrated
directional comparison function............................................596
Technical data........................................................................... 599
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection
SDEPSDE ..................................................................................... 599

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 11

Technical manual
Table of contents

Identification.............................................................................. 600
Functionality.............................................................................. 600
Function block........................................................................... 602
Signals.......................................................................................602
Settings......................................................................................603
Monitored data...........................................................................605
Operation principle.................................................................... 605
Function inputs..................................................................... 605
Technical data........................................................................... 612
Thermal overload protection, one time constant, Celsius/
Fahrenheit LCPTTR/LFPTTR.........................................................613
Identification.............................................................................. 613
Functionality.............................................................................. 614
Function block........................................................................... 614
Signals.......................................................................................614
Settings......................................................................................616
Monitored data...........................................................................617
Operation principle.................................................................... 618
Technical data........................................................................... 621
Thermal overload protection, two time constants TRPTTR ........... 621
Identification.............................................................................. 621
Functionality.............................................................................. 621
Function block........................................................................... 622
Signals.......................................................................................622
Settings......................................................................................623
Monitored data...........................................................................624
Operation principle.................................................................... 624
Technical data........................................................................... 628
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF............................................... 628
Identification.............................................................................. 628
Functionality.............................................................................. 628
Function block........................................................................... 629
Signals.......................................................................................629
Settings......................................................................................630
Monitored data...........................................................................631
Operation principle.................................................................... 631
Technical data........................................................................... 634
Stub protection STBPTOC ............................................................ 635
Identification.............................................................................. 635
Functionality.............................................................................. 635
Function block........................................................................... 635
Signals.......................................................................................636
Settings......................................................................................636

12 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Monitored data...........................................................................637
Operation principle.................................................................... 637
Technical data........................................................................... 638
Pole discordance protection CCPDSC........................................... 638
Identification.............................................................................. 638
Functionality.............................................................................. 638
Function block........................................................................... 639
Signals.......................................................................................639
Settings......................................................................................640
Monitored data...........................................................................640
Operation principle.................................................................... 640
Pole discordance signaling from circuit breaker...................643
Unsymmetrical current detection..........................................643
Technical data........................................................................... 644
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP............................... 644
Identification.............................................................................. 644
Functionality.............................................................................. 644
Function block........................................................................... 645
Signals.......................................................................................645
Settings......................................................................................646
Monitored data...........................................................................648
Operation principle.................................................................... 648
Low pass filtering..................................................................650
Calibration of analog inputs..................................................650
Technical data........................................................................... 651
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP ................................652
Identification.............................................................................. 652
Functionality.............................................................................. 652
Function block........................................................................... 653
Signals.......................................................................................653
Settings......................................................................................654
Monitored data...........................................................................656
Operation principle.................................................................... 656
Low pass filtering..................................................................658
Calibration of analog inputs..................................................658
Technical data........................................................................... 659
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC ............................................. 660
Identification.............................................................................. 660
Functionality.............................................................................. 660
Function block........................................................................... 660
Signals.......................................................................................660
Settings......................................................................................661
Monitored data...........................................................................661

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 13

Technical manual
Table of contents

Operation principle.................................................................... 661

Technical data........................................................................... 663
Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC............................................ 663
Identification.............................................................................. 663
Functionality.............................................................................. 663
Function block........................................................................... 664
Signals.......................................................................................664
Settings......................................................................................666
Monitored data...........................................................................667
Operation principle.................................................................... 667
Measured quantities............................................................. 667
Reconnection inhibit feature.................................................670
Overcurrent feature.............................................................. 671
Undercurrent feature............................................................ 672
Capacitor harmonic overload feature................................... 672
Capacitor reactive power overload feature...........................674
Technical data........................................................................... 675
Negativ sequence time overcurrent protection for machines
NS2PTOC ......................................................................................676
Identification.............................................................................. 676
Functionality.............................................................................. 676
Function block........................................................................... 677
Signals.......................................................................................677
Settings......................................................................................678
Monitored data...........................................................................679
Operation principle.................................................................... 679
Start sensitivity..................................................................... 681
Alarm function...................................................................... 681
Logic diagram.......................................................................682
Technical data........................................................................... 682
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC.............. 683
Identification.............................................................................. 683
Functionality.............................................................................. 683
Function block........................................................................... 684
Signals.......................................................................................684
Settings......................................................................................685
Monitored data...........................................................................686
Operation principle.................................................................... 686
Measured quantities............................................................. 686
Base quantities.....................................................................686
Overcurrent protection..........................................................686
Logic diagram.......................................................................688
Undervoltage protection....................................................... 688

14 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Technical data........................................................................... 689

Section 10 Voltage protection........................................................ 691

Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV ................................691
Identification.............................................................................. 691
Functionality.............................................................................. 691
Function block........................................................................... 692
Signals.......................................................................................692
Settings......................................................................................693
Monitored data...........................................................................695
Operation principle.................................................................... 695
Measurement principle......................................................... 696
Time delay............................................................................696
Blocking................................................................................702
Design.................................................................................. 703
Technical data........................................................................... 704
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV ..................................705
Identification.............................................................................. 705
Functionality OV2PTOV............................................................ 705
Function block........................................................................... 706
Signals.......................................................................................706
Settings......................................................................................707
Monitored data...........................................................................709
Operation principle.................................................................... 709
Measurement principle......................................................... 710
Time delay............................................................................710
Blocking................................................................................716
Design.................................................................................. 716
Technical data........................................................................... 717
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV ................. 718
Identification.............................................................................. 718
Functionality.............................................................................. 718
Function block........................................................................... 719
Signals.......................................................................................719
Settings......................................................................................720
Monitored data...........................................................................721
Operation principle.................................................................... 722
Measurement principle......................................................... 722
Time delay............................................................................722
Blocking................................................................................727
Design.................................................................................. 727
Technical data........................................................................... 728
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH ............................................ 729
Identification.............................................................................. 729

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 15

Technical manual
Table of contents

Functionality.............................................................................. 729
Function block........................................................................... 729
Signals.......................................................................................730
Settings......................................................................................730
Monitored data...........................................................................731
Operation principle.................................................................... 731
Measured voltage.................................................................734
Operate time of the overexcitation protection.......................735
Cooling................................................................................. 738
Overexcitation protection function measurands................... 738
Overexcitation alarm............................................................ 739
Logic diagram.......................................................................740
Technical data........................................................................... 740
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV ......................................741
Identification.............................................................................. 741
Functionality.............................................................................. 741
Function block........................................................................... 741
Signals.......................................................................................741
Settings......................................................................................742
Monitored data...........................................................................743
Operation principle.................................................................... 743
Technical data........................................................................... 744
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV .................................................. 745
Identification.............................................................................. 745
Functionality.............................................................................. 745
Function block........................................................................... 745
Signals.......................................................................................745
Settings......................................................................................746
Operation principle.................................................................... 746
Technical data........................................................................... 748

Section 11 Frequency protection....................................................749

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF ............................................. 749
Identification.............................................................................. 749
Functionality.............................................................................. 749
Function block........................................................................... 749
Signals.......................................................................................750
Settings......................................................................................750
Operation principle.................................................................... 751
Measurement principle......................................................... 751
Time delay............................................................................751
Voltage dependent time delay..............................................752
Blocking................................................................................753
Design.................................................................................. 753

16 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Technical data........................................................................... 754

Overfrequency protection SAPTOF ...............................................755
Identification.............................................................................. 755
Functionality.............................................................................. 755
Function block........................................................................... 756
Signals.......................................................................................756
Settings......................................................................................756
Operation principle.................................................................... 757
Measurement principle......................................................... 757
Time delay............................................................................757
Blocking................................................................................758
Design.................................................................................. 758
Technical data........................................................................... 759
Rate-of-change of frequency protection SAPFRC .........................759
Identification.............................................................................. 759
Functionality.............................................................................. 759
Function block........................................................................... 760
Signals.......................................................................................760
Settings......................................................................................760
Operation principle.................................................................... 761
Measurement principle......................................................... 761
Time delay............................................................................761
Blocking................................................................................762
Design.................................................................................. 762
Technical data........................................................................... 763

Section 12 Multipurpose protection................................................ 765

General current and voltage protection CVGAPC.......................... 765
Identification.............................................................................. 765
Functionality.............................................................................. 765
Function block........................................................................... 766
Signals.......................................................................................766
Settings......................................................................................768
Monitored data...........................................................................775
Operation principle.................................................................... 775
Measured quantities within CVGAPC...................................775
Base quantities for CVGAPC function..................................778
Built-in overcurrent protection steps.....................................778
Built-in undercurrent protection steps...................................783
Built-in overvoltage protection steps.................................... 784
Built-in undervoltage protection steps.................................. 784
Logic diagram.......................................................................784
Technical data........................................................................... 789

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 17

Technical manual
Table of contents

Section 13 System protection and control......................................793

Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC....................................................... 793
Identification.............................................................................. 793
Functionality.............................................................................. 793
Function block........................................................................... 793
Signals.......................................................................................793
Settings......................................................................................794
Operation principle.................................................................... 794
Filter calculation example.......................................................... 798

Section 14 Secondary system supervision.....................................801

Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC............................................801
Identification.............................................................................. 801
Functionality.............................................................................. 801
Function block........................................................................... 801
Signals.......................................................................................802
Settings......................................................................................802
Operation principle.................................................................... 802
Technical data........................................................................... 804
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC................................................804
Identification.............................................................................. 804
Functionality.............................................................................. 805
Function block........................................................................... 805
Signals.......................................................................................806
Settings......................................................................................807
Monitored data...........................................................................808
Operation principle.................................................................... 808
Zero and negative sequence detection................................ 808
Delta current and delta voltage detection.............................810
Dead line detection...............................................................813
Main logic............................................................................. 814
Technical data........................................................................... 817
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC..................................................817
Identification.............................................................................. 817
Functionality.............................................................................. 817
Function block........................................................................... 818
Signals.......................................................................................818
Settings......................................................................................819
Monitored data...........................................................................819
Operation principle.................................................................... 820
Technical data........................................................................... 821

Section 15 Control..........................................................................823

18 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN...823

Identification.............................................................................. 823
Functionality.............................................................................. 823
Function block........................................................................... 824
Signals.......................................................................................824
Settings......................................................................................827
Monitored data...........................................................................829
Operation principle.................................................................... 829
Basic functionality.................................................................829
Logic diagrams..................................................................... 830
Technical data........................................................................... 842
Interlocking .................................................................................... 843
Functionality.............................................................................. 843
Operation principle.................................................................... 843
Logical node for interlocking SCILO ......................................... 846
Identification......................................................................... 846
Functionality......................................................................... 846
Function block...................................................................... 847
Signals..................................................................................847
Logic diagram.......................................................................847
Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES .........................848
Identification......................................................................... 848
Functionality......................................................................... 848
Function block...................................................................... 848
Logic diagram.......................................................................849
Signals..................................................................................849
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS.......................... 849
Identification......................................................................... 849
Functionality......................................................................... 849
Function block...................................................................... 850
Logic diagram.......................................................................851
Signals..................................................................................852
Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC ................ 853
Identification......................................................................... 853
Functionality......................................................................... 853
Function block...................................................................... 854
Logic diagram.......................................................................855
Signals..................................................................................855
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC ................................ 856
Identification......................................................................... 856
Functionality......................................................................... 857
Function block...................................................................... 858
Logic diagram.......................................................................859

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 19

Technical manual
Table of contents

Signals..................................................................................861
Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB BH ..................................................... 864
Identification......................................................................... 864
Functionality......................................................................... 864
Function blocks.................................................................... 865
Logic diagrams..................................................................... 867
Signals..................................................................................872
Interlocking for double CB bay DB ........................................... 876
Identification......................................................................... 876
Functionality......................................................................... 876
Logic diagrams..................................................................... 878
Function block...................................................................... 881
Signals..................................................................................883
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE .......................................... 886
Identification......................................................................... 886
Functionality......................................................................... 886
Function block...................................................................... 887
Logic diagram.......................................................................888
Signals..................................................................................893
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO ............................ 895
Identification......................................................................... 895
Functionality......................................................................... 896
Function block...................................................................... 897
Logic diagram.......................................................................898
Signals..................................................................................899
Position evaluation POS_EVAL.................................................901
Identification......................................................................... 901
Functionality......................................................................... 901
Function block...................................................................... 901
Logic diagram.......................................................................902
Signals..................................................................................902
Apparatus control APC................................................................... 902
Functionality.............................................................................. 902
Operation principle.................................................................... 903
Error handling............................................................................ 904
Bay control QCBAY................................................................... 908
Functionality......................................................................... 908
Function block...................................................................... 908
Signals..................................................................................908
Settings................................................................................ 909
Operation principle............................................................... 909
Local/Remote switch LOCREM................................................. 911
Function block...................................................................... 911

20 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Signals..................................................................................912
Settings................................................................................ 913
Operation principle............................................................... 913
Switch controller SCSWI........................................................... 914
Functionality ........................................................................ 915
Function block...................................................................... 915
Signals..................................................................................915
Settings................................................................................ 917
Operation principle............................................................... 917
Interaction with switch on process bus.................................924
Circuit breaker SXCBR..............................................................925
Functionality ........................................................................ 925
Function block...................................................................... 926
Signals..................................................................................926
Settings................................................................................ 927
Operation principle............................................................... 927
Circuit switch SXSWI.................................................................932
Functionality ........................................................................ 932
Function block...................................................................... 932
Signals..................................................................................932
Settings................................................................................ 933
Operation principle............................................................... 934
Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE
XLNPROXY .............................................................................. 938
Functionality......................................................................... 938
Function block...................................................................... 938
Signals..................................................................................938
Settings................................................................................ 940
Operation principle............................................................... 940
Position supervision............................................................. 940
Command response evaluation............................................940
Bay reserve QCRSV..................................................................942
Functionality......................................................................... 942
Function block...................................................................... 943
Signals..................................................................................943
Settings................................................................................ 944
Operation principle............................................................... 944
Reservation input RESIN...........................................................946
Functionality......................................................................... 947
Function block...................................................................... 947
Signals..................................................................................947
Settings................................................................................ 948
Operation principle............................................................... 949

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 21

Technical manual
Table of contents

Voltage control................................................................................950
Identification.............................................................................. 950
Functionality.............................................................................. 951
Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR1ATCC and
TR8ATCC ................................................................................. 951
Operation principle............................................................... 951
Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs
TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC .........................................................962
Operation principle............................................................... 962
Connection between TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC and
TCMYLTCor TCLYLTC............................................................. 966
Function block........................................................................... 970
Signals.......................................................................................973
Settings......................................................................................980
Monitored data...........................................................................988
Operation principle.................................................................... 990
Technical data........................................................................... 991
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI
presentation SLGAPC.................................................................... 992
Identification.............................................................................. 992
Functionality.............................................................................. 992
Function block........................................................................... 993
Signals.......................................................................................993
Settings......................................................................................994
Monitored data...........................................................................995
Operation principle.................................................................... 995
Graphical display..................................................................995
Selector mini switch VSGAPC........................................................996
Identification.............................................................................. 997
Functionality.............................................................................. 997
Function block........................................................................... 997
Signals.......................................................................................997
Settings......................................................................................998
Operation principle.................................................................... 998
Generic communication function for Double Point indication
DPGAPC........................................................................................ 999
Identification.............................................................................. 999
Functionality.............................................................................. 999
Function block........................................................................... 999
Signals.....................................................................................1000
Settings....................................................................................1000
Operation principle.................................................................. 1000
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC...................... 1001
Identification............................................................................ 1001

22 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Functionality............................................................................ 1001
Function block......................................................................... 1001
Signals.....................................................................................1002
Settings....................................................................................1002
Operation principle.................................................................. 1003
AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 AUTOBITS........ 1003
Identification............................................................................ 1003
Functionality............................................................................ 1003
Function block......................................................................... 1004
Signals.....................................................................................1004
Settings....................................................................................1005
Operation principle.................................................................. 1006
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD.................................. 1006
Identification............................................................................ 1006
Functionality............................................................................ 1006
Function block......................................................................... 1007
Signals.....................................................................................1007
Settings....................................................................................1008
Operation principle.................................................................. 1008

Section 16 Scheme communication............................................. 1009

Scheme communication logic for distance or overcurrent
protection ZCPSCH...................................................................... 1009
Identification............................................................................ 1009
Functionality............................................................................ 1009
Function block......................................................................... 1009
Signals.....................................................................................1010
Settings....................................................................................1011
Operation principle.................................................................. 1011
Blocking scheme................................................................ 1012
Delta blocking scheme....................................................... 1012
Permissive underreaching scheme.................................... 1013
Permissive overreaching scheme...................................... 1014
Unblocking scheme............................................................ 1014
Intertrip scheme..................................................................1015
Simplified logic diagram..................................................... 1016
Technical data......................................................................... 1017
Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance
protection ZC1PPSCH .................................................................1017
Identification............................................................................ 1017
Functionality............................................................................ 1017
Function block......................................................................... 1018
Signals.....................................................................................1019
Settings....................................................................................1020

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 23

Technical manual
Table of contents

Operation principle.................................................................. 1020

Blocking scheme................................................................ 1021
Permissive underreach scheme......................................... 1021
Permissive overreach scheme........................................... 1022
Unblocking scheme............................................................ 1022
Intertrip scheme..................................................................1022
Simplified logic diagram..................................................... 1022
Technical data......................................................................... 1024
Current reversal and Weak-end infeed logic for distance
protection 3-phase ZCRWPSCH ................................................. 1024
Identification............................................................................ 1024
Functionality............................................................................ 1024
Function block......................................................................... 1025
Signals.....................................................................................1025
Settings....................................................................................1026
Operation principle.................................................................. 1026
Current reversal logic......................................................... 1026
Weak-end infeed logic........................................................1027
Technical data......................................................................... 1029
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase
segregated communication ZC1WPSCH .................................... 1029
Identification............................................................................ 1029
Functionality............................................................................ 1029
Function block......................................................................... 1030
Signals.....................................................................................1030
Settings....................................................................................1031
Operation principle.................................................................. 1032
Current reversal logic ........................................................ 1032
Weak end infeed logic........................................................ 1032
Technical data......................................................................... 1034
Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent
protection ECPSCH .....................................................................1034
Identification............................................................................ 1034
Functionality............................................................................ 1035
Function block......................................................................... 1035
Signals.....................................................................................1035
Settings....................................................................................1036
Operation principle.................................................................. 1037
Blocking scheme................................................................ 1037
Permissive under/overreaching scheme............................ 1038
Unblocking scheme............................................................ 1039
Technical data......................................................................... 1040
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual
overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH.............................................1040

24 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Identification............................................................................ 1040
Functionality............................................................................ 1041
Function block......................................................................... 1041
Signals.....................................................................................1042
Settings....................................................................................1042
Operation principle.................................................................. 1043
Directional comparison logic function.................................1043
Fault current reversal logic................................................. 1043
Weak-end infeed logic........................................................1044
Technical data......................................................................... 1046

Section 17 Logic...........................................................................1047
Tripping logic SMPPTRC .............................................................1047
Identification............................................................................ 1047
Functionality............................................................................ 1047
Function block......................................................................... 1048
Signals.....................................................................................1048
Settings....................................................................................1049
Operation principle.................................................................. 1050
Logic diagram.....................................................................1054
Technical data......................................................................... 1056
General start matrix block SMAGAPC..........................................1057
Identification............................................................................ 1057
Functionality............................................................................ 1057
Function block......................................................................... 1057
Signals.....................................................................................1057
Settings....................................................................................1058
Operation principle.................................................................. 1058
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC......................................................... 1064
Identification............................................................................ 1064
Functionality............................................................................ 1064
Function block......................................................................... 1065
Signals.....................................................................................1065
Settings....................................................................................1067
Operation principle.................................................................. 1067
Technical data......................................................................... 1068
Logic for group alarm ALMCALH..................................................1068
Identification............................................................................ 1068
Functionality............................................................................ 1069
Function block......................................................................... 1069
Signals.....................................................................................1069
Settings....................................................................................1070
Operation principle.................................................................. 1070
Technical data......................................................................... 1070

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 25

Technical manual
Table of contents

Logic for group warning WRNCALH.............................................1071

Identification............................................................................ 1071
Functionality............................................................................ 1071
Function block......................................................................... 1071
Signals.....................................................................................1071
Settings....................................................................................1072
Operation principle.................................................................. 1072
Technical data......................................................................... 1073
Logic for group indication INDCALH.............................................1073
Identification............................................................................ 1073
Functionality............................................................................ 1073
Function block......................................................................... 1073
Signals.....................................................................................1074
Settings....................................................................................1074
Operation principle.................................................................. 1074
Technical data......................................................................... 1075
Basic configurable logic blocks.....................................................1075
AND function block AND......................................................... 1076
Function block.................................................................... 1076
Signals................................................................................1077
Technical data.................................................................... 1077
Controllable gate function block GATE....................................1077
Function block.................................................................... 1077
Signals................................................................................1077
Settings.............................................................................. 1078
Technical data.................................................................... 1078
Inverter function block INV...................................................... 1078
Function block.................................................................... 1078
Signals................................................................................1078
Technical data.................................................................... 1079
Loop delay function block LLD................................................ 1079
Function block.................................................................... 1079
Signals................................................................................1079
Technical data.................................................................... 1079
OR function block.................................................................... 1080
Function block.................................................................... 1080
Signals................................................................................1080
Technical data.................................................................... 1080
Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER................................1081
Function block.................................................................... 1081
Signals................................................................................1081
Settings.............................................................................. 1081
Technical data.................................................................... 1081

26 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY...............1082

Function block.................................................................... 1082
Signals................................................................................1082
Settings.............................................................................. 1083
Technical data.................................................................... 1083
Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY............... 1083
Function block.................................................................... 1083
Signals................................................................................1084
Settings.............................................................................. 1084
Technical data.................................................................... 1084
Settable timer function block TIMERSET................................ 1084
Function block.................................................................... 1085
Signals................................................................................1085
Settings.............................................................................. 1086
Technical data.................................................................... 1086
Exclusive OR function block XOR........................................... 1086
Function block.................................................................... 1086
Signals................................................................................1087
Technical data.................................................................... 1087
Configurable logic blocks Q/T.......................................................1087
ANDQT function block............................................................. 1088
Function block.................................................................... 1089
Signals................................................................................1089
Technical data.................................................................... 1089
Single point indication related signals combining function
block INDCOMBSPQT............................................................ 1089
Function block.................................................................... 1090
Signals................................................................................1090
Technical data.................................................................... 1090
Single point input signal attributes converting function block
INDEXTSPQT..........................................................................1090
Function block.................................................................... 1091
Signals................................................................................1091
Technical data.................................................................... 1091
Invalid logic function block INVALIDQT...................................1092
Function block.................................................................... 1092
Signals................................................................................1092
Technical data.................................................................... 1093
Inverter function block INVERTERQT..................................... 1094
Function block.................................................................... 1094
Signals................................................................................1094
Technical data.................................................................... 1094
ORQT function block............................................................... 1094
Function block.................................................................... 1095

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 27

Technical manual
Table of contents

Signals................................................................................1095
Technical data.................................................................... 1095
Pulse timer function block PULSETIMERQT...........................1095
Function block.................................................................... 1096
Signals................................................................................1096
Settings.............................................................................. 1096
Technical data.................................................................... 1097
Reset/Set function block RSMEMORYQT...............................1097
Function block.................................................................... 1097
Signals................................................................................1097
Settings.............................................................................. 1098
Technical data.................................................................... 1098
Set/Reset function block SRMEMORYQT...............................1098
Function block.................................................................... 1099
Signals................................................................................1099
Settings.............................................................................. 1099
Technical data.................................................................... 1099
Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT........................... 1099
Function block.................................................................... 1100
Signals................................................................................1100
Settings.............................................................................. 1100
Technical data.................................................................... 1100
Exclusive OR function block XORQT...................................... 1101
Function block.................................................................... 1101
Signals................................................................................1101
Technical data.................................................................... 1102
Extension logic package...............................................................1102
Fixed signals FXDSIGN................................................................1103
Identification............................................................................ 1103
Functionality............................................................................ 1103
Function block......................................................................... 1103
Signals.....................................................................................1103
Settings....................................................................................1104
Operation principle.................................................................. 1104
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I........................................ 1104
Identification............................................................................ 1104
Functionality............................................................................ 1104
Function block......................................................................... 1105
Signals.....................................................................................1105
Monitored data.........................................................................1106
Settings....................................................................................1106
Operation principle.................................................................. 1106
Technical data......................................................................... 1107

28 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Boolean to integer conversion with logical node

representation, 16 bit BTIGAPC................................................... 1107
Identification............................................................................ 1107
Functionality............................................................................ 1107
Function block......................................................................... 1108
Signals.....................................................................................1108
Settings....................................................................................1109
Monitored data.........................................................................1109
Operation principle.................................................................. 1109
Technical data......................................................................... 1110
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16.........................................1110
Identification............................................................................ 1110
Functionality............................................................................ 1110
Function block......................................................................... 1111
Signals.....................................................................................1111
Setting parameters.................................................................. 1112
Operation principle.................................................................. 1112
Technical data......................................................................... 1113
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node
representation ITBGAPC..............................................................1113
Identification............................................................................ 1113
Functionality............................................................................ 1114
Function block......................................................................... 1114
Signals.....................................................................................1114
Settings....................................................................................1115
Operation principle.................................................................. 1115
Technical data......................................................................... 1116
Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow
supervision TEIGAPC...................................................................1117
Identification............................................................................ 1117
Functionality............................................................................ 1117
Function block......................................................................... 1118
Signals.....................................................................................1118
Settings....................................................................................1118
Operation principle.................................................................. 1118
Operation accuracy............................................................ 1120
Memory storage................................................................. 1120
Technical data......................................................................... 1120
Comparator for integer inputs INTCOMP..................................... 1121
Identification............................................................................ 1121
Functionality............................................................................ 1121
Function block......................................................................... 1121
Signals.....................................................................................1121
Settings....................................................................................1122

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 29

Technical manual
Table of contents

Monitored data.........................................................................1122
Operation principle.................................................................. 1122
Technical data......................................................................... 1123
Comparator for real inputs REALCOMP.......................................1123
Identification............................................................................ 1123
Functionality............................................................................ 1123
Function block......................................................................... 1123
Signals.....................................................................................1124
Settings....................................................................................1124
Operation principle.................................................................. 1124
Technical data......................................................................... 1126

Section 18 Monitoring...................................................................1127
Measurements..............................................................................1127
Identification............................................................................ 1127
Functionality............................................................................ 1127
Function block......................................................................... 1129
Signals.....................................................................................1131
Settings....................................................................................1134
Monitored data.........................................................................1146
Operation principle.................................................................. 1148
Measurement supervision.................................................. 1148
Measurements CVMMXN...................................................1154
Phase current measurement CMMXU............................... 1159
Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements
VMMXU, VNMMXU............................................................ 1160
Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI,
CMSQI................................................................................1160
Technical data......................................................................... 1160
Gas medium supervision SSIMG................................................. 1162
Identification............................................................................ 1162
Functionality............................................................................ 1162
Function block......................................................................... 1163
Signals.....................................................................................1163
Settings....................................................................................1164
Monitored data.........................................................................1164
Operation principle.................................................................. 1164
Technical data......................................................................... 1165
Liquid medium supervision SSIML............................................... 1166
Identification............................................................................ 1166
Functionality............................................................................ 1166
Function block......................................................................... 1166
Signals.....................................................................................1166
Settings....................................................................................1167

30 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Monitored data.........................................................................1168
Operation principle.................................................................. 1168
Technical data......................................................................... 1169
Breaker monitoring SSCBR..........................................................1169
Identification............................................................................ 1169
Functionality............................................................................ 1170
Function block......................................................................... 1170
Signals.....................................................................................1170
Settings....................................................................................1171
Monitored data.........................................................................1173
Operation principle.................................................................. 1173
Circuit breaker contact travel time......................................1175
Circuit breaker status......................................................... 1176
Remaining life of circuit breaker......................................... 1177
Accumulated energy...........................................................1178
Circuit breaker operation cycles......................................... 1179
Circuit breaker operation monitoring.................................. 1180
Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring........................... 1181
Circuit breaker gas pressure indication.............................. 1182
Technical data......................................................................... 1182
Event function EVENT..................................................................1183
Identification............................................................................ 1183
Functionality............................................................................ 1183
Function block......................................................................... 1184
Signals.....................................................................................1184
Settings....................................................................................1185
Operation principle.................................................................. 1187
Disturbance report DRPRDRE..................................................... 1188
Identification............................................................................ 1188
Functionality............................................................................ 1188
Function block......................................................................... 1189
Signals.....................................................................................1191
Settings....................................................................................1193
Monitored data.........................................................................1203
Operation principle.................................................................. 1207
Technical data......................................................................... 1215
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP................................... 1216
Identification............................................................................ 1216
Functionality............................................................................ 1216
Function block......................................................................... 1216
Signals.....................................................................................1217
Settings....................................................................................1218
Operation principle.................................................................. 1218

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 31

Technical manual
Table of contents

Measured value expander block RANGE_XP.............................. 1218

Identification............................................................................ 1218
Functionality............................................................................ 1218
Function block......................................................................... 1219
Signals.....................................................................................1219
Operation principle.................................................................. 1219
Fault locator LMBRFLO................................................................1220
Identification............................................................................ 1220
Functionality............................................................................ 1220
Function block......................................................................... 1221
Signals.....................................................................................1221
Settings....................................................................................1222
Monitored data.........................................................................1223
Operation principle.................................................................. 1223
Measuring Principle............................................................1224
Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault... 1224
The non-compensated impedance model.......................... 1228
IEC 60870-5-103................................................................ 1228
Technical data......................................................................... 1229
Limit counter L4UFCNT................................................................1229
Identification............................................................................ 1229
Identification....................................................................... 1229
Functionality............................................................................ 1229
Operation principle.................................................................. 1229
Design................................................................................ 1230
Reporting............................................................................1231
Function block......................................................................... 1231
Signals.....................................................................................1231
Settings....................................................................................1232
Monitored data.........................................................................1232
Technical data......................................................................... 1233
Running hour-meter TEILGAPC ..................................................1233
Identification............................................................................ 1233
Functionality............................................................................ 1233
Function block......................................................................... 1234
Signals.....................................................................................1234
Settings....................................................................................1235
Operation principle.................................................................. 1235
Operation accuracy............................................................ 1236
Memory storage................................................................. 1237
Technical data......................................................................... 1237
Estimation of transformer insulation life LOLSPTR ..................... 1237
Identification............................................................................ 1237

32 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Functionality............................................................................ 1237
Function block......................................................................... 1238
Signals.....................................................................................1239
Settings....................................................................................1239
Monitored data.........................................................................1243
Operation principle.................................................................. 1243
Hot spot temperature calculation........................................1244
Top oil temperature calculation.......................................... 1246
Transformer parameters selection..................................... 1247
Calculation of constants and losses................................... 1248
Load factor calculation....................................................... 1250
Function handling with less CT’s........................................1250
Temperature unit selection.................................................1251
Insulation loss of life calculation......................................... 1251
Warning and alarm............................................................. 1252
Blocking the function.......................................................... 1253
Technical data......................................................................... 1254

Section 19 Metering..................................................................... 1255

Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT....................................................... 1255
Identification............................................................................ 1255
Functionality............................................................................ 1255
Function block......................................................................... 1255
Signals.....................................................................................1256
Settings....................................................................................1256
Monitored data.........................................................................1257
Operation principle.................................................................. 1257
Technical data......................................................................... 1259
Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR1259
Identification............................................................................ 1259
Functionality............................................................................ 1259
Function block......................................................................... 1260
Signals.....................................................................................1260
Settings....................................................................................1261
Monitored data.........................................................................1263
Operation principle.................................................................. 1263
Technical data......................................................................... 1267
Technical data.................................................................... 1267

Section 20 Ethernet......................................................................1269
Access point................................................................................. 1269
Introduction..............................................................................1269
Settings....................................................................................1269
Access point diagnostics.............................................................. 1271

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 33

Technical manual
Table of contents

Functionality............................................................................ 1271
Function block......................................................................... 1272
Signals.....................................................................................1272
Monitored data.........................................................................1273
Redundant communication...........................................................1273
Identification............................................................................ 1273
Functionality............................................................................ 1274
Operation principle.................................................................. 1274
Merging unit..................................................................................1276
Introduction..............................................................................1276
Settings....................................................................................1277
Monitored data.........................................................................1277
Routes.......................................................................................... 1282
Introduction..............................................................................1282
Settings....................................................................................1283
Monitored data.........................................................................1283

Section 21 Station communication............................................... 1285

Communication protocols............................................................. 1285
Communication protocol diagnostics............................................1285
DNP3 protocol.............................................................................. 1286
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol....................................... 1286
Functionality............................................................................ 1286
Communication interfaces and protocols................................ 1287
Settings....................................................................................1287
Technical data......................................................................... 1288
Generic communication function for Single Point indication
SPGAPC, SP16GAPC.............................................................1288
Functionality....................................................................... 1288
Function block.................................................................... 1288
Signals................................................................................1289
Settings.............................................................................. 1290
Monitored data................................................................... 1290
Operation principle............................................................. 1291
Generic communication function for Measured Value
MVGAPC................................................................................. 1291
Functionality....................................................................... 1291
Function block.................................................................... 1291
Signals................................................................................1291
Settings.............................................................................. 1292
Monitored data................................................................... 1292
Operation principle............................................................. 1293
GOOSE function block to receive a double point value
GOOSEDPRCV.......................................................................1293

34 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Identification....................................................................... 1293
Functionality....................................................................... 1293
Function block.................................................................... 1293
Signals................................................................................1293
Settings.............................................................................. 1294
Operation principle ............................................................ 1294
GOOSE function block to receive an integer value
GOOSEINTRCV...................................................................... 1295
Identification....................................................................... 1295
Functionality....................................................................... 1295
Function block.................................................................... 1295
Signals................................................................................1296
Settings.............................................................................. 1296
Operation principle ............................................................ 1296
GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value
GOOSEMVRCV...................................................................... 1297
Identification....................................................................... 1297
Functionality....................................................................... 1297
Function block.................................................................... 1298
Signals................................................................................1298
Settings.............................................................................. 1298
Operation principle ............................................................ 1298
GOOSE function block to receive a single point value
GOOSESPRCV....................................................................... 1299
Identification....................................................................... 1299
Functionality....................................................................... 1300
Function block.................................................................... 1300
Signals................................................................................1300
Settings.............................................................................. 1300
Operation principle ............................................................ 1301
GOOSE VCTR configuration for send and receive
GOOSEVCTRCONF............................................................... 1302
Identification....................................................................... 1302
Functionality....................................................................... 1302
Settings.............................................................................. 1302
GOOSE voltage control receiving block GOOSEVCTRRCV...1303
Identification....................................................................... 1303
Functionality....................................................................... 1303
Function block.................................................................... 1303
Signals................................................................................1304
Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking
GOOSEINTLKRCV..................................................................1304
Functionality....................................................................... 1304
Function block.................................................................... 1305

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 35

Technical manual
Table of contents

Signals................................................................................1305
Settings.............................................................................. 1308
Operation principle............................................................. 1308
GOOSE binary receive GOOSEBINRCV................................ 1309
Function block.................................................................... 1309
Signals................................................................................1309
Settings.............................................................................. 1311
Operation principle............................................................. 1311
GOOSE function block to receive a switching device
GOOSEXLNRCV ....................................................................1312
Identification....................................................................... 1312
Functionality....................................................................... 1312
Function block.................................................................... 1313
Signals................................................................................1313
Settings.............................................................................. 1315
Operation principle............................................................. 1315
IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication protocol.......................... 1315
Introduction..............................................................................1315
Function block......................................................................... 1315
Signals.....................................................................................1316
Output signals.................................................................... 1316
Settings....................................................................................1317
Monitored data.........................................................................1317
Operation principle.................................................................. 1322
IEC 61850 quality expander QUALEXP............................. 1326
Technical data......................................................................... 1327
LON communication protocol....................................................... 1327
Functionality............................................................................ 1327
Settings....................................................................................1328
Operation principle.................................................................. 1328
Technical data......................................................................... 1347
SPA communication protocol....................................................... 1348
Functionality............................................................................ 1348
Design..................................................................................... 1348
Settings....................................................................................1348
Operation principle.................................................................. 1349
Communication ports......................................................... 1357
Technical data......................................................................... 1358
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol................................... 1359
Introduction..............................................................................1359
Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS......................... 1359
Functionality....................................................................... 1359
Identification....................................................................... 1359

36 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Function block.................................................................... 1360

Signals................................................................................1360
Settings.............................................................................. 1360
Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103
I103MEASUSR........................................................................1361
Functionality....................................................................... 1361
Identification....................................................................... 1361
Function block.................................................................... 1361
Signals................................................................................1362
Settings.............................................................................. 1362
Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR....1363
Functionality....................................................................... 1363
Identification....................................................................... 1363
Function block.................................................................... 1363
Signals................................................................................1363
Settings.............................................................................. 1363
Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF.........1364
Functionality....................................................................... 1364
Identification....................................................................... 1364
Function block.................................................................... 1364
Signals................................................................................1364
Settings.............................................................................. 1364
Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT......................................................................... 1365
Functionality....................................................................... 1365
Identification....................................................................... 1365
Function block.................................................................... 1366
Signals................................................................................1366
Settings.............................................................................. 1367
IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED................................ 1368
Functionality....................................................................... 1368
Identification....................................................................... 1368
Function block.................................................................... 1368
Signals................................................................................1368
Settings.............................................................................. 1369
Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV............1369
Functionality....................................................................... 1369
Identification....................................................................... 1369
Function block.................................................................... 1369
Signals................................................................................1369
Settings.............................................................................. 1370
Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRDEF...........................................................................1370
Functionality....................................................................... 1370

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 37

Technical manual
Table of contents

Identification....................................................................... 1370
Function block.................................................................... 1371
Signals................................................................................1371
Settings.............................................................................. 1372
Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD.............. 1373
Functionality....................................................................... 1373
Identification....................................................................... 1373
Function block.................................................................... 1373
Signals................................................................................1374
Settings.............................................................................. 1374
IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD................ 1374
Functionality....................................................................... 1374
Identification....................................................................... 1374
Function block.................................................................... 1375
Signals................................................................................1375
Settings.............................................................................. 1375
Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRCMD..........................................................................1375
Functionality....................................................................... 1375
Identification....................................................................... 1376
Function block.................................................................... 1376
Signals................................................................................1376
Settings.............................................................................. 1377
Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103
I103GENCMD..........................................................................1377
Functionality....................................................................... 1377
Identification....................................................................... 1377
Function block.................................................................... 1378
Signals................................................................................1378
Settings.............................................................................. 1378
IED commands with position and select for IEC
60870-5-103 I103POSCMD.................................................... 1378
Functionality....................................................................... 1378
Identification....................................................................... 1379
Function block.................................................................... 1379
Signals................................................................................1379
Settings.............................................................................. 1380
IED commands with position for IEC 60870-5-103
I103POSCMDV....................................................................... 1380
Functionality....................................................................... 1380
Identification....................................................................... 1380
Function block.................................................................... 1381
Signals................................................................................1381
Settings.............................................................................. 1381

38 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Operation principle ................................................................. 1381

General...............................................................................1381
Communication ports......................................................... 1391
Technical data......................................................................... 1392
MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND........................................ 1392
Functionality............................................................................ 1392
Design..................................................................................... 1392
General...............................................................................1392
Function block......................................................................... 1393
Signals.....................................................................................1393
Settings....................................................................................1395
Operation principle.................................................................. 1395
Security events on protocols SECALARM....................................1396
Security alarm SECALARM.....................................................1396
Signals................................................................................1396
Settings.............................................................................. 1396
Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG....................................... 1396
Activity logging ACTIVLOG..................................................... 1396
Settings....................................................................................1397

Section 22 Remote communication..............................................1399

Binary signal transfer....................................................................1399
Identification............................................................................ 1399
Functionality............................................................................ 1399
Signals.....................................................................................1400
Settings....................................................................................1404
Monitored data.........................................................................1408
Operation principle.................................................................. 1409
Transmission of local analog data via LDCM to remote end,
function block LDCMTRN called LDCMTransmit......................... 1410
Identification............................................................................ 1410
Function block......................................................................... 1411
Signals.....................................................................................1411

Section 23 Security...................................................................... 1413

Authority check ATHCHCK...........................................................1413
Identification............................................................................ 1413
Functionality............................................................................ 1413
Operation principle ................................................................. 1414
Authorization with Central Account Management
enabled IED........................................................................1416
Authority management AUTHMAN...............................................1419
Identification............................................................................ 1419
AUTHMAN...............................................................................1419

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 39

Technical manual
Table of contents

Settings....................................................................................1419
FTP access with password FTPACCS......................................... 1419
Identification............................................................................ 1419
FTP access with TLS, FTPACCS............................................1419
Settings....................................................................................1420
Authority status ATHSTAT........................................................... 1420
Identification............................................................................ 1420
Functionality............................................................................ 1420
Function block......................................................................... 1421
Signals.....................................................................................1421
Settings....................................................................................1421
Operation principle ................................................................. 1421
Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG.................... 1422
Functionality............................................................................ 1422
Function block......................................................................... 1422
Signals.....................................................................................1422
Settings....................................................................................1422
Operation principle.................................................................. 1422
Internal signals................................................................... 1424
Supervision of analog inputs.............................................. 1426
Technical data......................................................................... 1426
ChangeLock function CHNGLCK................................................. 1427
Functionality............................................................................ 1427
Function block......................................................................... 1427
Signals.....................................................................................1427
Operation principle ................................................................. 1427
Denial of service DOS.................................................................. 1428
Functionality ........................................................................... 1428
Operation principle.................................................................. 1428

Section 24 Basic IED functions.................................................... 1431

Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN......................................1431
Functionality............................................................................ 1431
Settings....................................................................................1431
Operation principle ................................................................. 1437
General concepts............................................................... 1437
Real-time clock (RTC) operation........................................ 1440
Synchronization alternatives.............................................. 1441
Process bus IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE synchronization........ 1444
Precision Time Protocol (PTP) .......................................... 1445
Technical data......................................................................... 1446
Parameter setting groups............................................................. 1446
Functionality............................................................................ 1446
Function block......................................................................... 1447

40 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Signals.....................................................................................1447
Settings....................................................................................1448
Operation principle.................................................................. 1448
Test mode functionality TESTMODE............................................1449
Functionality............................................................................ 1449
Function block......................................................................... 1450
Signals.....................................................................................1450
Settings....................................................................................1451
Operation principle ................................................................. 1451
IED identifiers TERMINALID........................................................ 1452
Functionality............................................................................ 1452
Settings ...................................................................................1452
Product information PRODINF..................................................... 1452
Functionality............................................................................ 1452
Settings ...................................................................................1453
Factory defined settings.......................................................... 1453
Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI............................................ 1454
Functionality............................................................................ 1454
Function block......................................................................... 1454
Signals.....................................................................................1454
Operation principle.................................................................. 1455
Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO ....................................... 1455
Functionality............................................................................ 1455
Function block......................................................................... 1456
Signals.....................................................................................1456
Operation principle.................................................................. 1456
Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI................................................ 1457
Functionality............................................................................ 1457
Function block......................................................................... 1457
Signals.....................................................................................1457
Operation principle.................................................................. 1458
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI........................................... 1458
Functionality............................................................................ 1458
Function block......................................................................... 1458
Signals.....................................................................................1459
Settings....................................................................................1460
Operation principle ................................................................. 1462
Frequency values............................................................... 1463
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM............................................ 1464
Functionality............................................................................ 1464
Function block......................................................................... 1464
Signals.....................................................................................1464
Settings....................................................................................1465

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 41

Technical manual
Table of contents

Operation principle ................................................................. 1466

Global base values GBASVAL..................................................... 1466
Identification............................................................................ 1466
Functionality............................................................................ 1466
Settings....................................................................................1466
Primary system values PRIMVAL.................................................1467
Identification............................................................................ 1467
Functionality............................................................................ 1467
Settings....................................................................................1467

Section 25 IED hardware............................................................. 1469

Overview.......................................................................................1469
Variants of case size with local HMI display............................1469
Case from the rear side........................................................... 1471
Hardware modules....................................................................... 1475
Overview..................................................................................1475
Numeric module (NUM)...........................................................1477
Introduction.........................................................................1477
Functionality....................................................................... 1477
Technical data.................................................................... 1477
Power supply module (PSM)................................................... 1478
Introduction.........................................................................1478
Design................................................................................ 1478
Technical data.................................................................... 1479
Local human-machine interface (Local HMI)...........................1479
Transformer input module (TRM)............................................ 1479
Introduction.........................................................................1479
Design................................................................................ 1479
Technical data.................................................................... 1481
Analog digital conversion module (ADM)................................ 1482
Introduction.........................................................................1482
Design................................................................................ 1482
Binary input module (BIM)....................................................... 1484
Introduction.........................................................................1484
Design................................................................................ 1484
Signals................................................................................1487
Settings.............................................................................. 1488
Monitored data................................................................... 1488
Technical data.................................................................... 1489
Binary output modules (BOM)................................................. 1490
Introduction.........................................................................1490
Design................................................................................ 1490
Signals................................................................................1491
Settings.............................................................................. 1492

42 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
 Table of contents

Monitored data................................................................... 1492

Technical data.................................................................... 1496
Static binary output module (SOM)......................................... 1497
Introduction.........................................................................1497
Design................................................................................ 1497
Signals................................................................................1498
Settings.............................................................................. 1499
Monitored data................................................................... 1499
Technical data.................................................................... 1501
Binary input/output module (IOM)............................................1502
Introduction.........................................................................1502
Design................................................................................ 1502
Signals................................................................................1504
Settings.............................................................................. 1505
Monitored data................................................................... 1505
Technical data.................................................................... 1507
mA input module (MIM)........................................................... 1509
Introduction.........................................................................1509
Design................................................................................ 1509
Signals................................................................................1511
Settings.............................................................................. 1512
Monitored data................................................................... 1513
Technical data.................................................................... 1514
Serial and LON communication module (SLM) ...................... 1514
Introduction.........................................................................1514
Design................................................................................ 1514
Technical data.................................................................... 1515
Galvanic RS485 communication module.................................1516
Introduction.........................................................................1516
Design................................................................................ 1516
Technical data.................................................................... 1517
Optical Ethernet module.......................................................... 1518
Introduction.........................................................................1518
Functionality....................................................................... 1518
Design................................................................................ 1518
Technical data.................................................................... 1518
Line data communication module (LDCM).............................. 1519
Introduction.........................................................................1519
Design................................................................................ 1519
Technical data.................................................................... 1520
GPS time synchronization module (GTM)............................... 1521
Introduction.........................................................................1521
Design................................................................................ 1521

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 43

Technical manual
Table of contents

Monitored data................................................................... 1522

Technical data.................................................................... 1522
GPS antenna........................................................................... 1522
Introduction.........................................................................1522
Design................................................................................ 1522
Technical data.................................................................... 1524
IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B........................... 1524
Introduction.........................................................................1524
Design................................................................................ 1524
Settings.............................................................................. 1525
Technical data.................................................................... 1525
Dimensions...................................................................................1526
Case with rear cover................................................................1526
Case without rear cover...........................................................1528
Flush mounting dimensions.....................................................1530
Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions................................. 1531
Wall mounting dimensions.......................................................1532
External resistor unit for high impedance differential protection1532
Mounting alternatives................................................................... 1534
Flush mounting........................................................................ 1534
Overview............................................................................ 1534
Mounting procedure for flush mounting..............................1535
19” panel rack mounting.......................................................... 1535
Overview............................................................................ 1535
Mounting procedure for 19” panel rack mounting...............1536
Wall mounting..........................................................................1537
Overview............................................................................ 1537
Mounting procedure for wall mounting............................... 1538
How to reach the rear side of the IED................................ 1538
Side-by-side 19” rack mounting...............................................1539
Overview............................................................................ 1539
Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting.......... 1540
IED mounted with a RHGS6 case...................................... 1540
Side-by-side flush mounting.................................................... 1541
Overview............................................................................ 1541
Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting......... 1542
Technical data.............................................................................. 1542
Enclosure.................................................................................1542
Electrical safety....................................................................... 1543
Connection system.................................................................. 1543
Influencing factors................................................................... 1544
Type tests according to standard............................................ 1545

Section 26 Labels.........................................................................1549
44 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC
Technical manual
 Table of contents

Labels on IED............................................................................... 1549

Section 27 Connection diagrams................................................. 1551

Section 28 Inverse time characteristics........................................1553

Application.................................................................................... 1553
Principle of operation....................................................................1556
Mode of operation....................................................................1556
Inverse characteristics..................................................................1561

Section 29 Glossary..................................................................... 1589

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 45

Technical manual
46
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 1
Introduction

Section 1 Introduction

1.1 This manual GUID-AB423A30-13C2-46AF-B7FE-A73BB425EB5F v18

The technical manual contains operation principle descriptions, and lists function
blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical
data, sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during
the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal
service.

1.1.1 Presumptions for Technical Data GUID-1E949E38-E04D-4374-A086-912C25E9F93C v1

The technical data stated in this document are only valid under the following
circumstances:

1. Main current transformers with 1 A or 2 A secondary rating are wired to the

IED 1 A rated CT inputs.
2. Main current transformer with 5 A secondary rating are wired to the IED 5 A
rated CT inputs.
3. CT and VT ratios in the IED are set in accordance with the associated main
instrument transformers. Note that for functions which measure an analogue
signal which do not have corresponding primary quantity the 1:1 ratio shall be
set for the used analogue inputs on the IED. Example of such functions are:
HZPDIF, ROTIPHIZ and STTIPHIZ.
4. Parameter IBase used by the tested function is set equal to the rated CT
primary current.
5. Parameter UBase used by the tested function is set equal to the rated primary
phase-to-phase voltage.
6. Parameter SBase used by the tested function is set equal to:
• √3 × IBase × UBase
7. The rated secondary quantities have the following values:
• Rated secondary phase current Ir is either 1 A or 5 A depending on
selected TRM.
• Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage Ur is within the range from 100
V to 120 V.
• Rated secondary power for three-phase system Sr = √3 × Ur × Ir
8. For operate and reset time testing, the default setting values of the function are
used if not explicitly stated otherwise.
9. During testing, signals with rated frequency have been injected if not explicitly
stated otherwise.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 47

Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Introduction

1.2 Intended audience GUID-C9B8127F-5748-4BEA-9E4F-CC762FE28A3A v11

This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning

personnel, who use technical data during engineering, installation and
commissioning, and in normal service.

The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems,

protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logic in
the IEDs. The installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic
knowledge in handling electronic equipment.

1.3 Product documentation

1.3.1 Product documentation set GUID-3AA69EA6-F1D8-47C6-A8E6-562F29C67172 v15

Deinstalling & disposal

Planning & purchase

Decommissioning
Commissioning

Maintenance
Engineering

Operation
Installing

Engineering manual
Installation manual

Commissioning manual
Operation manual

Application manual

Technical manual

Communication
protocol manual
Cyber security
deployment guideline
IEC07000220-4-en.vsd

IEC07000220 V4 EN-US

Figure 1: The intended use of manuals throughout the product lifecycle

The engineering manual contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using
the various tools available within the PCM600 software. The manual provides

48 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 1
Introduction

instructions on how to set up a PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project
structure. The manual also recommends a sequence for the engineering of
protection and control functions, LHMI functions as well as communication
engineering for IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850, DNP3, LON and SPA.

The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED. The
manual provides procedures for mechanical and electrical installation. The chapters
are organized in the chronological order in which the IED should be installed.

The commissioning manual contains instructions on how to commission the IED.

The manual can also be used by system engineers and maintenance personnel for
assistance during the testing phase. The manual provides procedures for the
checking of external circuitry and energizing the IED, parameter setting and
configuration as well as verifying settings by secondary injection. The manual
describes the process of testing an IED in a substation which is not in service. The
chapters are organized in the chronological order in which the IED should be
commissioned. The relevant procedures may be followed also during the service
and maintenance activities.

The operation manual contains instructions on how to operate the IED once it has
been commissioned. The manual provides instructions for the monitoring,
controlling and setting of the IED. The manual also describes how to identify
disturbances and how to view calculated and measured power grid data to
determine the cause of a fault.

The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines

sorted per function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose
a typical protection function can be used. The manual can also provide assistance
for calculating settings.

The technical manual contains operation principle descriptions, and lists function
blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical
data, sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during
the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal
service.

The communication protocol manual describes the communication protocols

supported by the IED. The manual concentrates on the vendor-specific
implementations.

The point list manual describes the outlook and properties of the data points
specific to the IED. The manual should be used in conjunction with the
corresponding communication protocol manual.

The cyber security deployment guideline describes the process for handling cyber
security when communicating with the IED. Certification, Authorization with role
based access control, and product engineering for cyber security related events are
described and sorted by function. The guideline can be used as a technical
reference during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and
during normal service.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 49

Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Introduction

1.3.2 Document revision history GUID-C8027F8A-D3CB-41C1-B078-F9E59BB73A6C v5

Document revision/date History

–/May 2017 First release
A/October 2017 2.2.1 release
B/November 2017 ZMFPDIS and ZMFCPDIS - Added missing
setting tables

1.3.3 Related documents GUID-94E8A5CA-BE1B-45AF-81E7-5A41D34EE112 v5

Documents related to RET670 Document numbers

Application manual 1MRK 504 163-UEN
Commissioning manual 1MRK 504 165-UEN
Product guide 1MRK 504 166-BEN
Technical manual 1MRK 504 164-UEN
Type test certificate 1MRK 504 166-TEN

670 series manuals Document numbers

Operation manual 1MRK 500 127-UEN
Engineering manual 1MRK 511 398-UEN
Installation manual 1MRK 514 026-UEN
Communication protocol manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 391-UUS
Communication protocol manual, IEC 1MRK 511 394-UEN
60870-5-103
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 1MRK 511 392-UEN
Edition 1
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 1MRK 511 393-UEN
Edition 2
Communication protocol manual, LON 1MRK 511 395-UEN
Communication protocol manual, SPA 1MRK 511 396-UEN
Point list manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 397-UUS
Accessories guide 1MRK 514 012-BEN
Cyber security deployment guideline 1MRK 511 399-UEN
Connection and Installation components 1MRK 513 003-BEN
Test system, COMBITEST 1MRK 512 001-BEN
Application guide, Communication set-up 1MRK 505 382-UEN

50 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 1
Introduction

1.4 Document symbols and conventions

1.4.1 Symbols GUID-2945B229-DAB0-4F15-8A0E-B9CF0C2C7B15 v12

The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard

which could result in electrical shock.

The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could

result in personal injury.

The caution hot surface icon indicates important information or

warning about the temperature of product surfaces.

Class 1 Laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes

and do not view directly with optical instruments.

The caution icon indicates important information or warning related

to the concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence
of a hazard which could result in corruption of software or damage
to equipment or property.

The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and

conditions.

The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your
project or how to use a certain function.

Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to

understand that under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged
equipment may result in degraded process performance leading to personal injury
or death. It is important that the user fully complies with all warning and
cautionary notices.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 51

Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Introduction

1.4.2 Document conventions GUID-96DFAB1A-98FE-4B26-8E90-F7CEB14B1AB6 v6

• Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The
glossary also contains definitions of important terms.
• Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the
push button icons.
For example, to navigate between the options, use and .
• HMI menu paths are presented in bold.
For example, select Main menu/Settings.
• LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
For example, to save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and
press .
• Parameter names are shown in italics.
For example, the function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation
setting.
• Each function block symbol shows the available input/output signal.
• the character ^ in front of an input/output signal name indicates that the
signal name may be customized using the PCM600 software.
• the character * after an input signal name indicates that the signal must
be connected to another function block in the application configuration
to achieve a valid application configuration.
• Logic diagrams describe the signal logic inside the function block and are
bordered by dashed lines.
• Signals in frames with a shaded area on their right hand side represent
setting parameter signals that are only settable via the PST, ECT or
LHMI.
• If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the
suffix -int is added to the signal name to indicate where the signal starts
and continues.
• Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in
another diagram have the suffix ”-cont.”

Illustrations are used as an example and might show other products

than the one the manual describes. The example that is illustrated is
still valid.

1.5 IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping GUID-C5133366-7260-4C47-A975-7DBAB3A33A96 v4

Function block names are used in ACT and PST to identify functions. Respective
function block names of Edition 1 logical nodes and Edition 2 logical nodes are
shown in the table below.

52 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 1
Introduction

Table 1: IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes
AEGPVOC AEGGAPC AEGPVOC
AGSAL AGSAL AGSAL
SECLLN0
ALMCALH ALMCALH ALMCALH
ALTIM - ALTIM
ALTMS - ALTMS
ALTRK - ALTRK
BCZPDIF BCZPDIF BCZPDIF
BCZSPDIF BCZSPDIF BCZSPDIF
BCZTPDIF BCZTPDIF BCZTPDIF
BDCGAPC SWSGGIO BBCSWI
BDCGAPC
BDZSGAPC BBS6LLN0 LLN0
BDZSGAPC BDZSGAPC
BFPTRC_F01 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F02 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F03 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F04 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F05 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F06 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F07 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F08 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F09 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F10 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F11 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F12 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F13 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F14 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F15 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F16 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F17 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F18 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F19 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F20 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F21 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F22 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F23 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F24 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BICPTRC_01 BICPTRC BICPTRC
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 53

Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

BICPTRC_02 BICPTRC BICPTRC
BICPTRC_03 BICPTRC BICPTRC
BICPTRC_04 BICPTRC BICPTRC
BICPTRC_05 BICPTRC BICPTRC
BRCPTOC BRCPTOC BRCPTOC
BRPTOC BRPTOC BRPTOC
BTIGAPC B16IFCVI BTIGAPC
BUSPTRC_B1 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BBSPLLN0
BUSPTRC_B2 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B3 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B4 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B5 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B6 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B7 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B8 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B9 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B10 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B11 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B12 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B13 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B14 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B15 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B16 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B17 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B18 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B19 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B20 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B21 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B22 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B23 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B24 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUTPTRC_B1 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BBTPLLN0
BUTPTRC_B2 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B3 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B4 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B5 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B6 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B7 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
Table continues on next page

54 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

BUTPTRC_B8 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BZISGGIO BZISGGIO BZISGAPC
BZITGGIO BZITGGIO BZITGAPC
BZNPDIF_Z1 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
BZNPDIF_Z2 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
BZNPDIF_Z3 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
BZNPDIF_Z4 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
BZNPDIF_Z5 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
BZNPDIF_Z6 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
BZNSPDIF_A BZNSPDIF BZASGAPC
BZASPDIF
BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF
BZNSPDIF_B BZNSPDIF BZBSGAPC
BZBSPDIF
BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF
BZNTPDIF_A BZNTPDIF BZATGAPC
BZATPDIF
BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF
BZNTPDIF_B BZNTPDIF BZBTGAPC
BZBTPDIF
BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF
CBPGAPC CBPLLN0 CBPMMXU
CBPMMXU CBPPTRC
CBPPTRC HOLPTOV
HOLPTOV HPH1PTOV
HPH1PTOV PH3PTOC
PH3PTUC PH3PTUC
PH3PTOC RP3PDOP
RP3PDOP
CCPDSC CCRPLD CCPDSC
CCRBRF CCRBRF CCRBRF
CCRWRBRF CCRWRBRF CCRWRBRF
CCSRBRF CCSRBRF CCSRBRF
CCSSPVC CCSRDIF CCSSPVC
CMMXU CMMXU CMMXU
CMSQI CMSQI CMSQI
COUVGAPC COUVLLN0 COUVPTOV
COUVPTOV COUVPTUV
COUVPTUV
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 55

Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

CVGAPC GF2LLN0 GF2MMXN
GF2MMXN GF2PHAR
GF2PHAR GF2PTOV
GF2PTOV GF2PTUC
GF2PTUC GF2PTUV
GF2PTUV GF2PVOC
GF2PVOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
CVMMXN CVMMXN CVMMXN
D2PTOC D2LLN0 D2PTOC
D2PTOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
DPGAPC DPGGIO DPGAPC
DRPRDRE DRPRDRE DRPRDRE
ECPSCH ECPSCH ECPSCH
ECRWPSCH ECRWPSCH ECRWPSCH
EF2PTOC EF2LLN0 EF2PTRC
EF2PTRC EF2RDIR
EF2RDIR GEN2PHAR
GEN2PHAR PH1PTOC
PH1PTOC
EF4PTOC EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC
EF4PTRC EF4RDIR
EF4RDIR GEN4PHAR
GEN4PHAR PH1PTOC
PH1PTOC
EFPIOC EFPIOC EFPIOC
EFRWPIOC EFRWPIOC EFRWPIOC
ETPMMTR ETPMMTR ETPMMTR
FDPSPDIS FDPSPDIS FDPSPDIS
FMPSPDIS FMPSPDIS FMPSPDIS
FRPSPDIS FPSRPDIS FPSRPDIS
FTAQFVR FTAQFVR FTAQFVR
FUFSPVC SDDRFUF FUFSPVC
SDDSPVC
GENPDIF GENPDIF GENGAPC
GENPDIF
GENPHAR
GENPTRC
GOPPDOP GOPPDOP GOPPDOP
PH1PTRC
GRPTTR GRPTTR GRPTTR
GSPTTR GSPTTR GSPTTR
GUPPDUP GUPPDUP GUPPDUP
PH1PTRC
HZPDIF HZPDIF HZPDIF
INDCALCH INDCALH INDCALH
ITBGAPC IB16FCVB ITBGAPC
Table continues on next page

56 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

L3CPDIF L3CPDIF L3CGAPC
L3CPDIF
L3CPHAR
L3CPTRC
L4CPDIF L4CLLN0 LLN0
L4CPDIF L4CGAPC
L4CPTRC L4CPDIF
L4CPSCH
L4CPTRC
L4UFCNT L4UFCNT L4UFCNT
L6CPDIF L6CPDIF L6CGAPC
L6CPDIF
L6CPHAR
L6CPTRC
LAPPGAPC LAPPLLN0 LAPPPDUP
LAPPPDUP LAPPPUPF
LAPPPUPF
LCCRPTRC LCCRPTRC LCCRPTRC
LCNSPTOC LCNSPTOC LCNSPTOC
LCNSPTOV LCNSPTOV LCNSPTOV
LCP3PTOC LCP3PTOC LCP3PTOC
LCP3PTUC LCP3PTUC LCP3PTUC
LCPTTR LCPTTR LCPTTR
LCZSPTOC LCZSPTOC LCZSPTOC
LCZSPTOV LCZSPTOV LCZSPTOV
LD0LLN0 LLN0 -
LDLPSCH LDLPDIF LDLPSCH
LDRGFC STSGGIO LDRGFC
LEXPDIS LEXPDIS LEXPDIS
LEXPTRC
LFPTTR LFPTTR LFPTTR
LMBRFLO LMBRFLO LMBRFLO
LOLSPTR LOLSPTR LOLSPTR
LOVPTUV LOVPTUV LOVPTUV
LPHD LPHD
LPTTR LPTTR LPTTR
LT3CPDIF LT3CPDIF LT3CGAPC
LT3CPDIF
LT3CPHAR
LT3CPTRC
LT6CPDIF LT6CPDIF LT6CGAPC
LT6CPDIF
LT6CPHAR
LT6CPTRC
MVGAPC MVGGIO MVGAPC
NS2PTOC NS2LLN0 NS2PTOC
NS2PTOC NS2PTRC
NS2PTRC
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 57

Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

NS4PTOC EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC
EF4PTRC EF4RDIR
EF4RDIR PH1PTOC
GEN4PHAR
PH1PTOC
O2RWPTOV GEN2LLN0 O2RWPTOV
O2RWPTOV PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
OC4PTOC OC4LLN0 GEN4PHAR
GEN4PHAR PH3PTOC
PH3PTOC PH3PTRC
PH3PTRC
OEXPVPH OEXPVPH OEXPVPH
OOSPPAM OOSPPAM OOSPPAM
OOSPTRC
OV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 OV2PTOV
OV2PTOV PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
PAPGAPC PAPGAPC PAPGAPC
PCFCNT PCGGIO PCFCNT
PH4SPTOC GEN4PHAR GEN4PHAR
OCNDLLN0 PH1BPTOC
PH1BPTOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
PHPIOC PHPIOC PHPIOC
PSLPSCH ZMRPSL PSLPSCH
PSPPPAM PSPPPAM PSPPPAM
PSPPTRC
QCBAY QCBAY BAY/LLN0
QCRSV QCRSV QCRSV
RCHLCCH RCHLCCH RCHLCCH
REFPDIF REFPDIF REFPDIF
ROTIPHIZ ROTIPHIZ ROTIPHIZ
ROTIPTRC
ROV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC ROV2PTOV
ROV2PTOV
SAPFRC SAPFRC SAPFRC
SAPTOF SAPTOF SAPTOF
SAPTUF SAPTUF SAPTUF
SCCVPTOC SCCVPTOC SCCVPTOC
SCHLCCH SCHLCCH SCHLCCH
SCILO SCILO SCILO
SCSWI SCSWI SCSWI
SDEPSDE SDEPSDE SDEPSDE
SDEPTOC
SDEPTOV
SDEPTRC
Table continues on next page

58 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

SESRSYN RSY1LLN0 AUT1RSYN
AUT1RSYN MAN1RSYN
MAN1RSYN SYNRSYN
SYNRSYN
SLGAPC SLGGIO SLGAPC
SMBRREC SMBRREC SMBRREC
SMPPTRC SMPPTRC SMPPTRC
SP16GAPC SP16GGIO SP16GAPC
SPC8GAPC SPC8GGIO SPC8GAPC
SPGAPC SPGGIO SPGAPC
SSCBR SSCBR SSCBR
SSIMG SSIMG SSIMG
SSIML SSIML SSIML
STBPTOC STBPTOC BBPMSS
STBPTOC
STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ
STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ
SXCBR SXCBR SXCBR
SXSWI SXSWI SXSWI
T2WPDIF T2WPDIF T2WGAPC
T2WPDIF
T2WPHAR
T2WPTRC
T3WPDIF T3WPDIF T3WGAPC
T3WPDIF
T3WPHAR
T3WPTRC
TCLYLTC TCLYLTC TCLYLTC
TCSLTC
TCMYLTC TCMYLTC TCMYLTC
TEIGAPC TEIGGIO TEIGAPC
TEIGGIO
TEILGAPC TEILGGIO TEILGAPC
TMAGAPC TMAGGIO TMAGAPC
TPPIOC TPPIOC TPPIOC
TR1ATCC TR1ATCC TR1ATCC
TR8ATCC TR8ATCC TR8ATCC
TRPTTR TRPTTR TRPTTR
U2RWPTUV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC U2RWPTUV
U2RWPTUV
UV2PTUV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC UV2PTUV
UV2PTUV
VDCPTOV VDCPTOV VDCPTOV
VDSPVC VDRFUF VDSPVC
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 59

Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

VMMXU VMMXU VMMXU
VMSQI VMSQI VMSQI
VNMMXU VNMMXU VNMMXU
VRPVOC VRLLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC PH1PTUV
PH1PTUV VRPVOC
VRPVOC
VSGAPC VSGGIO VSGAPC
WRNCALH WRNCALH WRNCALH
ZC1PPSCH ZPCPSCH ZPCPSCH
ZC1WPSCH ZPCWPSCH ZPCWPSCH
ZCLCPSCH ZCLCPLAL ZCLCPSCH
ZCPSCH ZCPSCH ZCPSCH
ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH
ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF
ZGVPDIS ZGVLLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC ZGVPDIS
ZGVPDIS ZGVPTUV
ZGVPTUV
ZMCAPDIS ZMCAPDIS ZMCAPDIS
ZMCPDIS ZMCPDIS ZMCPDIS
ZMFCPDIS ZMFCLLN0 PSFPDIS
PSFPDIS ZMFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFPTRC
ZMFPTRC ZMMMXU
ZMMMXU
ZMFPDIS ZMFLLN0 PSFPDIS
PSFPDIS PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFPDIS
ZMFPTRC ZMFPTRC
ZMMMXU ZMMMXU
ZMHPDIS ZMHPDIS ZMHPDIS
ZMMAPDIS ZMMAPDIS ZMMAPDIS
ZMMPDIS ZMMPDIS ZMMPDIS
ZMQAPDIS ZMQAPDIS ZMQAPDIS
ZMQPDIS ZMQPDIS ZMQPDIS
ZMRAPDIS ZMRAPDIS ZMRAPDIS
ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS
ZMRPSB ZMRPSB ZMRPSB
ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC

60 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 2
Available functions

Section 2 Available functions

GUID-F5776DD1-BD04-4872-BB89-A0412B4B5CC3 v1

The following tables list all the functions available in the IED.
Those functions that are not exposed to the user or do not need to
be configured are not described in this manual.

2.1 Main protection functions GUID-66BAAD98-851D-4AAC-B386-B38B57718BD2 v13

Table 2: Example of quantities

2 = number of basic instances

0-3 = option quantities
3-A03 = optional function included in packages A03 (refer to ordering details)

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Transformer

function name
RET670 (A10)

RET670 (B30)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)
RET670 (Customized)

Differential protection
T2WPDIF 87T Transformer differential 1-3 1
protection, two winding
T3WPDIF 87T Transformer differential 1-3 1
protection, three winding
HZPDIF 87 High impedance differential 0-6 1 3-A02 3-A02
protection, single phase
REFPDIF 87N Restricted earth fault protection, 0-3 1 2 2B
low impedance 1-A01
LDRGFC 11RE Additional security logic for 0-1
L differential protection
Impedance protection
ZMQPDIS, 21 Distance protection zone, 0-5
ZMQAPDIS quadrilateral characteristic
ZDRDIR 21D Directional impedance 0-2
quadrilateral
ZMCPDIS, 21 Distance measuring zone, 0-5
ZMCAPDIS quadrilateral characteristic for
series compensated lines
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 61

Technical manual
Section 2 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Available functions

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Transformer

function name

RET670 (A10)

RET670 (B30)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)
RET670 (Customized)

ZDSRDIR 21D Directional impedance 0-2

quadrilateral, including series
compensation
FDPSPDIS 21 Phase selection, quadrilateral 0-2
characteristic with fixed angle
ZMHPDIS 21 Full-scheme distance protection, 0-5
mho characteristic
ZMMPDIS, 21 Full-scheme distance protection, 0-5
ZMMAPDIS quadrilateral for earth faults
ZDMRDIR 21D Directional impedance element 0-2
for mho characteristic
ZDARDIR Additional distance protection 0-1
directional function for earth faults
ZSMGAPC Mho impedance supervision logic 0-1
FMPSPDIS 21 Faulty phase identification with 0-2
load enchroachment
ZMRPDIS, 21 Distance measuring zone, quad 0-5
ZMRAPDIS characteristic separate Ph-Ph
and Ph-E settings
FRPSPDIS 21 Phase selection, quadrilateral 0-2
characteristic with settable angle
ZMFPDIS 21 High speed distance protection, 0-2 1-B15 1-B15
quad and mho characteristic
ZMFCPDIS 21 High speed distance protection 0-2
for series comp. lines, quad and
mho characteristic
PPLPHIZ Phase preference logic 0-1
PPL2PHIZ Phase preference logic 0-1
ZMRPSB 68 Power swing detection 0-1 1-B15 1-B15
PSLPSCH Power swing logic 0-1 1-B15 1-B15
PSPPPAM 78 Poleslip/out-of-step protection 0-1
OOSPPAM 78 Out-of-step protection 0-1
ZCVPSOF Automatic switch onto fault logic, 0-1 1-B15 1-B15
voltage and current based
ZGVPDIS 21 Underimpedance protection for 0–2 1-B14 1-B14
generators and transformers

62 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 2
Available functions

2.2 Back-up protection functions GUID-A8D0852F-807F-4442-8730-E44808E194F0 v13

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Transformer

function name

RET670 (A10)

RET670 (B30)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)
RET670 (Customized)

Current protection
PHPIOC 50 Instantaneous phase 0-8 3 2 3 2-C19
overcurrent protection
OC4PTOC 51_671) Directional phase overcurrent 0-8 3 2 3 2-C19
protection, four steps
EFPIOC 50N Instantaneous residual 0-8 3 2 3 2-C19
overcurrent protection
EF4PTOC 51N Directional residual overcurrent 0-8 3 3 3 2-C19
67N2) protection, four steps

NS4PTOC 46I2 Four step directional negative 0-8 2-C42 2-C42 3-C43 2-C19
phase sequence overcurrent
protection
SDEPSDE 67N Sensitive directional residual 0-3 1 1-C16 1-C16 1-C16
overcurrent and power
protection
LCPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection, 0-2
one time constant, Celsius
LFPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection, 0-2
one time constant, Fahrenheit
TRPTTR 49 Thermal overload protection, 0-6 1 1B 2B
two time constants 1-C05 1-C05
CCRBRF 50BF Breaker failure protection 0-6 3 4 6
STBPTOC 50STB Stub protection 0-3 3-B26 3-B26 3-B26
CCPDSC 52PD Pole discordance protection 0-6 3 4 6
GUPPDUP 37 Directional underpower 0-2 1-C35 1-C35 1-C35
protection
GOPPDOP 32 Directional overpower protection 0-2 1-C35 1-C35 1-C35
BRCPTOC 46 Broken conductor check 1 1 1 1 1
CBPGAPC Capacitor bank protection 0-6
NS2PTOC 46I2 Negative sequence time 0-2
overcurrent protection for
machines
VRPVOC 51V Voltage restrained overcurrent 0-3 1-C35 1-C35 1-C35
protection
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 63

Technical manual
Section 2 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Available functions

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Transformer

function name

RET670 (A10)

RET670 (B30)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)
RET670 (Customized)

Voltage protection
UV2PTUV 27 Two step undervoltage 0-3 1-D01 1B 1B 2-D02
protection 1-D01 2-D02
OV2PTOV 59 Two step overvoltage protection 0-3 1-D01 1B 1B 2-D02
1-D01 2-D02
ROV2PTOV 59N Two step residual overvoltage 0-3 1-D01 1B 1B 2-D02
protection 1-D01 2-D02
OEXPVPH 24 Overexcitation protection 0-2 2-D04 1-D03 2-D04
VDCPTOV 60 Voltage differential protection 0-2 2 2 2 2
LOVPTUV 27 Loss of voltage check 1 1 1 1 1

Frequency protection
SAPTUF 81 Underfrequency protection 0-6 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01
SAPTOF 81 Overfrequency protection 0-6 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01
SAPFRC 81 Rate-of-change of frequency 0-6 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01
protection

Multipurpose protection
CVGAPC General current and voltage 0-9 6-F02 6-F02
protection

General calculation
SMAIHPAC Multipurpose filter 0-6

1) 67 requires voltage
2) 67N requires voltage

64 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 2
Available functions

2.3 Control and monitoring functions GUID-E3777F16-0B76-4157-A3BF-0B6B978863DE v15

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Transformer

function name

RET670 (A10)

RET670 (B30)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)
RET670
(Customized)

Control
SESRSYN 25 Synchrocheck, energizing 0-6 1 1B 1B
check and synchronizing 2-H01 4-H03
APC30 3 Control functionality for up to 0-1 1-H39 1-H39 1-H39
6 bays, max 30 objects
(6CBs), including interlocking
(see Table 4)
QCBAY Bay control 1+5/APC30 1 1+5/ 1+5/ 1+5/
APC30 APC30 APC30
LOCREM Handling of LR-switch 1+5/APC30 1 1+5/ 1+5/ 1+5/
positions APC30 APC30 APC30
LOCREMCTRL LHMI control of PSTO 1 1 1 1 1
SXCBR Circuit breaker 18 12 18 18 18
TR1ATCC 90 Automatic voltage control for 0-4 1 2 2B
tap changer, single control 2-H16
TR8ATCC 90 Automatic voltage control for 0-4 1-H15 1-H15 2B
tap changer, parallel control 2-H18 2-H18
TCMYLTC 84 Tap changer control and 0-4 4 4 4
supervision, 6 binary inputs
TCLYLTC 84 Tap changer control and 0-4 4 4 4
supervision, 32 binary inputs
SLGAPC Logic rotating switch for 15 15 15 15 15
function selection and LHMI
presentation
VSGAPC Selector mini switch 30 30 30 30 30
DPGAPC Generic communication 16 16 16 16 16
function for Double Point
indication
SPC8GAPC Single point generic control 5 5 5 5 5
function 8 signals
AUTOBITS Automation bits, command 3 3 3 3 3
function for DNP3.0
SINGLECMD Single command, 16 signals 4 4 4 4 4
I103CMD Function commands for IEC 1 1 1 1 1
60870-5-103
I103GENCMD Function commands generic 50 50 50 50 50
for IEC 60870-5-103
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 65

Technical manual
Section 2 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Available functions

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Transformer

function name

RET670 (A10)

RET670 (B30)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)
RET670
(Customized)

I103POSCMD IED commands with position 50 50 50 50 50

and select for IEC
60870-5-103
I103POSCMDV IED direct commands with 50 50 50 50 50
position for IEC 60870-5-103
I103IEDCMD IED commands for IEC 1 1 1 1 1
60870-5-103
I103USRCMD Function commands user 4 4 4 4 4
defined for IEC 60870-5-103
Secondary system
supervision
CCSSPVC 87 Current circuit supervision 0-5 4 6 4
FUFSPVC Fuse failure supervision 0-4 1 3 3
VDSPVC 60 Fuse failure supervision 0-2 1-G03 1-G03 1-G03 1-G03
based on voltage difference
Logic
SMPPTRC 94 Tripping logic 12 12 12 12 12
SMAGAPC General start matrix block 12 12 12 12 12
STARTCOMB Start combinator 32 32 32 32 32
TMAGAPC Trip matrix logic 12 12 12 12 12
ALMCALH Logic for group alarm 5 5 5 5 5
WRNCALH Logic for group warning 5 5 5 5 5
INDCALH Logic for group indication 5 5 5 5 5
AND, GATE, INV, Basic configurable logic 40-420 40-420 40-420 40-420 40-420
LLD, OR, blocks (see Table 3)
PULSETIMER,
RSMEMORY,
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET, XOR
ANDQT, Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0-1
INDCOMBSPQT, (see Table 5)
INDEXTSPQT,
INVALIDQT,
INVERTERQT,
ORQT,
PULSETIMERQT,
RSMEMORYQT,
SRMEMORYQT,
TIMERSETQT,
XORQT
Table continues on next page

66 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 2
Available functions

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Transformer

function name

RET670 (A10)

RET670 (B30)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)
RET670
(Customized)

AND, GATE, INV, Extension logic package (see 0-1

LLD, OR, Table 6)
PULSETIMER,
RSMEMORY,
SLGAPC,
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET,
VSGAPC, XOR
FXDSIGN Fixed signal function block 1 1 1 1 1
B16I Boolean to integer conversion, 18 18 18 18 18
16 bit
BTIGAPC Boolean to integer conversion 16 16 16 16 16
with logical node
representation, 16 bit
IB16 Integer to Boolean 16 18 18 18 18 18
conversion
ITBGAPC Integer to Boolean 16 16 16 16 16 16
conversion with Logic Node
representation
TEIGAPC Elapsed time integrator with 12 12 12 12 12
limit transgression and
overflow supervision
INTCOMP Comparator for integer inputs 30 30 30 30 30
REALCOMP Comparator for real inputs 30 30 30 30 30

Table 3: Total number of instances for basic configurable logic blocks

Basic configurable logic block Total number of instances
AND 280
GATE 40
INV 420
LLD 40
OR 298
PULSETIMER 40
RSMEMORY 40
SRMEMORY 40
TIMERSET 60
XOR 40

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 67

Technical manual
Section 2 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Available functions

Table 4: Number of function instances in APC30

Function name Function description Total number of instances
SCILO Interlocking 30
BB_ES 6
A1A2_BS 4
A1A2_DC 6
ABC_BC 2
BH_CONN 2
BH_LINE_A 2
BH_LINE_B 2
DB_BUS_A 3
DB_BUS_B 3
DB_LINE 3
ABC_LINE 6
AB_TRAFO 4
SCSWI Switch controller 30
SXSWI Circuit switch 24
QCRSV Apparatus control 6
RESIN1 1
RESIN2 59
POS_EVAL Evaluation of position indication 30
QCBAY Bay control 5
LOCREM Handling of LR-switch positions 5
XLNPROXY Proxy for signals from switching 42
device via GOOSE
GOOSEXLNRCV GOOSE function block to 42
receive a switching device

Table 5: Total number of instances for configurable logic blocks Q/T

Configurable logic blocks Q/T Total number of instances
ANDQT 120
INDCOMBSPQT 20
INDEXTSPQT 20
INVALIDQT 22
INVERTERQT 120
ORQT 120
PULSETIMERQT 40
RSMEMORYQT 40
SRMEMORYQT 40
TIMERSETQT 40
XORQT 40

68 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 2
Available functions

Table 6: Total number of instances for extended logic package

Extended configurable logic block Total number of instances
AND 180
GATE 49
INV 180
LLD 49
OR 180
PULSETIMER 89
RSMEMORY 40
SLGAPC 74
SRMEMORY 130
TIMERSET 109
VSGAPC 120
XOR 89

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Transformer

function name RET670 (A10)

RET670 (B30)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)
RET670
(Customized)

Monitoring
CVMMXN Power system measurement 6 6 6 6 6
CMMXU Current measurement 10 10 10 10 10
VMMXU Voltage measurement phase- 6 6 6 6 6
phase
CMSQI Current sequence 6 6 6 6 6
measurement
VMSQI Voltage sequence 6 6 6 6 6
measurement
VNMMXU Voltage measurement phase- 6 6 6 6 6
earth
AISVBAS General service value 1 1 1 1 1
presentation of analog inputs
EVENT Event function 20 20 20 20 20
DRPRDRE, Disturbance report 1 1 1 1 1
A4RADR,
SPGAPC Generic communication 64 64 64 64 64
function for Single Point
indication
SP16GAPC Generic communication 16 16 16 16 16
function for Single Point
indication 16 inputs
MVGAPC Generic communication 24 24 24 24 24
function for measured values
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 69

Technical manual
Section 2 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Available functions

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Transformer

function name

RET670 (A10)

RET670 (B30)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)
RET670
(Customized)

BINSTATREP Logical signal status report 3 3 3 3 3

RANGE_XP Measured value expander 66 66 66 66 66
block
SSIMG 63 Insulation supervision for gas 21 21 21 21 21
medium
SSIML 71 Insulation supervision for 4 4 4 4 4
liquid medium
SSCBR Circuit breaker condition 0-18 9 12 18
monitoring
LMBRFLO Fault locator 0-1 1-M01 1-M01
LOLSPTR 26/49 Transformer insulation loss of 0-4 4-M21 4-M21 4-M21
HS life monitoring
I103MEAS Measurands for IEC 1 1 1 1 1
60870-5-103
I103MEASUSR Measurands user defined 3 3 3 3 3
signals for IEC 60870-5-103
I103AR Function status auto-recloser 1 1 1 1 1
for IEC 60870-5-103
I103EF Function status earth-fault for 1 1 1 1 1
IEC 60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT Function status fault 1 1 1 1 1
protection for IEC
60870-5-103
I103IED IED status for IEC 1 1 1 1 1
60870-5-103
I103SUPERV Supervison status for IEC 1 1 1 1 1
60870-5-103
I103USRDEF Status for user defined signals 20 20 20 20 20
for IEC 60870-5-103
L4UFCNT Event counter with limit 30 30 30 30 30
supervision
TEILGAPC Running hour meter 6 6 6 6 6
Metering
PCFCNT Pulse-counter logic 16 16 16 16 16
ETPMMTR Function for energy 6 6 6 6 6
calculation and demand
handling

70 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 2
Available functions

2.4 Communication GUID-5F144B53-B9A7-4173-80CF-CD4C84579CB5 v15

IEC 61850 or function ANSI Function description Transformer

name

RET670 (A10)

RET670 (B30)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)
RET670
(Customized)

Station communication
LONSPA, SPA SPA communication protocol 1 1 1 1 1
ADE LON communication protocol 1 1 1 1 1
HORZCOMM Network variables via LON 1 1 1 1 1
RS485GEN RS485 1 1 1 1 1
DNPGEN DNP3.0 communication general 1 1 1 1 1
protocol
CHSERRS485 DNP3.0 for EIA-485 1 1 1 1 1
communication protocol
CH1TCP, CH2TCP, DNP3.0 for TCP/IP 1 1 1 1 1
CH3TCP, CH4TCP communication protocol
CHSEROPT DNP3.0 for TCP/IP and EIA-485 1 1 1 1 1
communication protocol
MSTSER DNP3.0 serial master 1 1 1 1 1
MST1TCP, DNP3.0 for TCP/IP 1 1 1 1 1
MST2TCP, communication protocol
MST3TCP,
MST4TCP
DNPFREC DNP3.0 fault records for TCP/IP 1 1 1 1 1
and EIA-485 communication
protocol
IEC 61850-8-1 IEC 61850 1 1 1 1 1
GOOSEINTLKRCV Horizontal communication via 59 59 59 59 59
GOOSE for interlocking
GOOSEBINRCV GOOSE binary receive 16 16 16 16 16
GOOSEDPRCV GOOSE function block to receive 64 64 64 64 64
a double point value
GOOSEINTRCV GOOSE function block to receive 32 32 32 32 32
an integer value
GOOSEMVRCV GOOSE function block to receive 60 60 60 60 60
a measurand value
GOOSESPRCV GOOSE function block to receive 64 64 64 64 64
a single point value
VCTRSEND Horizontal communication via 1 1 1 1 1
GOOSE for VCTR
GOOSEVCTRRCV Horizontal communication via 7 7 7 7 7
GOOSE for VCTR
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 71

Technical manual
Section 2 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Available functions

IEC 61850 or function ANSI Function description Transformer

name

RET670 (A10)

RET670 (B30)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)
RET670
(Customized)

GOOSEVCTRCONF GOOSE VCTR configuration for 1 1 1 1 1

send and receive
MULTICMDRCV, Multiple command and transmit 60/10 60/10 60/10 60/10 60/10
MULTICMDSND
OPTICAL103 IEC 60870-5-103 Optical serial 1 1 1 1 1
communication
RS485103 IEC 60870-5-103 serial 1 1 1 1 1
communication for RS485
AGSAL Generic security application 1 1 1 1 1
component
LD0LLN0 IEC 61850 LD0 LLN0 1 1 1 1 1
SYSLLN0 IEC 61850 SYS LLN0 1 1 1 1 1
LPHD Physical device information 1 1 1 1 1
PCMACCS IED configuration protocol 1 1 1 1 1
SECALARM Component for mapping security 1 1 1 1 1
events on protocols such as
DNP3 and IEC103
FSTACCS Field service tool access 1 1 1 1 1
IEC 61850-9-2 Process bus 0-1 1-P30 1-P30 1-P30 1-P30
communication, 8 merging units
ACTIVLOG Activity logging 1 1 1 1 1
ALTRK Service tracking 1 1 1 1 1
PRP IEC 62439-3 Parallel redundancy 0-1 1-P23 1-P23 1-P23 1-P23
protocol
HSR IEC 62439-3 High-availability 0-1 1-P24 1-P24 1-P24 1-P24
seamless redundancy
PMUCONF Synchrophasor report, 24 phasors 0-1 1-P33 1-P33 1-P33 1-P33
PMUREPORT (see Table 7)
PHASORREPORT1
PHASORREPORT2
PHASORREPORT3
ANALOGREPORT1
BINARYREPORT1
SMAI1 - SMAI12
3PHSUM
PMUSTATUS
PTP Precision time protocol 1 1 1 1 1
FRONTSTATUS Access point diagnostic for front 1 1 1 1 1
Ethernet port
SCHLCCH Access point diagnostic for non- 6 6 6 6 6
redundant Ethernet port
RCHLCCH Access point diagnostic for 3 3 3 3 3
redundant Ethernet ports
Table continues on next page

72 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 2
Available functions

IEC 61850 or function ANSI Function description Transformer

name

RET670 (A10)

RET670 (B30)

RET670 (B40)

RET670 (A25)
RET670
(Customized)

DHCP DHCP configuration for front 1 1 1 1 1

access point
QUALEXP IEC 61850 quality expander 96 96 96 96 96
Remote communication
BinSignRec1_1 Binary signal transfer receive 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6
BinSignRec1_2
BinSignReceive2
BinSignTrans1_1 Binary signal transfer transmit 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6
BinSignTrans1_2
BinSignTransm2
BinSigRec1_12M Binary signal transfer, 2Mbit 3 3 3 3 3
BinSigRec1_22M receive/transmit
BinSigTran1_12M
BinSigTran1_22M
LDCMTRN Transmission of analog data from 1 1 1 1 1
LDCM
LDCMTRN_2M Transmission of analog data from 6 6 6 6 6
LDCM, 2Mbit
LDCMRecBinStat1 Receive binary status from remote 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3
LDCMRecBinStat2 LDCM
LDCMRecBinStat3
LDCMRecBinS2_2M Receive binary status from LDCM, 3 3 3 3 3
2Mbit
LDCMRecBinS3_2M Receive binary status from remote 3 3 3 3 3
LDCM, 2Mbit
Scheme communication
ZCPSCH 85 Scheme communication logic with 0-2 1-B15 1-B15
delta based blocking scheme 1-K01 1-K01
signal transmit
ZC1PPSCH 85 Phase segregated scheme 0-2
communication logic for distance
protection
ZCRWPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end 0-2 1-B15 1-B15
infeed logic for distance protection 1-K01 1-K01
ZC1WPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end 0-2
infeed logic for phase segregated
communication
ZCLCPSCH Local acceleration logic 0-1 1-B15 1-B15
1-K01 1-K01
ECPSCH 85 Scheme communication logic for 0-1 1 1
residual overcurrent protection
ECRWPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end 0-1 1 1
infeed logic for residual
overcurrent protection

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 73

Technical manual
Section 2 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Available functions

Table 7: Number of function instances in Synchrophasor report, 24 phasors

Function name Function description Number of instances
PMUCONF Configuration parameters for C37.118 2011 and IEEE1344 protocol 1
PMUREPORT Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and C37.118 1
PHASORREPORT1 Protocol reporting of phasor data via IEEE 1344 and C37.118, phasors 1-8 1
PHASORREPORT2 Protocol reporting of phasor data via IEEE 1344 and C37.118, phasors 9-16 1
PHASORREPORT3 Protocol reporting of phasor data via IEEE 1344 and C37.118, phasors 17-24 1
ANALOGREPORT1 Protocol reporting of analog data via IEEE 1344 and C37.118, analogs 1-8 1
BINARYREPORT1 Protocol reporting of binary data via IEEE 1344 and C37.118, binary 1-8 1
SMAI1–SMAI12 Signal Matrix for analog inputs 1
3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase 6
PMUSTATUS Diagnostics for C37.118 2011 and IEEE1344 protocol 1

2.5 Basic IED functions GUID-C8F0E5D2-E305-4184-9627-F6B5864216CA v12

Table 8: Basic IED functions

IEC 61850 or function Description
name
INTERRSIG Self supervision with internal event list
TIMESYNCHGEN Time synchronization module
BININPUT, Time synchronization
SYNCHCAN,
SYNCHGPS,
SYNCHCMPPS,
SYNCHLON,
SYNCHPPH,
SYNCHPPS, SNTP,
SYNCHSPA
PTP Precision time protocol
TIMEZONE Time synchronization
IRIG-B Time synchronization
SETGRPS Number of setting groups
ACTVGRP Parameter setting groups
TESTMODE Test mode functionality
CHNGLCK Change lock function
SMBI Signal matrix for binary inputs
SMBO Signal matrix for binary outputs
SMMI Signal matrix for mA inputs
SMAI1 - SMAI12 Signal matrix for analog inputs
3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase
Table continues on next page

74 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 2
Available functions

IEC 61850 or function Description

name
ATHSTAT Authority status
ATHCHCK Authority check
AUTHMAN Authority management
FTPACCS FTP access with password
GBASVAL Global base values for settings
ALTMS Time master supervision
ALTIM Time management
COMSTATUS Protocol diagnostic

Table 9: Local HMI functions

IEC 61850 or function ANSI Description
name
LHMICTRL Local HMI signals
LANGUAGE Local human machine language
SCREEN Local HMI Local human machine screen behavior
FNKEYTY1–FNKEYTY5 Parameter setting function for HMI in PCM600
FNKEYMD1–
FNKEYMD5
LEDGEN General LED indication part for LHMI
OPENCLOSE_LED LHMI LEDs for open and close keys
GRP1_LED1– Basic part for CP HW LED indication module
GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1–
GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1–
GRP3_LED15

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 75

Technical manual
76
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 3
Analog inputs

Section 3 Analog inputs SEMOD55010-1 v3

3.1 Introduction SEMOD55003-5 v11

Analog input channels must be configured and set properly in order to get correct
measurement results and correct protection operations. For power measuring, all
directional and differential functions, the directions of the input currents must be
defined in order to reflect the way the current transformers are installed/connected
in the field ( primary and secondary connections ). Measuring and protection
algorithms in the IED use primary system quantities. Setting values are in primary
quantities as well and it is important to set the data about the connected current and
voltage transformers properly.

An AISVBAS reference PhaseAngleRef can be defined to facilitate service values

reading. This analog channel's phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and
remaining analog channel's phase angle information will be shown in relation to
this analog input. During testing and commissioning of the IED, the reference
channel can be changed to facilitate testing and service values reading.

The IED has the ability to receive analog values from primary
equipment, that are sampled by Merging units (MU) connected to a
process bus, via the IEC 61850-9-2 LE protocol.

The availability of VT inputs depends on the ordered transformer

input module (TRM) type.

3.2 Function block SEMOD116577-1 v5

The hardware channels appear in the signal matrix tool (SMT) and
in ACT when a TRM is included in the configuration with the
hardware configuration tool. In the SMT or the ACT, they can be
mapped to the desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED and used
internally in the configuration.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 77

Technical manual
Section 3 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Analog inputs

3.3 Signals
PID-3920-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 10: TRM_12I Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(I) STRING Analogue current input 7
CH8(I) STRING Analogue current input 8
CH9(I) STRING Analogue current input 9
CH10(I) STRING Analogue current input 10
CH11(I) STRING Analogue current input 11
CH12(I) STRING Analogue current input 12

PID-3921-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 11: TRM_6I_6U Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 7
CH8(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 8
CH9(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 9
CH10(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 10
CH11(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 11
CH12(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 12

78 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 3
Analog inputs

PID-3922-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 12: TRM_6I Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6

PID-3923-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 13: TRM_7I_5U Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(I) STRING Analogue current input 7
CH8(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 8
CH9(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 9
CH10(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 10
CH11(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 11
CH12(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 12

PID-3924-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 14: TRM_9I_3U Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(I) STRING Analogue current input 7
CH8(I) STRING Analogue current input 8
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 79

Technical manual
Section 3 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Analog inputs

Name Type Description

CH9(I) STRING Analogue current input 9
CH10(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 10
CH11(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 11
CH12(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 12

PID-6598-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 15: TRM_10I_2U Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(I) STRING Analogue current input 7
CH8(I) STRING Analogue current input 8
CH9(I) STRING Analogue current input 9
CH10(I) STRING Analogue current input 10
CH11(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 11
CH12(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 12

3.4 Settings
SEMOD129840-4 v2

Dependent on ordered IED type.

80 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 3
Analog inputs

PID-4153-SETTINGS v7

Table 16: AISVBAS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PhaseAngleRef TRM40-Ch1 - Ch12 - - TRM40-Ch1 Reference channel
TRM41-Ch1 - Ch12 for phase angle
MU1-L1I presentation
MU1-L2I
MU1-L3I
MU1-L4I
MU1-L1U
MU1-L2U
MU1-L3U
MU1-L4U
MU2-L1I
MU2-L2I
MU2-L3I
MU2-L4I
MU2-L1U
MU2-L2U
MU2-L3U
MU2-L4U
MU3-L1I
MU3-L2I
MU3-L3I
MU3-L4I
MU3-L1U
MU3-L2U
MU3-L3U
MU3-L4U
MU4-L1I - L4I
MU4-L1U - L4U
MU5-L1I - L4I
MU5-L1U - L4U
MU6-L1I - L4I
MU7-L1I - L4I
MU7-L1U - L4U
MU8-L1I - L4I
MU8-L1U - L4U
MU9-L1I - L4I
MU9-L1U - L4U
MU10-L1I - L4I
MU10-L1U - L4U
MU11-L1I - L4I
MU11-L1U - L4U
MU12-L1I - L4I
MU12-L1U - L4U

PID-3920-SETTINGS v7

Table 17: TRM_12I Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 81

Technical manual
Section 3 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint8 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec8 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim8 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint9 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec9 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim9 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint10 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec10 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim10 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint11 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec11 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim11 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint12 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec12 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim12 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current

82 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 3
Analog inputs

PID-3921-SETTINGS v7

Table 18: TRM_6I_6U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec7 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim7 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 83

Technical manual
Section 3 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Analog inputs

PID-3922-SETTINGS v7

Table 19: TRM_6I Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current

PID-3923-SETTINGS v7

Table 20: TRM_7I_5U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
Table continues on next page

84 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 3
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage

PID-3924-SETTINGS v7

Table 21: TRM_9I_3U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 85

Technical manual
Section 3 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint8 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec8 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim8 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint9 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec9 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim9 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage

PID-6598-SETTINGS v6

Table 22: TRM_10I_2U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
Table continues on next page

86 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 3
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint8 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec8 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim8 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint9 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec9 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim9 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint10 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec10 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim10 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 87

Technical manual
Section 3 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Analog inputs

3.5 Monitored data

PID-6531-MONITOREDDATA v3

Table 23: AISVBAS Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
Status INTEGER 0=Ok - Service value status
1=Error
2=AngRefLow
3=Uncorrelated

PID-3920-MONITOREDDATA v6

Table 24: TRM_12I Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

PID-3921-MONITOREDDATA v6

Table 25: TRM_6I_6U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

PID-3922-MONITOREDDATA v6

Table 26: TRM_6I Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

PID-3923-MONITOREDDATA v6

Table 27: TRM_7I_5U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

PID-3924-MONITOREDDATA v6

Table 28: TRM_9I_3U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

88 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 3
Analog inputs

PID-6598-MONITOREDDATA v6

Table 29: TRM_10I_2U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

3.6 Operation principle SEMOD55028-5 v9

The direction of a measured current depends on the connection of the CT. The main
CTs are typically star connected and can be connected with the star point towards
the object or away from the object. This information must be set in the IED.

Once the CT direction settings is correctly entered the internal IED convention of
the directionality is defined as follows:

• Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction
into the protected object.
• Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction
out from the protected object.

For directional functions the directional conventions are defined as follows (see
Figure 2)

• Forward means the direction is into the object.

• Reverse means the direction is out from the object.

Definition of direction Definition of direction

for directional functions for directional functions
Reverse Forward Forward Reverse
Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is Measured quantity is
positive when flowing positive when flowing
towards the object towards the object

Set parameter Set parameter

CTStarPoint CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is Correct Setting is
"ToObject" "FromObject"

en05000456.vsd
IEC05000456 V1 EN-US

Figure 2: Internal convention of the directionality in the IED

If the settings of the primary CT is correct, that is CTStarPoint set as FromObject

or ToObject according to the plant condition, then a positive quantity always flows
towards the protected object, and a Forward direction always looks towards the
protected object.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 89

Technical manual
Section 3 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Analog inputs

The settings of the IED is performed in primary values. The ratios of the main CTs
and VTs are, therefore, basic data for the IED. The user has to set the rated
secondary and primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the
IED with their rated ratios.

The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under Main
menu/Hardware/Analog modules in the Parameter Settings tool or on the HMI.

3.7 Technical data SEMOD55412-1 v1

M16988-1 v11

Table 30: TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for protection transformer
Description Value
Frequency
Rated frequency fr 50/60 Hz

Operating range fr ± 10%

Current inputs
Rated current Ir 1 or 5 A

Operating range (0-100) x Ir

Thermal withstand 100 × Ir for 1 s *)

30 × Ir for 10 s
10 × Ir for 1 min
4 × Ir continuously

Dynamic withstand 250 × Ir one half wave

Burden < 20 mVA at Ir = 1 A

< 150 mVA at Ir = 5 A

*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.

Voltage inputs **)
Rated voltage Ur 110 or 220 V

Operating range 0 - 340 V

Thermal withstand 450 V for 10 s
420 V continuously
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V
< 80 mVA at 220 V
**) all values for individual voltage inputs
Note! All current and voltage data are specified as RMS values at rated frequency

Table 31: TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for measuring transformer
Description Value
Frequency
Rated frequency fr 50/60 Hz

Operating range fr ± 10%

Table continues on next page

90 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 3
Analog inputs

Description Value
Current inputs
Rated current Ir 1A 5A

Operating range (0-1.8) × Ir (0-1.6) × Ir

Thermal withstand 80 × Ir for 1 s 65 × Ir for 1 s

25 × Ir for 10 s 20 × Ir for 10 s
10 × Ir for 1 min 8 × Ir for 1 min
1.8 × Ir for 30 min 1.6 × Ir for 30 min
1.1 × Ir continuously 1.1 × Ir continuously

Burden < 200 mVA at Ir < 350 mVA at Ir

Voltage inputs *)
Rated voltage Ur 110 or 220 V

Operating range 0 - 340 V

Thermal withstand 450 V for 10 s
420 V continuously
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V
< 80 mVA at 220 V
*) all values for individual voltage inputs
Note! All current and voltage data are specified as RMS values at rated frequency

SEMOD53376-2 v6

Table 32: CT and VT circuit connectors

Connector type Rated voltage and current Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x AWG14)
Terminal blocks suitable for 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
ring lug terminals

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 91

Technical manual
92
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 4
Binary input and output modules

Section 4 Binary input and output modules

4.1 Binary input

4.1.1 Binary input debounce filter GUID-AE43976C-E966-484C-AF39-89B2B12F56DC v5

The debounce filter eliminates bounces and short disturbances on a binary input.

A time counter is used for filtering. The time counter is increased once in a
millisecond when a binary input is high, or decreased when a binary input is low. A
new debounced binary input signal is forwarded when the time counter reaches the
set DebounceTime value and the debounced input value is high or when the time
counter reaches 0 and the debounced input value is low. The default setting of
DebounceTime is 1 ms.

The binary input ON-event gets the time stamp of the first rising edge, after which
the counter does not reach 0 again. The same happens when the signal goes down
to 0 again.

4.1.2 Oscillation filter GUID-41B89E6F-50C3-44BF-9171-3CC82EB5CA15 v4

Binary input wiring can be very long in substations and there are electromagnetic
fields from for example nearby breakers. An oscillation filter is used to reduce the
disturbance from the system when a binary input starts oscillating.

An oscillation counter counts the debounced signal state changes during 1 s. If the
counter value is greater than the set value OscBlock, the input signal is blocked.
The input signal is ignored until the oscillation counter value during 1 s is below
the set value OscRelease.

4.1.3 Settings
GUID-07348953-4A72-444B-A31A-030ABEA8E0C4 v1

OscBlock must always be set to a value greater than OscRelease. If

this is not done, oscillation detection will not function correctly, and
the resulting behaviour will be undefined.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 93

Technical manual
Section 4 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Binary input and output modules

4.1.3.1 Setting parameters for binary input modules

PID-3473-SETTINGS v2

Table 33: BIM Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit

4.1.3.2 Setting parameters for binary input/output module

PID-4050-SETTINGS v2

Table 34: IOMIN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Binary input/output module in operation
On (On) or not (Off)
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit

94 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.1 Local HMI screen behaviour

5.1.1 Identification
GUID-84392EFF-4D3F-4A67-A6ED-34C6E98574D6 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Local HMI screen behaviour SCREEN - -

5.1.2 Settings
PID-6451-SETTINGS v1

Table 35: SCREEN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DisplayTimeout 1 - 120 Min 1 10 Local HMI display timeout
ContrastLevel -100 - 100 % 10 0 Contrast level for display
DefaultScreen - 0 Default screen
EvListSrtOrder Latest on top - - Latest on top Sort order of event list
Oldest on top
AutoIndicationDRP Off - - Off Automatic indication of disturbance
On report
SubstIndSLD No - - No Substitute indication on single line
Yes diagram
InterlockIndSLD No - - No Interlock indication on single line
Yes diagram
BypassCommands No - - No Enable bypass of commands
Yes

5.2 Local HMI signals

5.2.1 Identification
GUID-03AB7AEE-87D3-4F3C-B6B9-B1EB1B538E38 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Local HMI signals LHMICTRL - -

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 95

Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.2.2 Function block GUID-A8AC51E9-5BD7-4A80-9576-4816F14DD08D v2

LHMICTRL
CLRLEDS HMI-ON
RED-S
YELLOW-S
YELLOW-F
CLRPULSE
LEDSCLRD

IEC09000320-1-en.vsd
IEC09000320 V1 EN-US

Figure 3: LHMICTRL function block

5.2.3 Signals
PID-3992-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 36: LHMICTRL Input signals

Name Type Default Description
CLRLEDS BOOLEAN 0 Input to clear the LCD-HMI LEDs

PID-3992-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 37: LHMICTRL Output signals

Name Type Description
HMI-ON BOOLEAN Backlight of the LCD display is active
RED-S BOOLEAN Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-S BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-F BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing
CLRPULSE BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD-
HMI are cleared
LEDSCLRD BOOLEAN Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not
active

96 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.3 Basic part for LED indication module

5.3.1 Identification
GUID-6E36C0BC-F284-4C88-A4A8-9535D3BE8B14 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Basic part for LED indication module LEDGEN - -
Basic part for LED indication HW GRP1_LED1 - - -
module GRP1_LED15

GRP2_LED1 -
GRP2_LED15

GRP3_LED1 -
GRP3_LED15

5.3.2 Function block GUID-BDB5797F-F27E-4FEE-9FDB-1C9E2F572BB6 v3

LEDGEN
BLOCK NEWIND
RESET ACK

IEC09000321-1-en.vsd
IEC09000321 V1 EN-US

Figure 4: LEDGEN function block

GRP1_LED1
^HM1L01R
^HM1L01Y
^HM1L01G
IEC09000322 V1 EN-US

Figure 5: GRP1_LED1 function block

The GRP1_LED1 function block is an example. The 15 LEDs in each of the three
groups have a similar function block.

5.3.3 Signals
PID-4114-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 38: LEDGEN Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Input to block the operation of the LEDs
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input to acknowledge/reset the indication LEDs

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 97

Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

PID-4114-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 39: LEDGEN Output signals

Name Type Description
NEWIND BOOLEAN New indication signal if any LED indication input
is set
ACK BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs are
acknowledged

PID-1697-INPUTSIGNALS v18

Table 40: GRP1_LED1 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
HM1L01R BOOLEAN 0 Red indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01Y BOOLEAN 0 Yellow indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group
1
HM1L01G BOOLEAN 0 Green indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group
1

5.3.4 Settings
PID-4114-SETTINGS v6

Table 41: LEDGEN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
tRestart 0.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 0.0 Defines the disturbance length
tMax 0.1 - 100.0 s 0.1 1.0 Maximum time for the definition of a
disturbance

PID-1697-SETTINGS v18

Table 42: GRP1_LED1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SequenceType Follow-S - - Follow-S Sequence type for LED 1, local HMI
Follow-F alarm group 1
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_OFF Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is off
LabelRed 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_RED Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is red
LabelYellow 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_YELLOW Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is yellow
LabelGreen 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_GREEN Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is green

98 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.4 LCD part for HMI function keys control module GUID-EECAE7FA-7078-472C-A429-F7607DB884EB v2

5.4.1 Identification
GUID-E6611022-5EA3-420D-ADCD-9D1E7604EFEB v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
LCD part for HMI Function Keys FNKEYMD1 - - -
Control module FNKEYMD5

5.4.2 Function block

GUID-A803A728-5CFC-4606-98E4-793E873B99D4 v3

FNKEYMD1
^LEDCTL1 ^FKEYOUT1
IEC09000327 V1 EN-US

Figure 6: FNKEYMD1 function block

Only the function block for the first button is shown above. There is a similar block
for every function key button.

5.4.3 Signals
PID-1657-INPUTSIGNALS v18

Table 43: FNKEYMD1 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
LEDCTL1 BOOLEAN 0 LED control input for function key

PID-1657-OUTPUTSIGNALS v19

Table 44: FNKEYMD1 Output signals

Name Type Description
FKEYOUT1 BOOLEAN Output controlled by function key

5.4.4 Settings
PID-1657-SETTINGS v19

Table 45: FNKEYMD1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Mode Off - - Off Output operation mode
Toggle
Pulsed
PulseTime 0.001 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Pulse time for output controlled by
LCDFn1
LabelOn 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_ON Label for LED on state
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_OFF Label for LED off state

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 99

Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

PID-6452-SETTINGS v2

Table 46: FNKEYTY1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Type Off - - Off Function key type
Menu shortcut
Control
MenuShortcut - 0 Menu shortcut for function key

GUID-BCE87D54-C836-40EE-8DA7-779B767059AB v1

MenuShortcut values are product dependent and created dynamically depending on

the product main menu.

100 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.5 Operation principle

5.5.1 Local HMI AMU0600442 v14

IEC13000239-3-en.vsd

IEC13000239 V3 EN-US

Figure 7: Local human-machine interface

The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements:

• Keypad
• Display (LCD)
• LED indicators
• Communication port for PCM600

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 101

Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling.

5.5.1.1 Keypad AMU0600428 v17

The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different
views or menus. The push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset
indications, provide help and switch between local and remote control mode.

The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons that can be configured either
as menu shortcut or control buttons.

102 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

24

1
23
2
18
3

19
4

6 20

21

7 22

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

IEC15000157-2-en.vsd

IEC15000157 V2 EN-US

Figure 8: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push-
buttons and RJ-45 communication port

1...5 Function button

6 Close
7 Open
8 Escape
9 Left
10 Down
11 Up
12 Right
13 Key
14 Enter
15 Remote/Local
16 Uplink LED
17 Not in use
18 Multipage
19 Menu

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 103

Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

20 Clear
21 Help
22 Communication port
23 Programmable indication LEDs
24 IED status LEDs

5.5.1.2 Display GUID-55739D4F-1DA5-4112-B5C7-217AAF360EA5 v11

The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome liquid crystal display (LCD) with a
resolution of 320 x 240 pixels. The character size can vary. The amount of
characters and rows fitting the view depends on the character size and the view that
is shown.

The display view is divided into four basic areas.

104 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

IEC15000270-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000270 V1 EN-US

Figure 9: Display layout

1 Path
2 Content
3 Status
4 Scroll bar (appears when needed)

• The path shows the current location in the menu structure. If the path is too
long to be shown, it is truncated from the beginning, and the truncation is
indicated with three dots.
• The content area shows the menu content.
• The status area shows the current IED time, the user that is currently logged in
and the object identification string which is settable via the LHMI or with
PCM600.
• If text, pictures or other items do not fit in the display, a vertical scroll bar
appears on the right. The text in content area is truncated from the beginning if
it does not fit in the display horizontally. Truncation is indicated with three
dots.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 105

Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

IEC15000138-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000138 V1 EN-US

Figure 10: Truncated path

The number after : (colon sign) at the end of the function instance, for example, 1
in SMAI1:1, indicates the number of that function instance.

The function key button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the
function buttons. Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a
feedback signal for the function button control action. The LED is connected to the
required signal with PCM600.

106 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

IEC13000281-1-en.vsd
GUID-C98D972D-D1D8-4734-B419-161DBC0DC97B V1 EN-US

Figure 11: Function button panel

The indication LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the indication
LEDs. Three indication LED pages are available.

IEC13000240-1-en.vsd
GUID-5157100F-E8C0-4FAB-B979-FD4A971475E3 V1 EN-US

Figure 12: Indication LED panel

The function button and indication LED panels are not visible at the same time.
Each panel is shown by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage
button. Pressing the ESC button clears the panel from the display. Both panels have
a dynamic width that depends on the label string length.

5.5.1.3 LEDs AMU0600427 v13

The LHMI includes three status LEDs above the display: Ready, Start and Trip.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 107

Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

There are 15 programmable indication LEDs on the front of the LHMI. Each LED
can indicate three states with the colors: green, yellow and red. The texts related to
each three-color LED are divided into three panels.

There are 3 separate panels of LEDs available. The 15 physical three-color LEDs
in one LED group can indicate 45 different signals. Altogether, 135 signals can be
indicated since there are three LED groups. The LEDs are lit according to priority,
with red being the highest and green the lowest priority. For example, if on one
panel there is an indication that requires the green LED to be lit, and on another
panel there is an indication that requires the red LED to be lit, the red LED takes
priority and is lit. The LEDs can be configured with PCM600 and the operation
mode can be selected with the LHMI or PCM600.

Information panels for the indication LEDs are shown by pressing the Multipage
button. Pressing that button cycles through the three pages. A lit or un-
acknowledged LED is indicated with a highlight. Such lines can be selected by
using the Up/Down arrow buttons. Pressing the Enter key shows details about the
selected LED. Pressing the ESC button exits from information pop-ups as well as
from the LED panel as such.

The Multipage button has a LED. This LED is lit whenever any LED on any panel
is lit. If there are un-acknowledged indication LEDs, then the Multipage LED
blinks. To acknowledge LEDs, press the Clear button to enter the Reset menu
(refer to description of this menu for details).

There are two additional LEDs which are next to the control buttons and
. These LEDs can indicate the status of two arbitrary binary signals by
configuring the OPENCLOSE_LED function block. For instance,
OPENCLOSE_LED can be connected to a circuit breaker to indicate the breaker
open/close status on the LEDs.

IEC16000076-1-en.vsd
IEC16000076 V1 EN-US

Figure 13: OPENCLOSE_LED connected to SXCBR

108 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.5.2 LED configuration alternatives

5.5.2.1 Functionality GUID-1A03E0EF-C10F-4797-9D9F-5CCA86CA29EB v5

The function blocks LEDGEN and GRP1_LEDx, GRP2_LEDx and GRP3_LEDx

(x=1-15) controls and supplies information about the status of the indication LEDs.
The input and output signals of the function blocks are configured with PCM600.
The input signal for each LED is selected individually using SMT or ACT. Each
LED is controlled by the GRPn_LEDx (n=1-3) function block that controls the
color and the operating mode.

Each indication LED on local HMI can be set individually to operate in 6 different
sequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence
types are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting
or restarting mode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used
as signalling system in collecting mode with acknowledgment functionality.

5.5.2.2 Status LEDs GUID-4822DF9C-E343-442B-B3F1-3FA8CD8DF234 v4

There are three status LEDs above the LCD in front of the IED: green, yellow and
red.

The green LED has a fixed function that presents the healthy status of the IED. The
yellow and red LEDs are user configured. The yellow LED can be used to indicate
that a disturbance report is triggered (steady) or that the IED is in test mode
(flashing). The red LED can be used to indicate a trip command.

Here is a typical configuration of the status LEDs:

• Green LED: unlit > no power; blinking > startup or abnormal situation (IED is
not in service); steady > IED is in service
• Yellow LED: unlit > no attention required; blinking > IED is in Testmode
(IED is not in normal service); steady > at least one of the signals configured
to turn the yellow LED on has been active
• Red LED: unlit > no attention required; blinking > user performs a common
write from PCM600; steady > at least one of the signals configured to turn the
red LED on has been active

The yellow and red status LEDs are configured in the disturbance recorder
function, DRPRDRE, by connecting a start or trip signal from the actual function
to a BxRBDR binary input function block using the PCM600, and configuring the
setting to Off, Start or Trip for that particular signal.

5.5.2.3 Indication LEDs

Operating modes GUID-B67F1ED3-900B-4D34-8EEB-A3005999CE50 v4

Collecting mode

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 109

Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

• LEDs that are used in the collecting mode of operation are accumulated
continuously until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable
when the LEDs are used as a simplified alarm system. When all three inputs
(red, yellow and green) are connected to different sources of events for the
same function block, collecting mode shows the highest priority LED color
that was activated since the latest acknowledgment was made. If a number of
different indications were made since the latest acknowledgment, it is not
possible to get a clear view of what triggered the latest event without looking
at the sequence of events list. A condition for getting the sequence of events is
that the signals have been engineered in the disturbance recorder.

Re-starting mode

• In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active
LEDs and activates only those which appear during one disturbance. Only
LEDs defined for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6
(LatchedReset-S) will initiate a reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A
disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the reset of the activated
input signals or when the maximum time limit has elapsed. In sequence 6, the
restarting or reset mode means that upon occurrence of any new event, all
previous indications will be reset. This facilitates that only the LED
indications related to the latest event is shown.

Acknowledgment/reset GUID-E6727E8F-C28B-4295-AE21-BC5643363805 v3

• From local HMI

• The active LED indications can be acknowledged/reset manually.
Manual acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and
is a common signal for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The
function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. The
acknowledgment/reset is performed via the button and menus on the
LHMI.

• From function input

• The active LED indications can also be acknowledged/reset via an input,
CLRLEDS, to the function block LHMICTRL. This input can for
example be configured to a binary input operated from an external push
button or a function button. The function is positive edge triggered, not
level triggered. This means that even if the button is continuously
pressed, the acknowledgment/reset only affects indications active at the
moment when the button is first pressed.

• Automatic reset
• The automatic reset can only be performed for LED indications defined
for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S).

110 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

When the automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still
persisting indications will be indicated with a steady light.

Operating sequence GUID-DFCA880B-308C-4334-94DF-97C7765E8C13 v5

The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type, the LED
follows the input signal completely. For the Latched type, each LED latches to the
corresponding input signal until it is reset.

The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each
LED separately. The following 6 sequences are available:
• Sequence 1: Follow-S
• Sequence 2: Follow-F
• Sequence 3: LatchedAck-F-S
• Sequence 4: LatchedAck-S-F
• Sequence 5: LatchedColl-S
• Sequence 6: LatchedReset-S

For sequence 1 and 2, which are of the Follow type, the acknowledgment (Ack ) /
reset function is not applicable because the indication shown by the LED follows
its input signal. Sequence 3 and 4, which are of the Latched type with
acknowledgement, are only working in collecting (Coll) mode. Sequence 5 is
working according to Latched type and collecting mode while Sequence 6 is
working according to Latched type and re-starting (Reset) mode. The letters S and
F in the sequence names have the meaning S = Steady and F = Flash.

At the activation of the input signal to any LED, the indication on the
corresponding LED obtains a color that corresponds to the activated input, and
operates according to the selected sequence diagrams shown below.

In the sequence diagrams the different statuses of the LEDs are shown using the
following symbols:

= No indication = Steady light = Flash

G= Green Y= Yellow R= Red

IEC09000311.vsd
IEC09000311 V1 EN-US

Figure 14: Symbols used in the sequence diagrams

Sequence 1 (Follow-S) SEMOD56072-39 v4

This sequence follows the corresponding input signals all the time with a steady
light. It does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of
the other LEDs in its operation.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 111

Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Activating
signal

LED

IEC01000228_2_en.vsd
IEC01000228 V2 EN-US

Figure 15: Operating Sequence 1 (Follow-S)

GUID-107FE952-3B4C-4C01-831A-3147E652327C v4

If inputs for two or more colors are active at the same time to the same LED, the
priority color it shows is in accordance with the color described above. An example
of the operation when two colors are activated in parallel to the same LED is
shown in figure16.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

LED G G R G

IEC09000312_1_en.vsd
IEC09000312 V1 EN-US

Figure 16: Operating sequence 1, two colors

Sequence 2 (Follow-F) SEMOD56072-47 v2

This sequence is the same as Sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing
instead of showing steady light.

Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S SEMOD56072-50 v2

This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is
independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal,
the indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if
the signal is not present any more. If the signal is still present after
acknowledgment it gets a steady light.

Activating
signal

LED

Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
IEC01000231 V1 EN-US

Figure 17: Operating Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S

GUID-CC607709-5344-4C88-AA97-6395FD335E55 v5

112 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

The sequence described below is valid only if the same function

block is used for all three colour LEDs.

When an acknowledgment is performed, all indications that appear before the

indication with higher priority has been reset, will be acknowledged, independent
of if the low priority indication appeared before or after acknowledgment. In figure
18 it is shown the sequence when a signal of lower priority becomes activated after
acknowledgment has been performed on a higher priority signal. The low priority
signal will be shown as acknowledged when the high priority signal resets.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

R R G
LED

Acknow
IEC09000313_1_en.vsd
IEC09000313 V1 EN-US

Figure 18: Operating Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S), 2 colors involved

GUID-A652A49D-F016-472D-8D38-6D3E75DAB1DB v3

If all three signals are activated the order of priority is still maintained.
Acknowledgment of indications with higher priority will acknowledge also low
priority indications, which are not visible according to figure 19.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED

LED G Y R R Y

Acknow.
IEC09000314-1-en.vsd
IEC09000314 V1 EN-US

Figure 19: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 1

GUID-071B9EB5-A1D2-49C5-9458-4D21B7E068BE v3

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 113

Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

If an indication with higher priority appears after acknowledgment of a lower

priority indication the high priority indication will be shown as not acknowledged
according to figure 20.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED

LED G G R R Y

Acknow.
IEC09000315-1-en.vsd
IEC09000315 V1 EN-US

Figure 20: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 2

Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F) SEMOD56072-64 v1

This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing
light have been alternated.

Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S SEMOD56072-67 v4

This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the
activation of the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The
difference to sequence 3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be
affected by the reset that is, immediately after the positive edge of the reset has
been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed. Every LED
is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.

Activating
signal

LED

Reset

IEC01000235_2_en.vsd
IEC01000235 V2 EN-US

Figure 21: Operating Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S

GUID-4D52D221-F54F-4966-95B1-6ED6C536CEC9 v3

That means if an indication with higher priority has reset while an indication with
lower priority still is active at the time of reset, the LED will change color
according to figure22.

114 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

R G
LED

Reset
IEC09000316_1_en.vsd
IEC09000316 V1 EN-US

Figure 22: Operating sequence 5, two colors

Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S SEMOD56072-75 v4

In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are
automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other
LEDs set to Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S. Also in this case indications that are still
activated will not be affected by manual reset, that is, immediately after the
positive edge of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing
of active signals is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent
in its operation of LEDs set for other sequences.

Timing diagram for sequence 6 SEMOD56072-86 v4

Figure 23 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 115

Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Disturbance
tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000239_2-en.vsd
IEC01000239 V2 EN-US

Figure 23: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within

same disturbance

Figure 24 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has
elapsed.

Disturbance Disturbance

tRestart tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000240_2_en.vsd
IEC01000240 V2 EN-US

Figure 24: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different

disturbances

116 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Figure 25 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first
one has reset but before tRestart has elapsed.

Disturbance

tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000241_2_en.vsd
IEC01000241 V2 EN-US

Figure 25: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within

same disturbance but with reset of activating signal between

Figure 26 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.

Disturbance

tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000242_2_en.vsd
IEC01000242 V2 EN-US

Figure 26: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 117

Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.5.3 Function keys

5.5.3.1 Functionality GUID-BED38E9A-C90D-4B7F-AA20-42821C4F6A1C v3

Local Human-Machine-Interface (LHMI) has five function buttons, directly to the

left of the LCD, that can be configured either as menu shortcut or control buttons.
Each button has an indication LED that can be configured in the application
configuration.

When used as a menu shortcut, a function button provides a fast way to navigate
between default nodes in the menu tree. When used as a control, the button can
control a binary signal.

5.5.3.2 Operation principle GUID-977C3829-B19B-457E-8A4D-45317226EF22 v3

Each output on the FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function blocks can be controlled

from the LHMI function keys. By pressing a function button on the LHMI, the
output status of the actual function block will change. These binary outputs can in
turn be used to control other function blocks, for example, switch control blocks,
binary I/O outputs etc.

FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function block also has a number of settings and

parameters that control the behavior of the function block. These settings and
parameters are normally set using the PST.

Operating sequence GUID-84CA7C61-4F83-4F86-A07F-BF9EC4E309BF v5

The operation mode is set individually for each output, either OFF, TOGGLE or
PULSED.

Setting OFF

This mode always sets the outputs to a low value (0).

Input value

Output value

IEC09000330-2-en.vsd

IEC09000330 V2 EN-US

Figure 27: Sequence diagram for setting OFF

Setting TOGGLE

In this mode the output toggles each time the function key has been pressed for
more than 500ms. Note that the input attribute is reset each time the function block
executes. The function block execution is marked with a dotted line below.

118 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Input value
500ms 500ms 500ms

Output value

IEC09000331_1_en.vsd

IEC09000331 V2 EN-US

Figure 28: Sequence diagram for setting TOGGLE

Setting PULSED

In this mode the output sets high (1) when the function key has been pressed for
more than 500ms and remains high according to set pulse time. After this time the
output will go back to 0. The input attribute is reset when the function block detects
it being high and there is no output pulse.

Note that the third positive edge on the input attribute does not cause a pulse, since
the edge was applied during pulse output. A new pulse can only begin when the
output is zero; else the trigger edge is lost.

Input value
500ms 500ms 500ms 500ms

pulse time pulse time pulse time

Output value

IEC09000332_2_en.vsd

IEC09000332 V2 EN-US

Figure 29: Sequence diagram for setting PULSED

Input function GUID-8EA4AE21-7A74-403A-84AE-D5CEF9292A63 v2

All function keys work the same way: When the LHMI is configured so that a
certain function button is of type CONTROL, then the corresponding input on this
function block becomes active, and will light the yellow function button LED when
high. This functionality is active even if the function block operation setting is set
to off. It has been implemented this way for safety reasons; the idea is that the
function key LEDs should always reflect the actual status of any primary
equipment monitored by these LEDs.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 119

Technical manual
120
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 6
Wide area measurement system

Section 6 Wide area measurement system

6.1 C37.118 Phasor Measurement Data Streaming

Protocol Configuration PMUCONF GUID-747C6AD7-E6A1-466E-92D1-68865681F92F v1

6.1.1 Identification
GUID-1E140EA0-D198-443A-B445-47CEFD2E6134 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Configuration parameters for IEEE PMUCONF - -
1344 and C37.118 protocol

6.1.2 Functionality GUID-33694C62-A109-4D8F-9063-CEFA5D0E78BC v4

The IED supports the following IEEE synchrophasor standards:

• IEEE 1344-1995 (Both measurements and data communication)
• IEEE Std C37.118-2005 (Both measurements and data communication)
• IEEE Std C37.118.1–2011 and C37.118.1a-2014 (Measurements)
• IEEE Std C37.118.2-2011 (Data communication)

PMUCONF contains the PMU configuration parameters for both IEEE C37.118
and IEEE 1344 protocols. This means all the required settings and parameters in
order to establish and define a number of TCP and/or UDP connections with one or
more PDC clients (synchrophasor client). This includes port numbers, TCP/UDP IP
addresses, and specific settings for IEEE C37.118 as well as IEEE 1344 protocols.

6.1.3 Operation principle GUID-2608FBC4-9036-476A-942B-13452019BC11 v2

The Figure 30 demonstrates the communication configuration diagram. As can be

seen, the IED can support communication with maximum 8 TCP clients and 6 UDP
client groups, simultaneously. Every client can communicate with only one
instance of the two available PMUREPORT function block instances at a time. It
means that one client cannot communicate with both PMUREPORT:1 and
PMUREPORT:2 at the same time. However, multiple clients can communicate
with the same instance of PMUREPORT function block at the same time. For TCP
clients, each client can decide to communicate with an existing instance of
PMUREPORT by knowing the corresponding PMU ID for that PMUREPORT
instance. Whereas, for UDP clients, the PMUREPORT instance for each UDP
channel is defined by the user in the PMU and the client has to know the PMU ID
corresponding to that instance in order to be able to communicate. More

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 121

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Wide area measurement system

information is available in the sections Short guidance for the use of TCP and Short
guidance for the use of UDP.

IED
PMU ID

1344/C37.118
PMUREPORT: 1 PMUREPORT: 2 TCP Client_1
1344/C37.118
TCP Client_2
1344/C37.118
TCP Client_3
PMU ID: X
1344/C37.118
TCP IP TCP Client_4
PMU ID: Y 1344/C37.118
TCP Port TCP Client_5
1344/C37.118 TCP Client_6
1344/C37.118 TCP Client_7
1344/C37.118 TCP Client_8

PMU ID

PMUREPORT Instance: 1 or 2 1344/C37.118

UDP 1 Unicast/Multicast
UDP Client Group_1

PMUREPORT Instance: 1 or 2 1344/C37.118

UDP 2 Unicast/Multicast
UDP Client Group_2

PMUREPORT Instance: 1 or 2 1344/C37.118

UDP 3 Unicast/Multicast
UDP Client Group_3

PMUREPORT Instance: 1 or 2 1344/C37.118

UDP 4 Unicast/Multicast
UDP Client Group_4

PMUREPORT Instance: 1 or 2 1344/C37.118

UDP 5 Unicast/Multicast
UDP Client Group_5

PMUREPORT Instance: 1 or 2 1344/C37.118

UDP 6 Unicast/Multicast
UDP Client Group_6

IEC140000117-1.en.vsd
IEC140000117 V2 EN-US

Figure 30: The communication configuration (PMUCONF) structure in the IED

6.1.3.1 IEEE C37.118 Message Framework GUID-B8CC9D53-1CC5-43CC-9AF0-9B4D8CDC1922 v2

Four message types are defined in IEEE C37.118 standard: data, configuration,
header, and command frames. The first three message types are transmitted from
the PMU/PDC that serves as the data source, and the last one (command frame) is
received by the PMU/PDC.

These four message types are defined in IEEE C37.118 standard as follows:

• Data messages are the measurements made by a PMU.

• Configuration is a machine-readable message describing the data types,
calibration factors, and other metadata for the data that the PMU/PDC sends.
• Header information is human readable descriptive information sent from the
PMU/PDC but provided by the user.

There is a default header file, named "ieee1344header.txt", located in the "tools"

folder in the IED. The user is allowed to access and update this text file and write it
back to the IED using a FTP client (e.g. Filezilla).

If the user-defined (updated) header file is larger than 1400 bytes, then it will be
truncated to 1400 bytes in both IEEE C37.118 and IEEE1344 protocols.

122 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 6
Wide area measurement system

Both PMU reporting instances are using the same header file (ieee1344header.txt)
and this header file is used for both IEEE C37.118 and IEEE1344 protocols.

• Commands are machine-readable codes sent to the PMU/PDC for control or

configuration.

6.1.3.2 Short guidance for use of TCP GUID-700B2618-3719-4C17-A1F8-3B8F5834FE95 v3

Port 7001 is used by the SPA on TCP/IP (field service tool). If the
port is used for any other protocol, for example C37.118, the SPA
on TCP/IP stops working.

The IED supports 8 concurrent TCP connections using IEEE1344 and/or C37.118
protocol. The following parameters are used to define the TCP connection between
the IED and the TCP clients:
1. 1344TCPport– TCP port for control of IEEE 1344 data for TCP clients
2. C37.118TCPport – TCP port for control of IEEE C37.118 data for TCP clients

As can be seen, there are two separate parameters in the IED for selecting port
numbers for TCP connections; one for IEEE1344 protocol (1344TCPport) and
another one for C37.118 protocol (C37.118 TCPport). Client can communicate
with the IED over IEEE1344 protocol using the selected TCP port defined in
1344TCPport, and can communicate with the IED over IEEE C37.118 protocol
using the selected TCP port number in C37.118TCPport.

All the frames (the header frame, configuration frame, command frame and data
frame) are communicated over the same TCP port. The client can request (by
sending a command frame) a configuration and/or header via the TCP channel and
the requested configuration and/or header will be sent back to the client (as
Configuration frame/Header frame) over the same TCP channel.

Once the TCP client connects to the IED, the client has to necessarily send a
command frame to start a communication. As shown in Figure 30, the IED can
support 2 PMUREPORT instances and the client has to specify the PMU ID Code
in order to know which PMUREPORT data needs to be sent out to that client. In
this figure, X and Y are referring to the user-defined PMU ID Codes for
PMUREPORT instances 1 or 2, respectively. It is up to the TCP client to decide
which PMUREPORT function block shall communicate with that client. Upon
successful reception of the first command by the IED, the PMU ID will be
extracted out of the command; if there is a PMUREPORT instance configured in
the IED with matching PMU ID, then the client connection over TCP with the IED
will be established and further communication will take place. Otherwise, the
connection will be terminated and the TCPCtrlCfgErrCnt is incremented in the
PMU Diagnostics on the Local HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/
Communication/PMU diagnostics/PMUSTATUS:1

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 123

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Wide area measurement system

It is possible to turn off/on the TCP data communication by sending a IEEE1344 or

C37.118 command frame remotely from the client to the PMU containing
RTDOFF/RTDON command.

At any given point of time maximum of 8 TCP clients can be connected to the IED
for IEEE1344/C37.118 protocol. If there is an attempt made by the 9th client, the
connection to the new client will be terminated without influencing the connection
of the other clients already connected. A list of active clients can be seen on the
Local HMI in the diagnostics menu under Main menu/Diagnostics/
Communication/PMU diagnostics/PMUSTATUS:1

6.1.3.3 Short guidance for use of UDP GUID-F5BCBBF7-4EED-4E79-9E86-AF046D201BB1 v3

The IED supports maximum of 6 concurrent UDP streams. They can be

individually configured to send IEEE1344 or C37.118 data frames as unicast /
multicast. Note that [x] at the end of each parameter is referring to the UDP stream
number (UDP client group) and is a number between 1 and 6. Each of the 6 UDP
groups in the IED has the following settings:
1. SendDataUDP[x] – Enable / disable UDP data stream
2. ProtocolOnUDP[x] – Send IEEE1344 or C37.118 on UDP
3. PMUReportUDP[x] – Instance number of PMUREPORT function block that
must send data on this UDP stream (UDP client group[x])
4. UDPDestAddres[x] – UDP destination address for UDP client group[x]
(unicast / multicast address range)
5. UDPDestPort[x] – UDP destination port number for UDP client group[x]
6. TCPportUDPdataCtrl[x] – TCP port to control of data sent over UDP client
group[x], i.e. to receive commands and send configuration frames
7. SendCfgOnUDP[x] – Send configuration frame 2 (CFG-2) on UDP for client
group[x]

It is possible to turn off/on the UDP data communication either by setting the
parameter SendDataUDP[x] to Off/On locally in the PMU or by sending a C37.118
or IEEE1344 command frame (RTDOFF/RTDON) remotely from the client to the
PMU as defined in IEEE 1344/C37.118 standard.

However, such a remote control to stop the streams from the client is only possible
when the parameter SendDataUDP[x] is set to SetByProtocol. The command
RTDOFF/RTDON sent by the client is stored in the IED, i.e. if the IED is rebooted
for some reason, the state of the stream will remain the same.

If the parameter SendDataUDP[x] is set toOn the RTDOFF/RTDON commands

received from the clients are ignored in the IED.

It is recommended not to set the parameter SendDataUDP[x] to SetByProtocol in

case of a multicast. This is because if one of the clients sends the RTDOFF
command, all the clients will stop receiving the frames.

124 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 6
Wide area measurement system

The UDP implementation in the IED is a UDP_TCP. This means that by default,
only the data frames are sent out on UDP stream and the header frame,
configuration frame and command frame are sent over TCP. This makes the
communication more reliable especially since commands are sent over TCP which
performs request/acknowledgment exchange to ensure that no data (command in
this case) is lost.

However, by setting the parameter SendCfgOnUDP[x] to On, the configuration

frame 2 (CFG-2) of IEEEC37.118 data stream is cyclically sent on the
corresponding UDP stream (UDP client group[x]) once per minute. This is useful
in case of multicast UDP data stream when a lot of PMU clients are receiving the
same UDP stream from the same UDP group (UDP client group[x]).

As shown in Figure 30, there are maximum 2 instances of PMUREPORT function

blocks available in the IED. Each UDP client group[x] can only connect to one of
the PMUREPORT instances at the same time. This is defined in the PMU by the
parameter PMUReportUDP[x] which is used to define the instance number of
PMUREPORT function block that must send data on this UDP stream (UDP client
group[x]).

The data streams in the IED can be sent as unicast or as multicast. The user-defined
IP address set in the parameter UDPDestAddress[x] for each UDP stream defines if
it is a Unicast or Multicast. The address range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 (Class
D IP addresses) is treated as multicast. Any other IP address outside this range is
treated as unicast and the UDP data will be only sent to that specific unicast IP
address. In addition to UDPDestAddress[x] parameter, UDPDestPort[x] parameter
is used to define the UDP destination port number for UDP client group[x].

In case of multicast IP, it will be the network switches and routers that take care of
replicating the packet to reach multiple receivers. Multicast mechanism uses
network infrastructure efficiently by requiring the IED to send a packet only once,
even if it needs to be delivered to a large number of receivers.

If there are more than one UDP client group defined as multicast, the user shall set
different multicast IP addresses for each UDP group.

The PMU clients receiving the UDP frames can also connect to the IED to request
(command frame) config frame 1, config frame 2, config frame 3, or header frame,
and to disable/enable real time data. This can be done by connecting to the TCP
port selected in TCPportUDPdataCtrl[x] for each UDP group. This connection is
done using TCP. The IED allows 4 concurrent client connections for every
TCPportUDPdataCtrl[x] port (for each UDP client group[x]).

If the client tries to connect on TCPportUDPdataCtrl[x] port using a PMU-ID

other than what is configured for that PMUREPORT instance
(PMUReportUDP[x]), then that client is immediately disconnected and the
UDPCtrlCfgErrCnt is incremented in PMU Diagnostics on LHMI at Main menu/
Diagnostics/Communication/PMU diagnostics/PMUSTATUS:1

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 125

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Wide area measurement system

Even if the parameter SendDataUDP[x] is set to Off it is still possible for the
clients to connect on the TCP port and request the configuration frames.

6.1.4 Settings SEMOD119927-1 v2

PID-6710-SETTINGS v4

Table 47: PMUCONF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
1344TCPport 1024 - 65534 - 1 4711 TCP port for control of IEEE 1344 data
for TCP clients
C37.118TCPport 1024 - 65534 - 1 4712 TCP port for control of IEEE C37.118
data for TCP clients
TCPportUDPdataCtrl1 1024 - 65534 - 1 4713 TCP port for control of data sent over
UDP client group1
SendDataUDP1 Off - - Off Send data to UDP client group1
On
SetByProtocol
ProtocolOnUDP1 IEEE1344 - - C37.118 Select protocol for UDP client group1
C37.118
PMUReportUDP1 1-2 - 1 1 PMUREPORT instance used for UDP
client group1
UDPDestAddres1 0 - 16 IP 1 234.5.6.7 UDP destination address for UDP client
Address group1
UDPDestPort1 1024 - 65534 - 1 8910 UDP destination port for UDP client
group1
SendCfgOnUDP1 Off - - Off Send Config frame2 on UDP for group1
On
TCPportUDPdataCtrl2 1024 - 65534 - 1 4714 TCP port for control of data sent over
UDP client group2
SendDataUDP2 Off - - Off Send data to UDP client group2
On
SetByProtocol
ProtocolOnUDP2 IEEE1344 - - C37.118 Select protocol for UDP client group2
C37.118
PMUReportUDP2 1-2 - 1 1 PMUREPORT instance used for UDP
client group2
UDPDestAddres2 0 - 16 IP 1 234.5.6.8 UDP destination address for UDP client
Address group2
UDPDestPort2 1024 - 65534 - 1 8911 UDP destination port for UDP client
group2
SendCfgOnUDP2 Off - - Off Send Config frame2 on UDP for group2
On
TCPportUDPdataCtrl3 1024 - 65534 - 1 4715 TCP port for control of data sent over
UDP client group3
SendDataUDP3 Off - - Off Send data to UDP client group3
On
SetByProtocol
ProtocolOnUDP3 IEEE1344 - - C37.118 Select protocol for UDP client group3
C37.118
Table continues on next page

126 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 6
Wide area measurement system

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

PMUReportUDP3 1-2 - 1 1 PMUREPORT instance used for UDP
client group3
UDPDestAddres3 0 - 16 IP 1 234.5.6.9 UDP destination address for UDP client
Address group3
UDPDestPort3 1024 - 65534 - 1 8912 UDP destination port for UDP client
group3
SendCfgOnUDP3 Off - - Off Send Config frame2 on UDP for group3
On
TCPportUDPdataCtrl4 1024 - 65534 - 1 4716 TCP port for control of data sent over
UDP client group4
SendDataUDP4 Off - - Off Send data to UDP client group4
On
SetByProtocol
ProtocolOnUDP4 IEEE1344 - - C37.118 Select protocol for UDP client group4
C37.118
PMUReportUDP4 1-2 - 1 1 PMUREPORT instance used for UDP
client group4
UDPDestAddres4 0 - 16 IP 1 234.5.6.10 UDP destination address for UDP client
Address group4
UDPDestPort4 1024 - 65534 - 1 8913 UDP destination port for UDP client
group4
SendCfgOnUDP4 Off - - Off Send Config frame2 on UDP for group4
On
TCPportUDPdataCtrl5 1024 - 65534 - 1 4717 TCP port for control of data sent over
UDP client group5
SendDataUDP5 Off - - Off Send data to UDP client group5
On
SetByProtocol
ProtocolOnUDP5 IEEE1344 - - C37.118 Select protocol for UDP client group5
C37.118
PMUReportUDP5 1-2 - 1 1 PMUREPORT instance used for UDP
client group5
UDPDestAddres5 0 - 16 IP 1 234.5.6.11 UDP destination address for UDP client
Address group5
UDPDestPort5 1024 - 65534 - 1 8914 UDP destination port for UDP client
group5
SendCfgOnUDP5 Off - - Off Send Config frame2 on UDP for group5
On
TCPportUDPdataCtrl6 1024 - 65534 - 1 4718 TCP port for control of data sent over
UDP client group6
SendDataUDP6 Off - - Off Send data to UDP client group6
On
SetByProtocol
ProtocolOnUDP6 IEEE1344 - - C37.118 Select protocol for UDP client group6
C37.118
PMUReportUDP6 1-2 - 1 1 PMUREPORT instance used for UDP
client group6
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 127

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Wide area measurement system

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UDPDestAddres6 0 - 16 IP 1 234.5.6.12 UDP destination address for UDP client
Address group6
UDPDestPort6 1024 - 65534 - 1 8915 UDP destination port for UDP client
group6
SendCfgOnUDP6 Off - - Off Send Config frame2 on UDP for group6
On

6.2 Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and C37.118

PMUREPORT GUID-0C45D2FA-1B95-4FCA-B23B-A28C2770B817 v1

6.2.1 Identification
GUID-0090956B-48F1-4E8B-9A40-90044C71DF20 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and PMUREPORT - -
C37.118

6.2.2 Functionality GUID-8DF29209-252A-4E51-9F4A-B14B669E71AB v4

The phasor measurement reporting block moves the phasor calculations into an
IEEE C37.118 and/or IEEE 1344 synchrophasor frame format. The PMUREPORT
block contains parameters for PMU performance class and reporting rate, the
IDCODE and Global PMU ID, format of the data streamed through the protocol,
the type of reported synchrophasors, as well as settings for reporting analog and
digital signals.

The message generated by the PMUREPORT function block is set in accordance

with the IEEE C37.118 and/or IEEE 1344 standards.

There are settings for Phasor type (positive sequence, negative sequence or zero
sequence in case of 3-phase phasor and L1, L2 or L3 in case of single phase
phasor), PMU's Service class (Protection or Measurement), Phasor representation
(polar or rectangular) and the data types for phasor data, analog data and frequency
data.

Synchrophasor data can be reported to up to 8 clients over TCP and/or 6 UDP

group clients for multicast or unicast transmission of phasor data from the IED.
More information regarding synchrophasor communication structure and
TCP/UDP configuration is available in section C37.118 Phasor Measurement Data
Streaming Protocol Configuration.

Multiple PMU functionality can be configured in the IED, which can stream out
same or different data at different reporting rates or different performance (service)
classes. There are 2 instances of PMU functionality available in the IED. Each

128 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 6
Wide area measurement system

instance of PMU functionality includes a set of PMU reporting function blocks

tagged by the same instance number (1 or 2). As shown in the following figures,
each set of PMU reporting function blocks includes PMUREPORT,
PHASORREPORT1-4, ANALOGREPORT1-3, and BINARYREPORT1-3
function blocks. In general, each instance of PMU functionality has 32
configurable phasor channels (PHASORREPORT1–4 blocks), 24 analog channels
(ANALOGREPORT1-3 blocks), and 28 digital channels (24 digital-report channels
in BINARYREPORT1-3 and 4 trigger-report channels in PMUREPORT function
block). Special rules shall be taken into account in PCM600 for Application
Configuration and Parameter Settings of multiple PMUREPORT blocks. These
rules are explained in the Application Manual in section PMU Report Function
Blocks Connection Rules.

Figure 31 shows both instances of the PMUREPORT function block. As seen, each
PMUREPORT instance has 4 predefined binary input signals corresponding to the
Bits 03-00: Trigger Reason defined in STAT field of the Data frame in IEEE
C37.118.2 standard. These are predefined inputs for Frequency Trigger, Rate of
Change of Frequency trigger, Magnitude High and Magnitude Low triggers.

IEC140000118-2-en.vsd
IEC140000118 V2 EN-US

Figure 31: Multiple instances of PMUREPORT function block

Figure 32 shows both instances of the PHASORREPORT function blocks. The

instance number is visible in the bottom of each function block. For each instance,
there are four separate PHASORREPORT blocks including 32 configurable phasor
channels (8 phasor channels in each PHASORREPORT block). Each phasor
channel can be configured as a 3-phase (symmetrical components positive/
negative/zero) or single-phase phasor (L1/L2/L3).

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 129

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Wide area measurement system

IEC140000119-2-en.vsd
IEC140000119 V2 EN-US

Figure 32: Multiple instances of PHASORREPORT blocks

Figure 33 shows both instances of ANALOGREPORT function blocks. The

instance number is visible in the bottom of each function block. For each instance,
there are three separate ANALOGREPORT blocks capable of reporting up to 24
Analog signals (8 Analog signals in each ANALOGREPORT block). These can
include for example transfer of active and reactive power or reporting the
milliampere input signals to the PDC clients as defined in IEEE C37.118 data
frame format.

IEC140000120-2-en.vsd
IEC140000120 V2 EN-US

Figure 33: Multiple instances of ANALOGREPORT blocks

Figure 34 shows both instances of BINARYREPORT function blocks. The instance

number is visible in the bottom of each function block. For each instance, there are
three separate BINARYREPORT blocks capable of reporting up to 24 Binary
signals (8 Binary signals in each BINARYREPORT block). These binary signals
can be for example dis-connector or breaker position indications or internal/
external protection alarm signals.

130 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 6
Wide area measurement system

IEC140000121-2-en.vsd
IEC140000121 V2 EN-US

Figure 34: Multiple instances of BINARYREPORT blocks

6.2.3 Function block GUID-45150D7E-3231-4661-A8B4-17364AF25035 v2

PMUREPORT
BLOCK TIMESTAT
^FREQTRIG
^DFDTTRIG
^MAGHIGHTRIG
^MAGLOWTRIG

IEC140000102-1_en.vsd
IEC140000102 V1 EN-US

ANALOGREPORT1
^ANALOG1
^ANALOG2
^ANALOG3
^ANALOG4
^ANALOG5
^ANALOG6
^ANALOG7
^ANALOG8
IEC140000107-1_en.vsd
IEC140000107 V1 EN-US

ANALOGREPORT2
^ANALOG9
^ANALOG10
^ANALOG11
^ANALOG12
^ANALOG13
^ANALOG14
^ANALOG15
^ANALOG16
IEC140000108-1_en.vsd
IEC140000108 V1 EN-US

ANALOGREPORT3
^ANALOG17
^ANALOG18
^ANALOG19
^ANALOG20
^ANALOG21
^ANALOG22
^ANALOG23
^ANALOG24

IEC140000109-1_en.vsd
IEC140000109 V1 EN-US

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 131

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Wide area measurement system

BINARYREPORT1
^BINARY1
^BINARY2
^BINARY3
^BINARY4
^BINARY5
^BINARY6
^BINARY7
^BINARY8
IEC140000110-1_en.vsd
IEC140000110 V1 EN-US

BINARYREPORT2
^BINARY9
^BINARY10
^BINARY11
^BINARY12
^BINARY13
^BINARY14
^BINARY15
^BINARY16

IEC140000111-1_en.vsd
IEC140000111 V1 EN-US

BINARYREPORT3
^BINARY17
^BINARY18
^BINARY19
^BINARY20
^BINARY21
^BINARY22
^BINARY23
^BINARY24
IEC140000112-1_en.vsd
IEC140000112 V1 EN-US

PHASORREPORT1
^PHASOR1
^PHASOR2
^PHASOR3
^PHASOR4
^PHASOR5
^PHASOR6
^PHASOR7
^PHASOR8

IEC140000103-1_en.vsd
IEC140000103 V1 EN-US

PHASORREPORT2
^PHASOR9
^PHASOR10
^PHASOR11
^PHASOR12
^PHASOR13
^PHASOR14
^PHASOR15
^PHASOR16

IEC140000104-1_en.vsd
IEC140000104 V1 EN-US

132 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 6
Wide area measurement system

PHASORREPORT3
^PHASOR17
^PHASOR18
^PHASOR19
^PHASOR20
^PHASOR21
^PHASOR22
^PHASOR23
^PHASOR24

IEC140000105-1_en.vsd
IEC140000105 V1 EN-US

PHASORREPORT4
^PHASOR25
^PHASOR26
^PHASOR27
^PHASOR28
^PHASOR29
^PHASOR30
^PHASOR31
^PHASOR32

IEC140000106-1_en.vsd
IEC140000106 V1 EN-US

6.2.4 Signals SEMOD55830-1 v2

PID-6244-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 48: PMUREPORT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals
FREQTRIG BOOLEAN 0 Frequency trigger
DFDTTRIG BOOLEAN 0 Rate of change of frequency trigger
MAGHIGHTRIG BOOLEAN 0 Magnitude high trigger
MAGLOWTRIG BOOLEAN 0 Magnitude low trigger

PID-6244-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 49: PMUREPORT Output signals

Name Type Description
TIMESTAT BOOLEAN Time synchronization status

PID-6238-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 50: ANALOGREPORT1 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ANALOG1 REAL 0.0 Analog input channel 1
ANALOG2 REAL 0.0 Analog input channel 2
ANALOG3 REAL 0.0 Analog input channel 3
ANALOG4 REAL 0.0 Analog input channel 4
ANALOG5 REAL 0.0 Analog input channel 5
ANALOG6 REAL 0.0 Analog input channel 6
ANALOG7 REAL 0.0 Analog input channel 7
ANALOG8 REAL 0.0 Analog input channel 8

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 133

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Wide area measurement system

PID-6239-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 51: ANALOGREPORT2 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ANALOG9 REAL 0.0 Analog input channel 9
ANALOG10 REAL 0.0 Analog input channel 10
ANALOG11 REAL 0.0 Analog input channel 11
ANALOG12 REAL 0.0 Analog input channel 12
ANALOG13 REAL 0.0 Analog input channel 13
ANALOG14 REAL 0.0 Analog input channel 14
ANALOG15 REAL 0.0 Analog input channel 15
ANALOG16 REAL 0.0 Analog input channel 16

PID-6240-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 52: ANALOGREPORT3 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ANALOG17 REAL 0.0 Analog input channel 17
ANALOG18 REAL 0.0 Analog input channel 18
ANALOG19 REAL 0.0 Analog input channel 19
ANALOG20 REAL 0.0 Analog input channel 20
ANALOG21 REAL 0.0 Analog input channel 21
ANALOG22 REAL 0.0 Analog input channel 22
ANALOG23 REAL 0.0 Analog input channel 23
ANALOG24 REAL 0.0 Analog input channel 24

PID-6241-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 53: BINARYREPORT1 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BINARY1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel1
BINARY2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel2
BINARY3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel3
BINARY4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel4
BINARY5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel5
BINARY6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel6
BINARY7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel7
BINARY8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel8

134 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 6
Wide area measurement system

PID-6242-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 54: BINARYREPORT2 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BINARY9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 9
BINARY10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 10
BINARY11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 11
BINARY12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 12
BINARY13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 13
BINARY14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 14
BINARY15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 15
BINARY16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 16

PID-6243-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 55: BINARYREPORT3 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BINARY17 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 17
BINARY18 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 18
BINARY19 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 19
BINARY20 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 20
BINARY21 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 21
BINARY22 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 22
BINARY23 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 23
BINARY24 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input channel 24

PID-6252-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 56: PHASORREPORT1 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
PHASOR1 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor1
SIGNAL
PHASOR2 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor2
SIGNAL
PHASOR3 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor3
SIGNAL
PHASOR4 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor4
SIGNAL
PHASOR5 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor 5
SIGNAL
PHASOR6 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor6
SIGNAL
PHASOR7 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor7
SIGNAL
PHASOR8 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor8
SIGNAL

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 135

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Wide area measurement system

PID-6253-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 57: PHASORREPORT2 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
PHASOR9 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor9
SIGNAL
PHASOR10 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor10
SIGNAL
PHASOR11 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor11
SIGNAL
PHASOR12 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor12
SIGNAL
PHASOR13 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor13
SIGNAL
PHASOR14 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor14
SIGNAL
PHASOR15 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor15
SIGNAL
PHASOR16 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor16
SIGNAL

PID-6254-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 58: PHASORREPORT3 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
PHASOR17 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor17
SIGNAL
PHASOR18 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor18
SIGNAL
PHASOR19 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor19
SIGNAL
PHASOR20 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor20
SIGNAL
PHASOR21 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor21
SIGNAL
PHASOR22 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor22
SIGNAL
PHASOR23 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor23
SIGNAL
PHASOR24 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor24
SIGNAL

136 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 6
Wide area measurement system

PID-6255-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 59: PHASORREPORT4 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
PHASOR25 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor25
SIGNAL
PHASOR26 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor26
SIGNAL
PHASOR27 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor27
SIGNAL
PHASOR28 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor28
SIGNAL
PHASOR29 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor29
SIGNAL
PHASOR30 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor30
SIGNAL
PHASOR31 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor31
SIGNAL
PHASOR32 GROUP - Group signal Input for Phasor32
SIGNAL

6.2.5 Settings SEMOD119927-1 v2

PID-6244-SETTINGS v2

Table 60: PMUREPORT Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation mode off/on
On
SvcClass P class - - P class Service class
M class
Global_PMU_ID 0 - 16 - 1 0 Global PMU Identifier (G_PMU_ID)
PMUdataStreamIDCOD 1 - 65534 - 1 1 PMU Data Stream ID Number (IDCODE)
E
PhasorFormat Rectangular - - Rectangular Select phasor format
Polar
PhasorDataType Float - - Float Select phasor datatype
Integer
FrequencyDataType Float - - Float Select frequency datatype
Integer
AnalogDataType Float - - Float Select analog data type
Integer
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 137

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Wide area measurement system

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SendFreqInfo Off - - On Send frequency and rate of change of
On frequency information
ReportRate 10/10 fr/s - - 10/10 fr/s Phasor data report rate
(60/50Hz) (60/50Hz)
12/10 fr/s
(60/50Hz)
15/10 fr/s
(60/50Hz)
20/25 fr/s
(60/50Hz)
30/25 fr/s
(60/50Hz)
60/50 fr/s
(60/50Hz)
120/100 fr/s
(60/50Hz)
240/200 fr/s
(60/50Hz)
RptTimetag FirstSample - - MiddleSample Method of phasor timetag
MiddleSample
LastSample

PID-6238-SETTINGS v2

Table 61: ANALOGREPORT1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Analog1Range 3277.0 - - 0.1 3277.0 (+/-) Range for scaling analog 1 in
10000000000.0 integer format
Analog1UnitType Single point-on- - - RMS of analog Unit type for analog 1
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
Analog2Range 3277.0 - - 0.1 3277.0 (+/-) Range for scaling analog 2 in
10000000000.0 integer format
Analog2UnitType Single point-on- - - RMS of analog Unit type for analog 2
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
Analog3Range 3277.0 - - 0.1 3277.0 (+/-) Range for scaling analog 3 in
10000000000.0 integer format
Analog3UnitType Single point-on- - - RMS of analog Unit type for analog 3
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
Analog4Range 3277.0 - - 0.1 3277.0 (+/-) Range for scaling analog 4 in
10000000000.0 integer format
Table continues on next page

138 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 6
Wide area measurement system

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Analog4UnitType Single point-on- - - RMS of analog Unit type for analog 4
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
Analog5Range 3277.0 - - 0.1 3277.0 (+/-) Range for scaling analog 5 in
10000000000.0 integer format
Analog5UnitType Single point-on- - - RMS of analog Unit type for analog 5
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
Analog6Range 3277.0 - - 0.1 3277.0 (+/-) Range for scaling analog 6 in
10000000000.0 integer format
Analog6UnitType Single point-on- - - RMS of analog Unit type for analog 6
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
Analog7Range 3277.0 - - 0.1 3277.0 (+/-) Range for scaling analog 7 in
10000000000.0 integer format
Analog7UnitType Single point-on- - - RMS of analog Unit type for analog 7
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
Analog8Range 3277.0 - - 0.1 3277.0 (+/-) Range for scaling analog 8 in
10000000000.0 integer format
Analog8UnitType Single point-on- - - RMS of analog Unit type for analog 8
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input

PID-6239-SETTINGS v2

Table 62: ANALOGREPORT2 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Analog9Range 3277.0 - - 0.1 3277.0 (+/-) Range for scaling analog 9 in
10000000000.0 integer format
Analog9UnitType Single point-on- - - RMS of analog Unit type for analog 9
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
Analog10Range 3277.0 - - 0.1 3277.0 (+/-) Range for scaling analog 10 in
10000000000.0 integer format
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 139

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Wide area measurement system

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Analog10UnitType Single point-on- - - RMS of analog Unit type for analog 10
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
Analog11Range 3277.0 - - 0.1 3277.0 (+/-) Range for scaling analog 11 in
10000000000.0 integer format
Analog11UnitType Single point-on- - - RMS of analog Unit type for analog 11
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
Analog12Range 3277.0 - - 0.1 3277.0 (+/-) Range for scaling analog 12 in
10000000000.0 integer format
Analog12UnitType Single point-on- - - RMS of analog Unit type for analog 12
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
Analog13Range 3277.0 - - 0.1 3277.0 (+/-) Range for scaling analog 13 in
10000000000.0 integer format
Analog13UnitType Single point-on- - - RMS of analog Unit type for analog 13
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
Analog14Range 3277.0 - - 0.1 3277.0 (+/-) Range for scaling analog 14 in
10000000000.0 integer format
Analog14UnitType Single point-on- - - RMS of analog Unit type for analog 14
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
Analog15Range 3277.0 - - 0.1 3277.0 (+/-) Range for scaling analog 15 in
10000000000.0 integer format
Analog15UnitType Single point-on- - - RMS of analog Unit type for analog 15
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
Analog16Range 3277.0 - - 0.1 3277.0 (+/-) Range for scaling analog 16 in
10000000000.0 integer format
Analog16UnitType Single point-on- - - RMS of analog Unit type for analog 16
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input

140 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 6
Wide area measurement system

PID-6240-SETTINGS v2

Table 63: ANALOGREPORT3 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Analog17Range 3277.0 - - 0.1 3277.0 (+/-) Range for scaling analog 17 in
10000000000.0 integer format
Analog17UnitType Single point-on- - - RMS of analog Unit type for analog 17
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
Analog18Range 3277.0 - - 0.1 3277.0 (+/-) Range for scaling analog 18 in
10000000000.0 integer format
Analog18UnitType Single point-on- - - RMS of analog Unit type for analog 18
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
Analog19Range 3277.0 - - 0.1 3277.0 (+/-) Range for scaling analog 19 in
10000000000.0 integer format
Analog19UnitType Single point-on- - - RMS of analog Unit type for analog 19
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
Analog20Range 3277.0 - - 0.1 3277.0 (+/-) Range for scaling analog 20 in
10000000000.0 integer format
Analog20UnitType Single point-on- - - RMS of analog Unit type for analog 20
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
Analog21Range 3277.0 - - 0.1 3277.0 (+/-) Range for scaling analog 21 in
10000000000.0 integer format
Analog21UnitType Single point-on- - - RMS of analog Unit type for analog 21
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
Analog22Range 3277.0 - - 0.1 3277.0 (+/-) Range for scaling analog 22 in
10000000000.0 integer format
Analog22UnitType Single point-on- - - RMS of analog Unit type for analog 22
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
Analog23Range 3277.0 - - 0.1 3277.0 (+/-) Range for scaling analog 23 in
10000000000.0 integer format
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 141

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Wide area measurement system

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Analog23UnitType Single point-on- - - RMS of analog Unit type for analog 23
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input
Analog24Range 3277.0 - - 0.1 3277.0 (+/-) Range for scaling analog 24 in
10000000000.0 integer format
Analog24UnitType Single point-on- - - RMS of analog Unit type for analog 24
wave input
RMS of analog
input
Peak of analog
input

PID-6252-SETTINGS v2

Table 64: PHASORREPORT1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Phasor2 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor2
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor3 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor3
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor4 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor4
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor5 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for phasor5
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor6 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor6
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor7 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor7
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Table continues on next page

142 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 6
Wide area measurement system

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Phasor8 L1 - - POSSEQ Group selector for phasor8
L2
L3
POSSEQ
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
Phasor1Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 1
On
Phasor1UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 1 for automatic frequency
On source selection
Phasor2Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 2
On
Phasor2UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 2 for automatic frequency
On source selection
Phasor3Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 3
On
Phasor3UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 3 for automatic frequency
On source selection
Phasor4Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 4
On
Phasor4UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 4 for automatic frequency
On source selection
Phasor5Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 5
On
Phasor5UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 5 for automatic frequency
On source selection
Phasor6Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 6
On
Phasor6UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 6 for automatic frequency
On source selection
Phasor7Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 7
On
Phasor7UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 7 for automatic frequency
On source selection
Phasor8Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 8
On
Phasor8UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 8 for automatic frequency
On source selection
Phasor1 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group Selector for Phasor1
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 143

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Wide area measurement system

PID-6253-SETTINGS v2

Table 65: PHASORREPORT2 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Phasor9 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor9
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor10 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor10
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor11 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor 11
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor12 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor12
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor13 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor13
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor14 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor14
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor15 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor15
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor16 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor16
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor9Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 9
On
Phasor9UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 9 for automatic frequency
On source selection
Phasor10Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 10
On
Table continues on next page

144 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 6
Wide area measurement system

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Phasor10UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 10 for automatic
On frequency source selection
Phasor11Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 11
On
Phasor11UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 11 for automatic
On frequency source selection
Phasor12Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 12
On
Phasor12UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 12 for automatic
On frequency source selection
Phasor13Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 13
On
Phasor13UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 13 for automatic
On frequency source selection
Phasor14Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 14
On
Phasor14UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 14 for automatic
On frequency source selection
Phasor15Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 15
On
Phasor15UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 15 for automatic
On frequency source selection
Phasor16Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 16
On
Phasor16UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 16 for automatic
On frequency source selection

PID-6254-SETTINGS v2

Table 66: PHASORREPORT3 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Phasor17 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor17
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor18 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor18
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor19 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor19
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 145

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Wide area measurement system

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Phasor20 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor20
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor21 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor21
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor22 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor22
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor23 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor23
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor24 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor24
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor17Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 17
On
Phasor17UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 17 for automatic
On frequency source selection
Phasor18Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 18
On
Phasor18UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 18 for automatic
On frequency source selection
Phasor19Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 19
On
Phasor19UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 19 for automatic
On frequency source selection
Phasor20Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 20
On
Phasor20UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 20 for automatic
On frequency source selection
Phasor21Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 21
On
Phasor21UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 21 for automatic
On frequency source selection
Phasor22Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 22
On
Phasor22UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 22 for automatic
On frequency source selection
Table continues on next page

146 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 6
Wide area measurement system

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Phasor23Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 23
On
Phasor23UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 23 for automatic
On frequency source selection
Phasor24Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 24
On
Phasor24UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 24 for automatic
On frequency source selection

PID-6255-SETTINGS v2

Table 67: PHASORREPORT4 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Phasor25 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor25
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor26 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor26
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor27 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor27
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor28 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor28
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor29 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor29
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor30 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor30
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor31 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor31
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 147

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Wide area measurement system

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Phasor32 POSSEQ - - POSSEQ Group selector for Phasor32
NEGSEQ
ZEROSEQ
L1
L2
L3
Phasor25Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 25
On
Phasor25UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 25 for automatic
On frequency source selection
Phasor26Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 26
On
Phasor26UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 26 for automatic
On frequency source selection
Phasor27Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 27
On
Phasor27UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 27 for automatic
On frequency source selection
Phasor28Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 28
On
Phasor28UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 28 for automatic
On frequency source selection
Phasor29Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 29
On
Phasor29UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 29 for automatic
On frequency source selection
Phasor30Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 30
On
Phasor30UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 30 for automatic
On frequency source selection
Phasor31Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 31
On
Phasor32Report Off - - On Reporting phasor 32
On
Phasor31UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 31 for automatic
On frequency source selection
Phasor32UseFreqSrc Off - - On Include phasor 32 for automatic
On frequency source selection

148 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 6
Wide area measurement system

6.2.6 Monitored data

PID-6244-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 68: PMUREPORT Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TIMESTAT BOOLEAN 1=Ready - Time synchronization
0=Fail status
FREQ REAL - Hz Frequency
FREQGRAD REAL - - Rate of change of
frequency
FREQREFCHSEL INTEGER - - Frequency reference
channel number
selected
FREQREFCHERR BOOLEAN 0=Freq ref not - Frequency reference
available channel error
1=Freq ref error
2=Freq ref
available
FREQTRIG BOOLEAN - - Frequency trigger
DFDTTRIG BOOLEAN - - Rate of change of
frequency trigger
MAGHIGHTRIG BOOLEAN - - Magnitude high trigger
MAGLOWTRIG BOOLEAN - - Magnitude low trigger

PID-6238-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 69: ANALOGREPORT1 Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
ANALOG1 REAL - - Analog input channel 1
ANALOG2 REAL - - Analog input channel 2
ANALOG3 REAL - - Analog input channel 3
ANALOG4 REAL - - Analog input channel 4
ANALOG5 REAL - - Analog input channel 5
ANALOG6 REAL - - Analog input channel 6
ANALOG7 REAL - - Analog input channel 7
ANALOG8 REAL - - Analog input channel 8

PID-6239-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 70: ANALOGREPORT2 Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
ANALOG9 REAL - - Analog input channel 9
ANALOG10 REAL - - Analog input channel 10
ANALOG11 REAL - - Analog input channel 11
ANALOG12 REAL - - Analog input channel 12
ANALOG13 REAL - - Analog input channel 13
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 149

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Wide area measurement system

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

ANALOG14 REAL - - Analog input channel 14
ANALOG15 REAL - - Analog input channel 15
ANALOG16 REAL - - Analog input channel 16

PID-6240-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 71: ANALOGREPORT3 Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
ANALOG17 REAL - - Analog input channel 17
ANALOG18 REAL - - Analog input channel 18
ANALOG19 REAL - - Analog input channel 19
ANALOG20 REAL - - Analog input channel 20
ANALOG21 REAL - - Analog input channel 21
ANALOG22 REAL - - Analog input channel 22
ANALOG23 REAL - - Analog input channel 23
ANALOG24 REAL - - Analog input channel 24

PID-6241-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 72: BINARYREPORT1 Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
BINARY1 BOOLEAN - - Binary input channel 1
BINARY2 BOOLEAN - - Binary input channel 2
BINARY3 BOOLEAN - - Binary input channel 3
BINARY4 BOOLEAN - - Binary input channel 4
BINARY5 BOOLEAN - - Binary input channel 5
BINARY6 BOOLEAN - - Binary input channel 6
BINARY7 BOOLEAN - - Binary input channel 7
BINARY8 BOOLEAN - - Binary input channel 8

PID-6242-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 73: BINARYREPORT2 Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
BINARY9 BOOLEAN - - Binary input channel 9
BINARY10 BOOLEAN - - Binary input channel 10
BINARY11 BOOLEAN - - Binary input channel 11
BINARY12 BOOLEAN - - Binary input channel 12
BINARY13 BOOLEAN - - Binary input channel 13
BINARY14 BOOLEAN - - Binary input channel 14
BINARY15 BOOLEAN - - Binary input channel 15
BINARY16 BOOLEAN - - Binary input channel 16

150 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 6
Wide area measurement system

PID-6243-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 74: BINARYREPORT3 Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
BINARY17 BOOLEAN - - Binary input channel 17
BINARY18 BOOLEAN - - Binary input channel 18
BINARY19 BOOLEAN - - Binary input channel 19
BINARY20 BOOLEAN - - Binary input channel 20
BINARY21 BOOLEAN - - Binary input channel 21
BINARY22 BOOLEAN - - Binary input channel 22
BINARY23 BOOLEAN - - Binary input channel 23
BINARY24 BOOLEAN - - Binary input channel 24

PID-6252-MONITOREDDATA v3

Table 75: PHASORREPORT1 Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
PHASOR1 REAL - - Phasor 1 amplitude
PHASOR1 REAL - deg Phasor 1 angle
PHASOR2 REAL - - Phasor 2 amplitude
PHASOR2 REAL - deg Phasor 2 angle
PHASOR3 REAL - - Phasor 3 amplitude
PHASOR3 REAL - deg Phasor 3 angle
PHASOR4 REAL - - Phasor 4 amplitude
PHASOR4 REAL - deg Phasor 4 angle
PHASOR5 REAL - - Phasor 5 amplitude
PHASOR5 REAL - deg Phasor 5 angle
PHASOR6 REAL - - Phasor 6 amplitude
PHASOR6 REAL - deg Phasor 6 angle
PHASOR7 REAL - - Phasor 7 amplitude
PHASOR7 REAL - deg Phasor 7 angle
PHASOR8 REAL - - Phasor 8 amplitude
PHASOR8 REAL - deg Phasor 8 angle

PID-6253-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 76: PHASORREPORT2 Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
PHASOR9 REAL - - Phasor 9 amplitude
PHASOR9 REAL - deg Phasor 9 angle
PHASOR10 REAL - - Phasor 10 amplitude
PHASOR10 REAL - deg Phasor 10 angle
PHASOR11 REAL - - Phasor 11 amplitude
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 151

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Wide area measurement system

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

PHASOR11 REAL - deg Phasor 11 angle
PHASOR12 REAL - - Phasor 12 amplitude
PHASOR12 REAL - deg Phasor 12 angle
PHASOR13 REAL - - Phasor 13 amplitude
PHASOR13 REAL - deg Phasor 13 angle
PHASOR14 REAL - - Phasor 14 amplitude
PHASOR14 REAL - deg Phasor 14 angle
PHASOR15 REAL - - Phasor 15 amplitude
PHASOR15 REAL - deg Phasor 15 angle
PHASOR16 REAL - - Phasor 16 amplitude
PHASOR16 REAL - deg Phasor 16 angle

PID-6254-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 77: PHASORREPORT3 Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
PHASOR17 REAL - - Phasor 17 amplitude
PHASOR17 REAL - deg Phasor 17 angle
PHASOR18 REAL - - Phasor 18 amplitude
PHASOR18 REAL - deg Phasor 18 angle
PHASOR19 REAL - - Phasor 19 amplitude
PHASOR19 REAL - deg Phasor 19 angle
PHASOR20 REAL - - Phasor 20 amplitude
PHASOR20 REAL - deg Phasor 20 angle
PHASOR21 REAL - - Phasor 21 amplitude
PHASOR21 REAL - deg Phasor 21 angle
PHASOR22 REAL - - Phasor 22 amplitude
PHASOR22 REAL - deg Phasor 22 angle
PHASOR23 REAL - - Phasor 23 amplitude
PHASOR23 REAL - deg Phasor 23 angle
PHASOR24 REAL - - Phasor 24 amplitude
PHASOR24 REAL - deg Phasor 24 angle

PID-6255-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 78: PHASORREPORT4 Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
PHASOR25 REAL - - Phasor 25 amplitude
PHASOR25 REAL - deg Phasor 25 angle
PHASOR26 REAL - - Phasor 26 amplitude
PHASOR26 REAL - deg Phasor 26 angle
Table continues on next page

152 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 6
Wide area measurement system

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

PHASOR27 REAL - - Phasor 27 amplitude
PHASOR27 REAL - deg Phasor 27 angle
PHASOR28 REAL - - Phasor 28 amplitude
PHASOR28 REAL - deg Phasor 28 angle
PHASOR29 REAL - - Phasor 29 amplitude
PHASOR29 REAL - deg Phasor 29 angle
PHASOR30 REAL - - Phasor 30 amplitude
PHASOR30 REAL - deg Phasor 30 angle
PHASOR31 REAL - - Phasor 31 amplitude
PHASOR31 REAL - deg Phasor 31 angle
PHASOR32 REAL - - Phasor 32 amplitude
PHASOR32 REAL - deg Phasor 32 angle

6.2.7 Operation principle GUID-EB2B9096-2F9D-4264-B2D2-8D9DC65697E8 v3

The Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) features three main functional principles:

• To measure the power system related AC quantities (voltage, current) and to

calculate the phasor representation of these quantities.
• To synchronize the calculated phasors with the UTC by time-tagging, in order
to make synchrophasors (time is reference).
• To publish all phasor-related data by means of TCP/IP or UDP/IP, following
the standard IEEE C37.118 protocol.

The C37.118 standard imposes requirements on the devices and describes the
communication message structure and data. The PMU complies with all the
standard requirements with a specific attention to the Total Vector Error (TVE)
requirement. The TVE is calculated using the following equation:

2
( X r ( n ) - X r )2 + ( X i ( n ) - X i )
TVE =
X r2 + X i2
GUID-80D9B1EA-A770-4F50-9530-61644B4DEBBE V1 EN-US (Equation 1)

where,

Xr(n) and Xi(n) are the measured values

Xr and Xi are the theoretical values

In order to comply with TVE requirements, special calibration is done in the

factory on the analog input channels of the PMU, resulting in increased accuracy of
the measurements. The IEEE C37.118 standard also imposes a variety of steady

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 153

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Wide area measurement system

state and dynamic requirements which are fulfilled in the IED with the help of high
accuracy measurements and advanced filtering techniques.

Figure 35 shows an overview of the PMU functionality and operation. In this

figure, only one instance of PMUREPORT (PMUREPORT1) is shown. Note that
connection of different signals to the PMUREPORT, in this figure, is only an
example and the actual connections and reported signals on the IEEEC37.118/1344
can be defined by the user.

U/I samples

PMUREPORT1

MU PHASOR1
PHASOR2 8 TCP
U IEEEC37.118 / 1344
TRM SMAI messages NUM
I
U 6 UDC
TRM PHASOR32
I

ANALOG1
I/P MIM SMMI ANALOG2

MEAS. ANALOG24

BINARY1
BINARY2
BIM

OR
BINARY24
PROTECTION

GPS / OP
IRIG-B FREQTRIG
UP
DFDTTRIG
OC
PPS time data MAGHIGHTRIG
MAGLOWTRIG
UV

IEC140000146-1-en.vsd

IEC140000146 V2 EN-US

Figure 35: Overview of reporting functionality (PMUREPORT)

The TRM modules are individually AC-calibrated in the factory. The calibration
data is stored in the prepared area of the TRM EEProm. The pre-processor block is
extended with calibration compensation and a new angle reference method based
on timestamps. The AI3P output of the preprocessor block is used to provide the
required information for each respective PMUREPORT phasor channel. More
information about preprocessor block is available in the section Signal matrix for
analog inputs SMAI.

6.2.7.1 Frequency reporting GUID-4F3BA7C7-8C9B-4266-9F72-AFB139E9DC21 v2

By using patented algorithm the IED can track the power system frequency in quite
wide range from 9 Hz to 95 Hz. In order to do that, the three-phase voltage signal

154 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 6
Wide area measurement system

shall be connected to the IED. Then IED can adapt its filtering algorithm in order
to properly measure phasors of all current and voltage signals connected to the
IED. This feature is essential for proper operation of the PMUREPORT function or
for protection during generator start-up and shut-down procedure.

This adaptive filtering is ensured by proper configuration and settings of all

relevant pre-processing blocks, see Signal matrix for analog inputs in the
Application manual. Note that in all preconfigured IEDs such configuration and
settings are already made and the three-phase voltage are used as master for
frequency tracking. With such settings the IED will be able to properly estimate the
magnitude and the phase angle of measured current and voltage phasors in this
wide frequency range.

One of the important functions of a PMU is reporting a very accurate system

frequency to the PDC client. In the IED, each of the PMUREPORT instances is
able to report an accurate frequency. Each voltage-connected preprocessor block
(SMAI block) delivers the frequency data, derived from the analog input AC
voltage values, to the respective voltage phasor channel. Every phasor channel has
a user-settable parameter (PhasorXUseFreqSrc) to be used as a source of frequency
data for reporting to the PDC client. It is very important to set this parameter to On
for the voltage-connected phasor channels. There is an automatic frequency source
selection logic to ensure an uninterrupted reporting of the system frequency to the
PDC client. In this frequency source selection logic, the following general rules are
applied:
• Only the voltage phasor channels are used
• The phasor channel with a lower channel number is prioritized to the one with
a higher channel number

As a result, the first voltage phasor is always the one delivering the system
frequency to the PDC client and if, by any reason, this voltage gets disconnected
then the next available voltage phasor is automatically used as the frequency source
and so on. If the first voltage phasor comes back, since it has a higher priority
compare to the currently selected phasor channel, after 500 ms it will be
automatically selected again as the frequency source. There is also an output
available on the component which shows if the reference frequency is good, error
or reference channel unavailable.

It is possible to monitor the status of the frequency reference channel (frequency

source) for the respective PMUREPORT instance on Local HMI under Test/
Function status/Communication/Station Communication/PMU Report/
PMUREPORT:1/Outputs, where the FREQREFCHSEL output shows the
selected channel as the reference for frequency and FREQREFCHERR output
states if the reference frequency is good, or if there is an error or if the reference
channel is unavailable. For more information refer to the table PMUREPORT
monitored data.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 155

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Wide area measurement system

PID-6244-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 79: PMUREPORT Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TIMESTAT BOOLEAN 1=Ready - Time synchronization
0=Fail status
FREQ REAL - Hz Frequency
FREQGRAD REAL - - Rate of change of
frequency
FREQREFCHSEL INTEGER - - Frequency reference
channel number
selected
FREQREFCHERR BOOLEAN 0=Freq ref not - Frequency reference
available channel error
1=Freq ref error
2=Freq ref
available
FREQTRIG BOOLEAN - - Frequency trigger
DFDTTRIG BOOLEAN - - Rate of change of
frequency trigger
MAGHIGHTRIG BOOLEAN - - Magnitude high trigger
MAGLOWTRIG BOOLEAN - - Magnitude low trigger

6.2.7.2 Reporting filters GUID-D39153B5-81CE-4C1F-A816-C7A4C3407048 v2

The PMUREPORT function block implements the reporting filters designed to

avoid aliasing as the reporting frequency is lower than the sample/calculation
frequency. This means, the synchrophasor and frequency data which are included
in the C37.118 synchrophasor streaming data are filtered in order to suppress
aliasing effects, as the rate of the C37.118 data is slower than the data rate for
internal processing. For this purpose, there is an anti-aliasing filter designed for
each reporting rate. The correct anti-aliasing filter will be automatically selected
based on the reporting rate and the performance class (P/M) settings. The filters are
designed to attenuate all aliasing frequencies to at least -40 dB (a gain of 0.01) at
M class.

The synchrophasor measurement is adaptive as it follows the

fundamental frequency over a wide range despite the reporting rate.

For example, when the synchrophasor measurement follows the fundamental

frequency beyond the fixed Nyquist limits in C37.118 standard, the anti-aliasing
filter stopband moves with the measured fundamental frequency. This has to be
considered in connection with C37.118, where the passband is defined relative to a
fixed nominal frequency as shown in the equation 2.

Fs
f0 ±
2
IECEQUATION2418 V1 EN-US (Equation 2)
where,

156 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 6
Wide area measurement system

f0 is the nominal frequency

Fs is the reporting rate

6.2.7.3 Scaling Factors for ANALOGREPORT channels GUID-0DDAF6A9-8643-4FDD-97CF-9E35EF40AF7E v2

The internal calculation of analog values in the IED is based on 32 bit floating
point. Therefore, if the user selects to report the analog data (AnalogDataType) as
Integer, there will be a down-conversion of a 32 bit floating value to a new 16 bit
integer value. In such a case, in order to optimize the resolution of the reported
analog data, the user-defined analog scaling is implemented in the IED.

The analog scaling in the IED is automatically calculated by use of the user-defined
parameters AnalogXRange for the respective analog channel X. The analog data
value on the input X will have a range between -AnalogXRange and
+AnalogXRange. The resulting scale factor will be applied to the reported analog
data where applicable.

If the AnalogDataType is selected as Float, then these settings are ignored.

The analog scaling in the IED is calculated using the equation:

AnalogXRange ´ 2
S calefactor =
65535.0
offset = 0.0
65535.0 = 16 bit integer range
IECEQUATION2443 V1 EN-US

According to the IEEE C37.118.2 standard, the scale factors (conversion factor) for
analog channels are defined in configuration frame 2 (CFG-2) and configuration
frame 3 (CFG-3) frames as follows:
• CFG-2 frame: The field ANUNIT (4 bytes) specifies the conversion factor as
a signed 24 bit word for user defined scaling. Since it is a 24 bit integer, in
order to support the floating point scale factor, the scale factor itself is
multiplied in 10, so that a minimum of 0.1 scale factor can be sent over the
CFG-2 frame. The resulting scale factor is rounded to the nearest decimal
value. The clients receiving the Analog scale factor over CFG-2 should divide
the received scale factor by 10 and then apply it to the corresponding analog
data value.
• CFG-3 frame: The field ANSCALE (8 bytes) specifies the conversion factor
as X’ = M * X + B where; M is magnitude scaling in 32 bit floating point (first
4 bytes) and B is the offset in 32 bit floating point (last 4 bytes).

The server uses CFG-3 scale factor to scale the analog data values. As a result, the
clients which use scale factors in CFG-3 in order to recalculate analog values, will
get a better resolution than using the scale factors in CFG-2.

The following examples show how the scale factor is calculated.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 157

Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Wide area measurement system

Example 1:

AnalogXRange = 3277.0
IECEQUATION2446 V1 EN-US

The scale factor is calculated as follows:

(3277.0 ´ 2.0 )
sc alefactor = = 0.1 a nd offset = 0.0
65535.0
IECEQUATION2447 V1 EN-US

The scale factor will be sent as 1 on configuration frame 2, and 0.1 on

configuration frame 3. The range of analog values that can be transmitted in this
case is -0.1 to -3276.8 and +0.1 to +3276.7.

Example 2:

AnalogXRange = 4915.5
IECEQUATION2448 V1 EN-US

The scale factor is calculated as follows:

(4915.5 ´ 2.0 )
s c alefac tor = = 0.15 a nd offse t = 0.0
65535.0
IECEQUATION2449 V1 EN-US

The scale factor will be sent as 1 on configuration frame 2, and 0.15 on

configuration frame 3. The range of analog values that can be transmitted in this
case is -0.15 to -4915.5 and +0.15 to +4915.5.

Example 3:

Analo gXRange = 10000000000

IECEQUATION2450 V1 EN-US

The scale factor is calculated as follows:

(10000000000 ´ 2.0)
sc alefac tor = = 305180.43 and offse t = 0.0
65535.5
IECEQUATION2451 V1 EN-US

The scale factor will be sent as 3051804 on configuration frame 2, and 305180.43
on configuration frame 3. The range of analog values that can be transmitted in this
case is -305181 to -10000000000 and +305181 to +10000000000.

158 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 6
Wide area measurement system

6.2.8 Technical data SEMOD172233-1 v1

GUID-F0BAEBD8-E361-4D50-9737-7DF8B043D66A v4

Table 80: PMUREPORT technical data

Influencing quantity Range Accuracy
Signal frequency ± 0.1 x fr ≤ 1.0% TVE

Signal magnitude:
Voltage phasor (0.1–1.2) x Ur
Current phasor (0.5–2.0) x Ir

Phase angle ± 180°

Harmonic distortion 10% from 2nd – 50th
Interfering signal:
Magnitude 10% of fundamental signal
Minimum frequency 0.1 x fr
Maximum frequency 1000 Hz

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 159

Technical manual
160
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

Section 7 Differential protection

7.1 Transformer differential protection T2WPDIF and

T3WPDIF IP14639-1 v3

7.1.1 Identification
M15074-1 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Transformer differential protection, two- T2WPDIF 87T
winding
3Id/I

SYMBOL-BB V1 EN-US

Transformer differential protection, T3WPDIF 87T

three-winding
3Id/I

SYMBOL-BB V1 EN-US

7.1.2 Functionality M16104-3 v18

The Transformer differential protection is provided with internal CT ratio

matching, vector group compensation and settable zero sequence current
elimination.

The function can be provided with up to six three-phase sets of current inputs if
enough HW is available. All current inputs are provided with percentage bias
restraint features, making the IED suitable for two- or three-winding transformer in
multi-breaker station arrangements.

Two-winding applications
two-winding power
transformer
xx05000048.vsd
IEC05000048 V1 EN-US

xx05000049.vsd
IEC05000049 V1 EN-US
two-winding power
transformer with
unconnected delta
tertiary winding

Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 161

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

two-winding power
transformer with two
circuit breakers and
xx05000050.vsd two CT-sets on one
IEC05000050 V1 EN-US
side
two-winding power
transformer with two
circuit breakers and
two CT-sets on both
sides

xx05000051.vsd
IEC05000051 V1 EN-US

Three-winding applications
three-winding power
transformer with all
three windings
connected

xx05000052.vsd
IEC05000052 V1 EN-US

three-winding power
transformer with two
circuit breakers and
two CT-sets on one
side

xx05000053.vsd
IEC05000053 V1 EN-US

Autotransformer with
two circuit breakers
and two CT-sets on
two out of three sides

xx05000057.vsd
IEC05000057 V1 EN-US

Figure 36: CT group

arrangement for
differential protection

The setting facilities cover the application of the differential protection to all types
of power transformers and auto-transformers with or without load tap changer as
well as shunt reactors and local feeders within the station. An adaptive stabilizing
feature is included for heavy through-fault currents.By introducing the load tap
changer position, the differential protection pick-up can be set to optimum
sensitivity thus covering internal faults with low fault current level.

Stabilization is included for inrush and overexcitation currents respectively, cross-

blocking is also available. Adaptive stabilization is also included for system
recovery inrush and CT saturation during external faults. A high set unrestrained

162 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

differential current protection element is included for a very high speed tripping at
high internal fault currents.

Included is an sensitive differential protection element based on the theory of

negative sequence current component. This element offers the best possible
coverage of power transformer windings turn to turn faults.

7.1.3 Function block IP12643-1 v1

SEMOD54397-4 v5

T2WPDIF
I3PW1CT1* TRIP
I3PW1CT2* TRIPRES
I3PW2CT1* TRIPUNRE
I3PW2CT2* TRNSUNR
TAPOLTC1 TRNSSENS
OLTC1AL START
BLOCK STL1
BLKRES STL2
BLKUNRES STL3
BLKNSUNR BLK2H
BLKNSSEN BLK2HL1
BLK2HL2
BLK2HL3
BLK5H
BLK5HL1
BLK5HL2
BLK5HL3
BLKWAV
BLKWAVL1
BLKWAVL2
BLKWAVL3
IDALARM
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
IDL1
IDL2
IDL3
IDL1MAG
IDL2MAG
IDL3MAG
IBIAS
IDNSMAG

IEC06000249_2_en.vsd
IEC06000249 V2 EN-US

Figure 37: T2WPDIF function block

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 163

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

SEMOD54551-4 v5

T3WPDIF
I3PW1CT1* TRIP
I3PW1CT2* TRIPRES
I3PW2CT1* TRIPUNRE
I3PW2CT2* TRNSUNR
I3PW3CT1* TRNSSENS
I3PW3CT2* START
TAPOLTC1 STL1
TAPOLTC2 STL2
OLTC1AL STL3
OLTC2AL BLK2H
BLOCK BLK2HL1
BLKRES BLK2HL2
BLKUNRES BLK2HL3
BLKNSUNR BLK5H
BLKNSSEN BLK5HL1
BLK5HL2
BLK5HL3
BLKWAV
BLKWAVL1
BLKWAVL2
BLKWAVL3
IDALARM
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
IDL1
IDL2
IDL3
IDL1MAG
IDL2MAG
IDL3MAG
IBIAS
IDNSMAG

IEC06000250_2_en.vsd
IEC06000250 V2 EN-US

Figure 38: T3WPDIF function block

7.1.4 Signals
PID-6758-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 81: T2WPDIF Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3PW1CT1 GROUP - Three phase winding primary CT1
SIGNAL
I3PW1CT2 GROUP - Three phase winding primary CT2
SIGNAL
I3PW2CT1 GROUP - Three phase winding secondary CT1
SIGNAL
I3PW2CT2 GROUP - Three phase winding secondary CT2
SIGNAL
TAPOLTC1 INTEGER 1 Most recent tap position reading on OLTC 1
OLTC1AL BOOLEAN 0 OLTC1 alarm
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKRES BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for restrained differential feature
BLKUNRES BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for unrestrained differential feature
BLKNSUNR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for unrestr. neg. seq. differential
feature
BLKNSSEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for sensitive neg. seq. differential
feature

164 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

PID-6758-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 82: T2WPDIF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General, common trip signal
TRIPRES BOOLEAN Trip signal from restrained differential protection
TRIPUNRE BOOLEAN Trip signal from unrestrained differential
protection
TRNSUNR BOOLEAN Trip signal from unrestr. neg. seq. diff. protection
TRNSSENS BOOLEAN Trip signal from sensitive neg. seq. diff. protection
START BOOLEAN Common start signal from any phase
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
BLK2H BOOLEAN Common second harmonic block signal from any
phase
BLK2HL1 BOOLEAN Second harmonic block signal, phase L1
BLK2HL2 BOOLEAN Second harmonic block signal, phase L2
BLK2HL3 BOOLEAN Second harmonic block signal, phase L3
BLK5H BOOLEAN Common fifth harmonic block signal from any
phase
BLK5HL1 BOOLEAN Fifth harmonic block signal, phase L1
BLK5HL2 BOOLEAN Fifth harmonic block signal, phase L2
BLK5HL3 BOOLEAN Fifth harmonic block signal, phase L3
BLKWAV BOOLEAN Common block signal, waveform criterion, from
any phase
BLKWAVL1 BOOLEAN Block signal, waveform criterion, phase L1
BLKWAVL2 BOOLEAN Block signal, waveform criterion, phase L2
BLKWAVL3 BOOLEAN Block signal, waveform criterion, phase L3
IDALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for sustained diff currents in all three
phases
OPENCT BOOLEAN An open CT was detected
OPENCTAL BOOLEAN Open CT Alarm output signal. Issued after a
delay ...
IDL1 REAL Value of the instantaneous differential current,
phase L1
IDL2 REAL Value of the instantaneous differential current,
phase L2
IDL3 REAL Value of the instantaneous differential current,
phase L3
IDL1MAG REAL Magnitude of fundamental freq. diff. current,
phase L1
IDL2MAG REAL Magnitude of fundamental freq. diff. current,
phase L2
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 165

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

Name Type Description

IDL3MAG REAL Magnitude of fundamental freq. diff. current,
phase L3
IBIAS REAL Magnitude of the bias current, which is common
to all phases
IDNSMAG REAL Magnitude of the negative sequence differential
current

PID-6757-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 83: T3WPDIF Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3PW1CT1 GROUP - Three phase winding primary CT1
SIGNAL
I3PW1CT2 GROUP - Three phase winding primary CT2
SIGNAL
I3PW2CT1 GROUP - Three phase winding secondary CT1
SIGNAL
I3PW2CT2 GROUP - Three phase winding secondary CT2
SIGNAL
I3PW3CT1 GROUP - Three phase winding tertiary CT1
SIGNAL
I3PW3CT2 GROUP - Three phase winding tertiary CT2
SIGNAL
TAPOLTC1 INTEGER 1 Most recent tap position reading on OLTC 1
TAPOLTC2 INTEGER 1 Most recent tap position reading on OLTC 2
OLTC1AL BOOLEAN 0 OLTC1 alarm
OLTC2AL BOOLEAN 0 OLTC2 alarm
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKRES BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for restrained differential feature
BLKUNRES BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for unrestrained differential feature
BLKNSUNR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for unrestr. neg. seq. differential
feature
BLKNSSEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for sensitive neg. seq. differential
feature

PID-6757-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 84: T3WPDIF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General, common trip signal
TRIPRES BOOLEAN Trip signal from restrained differential protection
TRIPUNRE BOOLEAN Trip signal from unrestrained differential
protection
TRNSUNR BOOLEAN Trip signal from unrestr. neg. seq. diff. protection
TRNSSENS BOOLEAN Trip signal from sensitive neg. seq. diff. protection
START BOOLEAN Common start signal from any phase
Table continues on next page

166 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

Name Type Description

STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
BLK2H BOOLEAN Common second harmonic block signal from any
phase
BLK2HL1 BOOLEAN Second harmonic block signal, phase L1
BLK2HL2 BOOLEAN Second harmonic block signal, phase L2
BLK2HL3 BOOLEAN Second harmonic block signal, phase L3
BLK5H BOOLEAN Common fifth harmonic block signal from any
phase
BLK5HL1 BOOLEAN Fifth harmonic block signal, phase L1
BLK5HL2 BOOLEAN Fifth harmonic block signal, phase L2
BLK5HL3 BOOLEAN Fifth harmonic block signal, phase L3
BLKWAV BOOLEAN Common block signal, waveform criterion, from
any phase
BLKWAVL1 BOOLEAN Block signal, waveform criterion, phase L1
BLKWAVL2 BOOLEAN Block signal, waveform criterion, phase L2
BLKWAVL3 BOOLEAN Block signal, waveform criterion, phase L3
IDALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for sustained diff currents in all three
phases
OPENCT BOOLEAN An open CT was detected
OPENCTAL BOOLEAN Open CT Alarm output signal. Issued after a
delay ...
IDL1 REAL Value of the instantaneous differential current,
phase L1
IDL2 REAL Value of the instantaneous differential current,
phase L2
IDL3 REAL Value of the instantaneous differential current,
phase L3
IDL1MAG REAL Magnitude of fundamental freq. diff. current,
phase L1
IDL2MAG REAL Magnitude of fundamental freq. diff. current,
phase L2
IDL3MAG REAL Magnitude of fundamental freq. diff. current,
phase L3
IBIAS REAL Magnitude of the bias current, which is common
to all phases
IDNSMAG REAL Magnitude of the negative sequence differential
current

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 167

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

7.1.5 Settings
PID-6758-SETTINGS v1

Table 85: T2WPDIF Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
SOTFMode Off - - On Operation mode for switch onto fault
On
tAlarmDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Time delay for diff currents alarm level
IDiffAlarm 0.05 - 1.00 IB 0.01 0.20 Dif. cur. alarm, multiple of base curr,
usually W1 curr.
IdMin 0.10 - 0.60 IB 0.01 0.30 Section1 sensitivity, multi. of base curr,
usually W1 curr.
IdUnre 1.00 - 100.00 IB 0.01 10.00 Unrestr. prot. limit, multiple of Winding 1
rated current
CrossBlockEn Off - - On Operation Off/On for cross-block logic
On between phases
NegSeqDiffEn Off - - On Operation Off/On for neg. seq.
On differential protections
IMinNegSeq 0.02 - 0.20 IB 0.01 0.04 Neg. seq. curr. must be higher than this
level to be used
NegSeqROA 30.0 - 120.0 Deg 0.1 60.0 Operate Angle for int. / ext. neg. seq.
fault discriminator

Table 86: T2WPDIF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
EndSection1 0.20 - 1.50 IB 0.01 1.25 End of section 1, multiple of Winding 1
rated current
EndSection2 1.00 - 10.00 IB 0.01 3.00 End of section 2, multiple of Winding 1
rated current
SlopeSection2 10.0 - 50.0 % 0.1 40.0 Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain
characteristic, in %
SlopeSection3 30.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 80.0 Slope in section 3 of operate-restrain
characteristic, in %
I2/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 15.0 Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to fundamental
harm dif. curr. in %
I5/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 25.0 Max. ratio of 5th harm. to fundamental
harm dif. curr. in %
OpenCTEnable Off - - Off Open CT detection feature. Open
On CTEnable Off/On
tOCTAlarmDelay 0.100 - 10.000 s 0.001 3.000 Open CT: time in s to alarm after an
open CT is detected
tOCTResetDelay 0.100 - 10.000 s 0.001 0.250 Reset delay in s. After delay, diff.
function is activated
tOCTUnrstDelay 0.10 - 6000.00 s 0.01 10.00 Unrestrained diff. protection blocked
after this delay, in s

168 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

Table 87: T2WPDIF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSelW1 1 - 12 - 1 1 Global base selector for winding 1
GlobalBaseSelW2 1 - 12 - 1 1 Global base selector for winding 2
ConnectTypeW1 WYE (Y) - - WYE (Y) Connection type of winding 1: Y-wye or
Delta (D) D-delta
ConnectTypeW2 WYE (Y) - - WYE (Y) Connection type of winding 2: Y-wye or
Delta (D) D-delta
ClockNumberW2 0 [0 deg] - - 0 [0 deg] Phase displacement between W2 &
1 [30 deg lag] W1=HV winding, hour notation
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg]
7 [150 deg lead]
8 [120 deg lead]
9 [90 deg lead]
10 [60 deg lead]
11 [30 deg lead]
ZSCurrSubtrW1 Off - - On Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for
On W1 side, On / Off
ZSCurrSubtrW2 Off - - On Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for
On W2 side, On / Off
TconfigForW1 No - - No Two CT inputs (T-config.) for winding 1,
Yes YES / NO
CT1RatingW1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on
transf. W1 side
CT2RatingW1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 CT primary in A, T-branch 2, on transf.
W1 side
TconfigForW2 No - - No Two CT inputs (T-config.) for winding 2,
Yes YES / NO
CT1RatingW2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on
transf. W2 side
CT2RatingW2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 CT primary rating in A, T-branch 2, on
transf. W2 side
LocationOLTC1 Not Used - - Not Used Transformer winding where OLTC1 is
Winding 1 (W1) located
Winding 2 (W2)
LowTapPosOLTC1 0 - 10 - 1 1 OLTC1 lowest tap position designation
(e.g. 1)
RatedTapOLTC1 1 - 100 - 1 6 OLTC1 rated tap/mid-tap position
designation (e.g. 6)
HighTapPsOLTC1 1 - 100 - 1 11 OLTC1 highest tap position designation
(e.g. 11)
TapHighVoltTC1 1 - 100 - 1 1 OLTC1 end-tap position with winding
highest no-load voltage
StepSizeOLTC1 0.01 - 30.00 % 0.01 1.00 Voltage change per OLTC1 step in
percent of rated voltage

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 169

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

PID-6757-SETTINGS v1

Table 88: T3WPDIF Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
SOTFMode Off - - On Operation mode for switch onto fault
On feature
tAlarmDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Time delay for diff currents alarm level
IDiffAlarm 0.05 - 1.00 IB 0.01 0.20 Dif. cur. alarm, multiple of base curr,
usually W1 curr.
IdMin 0.10 - 0.60 IB 0.01 0.30 Section1 sensitivity, multi. of base curr,
usually W1 curr.
IdUnre 1.00 - 100.00 IB 0.01 10.00 Unrestr. prot. limit, multi. of base curr.
usually W1 curr.
CrossBlockEn Off - - On Operation Off/On for cross-block logic
On between phases
NegSeqDiffEn Off - - On Operation Off/On for neg. seq.
On differential protections
IMinNegSeq 0.02 - 0.20 IB 0.01 0.04 Neg. seq. curr. limit, mult. of base curr,
usually W1 curr.
NegSeqROA 30.0 - 120.0 Deg 0.1 60.0 Operate Angle for int. / ext. neg. seq.
fault discriminator

Table 89: T3WPDIF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
EndSection1 0.20 - 1.50 IB 0.01 1.25 End of section 1, multi. of base current,
usually W1 curr.
EndSection2 1.00 - 10.00 IB 0.01 3.00 End of section 2, multi. of base current,
usually W1 curr.
SlopeSection2 10.0 - 50.0 % 0.1 40.0 Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain
characteristic, in %
SlopeSection3 30.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 80.0 Slope in section 3 of operate-restrain
characteristic, in %
I2/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 15.0 Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to fundamental
harm dif. curr. in %
I5/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 25.0 Max. ratio of 5th harm. to fundamental
harm dif. curr. in %
OpenCTEnable Off - - Off Open CT detection feature. Open
On CTEnable Off/On
tOCTAlarmDelay 0.100 - 10.000 s 0.001 3.000 Open CT: time in s to alarm after an
open CT is detected
tOCTResetDelay 0.100 - 10.000 s 0.001 0.250 Reset delay in s. After delay, diff.
function is activated
tOCTUnrstDelay 0.10 - 6000.00 s 0.01 10.00 Unrestrained diff. protection blocked
after this delay, in s

170 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

Table 90: T3WPDIF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSelW1 1 - 12 - 1 1 Global base selector for winding 1
GlobalBaseSelW2 1 - 12 - 1 1 Global base selector for winding 2
GlobalBaseSelW3 1 - 12 - 1 1 Global base selector for winding 3
ConnectTypeW1 WYE (Y) - - WYE (Y) Connection type of winding 1: Y-wye or
Delta (D) D-delta
ConnectTypeW2 WYE (Y) - - WYE (Y) Connection type of winding 2: Y-wye or
Delta (D) D-delta
ConnectTypeW3 WYE (Y) - - Delta (D) Connection type of winding 3: Y-wye or
Delta (D) D-delta
ClockNumberW2 0 [0 deg] - - 0 [0 deg] Phase displacement between W2 &
1 [30 deg lag] W1=HV winding, hour notation
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg]
7 [150 deg lead]
8 [120 deg lead]
9 [90 deg lead]
10 [60 deg lead]
11 [30 deg lead]
ClockNumberW3 0 [0 deg] - - 5 [150 deg lag] Phase displacement between W3 &
1 [30 deg lag] W1=HV winding, hour notation
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg]
7 [150 deg lead]
8 [120 deg lead]
9 [90 deg lead]
10 [60 deg lead]
11 [30 deg lead]
ZSCurrSubtrW1 Off - - On Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for
On W1 side, On / Off
ZSCurrSubtrW2 Off - - On Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for
On W2 side, On / Off
ZSCurrSubtrW3 Off - - On Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for
On W3 side, On / Off
TconfigForW1 No - - No Two CT inputs (T-config.) for winding 1,
Yes YES / NO
CT1RatingW1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on
transf. W1 side
CT2RatingW1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 CT primary in A, T-branch 2, on transf.
W1 side
TconfigForW2 No - - No Two CT inputs (T-config.) for winding 2,
Yes YES / NO
CT1RatingW2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on
transf. W2 side
CT2RatingW2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 CT primary rating in A, T-branch 2, on
transf. W2 side
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 171

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TconfigForW3 No - - No Two CT inputs (T-config.) for winding 3,
Yes YES / NO
CT1RatingW3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on
transf. W3 side
CT2RatingW3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 CT primary rating in A, T-branch 2, on
transf. W3 side
LocationOLTC1 Not Used - - Not Used Transformer winding where OLTC1 is
Winding 1 (W1) located
Winding 2 (W2)
Winding 3 (W3)
LowTapPosOLTC1 0 - 10 - 1 1 OLTC1 lowest tap position designation
(e.g. 1)
RatedTapOLTC1 1 - 100 - 1 6 OLTC1 rated tap/mid-tap position
designation (e.g. 6)
HighTapPsOLTC1 1 - 100 - 1 11 OLTC1 highest tap position designation
(e.g. 11)
TapHighVoltTC1 1 - 100 - 1 1 OLTC1 end-tap position with winding
highest no-load voltage
StepSizeOLTC1 0.01 - 30.00 % 0.01 1.00 Voltage change per OLTC1 step in
percent of rated voltage
LocationOLTC2 Not Used - - Not Used Transformer winding where OLTC2 is
Winding 1 (W1) located
Winding 2 (W2)
Winding 3 (W3)
LowTapPosOLTC2 0 - 10 - 1 1 OLTC2 lowest tap position designation
(e.g. 1)
RatedTapOLTC2 1 - 100 - 1 6 OLTC2 rated tap/mid-tap position
designation (e.g. 6)
HighTapPsOLTC2 1 - 100 - 1 11 OLTC2 highest tap position designation
(e.g. 11)
TapHighVoltTC2 1 - 100 - 1 1 OLTC2 end-tap position with winding
highest no-load voltage
StepSizeOLTC2 0.01 - 30.00 % 0.01 1.00 Voltage change per OLTC2 step in
percent of rated voltage

7.1.6 Monitored data

PID-3712-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 91: T2WPDIF Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OCTSIDE INTEGER - - Open CT side : 1 -> W 1
(pri), 2 -> W 2 (sec)
OPENCTIN INTEGER - - Open CT on Input : 1 for
input 1, 2 for input 2
OPENCTPH INTEGER - - Open CT in Phase : 1 for
L1, 2 for L2, 3 for L3
IDL1MAG REAL - A Magnitude of
fundamental freq. diff.
current, phase L1
Table continues on next page

172 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

IDL2MAG REAL - A Magnitude of
fundamental freq. diff.
current, phase L2
IDL3MAG REAL - A Magnitude of
fundamental freq. diff.
current, phase L3
IBIAS REAL - A Magnitude of the bias
current, which is
common to all phases
IDNSMAG REAL - A Magnitude of the
negative sequence
differential current

PID-3713-MONITOREDDATA v6

Table 92: T3WPDIF Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IDL1MAG REAL - A Magnitude of
fundamental freq. diff.
current, phase L1
IDL2MAG REAL - A Magnitude of
fundamental freq. diff.
current, phase L2
IDL3MAG REAL - A Magnitude of
fundamental freq. diff.
current, phase L3
IBIAS REAL - A Magnitude of the bias
current, which is
common to all phases
IDNSMAG REAL - A Magnitude of the
negative sequence
differential current

7.1.7 Operation principle

M13039-3 v8

The task of the power transformer differential protection is to determine whether a

fault is within the protected zone, or outside of the protected zone. The protected
zone is limited by the position of current transformers (see Figure 39), and in
principle can include more objects than just a transformer. If the fault is found to be
internal, the faulty power transformer must be quickly disconnected from the
system.

The main CTs are normally supposed to be star connected. The main CTs can be
earthed in anyway (that is, either "ToObject" or "FromObject"). However internally
the differential function will always use reference directions towards the protected
transformer as shown in Figure 39. Thus the IED will always internally measure
the currents on all sides of the power transformer with the same reference direction
towards the power transformer windings as shown in Figure 39. For more
information see the Application manual.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 173

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

IW1 IW2

Z1S1 Z1S2
E1S1 E1S2

IW1 IW2

IED

en05000186.vsd
IEC05000186 V1 EN-US

Figure 39: Typical CT location and definition of positive current direction

Even in a healthy power transformer, the currents are generally not equal when
they flow through it. This is due to the ratio of the number of turns of the windings
and the connection group of the protected transformer. Therefore the differential
protection must first correlate all currents to each other before any calculation can
be performed.

First, compensation for the protected transformer transformation ratio and

connection group is made, and only then are the currents compared phase-wise.
This makes external auxiliary (interposing) current transformers unnecessary.
Conversion of all currents to the common reference side of the power transformer
is performed by pre-programmed coefficient matrices, which depends on the
protected power transformer transformation ratio and connection group. Once the
power transformer vector group, rated currents and voltages have been entered by
the user, the differential protection is capable to calculate off-line matrix
coefficients required in order to perform the on-line current comparison by means
of a fixed equation.

The negative-sequence-current-based internal-external fault discriminator, is used

with advantage in order to determine whether a fault is internal or external. It not
only positively discriminates between internal and external faults, but can also
independently detect minor faults which may not be sensed by the "usual"
differential protection based on operate-restrain characteristic.

For all differential functions it is the common trip that is used to

initiate a trip of a breaker. The separate trip signals from the
different parts lacks the safety against maloperation. This will in
some cases result in a 6 ms time difference between, for example
restrained trip is issued and common trip is issued. The separate trip
signals are only used for information purpose of which part that has
caused the trip.

174 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

7.1.7.1 Function calculation principles M13039-12 v4

To make a differential IED as sensitive and stable as possible, restrained

differential characteristics have been developed and is now adopted as the general
practice in the protection of power transformers. The protection should be provided
with a proportional bias, which makes the protection operate for a certain
percentage differential current related to the current through the transformer. This
stabilizes the protection under through fault conditions while still permitting the
system to have good basic sensitivity. The following chapters explain how these
quantities are derived.

Fundamental frequency differential currents M13039-15 v9

The fundamental frequency differential current is a vectorial sum (sum of

fundamental frequency phasors) of the individual phase currents from the different
sides of the protected power transformer.

Before any differential current can be calculated, the power transformer phase shift,
and its transformation ratio, must be accounted for. Conversion of all currents to a
common reference is performed in two steps:

• all current phasors are phase-shifted to (referred to) the phase-reference side,
(whenever possible the first winding with star connection)
• all currents magnitudes are always referred to the first winding of the power
transformer (typically transformer high-voltage side)

The two steps of conversion are made simultaneously on-line by the pre-
programmed coefficient matrices, as shown in equation 3 for a two-winding power
transformer, and in equation 4 for a three-winding power transformer.

These are the internal compensation within the differential function.

The protected power transformer data is always entered per its
nameplate. The Differential function will correlate nameplate data
and select proper reference windings.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 175

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

é IDL1 ù é IL1_ W 1 ù é IL1_ W 2 ù

ê IDL 2 ú = A × ê IL 2 _ W 1ú + Un _ W 2 ê ú
ê ú ê ú Un _ W 1 × B × ê IL 2 _ W 2 ú
êë IDL3 úû êë IL3 _ W 1úû êë IL3 _ W 2 úû

1 2 3
EQUATION1880 V1 EN-US (Equation 3)

where:
1. is the resulting Differential Currents
2. is the current contribution from the W1 side
3. is the current contribution from the W2 side

é IDL1 ù é IL1_ W 1 ù é IL1_ W 2 ù é IL1_ W 3 ù

ê IDL 2 ú = A × ê IL 2 _ W 1ú + Un _ W 2 × B × ê IL 2 _ W 2 ú + Un _ W 3 × C × ê IL 2 _ W 3ú
ê ú ê ú Un _ W 1 ê ú Un _ W 1 ê ú
êë IDL3 úû êë IL3 _ W 1úû êë IL3 _ W 2 úû êë IL3 _ W 3 úû

1 2 3 4
EQUATION1556 V2 EN-US (Equation 4)

where:
1. is the resulting Differential Currents
2. is the current contribution from the W1 side
3. is the current contribution from the W2 side
4. is the current contribution from the W3 side

and where, for equation 3 and equation 4:

IDL1 is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase L1 (in W1 side primary
amperes)
IDL2 is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase L2 (in W1 side primary
amperes)
IDL3 is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase L3 (in W1 side primary
amperes)
IL1_W1 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L1 on the W1 side
IL2_W1 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L2 on the W1 side
IL3_W1 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L3 on the W1 side
IL1_W2 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L1 on the W2 side
IL2_W2 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L2 on the W2 side
IL3_W2 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L3 on the W2 side
Table continues on next page

176 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

IL1_W3 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L1 on the W3 side

IL2_W3 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L2 on the W3 side
IL3_W3 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L3 on the W3 side
Ur_W1 is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on the W1 side (setting parameter)
Ur_W2 is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on the W2 side (setting parameter)
Ur_W3 is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on the W3 side (setting parameter)
A, B and C are three by three matrices with numerical coefficients

Values of the matrix A, B and C coefficients depend on:

1. The Power transformer winding connection type, such as star (Y/y) or delta
(D/d)
2. The Transformer vector group such as Yd1, Dy11, YNautod5, Yy0d5 and so
on, which introduce phase displacement between individual windings currents
in multiples of 30°.
3. The Settings for elimination of zero sequence currents for the individual
windings.

When the end user enters all these parameters, transformer differential function
automatically calculates the matrix coefficients. During this calculations the
following rules are used:

For the phase reference, the first winding with set star (Y) connection is always
used. For example, if the power transformer is a Yd1 power transformer, the HV
winding (Y) is taken as the phase reference winding. If the power transformer is a
Dy1, then the LV winding (y) is taken for the phase reference. If there is no star
connected winding, such as in Dd0 type of power transformers, then the HV delta
winding (D) is automatically chosen as the phase reference winding.

The fundamental frequency differential currents are in general composed of

currents of all sequences, that is, the positive-, the negative-, and the zero-sequence
currents. If the zero-sequence currents are eliminated (see section "Optional
Elimination of zero sequence currents"), then the differential currents can consist
only of the positive-, and the negative-sequence currents. When the zero-sequence
current is subtracted on one side of the power transformer, then it is subtracted
from each individual phase current.

As it can be seen from equation 3 and equation 4 the first entered winding (W1) is
always taken for ampere level reference (current magnitudes from all other sides
are always transferred to W1 side). In other words, within the differential
protection function, all differential currents and bias current are always expressed
in HV side primary Amperes.

It can be shown that the values of the matrix A, B & C coefficients (see equation 3
and equation 4) can be pre-calculated in advance depending on the relative phase
shift between the reference winding and other power transformer windings.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 177

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

Table 93 summarizes the values of the matrices for all standard phase shifts
between windings.
Table 93: Matrices for differential current calculation
Matrix with Zero Sequence Matrix with Zero Sequence
Reduction set to On Reduction set to Off
Matrix for Reference Winding
é 2 -1 -1ù é1 0 0 ù
1 ê
× -1 2 -1ú ê0 1 0 ú
3 ê ú ê ú
ëê -1 -1 2 ûú êë0 0 1 úû
EQUATION1227 V1 EN-US (Equation 5) EQUATION1228 V1 EN-US (Equation 6)
Matrix for winding with 30° Not applicable. Matrix on the
lagging é 1 -1 0 ù left used.
1 ê
× 0 1 -1ú
3 ê ú
êë -1 0 1 úû
EQUATION1229 V1 EN-US (Equation 7)
Matrix for winding with 60°
lagging é1 -2 1ù é 0 -1 0 ù
1 ê
× 1 1 -2 ú ê 0 0 -1ú
3 ê ú ê ú
êë -2 1 1 úû êë -1 0 0 úû
EQUATION1230 V1 EN-US (Equation 8) EQUATION1231 V1 EN-US (Equation 9)
Matrix for winding with 90° Not applicable. Matrix on the
lagging é 0 -1 1 ù left used.
1
× ê 1 0 -1ú
3 ê ú
êë -1 1 0 úû
EQUATION1232 V1 EN-US (Equation 10)
Matrix for winding with 120°
lagging é -1 -1 2 ù é0 0 1 ù
1 ê
× 2 -1 -1ú ê1 0 0 ú
3 ê ú ê ú
êë -1 2 -1úû ëê0 1 0 úû
EQUATION1233 V1 EN-US (Equation 11) EQUATION1234 V1 EN-US (Equation 12)
Matrix for winding with 150° Not applicable. Matrix on the
lagging é-1 0 1 ù left used.
1
× ê 1 -1 0 ú
3 ê ú
ëê 0 1 -1ûú
EQUATION1235 V1 EN-US (Equation 13)
Matrix for winding which is in
opposite phase é -2 1 1ù é -1 0 0 ù
1 ê
× 1 -2 1 ú ê 0 -1 0 ú
3 ê ú ê ú
ëê 1 1 -2 ûú ëê 0 0 -1ûú
EQUATION1236 V1 EN-US (Equation 14) EQUATION1237 V1 EN-US (Equation 15)
Matrix for winding with 150° Not applicable. Matrix on the
leading é-1 1 0 ù left used.
1 ê
× 0 -1 1 ú
3 ê ú
ëê 1 0 -1ûú
EQUATION1238 V1 EN-US (Equation 16)
Table continues on next page

178 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

Matrix with Zero Sequence Matrix with Zero Sequence

Reduction set to On Reduction set to Off
Matrix for winding with 120°
leading é -1 2 -1ù é0 1 0 ù
1 ê
× -1 -1 2 ú ê0 0 1 ú
3 ê ú ê ú
êë 2 -1 -1úû êë1 0 0 úû
EQUATION1239 V1 EN-US (Equation 17) EQUATION1240 V1 EN-US (Equation 18)

Matrix for winding with 90° Not applicable. Matrix on the

leading é 0 1 -1ù left used.
1
× ê -1 0 1 ú
3 ê ú
ëê 1 -1 0 úû
EQUATION1241 V1 EN-US (Equation 19)
Matrix for winding with 60°
leading é1 1 -2 ù é 0 0 -1ù
1 ê ê -1 0 0 ú
× -2 1 1ú
3 ê ú ê ú
ëê 1 -2 1 ûú ëê 0 -1 0 úû
EQUATION1242 V1 EN-US (Equation 20) EQUATION1243 V1 EN-US (Equation 21)
Matrix for winding with 30° Not applicable. Matrix on the
leading é 1 0 -1ù left used.
1
× ê -1 1 0 ú
3 ê ú
ëê 0 -1 1 úû
EQUATION1244 V1 EN-US (Equation 22)

By using this table complete equation for calculation of fundamental frequency

differential currents for two winding power transformer with YNd5 vector group
and enabled zero sequence current reduction on HV side will be derived. From the
given power transformer vector group the following is possible to be concluded:

1. The HV star (Y) connected winding will be used as the reference winding and
zero sequence currents shall be subtracted on that side
2. The LV winding is lagging for 150°

With the help of table 93, the following matrix equation can be written for this
power transformer:

é IDL1ù é 2 -1 -1ù é IL1_ W1ù é-1 0 1 ù é IL1_ W 2 ù

ê IDL2ú = 1 × ê-1 2 -1ú × ê IL2 _ W1ú + Ur _ W 2 × 1 × ê 1 -1 0 ú × ê IL2 _ W 2ú
ê ú 3 ê ú ê ú Ur _ W1 3 ê ú ê ú
ëê IDL3ûú ëê-1 -1 2 ûú ëê IL3_ W1ûú ëê 0 1 -1ûú ëê IL3_ W 2 ûú
EQUATION2015 V1 EN-US (Equation 23)

where:
IDL1 is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase L1 (in W1 side primary
amperes)
IDL2 is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase L2 (in W1 side primary
amperes)
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 179

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

IDL3 is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase L3 (in W1 side primary
amperes)
IL1_W1 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L1 on the W1 side
IL2_W1 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L2 on the W1 side
IL3_W1 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L3 on the W1 side
IL1_W2 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L1 on the W2 side
IL2_W2 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L2 on the W2 side
IL3_W2 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L3 on the W2 side
Ur_W1 is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on the W1 side (setting parameter)
Ur_W2 is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on the W2 side (setting parameter)

As marked in equation 3 and equation 4, the first term on the right hand side of the
equation, represents the total contribution from the individual phase currents from
the W1 side to the fundamental frequency differential currents, compensated for
eventual power transformer phase shift. The second term on the right hand side of
the equation, represents the total contribution from the individual phase currents
from the W2 side to the fundamental frequency differential currents, compensated
for eventual power transformer phase shift and transferred to the power transformer
W1 side. The third term on the right hand side of the equation, represents the total
contribution from the individual phase currents from the W3 side to the
fundamental frequency differential currents, compensated for eventual power
transformer phase shift and transferred to the power transformer W1 side. These
current contributions are important, because they are used for calculation of
common bias current.

The fundamental frequency differential currents are the "usual" differential

currents, the magnitudes which are applied in a phase-wise manner to the operate -
restrain characteristic of the differential protection. The magnitudes of the
differential currents can be read as service values from the function and they are
available as outputs IDL1MAG, IDL2MAG, IDL3MAG from the differential
protection function block. Thus they can be connected to the disturbance recorder
and automatically recorded during any external or internal fault condition.

On-line compensation for load tap changer movement M13039-424 v5

A load tap changer is a mechanical device, which is used to step-wise change

number of turns within one power transformer winding. Consequently the power
transformer overall turns ratio is changed. Typically the load tap changer is located
within the HV winding (that is, winding 1, W1) of the power transformer. By
operating load tap changer, it is possible to step-wise regulate voltage on the LV
side of the power transformer. However at the same time the differential protection
for power transformer becomes unbalanced. Differential function in the IED has
built-in feature to continuously monitor the load tap changer position and
dynamically compensate on-line for changes in power transformer turns ratio.

Differential currents are calculated as shown in equation and equation . By setting

parameters, the winding location of the OLTC is defined. Also, the voltage change
of each step. Thus, if for example the load tap changer is located within winding 1

180 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

the no-load voltage Vn_W1 will be treated as a function of the actual load tap
changer position in equation and equation . Thus for every load tap changer
position a corresponding value for Ur_W1 will be calculated and used in the above
mentioned equations. By doing this, complete on-line compensation for load tap
changer movement is achieved. Differential protection will be ideally balanced for
every load tap changer position and no false differential current will appear
irrespective of actual load tap changer position.

Typically the minimum differential protection pickup for power transformer with
load tap changer is set between 30% to 40%. However with this load tap changer
compensation feature it is possible to set the differential protection in the IED more
sensitive with a pickup value of 15% to 20%.

Load tap changer position is measured within the IED by Tap changer control and
supervision, (TCLYLTC). Within this function block, the load tap changer position
value is continuously monitored to insure its integrity.

When any error in the load tap changer position is detected an alarm is given. This
signal shall be connected to the OLTCxAL input of the differential function block.
While OLTCxAL input has a logical value of one the differential protection
minimum pickup, originally defined by setting parameter IdMin, will be increased
by the set range of the load tap changer. Alternatively the differential current alarm
feature can be used to alarm for any problems in the whole load tap changer
compensation chain.

It shall be noted that:

• two-winding differential protection in the IED can on-line compensate for one
load tap changer within the protected power transformer
• three-winding differential protection in the IED can on-line compensate for up
to two load tap changers within the protected power transformer

Differential current alarm M13039-436 v6

Fundamental frequency differential current level is monitored all the time within
the differential function. As soon as all three fundamental frequency differential
currents are above the set threshold defined by setting parameter IDiffAlarm a
delay on pickup timer is started. When the pre-set time, defined by setting
parameter tAlarmDelay, has expired the differential current alarm is generated and
output signal IDALARM is set to logical value one. This feature can be effectively
used to provide alarm when load tap changer position compensation is used and
something in the whole compensation chain goes wrong. This alarm can be as well
used with some additional IED configuration logic to desensitize the differential
function.

Bias current M13039-179 v5

The bias current is calculated as the highest current amongst all individual winding
current contributions to the total fundamental frequency differential currents, as
shown in equation and equation . All individual winding current contributions are
already referred to the power transformer winding one side (power transformer HV

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 181

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

winding) and therefore they can be compared regarding their magnitudes. There are
six (or nine in the case of a three-winding transformer) contributions to the total
fundamental differential currents, which are the candidates for the common bias
current. The highest individual current contribution is taken as a common bias
(restrain) current for all three phases. This "maximum principle" makes the
differential protection more secure, with less risk to operate for external faults and
in the same time brings more meaning to the breakpoint settings of the operate -
restrain characteristic.

It shall be noted that if the zero-sequence currents are subtracted from the separate
contributions to the total differential current, then the zero-sequence component is
automatically eliminated from the bias current as well. This ensures that for
secondary injection from just one power transformer side the bias current is always
equal to the highest differential current regardless of the fault type. During normal
through-load operation of the power transformer, the bias current is equal to the
maximum load current from two (three) -power transformer windings.

The magnitudes of the common bias (restrain) current expressed in HV side

amperes can be read as service value from the function. At the same time it is
available as an output IBIAS from the differential protection function block. It can
be connected to the disturbance recorder and automatically recorded during any
external or internal fault condition.

For application with so called "T" configuration, that is, two restraint CT inputs
from one side of the protected power transformer, such as in the case of breaker-
and-a-half schemes the primary CT ratings can be much higher than the rating of
the protected power transformer. In order to determine the bias current for such T
configuration, the two separate currents flowing in the T-side are scaled down to
the protected power transform level by means of additional settings. This is done in
order to prevent unwanted de-sensitizing of the overall differential protection. In
addition to that, the resultant currents (the sum of two currents) into the protected
power transformer winding, which is not directly measured is calculated, and
included in the common bias calculation. The rest of the bias calculation procedure
is the same as in protection schemes without breaker-and-a-half arrangements.

Optional Elimination of zero sequence currents M13039-185 v8

To avoid unwanted trips for external earth-faults, the zero sequence currents should
be subtracted on the side of the protected power transformer, where the zero
sequence currents can flow at external earth -faults.

The zero sequence currents can be explicitly eliminated from the differential
currents and common bias current calculation by special, dedicated parameter
settings, which are available for every individual winding.

Elimination of the zero sequence component of current is necessary whenever:

• the protected power transformer cannot transform the zero sequence currents
to the other side.
• the zero sequence currents can only flow on one side of the protected power
transformer.

182 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

In most cases, power transformers do not properly transform the zero sequence
current to the other side. A typical example is a power transformer of the star-delta
type, for example YNd1. Transformers of this type do not transform the zero
sequence quantities, but zero sequence currents can flow in the earthed star-
connected winding. In such cases, an external earth-fault on the star-side causes
zero sequence current to flow on the star-side of the power transformer, but not on
the other side. This results in false differential currents - consisting exclusively of
the zero sequence currents. If high enough, these false differential currents can
cause an unwanted disconnection of the healthy power transformer. They must
therefore be subtracted from the fundamental frequency differential currents if an
unwanted trip is to be avoided.

For delta windings this feature shall be enabled only if an earthing transformer
exists within the differential zone on the delta side of the protected power
transformer.

Removing the zero sequence current from the differential currents decreases to
some extent the sensitivity of the differential protection for internal earth -faults. In
order to counteract this effect to some degree, the zero sequence current is
subtracted not only from the three fundamental frequency differential currents, but
from the bias current as well.

Restrained and unrestrained limits of the differential protection M13039-194 v7

The power transformer differential protection function uses two limits, to which
actual magnitudes of the three fundamental frequency differential currents are
compared at each execution of the function.

The unrestrained (that is, non-stabilized, "instantaneous") part of the differential

protection is used for very high differential currents, where it should be beyond any
doubt, that the fault is internal. This settable limit is constant and not proportional
to the bias current. Neither harmonic, nor any other restrain is applied to this limit,
which is therefore allowed to trip the power transformer instantaneously.

The restrained (stabilized) part of the differential protection compares the

calculated fundamental differential (operating) currents and the bias (restrain)
current, by applying them to the operate - restrain characteristic. Practically, the
magnitudes of the individual fundamental frequency differential currents are
compared with an adaptive limit. This limit is adaptive because it is dependent on
the bias (that is, restrain) current magnitude. This limit is called the operate -
restrain characteristic. It is represented by a double-slope, double-breakpoint
characteristic, as shown in figure 40. The restrained characteristic is determined by
the following 5 settings:

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 183

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

1. IdMin (Sensitivity in section 1, multiple of trans. HV side rated current set

under the parameter RatedCurrentW1)
2. EndSection1 (End of section 1, as multiple of transformer HV side rated
current set under the parameter RatedCurrentW1)
3. EndSection2 (End of section 2, as multiple of transformer HV side rated
current set under the parameter RatedCurrentW1)
4. SlopeSection2 (Slope in section 2, as multiple of transformer HV side rated
current set under the parameter RatedCurrentW1)
5. SlopeSection3 (Slope in section 2, as multiple of transformer HV side rated
current set under the parameter RatedCurrentW1)

The restrained characteristic in figure 40 is defined by the settings:

1. IdMin
2. EndSection1
3. EndSection2
4. SlopeSection2
5. SlopeSection3

184 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

operate current
[ times IBase ]
Operate
5
unconditionally

UnrestrainedLimit
4

Operate
3
conditionally

2
Section 1 Section 2 Section 3

SlopeSection3
1
IdMin
SlopeSection2 Restrain
0
0 1 2 3 4 5

EndSection1 restrain current

EndSection2 [ times IBase ]

en05000187-2.vsd
IEC05000187 V2 EN-US

Figure 40: Description of the restrained, and the unrestrained operate

characteristics

where:

slope = D Ioperate × 100%

D Irestrain
EQUATION1246 V1 EN-US

The operate - restrain characteristic is tailor-made and can be designed freely by

the user after his needs. The default characteristic is recommended to be used. It
gives good results in a majority of applications. The operate - restrain characteristic
has in principle three sections with a section-wise proportionality of the operate
value to the bias (restrain) current. The reset ratio is in all parts of the characteristic
equal to 0.95.

Section 1: This is the most sensitive part on the characteristic. In section 1, normal
currents flow through the protected circuit and its current transformers, and risk for
higher false differential currents is relatively low. An un-compensated on-load tap-
changer is a typical reason for existence of the false differential currents in this
section. The slope in section 1 is always zero percent.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 185

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

Section 2: In section 2, a certain minor slope is introduced which is supposed to

cope with false differential currents proportional to higher than normal currents
through the current transformers.

Section 3: The more pronounced slope in section 3 is designed to result in a higher

tolerance to substantial current transformer saturation at high through-fault
currents, which may be expected in this section.

The operate - restrain characteristic should be designed so that it can be expected

that:

• for internal faults, the operate (differential) currents are always with a good
margin above the operate - restrain characteristic
• for external faults, the false (spurious) operate currents are with a good margin
below the operate - restrain characteristic

The differential protection can be temporarily desensitized by applying the

adaptive DC biasing method. When the external fault is detected, this adaptive DC
biasing method will temporarily shift the operate-bias characteristic by adding DC
components to the operate level IdMin. The DC component is extracted online
form the instantaneous differential currents and the highest DC in all three phases
is selected to be added to IdMin. This feature improves the security of the
differential function against the CT errors during heavy external faults followed by
CT saturation. The adaptive DC biasing will be reset if either of the conditions
below is fulfilled:

• The external fault signal disappears and no DC components exist in the phase
currents.
• The differential currents become higher than the bias current.

The adaptive DC biasing feature is disabled when NegSeqDiffEn is

set to Off.

Fundamental frequency negative sequence differential currents M13039-226 v7

Existence of relatively high negative sequence currents is in itself a proof of a

disturbance on the power system, possibly a fault in the protected power
transformer. The negative-sequence currents are a measurable indication of an
abnormal condition, similar to the zero sequence current. One of the several
advantages of the negative sequence currents compared to the zero sequence
currents is that they provide coverage for phase-to-phase and power transformer
turn-to-turn faults. Theoretically, the negative sequence currents do not exist during
symmetrical three-phase faults, however they do appear during initial stage of such
faults for a long enough time (in most cases) for the IED to make the proper
decision. Further, the negative sequence currents are not stopped at a power
transformer by the Yd, or Dy connection type. The negative sequence currents are
always properly transformed to the other side of any power transformer for any

186 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

external disturbance. Finally, the negative sequence currents are not affected by
symmetrical through-load currents.

For power transformer differential protection applications, the negative sequence

based differential currents are calculated by using exactly the same matrix
equations, which are used to calculate the traditional phase-wise fundamental
frequency differential currents. The same equation shall be fed by the negative
sequence currents from the two power transformer sides instead of individual phase
currents, as shown in matrix equation 25 for a case of two-winding, YNd5 power
transformer.

é IDL1 _ NS ù é2 -1 -1ù é INS _ W 1 ù é -1 0 1 ù é INS _ W 2 ù

ê IDL 2 _ NS ú = × ê -1
1
2 -1ú × ê a × INS _ W 1 ú +
Ur _ W 2
×
1
×ê1 -1 0 ú × ê a × INS _ W 2 ú
ê ú 3 ê ú ê 2 ú Ur _ W 1 3 ê ú ê 2 ú
ëê IDL3 _ NS ûú ëê -1 -1 2ûú ëê a × INS _ W 1ûú ëê 0 1 ú ëê a × INS _ W 2 ûú
-1û

1 2 3

EQUATION1247 V1 EN-US (Equation 25)

where:
1. is the Negative Sequence Differential Currents
2. is the Negative Sequence current contribution from the W1 side
3. is the Negative Sequence current contribution from the W2 side

and where:
IDL1_NS is the negative sequence differential current in phase L1 (in
W1 side primary amperes)
IDL2_NS is the negative sequence differential current in phase L2 (in
W1 side primary amperes)
IDL3_NS is the negative sequence differential current in phase L3 (in
W1 side primary amperes)
INS_W1 is the negative sequence current on the W1 side in primary
amperes (phase L1 reference)
INS_W2 is the negative sequence current on the W2 side in primary
amperes (phase L1 reference)
Ur_W1 is the transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on the W1
side (setting parameter)
Ur_W2 is the transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on W2
side (setting parameter)

a is the complex operator for sequence quantities,

j ×120
o 1 3
a=e =- + j×
2 2
EQUATION1248 V1 EN-US (Equation 26)

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 187

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

Because the negative sequence currents always form the symmetrical three phase
current system on each transformer side (that is, negative sequence currents in
every phase will always have the same magnitude and be phase displaced for 120
electrical degrees from each other), it is only necessary to calculate the first
negative sequence differential current that is, IDL1_NS.

As marked in equation 25, the first term on the right hand side of the equation,
represents the total contribution of the negative sequence current from the W1 side
compensated for eventual power transformer phase shift. The second term on the
right hand side of the equation, represents the total contribution of the negative
sequence current from the W2 side compensated for eventual power transformer
phase shift and transferred to the power transformer W1 side. These negative
sequence current contributions are phasors, which are further used in directional
comparisons, to characterize a fault as internal or external. See section "Internal/
external fault discriminator" for more information.

The magnitudes of the negative sequence differential current expressed in the HV

side A can be read as service values from the function. In the same time it is
available as outputs IDNSMAG from the differential protection function block.
Thus, it can be connected to the disturbance recorder and automatically recorded
during any external or internal fault condition.

Internal/external fault discriminator M13039-280 v7

The internal/external fault discriminator is a very powerful and reliable

supplementary criterion to the traditional differential protection. It is recommended
that this feature shall be always used (that is, On) when protecting three-phase
power transformers. The internal/external fault discriminator detects even minor
faults, with a high sensitivity and at high speed, and at the same time discriminates
with a high degree of dependability between internal and external faults.

The internal/external fault discriminator responds to the magnitudes and the

relative phase angles of the negative-sequence fault currents at the different
windings of the protected power transformer. The negative sequence fault currents
must first be referred to the same phase reference side, and put to the same
magnitude reference. This is done by the matrix expression (see equation ).

Operation of the internal/external fault discriminator is based on the relative

position of the two phasors representing the winding one (W1) and winding two
(W2) negative sequence current contributions, respectively, defined by expression
shown in equation . It performs a directional comparison between these two
phasors. First, the LV side phasor is referred to the HV side (W1 side): both the
magnitude, and the phase position are referred to the HV (W1 side). Then the
relative phase displacement between the two negative sequence current phasors is
calculated. In case of three-winding power transformers, a little more complex
algorithm is applied, with two directional tests. The overall directional
characteristic of the internal/external fault discriminator is shown in figure 41,
where the directional characteristic is defined by two setting parameters:

1. IMinNegSeq
2. NegSeqROA

188 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

90 deg
120 deg
If one or the Internal/external
other of fault boundary
currents is too
low, then no
measurement
NegSeqROA
is done, and
(Relay
120 degrees
Operate
is mapped
Angle)

180 deg 0 deg

IMinNegSeq

External Internal
fault fault
region region

270 deg en05000188-3-en.vsd

IEC05000188 V3 EN-US

Figure 41: Operating characteristic of the internal/external fault discriminator

In order to perform directional comparison of the two phasors their magnitudes

must be high enough so that one can be sure that they are due to a fault. On the
other hand, in order to guarantee a good sensitivity of the internal/external fault
discriminator, the value of this minimum limit must not be too high. Therefore this
limit value, called IminNegSeq, is settable in the range of 0.02 to 0.20 times the
IBase of the power transformer winding one. The default value is 0.04. Note that,
in order to enhance stability at higher fault currents, the relatively very low
threshold value IminNegSeq is dynamically increased at currents higher than
normal currents: if the bias current is higher than 110% of IBase ,then 10% of the
bias current is added to the IminNegSeq. Only if the magnitudes of both negative
sequence current contributions are above the actual limit, the relative position
between these two phasors is checked. If either of the negative sequence current
contributions, which should be compared, is too small (less than the set value for
IminNegSeq), no directional comparison is made in order to avoid the possibility to
produce a wrong decision. This magnitude check guarantees stability of the
algorithm, when the power transformer is energized. The setting NegSeqROA
represents the Relay Operate Angle, which determines the boundary between the
internal and external fault regions. It can be selected in a range from ±30 degrees to
±90 degrees, with a step of 0.1 degree. The default value is ±60 degrees. The
default setting ±60 degree favours security in comparison to dependability.

If the above condition concerning magnitudes is fulfilled, the internal/external fault

discriminator compares the relative phase angle between the negative sequence
current contributions from W1 and W2 sides of the power transformer using the
following two rules:

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 189

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

• If the negative sequence current contributions from the W1 and the W2 sides
are in phase, the fault is internal (that is, both phasors are within protected
zone)
• If the negative sequence currents contributions from W1 and W2 sides are 180
degrees out of phase, the fault is external (that is, W1 phasors is outside
protected zone)

For example, for any unsymmetrical external fault, ideally the respective negative
sequence current contributions from the W1 and W2 power transformer sides will
be exactly 180 degrees apart and equal in magnitude, regardless the power
transformer turns ratio and phase displacement. An example is shown in figure 42,
which shows trajectories of the two separate phasors representing the negative
sequence current contributions from the HV and LV sides of an Yd5 power
transformer (after compensation of the transformer turns ratio and phase
displacement) by using equation ) for an unsymmetrical external fault. Observe that
the relative phase angle between these two phasors is 180 electrical degrees at any
point in time. No current transformer saturation was assumed for this case.

"steady state"
for HV side 90
neg. seq. phasor
60

150 30

10
ms

180 0
0.1 kA
0.2 kA
0.3 kA
10 0.4 kA
ms
210 330

"steady state"
240 for LV side
270 neg. seq. phasor

Contribution to neg. seq. differential current from HV side

Contribution to neg. seq. differential current from LV side

en05000189.vsd
IEC05000189 V1 EN-US

Figure 42: Trajectories of Negative Sequence Current Contributions from HV

and LV sides of Yd5 power transformer during external fault

Under external fault conditions, the relative angle is theoretically equal to 180
degrees. During internal faults, the angle shall ideally be 0 degrees, but due to

190 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

possible different negative sequence source impedance angles on the W1 and W2

sides of the protected power transformer, it may differ somewhat from the ideal
zero value. However, during heavy faults, CT saturation might cause the measured
phase angle to differ from 180 degrees for an external, and from 0 degrees for an
internal fault. See figure 43 for an example of a heavy internal fault with transient
CT saturation.

Dire ctiona l Compa ris on Crite rion: Inte rna l fa ult a s s e e n from the HV s ide
90
e xcurs ion
120 60
from 0 de gre e s
35 ms due to CT
s a tura tion
150 30
de finite ly
a n inte rna l
fa ult

180 0
trip c o mmand
in 12 ms
e xte rna l
fa ult Inte rna l fa ult
0.5 kA de cla re d 7 ms
re gion
210 330 a fte r inte rna l
fa ult occure d
1.0 kA

240 300
1.5 kA
270
HV s ide contribution to the tota l ne ga tive s e que nce diffe re ntia l curre nt in kA
Dire ctiona l limit (within the re gion de limite d by ± 60 de gre e s is inte rna l fa ult)

en05000190.vsd
IEC05000190 V1 EN-US

Figure 43: Operation of the internal/external fault discriminator for internal

fault with CT saturation

It shall be noted that additional security measures are implemented in the internal/
external fault discriminator algorithm in order to guarantee proper operation with
heavily saturated current transformers. The trustworthy information on whether a
fault is internal or external is typically obtained in about 10ms after the fault
inception, depending on the setting IminNegSeq, and the magnitudes of the fault
currents. During heavy faults, approximately 5ms time to full saturation of the
main CT is sufficient in order to produce a correct discrimination between internal
and external faults.

Unrestrained, and sensitive negative sequence protections M13039-320 v5

Two sub functions, which are based on the internal/external fault discriminator
with the ability to trip a faulty power transformer, are parts of the traditional power
transformer differential protection.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 191

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

The unrestrained negative sequence differential protection M13039-323 v6

The unrestrained negative sequence protection is activated if one or more start

signals have been set by the traditional differential protection algorithm. This
happens because one or more of the fundamental frequency differential currents
entered the operate region on the operate - restrain characteristic. So, this
protection is not independent of the traditional restrained differential protection - it
is activated after the first start signal has been placed.

If the same fault has been positively recognized as internal, then the unrestrained
negative sequence differential protection places its own trip request.

Any block signals by the harmonic and/or waveform criteria, which can block the
traditional differential protection are overridden, and the differential protection
operates quickly without any further delay.

This logic guarantees a fast disconnection of a faulty power transformer for any
internal fault.

If the same fault has been classified as external, then generally, but not
unconditionally, a trip command is prevented. If a fault is classified as external, the
further analysis of the fault conditions is initiated. If all the instantaneous
differential currents in phases where start signals have been issued are free of
harmonic pollution, then a (minor) internal fault, simultaneous with a predominant
external fault can be suspected. This conclusion can be drawn because at external
faults, major false differential currents can only exist when one or more current
transformers saturate. In this case, the false instantaneous differential currents are
polluted by higher harmonic components, the 2nd, the 5th etc.

Sensitive negative sequence based turn-to-turn fault protection M13039-328 v4

The sensitive, negative sequence current based turn-to-turn fault protection detects
the low level faults, which are not detected by the traditional differential protection
until they develop into more severe faults, including power transformer iron core.
The sensitive protection is independent from the traditional differential protection
and is a very good complement to it. The essential part of this sensitive protection
is the internal/external fault discriminator. In order to be activated, the sensitive
protection requires no start signal from the traditional power transformer biased
differential protection. If magnitudes of HV and LV negative sequence current
contributions are above the set limit for IminNegSeq, then their relative positions
are determined. If the disturbance is characterized as an internal fault, then a
separate trip request will be placed. Any decision on the way to the final trip
request must be confirmed several times in succession in order to cope with
eventual CT transients. This causes a short additional operating time delay due to
this security count. For very low level turn-to-turn faults the overall response time
of this protection is about 30ms.

Instantaneous differential currents M13039-331 v4

The instantaneous differential currents are calculated from the instantaneous values
of the input currents in order to perform the harmonic analysis and waveform

192 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

analysis upon each one of them (see section "Harmonic and waveform block
criteria" for more information).

The instantaneous differential currents are calculated using the same matrix
expression as shown in equation and equation . The same matrices A, B and C are
used for these calculations. The only difference is that the matrix algorithm is fed
by instantaneous values of currents, that is, samples.

Harmonic and waveform block criteria M13039-334 v4

The two block criteria are the harmonic restrain and the waveform restrain. These
two criteria have the power to block a trip command by the traditional differential
protection, which produces start signals by applying the differential currents, and
the bias current, to the operate - restrain characteristic.

Harmonic restrain M13039-337 v7

The harmonic restrain is the classical restrain method traditionally used with power
transformer differential protections. The goal is to prevent an unwanted trip
command due to magnetizing inrush currents at switching operations, or due to
magnetizing currents at over-voltages.

The magnetizing currents of a power transformer flow only on one side of the
power transformer and are therefore always the cause of false differential currents.
The harmonic analysis (the 2nd and the 5th harmonic) is applied to the
instantaneous differential currents. Typical instantaneous differential currents
during power transformer energizing are shown in figure 44. The harmonic
analysis is only applied in those phases where start signals have been set.For
example, if the content of the 2nd harmonic in the instantaneous differential current
of phase L1 is above the setting I2/I1Ratio, then a block signal is set for that phase,
which can be read as BLK2HL1 output of the differential protection.

After the transformer has been energized (the energizing period has elapsed and the
inrush currents have disappeared), the 2nd harmonic blocking is conditionally
activated if NegSeqDiffEn is set to On. When the fault cannot be identified as
internal or external, the 2nd harmonic blocking signal is activated only if the
differential current is smaller than the bias current. If the differential current
becomes equal to or higher than the bias current, the differential function will be
released regardless of the 2nd harmonic blocking signal.

The 2nd harmonic blocking is always activated if NegSeqDiffEn is

set to Off.

Waveform restrain M13039-341 v4

The waveform restrain criterion is a good complement to the harmonic analysis.

The waveform restrain is a pattern recognition algorithm, which looks for intervals
within each fundamental power system cycle with low instantaneous differential
current. This interval is often called current gap in protection literature. However,
within differential function this criterion actually searches for long-lasting intervals

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 193

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

with low rate-of-change in instantaneous differential current, which are typical for
the power transformer inrush currents. Block signals BLKWAVLx are set in those
phases where such behavior is detected. The algorithm does not require any end
user settings. The waveform algorithm is automatically adapted dependent only on
the power transformer rated data.

IEC05000343 V1 EN-US

Figure 44: Inrush currents to a transformer as seen by a protective IED.

Typical is a high amount of the 2nd harmonic, and intervals of low
current, and low rate-of-change of current within each period.

Cross-blocking between phases M13039-384 v8

The basic definition of the cross-blocking is that one of the three phases can block
operation (that is, tripping) of the other two phases due to the harmonic pollution of
the differential current in that phase (that is, waveform, 2nd or 5th harmonic
content). In differential algorithm the user can control the cross-blocking between
the phases via the setting parameter CrossBlockEn=On.

When parameter CrossBlockEn=On cross blocking between phases is introduced.

There is no time settings involved, but the phase with the operating point above the
set bias characteristic (in the operate region) will be able to cross-block the other
two phases if it is itself blocked by any of the previously explained restrained
criteria. As soon as the operating point for this phase is below the set bias
characteristic (that is, in the restrain region) cross blocking from that phase will be
inhibited. In this way cross-blocking of the temporary nature is achieved. It should
be noted that this is the default setting value for this parameter.

When parameter CrossBlockEn=Off, any cross blocking between phases will be

disabled. It is recommended to use the value Off with caution in order to avoid the
unwanted tripping during initial energizing of the power transformer.

Switch onto fault feature M13039-499 v7

The transformer differential function has a built-in, advanced switch onto fault
feature. This feature can be enabled or disabled by a setting parameter SOTFMode.
When enabled this feature ensures quick differential protection tripping in cases

194 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

where a transformer is energized with an internal fault (for example, forgotten

earthing on transformer LV side). Operation of this feature is based on the fact that
a current gap (term current gap is explained under waveblock feature above) will
exist within the first power system cycle when healthy power transformer is
energized. If this is not the case the waveblock criterion will reset quickly. This
quick reset of the waveblock criterion will temporarily disable the second harmonic
blocking feature of the differential protection function. This consequently ensures
fast operation of the transformer differential function for a switch onto a fault
condition. It shall be noted that this feature is only active during initial power
transformer energizing, under the first 50 ms. When the switch onto fault feature is
disabled by the setting parameter SOTFMode, the waveblock and second harmonic
blocking features work in parallel and are completely independent from each other.

Open CT detection feature M13039-440 v8

Transformer differential protection has a built-in, advanced open CT detection

feature.

A sudden inadvertently opened CT circuit may cause an unexpected and unwanted

operation of the Transformer differential protection under normal load conditions.
Damage of secondary equipment may occur due to high voltage from open CT
circuit outputs. It is always an advantage, from the point of view of security and
reliability, to have the open CT detection function to block the transformer
differential protection function in case of an open CT condition, and produce an
alarm signal to the operational personnel to quickly correct the open CT condition.

The built-in open CT feature can be enabled or disabled by the setting parameter
OpenCTEnable (Off/On). When enabled, this feature tries to prevent mal-operation
when a loaded main CT connected to Transformer differential protection is by
mistake open circuited on the secondary side. Note that this feature can only detect
interruption of one CT phase current at a time. If two or even all three-phase
currents of one set of CTs are accidentally interrupted at precisely the same time,
this feature cannot operate. Transformer differential protection generates a trip
signal if the false differential current is sufficiently high. An open CT circuit is
typically detected in 12–14 ms, and if the load in the protected circuit is relatively
high, about the nominal load, the unwanted trip cannot always be prevented. Still,
the information about what was the cause of the open CT secondary circuit, is vital.

The principle applied to detect an open CT is a simple pattern recognition method,

similar to the waveform check used by the Power transformer differential
protection in order to detect the magnetizing inrush condition. The open CT
detection principle is based on the fact that for an open CT, the current in the phase
with the open CT suddenly drops to zero (that is, as seen by the protection), while
the currents of the other two phases continue as before.

The open CT function is supposed to detect an open CT under normal conditions,

that is, with the protected multi-terminal circuit under normal load (10...110% of
the rated load). If the load currents are very low or zero, the open CT condition
cannot be detected. In addition to load condition requirement, Open CT function
also checks the differential current on faulty phase. If the differential current is

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 195

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

lower than 50% of IdMin, the open CT condition cannot be detected. Therefore, the
Open CT algorithm only detects an open CT if the load on the power transformer is
10...110% of rated load and the differential current is higher than 50% of IdMin on
that phase. The search for an open CT starts 60 seconds (50 seconds in 60 Hz
systems) after the transformer is energized. The Open CT detection feature can also
be explicitly deactivated by setting: OpenCTEnable = 0 ( Off).

If an open CT is detected and the output OPENCT set to 1, then all the differential
functions are blocked, except the unrestrained (instantaneous) differential. An
alarm signal is also produced after a settable delay (tOCTAlarmDelay) to report to
operational personnel for quick remedy actions once the open CT is detected.
When the open CT condition is removed (that is, the previously open CT is
reconnected), the functions remain blocked for a specified interval of time, which
is also defined by a setting (tOCTResetDelay). This is to prevent an eventual mal-
operation after the reconnection of the previously open CT secondary circuit.

The open CT algorithm provides detailed information about the location of the
defective CT secondary circuit. The algorithm clearly indicates the IED side, CT
input and phase in which an open CT condition has been detected. These
indications are provided via the following outputs from the Transformer differential
protection function:

1. Output OPENCT provides instant information to indicate that an open CT

circuit has been detected.
2. Output OPENCTAL provides a time-delayed alarm that the open CT circuit
has been detected. Time delay is defined by the parameter tOCTAlarmDelay.
3. Integer output OPENCTIN provides information on the local HMI regarding
which open CT circuit has been detected (1=CT input No 1; 2=CT input No
2).
4. Integer output OPENCTPH provides information on the local HMI regarding
in which phase an open CT circuit has been detected (1=Phase L1; 2= Phase
L2; 3= Phase L3).

Once the open CT condition is declared, the algorithm stops to search for further
open CT circuits. It waits until the first open CT circuit has been corrected. Note
that once the open CT condition has been detected, it can be reset automatically
within the differential function. It is not possible to externally reset an open CT
condition. To reset the open CT circuit alarm automatically, the following
conditions must be fulfilled:

• Bias current is for at least one minute smaller than 110%

• The open CT condition in the defective CT circuit has been corrected (for
example, current asymmetry disappears)
• The above two conditions are fulfilled for a longer time than defined by the
setting parameter tOCTResetDelay

If an open CT has been detected in a separate group of three CTs, the algorithm is
reset either when the missing current returns to the normal value, or when all three

196 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

currents become zero. After the reset, the open CT detection algorithm starts again
to search for open CT circuits within the protected zone.

7.1.7.2 Logic diagram M13043-3 v8

The simplified internal logics, for transformer differential protection are shown in
the following figures.

ADM Differential function

Trafo
Data
A/D conversion scaling with CT

Phasor calculation of individual

Open CT logic on W1 side

Instantaneous (sample based) IDL1

Phasors & samples
phase current

Differential current, phase L1

ratio

IDL2
Derive equation to calculate differential currents

Instantaneous (sample based)

Differential current, phase L2

Instantaneous (sample based) IDL3

Differential current, phase L3

Negative sequence diff current IDNSMAG

& NS current contribution from
A/D conversion scaling with CT

Phasor calculation of individual

individual windings
Open CT logic on W2 side
phase current

IDL1MAG
Fundamental frequency (phasor
based) Diff current, phase L1 &
ratio

phase current contributions from

individual windings
Phasors & samples

IDL2MAG
Fundamental frequency (phasor
based) Diff current, phase L2 &
phase current contributions from
individual windings
IDL3MAG
Fundamental frequency (phasor
based) Diff current, phase L3 &
phase current contributions from
individual windings
MAX IBIAS

Settings for Zer. Seq.

Current Reduction

en06000554-3-en.vsd

IEC06000544 V3 EN-US

Figure 45: Treatment of measured currents within IED for transformer differential function

Figure 45 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done in case of a

two-winding transformer.

The following currents are inputs used in the power transformer differential
protection function. They must all be expressed in power system (primary) A.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 197

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

1. Instantaneous values of currents (samples) from the HV, and LV sides for two-
winding power transformers, and from the HV, the first LV, and the second LV
side for three-winding power transformers.
2. Currents from all power transformer sides expressed as fundamental frequency
phasors with their real and imaginary parts. These currents are calculated
within the protection function by the fundamental frequency Fourier filters.
3. Negative sequence currents from all power transformer sides expressed as
phasors. These currents are calculated within the protection function by the
symmetrical components module.

The power transformer differential protection:

1. Calculates three fundamental frequency differential currents and one common

bias current. The zero-sequence component can optionally be eliminated from
each of the three fundamental frequency differential currents and at the same
time from the common bias current.
2. Calculates three instantaneous differential currents. They are used for
harmonic, and waveform analysis. Instantaneous differential currents are
useful for post-fault analysis using disturbance recording
3. Calculates negative-sequence differential current. Contributions to it from both
(all three) power transformer sides are used by the internal/external fault
discriminator to detect and classify a fault as internal or external.

BLKUNRES

IdUnre a TRIPUNREL1
b>a AND
b
IDL1MAG

IBIAS STL1
AND
BLOCK
BLKRES

TRIPRESL1
AND
OR 1

IDL1
to fault logic

2nd BLK2HL1
Switch on

Harmonic

Wave BLKWAVL1
block

5th BLK5HL1
Harmonic
Cross Block
Cross Block to L2 or L3
from L2 or L3 AND
OR
AND
OpCrossBlock=On

en06000545.vsd
IEC06000545 V1 EN-US

Figure 46: Transformer differential protection simplified logic diagram for

Phase L1

198 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

Internal/ EXTFAULT
Neg.Seq. Diff External INTFAULT
Current Fault
Contributions discrimin
ator TRNSSENS
t
&
OpNegSeqDiff=On

IBIAS
a
b>a
b
Constant

TRNSUNR
STL1 &
STL2
>1
STL3

IEC05000167-2-en.vsd
IEC05000167-TIFF V2 EN-US

Figure 47: Transformer differential protection simplified logic diagram for

external/internal fault discriminator

TRIPRESL1
TRIPRESL2 TRIPRES
OR
TRIPRESL3

TRIPUNREL1
TRIPUNREL2 TRIPUNRE
OR
TRIPUNREL3

TRIP
TRNSSENS OR
TRNSUNR

en05000278.vsd
IEC05000278 V1 EN-US

Figure 48: Transformer differential protection internal grouping of tripping

signals

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 199

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

STL1
STL2 START
OR
STL3

BLK2HL1
BLK2HL2 BLK2H
OR
BLK2HL3

BLK5HL1
BLK5HL2 BLK5H
OR
BLK5HL3

BLKWAVL1
BLKWAVL2 BLKWAV
OR
BLKWAVL3

IEC05000279-2-en.vsd
IEC05000279-TIFF V2 EN-US

Figure 49: Transformer differential protection internal grouping of logical

signals

Logic in figures 46, 47, 48 and 49 can be summarized as follows:

1. The three fundamental frequency differential currents are applied in a phase-

wise manner to two limits. The first limit is the operate-restrain characteristic,
while the other is the high-set unrestrained limit. If the first limit is exceeded, a
start signal START is set. If the unrestrained limit is exceeded, an immediate
unrestrained trip TRIPUNRE and common trip TRIP are issued.
2. If a start signal is issued in a phase the harmonic and the waveform block
signals are checked. Only a start signal, which is free of all of its block signals
can result in a trip command. If the cross-block logic scheme is applied, then
only if all phases with set start signal are free of their respective block signals,
a restrained trip TRIPRES and common trip TRIP are issued
3. If a start signal is issued in a phase, and the fault has been classified as
internal, then any eventual block signals are overridden and unrestrained
negative-sequence trip TRNSUNR and common trip TRIP are issued without
any further delay. This feature is called the unrestrained negative-sequence
protection 110% bias.
4. The sensitive negative sequence differential protection is independent of any
start signals. It is meant to detect smaller internal faults such as turn-to-turn
faults, which are often not detected by the traditional differential protection.
The sensitive negative sequence differential protection starts whenever both
contributions to the total negative sequence differential current (that must be
compared by the internal/external fault discriminator) are higher than the value
of the setting IMinNegSeq. If a fault is positively recognized as internal, and
the condition is stable with no interruption for at least one fundamental
frequency cycle the sensitive negative sequence differential protection
TRNSSENS and common trip TRIP are issued. This feature is called the
sensitive negative sequence differential protection.
5. If a start signal is issued in a phase (see signal STL1), even if the fault has
been classified as an external fault, the instantaneous differential current of
that phase (see signal IDL1) is analyzed for the 2nd and the 5th harmonic

200 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

contents (see the blocks with the text inside: 2nd Harmonic; Wave block and
5th Harmonic). If there is less harmonic pollution. than allowed by the settings
I2/I1Ratio, and I5/I1Ratio, (then the outputs from the blocks 2nd harmonic and
5th harmonic is 0) then it is assumed that a minor simultaneous internal fault
must have occurred. Only under these conditions a trip command is allowed
(the signal TRIPRESL1 is = 1). The cross-block logic scheme is automatically
applied under such circumstances. (This means that the cross block signals
from the other two phases L2 and L3 is not activated to obtain a trip on the
TRIPRESL1 output signal in figure 46)
6. All start and blocking conditions are available as phase segregated as well as
common (that is three-phase) signals.

IDL1 MAG
a
a>b
I Diff Alarm b

IDL2 MAG tAlarm Delay

a
& IDALARM
a>b t
I Diff Alarm b

IDL3 MAG
a
a>b
I Diff Alarm b

en06000546.vsd
IEC06000546 V1 EN-US

Figure 50: Differential current alarm logic

7.1.8 Technical data IP12646-1 v1

M13046-1 v12

Table 94: T2WPDIF/T3WPDIF technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic Adaptable ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤
Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio > 90% -
Unrestrained differential current limit (100-5000)% ofIBase on high voltage ±1.0% of set
winding value
Minimum pickup (5-60)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Second harmonic blocking (5.0-100.0)% of fundamental ±1.0% of Ir
differential current Note:
fundamental
magnitude =
100% of Ir

Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 201

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Fifth harmonic blocking (5.0-100.0)% of fundamental ±5.0% of Ir
differential current Note:
fundamental
magnitude =
100% of Ir

Connection type for each of the Y or D -

windings
Phase displacement between high 0–11 -
voltage winding, W1 and each of the
windings, W2 and W3. Hour notation
*Operate time at 0 to 10 x IdMin, Min. = 25 ms -
restrained function Max. = 35 ms
*Reset time at 10 x IdMin to 0, Min. = 5 ms -
restrained function Max. = 15 ms
*Operate time at 0 to 10 x Idunre, Min. = 5 ms -
unrestrained function Max. = 15 ms
*Reset time at 10 x Idunre to 0, Min. = 15 ms -
unrestrained function Max. = 30 ms
**Operate time, unrestrained negative Min. = 10 ms -
sequence function Max. = 20 ms
**Reset time, unrestrained negative Min. = 10 ms -
sequence function Max. = 30 ms
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 5 x IdMin -
*Note: Data obtained with single input current group.
**Note: Data obtained with two input current groups. The rated symmetrical currents are applied on
both sides as pre- and after-fault currents. The fault is performed by increasing one phase current to
double on one side and decreasing same phase current to zero on the other side.

7.2 High impedance differential protection, single phase

HZPDIF IP14239-1 v4

7.2.1 Identification M14813-1 v4

IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

Function description
identification identification device number

High impedance differential protection,

HZPDIF Id 87
single phase

SYMBOL-CC V2 EN-US

7.2.2 Functionality M13071-3 v13

High impedance differential protection, single phase (HZPDIF) functions can be

used when the involved CT cores have the same turns ratio and similar
magnetizing characteristics. It utilizes an external CT secondary current summation

202 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

by wiring. Actually all CT secondary circuits which are involved in the differential
scheme are connected in parallel. External series resistor, and a voltage dependent
resistor which are both mounted externally to the IED, are also required.

The external resistor unit shall be ordered under IED accessories in the Product
Guide.

HZPDIF can be used to protect tee-feeders or busbars, reactors, motors, auto-

transformers, capacitor banks and so on. One such function block is used for a
high-impedance restricted earth fault protection. Three such function blocks are
used to form three-phase, phase-segregated differential protection.

7.2.3 Function block M13737-3 v3

HZPDIF
ISI* TRIP
BLOCK ALARM
BLKTR MEASVOLT

IEC05000363-2-en.vsd
IEC05000363 V2 EN-US

Figure 51: HZPDIF function block

7.2.4 Signals IP14244-1 v2

PID-6990-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 95: HZPDIF Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ISI GROUP - Single phase current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip

PID-6990-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 96: HZPDIF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
MEASVOLT REAL Measured RMS voltage on CT secondary side

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 203

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

7.2.5 Settings IP14245-1 v2

PID-6990-SETTINGS v1

Table 97: HZPDIF Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
U>Alarm 5 - 500 V 1 10 Alarm voltage level in volts on CT
secondary side
tAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to activate alarm
U>Trip 10 - 900 V 1 100 Operate voltage level in volts on CT
secondary side
SeriesResistor 50 - 20000 Ohm 1 250 Value of series resistor in Ohms

7.2.6 Monitored data

PID-6990-MONITOREDDATA v1

Table 98: HZPDIF Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MEASVOLT REAL - kV Measured RMS voltage
on CT secondary side

7.2.7 Operation principle IP14242-1 v2

M13075-3 v11

High impedance protection system is a simple technique which requires that all
CTs, used in the protection scheme, have relatively high knee point voltage, similar
magnetizing characteristic and the same ratio. These CTs are installed in all ends of
the protected object. In order to make a scheme all CT secondary circuits belonging
to one phase are connected in parallel. From the CT junction points a measuring
branch is connected. The measuring branch is a series connection of one variable
setting resistor (or series resistor) RS with high ohmic value and an over-current
element. Thus, the high impedance differential protection responds to the current
flowing through the measuring branch. However, this current is result of a
differential voltage caused by this parallel CT connection across the measuring
branch. Non-linear resistor (that is, metrosil) is used in order to protect entire
scheme from high peak voltages which may appear during internal faults. Typical
high impedance differential scheme is shown in Figure 52. Note that only one
phase is shown in this figure.

204 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

RS

3 U
I
1
I> (50) 5

2
GUID-5CEAF088-D92B-45E5-B98F-3083894A694C V1 EN-US

Figure 52: HZPDIF scheme

Where in the Figure:

1. shows one main CT secondary winding connected in parallel with all other
CTs, from the same phase, connected to this scheme.
2. shows the scheme earthing point.

It is of utmost importance to insure that only one earthing point

exists in such protection scheme.

3. shows the setting (stabilizing) resistor RS.

4. shows the over-current measuring element.

The series connection of stabilizing resistor and over-current

element is designated as measuring branch.

5. shows the non-linear resistor (that is, metrosil).

6. U is the voltage across the CT paralleling point (for example, across the
measuring branch).
7. I is the current flowing through the measuring branch.

U and I are interrelated in accordance with the following

formula U=RS × I.

Due to the parallel CT connections the high impedance differential relay can only
measure one current and that is the relay operating quantity. That means that there
is no any stabilizing quantity (that is, bias) in high-impedance differential
protection schemes. Therefore in order to guaranty the stability of the differential
relay during external faults the operating quantity must not exceed the set pickup

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 205

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

value. Thus, for external faults, even with severe saturation of some of the current
transformers, the voltage across the measuring branch shall not rise above the relay
set pickup value. To achieve that a suitable value for setting resistor RS is selected
in such a way that the saturated CT secondary winding provides a much lower
impedance path for the false differential current than the measuring branch. In case
of an external fault causing current transformer saturation, the non-saturated
current transformers drive most of the spill differential current through the
secondary winding of the saturated current transformer and not through the
measuring brunch of the relay. The voltage drop across the saturated current
transformer secondary winding appears also across the measuring brunch, however
it will typically be relatively small. Therefore, the pick-up value of the relay has to
be set above this false operating voltage.

See the application manual for operating voltage and sensitivity calculation.

7.2.7.1 Logic diagram M13075-9 v5

The logic diagram shows the operation principles for the 1Ph High impedance
differential protection function HZPDIF, see Figure 53.

The function utilizes the raw samples from the single phase current input connected
to it. Thus the twenty samples per fundamental power system cycle are available to
the HZPDIF function. These current samples are first multiplied with the set value
for the used stabilizing resistor in order to get voltage waveform across the
measuring branch. The voltage waveform is then filtered in order to get its RMS
value. Note that used filtering is designed in such a way that it ensures complete
removal of the DC current component which may be present in the primary fault
current. The voltage RMS value is then compared with set Alarm and Trip
thresholds. Note that the TRIP signal is intentionally delayed on drop off for 30 ms
within the function. The measured RMS voltage is available as a service value
from the function. The function has block and trip block inputs available as well.

IEC05000301 V1 EN-US

Figure 53: Logic diagram for 1Ph High impedance differential protection
HZPDIF

206 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

7.2.8 Technical data IP14246-1 v1

M13081-1 v12

Table 99: HZPDIF technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage (10-900) V ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
I=U/R ±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio >95% at (30-900) V -

Maximum continuous power U>Trip2/SeriesResistor ≤200 -
W
Operate time at 0 to 10 x Ud Min. = 5 ms
Max. = 15 ms
Reset time at 10 x Ud to 0 Min. = 75 ms
Max. = 95 ms
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Ud -

Operate time at 0 to 2 x Ud Min. = 25 ms

Max. = 35 ms
Reset time at 2 x Ud to 0 Min. = 50 ms
Max. = 70 ms
Critical impulse time 15 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Ud -

7.3 Low impedance restricted earth fault protection

REFPDIF IP14640-1 v6

7.3.1 Identification
M14843-1 v6

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Restricted earth fault protection, low REFPDIF 87N
impedance
IdN/I

SYMBOL-AA V1 EN-US

7.3.2 Functionality IP12418-1 v2

M13047-3 v19

Restricted earth-fault protection, low-impedance function (REFPDIF) can be used

on all directly or low-impedance earthed windings. The REFPDIF function
provides high sensitivity and high speed tripping as it protects each winding
separately and thus does not need inrush stabilization.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 207

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

The REFPDIF function is a percentage biased function with an additional zero

sequence current directional comparison criterion. This gives excellent sensitivity
and stability during through faults.

REFPDIF can also protect autotransformers. Five currents are measured at the most
complicated configuration as shown in Figure 54.

CT CT
YNdx
CT CB CB
Y d
CB CB

Autotransformer
CT
IED

The most typical CT CB CB CT

application
The most complicated
application - autotransformer

IEC05000058-2-en.vsd
IEC05000058-2 V1 EN-US

Figure 54: Examples of applications of the REFPDIF

7.3.3 Function block M13736-3 v8

REFPDIF
I3P* TRIP
I3PW1CT1* START
I3PW1CT2* DIROK
I3PW2CT1* BLK2H
I3PW2CT2* IRES
BLOCK IN
IBIAS
IDIFF
ANGLE
I2RATIO

IEC06000251_2_en.vsd
IEC06000251 V2 EN-US

Figure 55: REFPDIF function block

208 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

7.3.4 Signals IP12658-1 v2

PID-3772-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 100: REFPDIF Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for neutral current input
SIGNAL
I3PW1CT1 GROUP - Group signal for primary CT1 current input
SIGNAL
I3PW1CT2 GROUP - Group signal for primary CT2 current input
SIGNAL
I3PW2CT1 GROUP - Group signal for secondary CT1 current input
SIGNAL
I3PW2CT2 GROUP - Group signal for secondary CT2 current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

PID-3772-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 101: REFPDIF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip by restricted earth fault protection function
START BOOLEAN Start by restricted earth fault protection function
DIROK BOOLEAN Directional Criteria has operated for internal fault
BLK2H BOOLEAN Block due to 2-nd harmonic
IRES REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. residual current
IN REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. neutral current
IBIAS REAL Magnitude of the bias current
IDIFF REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current
ANGLE REAL Direction angle from zerosequence feature
I2RATIO REAL Second harmonic ratio

7.3.5 Settings IP12660-1 v2

PID-3772-SETTINGS v5

Table 102: REFPDIF Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IdMin 4.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 10.0 Maximum sensitivity in % of IBase
CTFactorPri1 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 CT factor for HV side CT1 (CT1rated/
HVrated current)
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 209

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTFactorPri2 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 CT factor for HV side CT2 (CT2rated/
HVrated current)
CTFactorSec1 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 CT factor for MV side CT1 (CT1rated/
MVrated current)
CTFactorSec2 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 CT factor for MV side CT2 (CT2rated/
MVrated current)

Table 103: REFPDIF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ROA 60 - 90 Deg 1 60 Relay operate angle for zero sequence
directional feature

Table 104: REFPDIF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

7.3.6 Monitored data

PID-3772-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 105: REFPDIF Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IRES REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq.
residual current
IN REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq.
neutral current
IBIAS REAL - A Magnitude of the bias
current
IDIFF REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq.
differential current
ANGLE REAL - deg Direction angle from
zerosequence feature
I2RATIO REAL - - Second harmonic ratio

7.3.7 Operation principle IP16290-1 v2

7.3.7.1 Fundamental principles of the restricted earth fault protection M5447-3 v14

Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance function (REFPDIF) detects earth
faults on earthed power transformer windings, most often an earthed star winding.
REFPDIF is a unit protection of the differential type. Since REFPDIF is based on
the zero sequence current, which theoretically only exists in case of an earth fault,
REFPDIF can be made very sensitive regardless of normal load currents. It is the

210 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

fastest protection a power transformer winding can have. The high sensitivity and
the high speed tend to make such a protection unstable. Special measures must be
taken to make it insensitive to conditions for which it should not operate, for
example, heavy through faults of phase-to-phase type or heavy external earth
faults.

REFPDIF is a differential protection of the low impedance type. All three-phase

currents, and the neutral point current, must be fed separately to REFPDIF. The
fundamental frequency components of all currents are extracted from all input
currents, while other eventual zero sequence components, such as the 3rd harmonic
currents, are fully suppressed. Then the residual current phasor is calculated from
the three line current phasors. This zero sequence current phasor is added to the
neutral current vectorially, in order to obtain differential current.

The following facts may be observed from Figure 56 and Figure 57, where the
three line CTs are shown as connected together in order to measure the residual 3Io
current, for the sake of simplicity.

These three zone of protection

zero-sequence
currents are not measured
Izs1
L1 L1

Power Izs1
L2 L2
system
Izs1 L3
L3
3Izs1

Uzs Current in the neutral

IL1+ IL2+IL3 = 3I0 (measured as IN ) serves
3I0 = 3Izs1 IN = -3Izs1 as a directional reference
Ifault (Summation in the IED) because it has the same
direction for both internal
Return path through
transformer and external faults.
Return path via
power system
External
fault
block operate Zero-sequence differential
region
IN current for external fault
3I0
Idiff = abs(3I0 + IN )
block Idiff = 3Izs1 - 3Izs1 = 0
ROA
External Internal
fault block fault
ROA = Relay Operate Angle
region region
IEC09000107-3-en.vsd
IEC09000107-3 V1 EN-US

Figure 56: Zero sequence currents at an external earth fault

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 211

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

zone of protection

Izs2 Izs1
L1 L1
Power Izs2 Izs1
L2 L2
system
Izs2 Izs1 L3
L3
3Izs1

Uzs Current in the neutral

IL1+ IL2+IL3 = 3I0 (measured as IN ) serves
IN = -3Izs1 as a directional reference
3I0 = -3Izs2 Ifault
(Summation in the IED) because it has the same
direction for both internal
and external faults.
Return path via Return path
power system through transformer
External
Zero-sequence differential
fault
block operate
region current for internal fault
3I0 Idiff = abs(3I0 + IN )
Idiff = 3Izs2 + 3Izs1 > 0
block IN (reference) Idiff = Ifault
ROA
External Internal
fault
block fault ROA = Relay Operate Angle
region region
IEC09000108-3-en.vsd
IEC09000108-3 V1 EN-US

Figure 57: Zero sequence currents at an internal earth fault

1. For an external earth fault (Figure 56), the residual current 3Io and the neutral
current IN have equal magnitude, but they are seen within the IED as 180
degrees out-of-phase if the current transformers are connected as in Figure 56,
which is the ABB recommended connection. The differential current becomes
zero as both CTs ideally measure exactly the same component of the earth
fault current.
2. For an internal fault, the total earth fault current is composed generally of two
zero sequence currents. One zero sequence current (3IZS1) flows towards the
power transformer neutral point and into the earth, while the other zero
sequence current (3IZS2) flows into the connected power system. These two
primary currents can be expected to have approximately opposite directions
(about the same zero sequence impedance angle is assumed on both sides of
the earth fault). However, on the secondary CT sides of the current
transformers, they will be approximately in phase if the current transformers
are oriented as in Figure 54, which is the orientation recommended by ABB.
The magnitudes of the two currents may be different, dependent on the
magnitudes of zero sequence impedances on both sides. No current can flow
towards the power system, if the only point where the system is earthed, is at
the protected power transformer. Likewise, no current can flow into the power
system, if the winding is not connected to the power system (circuit breaker
open and power transformer energized from the other side).
3. For both internal and external earth faults, the current in the neutral connection
IN always has the same direction, which is towards the earth (except in case of
autotransformers where the direction can vary).
4. The two internally processed zero sequence currents are 3Io and IN. The
vectorial sum is the REFPDIF differential current, which is equal to Idiff = IN
+3Io .

212 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

The line zero sequence (residual) current is calculated from 3 line (terminal)
currents. A bias quantity must give stability against false operations due to high
through fault currents. To stabilize REFPDIF at external faults, a fixed bias
characteristic is implemented.

REFPDIF should also be stable against heavy phase-to-phase internal faults, not
including earth. These faults may also give false zero sequence currents due to
saturated line CTs. Such faults, however are without neutral current, and can thus
be eliminated as a source of danger.

As an additional measure against unwanted operation, a directional check is made

in agreement with the above points 1 and 2. Operation is only allowed if the
currents 3Io and IN (as shown in Figure 56 and Figure 57) are both within the
operating region. By taking a smaller ROA, REFPDIF can be made more stable
under heavy external fault conditions, as well as under the complex conditions,
when external faults are cleared by other protections.

7.3.7.2 Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance differential protection M5447-20 v13

Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance (REFPDIF) is a protection of

differential type, a unit protection, whose settings are independent of any other
protection. It has some advantages compared to the transformer differential
protection. It is less complicated, as no current phase correction or magnitude
correction are needed, not even in the case of an eventual on-load tap changer
(OLTC). REFPDIF is not sensitive to inrush and overexcitation currents. The only
danger is an eventual current transformer saturation.

REFPDIF has only one operate-bias characteristic, which is described in the table
106 and shown in Figure 58.
Table 106: Data of the operate-bias characteristic of REFPDIF
Default sensitivity Max. base Min. base sensitivity End of zone First slope Second
Idmin (zone 1) sensitivity Idmin Idmin (zone 1) 1 slope
(zone 1)
% IBase % IBase % IBase % IBase % %
30 4 100 125 70 100

The differential protection REFPDIF calculates a differential current and a bias

current. In case of internal earth faults, the differential current is theoretically equal
to the total earth fault current. The bias current is supposed to give stability to
REFPDIF. The bias current is a measure of how high the currents are and how
difficult the conditions are under which the CTs operate. With a high bias, difficult
conditions can be suspected, and it will be more likely that the calculated
differential current has a component of a false current, primarily due to CT
saturation. This “law” is formulated by the operate-bias characteristic. This
characteristic divides the Idiff - Ibias plane in two areas. The area above the
operate-bias characteristic is the operate area, while the one below is the block
area, see Figure 58.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 213

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

operate current in pu

4 operate

Base Sensitivity Idmin

3
*************************************
Range : 4 % to 100 % rated current
Step : 1 % transformer rated current
2
zone 1 zone 2 second slope

1
minimum base sensitivity 100 %
default base sensitivity 30 % first slope block
maximum base sensitivity 4 %
0 1 2 3 4 5 6

1.25 pu bias current in per unit

IEC98000017-5-en.vsdx
IEC98000017 V5 EN-US

Figure 58: Operate - bias characteristic of the Restricted earth fault protection,
low impedance REFPDIF

7.3.7.3 Calculation of differential current and bias current M5447-47 v12

The differential current (operate current), as a fundamental frequency phasor, is

calculated as (with designations as in Figure 56 and Figure 57):

Idiff = IN + 3 Io
EQUATION1533 V1 EN-US (Equation 27)

where:

IN is current in the power transformer neutral as a fundamental frequency phasor.

3Io is residual current of the power transformer terminal currents as a phasor.

If there are two three-phase CT inputs, as in breaker-and-a-half configurations, see

figure 10, then their respective residual currents are added within the REFPDIF
function so that:

I3PW1 = I3PW1CT1 + I3PW1CT2

where the signals are defined in the input and output signal tables for REFPDIF.

The bias current is a measure (expressed internally as a true fundamental frequency

current in Amperes) of how difficult the conditions are under which the instrument

214 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

current transformers operate. Dependent on the magnitude of the bias current, the
corresponding zone (section) of the operate-bias characteristic is applied, when
deciding whether to trip, or not to trip. In general, the higher the bias current, the
higher the differential current required to produce a trip.

The bias current is the highest current of all separate input currents to REFPDIF,
that is, of current in phase L1, phase L2, phase L3, and the current in the neutral
point (designated as IN in Figure 56 and in Figure 57).

If there are two feeders included in the zone of protection of REFPDIF, as in case
of an auto-transformer with two feeders included on both sides, then the respective
bias current is found as the relatively highest of the following currents:

1
current[1] = max (I3PW1CT1) ×
CTFactorPri1
EQUATION1526 V1 EN-US (Equation 28)

1
current[2] = max (I3PW1CT2) ×
CTFactorPri2
EQUATION1527 V1 EN-US (Equation 29)

1
current[3] = max (I3PW2CT1) ×
CTFactorSec1
EQUATION1528 V1 EN-US (Equation 30)

1
current[4] = max (I3PW2CT2) ×
CTFactorSec2
EQUATION1529 V1 EN-US (Equation 31)

current[5] = IN
EQUATION1530 V1 EN-US (Equation 32)

The bias current is thus generally equal to none of the input currents. If all primary
ratings of the CTs were equal to IBase, then the bias current would be equal to the
highest current in Amperes. IBase shall be set equal to the rated current of the
protected winding where REFPDIF function is applied.

7.3.7.4 Detection of external earth faults M5447-75 v12

External faults are more common than internal earth faults for which the restricted
earth fault protection should operate. It is important that the restricted earth fault
protection remains stable during heavy external earth and phase-to-phase faults,
and also when such a heavy external fault is cleared by some other protection such
as overcurrent, or earth fault protection. The conditions during a heavy external
fault, and particularly immediately after the clearing of such a fault may be
complex. The circuit breaker’s poles may not open exactly at the same moment,
some of the CTs may still be highly saturated, and so on.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 215

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

The detection of external earth faults is based on the fact that for such a fault a high
neutral current appears first, while a false differential current only appears if one or
more current transformers saturate.

An external earth fault is thus assumed to have occurred when a high neutral
current suddenly appears, while at the same time the differential current Idiff
remains low, at least for a while. This condition must be detected before a trip
request is placed within REFPDIF. Any search for external fault is aborted if a trip
request has been placed. A condition for a successful detection is that it takes not
less than 4ms for the first CT to saturate.

For an internal earth fault, a true differential current develops immediately, while
for an external fault it only develops if a CT saturates. If a trip request comes first,
before an external fault could be positively detected, then it must be an internal
fault.

If an external earth fault has been detected, then the REFPDIF is temporarily
desensitized.

Directional criterion M5447-110 v12

The directional criterion is applied in order to positively distinguish between

internal and external earth faults. This check is an additional criterion, which
should prevent malfunctions at heavy external earth faults, and during the
disconnection of such faults by other protections. Earth faults on lines connecting
the power transformer occur much more often than earth faults on a power
transformer winding. It is important that the Restricted earth fault protection, low
impedance (REFPDIF) must remain stable during an external fault, and
immediately after the fault has been cleared by some other protection.

For an external earth faults with no CT saturation, the residual current in the lines
(3Io) and the neutral current (IN in Figure 56) are theoretically equal in magnitude
and are 180 degrees out-of-phase. The current in the neutral (IN) serves as a
directional reference because it has the same direction for both internal and
external earth faults. The directional criterion in REFPDIF protection makes it a
current-polarized protection.

However, if one or more CTs saturate under external fault conditions, then the
measured currents 3Io and IN may no longer be equal, nor will their positions in the
complex plane be exactly 180 degrees apart. There is a risk that the resulting false
differential current Idiff enters the operate area of the operate-restrain characteristic
under external fault conditions. If this happens, a directional test may prevent a
malfunction.

A directional check is only executed if:

1. a trip request signal has been issued (REFPDIF function START signal set to
1)
2. the residual current in lines (3Io) is at least 3% of the IBase current.

216 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

If a directional check is either unreliable or not possible to do, due to too small
currents, then the direction is cancelled as a condition for an eventual trip.

If a directional check is executed, the REFPDIF protection operation is only

allowed if currents 3Io and IN (as seen in Figure 56 and Figure 57) are both within
the operating region determined by the set value of ROA, in degrees.

ROA = 60 to 90 deg; where ROA stands for Relay Operate Angle.

Second harmonic analysis M5447-106 v10

When energizing a transformer a false differential current may appear in earth fault
protection, low impedance function (REFPDIF). The phase CTs may saturate due
to a high DC component with a long duration, but the current through the neutral
CT does not have either the same DC component or the same amplitude and the
risk for saturation of this CT is not as high. As a result, the differential current due
to the saturation may be so high that it reaches the operate characteristic. A
calculation of the content of 2nd harmonic in the neutral current is made when the
neutral current, residual current and bias current are within some windows and
some timing criteria are fulfilled. If the ratio between second and fundamental
harmonic exceeds 40%, REFPDIF is blocked.

7.3.7.5 Algorithm of the restricted earth fault protection M5447-95 v12

1. Check if current in the neutral Ineutral (IN) is less than 50% of the base
sensitivity Idmin. If yes, only service values are calculated, and rest of the
REFPDIF algorithm is not executed.
2. If current in the Ineutral (IN) is more than 50% of Idmin, then determine the
bias current Ibias.
3. Determine the differential (operate) current Idiff as a phasor, and calculate its
magnitude.
4. Check if the point P(Ibias, Idiff) is above the operate-bias characteristic. If yes,
increment the trip request counter by 1. If the point P(Ibias, Idiff) is found to
be below the operate-bias characteristic, then the trip request counter is reset to
zero.
5. If the trip request counter is still zero, search for an eventual heavy external
earth fault. The search is only made if the neutral current is at least 50% of the
Idmin current. If an external earth fault has been detected, a flag is set which
remains set until the external fault has been cleared. The external fault flag is
reset to zero when Ineutral falls below 50% of the base sensitivity Idmin. Any
search for an external fault is aborted if trip request counter is greater than
zero.
6. As long as the external fault persists, an additional temporary trip condition is
introduced. This means that REFPDIF is temporarily desensitized.
7. If point P(Ibias, Idiff) is found to be above the operate-bias characteristic), so
that trip request counter is greater than zero, a directional check can be made.
The directional check is made only if Iresidual (3Io) is more than 3% of the
IBase current. If the result of the check means “external fault”, then the

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 217

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

internal trip request is reset. If the directional check cannot be executed, then
direction is no longer a condition for a trip.
8. When neutral current, residual current and bias current are within some
windows and some timing criteria are fulfilled, the ratio of 2nd to fundamental
harmonic is calculated. If it is found to be above 60%, the trip request counter
is reset and TRIP remains zero.
9. Finally, a check is made if the trip request counter is equal to, or higher than 2.
If yes, and at the same instance of time tREFtrip, the actual bias current at this
instance of time tREFtrip is at least 50% of the highest bias current Ibiasmax
(Ibiasmax is the highest recording of any of the three phase currents measured
during the disturbance), then REFPDIF sets output TRIP to 1. If the counter is
less than 2, the TRIP signal remains zero.

7.3.8 Technical data IP12661-1 v1

M13062-1 v19

Table 107: REFPDIF technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic Adaptable ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% -

Minimum pickup, IdMin (4.0-100.0)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Directional characteristic Fixed 180 degrees or ±60 to ±90 ±2.0 degrees

degrees
Operate time, trip at 0 to 10 x IdMin Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, trip at 10 x IdMin to 0 Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Second harmonic blocking 60.0% of fundamental (hidden ±1.0% of Ir
setting)

7.4 Additional security logic for differential protection

LDRGFC GUID-0E064528-0E70-4FA1-87C7-581DADC1EB55 v2

7.4.1 Identification
GUID-3081E62B-3E96-4615-97B8-2CCA92752658 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Additional security logic for differential LDRGFC - 11
protection

218 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

7.4.2 Functionality GUID-8F918A08-E50E-4E7B-BDCA-FF0B5534B289 v3

Additional security logic for differential protection (LDRGFC) can help the
security of the protection especially when the communication system is in
abnormal status or for example when there is unspecified asymmetry in the
communication link. It helps to reduce the probability for mal-operation of the
protection. LDRGFC is more sensitive than the main protection logic to always
release operation for all faults detected by the differential function. LDRGFC
consists of four sub functions:

• Phase-to-phase current variation

• Zero sequence current criterion
• Low voltage criterion
• Low current criterion

Phase-to-phase current variation takes the current samples as input and it calculates
the variation using the sampling value based algorithm. Phase-to-phase current
variation function is major one to fulfill the objectives of the startup element.

Zero sequence criterion takes the zero sequence current as input. It increases the
security of protection during the high impedance fault conditions.

Low voltage criterion takes the phase voltages and phase-to-phase voltages as
inputs. It increases the security of protection when the three-phase fault occurred
on the weak end side.

Low current criterion takes the phase currents as inputs and it increases the
dependability during the switch onto fault case of unloaded line.

The differential function can be allowed to trip as no load is fed through the line
and protection is not working correctly.

Features:

• Startup element is sensitive enough to detect the abnormal status of the

protected system
• Startup element does not influence the operation speed of main protection
• Startup element would detect the evolving faults, high impedance faults and
three phase fault on weak side
• It is possible to block the each sub function of startup element
• Startup signal has a settable pulse time

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 219

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

7.4.3 Function block GUID-A205A0BB-C09E-42E2-B664-1863E1FF2A0A v2

LDRGFC
I3P* START
U3P* STCVL1L2
BLOCK STCVL2L3
BLKCV STCVL3L1
BLKUC STUC
BLK3I0 ST3I0
BLKUV STUV
REMSTUP

IEC14000015-1-en.vsd
IEC14000015 V1 EN-US

Figure 59: LDRGFC function block

7.4.4 Signals
PID-3558-INPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 108: LDRGFC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKCV BOOLEAN 0 Block of ph to ph current variation criterion
BLKUC BOOLEAN 0 Block of the low current criterion
BLK3I0 BOOLEAN 0 Block of zero sequence current criterion
BLKUV BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage criterion
REMSTUP BOOLEAN 0 Startup signal of remote end

PID-3558-OUTPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 109: LDRGFC Output signals

Name Type Description
START BOOLEAN General startup signal
STCVL1L2 BOOLEAN Start signal for current variation criterion for
phase L1L2
STCVL2L3 BOOLEAN Start signal for current variation criterion for
phase L2L3
STCVL3L1 BOOLEAN Start signal for current variation criterion for
phase L3L1
STUC BOOLEAN Start signal for low current criterion
ST3I0 BOOLEAN Start signal for zero sequence current criterion
STUV BOOLEAN Start signal for under voltage criterion

220 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

7.4.5 Settings
PID-3558-SETTINGS v9

Table 110: LDRGFC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
tStUpReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 7.000 Reset delay for startup signal
OperationCV Off - - On Operation current variation Off/On
On
ICV> 1 - 100 %IB 1 20 Fixed threshold for ph to ph current
variation criterion
OperationUC Off - - On Operation low current criterion Off/On
On
IUC< 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Start value for low current operation in %
of IBase
Operation3I0 Off - - On Operation zero sequence current
On criterion Off/On
I3I0> 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Start value for zero sequence current
criterion in % of IBase
OperationUV Off - - On Operation under voltage criterion Off/On
On
UPhN< 1 - 100 %UB 1 60 Start value for phase voltage criterion in
% of UBase
UPhPh< 1 - 100 %UB 1 60 Start value for ph to ph voltage criterion
in % of UBase

Table 111: LDRGFC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tCV 0.000 - 0.005 s 0.001 0.002 Time delay for phase to phase current
variation
tUC 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay for low current criterion
t3I0 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for zero sequence current
criterion
tUV 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for low voltage criterion

Table 112: LDRGFC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 221

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

7.4.6 Monitored data

PID-3558-MONITOREDDATA v8

Table 113: LDRGFC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A Current RMS value for
phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current RMS value for
phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current RMS value for
phase L3
3I0 REAL - A Zero sequence current
value
UL1 REAL - kV Voltage RMS value for
phase L1
UL2 REAL - kV Voltage RMS value for
phase L2
UL3 REAL - kV Voltage RMS value for
phase L3
UL12 REAL - kV Voltage RMS value for
ph to ph L1L2
UL23 REAL - kV Voltage RMS value for
ph to ph L2L3
UL31 REAL - kV Voltage RMS value for
ph to ph L3L1

7.4.7 Operation principle GUID-60091A2A-AC10-4E04-B4B8-C190E3E07D3E v5

Additional security logic for differential protection (LDRGFC) takes the current
samples, current RMS values, phase voltage values, phase-to-phase voltage values,
zero sequence current and remote side startup signals as inputs.

Startup signal becomes activated when any one of the current variation startup
signal, zero sequence current startup signal, voltage startup signal, and current
startup signal is activated.

Phase-to-phase current variation takes current samples and generates the startup
signal by comparing with the start value.

If the zero sequence current value is greater than the start value of zero sequence
current then the zero sequence current startup signal will be activated.

Voltage startup signal becomes activated when the any of phase voltage and line
voltage is less than the voltage start value and the remote startup signal has to be
activated.

Current startup signal becomes activated when the current value in all phases is
less than current start value.

222 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

Phase-to-phase current variation

Phase-to-phase current variation one is main startup element. It covers most of the
abnormal status of the system. The phase-to-phase current variation fails in high
impedance faults, three-phase fault on weak side and switch onto fault on unloaded
line because of low sensitivity in these cases.

Phase-to-phase current variation takes the current samples as input and the signal is
evaluated using the sampling value based algorithm.

The phase-to-phase current variation criterion is shown below:

DiFF > 1.8DIT + DI ZD

EQUATION2255 V1 EN-US

Where:
ΔiФФ sampling value of phase-to-phase current variation

ΔIZD setting of fixed threshold, which corresponds to setting ICV>. The default value for
the setting is 0.2·IBase, where IBase is the base current.
ΔIT float threshold

It is the full-circle integral of the phase-to-phase current variation

1 2T -1
DI T = å | DiFF (t - n) |
T n =T
EQUATION2256 V1 EN-US

Where:
T count of sample values in one cycle

ΔiФФ is calculated using the below formula:

Di (k ) = [i ( k ) - i (k - N )] - [i (k - N ) - i (k - 2 N )]
= i ( k ) - 2i ( k - N ) + i (k - 2 N )
EQUATION2257 V1 EN-US

N is the number of samples in one cycle.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 223

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

tCV
STCVL1L2
t
cont

I3P Current variation tCV

STCVL2L3
subfunction t
i
tCV
STCVL3L1
t

OR STCV
cont

IEC10000295-1-en.vsd
IEC10000295 V1 EN-US

Figure 60: Current variation logic diagram

tCV is the time setting for the change of current criterion. Phase current samples
are included in input signal I3P.

Zero sequence current criterion

Zero sequence criterion is mainly for detection of remote IED high resistance faults
or some gradual faults. The criterion takes the zero sequence current as input. Zero
sequence current is compared with I3I0> for the t3I0 time to generate the zero
sequence current startup signal.

I3P a
a>b t3I0
I3IO> b ST3I0
AND t

BLK3I0
BLOCK OR

IEC09000778-2-en.vsd
IEC09000778 V2 EN-US

Figure 61: Zero sequence current criterion logic diagram

Here I3I0> is the setting of the maximum possible non-faulted zero sequence
current for the protected line. The default value for this setting is 0.1 · IBase where
IBase is the rated current of the CT.

t3I0 is the time setting for the zero sequence current criterion.

The zero sequence current criterion can be blocked by activating the BLK3I0 input
signal.

Low voltage criterion

224 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 7
Differential protection

Low voltage criterion is mainly for detection of the three phase faults occurring on
weak side with pre fault no load condition. The low voltage criterion takes the
voltage phase values, voltage phase-to-phase values and remote startup signals as
inputs. The logic for low voltage criterion is shown below:

U3P (UPhN) a
a<b
UPhN< b
OR
U3P (UPhPh) a
a<b
UPhPh< b
tUV STUV
REMSTUP (Recived)
AND t

BLKUV
BLOCK OR

IEC09000779-2-en.vsd
IEC09000779 V2 EN-US

Figure 62: Low voltage criterion logic diagram

Voltage phase value is compared with the start value of voltage phase and voltage
phase-to-phase value is compared with the start value of voltage phase-to-phase. If
any of the phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltages is below the set voltage levels
for some time duration (tUV) then the low voltage START signal becomes
activated after receiving the remote startup signal. Low voltage criterion can be
blocked by activating BLKUV input signal.

If there are more than one remote IED, all the startup signals of the remote ends are
logically OR to obtain the REMSTUP signal from the remote side as input.

Low current criterion

The current in each phase is compared to the set current level. If all currents are
below setting IUC<, the STUC output is activated after the set delay tUC.

I3P
a
a<b tUC
IUC< b STUC
AND t

BLKUC
BLOCK OR

IEC09000780-2-en.vsd
IEC09000780 V2 EN-US

Figure 63: Low current criterion logic diagram

Security logic for differential protection

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 225

Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Differential protection

The configuration for the additional security logic for differential protection is
shown in Figure 64. The function will release tripping of the line differential
protection up to the end of timer tStUpReset.

Phase-phase STCV
i
current variation

Zero sequence ST3IO

I0 > tStUpReset
current criterion START Local side start-up
t
Send signal to
Low voltage
OR remote side
criterion STUV
ULOW <

Low current
criterion STUC
I0 <

REMSTUP

IEC10000296-2-en.vsd
IEC10000296 V2 EN-US

Figure 64: Additional security logic for differential protection. Logic diagram for
start up element.

7.4.8 Technical data

GUID-0BD8D3C9-620A-426C-BDB5-DAA0E4F8247F v4

Table 114: LDRGFC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current, zero (1-100)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir
sequence current
Operate current, low current (1-100)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir
operation
Operate voltage, phase to (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
neutral
Operate voltage, phase to (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
phase
Independent time delay, zero (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms
sequence current at 0 to 2 x whichever is greater
Iset

Independent time delay, low (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 40 ms

current operation at 2 x Iset to whichever is greater
0
Independent time delay, low (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms
voltage operation at 2 x Uset whichever is greater
to 0
Reset time delay for startup (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms
signal at 0 to 2 x Uset whichever is greater

226 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Section 8 Impedance protection

8.1 Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral

characteristic ZMQPDIS, ZMQAPDIS, ZDRDIR IP14498-1 v4

8.1.1 Identification M14852-1 v6

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral ZMQPDIS 21
characteristic (zone 1)

S00346 V1 EN-US

Distance protection zone, quadrilateral ZMQAPDIS 21

characteristic (zone 2-5)

S00346 V1 EN-US

Directional impedance quadrilateral ZDRDIR 21D

Z<->

IEC09000167 V1 EN-US

8.1.2 Functionality M13787-3 v14

The line distance protection is an up to five (depending on product variant) zone

full scheme protection function with three fault loops for phase-to-phase faults and
three fault loops for phase-to-earth faults for each of the independent zones.
Individual settings for each zone in resistive and reactive reach gives flexibility for
use as back-up protection for transformer connected to overhead lines and cables of
different types and lengths.

Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic (ZMQPDIS) together with

Phase selection with load encroachment (FDPSPDIS) has functionality for load
encroachment, which increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults on
heavily loaded lines, as shown in figure 65.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 227

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Forward
operation

Reverse
operation

en05000034.vsd
IEC05000034 V1 EN-US

Figure 65: Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with Phase selection
with load encroachment function FDPSPDIS activated

The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a
sensitive and reliable built-in phase selection makes the function suitable in
applications with single-phase autoreclosing.

Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of zone 1 at

load exporting end at phase-to-earth faults on heavily loaded power lines.

The distance protection zones can operate independently of each other in

directional (forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable,
together with different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines
and cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-
terminal lines.

8.1.3 Function block IP12800-1 v2

SEMOD115983-4 v8

ZMQPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
VTSZ TRL3
BLKTR START
STCND STL1
DIRCND STL2
STL3
STND

IEC06000256-2-en.vsd
IEC06000256 V2 EN-US

Figure 66: ZMQPDIS function block

228 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

ZMQAPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
VTSZ TRL3
BLKTR START
STCND STL1
DIRCND STL2
STL3
STND

IEC09000884-1-en.vsd
IEC09000884 V1 EN-US

Figure 67: ZMQAPDIS function block (zone 2 - 5)

The two inputs I3P — Three phase group signal for current and
U3P — Three phase group signal for voltage, must be connected to
non-adaptive SMAI blocks if ANY OF THE ZONES are set for
directional operation. That is, the parameter DFTReference in used
SMAI must be set to InternalDFTRef. If adaptive SMAI block is
used this might result in a wrong directional and reach evaluation.
SEMOD54537-4 v5

ZDRDIR
I3P* STDIRCND
U3P*
IEC10000007-2-en.vsd

IEC10000007 V2 EN-US

Figure 68: ZDRDIR function block

8.1.4 Signals
PID-3651-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 115: ZMQPDIS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
STCND INTEGER 0 External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 229

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

PID-3651-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 116: ZMQPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
START BOOLEAN General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
STND BOOLEAN Non-directional start, issued from any phase or
loop

PID-3650-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 117: ZMQAPDIS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
STCND INTEGER 0 External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

PID-3650-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 118: ZMQAPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
START BOOLEAN General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
STND BOOLEAN Non-directional start, issued from any phase or
loop

230 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

PID-3545-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 119: ZDRDIR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL

PID-3545-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 120: ZDRDIR Output signals

Name Type Description
STDIRCND INTEGER Binary coded directional information per
measuring loop

8.1.5 Settings
GUID-62142086-79A9-46FF-A14F-BA0CDD6B6466 v1

Signals and settings for ZMQPDIS are valid for zone 1 while
signals and settings for ZMQAPDIS are valid for zone 2 - 5

PID-3651-SETTINGS v6

Table 121: ZMQPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationDir Non-directional - - Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
X1 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach
R1 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle
X0 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach
R0 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle
RFPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-
Ph
RFPE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E
OperationPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-
On Phase loops
OpModetPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph
OperationPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth
On loops
OpModetPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 231

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-E
IMinOpPP 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate delta current for
Phase-Phase loops
IMinOpPE 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpIN 5 - 1000 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate residual current for
Phase-Earth loops

Table 122: ZMQPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

PID-3650-SETTINGS v6

Table 123: ZMQAPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationDir Non-directional - - Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
X1 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach
R1 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle
X0 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach
R0 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle
RFPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-
Ph
RFPE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E
OperationPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-
On Phase loops
OpModetPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph
OperationPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth
On loops
OpModetPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-E
IMinOpPP 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate delta current for
Phase-Phase loops
IMinOpPE 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops

232 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Table 124: ZMQAPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

PID-3545-SETTINGS v6

Table 125: ZDRDIR Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IMinOpPP 5 - 30 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase-phase current
for Phase-Phase loops
IMinOpPE 5 - 30 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
ArgNegRes 90 - 175 Deg 1 115 Angle of blinder in second quadrant for
forward direction
ArgDir 5 - 45 Deg 1 15 Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for
forward direction

Table 126: ZDRDIR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.1.6 Monitored data

PID-3545-MONITOREDDATA v6

Table 127: ZDRDIR Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
L1Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L2Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L3Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L1R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L1
L1X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L1
L2R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L2
L2X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L2
L3R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L3
L3X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L3

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 233

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.1.7 Operation principle

8.1.7.1 Full scheme measurement M16923-92 v4

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type,
which means that each fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase faults
for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.

Figure 69 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for up to five,

impedance-measuring zones. There are 3 to 5 zones depending on product type and
variant.

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 1

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 2

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 3

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 4

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 5

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

Zone RV

IEC05000458-2-en.vsd
IEC05000458 V2 EN-US

Figure 69: The different measuring loops at phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-
phase fault.

The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one
independent distance protection IED with six measuring elements.

8.1.7.2 Impedance characteristic M16923-100 v7

The distance measuring zone includes six impedance measuring loops; three
intended for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as,
three-phase faults.

The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-
directional impedance characteristics presented in figure 70 and figure 71. The
phase-to-earth characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-
to-phase characteristic presents the per phase reach.

234 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/loop)

R1+Rn

RFPE RFPE

X0-X1
Xn =
3
X1+Xn R0-R1
Rn =
3
jN jN
R (Ohm/loop)

RFPE RFPE

X1+Xn

RFPE RFPE
IEC11000427-1-en.vsd

R1+Rn
IEC11000427 V1 EN-US

Figure 70: Characteristic for phase-to-earth measuring, ohm/loop domain

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 235

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/phase)

RFPP R1 RFPP
2 2
X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PEPG--X31XRVPE
1RVPG
XNRV =
XNRV =
33
XX
X00PE
0PE
PG --1X
-X 11FWPE
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW===
XNFW
XNFW
3
X1 3 3

j j
R (Ohm/phase)

RFPP RFPP
2 2

X1

RFPP R1 RFPP
2 2
IEC11000428-1-en.vsd
IEC11000428 V1 EN-US

Figure 71: Characteristic for phase-to-phase measuring

The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in
figure 72. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault)
resistive reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.

236 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

IL1 R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
UL1
element

Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1 RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)

0
IN (R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )

IL1 R1 + j X1 Phase-to-phase
UL1 element L1-L2
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase RFPP
L1-L2 IL2
UL2 (Arc resistance)
R1 + j X1

IL1 R1 + j X1 0.5·RFPP Phase-to-phase

UL1 element L1-L3
Three-phase
fault
IL3
UL3
R1 + j X1 0.5·RFPP
IEC08000282-2-en.vsd
IEC08000282 V2 EN-US

Figure 72: Fault loop model

The R1 and jX1 in figure 72 represents the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The settings and RFPP are the eventual fault
resistances in the faulty place.

Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 72, there is of course fault
current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration
merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase.

The zone can be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction

through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated
in figure 73. The impedance reach is symmetric, in the sense that it conforms for
forward and reverse direction (there are different forward and reverse settings - Zx
and ZxRev respectively, where x = 1 - 5). Therefore, all reach settings apply to
both directions.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 237

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

X X X

R R R

Non-directional Forward Reverse

IEC05000182-2-en.vsdx

IEC05000182 V2 EN-US

Figure 73: Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zones

8.1.7.3 Minimum operating current M16923-127 v5

The operation of Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic

(ZMQPDIS) is blocked if the magnitude of input currents fall below certain
threshold values.

The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn < IMinOpPE.

For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all
phase-to-earth loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIN, regardless of the phase
currents.

ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. IN is the RMS value of the vector
sum of the three-phase currents, that is, residual current 3I0.

The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if ILmLn < IMinOpPP.

ILmLn is the RMS value of the vector difference between phase currents Lm and
Ln.

All three current limits IMinOpPE, IMinOpIN and IMinOpPP are

automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set
to operate in reverse direction, that is, OperationDir = Reverse.

238 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

8.1.7.4 Measuring principles M16923-4 v7

Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The
apparent impedances at phase-to-phase faults follow equation 33 (example for a
phase L1 to phase L2 fault).

UL1 – UL2
Zapp = -------------------------
I L1 – IL2
EQUATION1222 V1 EN-US (Equation 33)

Here U and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the
respective phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3)

The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner to phase-to-earth

faults (example for a phase L1 to earth fault) according to equation 34.

U L1
Z app =
I L1 + I N × KN
EQUATION1223 V2 EN-US (Equation 34)

Where:
are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
U L1
I L1
IN

KN
is defined as:

Z 0 - Z1
KN =
3 × Z1
EQUATION-2105 V2 EN-US

Z 0 = R 0 + jX 0
EQUATION2106 V2 EN-US

Z 1 = R1 + jX 1
EQUATION2107 V2 EN-US

Where
R0 is setting of the resistive zero sequence reach
X0 is setting of the reactive zero sequence reach
R1 is setting of the resistive positive sequence reach

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 239

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

X1 is setting of the reactive positive sequence reach

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in IED point. This results in the same
reach along the line for all types of faults.

The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and

reactance X.

The formula given in equation 34 is only valid for radial feeder application without
load. When load is considered in the case of single phase-to-earth fault,
conventional distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach
at importing end. The IED has an adaptive load compensation which increases the
security in such applications.

Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D
converter. The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is
distributed into memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops,
sampled values of voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples
(DI) are brought from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.

The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related
to the loop impedance according to equation 35,

X Di
U = R × i + ------ × -----
w 0 Dt
EQUATION1224 V1 EN-US (Equation 35)

in complex notation, or:

X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R × Re ( I ) + ------ × ------------------
w0 Dt

EQUATION354 V1 EN-US (Equation 36)

X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R × Im ( I ) + ------ × -----------------
w0 Dt

EQUATION355 V1 EN-US (Equation 37)

with

w0 = 2 × p × f 0
EQUATION356 V1 EN-US (Equation 38)

where:
Re designates the real component of current and voltage,
Im designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and
f0 designates the rated system frequency

240 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real
value of the voltage and substitutes it in the equation for the imaginary part. The
equation for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is
equal to:

Im ( U ) × DRe ( I ) – Re ( U ) × D Im ( I )
R m = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) × Im ( I ) – D Im ( I ) × Re ( I )
EQUATION357 V1 EN-US (Equation 39)

Re ( U ) × Im ( I ) – Im ( U ) × Re ( I )
Xm = w 0 × Dt × -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) × Im ( I ) – DIm ( I ) × Re ( I )
EQUATION358 V1 EN-US (Equation 40)

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the
set zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive
tripping results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the
capacitive voltage transformers or by other factors.

The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and

reverse directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase
locked positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures
unlimited directional sensitivity for faults close to the IED point.

8.1.7.5 Directional impedance element for quadrilateral characteristics M16923-139 v6

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance

quadrilateral function ZDRDIR. Equation 41 and equation 42 are used to classify
that the fault is in forward direction for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase
fault.

0.8 × U 1L1 + 0.2 × U 1L1 M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1
EQUATION725 V2 EN-US (Equation 41)

For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is according to.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 241

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

0.8 × U 1L1 L 2 + 0.2 × U 1L1 L 2 M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1 L 2
EQUATION726 V2 EN-US (Equation 42)

where:
ArgDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 115 degrees, see figure 74.
is positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1
U 1L1
is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1
U 1L1M
is phase current in phase L1
I L1
is voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
U 1L1L 2
is memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
U 1L1L 2 M
is current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
I L1L 2

The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115
degrees respectively (as shown in figure 74). It should not be changed unless
system studies have shown the necessity.

ZDRDIR gives binary coded directional information per measuring loop on the
output STDIRCND.

STDIR= STFWL1*1+STFWL2*2+STFWL3*4+STFWL1L2*8+
+STFWL2L3*16+STFWL3L1*32+STRVL1*64+STRVL2*128+
+STRVL3*256+STRVL1L2*512+STRVL2L3*1024+STRVL3L1*2048

242 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

ArgNegRes

ArgDir
R

en05000722.vsd
IEC05000722 V1 EN-US

Figure 74: Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault in
Directional impedance quadrilateral function ZDRDIR

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated

by 180 degrees.

The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive sequence voltage exceeds
5% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for all
unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.

For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.

The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored.

After 100 ms the following occurs:

• If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set IED rated current IBase), the condition seals
in.
• If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.
• If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element
in the reverse direction remains in operation.
• If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory
resets until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 243

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.1.7.6 Simplified logic diagrams M13841-35 v2

Distance protection zones M13841-10 v9

The design of the distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops:
phase-to-earth as well as phase-to-phase.

Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by L1N, L2N and L3N. The phase-to-
phase signals are designated by L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1.

Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one

logical signal for each separate measuring loop:

• Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described

above.
• Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 75.

Two types of function block, ZMQPDIS and ZMQAPDIS, are used in the IED.
ZMQPDIS is used for zone 1 and ZMQAPDIS for zone 2 - 5.

The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values
from Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function
FDPSPDIS within the IED, which are converted within the zone measuring
function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition separately.
Input signal STCND is connected to FDPSPDIS or FMPSPDIS function output
STCNDZ.

The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the
distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both
forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filters out the
relevant signals depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It must be
configured to the STDIR output on ZDRDIR function.

244 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

STZMPP
OR
STCND

AND STNDL1L2
L1L2

STNDL2L3
L2L3 AND

L3L1 AND STNDL3L1

AND STNDL1N
L1N

AND STNDL2N
L2N

STNDL3N
L3N AND

OR STPE

OR
VTSZ STND
OR AND
BLOCK
BLOCFUNC BLK

99000557-2.vsd
IEC99000557-TIFF V3 EN-US

Figure 75: Conditioning by a group functional input signal STCND, external

start condition

Composition of the phase start signals for a case, when the zone operates in a non-
directional mode, is presented in figure 76.

IEC00000488-TIFF V1 EN-US

Figure 76: Composition of starting signals in non-directional operating mode

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 245

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone
operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 77.

STNDL1N
AND
DIRL1N
STZMPE.
OR
STNDL2N
DIRL2N AND

STNDL3N 15 ms
OR STL1
AND AND t
DIRL3N

STNDL1L2
DIRL1L2 AND 15 ms
OR STL2
AND t
STNDL2L3
DIRL2L3 AND
15 ms
OR STL3
STNDL3L1 AND t
DIRL3L1 AND

STZMPP
OR

BLK

15 ms
OR START
AND t

IEC09000888-2-en.vsd
IEC09000888 V2 EN-US

Figure 77: Composition of start signals in directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented
in figure 78.

246 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Timer tPP=On
STZMPP AND tPP
AND
t

BLOCFUNC
OR OR
tPE
t
AND
Timer tPE=On AND
STZMPE 15ms
BLKTR AND t
TRIP
BLK OR

STL1 AND TRL1

STL2 AND TRL2

STL3 AND TRL3

IEC09000887-3-en.vsdx

IEC09000887 V3 EN-US

Figure 78: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone

8.1.8 Technical data IP12804-1 v1

M13842-1 v15

Table 128: ZMQPDIS Technical data

Function
Number of zones
Minimum operate residual
current, zone 1
Minimum operate current,
phase-to-phase and phase-to-
earth
Positive sequence reactance
Positive sequence resistance
Zero sequence reactance
Zero sequence resistance
Fault resistance, phase-to-earth
Fault resistance, phase-to-
phase
Table continues on next page
Range or value Accuracy
Max 5 with selectable
direction
(5-1000)% of IBase
(10-1000)% of IBase
(0.10-3000.00) Ω/phase
(0.01-1000.00) Ω/phase
(0.10-9000.00) Ω/phase
(0.01-3000.00) Ω/phase
(0.10-9000.00) Ω/loop
(0.10-3000.00) Ω/loop
-
-
-
±2.0% static accuracy
±2.0 degrees static angular
accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 247

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees -
measured with CVT’s and
0.5<SIR<30
Definite time delay Ph-Ph and (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is
Ph-E operation greater
Operate time 25 ms typically IEC 60255-121
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Reset time at 0.1 x Zreach to 2 x Min. = 20 ms -
Zreach Max. = 50 ms

8.2 Phase selection, quad, fixed angle, load

encroachment FDPSPDIS IP12400-1 v4

8.2.1 Identification

8.2.1.1 Identification M14850-1 v6

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Phase selection, quad, fixed angle, FDPSPDIS 21
load encroachment
Z<phs

SYMBOL-DD V1 EN-US

8.2.2 Functionality M13139-3 v9

The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability
limit. Due to environmental considerations, the rate of expansion and
reinforcement of the power system is reduced, for example, difficulties to get
permission to build new power lines. The ability to accurately and reliably classify
the different types of fault, so that single pole tripping and autoreclosing can be
used plays an important role in this matter. Phase selection, quadrilateral
characteristic with fixed angle (FDPSPDIS) is designed to accurately select the
proper fault loop in the distance function dependent on the fault type.

The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may make
fault resistance coverage difficult to achieve. Therefore, FDPSPDIS has a built-in
algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the
resistive setting of both the phase selection and the measuring zones without
interfering with the load.

The extensive output signals from the phase selection gives also important
information about faulty phase(s), which can be used for fault analysis.

248 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements

continuously measure three phase currents and the residual current and, compare
them with the set values.

8.2.3 Function block M13147-3 v4

FDPSPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* START
BLOCK STFWL1
DIRCND STFWL2
STFWL3
STFWPE
STRVL1
STRVL2
STRVL3
STRVPE
STNDL1
STNDL2
STNDL3
STNDPE
STFW1PH
STFW2PH
STFW3PH
STPE
STPP
STCNDZ
STCNDLE

IEC14000047-1-en.vsd
IEC10000047 V2 EN-US

Figure 79: FDPSPDIS function block

8.2.4 Signals
PID-3642-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 129: FDPSPDIS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

PID-3642-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 130: FDPSPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip output
START BOOLEAN Start in any phase or loop
STFWL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - forward direction
STFWL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - forward direction
STFWL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - forward direction
STFWPE BOOLEAN Earth fault detected in forward direction
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 249

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Type Description

STRVL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - reverse direction
STRVL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - reverse direction
STRVL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - reverse direction
STRVPE BOOLEAN Earth fault detected in reverse direction
STNDL1 BOOLEAN Non directional start in L1
STNDL2 BOOLEAN Non directional start in L2
STNDL3 BOOLEAN Non directional start in L3
STNDPE BOOLEAN Non directional start, phase-earth
STFW1PH BOOLEAN Start in forward direction for single-phase fault
STFW2PH BOOLEAN Start in forward direction for two- phase fault
STFW3PH BOOLEAN Start in forward direction for thre-phase fault
STPE BOOLEAN Current conditions release of phase-earth
measuring elements
STPP BOOLEAN Current conditions release of phase-phase
measuring elements
STCNDZ INTEGER Start condition (Z< with LE and 3I0 E/F detection)
STCNDLE INTEGER Start condition (only LE and 3I0 E/F detection)

8.2.5 Settings
PID-3642-SETTINGS v7

Table 131: FDPSPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
INBlockPP 10 - 100 %IPh 1 40 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase
measuring loops
INReleasePE 10 - 100 %IPh 1 20 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth
measuring loops
RLdFw 1.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 80.00 Forward resistive reach within the load
impedance area
RLdRv 1.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 80.00 Reverse resistive reach within the load
impedance area
ArgLd 5 - 70 Deg 1 30 Load angle determining the load
impedance area
X1 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach
X0 0.50 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach
RFFwPP 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward
RFRvPP 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
RFFwPE 1.00 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward
RFRvPE 1.00 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse
IMinOpPP 5 - 500 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate delta current for
Phase-Phase loops
IMinOpPE 5 - 500 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops

250 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Table 132: FDPSPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
OperationZ< Off - - On Operation of impedance based
On measurement
OperationI> Off - - Off Operation of current based
On measurement
IPh> 10 - 2500 %IB 1 120 Start value for phase over-current
element
IN> 10 - 2500 %IB 1 20 Start value for trip from 3I0 over-current
element
TimerPP Off - - Off Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Time delay to trip, Ph-Ph
TimerPE Off - - Off Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Time delay to trip, Ph-E

Table 133: FDPSPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.2.6 Operation principle

M13140-3 v5

The basic impedance algorithm for the operation of the phase selection measuring
elements is the same as for the distance zone measuring function. Phase selection
with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic FDPSPDIS includes six
impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-earth faults, and three
intended for phase-to-phase faults as well as for three-phase faults.

The difference, compared to the distance zone measuring function, is in the

combination of the measuring quantities (currents and voltages) for different types
of faults.

A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements

continuously measure three phase currents and the residual current, and compare
them with the set values. The current signals are filtered by Fourier's recursive
filter, and separate trip counter prevents too high overreaching of the measuring
elements.

The characteristic is basically non-directional, but FDPSPDIS uses information

from the directional function to discriminate whether the fault is in forward or
reverse direction.

The start condition STCNDZ is essentially based on the following criteria:

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 251

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

1. Residual current criteria, that is, separation of faults with and without earth
connection
2. Regular quadrilateral impedance characteristic
3. Load encroachment characteristics is always active but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.

The current start condition STCNDLE is based on the following criteria:

1. Residual current criteria

2. No quadrilateral impedance characteristic. The impedance reach outside the
load area is theoretically infinite. The practical reach, however, will be
determined by the minimum operating current limits.
3. Load encroachment characteristic is always active, but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.

The STCNDLE output is non-directional. The directionality is determined by the

distance zones directional function. There are outputs from FDPSPDIS that
indicate whether a start is in forward or reverse direction or non-directional, for
example STFWL1, STRVL1 and STNDL1.

These directional indications are based on the sector boundaries of the directional
function and the impedance setting of FDPSPDIS function. Their operating
characteristics are illustrated in figure 80.

X X X

R
R R

Non-directional (ND) Forward (FW) Reverse (RV)

en08000286.vsd
IEC08000286 V1 EN-US

Figure 80: Characteristics for non-directional, forward and reverse operation

of Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral
characteristic FDPSPDIS

The setting of the load encroachment function may influence the total operating
characteristic, (for more information, refer to section "Load encroachment").

The input DIRCND contains binary coded information about the directional
coming from the directional function . It shall be connected to the STDIR output on

252 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

ZDRDIR, directional measuring block. This information is also transferred to the

input DIRCND on the distance measuring zones, that is, the ZMQPDIS, distance
measuring block.

The code built up for the directionality is as follows:

STDIR= STFWL1*1+STFWL2*2+STFWL3*4+STFWL1L2*8+
+STFWL2L3*16+STFWL3L1*32+STRVL1*64+STRVL2*128+
+STRVL3*256+STRVL1L2*512+STRVL2L3*1024+STRVL3L1*2048

If the binary information is 1 then it will be considered that we have start in

forward direction in phase L1. If the binary code is 3 then we have start in forward
direction in phase L1 and L2, binary code 192 means start in reverse direction in
phase L1 and L2A and B etc.

The STCNDZ or STCNDLE output contains, in a similar way as DIRCND, binary

coded information, in this case information about the condition for opening correct
fault loop in the distance measuring element. It shall be connected to the STCND
input on the ZMQPDIS, distance measuring block.

The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows:

STCND = L1N*1 + L2N*2 + L3N*4 + L1L2*8 + L2L3*16 + L3L1*32

8.2.6.1 Phase-to-earth fault M13140-22 v3

For a phase-to-earth fault, the measured impedance by FDPSPDIS will be

according to equation 43.

Index PHS in images and equations reference settings for Phase

selection with load encroachment function FDPSPDIS.

ULn
ZPHSn =
ILn
EQUATION1255 V1 EN-US (Equation 43)

where:
n corresponds to the particular phase (n=1, 2 or 3)

The characteristic for FDPSPDIS function at phase-to-earth fault is according to

figure 81. The characteristic has a fixed angle for the resistive boundary in the first
quadrant of 60°.

The resistance RN and reactance XN are the impedance in the earth-return path
defined according to equation 44 and equation 45.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 253

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

R0 - R1
RN =
3
EQUATION1256 V1 EN-US (Equation 44)

X 0 - X1
XN =
3
EQUATION1257 V1 EN-US (Equation 45)

X (ohm/loop)
Kr·(X1+XN)

RFRvPE RFFwPE

X1+XN

60 deg
RFFwPE

RFRvPE R (Ohm/loop)
60 deg
X1+XN

1
Kr =
tan(60deg)

RFRvPE RFFwPE

Kr·(X1+XN)
en06000396.vsd
IEC06000396 V2 EN-US

Figure 81: Characteristic of FDPSPDIS for phase-to-earth fault (setting

parameters in italic), ohm/loop domain (directional lines are drawn
as "line-dot-dot-line")

Besides this, the 3I0 residual current must fulfil the conditions according to
equation 46 and equation 47.

3 × I0 ³ 0.5 × IMinOpPE
EQUATION2108 V1 EN-US (Equation 46)

254 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

3 × I0 ³ INReleasePE
------------------------------------ × Iphmax
100
EQUATION766 V1 EN-US (Equation 47)

where:
IMinOpPE is the minimum operation current for forward zones
INReleasePE is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the
phase-to-earth fault loops (in %).
Iphmax is the maximum phase current in any of three phases.

8.2.6.2 Phase-to-phase fault M13140-56 v3

For a phase-to-phase fault, the measured impedance by FDPSPDIS will be

according to equation 48.

ULm - ULn
ZPHS =
-2 × ILn
EQUATION1258 V1 EN-US (Equation 48)

ULm is the leading phase voltage, ULn the lagging phase voltage and ILn the
phase current in the lagging phase n.

The operation characteristic is shown in figure 82.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 255

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

X (W / phase)
0.5·RFRvPP 0.5·RFFwPP

Kr·X1

X1
0.5·RFFwPP
60 deg

R (W / phase)
60 deg
0.5·RFRvPP
X1
1
Kr =
tan(60 deg)

Kr·X1

0.5·RFRvPP 0.5·RFFwPP
IEC09000047-2-en.vsd
IEC09000047 V2 EN-US

Figure 82: The operation characteristics for FDPSPDIS at phase-to-phase

fault (setting parameters in italic, directional lines drawn as "line-
dot-dot-line"), ohm/phase domain

In the same way as the condition for phase-to-earth fault, there are current
conditions that have to be fulfilled in order to release the phase-to-phase loop.
Those are according to equation 49 or equation 50.

3I 0 < IMinOpPE
EQUATION2109 V1 EN-US (Equation 49)

INBlockPP
3I 0 < × Iph max
100
EQUATION2110 V1 EN-US (Equation 50)

where:
IMinOpPE is the minimum operation current for earth measuring loops,
INBlockPP is 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loop and
Iphmax is maximal magnitude of the phase currents.

256 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

8.2.6.3 Three-phase faults M13140-80 v4

The operation conditions for three-phase faults are the same as for phase-to-phase
fault, that is equation , equation and equation are used to release the operation of
the function.

However, the reach is expanded by a factor 2/√3 (approximately 1.1547) in all

directions. At the same time the characteristic is rotated 30 degrees, counter-
clockwise. The characteristic is shown in figure 83.

X (ohm/phase)

4 × X1
3

90 deg

0.5·RFFwPP·K3

X1·K3 4 × RFFwPP
6

R (ohm/phase)

0.5·RFRvPP·K3
2
K3 =
3 30 deg

IEC05000671-5-en.vsd
IEC05000671 V5 EN-US

Figure 83: The characteristic of FDPSPDIS for three-phase fault (setting

parameters in italic)

8.2.6.4 Load encroachment M13140-86 v6

Each of the six measuring loops has its own load encroachment characteristic based
on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is
always active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting.

The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 84. As illustrated, the

resistive blinders are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the
angle of the sector is the same in all four quadrants.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 257

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

RLdFw
ArgLd ArgLd
R

ArgLd ArgLd
RLdRv

IEC09000042-1-en.vsd
IEC09000042 V1 EN-US

Figure 84: Characteristic of load encroachment function

The influence of load encroachment function on the operation characteristic is

dependent on the chosen operation mode of FDPSPDIS function. When output
signal STCNDZ is selected, the characteristic for FDPSPDIS (and also zone
measurement depending on settings) will be reduced by the load encroachment
characteristic (see figure 85, left illustration).

When output signal STCNDLE is selected, the operation characteristic will be as

the right illustration in figure 85. The reach will in this case be limit by the
minimum operation current and the distance measuring zones.

258 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

X X

R R

STCNDZ STCNDLE

IEC10000099-1-
en.vsd
IEC10000099 V1 EN-US

Figure 85: Difference in operating characteristic depending on operation

mode when load encroachment is activated

When FDPSPDIS is set to operate together with a distance measuring zone the
resultant operate characteristic could look like in figure 86. The figure shows a
distance measuring zone operating in forward direction. Thus, the operating area is
highlighted in black.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 259

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

"Phase selection"
"quadrilateral" zone

Distance measuring zone

Load encroachment
characteristic

Directional line

en05000673.vsd
IEC05000673 V1 EN-US

Figure 86: Operating characteristic in forward direction when load

encroachment is activated

Figure 86 is valid for phase-to-earth. During a three-phase fault, or load, when the
quadrilateral phase-to-phase characteristic is subject to enlargement and rotation
the operate area is transformed according to figure 87. Notice in particular what
happens with the resistive blinders of the "phase selection" "quadrilateral" zone.
Due to the 30-degree rotation, the angle of the blinder in quadrant one is now 90
degrees instead of the original 60 degrees. The blinder that is nominally located to
quadrant four will at the same time tilt outwards and increase the resistive reach
around the R-axis. Consequently, it will be more or less necessary to use the load
encroachment characteristic in order to secure a margin to the load impedance.

260 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

X (W / phase)
Phase selection
”Quadrilateral” zone

Distance measuring zone

R (W / phase)

IEC09000049-1-en.vsd
IEC09000049 V1 EN-US

Figure 87: Operating characteristic for FDPSPDIS in forward direction for

three-phase fault, ohm/phase domain

The result from rotation of the load characteristic at a fault between two phases is
presented in fig 88. Since the load characteristic is based on the same measurement
as the quadrilateral characteristic, it will rotate with the quadrilateral characteristic
clockwise by 30 degrees when subject to a pure phase-to-phase fault. At the same
time the characteristic will "shrink", divided by 2/√3, from the full RLdFw and
RLdRv reach, which is valid at load or three-phase fault.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 261

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

IEC08000437.vsd

IEC08000437 V1 EN-US

Figure 88: Rotation of load characteristic for a fault between two phases

There is a gain in selectivity by using the same measurement as for the

quadrilateral characteristic since not all phase-to-phase loops will be fully affected
by a fault between two phases. It should also provide better fault resistive coverage
in quadrant one. The relative loss of fault resistive coverage in quadrant four
should not be a problem even for applications on series compensated lines.

8.2.6.5 Minimum operate currents M13140-102 v3

The operation of the Phase selection with load encroachment function (FDPSPDIS)
is blocked if the magnitude of input currents falls below certain threshold values.

The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn<IMinOpPE, where ILn is the RMS

value of the current in phase Ln.

The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if (2·ILn<IMinOpPP).

8.2.6.6 Simplified logic diagrams M13140-107 v6

Figure 89 presents schematically the creation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-

earth operating conditions. Consider only the corresponding part of measuring and

262 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

logic circuits, when only a phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase measurement is

available within the IED.

LDEblock

3I 0 ≥ 0.5 ⋅ IMinOpPE IRELPE

& 15 ms
t STPE
&
INReleasePE
3I 0 ≥ ⋅ Iphmax
100 STCNDLE
Bool to &
BLOCK integer

15 ms
3I 0 < IMinOpPE & t STPP
10 ms 20 ms
OR & t t
IRELPP
INBlockPP
3I 0 < ⋅ Iphmax
100

IEC09000149_2_en.vsd
IEC09000149 V2 EN-US

Figure 89: Phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth operating conditions (residual

current criteria)

A special attention is paid to correct phase selection at evolving faults. A

STCNDLE output signal is created as a combination of the load encroachment
characteristic and current criteria, refer to figure 89. This signal can be configured
to STCND functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way
influence the operation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth zone measuring
elements, residual current and the load encroachment characteristic.

Figure 90 presents schematically the composition of non-directional phase

selective signals STNDLn. Internal signals ZMLnN and ZMLmLn (m and n
change between one and three according to the phase number) represent the
fulfilled operating criteria for each separate loop measuring element, that is, within
the characteristic.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 263

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

INDL1N
INDL2N
INDL3N

15 ms
STNDPE
IRELPE OR t

LDEblockL1N
AND 15 ms
ZML1N STNDL1
OR t
LDEblockL2N
AND
ZML2N
15 ms
LDEblockL3N STNDL2
OR t
AND
ZML3N

LDEblockL1L2 15 ms
STNDL3
AND OR t
ZML1L2
LDEblockL2L3
AND INDL1L2
ZML2L3
LDEblockL3L1 INDL2L3
AND
ZML3L1 INDL3L1
IRELPP 15 ms
STNDPP
OR t

IEC00000545-3-en.vsd
IEC00000545-TIFF V3 EN-US

Figure 90: Composition on non-directional phase selection signals

Composition of the directional (forward and reverse) phase selective signals is

presented schematically in figure 92 and figure 91. The directional criteria appears
as a condition for the correct phase selection in order to secure a high phase
selectivity for simultaneous and evolving faults on lines within the complex
network configurations. Internal signals DFWLn and DFWLnLm present the
corresponding directional signals for measuring loops with phases Ln and Lm.
Designation FW (figure 92) represents the forward direction as well as the
designation RV (figure 91) represents the reverse direction. All directional signals
are derived within the corresponding digital signal processor.

Figure 91 presents additionally a composition of a STCNDZ output signal, which

is created on the basis of the continuation of the impedance measuring conditions
and the load encroachment characteristic. This signal can be configured to STCND
functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way influence the
operation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth zone measuring elements and
their phase related starting and tripping signals.

264 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

INDL1N
AND
DRVL1N
INDL1L2 15 ms STRVL1
AND OR t
DRVL1L2
INDL3L1
AND
DRVL3L1 15 ms
STRVPE
INDL2N OR t
AND
DRVL2N
INDL1L2 15 ms
STRVL2
AND OR t

INDL2L3 INDL1N
AND INDL2N
DRVL2L3
INDL3N Bool to STCNDZ
INDL3N INDL1L2 integer
AND INDL2L3
DRVL3N INDL3L1
INDL2L3 15 ms
STRVL3
AND OR t

INDL3L1
15 ms
AND STRVPP
OR t

IEC00000546_2_en.vsd
IEC00000546-TIFF V2 EN-US

Figure 91: Composition of phase selection signals for reverse direction

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 265

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

AND

INDL1N
AND 15 ms 15 ms
DFWL1N STFW1PH
AND OR t t
INDL1L2
15 ms STFWL1
AND OR t
DFWL1L2
INDL3L1
AND
AND
DFWL3L1 15 ms
STFWPE
INDL2N OR t
AND
DFWL2N
AND 15 ms
INDL1L2 STFWL2
t
AND OR
15 ms 15 ms
INDL2L3 STFW2PH
AND OR t t
AND
DFWL2L3
INDL3N
AND AND
DFWL3N 15 ms
STFWL3
t
INDL2L3
AND OR
15 ms
INDL3L1 STFW3PH
AND t
AND

15 ms
STFWPP
OR t

IEC05000201_2_en.vsd

IEC05000201 V2 EN-US

Figure 92: Composition of phase selection signals for forward direction

Figure 93 presents the composition of output signals TRIP and START, where
internal signals STNDPP, STFWPP and STRVPP are the equivalent to internal
signals STNDPE, STFWPE and STRVPE, but for the phase-to-phase loops.

266 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

TimerPP=Off
tPP
AND AND
t
TRIP
OR OR
tPE
TimerPE=Off
t
AND AND

STNDPP

STFWPP OR
STRVPP
START
OR
STNDPE

STFWPE OR
STRVPE

IEC08000441_2_en.vsd
IEC08000441-1 V2 EN-US

Figure 93: TRIP and START signal logic

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 267

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.2.7 Technical data

M16024-1 v12

Table 134: FDPSPDIS technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Minimum operate current (5-500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reactive reach, positive (0.50–3000.00) Ω/phase ±2.5% static accuracy

sequence
Resistive reach, positive
sequence
Reactive reach, zero sequence
Resistive reach, zero sequence
Fault resistance, phase-to-earth
faults, forward and reverse
Fault resistance, phase-to-
phase faults, forward and
reverse
Load encroachment criteria:
Load resistance, forward and
reverse
Safety load impedance angle
Reset ratio
±2.0 degrees static angular
accuracy
(0.10–1000.00) Ω/phase Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
(0.50–9000.00) Ω/phase Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
(0.50–3000.00) Ω/phase degrees
(1.00–9000.00) Ω/loop
(0.50–3000.00) Ω/loop
(1.00–3000.00) Ω/phase
(5-70) degrees
105% typically -

8.3 Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral

characteristic for series compensated lines
ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS, ZDSRDIR SEMOD168167-1 v3

8.3.1 Identification
SEMOD168165-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral ZMCPDIS 21
characteristic for series compensated
lines (zone 1)

S00346 V1 EN-US

Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral ZMCAPDIS 21

characteristic for series compensated
lines (zone 2-5)

S00346 V1 EN-US

Directional impedance quadrilateral, ZDSRDIR 21D

including series compensation
Z<->

IEC09000167 V1 EN-US

268 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

8.3.2 Functionality SEMOD168173-4 v11

The line distance protection is an up to five (depending on product variant) zone

full scheme protection with three fault loops for phase-to-phase faults and three
fault loops for phase-to-earth fault for each of the independent zones. Individual
settings for each zone resistive and reactive reach give flexibility for use on
overhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.

Quadrilateral characteristic is available.

Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines

(ZMCPDIS) function has functionality for load encroachment which increases the
possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines.

Forward
operation

Reverse
operation

en05000034.vsd
IEC05000034 V1 EN-US

Figure 94: Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with load

encroachment function activated

The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together
with different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables
in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 269

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.3.3 Function block SEMOD168196-1 v2

SEMOD168198-4 v2

ZMCPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
VTSZ TRL3
BLKTR START
STCND STL1
DIRCND STL2
STL3
STND

IEC07000036-2-en.vsd
IEC07000036 V2 EN-US

Figure 95: ZMCPDIS function block

ZMCAPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
VTSZ TRL3
BLKTR START
STCND STL1
DIRCND STL2
STL3
STND

IEC09000890-1-en.vsd
IEC09000890 V1 EN-US

Figure 96: ZMCAPDIS function block

SEMOD168200-4 v2

ZDSRDIR
I3P* STFW
U3P* STRV
STDIRCND

IEC07000035-2-en.vsd
IEC07000035 V2 EN-US

Figure 97: ZDSRDIR function block

8.3.4 Signals SEMOD173074-1 v3

Input and output signals is shown for zone 1, zone 2 - 5 are equal.

PID-3639-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 135: ZMCPDIS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
Table continues on next page

270 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Name Type Default Description

BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
STCND INTEGER 0 External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

PID-3639-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 136: ZMCPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
START BOOLEAN General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
STND BOOLEAN Non-directional start, issued from any phase or
loop

PID-3637-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 137: ZMCAPDIS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
STCND INTEGER 0 External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

PID-3637-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 138: ZMCAPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
START BOOLEAN General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 271

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Type Description

STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
STND BOOLEAN Non-directional start, issued from any phase or
loop

PID-3547-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 139: ZDSRDIR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL

PID-3547-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 140: ZDSRDIR Output signals

Name Type Description
STFW BOOLEAN Start in forward direction
STRV BOOLEAN Start in reverse direction
STDIRCND INTEGER Binary coded directional information per
measuring loop

8.3.5 Settings SEMOD173077-1 v3

Settings for ZMCPDIS are valid for zone 1, while settings for
ZMCAPDIS are valid for zone 2 - 5

PID-3639-SETTINGS v6

Table 141: ZMCPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationDir Non-directional - - Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
OperationPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-
On Phase loops
X1FwPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, forward
R1PP 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-Ph
RFFwPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward
Table continues on next page

272 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

X1RvPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, reverse
RFRvPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
OpModetPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph
OperationPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth
On loops
X1FwPE 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, forward
R1PE 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-E
X0PE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E
R0PE 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 47.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle, Ph-E
RFFwPE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward
X1RvPE 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, reverse
RFRvPE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse
OpModetPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-E
IMinOpPP 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate delta current for
Phase-Phase loops
IMinOpPE 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpIN 5 - 1000 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate residual current for
Phase-Earth loops

Table 142: ZMCPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

PID-3637-SETTINGS v6

Table 143: ZMCAPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationDir Non-directional - - Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
OperationPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-
On Phase loops
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 273

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

X1FwPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, forward
R1PP 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-Ph
RFFwPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward
X1RvPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, reverse
RFRvPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
OpModetPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph
OperationPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth
On loops
X1FwPE 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, forward
R1PE 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-E
X0PE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E
R0PE 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 47.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle, Ph-E
RFFwPE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward
X1RvPE 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, reverse
RFRvPE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse
OpModetPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-E
IMinOpPP 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate delta current for
Phase-Phase loops
IMinOpPE 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops

Table 144: ZMCAPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

274 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

PID-3547-SETTINGS v6

Table 145: ZDSRDIR Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
OperationSC NoSeriesComp - - SeriesComp Special directional criteria for voltage
SeriesComp reversal
IMinOpPE 5 - 30 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpPP 5 - 30 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase-phase current
for Phase-Phase loops
ArgNegRes 90 - 175 Deg 1 130 Angle of blinder in second quadrant for
forward direction
ArgDir 5 - 45 Deg 1 15 Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for
forward direction
INReleasePE 10 - 100 %IPh 1 20 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth
measuring loops
INBlockPP 10 - 100 %IPh 1 40 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase
measuring loops
OperationLdCh Off - - On Operation of load discrimination
On characteristic
RLdFw 1.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 80.00 Forward resistive reach within the load
impedance area
RLdRv 1.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 80.00 Reverse resistive reach within the load
impedance area
ArgLd 5 - 70 Deg 1 30 Load angle determining the load
impedance area
X1FwPP 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, forward
R1PP 0.10 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 7.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-Ph
RFFwPP 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward
X1RvPP 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, reverse
RFRvPP 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
X1FwPE 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, forward
R1PE 0.10 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 7.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-E
X0FwPE 0.50 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E,
forward
R0PE 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 20.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle, Ph-E
RFFwPE 1.00 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward
X1RvPE 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, reverse
X0RvPE 0.50 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E,
reverse
RFRvPE 1.00 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 275

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Table 146: ZDSRDIR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.3.6 Monitored data

PID-3547-MONITOREDDATA v6

Table 147: ZDSRDIR Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
L1Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L2Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L3Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L1R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L1
L1X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L1
L2R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L2
L2X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L2
L3R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L3
L3X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L3

8.3.7 Operation principle

8.3.7.1 Full scheme measurement SEMOD168177-4 v2

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type,
which means that earth fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase
faults for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.

Figure 98 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five,
impedance-measuring zones.

276 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 1

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 2

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 3

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 4

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 5

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

Zone RV

IEC05000458-2-en.vsd
IEC05000458 V2 EN-US

Figure 98: The different measuring loops at phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-
phase fault

The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one
independent distance protection IED with six measuring elements.

8.3.7.2 Impedance characteristic SEMOD168177-11 v4

Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines

(ZMCPDIS) include six impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-
earth faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as, three-phase faults.

The distance measuring zone operates according to the non-directional impedance

characteristics presented in figure 99 and figure 100. The phase-to-earth
characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase
characteristic presents the per-phase reach.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 277

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/loop)

R1PE+RNFw
X 0 PE - X 1FwPE
RFRvPE RFFwPE XNFw =
3
PG- -
XX00PE 1RVPG 1RvPE
1XRVPE
X
XNRV XNRv
XNRV == =XXNFw
3
×
3 X 1FwPE
XX0 PE - X-1X
0 PG FWPE
1FWPG
XNFW==
XNFW
X1FwPE+XNFw 3 3 R0 PE - R1PE
RNFw =
jN jN 3
R (Ohm/loop)

RFRvPE RFFwPE

X1RvPE+XNRv

jN

RFRvPE RFFwPE
IEC09000625-1-en.vsd
IEC09000625 V1 EN-US

Figure 99: Characteristic for the phase-to-earth measuring loops, ohm/loop

domain

278 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/phase)

RFRvPP R1PP RFFwPP

2 2
X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PEPG- -
X31XRVPE
1RVPG
XNRV =
XNRV =
3 3
XX
X00
PE
0 PE
-X
PG --1X 11FWPE
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW =
XNFW==
XNFW
X1FwPP 3 33

j j
jN R (Ohm/phase)

RFRvPP RFFwPP
2 2

X1RvPP

jN

RFRvPP RFFwPP
2 2
IEC09000632-1-en.vsd
IEC09000632 V1 EN-US

Figure 100: Characteristic for the phase-to-phase measuring loops

The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in
figure 101. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault)
resistive reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 279

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

IL1 R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
UL1
element

Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1 RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)

0
IN (R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )

IL1 R1 + j X1 Phase-to-phase
UL1 element L1-L2
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase RFPP
L1-L2 IL2
UL2 (Arc resistance)
R1 + j X1

IL1 R1 + j X1 0.5·RFPP Phase-to-phase

UL1 element L1-L3
Three-phase
fault
IL3
UL3
R1 + j X1 0.5·RFPP
IEC08000282-2-en.vsd
IEC08000282 V2 EN-US

Figure 101: Fault loop model

The R1 and jX1 in figure 101 represents the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The RFPE and RFPP is the eventual fault
resistance in the fault place.

Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 101, there is of course fault
current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration
merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase.

The zone may be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction

through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated
in figure 102. It may be convenient to once again mention that the impedance reach
is symmetric, forward and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to
both directions.

280 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

X X X

R R R

Non-directional Forward Reverse

IEC05000182-2-en.vsdx

IEC05000182 V2 EN-US

Figure 102: Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zone

8.3.7.3 Minimum operating current SEMOD168177-36 v2

The operation of Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series

compensated lines (ZMCPDIS,ZMCAPDIS) is blocked if the magnitude of input
currents fall below certain threshold values.

The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn < IMinOpPE.

For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all
phase-to-earth loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIN, regardless of the phase
currents.

ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. IN is the RMS value of the vector
sum of the three phase currents, that is, residual current 3I0.

The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if ILmLnAB (BC or CA)< IMinOpPP.

ILmLn is the RMS value of the vector difference between phase currents Lm and
Ln.

All three current limits IMinOpPE, IMinOpIN and IMinOpPP are

automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set
to operate in reverse direction, that is, OperationDir=Reverse.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 281

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.3.7.4 Measuring principles SEMOD168177-46 v3

Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The
calculation of the apparent impedances at ph-ph faults follows equation 51
(example for a phase L1 to phase L2 fault).

UL1 – UL2
Zapp = -------------------------
I L1 – IL2
EQUATION1222 V1 EN-US (Equation 51)

Here U and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the
respective phase.

The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner to ph-E faults

(example for a phase L1 to earth fault) according to equation 52.

U L1
Z app =
I L1 + I N × KN
EQUATION1223 V2 EN-US (Equation 52)

Where:
UL1, IL1 and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
KN is defined as:

Z 0 - Z1
KN =
3 × Z1
EQUATION-2105 V2 EN-US

Z 0 = R 0 + jX 0
EQUATION2106 V2 EN-US

Z 1 = R1 + jX 1
EQUATION2107 V2 EN-US

Where
R0 is setting of the resistive zero sequence reach
X0 is setting of the reactive zero sequence reach
R1 is setting of the resistive positive sequence reach
X1 is setting of the reactive positive sequence reach

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current at the IED point. This results in the same
reach along the line for all types of faults.

282 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and

reactance X.

The formula given in equation 52 is only valid for no loaded radial feeder
applications. When load is considered in the case of single phase-to-earth fault,
conventional distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach
at importing end. IED has an adaptive load compensation which increases the
security in such applications.

Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D
converter. The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is
distributed into memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops,
sampled values of voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples
(DI) are brought from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.

The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related
to the loop impedance according to equation 53,

X Di
U = R × i + ------ × -----
w 0 Dt
EQUATION1224 V1 EN-US (Equation 53)

in complex notation, or:

X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R × Re ( I ) + ------ × ------------------
w0 Dt

EQUATION354 V1 EN-US (Equation 54)

X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R × Im ( I ) + ------ × -----------------
w0 Dt

EQUATION355 V1 EN-US (Equation 55)

with

w0 = 2 × p × f 0
EQUATION356 V1 EN-US (Equation 56)

where:
Re designates the real component of current and voltage,
Im designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and
f0 designates the rated system frequency

The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real
value of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 283

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

equation for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is
equal to:

Im ( U ) × DRe ( I ) – Re ( U ) × D Im ( I )
R m = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) × Im ( I ) – D Im ( I ) × Re ( I )
EQUATION357 V1 EN-US (Equation 57)

Re ( U ) × Im ( I ) – Im ( U ) × Re ( I )
Xm = w 0 × Dt × -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) × Im ( I ) – DIm ( I ) × Re ( I )
EQUATION358 V1 EN-US (Equation 58)

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the
set zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive
tripping results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the
capacitive voltage transformers or by other factors.

The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and

reverse directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase
locked positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures
unlimited directional sensitivity for faults close to the IED point.

8.3.7.5 Directionality for series compensation SEMOD168177-97 v4

In the basic distance protection function, the control of the memory for polarizing
voltage is performed by an undervoltage control. In case of series compensated
line, a voltage reversal can occur with a relatively high voltage also when the
memory must be locked. Thus, a simple undervoltage type of voltage memory
control can not be used in case of voltage reversal. In the option for series
compensated network the polarizing quantity and memory are controlled by an
impedance measurement criterion.

The polarizing voltage is a memorized positive sequence voltage. The memory is

continuously synchronized via a positive sequence filter. The memory is starting to
run freely instantaneously when a voltage change is detected in any phase. A non-
directional impedance measurement is used to detect a fault and identify the faulty
phase or phases.

At a three phase fault when no positive sequence voltage remains (all three phases
are disconnected) the memory is used for direction polarization during 100 ms.

The memory predicts the phase of the positive sequence voltage with the pre-fault
frequency. This extrapolation is made with a high accuracy and it is not the
accuracy of the memory that limits the time the memory can be used. The network
is at a three phase fault under way to a new equilibrium and the post-fault condition
can only be predicted accurately for a limited time from the pre-fault condition.

In case of a three phase fault after 100 ms the phase of the memorized voltage can
not be relied upon and the directional measurement has to be blocked. The

284 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

achieved direction criteria are sealed-in when the directional measurement is

blocked and kept until the impedance fault criteria is reset (the direction is stored
until the fault is cleared).

This memory control allows in the time domain unlimited correct directional
measurement for all unsymmetrical faults also at voltage reversal. Only at three
phase fault within the range of the set impedance reach of the criteria for control of
the polarization voltage the memory has to be used and the measurement is limited
to 100 ms and thereafter the direction is sealed-in. The special impedance
measurement to control the polarization voltage is set separately and has only to
cover (with some margin) the impedance to fault that can cause the voltage
reversal.

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance

quadrilateral, including series compensation (ZDSRDIR) function. Equation 59 and
equation 60 are used to classify that the fault is in forward direction for phase-to-
earth fault and phase-to-phase fault.

U 1L1M
- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1
EQUATION2004 V2 EN-US (Equation 59)

For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is according to:

U 1L1L 2 M
- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1L 2
EQUATION2006 V2 EN-US (Equation 60)

where:
ArgDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 115 degrees, see Figure 103.
U1L1M is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1

IL1 is phase current in phase L1

U1L1L2M is memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

IL1L2 is current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115
degrees respectively, see Figure 103, and it should not be changed unless system
studies have shown the necessity.

ZDSRDIR generates a binary coded signal on the output STDIR depending on the
evaluation where STFWL1N=1 adds 1, STRVL1N=1 adds 2, STFWL2N=1 adds 4.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 285

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

ArgNegRes

ArgDir
R

en05000722.vsd
IEC05000722 V1 EN-US

Figure 103: Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated

by 180 degrees.

8.3.7.6 Simplified logic diagrams SEMOD168192-4 v2

Distance protection zones SEMOD168192-6 v5

The design of distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops:
phase-to-earth as well as phase-to-phase.

Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by Ln, where n represents the

corresponding phase number (L1, L2, and L3). The phase-to-phase signals are
designated by LnLm, where n and m represent the corresponding phase numbers
(L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1).

Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one

logical signal for each separate measuring loop:

• Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described

above.
• Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 104.

Two types of function block, ZMCPDIS and ZMCAPDIS, are used in the IED.
ZMCPDIS is used for zone 1 and ZMCAPDIS for zone 2 - 5.

286 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values
from the phase selection function within the IED, which are converted within the
zone measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each
condition separately. It is connected to Phase selection with load enchroachment,
quadrilateral characteristic (FDPSPDIS) function output STCNDZ.

STZMPP
OR
STCND

AND STNDL1L2
L1L2

STNDL2L3
L2L3 AND

L3L1 AND STNDL3L1

AND STNDL1N
L1N

AND STNDL2N
L2N

STNDL3N
L3N AND

OR STPE

OR
VTSZ STND
OR AND
BLOCK
BLOCFUNC BLK

99000557-2.vsd
IEC99000557-TIFF V3 EN-US

Figure 104: Conditioning by a group functional input signal STCND

Composition of the phase starting signals for a case, when the zone operates in a
non-directional mode, is presented in figure 105.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 287

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

IEC00000488-TIFF V1 EN-US

Figure 105: Composition of starting signals in non-directional operating mode

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone
operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 106.

STNDL1N
AND
DIRL1N
STZMPE.
OR
STNDL2N
DIRL2N AND

STNDL3N 15 ms
OR STL1
AND AND t
DIRL3N

STNDL1L2
DIRL1L2 AND 15 ms
OR STL2
AND t
STNDL2L3
DIRL2L3 AND
15 ms
OR STL3
STNDL3L1 AND t
DIRL3L1 AND

STZMPP
OR

BLK

15 ms
OR START
AND t

IEC09000888-2-en.vsd
IEC09000888 V2 EN-US

Figure 106: Composition of starting signals in directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented
in figure 107.

288 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Timer tPP=On
STZMPP AND tPP
AND
t

BLOCFUNC
OR OR
tPE
t
AND
Timer tPE=On AND
STZMPE 15ms
BLKTR AND t
TRIP
BLK OR

STL1 AND TRL1

STL2 AND TRL2

STL3 AND TRL3

IEC09000887-3-en.vsdx

IEC09000887 V3 EN-US

Figure 107: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one

8.3.8 Technical data SEMOD173234-1 v1

SEMOD173239-2 v10

Table 148: ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS Technical data

Function
Number of zones
Minimum operate residual
current, zone 1
Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph
and Ph-E
Positive sequence reactance
Positive sequence resistance
Zero sequence reactance
Zero sequence resistance
Fault resistance, Ph-E
Fault resistance, Ph-Ph
Dynamic overreach
Definite time delay Ph-Ph and
Ph-E operation
Table continues on next page
Range or value Accuracy
Max 5 with selectable direction -
(5-1000)% of IBase -
(10-1000)% of IBase -
(0.10-3000.00) Ω/phase ±2.0% static accuracy
±2.0 degrees static angular
(0.10-1000.00) Ω/phase accuracy
(0.01-9000.00) Ω/phase Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
(0.01-3000.00) Ω/phase Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
(0.10-9000.00) Ω/loop Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
degrees
(0.10-3000.00) Ω/loop
<5% at 85 degrees measured -
with CCVT’s and 0.5<SIR<30
(0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 35 ms whichever
is greater

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 289

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate time 25 ms typically IEC 60255-121
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Reset time at 0.1 x Zreach to 2 x Min. = 20 ms -
Zreach Max. = 50 ms

8.4 Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho

characteristic ZMHPDIS SEMOD154227-1 v4

8.4.1 Identification
SEMOD154447-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE

identification C37.2 device
number
Full-scheme distance protection, mho ZMHPDIS 21
characteristic

S00346 V1 EN-US

8.4.2 Functionality SEMOD175459-4 v12

The numerical mho line distance protection is an up to five (depending on product

variant) zone full scheme protection of short circuit and earth faults.

The full scheme technique provides back-up protection of power lines with high
sensitivity and low requirement on remote end communication.

The zones have fully independent measuring and settings, which gives high
flexibility for all types of lines.

Built-in selectable zone timer logic is also provided in the function.

The function can be used as under impedance back-up protection for transformers
and generators.

290 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

8.4.3 Function block SEMOD154705-4 v4

ZMHPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRL1
CURR_INP* TRL2
VOLT_INP* TRL3
POL_VOLT* TRPE
BLOCK TRPP
BLKZ START
BLKZMTD STL1
BLKHSIR STL2
BLKTRIP STL3
BLKPE STPE
BLKPP STPP
EXTNST STTIMER
INTRNST
DIRCND
STCND*
LDCND

IEC06000423-2-en.vsd
IEC06000423 V3 EN-US

Figure 108: ZMHPDIS function block

8.4.4 Signals SEMOD154579-1 v2

PID-3552-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 149: ZMHPDIS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Connection for current sample signals
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Connection for voltage sample signals
SIGNAL
CURR_INP GROUP - Connection for current signals
SIGNAL
VOLT_INP GROUP - Connection for voltage signals
SIGNAL
POL_VOLT GROUP - Connection for polarizing voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Block due to fuse failure
BLKZMTD BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for blocking of time domaine function
BLKHSIR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks time domain function at high SIR
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all operate output signals
BLKPE BOOLEAN 0 Blocks phase-to-earth operation
BLKPP BOOLEAN 0 Blocks phase-to-phase operation
EXTNST BOOLEAN 0 External start
INTRNST BOOLEAN 0 Internal start
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition
STCND INTEGER 0 External start condition (loop enabler)
LDCND INTEGER 0 External load condition (loop enabler)

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 291

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

PID-3552-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 150: ZMHPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip General
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip phase L3
TRPE BOOLEAN Trip phase-to-earth
TRPP BOOLEAN Trip phase-to-phase
START BOOLEAN Start General
STL1 BOOLEAN Start phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start phase L3
STPE BOOLEAN Start phase-to-earth
STPP BOOLEAN Start phase-to-phase
STTIMER BOOLEAN Start timer

8.4.5 Settings SEMOD154644-1 v2

PID-3552-SETTINGS v7

Table 151: ZMHPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
DirMode Off - - Forward Direction mode
Offset
Forward
Reverse
LoadEncMode Off - - Off Load encroachment mode Off/On
On
ReachMode Overreach - - Overreach Reach mode Over/Underreach
Underreach
ZnTimerSel Timers seperated - - Timers seperated Zone timer selection
Timers linked
Internal start
Start from PhSel
External start
OpModePE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth
On loops
ZPE 0.005 - 3000.000 Ohm/p 0.001 30.000 Positive sequence impedance setting for
Phase-Earth loop
ZAngPE 10 - 90 Deg 1 85 Angle for positive sequence line
impedance for Phase-Earth loop
KN 0.00 - 3.00 - 0.01 0.80 Magnitude of earth return compensation
factor KN
KNAng -180 - 180 Deg 1 -15 Angle for earth return compensation
factor KN
Table continues on next page

292 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ZRevPE 0.005 - 3000.000 Ohm/p 0.001 30.000 Reverse reach of the phase to earth
loop(magnitude)
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay time for operation of phase to
earth elements
IMinOpPE 10 - 30 %IB 1 20 Minimum operation phase to earth
current
OpModePP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-
On Phase loops
ZPP 0.005 - 3000.000 Ohm/p 0.001 30.000 Impedance setting reach for phase to
phase elements
ZAngPP 10 - 90 Deg 1 85 Angle for positive sequence line
impedance for Phase-Phase elements
ZRevPP 0.005 - 3000.000 Ohm/p 0.001 30.000 Reverse reach of the phase to phase
loop(magnitude)
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay time for operation of phase to
phase
IMinOpPP 10 - 30 %IB 1 20 Minimum operation phase to phase
current

Table 152: ZMHPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
OffsetMhoDir Non-directional - - Non-directional Direction mode for offset mho
Forward
Reverse
OpModetPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
OpModetPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-ph

Table 153: ZMHPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.4.6 Operation principle SEMOD154230-1 v2

8.4.6.1 Full scheme measurement SEMOD154224-4 v3

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type,
which means that each fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase faults
are executed in parallel for all zones.

The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 293

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

depending on fault type. So each distance protection zone performs like one
independent distance protection function with six measuring elements.

8.4.6.2 Impedance characteristic SEMOD154224-11 v7

The Mho distance function ZMHPDIS is present with four instances so that four
separate zones could be designed. Each instance can be selected to be either
forward or reverse with positive sequence polarized mho characteristic;
alternatively self polarized offset mho characteristics is also available. One
example of the operating characteristic is shown in Figure 109 A) where zone 5 is
selected offset mho.

The directional mho characteristic of Figure 109 B) has a dynamic expansion due
to the source impedance. Instead of mho characteristic crossing origin, which is
only valid where the source impedance is zero, the crossing point is moved to the
coordinates of the negative source impedance giving an expansion of the circle of
Figure 109 B).

A B
jx X

Mho, zone4

Mho, zone3 Zs=0

Mho, zone2 R

Mho, zone1

Zs=Z1

Zs=2Z1

R
Offset mho, zone5

IEC09000143-3-en.vsd

IEC09000143 V3 EN-US

Figure 109: Mho, offset mho characteristic and the source impedance influence on the mho characteristic

The polarization quantities used for the mho circle are 100% memorized positive
sequence voltages. This will give a somewhat less dynamic expansion of the mho
circle during faults than a plain cross polarized characteristic. However, if the
source impedance is high, the dynamic expansion of the mho circle might lower the
security of the function too much with high loading and mild power swing
conditions.

294 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

The mho distance element has a load encroachment function which cuts off a
section of the characteristic when enabled. The function is enabled by setting the
setting parameter LoadEnchMode to On. Enabling of the load encroachment
function increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults without interfering
with the load impedance. The algorithm for the load encroachment is located in the
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho function FMPSPDIS,
where also the relevant settings can be found. Information about the load
encroachment from FMPSPDIS to the zone measurement is given in binary format
to the input signal LDCND.

8.4.6.3 Basic operation characteristics SEMOD154224-21 v9

Each impedance zone can be switched On and Off by the setting parameter
Operation.

Each zone can be set to Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by setting the

parameter DirMode .

The operation for phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase fault can be individually

switched On and Off by the setting parameter OpModePE and OpModePP.

For critical applications such as for lines with high SIRs as well as CVTs, it is
possible to improve the security by setting the parameter ReachMode to
Underreach. In this mode the reach for faults close to the zone reach is reduced by
20% and the filtering is also introduced to increase the accuracy in the measuring.
If the ReachMode is set to Overreach no reduction of the reach is introduced and
no extra filtering introduced. The latter setting is recommended for overreaching
pilot zone, zone 2 or zone 3 elements and reverse zone where overreaching on
transients is not a major issue either because of less likelihood of overreach with
higher settings or the fact that these elements do not initiate tripping
unconditionally.

The offset Mho characteristic can be set in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by

the setting parameter OffsetMhoDir. When Forward or Reverse is selected a
directional line is introduced. Information about the directional line is given from
the directional element and given to the measuring element as binary coded signal
to the input DIRCND.

The zone reach for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase fault is set individually
in polar coordinates.

The impedance is set by the parameters ZPE and ZPP and the corresponding
arguments by the parameters ZAngPE and ZAngPP.

Compensation for earth -return path for faults involving earth is done by setting the
parameter KNMag and KNAng where KNMag is the magnitude of the earth-return
path and KNAng is the difference of angles between KNMag and ZPE .

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 295

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Z0-Z1
KNMag =
3 × Z1
EQUATION1579 V1 EN-US (Equation 61)

KNAng = arg
( Z 0 - Z1

3 × Z1
)
EQUATION1580 V1 EN-US (Equation 62)

where
Z0 is the complex zero sequence impedance of the line in Ω/phase
Z1 is the complex positive sequence impedance of the line in Ω/phase

The phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase measuring loops can be time delayed

individually by setting the parameter tPE and tPP respectively. To release the time
delay, the operation mode for the timers, OpModetPE and OpModetPP, has to be
set to On. This is also the case for instantaneous operation.

The operate timers triggering input depends on the parameter ZnTimerSel setting.
The parameter ZnTimerSel can be set to:

• Timers separated: Phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by

the respective measuring loop start signals.
• Timers linked: Start of any of the phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase loops will
trigger both the phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase timers.
• Internal start: Phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by the
INTRNST input.
• Start from PhSel: The phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase timers are triggered
by the STCND and LDCND inputs. Each of the two inputs consist binary status
information related to the six measuring loops. Hence if any of the measuring
loop status is high in both two inputs STCND and LDCND, then the timers will
be triggered. In case when LoadEnchMode is off then only STCND enables the
timer.

It is not recommended to use this timer setting for the Zone

instance where LoadEnchMode is off.

• External start: Phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by the

EXTNST input.

The function can be blocked in the following ways:

296 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

• activating of input BLOCK blocks the whole function

• activating of the input BLKZ (fuse failure) blocks all output signals
• activating of the input BLKZMTD blocks the delta based time domain
algorithm
• activating of the input BLKHSIR blocks the instantaneous part of the
algorithm for high SIR values
• activating of the input BLKTRIP blocks all output signals
• activating the input BLKPE blocks the phase-to-earth fault loop outputs
• activating the input BLKPP blocks the phase-to-phase fault loop outputs

The activation of input signal BLKZ can be made by external fuse failure function
or from the loss of voltage check in the Mho supervision logic (ZSMGAPC). In
both cases the output BLKZ in the Mho supervision logic shall be connected to the
input BLKZ in the Mho distance function block (ZMHPDIS)

The input signal BLKZMTD is activated during some ms after fault has been
detected by ZSMGAPC to avoid unwanted operations due to transients. It shall be
connected to the BLKZMTD output signal of ZSMGAPC function.

At SIR values >10, the use of electronic CVT might cause overreach due to the
built-in resonance circuit in the CVT, which reduce the secondary voltage for a
while. The input BLKHSIR is connected to the output signal HSIR on ZSMGAPC
for increasing of the filtering and high SIR values. This is valid only when
permissive underreach scheme is selected by setting ReachMode=Underreach.

8.4.6.4 Theory of operation SEMOD154224-46 v6

The mho algorithm is based on the phase comparison of an operating phasor and a
polarizing phasor. When the operating phasor leads the reference polarizing phasor
by 90 degrees or more, the function operates and gives a trip output.

Phase-to-phase fault SEMOD154224-240 v2

Mho SEMOD154224-217 v5

The plain Mho circle has the characteristic as in Figure 110. The condition for
deriving the angle β is according to equation 63.

EQUATION1789 V2 EN-US (Equation 63)

where

U L1L2 is the voltage vector difference between phases L1 and L2

EQUATION1790
EN-US V2

I L1L2 is the current vector difference between phases L1 and L2

EQUATION1791 V2
EN-US

ZPP is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault

Upol is the polarizing voltage

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 297

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

The polarized voltage consists of 100% memorized positive sequence voltage

(UL1L2 for phase L1 to L2 fault). The memorized voltage will prevent collapse of
the Mho circle for close in faults.

Operation occurs if 90≤β≤270

IL1L2·X
Ucomp = UL1L2 - IL1L2 • ZPP

IL1L2 • ZPP
ß
Upol
UL1L2

IL1L2·R

en07000109.vsd
IEC07000109 V1 EN-US

Figure 110: Simplified mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase L1-to-
L2 fault

Offset Mho SEMOD154224-242 v4

The characteristic for offset mho is a circle where two points on the circle are the
setting parameters ZPP and ZRevPP. The vector ZPP in the impedance plane has
the settable angle AngZPP and the angle for ZRevPP is AngZPP+180°.

The condition for operation at phase-to-phase fault is that the angle β between the
two compensated voltages Ucomp1 and Ucomp2 is greater than or equal to 90°
(figure 111). The angle will be 90° for fault location on the boundary of the circle.

The angle β for L1-to-L2 fault can be defined according to equation 64.

298 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

æ ö
U -IL1L2 × ZPP
b = arg ç ÷
è U-(-IL1L2 × ZRevPP) ø
EQUATION1792 V1 EN-US (Equation 64)

where

U is the UL1L2 voltage

EQUATION1800 V1 EN-US

ZRevPP is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault in reverse
direction

IL1L2jX

Ucomp1 = UL1L2 - IL1L2 • ZPP

IL1L2 • ZPP

U
Ucomp2 = U = IF•ZF=UL1L2
IL1L2R

- IL1L2 • Z RevPP
en07000110.vsd
IEC07000110 V1 EN-US

Figure 111: Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vectors for phase
L1-to-L2 fault.

Operation occurs if 90≤β≤270.

Offset mho, forward direction SEMOD154224-249 v4

When forward direction has been selected for the offset mho, an extra criteria
beside the one for offset mho (90<β<270) is introduced, that is the angle φ between
the voltage and the current must lie between the blinders in second quadrant and
fourth quadrant. See figure 112. Operation occurs if 90≤β≤270 and
ArgDir≤φ≤ArgNegRes.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 299

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

where
ArgDir is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR.
ArgNegRes is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR.
β is calculated according to equation

The directional information is brought to the mho distance measurement from the
mho directional element as binary coded information to the input DIRCND. See
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR) for information
about the mho directional element.

IL1L2jX

ZPP

UL1L2

ArgNegRes f

IL1L2
ArgDir

en07000111.vsd
IEC07000111 V1 EN-US

Figure 112: Simplified offset mho characteristic in forward direction for phase
L1-to-L2 fault

Offset mho, reverse direction SEMOD154224-265 v4

The operation area for offset mho in reverse direction is according to figure 113.
The operation area in second quadrant is ArgNegRes+180°.

Operation occurs if 90≤β≤270 and 180° - ArgDir ≤φ ≤ ArgNegRes + 180°

The β is derived according to equation for the mho circle and φ is the angle
between the voltage and current.

300 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

ZPP

ArgNegRes
ϕ

IL1L2

ArgDir R

UL1L2

ZRevPP

en06000469.eps
IEC06000469 V1 EN-US

Figure 113: Operation characteristic for reverse phase L1-to-L2 fault

Phase-to-earth fault SEMOD154224-283 v2

Mho SEMOD154224-120 v5

The measuring of earth faults uses earth-return compensation applied in a

conventional way. The compensation voltage is derived by considering the
influence from the earth-return path.

For an earth fault in phase L1, the compensation voltage Ucomp can be derived, as
shown in Figure 114.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 301

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Ucomp = U pol - I L1 × Z loop

EQUATION1793 V1 EN-US (Equation 65)

where
Upol is the polarizing voltage (memorized UL1 for Phase L1-to- earth
fault)
Zloop is the loop impedance, which in general terms can be expressed as

(
Z1+ZN = Z 1 × 1 + KN )
where
Z1 is the positive sequence impedance of the line (Ohm/phase)

KN is the zero-sequence compensator factor

The angle β between the Ucomp and the polarize voltage Upol for a L1-to-earth
fault is

β = arg U L1 − I L1 + 3I 0 ⋅ KN ⋅ ZPE  − arg (Upol )

( )
 
GUID-A9492CDF-D3B7-4DC5-8E06-6638BEE2540B V2 EN-US (Equation 66)

where
UL1 is the phase voltage in faulty phase L1

IL1 is the phase current in faulty phase L1

3I0 is the zero-sequence current in faulty phase L1

KN Z0-Z1
3 × Z1
the setting parameter for the zero sequence
compensation consisting of the magnitude KN and
the angle KNAng.
Upol is the 100% of positive sequence memorized
voltage UL1

302 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

IL1·X

IL1·ZN
Ucomp

IL1 • Zloop
IL1·ZPE
Upol

f
IL1 (Ref) IL1·R

en06000472_2.vsd
IEC06000472 V2 EN-US

Figure 114: Simplified offset mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase
L1-to-earth fault

Operation occurs if 90≤β≤270.

Offset mho SEMOD154224-309 v5

The characteristic for offset mho at earth fault is a circle containing the two vectors
from the origin ZPE and ZRevPE where ZPE and ZrevPE are the setting reach for
the positive sequence impedance in forward respective reverse direction. The
vector ZPE in the impedance plane has the settable angle AngZPE and the angle for
ZRevPP is AngZPE+180°.

The condition for operation at phase-to-earth fault is that the angle β between the
two compensated voltages Ucomp1 and Ucomp2 is greater or equal to 90° see
figure 115. The angle will be 90° for fault location on the boundary of the circle.

The angle β for L1-to-earth fault can be defined as

æ UL1- IL1L × ZPE ö

b = arg ç ÷
è UL1-(- IL1 × Z Re vPE ) ø
EQUATION1802 V1 EN-US (Equation 67)

is the phase L1 voltage

U L1
805 V1 EN-
EQUATION1
US

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 303

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

IL1L 2 • jX

U comp1 = UL1 - I L1• ZPE

IL1 • ZPE

UL1
U comp2 = UL1 - (-IL1 • ZRevPE)
IL1L2 • R

- I L1 • Z Re vPe

en 06000465.vsd
IEC06000465 V1 EN-US

Figure 115: Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vector for phase
L1-to-earth fault

Operation occurs if 90≤β≤270.

Offset mho, forward direction SEMOD154224-327 v3

In the same way as for phase-to-phase fault, selection of forward direction of offset
mho will introduce an extra criterion for operation. Beside the basic criteria for
offset mho according to equation and 90≤β≤270, also the criteria that the angle φ
between the voltage and the current must lie between the blinders in second and
fourth quadrant. See figure 116. Operation occurs if 90≤β≤270 and
ArgDir≤φ≤ArgNegRes.

where
ArgDir is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR.
ArgNegRes is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR.
β is calculated according to equation

304 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

IL1 jX

UL1

ArgNegRes f

IL1 IL1·R

ArgDir

en 06000466.vsd
IEC06000466 V1 EN-US

Figure 116: Simplified characteristic for offset mho in forward direction for L1-
to-earth fault

Offset mho, reverse direction SEMOD154224-341 v4

In the same way as for offset in forward direction, the selection of offset mho in
reverse direction will introduce an extra criterion for operation compare to the
normal offset mho. The extra is that the angle between the fault voltage and the
fault current shall lie between the blinders in second and fourth quadrant. The
operation area in second quadrant is limited by the blinder defined as 180° -ArgDir
and in fourth quadrant ArgNegRes+180°, see figure 117.

The conditions for operation of offset mho in reverse direction for L1-to-earth fault
is 90≤β≤270 and 180°-Argdir≤φ≤ArgNegRes+180°.

The β is derived according to equation for the offset mho circle and φ is the angle
between the voltage and current.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 305

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

ZPE

ArgNegRes
ϕ

IL
1
ArgDir R

UL1
ZRevPE

en06000470.eps
IEC06000470 V1 EN-US

Figure 117: Simplified characteristic for offset mho in reverse direction for L1-
to-earth fault

8.4.6.5 Simplified logic diagrams GUID-22B4A410-6F8E-4569-A354-51A1F4951F79 v3

Distance protection zones

The design of the distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops:
phase-to-earth as well as phase-to-phase.

Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by L1N, L2N and L3N. The phase-to-
phase signals are designated by L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1.

Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one

logical signal for each separate measuring loop:

• Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described

above.
• Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 118.

The ZMHPDIS function block is used in the IED for each zone.

The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values
from Phase selection with load encroachment function FMPSPDIS within the IED,

306 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

which are converted within the zone measuring function into corresponding
boolean expressions for each condition separately. Input signal STCND is
connected from FMPSPDIS function output signal STCNDPHS.

The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the
distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both
forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filters out the
relevant signals depending on the setting of the parameter DirMode. Input signal
DIRCND must be configured to the STDIRCND output signal on ZDMRDIR
function.

OffsetMhoDir=
Non-directional
AND AND
DirMode=Offset

STCND T
AND F

AND
LoadEnchMode=
On/Off
LDCND
T
True F
AND Release

DIRCND

OffsetMhoDir=
Forward/Reverse
AND
DirMode=
Forward/Reverse

BLKZ
BLOCK OR

IEC11000216-1-en.vsd
IEC11000216 V1 EN-US

Figure 118: Simplified logic for release start signal

When load encroachment mode is switched on (LoadEnchMode=On), start signal

STCND is also checked against LDCND signal.

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits when the zone
operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 118.

Composition of the phase start signals is presented in figure 119.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 307

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Release STPE
OR

AND
STL1N STL1
OR

AND
STL2N

AND
STL3N
STL2
OR
AND
STL1L2

AND
STL2L3
STL3
OR
AND
STL3L1

START
OR

STPP
OR

IEC11000217-1-en.vsd
IEC11000217 V1 EN-US

Figure 119: Composition of starting signals

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented
in figure 120.

308 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Timer tPP=On tPP

AND t
STPP
OR
Timer tPE=On tPE
AND t
STPE

15ms
BLKTRIP AND t
TRIP

STL1 AND TRL1

AND TRL2
STL2

STL3 AND TRL3

IEC11000218-1-en.vsd
IEC11000218 V1 EN-US

Figure 120: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone

Zone timer logic for the distance protection is symbolically presented in figure 121.

STPE

BLOCK
TRPE
&
tON
& ³1 t
a
Internal a=b
start b STTIMER
&

Internal
a
a<b
start b
tON
³1 t && TRPP
&

STPP
ZnTimerSel
FALSE 1 timers seperated

³1 2 timers linked
internalCommonStart
3 internal start
phSelStart 4 start from phSel
externalCommonStart
5 external start

IEC12000463-3-en.vsd
IEC12000463 V2 EN-US

Figure 121: Zone timer logic

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 309

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.4.7 Technical data SEMOD173244-1 v1

SEMOD173242-2 v14

Table 154: ZMHPDIS technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones, Ph-E Max 5 with selectable -
direction
Minimum operate current (10–30)% of IBase -
Positive sequence impedance, (0.005–3000.000) W/phase ±2.0% static accuracy
Ph-E loop Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Positive sequence impedance (10–90) degrees
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
angle, Ph-E loop
Angle: 85 degrees
Reverse reach, Ph-E loop (0.005–3000.000) Ω/phase
(Magnitude)
Magnitude of earth return (0.00–3.00)
compensation factor KN
Angle for earth compensation (-180–180) degrees
factor KN
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees measured -
with CVT’s and 0.5<SIR<30
Definite time delay Ph-Ph and (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±60 ms whichever is
Ph-E operation greater
Operate time 22 ms typically IEC 60255-121
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Reset time at 0.5 x Zreach to 1.5 Min. = 30 ms -
x Zreach Max. = 50 ms

8.5 Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for

earth faults ZMMPDIS, ZMMAPDIS SEMOD154561-1 v2

8.5.1 Identification
SEMOD154542-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Fullscheme distance protection, ZMMPDIS 21
quadrilateral for earth faults (zone 1)

S00346 V1 EN-US

Fullscheme distance protection, ZMMAPDIS 21

quadrilateral for earth faults (zone 2-5)

S00346 V1 EN-US

310 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

8.5.2 Functionality SEMOD154544-4 v7

The line distance protection is an up to five (depending on product variant) zone

full scheme protection function with three fault loops for phase-to-earth fault for
each of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone resistive and
reactive reach give flexibility for use on overhead lines and cables of different
types and lengths.

The Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth fault functions have
functionality for load encroachment, which increases the possibility to detect high
resistive faults on heavily loaded lines , see Figure 122.

Forward
operation

Reverse
operation

en05000034.vsd
IEC05000034 V1 EN-US

Figure 122: Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with Phase selection,
quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle function FRPSPDIS
activated

The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a
sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in
applications with single phase auto-reclosing.

Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of zone1 at

load exporting end at phase to earth faults on heavily loaded power lines.

The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together
with different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables
in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 311

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.5.3 Function block SEMOD155557-4 v2

ZMMPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
BLKZ TRL3
BLKTR START
STCND STL1
DIRCND STL2
STL3
STND

IEC06000454-2-en.vsd
IEC06000454 V2 EN-US

Figure 123: ZMMPDIS function block

ZMMAPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
BLKZ TRL3
BLKTR START
STCND STL1
DIRCND STL2
STL3
STND

IEC09000947-1-en.vsd
IEC09000947 V1 EN-US

Figure 124: ZMMAPDIS function block

8.5.4 Signals
PID-3645-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 155: ZMMPDIS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
STCND INTEGER 0 External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

PID-3645-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 156: ZMMPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
Table continues on next page

312 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Name Type Description

TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
START BOOLEAN General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
STND BOOLEAN Non-directional start, issued from any phase or
loop

PID-3640-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 157: ZMMAPDIS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
STCND INTEGER 0 External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

PID-3640-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 158: ZMMAPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
START BOOLEAN General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
STND BOOLEAN Non-directional start, issued from any phase or
loop

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 313

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.5.5 Settings
PID-3645-SETTINGS v6

Table 159: ZMMPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationDir Non-directional - - Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
X1 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach
R1 0.10 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle
X0 0.50 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach
R0 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle
RFPE 1.00 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E
OpModetPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-E
IMinOpPE 10 - 30 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpIN 5 - 30 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate residual current for
Phase-Earth loops

Table 160: ZMMPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

PID-3640-SETTINGS v6

Table 161: ZMMAPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationDir Non-directional - - Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
X1 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach
R1 0.10 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle
X0 0.50 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach
R0 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle
RFPE 1.00 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E
Table continues on next page

314 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OpModetPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-E
IMinOpPE 10 - 30 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops

Table 162: ZMMAPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.5.6 Operation principle

8.5.6.1 Full scheme measurement SEMOD154546-4 v2

The different fault loops within the IED are operating in parallel in the same
principle as a full scheme measurement.

Figure 125 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five,
impedance-measuring zones l.

L1-N L2-N L3-N Zone 1

L1-N L2-N L3-N Zone 2

L1-N L2-N L3-N Zone 3

L1-N L2-N L3-N Zone 4

L1-N L2-N L3-N Zone 5

en07000080.vsd
IEC07000080 V1 EN-US

Figure 125: The different measuring loops at line-earth fault and phase-phase
fault.

8.5.6.2 Impedance characteristic SEMOD154546-11 v4

The distance measuring zone include three impedance measuring loops; one fault
loop for each phase.

The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-
directional impedance characteristics presented in Figure 126. The characteristic is
illustrated with the full loop reach.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 315

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/loop)

R1PE+Rn

RFPE RFPE

X0PE-X1PE
Xn =
3
X1PE+Xn R0PE-R1PE
Rn =
3
jN jN
R (Ohm/loop)

RFPE RFPE

X1PE+Xn

RFPE RFPE
en08000280-2-en.vsd

R1PE+Rn
IEC08000280 V1 EN-US

Figure 126: Characteristic for the phase-to-earth measuring loops, ohm/loop

domain.

The fault loop reach may also be presented as in Figure 127.

ILn R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
UL1
element

Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1 RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)

0
IN (R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 ) en06000412.vsd
IEC06000412 V1 EN-US

Figure 127: Fault loop model

316 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

The R1 and jX1 in Figure 127 represent the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The RFPE is presented in order to “convey”
the fault resistance reach.

The zone may be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward, Off or Reverse

direction through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is
illustrated in Figure 128. The impedance reach is symmetric, in the sense that it is
conform for forward and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to
both directions.

X X X

R R R

Non-directional Forward Reverse

IEC05000182-2-en.vsdx

IEC05000182 V2 EN-US

Figure 128: Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zone

8.5.6.3 Minimum operating current SEMOD154546-36 v2

The operation of the distance measuring zone is blocked if the magnitude of input
currents fall below certain threshold values.

The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn < IMinOpPE.

For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all
phase-to-earth loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIN, regardless of the phase
currents.

ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. IN is the RMS value of the vector
sum of the three phase currents, that is, residual current 3I0.

Both current limits IMinOpPE and IMinOpIN are automatically

reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set to operate in
reverse direction, that is, OperationDir=Reverse.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 317

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.5.6.4 Measuring principles SEMOD154546-46 v3

Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits.

Here U and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the
respective phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3).

The calculation of the apparant impedances at phase-to-earth fault follow equation

68

The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner.

U L1
Z app =
I L1 + I N × KN
EQUATION1223 V2 EN-US (Equation 68)

Where:
UL1, IL1 and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
KN is defined as:

Z 0 - Z1
KN =
3 × Z1
EQUATION-2105 V2 EN-US

Z 0 = R 0 + jX 0
EQUATION2106 V2 EN-US

Z 1 = R1 + jX 1
EQUATION2107 V2 EN-US

Where
R0 is setting of the resistive zero sequence reach
X0 is setting of the reactive zero sequence reach
R1 is setting of the resistive positive sequence reach
X1 is setting of the reactive positive sequence reach

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in IED point. This results in the same
reach along the line for all types of faults.

The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and

reactance X.

318 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

The formula given in equation 68 is only valid for no loaded radial feeder
applications. When load is considered in the case of single phase-to-earth fault,
conventional distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach
at importing end. IED has an adaptive load compensation which increases the
security in such applications.

Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D
converter. The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is
distributed into memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops,
sampled values of voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples
(DI) are brought from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.

The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related
to the loop impedance according to equation 69,

X Di
U = R × i + ------ × -----
w 0 Dt
EQUATION1224 V1 EN-US (Equation 69)

in complex notation, or:

X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R × Re ( I ) + ------ × ------------------
w0 Dt

EQUATION354 V1 EN-US (Equation 70)

X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R × Im ( I ) + ------ × -----------------
w0 Dt

EQUATION355 V1 EN-US (Equation 71)

with

w0 = 2 × p × f 0
EQUATION356 V1 EN-US (Equation 72)

where:
Re designates the real component of current and voltage,
Im designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and
f0 designates the rated system frequency

The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real
value of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The
equation for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal
to:

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 319

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Im ( U ) × DRe ( I ) – Re ( U ) × D Im ( I )
R m = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) × Im ( I ) – D Im ( I ) × Re ( I )
EQUATION357 V1 EN-US (Equation 73)

Re ( U ) × Im ( I ) – Im ( U ) × Re ( I )
Xm = w 0 × Dt × -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) × Im ( I ) – DIm ( I ) × Re ( I )
EQUATION358 V1 EN-US (Equation 74)

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the
set zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive
tripping results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the
capacitive voltage transformers or by other factors.

The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and

reverse directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase
locked positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures
unlimited directional sensitivity for faults close to the IED point.

8.5.6.5 Directionality SEMOD154546-97 v3

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in the Directional impedance

element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR function. Equation 75 is used to classify
that the fault is in forward direction for line-to-earth fault.

0.85 × U1L1 + 0.15 × U1L1M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1
EQUATION1617 V1 EN-US (Equation 75)

where:
ArgDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 115 degrees, see figure 129.
U1L1 is positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1

U1L1M is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1

IL1 is phase current in phase L1

The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115
degrees respectively (see figure 129) and it should not be changed unless system
studies have shown the necessity.

ZDMRDIR gives a binary coded signal on the output STDIRCND depending on

the evaluation where STFWL1N=1 adds 1, STRVL1N=1 adds 2, STFWL2N=1
adds 4 etc.

320 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

ArgNegRes

ArgDir
R

en05000722.vsd
IEC05000722 V1 EN-US

Figure 129: Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated

by 180 degrees.

The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage

exceeds 5% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for
all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.

For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.

The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored.

After 100 ms, the following occurs:

• If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set IED rated current IBase), the condition seals
in.
• If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.
• If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element
in the reverse direction remains in operation.
• If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory
resets until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 321

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.5.6.6 Simplified logic diagrams SEMOD154548-4 v1

Distance protection zones SEMOD154548-6 v3

The design of distance protection zone 1 is presented for all measuring phase-to-
earth loops.

Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by LnE, where n represents the

corresponding phase number (L1E, L2E, and L3E).

Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one

logical signal for each separate measuring loop:

• Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described

above.
• Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 130.

The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values
from the phase selection function within the IED, which are converted within the
zone measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each
condition separately. It is connected to the Phase selection with load
enchroachment, quadrilateral characteristic (FDPSPDIS) function output STCNDZ.

The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the
distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both
forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the
relevant signals on the DIRCND input depending on the setting of the parameter
OperationDir. It shall be configured to the DIRCND output on the Directional
impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR) function.

322 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

STCND

AND STNDL1N
L1N

AND STNDL2N
L2N

STNDL3N
L3N AND

OR STNDPE

OR
BLKZ STND
OR AND
BLOCK
BLK

en06000408-2.vsd
IEC06000408 V2 EN-US

Figure 130: Conditioning by a group functional input signal STCND

Composition of the phase starting signals for a case, when the zone operates in a
non-directional mode, is presented in figure 131.

STNDL1N 15 ms
AND t STL1

STNDL2N 15 ms
AND t STL2

STNDL3N 15 ms
AND t STL3

15 ms
AND t START
OR

BLK

en06000409.vsd
IEC06000409 V1 EN-US

Figure 131: Composition of starting signals in non-directional operating mode

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone
operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, see figure 132.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 323

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

STNDL1N
DIRL1N AND
OR STZMPE.
&
STNDL2N
DIRL2N AND

STNDL3N 15 ms
STL1
& t
DIRL3N AND

15 ms
STL2
& t

15 ms
STL3
& t

BLK

15 ms
OR START
& t

en07000081.vsd
IEC07000081 V1 EN-US

Figure 132: Composition of starting signals in directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented
in figure 133.

Timer tPE=On tPE

AND t
STZMPE
15ms
BLKTR AND t
TRIP

STL1 AND TRL1

STL2 AND TRL2

STL3 AND TRL3

en07000082.vsd
IEC07000082 V1 EN-US

Figure 133: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one

324 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

8.5.7 Technical data

SEMOD173249-2 v8

Table 163: ZMMPDIS technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones Max 5 with selectable direction -
Minimum operate current (10-30)% of IBase -
Positive sequence reactance (0.50-3000.00) W/phase ±2.0% static accuracy
±2.0 degrees static angular
Positive sequence resistance (0.10-1000.00) Ω/phase accuracy
Zero sequence reactance (0.50-9000.00) Ω/phase Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Zero sequence resistance (0.50-3000.00) Ω/phase Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Fault resistance, Ph-E (1.00-9000.00) W/loop Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
degrees
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees measured -
with CCVT’s and 0.5<SIR<30
Definite time delay Ph-Ph and (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever
Ph-E operation is greater
Operate time 25 ms typically IEC 60255-121
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Reset time at 0.1 x Zreach to 2 x Min. = 20 ms -
Zreach Max. = 50 ms

8.6 Directional impedance element for mho

characteristic and additional distance protection
directional function for earth faults ZDMRDIR,
ZDARDIR SEMOD154813-1 v3

8.6.1 Identification
SEMOD155886-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Directional impedance element for mho ZDMRDIR 21D
characteristic

S00346 V1 EN-US

GUID-39299546-12A2-4D9D-86D0-A33F423944E4 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Additional distance protection ZDARDIR -
directional function for earth faults

S00346 V1 EN-US

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 325

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.6.2 Functionality SEMOD154885-5 v9

The phase-to-earth impedance elements can be supervised by a phase unselective

directional function based on symmetrical components (option).

8.6.3 Function block SEMOD155551-4 v5

ZDMRDIR
I3P* DIR_CURR
U3P* DIR_VOLT
DIR_POL
STFW
STRV
STDIRCND

IEC06000422_2_en.vsd
IEC06000422 V2 EN-US

Figure 134: ZDMRDIR function block

SEMOD155560-4 v3

ZDARDIR
I3P* STFWPE
U3P* STRVPE
I3PPOL* DIREFCND
DIRCND

IEC06000425-2-en.vsd
IEC06000425 V2 EN-US

Figure 135: ZDARDIR function block

8.6.4 Signals
PID-3546-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 164: ZDMRDIR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL

PID-3546-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 165: ZDMRDIR Output signals

Name Type Description
CURR GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for current signals to Mho function
VOLT GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for voltage signals to Mho function
POL GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for polarization voltage signals to
Mho function
STFW BOOLEAN Start in forward direction
STRV BOOLEAN Start in reverse direction
STDIRCND INTEGER Binary coded directional information per
measuring loop

326 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

PID-3564-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 166: ZDARDIR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current signals
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage signals
SIGNAL
I3PPOL GROUP - Polarisation current signals
SIGNAL
DIRCND INTEGER 0 Binary coded directional signal

PID-3564-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 167: ZDARDIR Output signals

Name Type Description
STFWPE BOOLEAN Forward start signal from phase-to-ground
directional element
STRVPE BOOLEAN Reverse start signal from phase-to-ground
directional element
DIREFCND INTEGER Start direction Binary coded

8.6.5 Settings
PID-3546-SETTINGS v7

Table 168: ZDMRDIR Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DirEvalType Impedance - - Comparator Directional evaluation mode Impedance /
Comparator Comparator
Imp/Comp
ArgNegRes 90 - 175 Deg 1 115 Angle of blinder in second quadrant for
forward direction
ArgDir 5 - 45 Deg 1 15 Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for
forward direction
IMinOpPE 5 - 30 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpPP 5 - 30 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase-phase current
for Phase-Phase loops

Table 169: ZDMRDIR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 327

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

PID-3564-SETTINGS v7

Table 170: ZDARDIR Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PolMode -3U0 - - -3U0 Polarization quantity for opt dir function
-U2 for P-E faults
IPol
Dual
-3U0Comp
-U2comp
AngleRCA -90 - 90 Deg 1 75 Characteristic relay angle (= MTA or
base angle)
I> 5 - 200 %IB 1 5 Minimum operation current in % of IBase
UPol> 4 - 100 %UB 1 4 Minimum polarizing voltage in % of
UBase
IPol> 5 - 100 %IB 1 10 Minimum polarizing current in % of IBase

Table 171: ZDARDIR Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AngleOp 90 - 180 Deg 1 160 Operation sector angle
Kmag 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm 0.01 40.00 Boost-factor in -U0comp and -U2comp
polarization

Table 172: ZDARDIR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.6.6 Monitored data

PID-3546-MONITOREDDATA v6

Table 173: ZDMRDIR Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
L1Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L2Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L3Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L1R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L1
L1X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L1
L2R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L2
Table continues on next page

328 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

L2X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L2
L3R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L3
L3X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L3

8.6.7 Operation principle

8.6.7.1 Directional impedance element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR SEMOD154817-5 v6

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance element

for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR). Equation 76 and equation 77 are used to
classify that the fault is in the forward direction for phase-to-earth fault and phase-
to-phase fault respectively.

0.85 × U1L1 + 0.15 × U1L1M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1
EQUATION1617 V1 EN-US (Equation 76)

0.85 × U1L1L 2 + 0.15 × U1L1L 2M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1L 2
EQUATION1619 V1 EN-US (Equation 77)

Where:
ArgDir Setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
15 (= -15 degrees)
ArgNegRes Setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
115 degrees, see figure 136 for mho characteristics.
U1L1 Positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1

U1L1M Positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1

IL1 Phase current in phase L1

U1L1L2 Voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

U1L1L2M Memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

IL1L2 Current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

The default settings for ArgDir and ArgNegRes are 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively (see figure 136) and they should not be changed unless system studies
show the necessity.

If one sets DirEvalType to Comparator (which is recommended when using the

mho characteristic) then the directional lines are computed by means of a
comparator-type calculation, meaning that the directional lines are based on mho-
circles (of infinite radius). The default setting value Impedance otherwise means

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 329

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

that the directional lines are implemented based on an impedance calculation

equivalent to the one used for the quadrilateral impedance characteristics.

When Directional impedance element for mho characteristic

(ZDMRDIR) is used together with Fullscheme distance protection,
mho characteristic (ZMHPDIS) the following settings for
parameter DirEvalType is vital:
• alternative Comparator is strongly recommended
• alternative Imp/Comp should generally not be used
• alternative Impedance should not be used. This altenative is
intended for use together with Distance protection zone,
quadrilateral characteristic (ZMQPDIS)

X
Zset reach point

ArgNegRes

-ArgDir R

-Zs
en06000416.vsd

IEC06000416 V1 EN-US

Figure 136: Setting angles for discrimination of forward fault

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated

by 180 degrees.

The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows:
STDIRCND = L1N*1 + L2N*2 + L3N*4 + L1L2*8 + L2L3*16 + L3L1*32

Example: If only L1Nstart, the value is 1, if start in L1N and L3N are detected, the
value is 1+4=5.

The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage

exceeds 5% of the set base voltage UBase, thus the directional element can use it
for all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.

330 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.

The memory voltage is used for 100ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored. After 100ms, the following occurs:

• If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current the
condition seals in.
• If the fault has caused tripping, the trip continues.
• If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element
in the reverse direction remains in operation.
• If the current decreases below the minimum operate value, no directional
indications will be given until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of
its rated value.

The Directional impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR) function

has the following output signals:

The STDIRCND output provides an integer signal that depends on the evaluation
and is derived from a binary coded signal as follows:

bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6

(2048) (1024) (512) (256) (128) (64)
STRVL3L1= STRVL2L3= STRVL1L2= STRVL3N=1 STRVL2N=1 STRVL1N=1
1 1 1
bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
(32) (16) (8) (4) (2) (1)
STFWL3L1= STFWL2L3= STFWL1L2= STFWL3N=1 STFWL2N=1 STFWL1N=1
1 1 1

The STFW output is a logical signal with value 1 or 0. It is made up as an OR-

function of all the forward starting conditions, that is, STFWL1N, STFWL2N,
STFWL3N, STFWL1L2, STFWL2L3 and STFWL3L1. The STRV output is
similar to the STFW output, the only difference being that it is made up as an OR-
function of all the reverse starting conditions, that is, STRVL1N, STRVL2N,
STRVL3N, STRVL1L2, STRVL2L3 and STRVL3L1.

8.6.7.2 Additional distance protection directional function for earth faults

ZDARDIR SEMOD154933-95 v5

A Mho element needs a polarizing voltage to operate. The positive-sequence

memory-polarized elements are generally preferred. The benefits include:

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 331

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

• The greatest amount of expansion for improved resistive coverage. These

elements always expand back to the source.
• Memory action for all fault types. This is very important for close-in three-
phase faults.
• A common polarizing reference for all six distance-measuring loops. This is
important for single-pole tripping, during a pole-open period.

There are however some situations that can cause security problems like reverse
phase to phase faults and double phase-to-earth faults during high load periods. To
solve these, additional directional element is used.

For phase-to-earth faults, directional elements using sequence components are very
reliable for directional discrimination. The directional element can be based on one
of following types of polarization:

• Zero-sequence voltage
• Negative-sequence voltage
• Zero-sequence current

These additional directional criteria are evaluated in the Additional distance

protection directional function for earth faults (ZDARDIR).

Zero-sequence voltage polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the zero-
sequence voltage and the zero-sequence current at the location of the protection.
The measurement principle is illustrated in figure 137.

- 3U 0

AngleOp
AngleRCA

3I 0

en06000417.vsd
IEC06000417 V1 EN-US

Figure 137: Principle for zero-sequence voltage polarized additional directional

element

Negative-sequence voltage polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the

negative-sequence voltage and the negative-sequence current at the location of the
protection.

332 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Zero-sequence current polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the zero-
sequence current at the location of the protection and some reference zero-
sequence current, for example, the current in the neutral of a power transformer.

The principle of zero-sequence voltage polarization with zero-sequence current

compensation is described in figure 138. The same also applies for the negative-
sequence function.

Z0 SA I0 I0
Z0 Line Z0 SB
Charac te ris tic
ang le
U0 U0
K*I0

U0 + K*I0
IF
en06000418.vsd
IEC06000418 V1 EN-US

Figure 138: Principle for zero sequence compensation

Note that the sequence based additional directional element cannot give per phase
information about direction to fault. This is why it is an AND-function with the
normal directional element that works on a per phase base. The enable signals are
per phase and to enable the measuring element in a specific phase, both the
additional directional element and the normal directional element, for that phase
must indicate correct direction.

These polarization quantities, voltage and current, are stabilized against minimum
polarizing voltage (UPOL>) and current (IPOL>). That means if polarizing voltage
is greater than UPOL> setting, and if polarizing current is greater than IPol>, then
only they are used for direction determination.

Normal
directional Release of distance
element measuring element
L1N, L2N, L3N L1N, L2N, L3N
AND

Additional
directional AND per
element phase

en06000419.vsd
IEC06000419 V1 EN-US

Figure 139: Earth distance element directional supervision

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 333

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.7 Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC SEMOD153841-1 v3

8.7.1 Identification
GUID-030C086A-8301-481E-BA0A-6550A9C1482E v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Mho Impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC - -

8.7.2 Functionality SEMOD153843-5 v3

The Mho impedance supervision logic (ZSMGAPC) includes features for fault
inception detection and high SIR detection. It also includes the functionality for
loss of potential logic as well as for the pilot channel blocking scheme.

ZSMGAPC can mainly be decomposed in two different parts:

1. A fault inception detection logic

2. High SIR detection logic

8.7.3 Function block SEMOD155607-4 v4

ZSMGAPC
I3P* BLKZMTD
U3P* BLKCHST
BLOCK CHSTOP
REVSTART HSIR
BLOCKCS
CBOPEN

IEC06000426-2-en.vsd
IEC06000426 V2 EN-US

Figure 140: ZSMGAPC function block

8.7.4 Signals
PID-6718-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 174: ZSMGAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase current samples and DFT
SIGNAL magnitude
U3P GROUP - Three phase phase-neutral voltage samples and
SIGNAL DFT magnitude
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of the function
REVSTART BOOLEAN 0 Indication of reverse start
BLOCKCS BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the blocking carrier signal to remote end
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Indicates that the breaker is open

334 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

PID-6718-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 175: ZSMGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
BLKZMTD BOOLEAN Block signal for blocking of time domained mho
BLKCHST BOOLEAN Blocking signal to remote end to block
overreaching zone
CHSTOP BOOLEAN Stops the blocking signal to remote end
HSIR BOOLEAN Indication of source impedance ratio above set
limit

8.7.5 Settings
PID-6718-SETTINGS v1

Table 176: ZSMGAPC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PilotMode Off - - Off Pilot mode Off/On
On
Zreach 0.1 - 3000.0 Ohm 0.1 38.0 Line impedance
IMinOp 10 - 30 %IB 1 20 Minimum operating current for SIR
measurement

Table 177: ZSMGAPC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DeltaI 0 - 200 %IB 1 10 Current change level in % of IBase for
fault inception detection
Delta3I0 0 - 200 %IB 1 10 Zero seq current change level in % of
IBase
DeltaU 0 - 100 %UB 1 5 Voltage change level in % of UBase for
fault inception detection
Delta3U0 0 - 100 %UB 1 5 Zero seq voltage change level in % of
UBase
SIRLevel 5 - 15 - 1 10 Settable level for source impedance ratio

Table 178: ZSMGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 335

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.7.6 Operation principle

8.7.6.1 Fault inception detection SEMOD153847-4 v5

The aim for the fault inception detector is to quickly detect that a fault has occurred
in the system. The fault detector detects a fault when there is a sufficient change in
at least one current and at the same time there is a sufficient change in at least one
voltage. A change is defined roughly by the difference between the present
instantaneous value and the one from one power system cycle before. The change
is sufficient if it exceeds the related threshold value. DeltaI and DeltaU for phase
currents and voltages. Delta3I0 and Delta3U0 for residual current and voltage.

If the setting PilotMode is set to On in blocking scheme and the fault inception
function has detected a system fault, a block signal BLKCHST is issued and send to
remote end in order to block the overreaching zones. Different criteria has to be
fulfilled for sending the BLKCHST signal:

1. The setting PilotMode has to be set to On

2. The breaker has to be closed, that is, the input signal CBOPEN should not be
actived
3. A reverse fault should have been detected while the carrier send signal is not
blocked, that is, input signal REVSTART is activated and input signal
BLOCKCS is not activated or a fault inception is detected and input signal
CSBLOCK is not activated.

If it is later detected that it was an internal fault that made the function issue the
BLKCHST signal, the function issues a CHSTOP signal to unblock the remote end.
The criteria that have to be fulfilled for this are:

1. The function has to be in pilot mode, that is, the setting PilotMode has to be
set to On
2. The carrier send signal should be blocked, that is, input signal BLOCKCS is On
and,
3. A reverse fault should not have been detected while the carrier send signal was
not blocked, that is, input REVSTART should not have been activated before
BLOCKCS.

If loss of voltage is detected, but not a fault inception, the distance protection
function is blocked. This is also the case if a fuse failure is detected by the external
fuse failure function and activate the input FUSEFAIL. Those blocks are generated
by activating the output BLKZ, which are connected to the input BLKZ on the
distance Mho function block.

During fault inception a lot of transients are developed which in turn might cause
the distance function to overreach. The Mho supervision logic (ZSMGAPC)
increases the filtering during the most transient period of the fault. This is done by

336 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

activating the output BLKZMTD, which is connected to the input BLKZMTD on mho
distance function block.

High SIR detection SEMOD153847-22 v3

High SIR values increases the likelihood that CVT will introduce a prolonged and
distorted transient, increasing the risk for overreach of the distance function.

The SIR function calculates the SIR value as the source impedance divided by the
setting Zreach and activates the output signal HSIR if the calculated value for any
of the six basic shunt faults exceed the setting SIRLevel. The HSIR signal is
intended to block the delta based mho impedance function.

8.8 Faulty phase identification with load encroachment

FMPSPDIS SEMOD153819-1 v5

8.8.1 Identification
SEMOD155879-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Faulty phase identification with load FMPSPDIS 21
encroachment for mho

S00346 V1 EN-US

8.8.2 Functionality SEMOD153825-5 v7

The ability to accurately and reliably classify different types of fault so that single
phase tripping and autoreclosing can be used plays an important roll in today's
power systems.

The phase selection function is design to accurately select the proper fault loop(s)
in the distance function dependent on the fault type.

The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may in
some cases interfere with the distance protection zone reach and cause unwanted
operation. Therefore the function has a built in algorithm for load encroachment,
which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of the measuring zones
without interfering with the load.

The output signals from the phase selection function produce important
information about faulty phase(s), which can be used for fault analysis as well.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 337

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.8.3 Function block SEMOD155615-4 v4

FMPSPDIS
I3P* STL1
U3P* STL2
BLOCK STL3
ZSTART STPE
TR3PH STCNDPHS
1POLEAR STCNDPLE
STCNDLE
START

IEC06000429-2-en.vsd
IEC06000429 V2 EN-US

Figure 141: FMPSPDIS function block

8.8.4 Signals
PID-3541-INPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 179: FMPSPDIS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
ZSTART BOOLEAN 0 Start from underimpdeance function
TR3PH BOOLEAN 0 Three phase tripping initiated
1POLEAR BOOLEAN 0 Single pole autoreclosing in progress

PID-3541-OUTPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 180: FMPSPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
STL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3
STPE BOOLEAN Earth fault detected
STCNDPHS INTEGER Binary coded starts from phase selection
STCNDPLE INTEGER Binary coded starts from ph sel with load
encroachment
STCNDLE INTEGER Binary coded starts from load encroachment only
START BOOLEAN Indicates that something has started

338 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

8.8.5 Settings
PID-3541-SETTINGS v9

Table 181: FMPSPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IMaxLoad 10 - 5000 %IB 1 200 Maximum load for identification of three
phase fault in % of IBase
RLd 1.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 80.00 Load encroachment resistive reach in
ohm/phase
ArgLd 5 - 70 Deg 1 20 Load encroachment inclination of load
angular sector

Table 182: FMPSPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DeltaIMinOp 5 - 100 %IB 1 10 Delta current level in % of IBase
DeltaUMinOp 5 - 100 %UB 1 20 Delta voltage level in % of UBase
U1Level 5 - 100 %UB 1 80 Pos seq voltage limit for identification of
3-ph fault
I1LowLevel 5 - 200 %IB 1 10 Pos seq current level for identification of
3-ph fault in % of IBase
U1MinOp 5 - 100 %UB 1 20 Minimum operate positive sequence
voltage for ph sel
U2MinOp 1 - 100 %UB 1 5 Minimum operate negative sequence
voltage for ph sel
INRelPE 10 - 100 %IB 1 20 3I0 limit for release ph-e measuring
loops in % of max phase current
INBlockPP 10 - 100 %IB 1 40 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase
measuring loops in % of max phase
current

Table 183: FMPSPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.8.6 Operation principle

8.8.6.1 The phase selection function SEMOD153832-4 v3

Faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho (FMPSPDIS) function
can be decomposed into six different parts:

1. A high speed delta based current phase selector

2. A high speed delta based voltage phase selector
3. A symmetrical components based phase selector

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 339

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

4. Fault evaluation and selection logic

5. A load encroachment logic
6. A blinder logic

The total function can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK.

Delta based current and voltages SEMOD153832-14 v5

The delta based fault detection function uses adaptive technique and is based on
patent US4409636.

The aim of the delta based phase selector is to provide very fast and reliable phase
selection for releasing of tripping from the high speed Mho measuring element and
is essential to Directional Comparison Blocking scheme (DCB), which uses Power
Line Carrier (PLC) communication system along the protected line.

The current and voltage samples for each phase passes through a notch filter that
filters out the fundamental components. Under steady state load conditions or when
no fault is present, the output of the filter is zero or close to zero. When a fault
occurs, currents and voltages change resulting in sudden changes in the currents
and voltages resulting in non-fundamental waveforms being introduced on the line.
At this point the notch filter produces significant non-zero output. The filter output
is processed by the delta function. The algorithm uses an adaptive relationship
between phases to determine if a fault has occurred, and determines the faulty
phases.

The current and voltage delta based phase selector gives a real output signal if the
following criterion is fulfilled (only phase L1 shown):

Max(ΔUL1,ΔUL2,ΔUL3)>DeltaUMinOp

Max(ΔIL1,ΔIL2,ΔIL3)>DeltaIMinOp

where:
ΔUL1, ΔUL2 and ΔUL3 are the voltage change between sample t and sample t-1
DeltaUMinOp and are the minimum harmonic level settings for the voltage and current
DeltaIMinOp filters to decide that a fault has occurred. A slow evolving fault may not
produce sufficient harmonics to detect the fault; however, in such a
case speed is no longer the issue and the sequence components
phase selector will operate.

The delta voltages ΔULn and delta current ΔILn (n index for phase order) are the
voltage and current between sample t and sample t-1.

The delta phase selector employs adaptive techniques to determine the fault type.
The logic determines the fault type by summing up all phase values and dividing
by the largest value. Both voltages and currents are filtered out and evaluated. The
condition for fault type classification for the voltages and currents can be expressed
as:

340 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

FaulType =
∑ ( ∆UL1, ∆UL2, ∆UL3)
MAX ( ∆UL1, ∆UL 2, ∆UL3)
EQUATION1621 V2 EN-US (Equation 78)

FaulType =
∑ ( ∆IL1, ∆IL2, ∆IL3)
MAX ( ∆IL1, ∆IL 2, ∆IL3)
EQUATION1622 V2 EN-US (Equation 79)

The value of FaultType for different shunt faults are as follows:

Under ideal conditions: (Patent pending)

Single phase-to-earth; FaultType=1
Phase-to-phase fault FaultType=2
Three-phase fault; FaultType=3

The output signal is 1 for single phase-to-earth fault, 2 for phase-to-phase fault and
3 for three-phase fault. At this point the filter does not know if earth was involved
or not.

Typically there are induced harmonics in the non-faulted lines that will affect the
result. This method allows for a significant tolerance in the evaluation of FaultType
over its entire range.

When a single phase-to-earth fault has been detected, the logic determines the
largest quantity, and asserts that phase. If phase-to-phase fault is detected, the two
largest phase quantities will be detected and asserted as outputs.

The faults detected by the delta based phase selector are coordinated in a separate
block. Different phases of faults may be detected at slightly different times due to
differences in the angles of incidence of fault on the wave shape. Therefore the
output is forced to wait a certain time by means of a timer. If the timer expires, and
a fault is detected in one phase only, the fault is deemed as phase-to-earth. This
way a premature single phase-to-earth fault detection is not released for a phase-to-
phase fault. If, however, earth current is detected before the timer expires, the
phase-to-earth fault is released sooner.

If another phase picks up during the time delay, the wait time is reduced by a
certain amount. Each detection of either phase-to-earth or additional phases further
reduce the initial time delay and allow the delta phase selector output to be faster.
There is no time delay if all three phases are faulty.

The delta function is released if the input DELTAREL is activated at the same time
as input DELTABLK is not activated. Activating the DELTABLK input blocks the
delta function. The release signal has an internal pulse timer of 100 ms. When the
DELTAREL signal has disappeared the delta logic is reset. In order not to get too
abrupt change, the reset is decayed in pre-defined steps.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 341

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Symmetrical component based phase selector SEMOD153832-58 v3

The symmetrical component phase selector uses preprocessed calculated sequence

voltages and currents as inputs. It also uses sampled values of the phase currents.
All the symmetrical quantities mentioned further in this section are with reference
to phase L1.

The function is made up of four main parts:

A Detection of the presence of earth fault

B A phase-to-phase logic block based on U1/U2 angle relationship

C A phase-to-earth component based on patent US5390067 where the angle relationships

between U2/I0 and U2/U1 is evaluated to determine earth fault or phase- to-phase to earth fault

D Logic for detection of three-phase fault

Presence of earth-fault detection SEMOD153832-70 v8

This detection of earth fault is performed in two levels, first by evaluation of the
magnitude of zero sequence current, and secondly by the evaluation of the zero and
negative sequence voltage. It is a complement to the earth-fault signal built-in in
the Symmetrical component based phase selector.

The complementary based zero-sequence current function evaluates the presence of

earth fault by calculating the 3I0 and comparing the result with the setting
parameter INRelPE. The output signal is used to release the earth-fault loop. It is a
complement to the earth-fault signal built-in in the sequence based phase selector.
The condition for releasing the phase-to-earth loop is as follows:

The output from this detection is used to release the earth-fault loop.

|3I0|>maxIph × INRelPE

where:
|3I0| is the magnitude of the zero sequence current 3I0

maxIph is the maximum magnitude of the phase currents

INRelPE is a setting parameter for the relation between the magnitude of 3I0 and the
maximum phase current

The earth-fault loop is also released if the evaluation of the zero sequence current
by the main sequence function meets the following conditions:

|3I0|>IBase × 0.5

|3I0|>maxIph ×INRelPE

where:
maxIph is the maximal current magnitude found in any of the three phases
INRelPE is the setting of 3I0 limit for release of phase-to-earth measuring loop in % of IBase
IBase is the global setting of the base current (A)

342 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

In systems where the source impedance for zero sequence is high the change of
zero sequence current may not be significant and the above detection may fail. In
those cases the detection enters the second level, with evaluation of zero and
negative sequence voltage. The release of the earth-fault loops can then be
achieved if all of the following conditions are fulfilled:

|3U0|>|U2| × 0.5

|3U0|>|U1| × 0.2

|U1|> UBase × 0.2/√(3)

and

3I0<0.1 × IBase

or

3I0<maxIph × INRelPE

where:
3U0 is the magnitude of the zero sequence voltage

U2 is the magnitude of the negative sequence voltage at the relay measuring point

k5 is design parameter
ILmax is the maximal phase current
IMinOp is the setting of minimum operate phase current in % of IBase

Phase-to-phase fault detection SEMOD153832-119 v2

The detection of phase-to-phase fault is performed by evaluation of the angle

difference between the sequence voltages U2 and U1.

IEC06000383-2-en.vsd
IEC06000383 V2 EN-US

Figure 142: Definition of fault sectors for phase-to-phase fault

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 343

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

The phase-to-phase loop for the faulty phases will be determined if the angle
between the sequence voltages U2 and U1 lies within the sector defined according
to figure 142 and the following conditions are fulfilled:

|U1|>U1MinOP

|U2|>U2MinOp

where:
U1MinOP and U2MinOp are the setting parameters for positive sequence and negative sequence
minimum operate voltages

The positive sequence voltage U1L1 in figure 142 above is reference.

If there is a three-phase fault, there will not be any release of the individual phase
signals, even if the general conditions for U2 and U1 are fulfilled.

Phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase-to-earth-fault detection SEMOD153832-135 v5

The detection of phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase-to-earth fault (US patent

5390067) is based on two conditions:

1. Angle relationship between U2 and I0

2. Angle relationship between U2 and U1

The condition 1 determines faulty phase at single phase-to-earth fault by evaluating

the argument between U2 and I0.

80°

L2-E sector L3-E sector

U2L1
(Ref)

200°
L1-E sector
320°

IEC06000384_2_en.vsd
IEC06000384 V3 EN-US

Figure 143: Condition 1: Definition of faulty phase sector as angle between U2

and I0

The angle is calculated in a directional function block and gives the angle in
radians as input to the U2 and I0 function block. The input angle is released only if

344 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

the fault is in forward direction. This is done by the directional element. The fault
is classified as forward direction if the angle between U0 and I0 lies between 20 to
200 degrees, see figure 144.

Forward 20°

200° Reverse

en06000385.vsd

IEC06000385 V1 EN-US

Figure 144: Directional element used to release the measured angle between
Uo and I0

The input radians are summarized with an offset angle and the result evaluated. If
the angle is within the boundaries for a specific sector, the phase indication for that
sector will be active see figure 143. Only one sector signal is allowed to be
activated at the same time.

The sector function for condition 1 has an internal release signal which is active if
the main sequence function has classified the angle between U0 and I0 as valid. The
following conditions must be fulfilled for activating the release signals:

|U2|>U2MinOp

|3I0|> 0.05 · IBase

|3I0|>maxIph · INRelPE

where:
U2 and IN are the magnitude of the negative sequence voltage and zero-
sequence current (3I0)

U2MinOp is the setting parameter for minimum operating negative sequence

voltage
maxIph is the maximum phase current
INRelPE is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth loop

The angle difference is phase shifted by 180 degrees if the fault is in reverse
direction.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 345

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

The condition 2 looks at the angle relationship between the negative sequence
voltage U2 and the positive sequence voltage U1. Since this is a phase-to-phase
voltage relationship, there is no need for shifting phases if the fault is in reverse
direction. A phase shift is introduced so that the fault sectors will have the same
angle boarders as for condition 1. If the calculated angle between U2 and U1 lies
within one sector, the corresponding phase for that sector will be activated. The
condition 2 is released if both the following conditions are fulfilled:

|U2|>U2MinOp

|U1|>U1MinOP

where:
|U1| and |U2| are the magnitude of the positive and negative sequence voltages.

U1MinOP and U2MinOp are the setting parameters for positive sequence and negative sequence
minimum operating voltages.

140°
L3-E sector
20°

U1L1
(Ref)
L1-E sector
L2-E sector

260° IEC06000413_2_en.vsd
IEC06000413 V2 EN-US

Figure 145: Condition 2: U2 and U1 angle relationship

If both conditions are true and there is sector match, the fault is deemed as single
phase-to-earth. If the sectors, however, do not match the fault is determined to be
the complement of the second condition, that is, a phase-to-phase-to- earth fault.

Condition 1 and Condition 2 ⇒ Fault type

L3-E L3-E L3-E
L2-E L1-E L2-L3-E

The sequence phase selector is blocked when earth is not involved or if a three-
phase fault is detected.

346 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Three-phase fault detection SEMOD153832-174 v4

Unless it has been categorized as a single or two-phase fault, the function classifies
it as a three-phase fault if the following conditions are fulfilled:

|U1|<U1Level

and

|I1|>I1LowLevel

or

|I1|>IMaxLoad

where:
|U1| and |I1| are the positive sequence voltage and current magnitude

U1Level , are the setting of limits for positive sequence voltage and current
I1LowLevel
IMaxLoad is the setting of the maximum load current

The output signal for detection of three-phase fault is only released if not earth
fault and phase-to-phase fault in the main sequence function is detected.

The conditions for not detecting earth fault are the inverse of equation 5 to 10.

The condition for not detecting phase-to-phase faults is determined by three

conditions. Each of them gives condition for not detecting phase-to-phase fault.
Those are:

1:
earth fault is detected
or
|3I0|> 0.05 · IBase

and
|3I0|>maxIph ·INRelPE

2:
phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase faults are not fulfilled
and
maxIph<0.1 · IBase
and
|I2|<0.1 · maxIph

3:
|3I0|>maxIph · INBlockPP

or
|I2|<maxIph · I2ILmax

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 347

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

where:
maxIph is the maximum of the phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3
INRelPE is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for release of phase-to-earth fault loops
|I2| is the magnitude of the negative sequence current

I2ILmax is the setting parameter for the relation between negative sequence current
to the maximum phase current in percent of IBase
INBlockPP is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for blocking phase to phase measuring
loops

Fault evaluation and selection logic SEMOD153832-307 v3

The phase selection logic has an evaluation procedure that can be simplified
according to figure 146. Only phase L1 is shown in the figure. If the internal signal
3 Phase fault is activated, all four outputs START, STL1, STL2 and STL3 gets
activated.

a a>b FaultPriority
DeltaIL1 then c=a c Adaptive release
b else c=b dependent on result
from Delta logic
DeltaUL1

Sequence based
function a<b
a
L1L2 fault
then c=b c
OR b else c=a OR
L1N fault

3 Phase fault

STL1
IL1Valid &

BLOCK

IEC06000386-2-en.vsd
IEC06000386 V2 EN-US

Figure 146: Simplified diagram for fault evaluation, phase L1

Load encroachment logic SEMOD153832-312 v3

Each of the six measuring loops has its own load (encroachment) characteristic
based on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality
is always activated in faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho
(FMPSPDIS) function but the influence on the zone measurement can be switched
On/Offin the respective impedance measuring function.

The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 147. As illustrated, the

resistive reach in forward and reverse direction and the angle of the sector is the

348 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

same in all four quadrants. The reach for the phase selector will be reduced by the
load encroachment function, as shown in figure 147.

Blinder
Blinder provides a mean to discriminate high load from a fault. The operating
characteristic is illustrated in figure 147. There are six individual measuring loops
with the blinder functionality. Three phase-to-earth loops which estimate the
impedance according to

Zn = Uph / Iph

and three phase-to-phase loops according to

Zph-ph = Uph-ph / Iph-ph

The start operations from respective loop are binary coded into one word and
provides an output signal STCNDPLE.
X jX

Operation area Operation area

RLd
ArgLd ArgLd
R

ArgLd R
ArgLd
RLd

Operation area

No operation area No operation area

en06000414.vsd
IEC06000414 V1 EN-US

Figure 147: Influence on the characteristic by load encroachment logic

Outputs SEMOD153832-327 v7

The output of the sequence components based phase selector and the delta logic
phase selector activates the output signals STL1, STL2 and STL3. If an earth fault
is detected the signal STPE gets activated.

The phase selector also gives binary coded signals that are connected to the zone
measuring element for opening the correct measuring loop(s). This is done by the
signal STCNDPHS. If only one phase is started (L1, L2 or L3), the corresponding
phase-to-earth element is enabled. STPE is expected to be made available for two-
phase and three-phase faults for the correct output to be selected. The fault loop is
indicated by one of the decimal numbers below.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 349

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

The output STCNDPHS provides release information from the phase selection part
only. STCNDLE provides release information from the load encroachment part
only. STCNDPLE provides release information from the phase selection part and
the load encroachment part combined, that is, both parts have to issue a release at
the same time (this signal is normally not used in the zone measuring element). In
these signals, each fault type has an associated value, which represents the
corresponding zone measuring loop to be released. The values are presented in
table 183.

0= no faulted phases
1= L1E
2= L2E
3= L3E
4= -L1L2E
5= -L2L3E
6= -L3L1E
7= -L1L2L3E
8= -L1L2
9= -L2L3
10= -L3L1
11= L1L2L3

An additional logic is applied to handle the cases when phase-to-earth outputs are
to be asserted when the earth input G is not asserted.

The output signal STCNDPLE is activated when the load encroachment is

operating.

STCNDPLE is connected to the input STCND for selected quadrilateral impedance

measuring zones to be blocked. The signal must be connected to the input LDCND
for selected mho impedance measuring zones .

The load encroachment at the measuring zone must be activated to

release the blocking from the load encroachment function.

8.8.7 Technical data

SEMOD153649-2 v8

Table 184: FMPSPDIS technical data

Function
Load encroachment criteria:
Load resistance, forward and
reverse
Range or value Accuracy
(1.00–3000.00) W/phase ±2.0% static accuracy
(5–70) degrees Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1–1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5–30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees

350 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

8.9 Distance protection zone, quadrilateral

characteristic, separate settings ZMRPDIS,
ZMRAPDIS and ZDRDIR GUID-7308DB86-32CE-4615-95DC-92BEEF69E184 v1

8.9.1 Identification
GUID-420DD49A-C65B-4F04-B317-9558DCCE7A52 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral ZMRPDIS 21
characteristic, separate settings (zone
1)

S00346 V1 EN-US

Distance protection zone, quadrilateral ZMRAPDIS 21

characteristic, separate settings (zone
2-5)

S00346 V1 EN-US

GUID-119120A5-8600-44C6-9C85-81136DBBE280 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Directional impedance quadrilateral ZDRDIR Z<-> 21D

8.9.2 Functionality GUID-014501E7-EE0D-440F-8DC8-C44B848E49D3 v3

The line distance protection is up to five zone full scheme protection with three
fault loops for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-earth fault
for each of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone in resistive and
reactive reach gives flexibility for use as back-up protection for transformer
connected to overhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.

Mho alternative quadrilateral characteristic is available.

Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic (ZMRPDIS) together with

Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle (FRPSPDIS) has
functionality for load encroachment, which increases the possibility to detect high
resistive faults on heavily loaded lines.

The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 351

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.9.3 Function block

GUID-8DF1E00C-8404-4B1C-AE2F-5702269B699A v2

ZMRPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
BLKZ TRL3
BLKTR START
STCND STL1
DIRCND STL2
STL3
STND

IEC08000248-1-en.vsd
IEC08000248 V1 EN-US

Figure 148: ZMRPDIS function block

ZMRAPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
BLKZ TRL3
BLKTR START
STCND STL1
DIRCND STL2
STL3
STND

IEC08000290_1_en.vsd
IEC08000290 V1 EN-US

Figure 149: ZMRAPDIS function block

GUID-3BB8A08A-3199-42E3-B161-B11F4FF8C65F v2

ZDRDIR
I3P* STDIRCND
U3P*
IEC10000007-2-en.vsd

IEC10000007 V2 EN-US

8.9.4 Signals
PID-3649-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 185: ZMRPDIS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
STCND INTEGER 0 External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

352 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

PID-3649-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 186: ZMRPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
START BOOLEAN General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
STND BOOLEAN Non-directional start, issued from any phase or
loop

PID-3648-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 187: ZMRAPDIS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all trip outputs
STCND INTEGER 0 External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

PID-3648-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 188: ZMRAPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
START BOOLEAN General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
STND BOOLEAN Non-directional start, issued from any phase or
loop

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 353

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

PID-726-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 189: ZDRDIR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - group connection for current abs 2
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - group connection for voltage abs 2
SIGNAL

PID-726-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 190: ZDRDIR Output signals

Name Type Description
STDIRCND INTEGER Binary coded directional information per
measuring loop

8.9.5 Settings
PID-3649-SETTINGS v6

Table 191: ZMRPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationDir Non-directional - - Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
X1PP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-
Ph
R1PP 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-Ph
X1PE 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-E
R1PE 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-E
RFPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-
Ph
X0PE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E
RFPE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E
R0PE 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle, Ph-E
OperationPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-
On Phase loops
OpModetPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph
OperationPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth
On loops
OpModetPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
Table continues on next page

354 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-E
IMinOpPP 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate delta current for
Phase-Phase loops
IMinOpPE 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpIN 5 - 1000 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate residual current for
Phase-Earth loops

Table 192: ZMRPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

PID-3648-SETTINGS v6

Table 193: ZMRAPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationDir Non-directional - - Forward Operation mode of directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
X1PP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-
Ph
R1PP 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-Ph
X1PE 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-E
R1PE 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-E
RFPP 0.10 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-
Ph
X0PE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E
RFPE 0.10 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-E
R0PE 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle, Ph-E
OperationPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-
On Phase loops
OpModetPP Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph
OperationPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth
On loops
OpModetPE Off - - On Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 355

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of trip, Ph-E
IMinOpPP 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate delta current for
Phase-Phase loops
IMinOpPE 10 - 1000 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops

Table 194: ZMRAPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

PID-3545-SETTINGS v6

Table 195: ZDRDIR Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IMinOpPP 5 - 30 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase-phase current
for Phase-Phase loops
IMinOpPE 5 - 30 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
ArgNegRes 90 - 175 Deg 1 115 Angle of blinder in second quadrant for
forward direction
ArgDir 5 - 45 Deg 1 15 Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for
forward direction

Table 196: ZDRDIR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.9.6 Operation principle

8.9.6.1 Full scheme measurement GUID-4519D9AD-4446-48FC-86CC-140E5299AFB7 v1

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type,
which means that each fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase faults
for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.

Figure 150 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for up to five,
impedance-measuring zones. There are 3 to 5 zones depending on product type and
variant.

356 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 1

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 2

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 3

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 4

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 5

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

Zone RV

IEC05000458-2-en.vsd
IEC05000458 V2 EN-US

Figure 150: The different measuring loops at phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-
phase fault.

The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one
independent distance protection IED with six measuring elements.

8.9.6.2 Impedance characteristic GUID-0DC94F08-9B3A-424D-9615-BD5C577344ED v1

The distance measuring zone includes six impedance measuring loops; three
intended for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as,
three-phase faults.

The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-
directional impedance characteristics presented in figure 151 and figure 152. The
phase-to-earth characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-
to-phase characteristic presents the per phase reach.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 357

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/loop)

R1PE+Rn

RFPE RFPE

X0PE-X1PE
Xn =
3
X1PE+Xn R0PE-R1PE
Rn =
3
jN jN
R (Ohm/loop)

RFPE RFPE

X1PE+Xn

RFPE RFPE
en08000280-2-en.vsd

R1PE+Rn
IEC08000280 V1 EN-US

Figure 151: Characteristic for phase-to-earth measuring , ohm/loop domain

358 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/phase)

RFPP R1PP RFPP

2 2
X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PEPG- -
X31XRVPE
1RVPG
XNRV =
XNRV =
3 3
XX
X00
PE
0 PE
-X
PG --1X 11FWPE
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW =
XNFW==
XNFW
X1PP 3 33

j j
R (Ohm/phase)

RFPP RFPP
2 2

X1PP

RFPP R1PP RFPP

2 2
en07000062.vsd
IEC07000062 V2 EN-US

Figure 152: Characteristic for phase-to-phase measuring

The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in
figure 153. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault)
resistive reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 359

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

IL1 R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
UL1
element

Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1 RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)

0
IN (R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )

IL1 R1 + j X1 Phase-to-phase
UL1 element L1-L2
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase RFPP
L1-L2 IL2
UL2 (Arc resistance)
R1 + j X1

IL1 R1 + j X1 0.5·RFPP Phase-to-phase

UL1 element L1-L3
Three-phase
fault
IL3
UL3
R1 + j X1 0.5·RFPP
IEC08000282-2-en.vsd
IEC08000282 V2 EN-US

Figure 153: Fault loop model

The R1 and jX1 in figure 153 represents the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The settings RFPE and RFPP are the
eventual fault resistances in the faulty place.

Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 153, there is of course fault
current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration
merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase.

The zone can be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction

through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated
in figure 154. The impedance reach is symmetric, in the sense that it conforms for
forward and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to both directions.

360 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

X X X

R R R

Non-directional Forward Reverse

IEC05000182-2-en.vsdx

IEC05000182 V2 EN-US

Figure 154: Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zones

8.9.6.3 Minimum operating current GUID-BFD07CBE-F322-4602-A3BC-B6E8D72DB92B v1

The operation of Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic

(ZMRPDIS) is blocked if the magnitude of input currents fall below certain
threshold values.

The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn < IMinOpPE.

For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all
phase-to-earth loops can be blocked when IN < IMinOpIN, regardless of the phase
currents.

ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. IN is the RMS value of the vector
sum of the three-phase currents, that is residual current 3I0.

The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if ILmLn< IMinOpPP.

ILmLn is the RMS value of the vector difference between phase currents Lm and
Ln.

All three current limits IMinOpPE, IMinOpIN and IMinOpPP are

automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set
to operate in reverse direction, that is OperationDir=Reverse

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 361

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.9.6.4 Measuring principles M16923-4 v7

Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The
apparent impedances at phase-to-phase faults follow equation 80 (example for a
phase L1 to phase L2 fault).

UL1 – UL2
Zapp = -------------------------
I L1 – IL2
EQUATION1222 V1 EN-US (Equation 80)

Here U and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the
respective phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3)

The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner to phase-to-earth

faults (example for a phase L1 to earth fault) according to equation 81.

U L1
Z app =
I L1 + I N × KN
EQUATION1223 V2 EN-US (Equation 81)

Where:
are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
U L1
I L1
IN

KN
is defined as:

Z 0 - Z1
KN =
3 × Z1
EQUATION-2105 V2 EN-US

Z 0 = R 0 + jX 0
EQUATION2106 V2 EN-US

Z 1 = R1 + jX 1
EQUATION2107 V2 EN-US

Where
R0 is setting of the resistive zero sequence reach
X0 is setting of the reactive zero sequence reach
R1 is setting of the resistive positive sequence reach

362 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

X1 is setting of the reactive positive sequence reach

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in IED point. This results in the same
reach along the line for all types of faults.

The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and

reactance X.

The formula given in equation 81 is only valid for radial feeder application without
load. When load is considered in the case of single phase-to-earth fault,
conventional distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach
at importing end. The IED has an adaptive load compensation which increases the
security in such applications.

Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D
converter. The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is
distributed into memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops,
sampled values of voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples
(DI) are brought from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.

The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related
to the loop impedance according to equation 82,

X Di
U = R × i + ------ × -----
w 0 Dt
EQUATION1224 V1 EN-US (Equation 82)

in complex notation, or:

X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R × Re ( I ) + ------ × ------------------
w0 Dt

EQUATION354 V1 EN-US (Equation 83)

X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R × Im ( I ) + ------ × -----------------
w0 Dt

EQUATION355 V1 EN-US (Equation 84)

with

w0 = 2 × p × f 0
EQUATION356 V1 EN-US (Equation 85)

where:
Re designates the real component of current and voltage,
Im designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and
f0 designates the rated system frequency

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 363

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real
value of the voltage and substitutes it in the equation for the imaginary part. The
equation for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is
equal to:

Im ( U ) × DRe ( I ) – Re ( U ) × D Im ( I )
R m = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) × Im ( I ) – D Im ( I ) × Re ( I )
EQUATION357 V1 EN-US (Equation 86)

Re ( U ) × Im ( I ) – Im ( U ) × Re ( I )
Xm = w 0 × Dt × -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) × Im ( I ) – DIm ( I ) × Re ( I )
EQUATION358 V1 EN-US (Equation 87)

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the
set zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive
tripping results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the
capacitive voltage transformers or by other factors.

The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and

reverse directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase
locked positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures
unlimited directional sensitivity for faults close to the IED point.

8.9.6.5 Directional impedance element for quadrilateral characteristics M16923-139 v6

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance

quadrilateral function ZDRDIR. Equation 88 and equation 89 are used to classify
that the fault is in forward direction for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase
fault.

0.8 × U 1L1 + 0.2 × U 1L1 M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1
EQUATION725 V2 EN-US (Equation 88)

For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is according to.

364 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

0.8 × U 1L1 L 2 + 0.2 × U 1L1 L 2 M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1 L 2
EQUATION726 V2 EN-US (Equation 89)

where:
ArgDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 115 degrees, see figure 155.
is positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1
U 1L1
is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1
U 1L1M
is phase current in phase L1
I L1
is voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
U 1L1L 2
is memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
U 1L1L 2 M
is current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
I L1L 2

The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115
degrees respectively (as shown in figure 155). It should not be changed unless
system studies have shown the necessity.

ZDRDIR gives binary coded directional information per measuring loop on the
output STDIRCND.

STDIR= STFWL1*1+STFWL2*2+STFWL3*4+STFWL1L2*8+
+STFWL2L3*16+STFWL3L1*32+STRVL1*64+STRVL2*128+
+STRVL3*256+STRVL1L2*512+STRVL2L3*1024+STRVL3L1*2048

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 365

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

ArgNegRes

ArgDir
R

en05000722.vsd
IEC05000722 V1 EN-US

Figure 155: Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault in
Directional impedance quadrilateral function ZDRDIR

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated

by 180 degrees.

The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive sequence voltage exceeds
5% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for all
unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.

For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.

The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored.

After 100 ms the following occurs:

• If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set IED rated current IBase), the condition seals
in.
• If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.
• If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element
in the reverse direction remains in operation.
• If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory
resets until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

366 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

8.9.6.6 Simplified logic diagrams M13841-35 v2

Distance protection zones GUID-CBBD5D22-7372-4C0A-B941-44A5D21EC328 v2

The design of the distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops:
phase-to-earth as well as phase-to-phase.

Phase-to-earth related signals are designated by L1N, L2N and L3N.. The phase-to-
phase signals are designated by L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1.

Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one

logical signal for each separate measuring loop:

• Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described

above.
• Group functional input signal (STCND), as presented in figure 75.

The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values
from Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function
FRPSPDIS within the IED, which are converted within the zone measuring
function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition separately.
Input signal STCND is connected to FRPSPDISfunction output STCNDZ.

The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the
distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both
forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the
relevant signals depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It must be
configured to the STDIRCND output on directional function ZDRDIR function.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 367

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

STZMPP
OR
STCND

AND STNDL1L2
L1L2

STNDL2L3
L2L3 AND

L3L1 AND STNDL3L1

AND STNDL1N
L1N

AND STNDL2N
L2N

STNDL3N
L3N AND

OR STPE

OR
VTSZ STND
OR AND
BLOCK
BLOCFUNC BLK

99000557-2.vsd
IEC99000557-TIFF V3 EN-US

Figure 156: Conditioning by a group functional input signal STCND, external

start condition

Composition of the phase start signals for a case, when the zone operates in a non-
directional mode, is presented in figure 76.

STNDL1N
OR
STNDL2N 15 ms
AND t STL1
STNDL3N
STNDL1L2 OR 15 ms
AND t STL2
STNDL2L3
15 ms
STNDL3L1 AND t STL3
OR
15 ms
AND t START
OR

BLK

IEC09000889-1-en.vsd
IEC09000889 V1 EN-US

Figure 157: Composition of starting signals in non-directional operating mode

368 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone
operates in directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 77.

STNDL1N
AND
DIRL1N
STZMPE.
OR
STNDL2N
DIRL2N AND

STNDL3N 15 ms
OR STL1
AND AND t
DIRL3N

STNDL1L2
DIRL1L2 AND 15 ms
OR STL2
AND t
STNDL2L3
DIRL2L3 AND
15 ms
OR STL3
STNDL3L1 AND t
DIRL3L1 AND

STZMPP
OR

BLK

15 ms
OR START
AND t

IEC09000888-2-en.vsd
IEC09000888 V2 EN-US

Figure 158: Composition of start signals in directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented
in figure 78.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 369

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Timer tPP=On
STZMPP AND tPP
AND
t

BLOCFUNC
OR OR
tPE
t
AND
Timer tPE=On AND
STZMPE 15ms
BLKTR AND t
TRIP
BLK OR

STL1 AND TRL1

STL2 AND TRL2

STL3 AND TRL3

IEC09000887-3-en.vsdx

IEC09000887 V3 EN-US

Figure 159: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone

8.9.7 Technical data

GUID-7617A215-AE7C-47CC-B189-4914F530F717 v7

Table 197: ZMRPDIS, ZMRAPDIS technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones Max 5 with selectable -
direction
Minimum operate residual (5-1000)% of IBase -
current, zone 1
Minimum operate current, (10-1000)% of IBase -
phase-to-phase and phase-to-
earth
Positive sequence reactance (0.10-3000.00) Ω/ ±2.0% static accuracy
phase ±2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Conditions:
Positive sequence resistance (0.01-1000.00) Ω/ Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
phase
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Zero sequence reactance (0.10-9000.00) Ω/ Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
phase
Zero sequence resistance (0.01-3000.00) Ω/
phase
Fault resistance, phase-to-earth (0.10-9000.00) Ω/loop
Fault resistance, phase-to- (0.10-3000.00) Ω/loop
phase
Table continues on next page

370 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees -
measured with CVT’s
and 0.5<SIR<30
Definite time delay phase-phase (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
and phase-earth operation
Operate time 25 ms typically IEC 60255-121
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Reset time at 0.1 x Zreach to 2 x Min. = 20 ms -
Zreach Max. =50 ms

8.10 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with

settable angle FRPSPDIS GUID-29E9C424-5AF7-40EE-89D9-F6BB4F0A0836 v2

8.10.1 Identification
GUID-07DB9506-656C-4E5F-A043-3DAA624313C7 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Phase selection, quadrilateral FRPSPDIS 21
characteristic with settable angle
Z<phs

SYMBOL-DD V1 EN-US

8.10.2 Functionality GUID-A15350C8-CFA9-4BD9-9DE1-5D5814290F61 v3

The ability to accurately and reliably classify the different types of fault, so that
single pole tripping and autoreclosing can be used plays an important role in
today's power systems. Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable
angle FRPSPDIS is designed to accurately select the proper fault loop in the
distance function dependent on the fault type.

The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may make
fault resistance coverage difficult to achieve. Therefore, FRPSPDIS has a built-in
algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the
resistive setting of both the phase selection and the measuring zones without
interfering with the load.

The extensive output signals from the phase selection gives also important
information about faulty phase(s) which can be used for fault analysis.

A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements

continuously measure three phase currents and the residual current and, compare
them with the set values.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 371

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.10.3 Function block GUID-4AE8EAC6-5231-4646-9215-33DBBA039B65 v2

FRPSPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* START
BLOCK STFWL1
DIRCND STFWL2
STFWL3
STFWPE
STRVL1
STRVL2
STRVL3
STRVPE
STNDL1
STNDL2
STNDL3
STNDPE
STFW1PH
STFW2PH
STFW3PH
STPE
STPP
STCNDZ
STCNDLE

IEC08000430-2-en.vsd
IEC08000430 V2 EN-US

Figure 160: FRPSPDIS function block

8.10.4 Signals
PID-3643-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 198: FRPSPDIS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
DIRCND INTEGER 0 External directional condition

PID-3643-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 199: FRPSPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip output
START BOOLEAN Start in any phase or loop
STFWL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - forward direction
STFWL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - forward direction
STFWL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - forward direction
STFWPE BOOLEAN Earth fault detected in forward direction
STRVL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - reverse direction
STRVL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - reverse direction
STRVL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - reverse direction
Table continues on next page

372 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Name Type Description

STRVPE BOOLEAN Earth fault detected in reverse direction
STNDL1 BOOLEAN Non directional start in L1
STNDL2 BOOLEAN Non directional start in L2
STNDL3 BOOLEAN Non directional start in L3
STNDPE BOOLEAN Non directional start, phase-earth
STFW1PH BOOLEAN Start in forward direction for single-phase fault
STFW2PH BOOLEAN Start in forward direction for two- phase fault
STFW3PH BOOLEAN Start in forward direction for thre-phase fault
STPE BOOLEAN Current conditions release of phase-earth
measuring elements
STPP BOOLEAN Current conditions release of phase-phase
measuring elements
STCNDZ INTEGER Start condition (Z< with LE and 3I0 E/F detection)
STCNDLE INTEGER Start condition (only LE and 3I0 E/F detection)

8.10.5 Settings
PID-3643-SETTINGS v7

Table 200: FRPSPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
INBlockPP 10 - 100 %IPh 1 40 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase
measuring loops
INReleasePE 10 - 100 %IPh 1 20 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth
measuring loops
RLdFw 1.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 80.00 Forward resistive reach within the load
impedance area
RLdRv 1.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 80.00 Reverse resistive reach within the load
impedance area
ArgLd 5 - 70 Deg 1 30 Load angle determining the load
impedance area
X1 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach
R1PP 0.10 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-Ph
R1PE 0.10 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 1.50 Positive seq. resistance for characteristic
angle, Ph-E
X0 0.50 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach
R0PE 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Zero seq. resistance for zone
characteristic angle, Ph-E
RFFwPP 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward
RFRvPP 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
RFFwPE 1.00 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, forward
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 373

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

RFRvPE 1.00 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, reverse
IMinOpPP 5 - 500 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate delta current for
Phase-Phase loops
IMinOpPE 5 - 500 %IB 1 5 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops

Table 201: FRPSPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TimerPP Off - - Off Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Time delay to trip, Ph-Ph
TimerPE Off - - Off Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer,
On Ph-E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Time delay to trip, Ph-E

Table 202: FRPSPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.10.6 Operation principle GUID-163B55DE-056F-4CB9-A401-78F9F4897903 v2

The basic impedance algorithm for the operation of the phase selection measuring
elements is the same as for the distance zone measuring function. Phase selection,
quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle (FRPSPDIS) includes six impedance
measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for
phase-to-phase as well as for three-phase faults.

The difference, compared to the distance zone measuring function, is in the

combination of the measuring quantities (currents and voltages) for different types
of faults.

The characteristic is basically non-directional, but FRPSPDIS uses information

from the directional function ZDRDIR to discriminate whether the fault is in
forward or reverse direction.

The start condition STCNDZ is essentially based on the following criteria:

• Residual current criteria, that is, separation of faults with and without earth
connection
• Regular quadrilateral impedance characteristic
• Load encroachment characteristics is always active but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.

374 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

The current start condition STCNDLE is based on the following criteria:

• Residual current criteria

• No quadrilateral impedance characteristic. The impedance reach outside the
load area is theoretically infinite. The practical reach, however, will be
determined by the minimum operating current limits.
• Load encroachment characteristic is always active, but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.

The STCNDLE output is non-directional. The directionality is determined by the

distance zones directional function ZDRDIR.

There are output from FRPSPDIS that indicate whether a start is in forward or
reverse direction or non-directional, for example STFWL1, STRVL1 and STNDL1.

These directional indications are based on the sector boundaries of the directional
function and the impedance setting of FRPSPDIS function. Their operating
characteristics are illustrated in figure 161.

X X X

R
R R

Non-directional (ND) Forward (FW) Reverse (RV)

en08000286.vsd
IEC08000286 V1 EN-US

Figure 161: Characteristics for non-directional, forward and reverse operation

of Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle
(FRPSPDIS)

The setting of the load encroachment function may influence the total operating
characteristic, for more information, refer to section "Load encroachment".

The input DIRCND contains binary coded information about the directional
coming from the directional function ZDRDIR. It shall be connected to the STDIR
output on ZDRDIR. This information is also transferred to the input DIRCND on
the distance measuring zones, that is, the ZMRPDIS block.

The code built up for the directionality is as follows:

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 375

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

STDIR= STFWL1*1+STFWL2*2+STFWL3*4+STFWL1L2*8+
+STFWL2L3*16+STFWL3L1*32+STRVL1*64+STRVL2*128+
+STRVL3*256+STRVL1L2*512+STRVL2L3*1024+STRVL3L1*2048

If the binary information is 1 then it will be considered that we have start in

forward direction in phase L1. If the binary code is 3 then we have start in forward
direction in phase L1 and L2 etc.

The STCNDZ or STCNDLE output contains, in a similar way as DIRCND, binary

coded information, in this case information about the condition for opening correct
fault loop in the distance measuring element. It shall be connected to the STCND
input on the ZMRPDIS distance measuring zones block.

The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows:

STCNDZ = L1N*1 + L2N*2 + L3N*4 + L1L2*8 + L2L3*16 + L3L1*32

8.10.6.1 Phase-to-earth fault GUID-37AF6C9C-852E-48D9-A307-A23F2BF6884A v1

For a phase-to-earth fault, the measured impedance by FRPSPDIS is according to

equation 90.

Index PHS in images and equations reference settings for Phase

selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle
(FRPSPDIS).

ULn
ZPHSn =
ILn
EQUATION1255 V1 EN-US (Equation 90)

where:
n corresponds to the particular phase (n=1, 2 or 3)

The characteristic for FRPSPDIS function at phase-to-earth fault is according to

figure 162. The characteristic has a settable angle for the resistive boundary in the
first quadrant of 70°.

The resistance RN and reactance XN are the impedance in the earth-return path
defined according to equation 93 and equation 94.

376 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

R 0 PE - R1PE
RN =
3
EQUATION-2125 V1 EN-US (Equation 91)
R0 - R1
RN =
3
EQUATION1256 V1 EN-US (Equation 91)

X 0 - X1
XN =
3
EQUATION1257 V1 EN-US (Equation 92)

X (ohm/loop)
R1PE+RN

RFRvPE RFFwPE

X1+XN

RFFwPE

RFRvPE R (Ohm/loop)

X1+XN

RFRvPE RFFwPE

R1PE+RN
IEC09000633-1-en.vsd
IEC09000633 V1 EN-US

Figure 162: Characteristic of FRPSPDIS for phase to earth fault (directional

lines are drawn as "line-dot-dot-line")

Besides this, the 3I0 residual current must fulfil the conditions according to
equation 93 and equation 94.

3 × I0 ³ 0.5 × IMinOpPE
EQUATION2108 V1 EN-US (Equation 93)

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 377

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

3 × I0 ³ INReleasePE
------------------------------------ × Iphmax
100
EQUATION766 V1 EN-US (Equation 94)

where:
IMinOpPE is the minimum operation current for forward zones
INReleasePE is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the
phase-to-earth fault loops (in %).
Iphmax is the maximum phase current in any of three phases.

8.10.6.2 Phase-to-phase fault GUID-8C41B037-72E8-42EB-A5BA-9FA20BD830DB v1

For a phase-to-phase fault, the measured impedance by FRPSPDIS is according to

equation 95.

ULm - ULn
ZPHS =
-2 × ILn
EQUATION1258 V1 EN-US (Equation 95)

ULm is the leading phase voltage, ULn the lagging phase voltage and ILn the
phase current in the lagging phase n.

The operation characteristic is shown in figure 163.

378 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

X (ohm/phase)

0.5·FRvPP
R1PP 0.5·RFFwPP

X1
0.5·RFFwPP

R (ohm/phase)

0.5·RFRvPP
X1

R1PP
0.5·RFRvPP 0.5·RFFwPP
IEC09000634-1-en.vsd
IEC09000634 V1 EN-US

Figure 163: The operation characteristic for FRPSPDIS at phase-to-phase fault

(directional lines are drawn as "line-dot-dot-line")

In the same way as the condition for phase-to-earth fault, there are current
conditions that have to be fulfilled in order to release the phase-to-phase loop.
Those are according to equation 96 or equation 97.

3I 0 < IMinOpPE
EQUATION2109 V1 EN-US (Equation 96)

INBlockPP
3I 0 < × Iph max
100
EQUATION2110 V1 EN-US (Equation 97)

where:
IMinOpPE is the minimum operation current for forward earth measuring loops,
INBlockPP is 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loop and
Iphmax is maximal magnitude of the phase currents.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 379

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.10.6.3 Three-phase faults GUID-0CB276AE-1700-4ACB-8F90-E8E1FD670365 v1

The operation conditions for three-phase faults are the same as for phase-to-phase
fault, that is equation 95, equation 96 and equation 97 are used to release the
operation of the function.

However, the reach is expanded by a factor 2/√3 (approximately 1.1547) in all

directions. At the same time the characteristic is rotated 30 degrees, counter-
clockwise. The characteristic is shown in figure 164.

X (ohm/phase)

4 × X1PP
3

0.5·RFFwPP·K3

X1·K3 30 deg 2
RFwPP ×
3

R (ohm/phase)

0.5·RFRvPP·K3

K3 = 2 / sqrt(3)
30 deg

IEC09000635-1-en.vsd
IEC09000635 V2 EN-US

Figure 164: The characteristic of FRPSPDIS for three-phase fault (set angle
70°)

8.10.6.4 Load encroachment GUID-ABD74C3B-FF0F-45B3-BF34-D7C5FEAD62D3 v1

Each of the six measuring loops has its own load encroachment characteristic based
on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is
always active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting.

380 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 166. As illustrated, the

resistive blinders are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the
angle of the sector is the same in all four quadrants.

RLdFw
ArgLd ArgLd
R

ArgLd ArgLd
RLdRv

IEC09000042-1-en.vsd
IEC09000042 V1 EN-US

Figure 165: Characteristic of load encroachment function

The influence of load encroachment function on the operation characteristic is

dependent on the chosen operation mode of FRPSPDIS function. When output
signal STCNDZ is selected, the characteristic for FRPSPDIS (and also zone
measurement depending on settings) will be reduced by the load encroachment
characteristic, see figure 167.

When output signal STCNDI is selected, the operation characteristic will be as in

figure 166. The reach will in this case be limit by the minimum operation current
and the distance measuring zones.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 381

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

X X

R R

STCNDZ STCNDLE

IEC10000099-1-
en.vsd
IEC10000099 V1 EN-US

Figure 166: Difference in operating characteristic depending on operation

mode when load encroachment is activated

When FRPSPDIS is set to operate together with a distance measuring zone the
resultant operate characteristic could look like in figure 167. The figure shows a
distance measuring zone operating in forward direction. Thus, the operating area of
the zone together with the load encroachment is highlighted in black.

382 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

"Phase selection"
"quadrilateral" zone

Distance measuring zone

Load encroachment
characteristic

Directional line

en05000673.vsd
IEC05000673 V1 EN-US

Figure 167: Operating characteristic in forward direction when load

encroachment is activated

Figure 167 is valid for phase-to-earth. During a three-phase fault, or load, when the
quadrilateral phase-to-phase characteristic is subject to enlargement and rotation
the operate area is transformed according to figure 168. Notice in particular what
happens with the resistive blinders of the "phase selection" "quadrilateral" zone.
Due to the 30-degree rotation, the angle of the blinder in quadrant one is now 100
degrees instead of the original 70 degrees (if the angle setting is 70 degrees). The
blinder that is nominally located to quadrant four will at the same time tilt outwards
and increase the resistive reach around the R-axis. Consequently, it will be more or
less necessary to use the load encroachment characteristic in order to secure a
margin to the load impedance.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 383

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

X (W / phase)
Phase selection
”Quadrilateral” zone

Distance measuring zone

R (W / phase)

IEC09000049-1-en.vsd
IEC09000049 V1 EN-US

Figure 168: Operating characteristic for FRPSPDIS in forward direction for

three-phase fault, ohm/phase domain

The result from rotation of the load characteristic at a fault between two phases is
presented in fig 169. Since the load characteristic is based on the same
measurement as the quadrilateral characteristic, it will rotate with the quadrilateral
characteristic clockwise by 30 degrees when subject to a pure phase-to-phase fault.
At the same time the characteristic will "shrink" by 2/√3, from the full RLdFw and
RLdRv reach, which is valid at load or three-phase fault.

384 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

IEC08000437.vsd

IEC08000437 V1 EN-US

Figure 169: Rotation of load characteristic for a fault between two phases

There is a gain in selectivity by using the same measurement as for the

quadrilateral characteristic since not all phase-to-phase loops will be fully affected
by a fault between two phases. It should also provide better fault resistive coverage
in quadrant one. The relative loss of fault resistive coverage in quadrant four
should not be a problem even for applications on series compensated lines.

8.10.6.5 Minimum operate currents GUID-7F780AC7-36AB-4704-843D-C1EA3F5B2D6A v1

The operation of Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle

(FRPSPDIS) is blocked if the magnitude of input currents falls below certain
threshold values.

The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn<IMinOpPE, where ILn is the RMS

value of the current in phase Ln.

The phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if (2·ILn<IMinOpPP).

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 385

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.10.6.6 Simplified logic diagrams GUID-95AD1A91-86F0-4854-A12B-99C504BFBC6C v1

Figure 170 presents schematically the creation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-
earth operating conditions. Consider only the corresponding part of measuring and
logic circuits, when only a phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase measurement is
available within the IED.

LDEblock

3I 0 ≥ 0.5 ⋅ IMinOpPE IRELPE

& 15 ms
t STPE
&
INReleasePE
3I 0 ≥ ⋅ Iphmax
100 STCNDLE
Bool to &
BLOCK integer

15 ms
3I 0 < IMinOpPE & t STPP
10 ms 20 ms
OR & t t
IRELPP
INBlockPP
3I 0 < ⋅ Iphmax
100

IEC09000149_2_en.vsd
IEC09000149 V2 EN-US

Figure 170: Phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth operating conditions (residual

current criteria)

A special attention is paid to correct phase selection at evolving faults. A

STCNDLE output signal is created as a combination of the load encroachment
characteristic and current criteria, refer to figure 170. This signal can be configured
to STCND functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way
influence the operation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth zone measuring
elements and their phase related starting and tripping signals.

Figure 171 presents schematically the composition of non-directional phase

selective signals STNDLn. Internal signals ZMLnN and ZMLmLn (m and n
change between one and three according to the phase number) represent the
fulfilled operating criteria for each separate loop measuring element, that is within
the characteristic.

386 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

INDL1N
INDL2N
INDL3N

15 ms
STNDPE
IRELPE OR t

LDEblockL1N
AND 15 ms
ZML1N STNDL1
OR t
LDEblockL2N
AND
ZML2N
15 ms
LDEblockL3N STNDL2
OR t
AND
ZML3N

LDEblockL1L2 15 ms
STNDL3
AND OR t
ZML1L2
LDEblockL2L3
AND INDL1L2
ZML2L3
LDEblockL3L1 INDL2L3
AND
ZML3L1 INDL3L1
IRELPP 15 ms
STNDPP
OR t

IEC00000545-3-en.vsd
IEC00000545-TIFF V3 EN-US

Figure 171: Composition on non-directional phase selection signals

Composition of the directional (forward and reverse) phase selective signals is

presented schematically in figure 172 and figure 173. The directional criteria
appears as a condition for the correct phase selection in order to secure a high
phase selectivity for simultaneous and evolving faults on lines within the complex
network configurations. Internal signals DFWLn and DFWLnLm present the
corresponding directional signals for measuring loops with phases Ln and Lm.
Designation FW (figure 173) represents the forward direction as well as the
designation RV (figure 172) represents the reverse direction. All directional signals
are derived within the corresponding digital signal processor.

Figure 172 presents additionally a composition of a STCNDZ output signal, which

is created on the basis of impedance measuring conditions. This signal can be
configured to STCND functional input signals of the distance protection zone and
this way influence the operation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth zone
measuring elements and their phase related starting and tripping signals.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 387

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

INDL1N
AND
DRVL1N
INDL1L2 15 ms STRVL1
AND OR t
DRVL1L2
INDL3L1
AND
DRVL3L1 15 ms
STRVPE
INDL2N OR t
AND
DRVL2N
INDL1L2 15 ms
STRVL2
AND OR t

INDL2L3 INDL1N
AND INDL2N
DRVL2L3
INDL3N Bool to STCNDZ
INDL3N INDL1L2 integer
AND INDL2L3
DRVL3N INDL3L1
INDL2L3 15 ms
STRVL3
AND OR t

INDL3L1
15 ms
AND STRVPP
OR t

IEC00000546_2_en.vsd
IEC00000546-TIFF V2 EN-US

Figure 172: Composition of phase selection signals for reverse direction

388 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

AND

INDL1N
AND 15 ms 15 ms
DFWL1N STFW1PH
AND OR t t
INDL1L2
15 ms STFWL1
AND OR t
DFWL1L2
INDL3L1
AND
AND
DFWL3L1 15 ms
STFWPE
INDL2N OR t
AND
DFWL2N
AND 15 ms
INDL1L2 STFWL2
t
AND OR
15 ms 15 ms
INDL2L3 STFW2PH
AND OR t t
AND
DFWL2L3
INDL3N
AND AND
DFWL3N 15 ms
STFWL3
t
INDL2L3
AND OR
15 ms
INDL3L1 STFW3PH
AND t
AND

15 ms
STFWPP
OR t

IEC05000201_2_en.vsd

IEC05000201 V2 EN-US

Figure 173: Composition of phase selection signals for forward direction

Figure174 presents the composition of output signals TRIP and START, where
internal signals STNDPP, STFWPP and STRVPP are the equivalent to internal
signals STNDPE, STFWPE and STRVPE, but for the phase-to-phase loops.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 389

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

TimerPP=Off
tPP
AND AND
t
TRIP
OR OR
tPE
TimerPE=Off
t
AND AND

STNDPP

STFWPP OR
STRVPP
START
OR
STNDPE

STFWPE OR
STRVPE

IEC08000441_2_en.vsd
IEC08000441-1 V2 EN-US

Figure 174: TRIP and START signal logic

8.10.7 Technical data

GUID-9E13C38A-3B6D-402B-98A6-6CDA20632CE7 v5

Table 203: FRPSPDIS technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Minimum operate current (5-500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reactive reach, positive (0.50–3000.00) Ω/phase ±2.0% static accuracy

sequence
Resistive reach, positive
sequence
Reactive reach, zero sequence
Resistive reach, zero sequence
Fault resistance, Ph-E faults,
forward and reverse
Fault resistance, Ph-Ph faults,
forward and reverse
Reset ratio
(0.10–1000.00) Ω/phase
(0.50–9000.00) Ω/phase
(0.50–3000.00) Ω/phase
(1.00–9000.00) Ω/loop
(0.50–3000.00) Ω/loop
105% typically
±2.0 degrees static angular
accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
degrees
-

390 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

8.11 High speed distance protection ZMFPDIS GUID-CC4F7338-2281-411D-B55A-67BF03F31681 v4

8.11.1 Identification GUID-8ACD3565-C607-4399-89D2-A05657840E6D v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
High speed distance protection zone ZMFPDIS 21

S00346 V1 EN-US

8.11.2 Functionality GUID-2E34AB7F-886E-499F-8984-09041A89238D v8

The High speed distance protection (ZMFPDIS) is providing sub-cycle, down

towards half-cycle, operate time for basic faults within 60% of the line length and
up to around SIR 5.

The ZMFPDIS function is a six zone full scheme protection with three fault loops
for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-earth faults for each of
the independent zones, which makes the function suitable in applications with
single-phase autoreclosing.

In each measurement zone, ZMFPDIS function is designed with the flexibility to

operate in either quadrilateral or mho characteristic mode for separate phase-to-
ground or phase-to-phase loops.

The zones can operate independently of each other. Zones 3 to 5 in directional

(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. Zone1 and zone2 are designed to
measure in forward direction only, while one zone (ZRV) is designed to measure in
the reverse direction. This makes them suitable, together with a communication
scheme, for protection of power lines and cables in complex network
configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines, and so on.

A built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of the

distance zones in the load exporting end during phase-to-earth faults on heavily
loaded power lines. It also reduces underreach in the importing end.

The ZMFPDIS function block itself incorporates a phase-selection element and a

directional element, contrary to previous designs in the 600-series, where these
elements were represented with separate function-blocks.

The operation of the phase-selection element is primarily based on current change

criteria (i.e. delta quantities), with significantly increased dependability. There is
also a phase selection criterion operating in parallel which bases its operation only
on voltage and current phasors.

The directional element utilizes a set of well-established quantities to provide fast

and correct directional decision during various power system operating conditions,

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 391

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

including close-in three-phase faults, simultaneous faults and faults with only zero-
sequence in-feed.

8.11.3 Function block GUID-322E158B-C2A1-4F0D-A749-01C7942875ED v1

ZMFPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRZ1
BLOCK TRL1Z1
VTSZ TRL2Z1
BLKZ1 TRL3Z1
BLKZ2 TRZ2
BLKZ3 TRL1Z2
BLKZ4 TRL2Z2
BLKZ5 TRL3Z2
BLKZRV TRZ3
BLKTRZ1 TRZ4
BLKTRZ2 TRZ5
BLKTRZ3 TRZRV
BLKTRZ4 START
BLKTRZ5 STZ1
BLKTRZRV STNDZ1
EXTNST STZ2
RELCNDZ1 STL1Z2
RELCNDZ2 STL2Z2
RELCNDZ3 STL3Z2
RELCNDZ4 STNDZ2
RELCNDZ5 STZ3
RELCNDZRV STNDZ3
STZ4
STNDZ4
STZ5
STNDZ5
STZRV
STL1ZRV
STL2ZRV
STL3ZRV
STNDZRV
STND
STNDL1
STNDL2
STNDL3
STNDPE
STFWL1
STFWL2
STFWL3
STFWPE
STRVL1
STRVL2
STRVL3
STRVP E
STFW1PH
STFW2PH
STFW3PH
STPE
STPP

IEC11000433-5-en.vsdx
IEC11000433 V5 EN-US

Figure 175: ZMFPDIS function block

392 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

8.11.4 Signals
PID-6815-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 204: ZMFPDIS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets timers and outputs of entire
function
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets timers and outputs of entire
function
BLKZ1 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 1 timers and outputs
BLKZ2 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 2 timers and outputs
BLKZ3 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 3 timers and outputs
BLKZ4 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 4 timers and outputs
BLKZ5 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 5 timers and outputs
BLKZRV BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets reverse zone timers and
outputs
BLKTRZ1 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 1 timers and trip outputs
BLKTRZ2 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 2 timers and trip outputs
BLKTRZ3 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 3 timers and trip outputs
BLKTRZ4 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 4 timers and trip outputs
BLKTRZ5 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 5 timers and trip outputs
BLKTRZRV BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets reverse zone timers and trip
outputs
EXTNST BOOLEAN 0 External start of zone timers
RELCNDZ1 INTEGER 127 Release word for the measuring loops of zone 1
RELCNDZ2 INTEGER 127 Release word for the measuring loops of zone 2
RELCNDZ3 INTEGER 127 Release word for the measuring loops of zone 3
RELCNDZ4 INTEGER 127 Release word for the measuring loops of zone 4
RELCNDZ5 INTEGER 127 Release word for the measuring loops of zone 5
RELCNDZRV INTEGER 127 Release word for the measuring loops of zone RV

PID-7066-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 205: ZMFPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from any zone or
zones
TRZ1 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 1 -
forward direction
TRL1Z1 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L1 from zone 1 - forward direction
TRL2Z1 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L2 from zone 1 - forward direction
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 393

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Type Description

TRL3Z1 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L3 from zone 1 - forward direction
TRZ2 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 2 -
forward direction
TRL1Z2 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L1 from zone 2 - forward direction
TRL2Z2 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L2 from zone 2 - forward direction
TRL3Z2 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L3 from zone 2 - forward direction
TRZ3 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 3 - zone
direction
TRZ4 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 4 - zone
direction
TRZ5 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 5 - zone
direction
TRZRV BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone RV -
reverse direction
START BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from any zone or
zones
STZ1 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 1 -
forward direction
STNDZ1 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 1 - any
direction
STZ2 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 2 -
forward direction
STL1Z2 BOOLEAN Start in phase L1 from zone 2 - forward direction
STL2Z2 BOOLEAN Start in phase L2 from zone 2 - forward direction
STL3Z2 BOOLEAN Start in phase L3 from zone 2 - forward direction
STNDZ2 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 2 - any
direction
STZ3 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 3 - zone
direction
STNDZ3 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 3 - any
direction
STZ4 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 4 - zone
direction
STNDZ4 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 4 - any
direction
STZ5 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 5 - zone
direction
STNDZ5 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 5 - any
direction
STZRV BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone RV -
reverse direction
STL1ZRV BOOLEAN Start in phase L1 from zone RV - reverse
direction
STL2ZRV BOOLEAN Start in phase L2 from zone RV - reverse
direction
STL3ZRV BOOLEAN Start in phase L3 from zone RV - reverse
direction
Table continues on next page

394 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Name Type Description

STNDZRV BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone RV - any
direction
STND BOOLEAN Fault detected in any phase or phases - any
direction
STNDL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - any direction
STNDL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - any direction
STNDL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - any direction
STNDPE BOOLEAN Fault with earth connection detected in any phase
or phases - any direction
STFWL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - forward direction
STFWL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - forward direction
STFWL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - forward direction
STFWPE BOOLEAN Fault with earth connection detected - forward
direction
STRVL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - reverse direction
STRVL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - reverse direction
STRVL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - reverse direction
STRVPE BOOLEAN Fault with earth connection detected - reverse
direction
STFW1PH BOOLEAN Single-phase fault detected - forward direction
STFW2PH BOOLEAN Two-phase fault detected - forward direction
STFW3PH BOOLEAN Three-phase fault detected - forward direction
STPE BOOLEAN Ph-E zone measurement enabled - any direction
STPP BOOLEAN Ph-Ph zone measurement enabled - any direction

8.11.5 Settings
PID-7066-SETTINGS v2

Table 206: ZMFPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
ZDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
ZMax 0.0 - 5000.0 Ohm 0.1 1500.0 Maximum value in ohm
ZRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band & 5s
Cyclic
Dead band & 30s
Cyclic
Dead band & 1min
Cyclic
ZAngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 395

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Table 207: ZMFPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
RLdFw 0.01 - 5000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 60.00 Resistance determining the load
impedance area - forward
RLdRvFactor 1 - 1000 %RLdF 1 100 Resistance factor determining the load
w impedance area - reverse
XLd 0.01 - 10000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 400.00 Reactance determining the load
impedance area
ArgLd 5 - 70 Deg 1 30 Angle determining the load impedance
area
CVTType Any - - Passive type CVT selection determining filtering of the
Passive type function
None (Magnetic)
OpModePPZ1 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for Ph-
Quadrilateral Ph loops, zone 1
Mho
MhoOffset
OpModePEZ1 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for Ph-
Quadrilateral E loops, zone 1
Mho
MhoOffset
X1PPZ1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, zone 1
R1PPZ1 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, Ph-
Ph, zone 1
X1PEZ1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, zone 1
R1PEZ1 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, Ph-E,
zone 1
X0Z1 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, zone 1
R0Z1 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, zone 1
RFPPZ1 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 1
RFPEZ1 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 1
tPPZ1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 1
tPEZ1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 1
IMinOpPPZ1 10 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate Ph-Ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 1
IMinOpPEZ1 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 1
OpModePPZ2 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for Ph-
Quadrilateral Ph loops, zone 2
Mho
MhoOffset
OpModePEZ2 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for Ph-
Quadrilateral E loops, zone 2
Mho
MhoOffset
Table continues on next page

396 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

X1Z2 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach,
zone 2
R1Z2 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, zone
2
X0Z2 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, zone 2
R0Z2 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, zone 2
RFPPZ2 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 2
RFPEZ2 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 2
tPPZ2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 2
tPEZ2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 2
IMinOpPPZ2 10 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate Ph-Ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 2
IMinOpPEZ2 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 2
OpModePPZ3 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for Ph-
Quadrilateral Ph loops, zone 3
Mho
MhoOffset
OpModePEZ3 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for Ph-
Quadrilateral E loops, zone 3
Mho
MhoOffset
DirModeZ3 Non-directional - - Forward Direction of zone 3
Forward
Reverse
X1Z3 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach,
zone 3
R1Z3 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, zone
3
X0Z3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, zone 3
R0Z3 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, zone 3
RFPPZ3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 3
RFPEZ3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 3
tPPZ3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 3
tPEZ3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 3
IMinOpPPZ3 10 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate Ph-Ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 3
IMinOpPEZ3 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 3
OpModePPZ4 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for Ph-
Quadrilateral Ph loops, zone 4
Mho
MhoOffset
OpModePEZ4 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for Ph-
Quadrilateral E loops, zone 4
Mho
MhoOffset
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 397

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

DirModeZ4 Non-directional - - Forward Direction of zone 4
Forward
Reverse
X1Z4 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach,
zone 4
R1Z4 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, zone
4
X0Z4 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, zone 4
R0Z4 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, zone 4
RFPPZ4 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 4
RFPEZ4 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 4
tPPZ4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 4
tPEZ4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 4
IMinOpPPZ4 10 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate Ph-Ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 4
IMinOpPEZ4 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 4
OpModePPZ5 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for Ph-
Quadrilateral Ph loops, zone 5
Mho
MhoOffset
OpModePEZ5 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for Ph-
Quadrilateral E loops, zone 5
Mho
MhoOffset
DirModeZ5 Non-directional - - Forward Direction of zone 5
Forward
Reverse
X1Z5 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach,
zone 5
R1Z5 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, zone
5
X0Z5 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, zone 5
R0Z5 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, zone 5
RFPPZ5 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 5
RFPEZ5 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 5
tPPZ5 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.600 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 5
tPEZ5 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.600 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 5
IMinOpPPZ5 10 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate Ph-Ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 5
IMinOpPEZ5 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 5
OpModePPZRV Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for Ph-
Quadrilateral Ph loops, zone RV
Mho
MhoOffset
Table continues on next page

398 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OpModePEZRV Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for Ph-
Quadrilateral E loops, zone RV
Mho
MhoOffset
X1ZRV 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach,
zone RV
R1ZRV 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, zone
RV
X0ZRV 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, zone
RV
R0ZRV 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, zone RV
RFPPZRV 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone RV
RFPEZRV 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone RV
tPPZRV 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone
RV
tPEZRV 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone RV
IMinOpPPZRV 10 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate Ph-Ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone RV
IMinOpPEZRV 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone RV

Table 208: ZMFPDIS Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ZZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 100 0 Zero point clamping
ZHiHiLim 0.0 - 5000.0 Ohm 0.1 800.0 High High limit in ohm
ZHiLim 0.0 - 5000.0 Ohm 0.1 150.0 High limit in ohm
ZLowLim 0.0 - 5000.0 Ohm 0.1 50.0 Low limit in ohm
ZLowLowLim 0.0 - 5000.0 Ohm 0.1 35.0 Low Low limit in ohm
ZMin 0.000 - 5000.000 Ohm 0.001 0.005 Minimum value in ohm
ZLimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 0.500 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits

Table 209: ZMFPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
RLdFwMax 0.01 - 5000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5000.00 Maximum used resistance determining
the load impedance area, if RLdFw is
greater than RLdFwMax then RLdFw is
set to RLdFwMax
RLdFwMin 0.01 - 5000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 0.01 Minimum used resistance determining
the load impedance area, if RLdFw is
less than RLdFwMin then RLdFw is set
to RLdFwMin
ArgLdMax 5 - 70 Deg 1 70 Maximum used angle determining the
load impedance area, if ArgLd is greater
than ArgLdMax then ArgLd is set to
ArgLdMax
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 399

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ArgLdMin 5 - 70 Deg 1 5 Minimum used angle determining the
load impedance area, if ArgLd is less
than ArgLdMin then ArgLd is set to
ArgLdMin
ZoneLinkStart Phase Selection - - Phase Selection Selection of start source for all
1st starting zone ZoneLinked trip delay timers
INReleasePE 5 - 400 %MaxIP 1 400 3I0 limit for releasing Phase-to-Earth
h measuring loops
TimerModeZ1 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E PhPh output, zone 1
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ1 LoopLink (tPP & - - LoopLink (tPP & How start of trip delay timers should be
tPE) tPE) linked for zone 1
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZ2 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E PhPh output, zone 2
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ2 LoopLink (tPP & - - LoopLink (tPP & How start of trip delay timers should be
tPE) tPE) linked for zone 2
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZ3 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E PhPh output, zone 3
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ3 LoopLink (tPP & - - LoopLink (tPP & How start of trip delay timers should be
tPE) tPE) linked for zone 3
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZ4 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E PhPh output, zone 4
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ4 LoopLink (tPP & - - LoopLink (tPP & How start of trip delay timers should be
tPE) tPE) linked for zone 4
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZ5 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E PhPh output, zone 5
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
Table continues on next page

400 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TimerLinksZ5 LoopLink (tPP & - - LoopLink (tPP & How start of trip delay timers should be
tPE) tPE) linked for zone 5
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZRV Disable all - - Enable Ph-E On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E PhPh output, zone RV
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZRV LoopLink (tPP & - - LoopLink (tPP & How start of trip delay timers should be
tPE) tPE) linked for zone RV
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links

8.11.6 Monitored data

PID-7066-MONITOREDDATA v1

Table 210: ZMFPDIS Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
L1Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L2Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L3Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L1L2Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in loop L1L2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L2L3Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in loop L2L3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L3L1Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in loop L3L1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L1R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L1
L1X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L1
L2R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L2
L2X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L2
L3R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L3
L3X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L3
L12R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L1-
L2
L12X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L1-
L2
L23R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L2-
L3
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 401

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

L23X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L2-
L3
L31R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L3-
L1
L31X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L3-
L1
ZL1IMAG REAL - Ohm ZL1 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL1ANGIM REAL - deg ZL1 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL2IMAG REAL - Ohm ZL2 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL2ANGIM REAL - deg ZL2 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL3IMAG REAL - Ohm ZL3 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL3ANGIM REAL - deg ZL3 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL12IMAG REAL - Ohm ZL12 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL12ANGIM REAL - deg ZL12 Angle, magnitude
of instantaneous value
ZL23IMAG REAL - Ohm ZL23 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL23ANGIM REAL - deg ZL23 Angle, magnitude
of instantaneous value
ZL31IMAG REAL - Ohm ZL31 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL31ANGIM REAL - deg ZL31 Angle, magnitude
of instantaneous value

8.11.7 Operation principle GUID-2432C04F-62E4-4817-9900-C830306FB4B0 v3

Settings, input and output names are sometimes mentioned in the

following text without its zone suffix (i.e. BLKZx instead of
BLKZ3) when the description is equally valid for all zones.

402 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

8.11.7.1 Filtering GUID-16B5060B-101C-402A-BF25-06E70FDD7836 v2

Practically all voltage, current and impedance quantities used within the ZMFPDIS
function are derived from fundamental frequency phasors filtered by a half cycle
filter.

The phasor filter is frequency adaptive in the sense that its coefficients are changed
based on the estimated power system frequency.

A half cycle filter will not be able to reject both even and odd harmonics. So, while
odd harmonics will be completely attenuated, accuracy will be affected by even
harmonics. Even harmonics will not cause the distance zones to overreach
however; instead there will be a slightly variable underreach, on average in the
same order as the magnitude ratio between the harmonic and fundamental
component.

8.11.7.2 Distance measuring zones GUID-74B12BB1-FE0A-4DE4-BDBE-159A438D396B v4

The different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type, which means that
earth fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase faults for forward and
reverse faults are executed in parallel.

Figure 176 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the six distance
zones.

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 1

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 2

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 3

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 4

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 5

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

Zone RV

IEC05000458-2-en.vsd
IEC05000458 V2 EN-US

Figure 176: The different measuring loops at phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-
phase fault

Each distance protection zone performs like one independent distance protection
function with six measuring elements.

Transients from CVTs may have a significant impact on the transient overreach of
a distance protection. At the same time these transients can be very diverse in
nature from one type to the other; in fact, more diverse than can be distinguished
by the algorithm itself in the course of a few milliseconds. So, a setting (CVTtype)
is introduced in order to inform the algorithm about the type of CVT applied and

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 403

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

thus providing the advantage of knowing how performance should be optimized,

even during the first turbulent milliseconds of the fault period.

There are two types of CVTs from the function point of view, the passive and the
active type, which refers to the type of ferro-resonance suppression device that is
employed. The active type requires more rigorous filtering which will have a
negative impact on operate times. However, this will be evident primarily at higher
source impedance ratios (SIRs), SIR 5 and above, or close to the reach limit.

The IEC 60044-5 transient classification is of little or no use in relation to this. It is

not primarily the damping of transients that is important; it is the frequency content
of the transients that is decisive, i.e. how difficult it is to filter out the specific
frequency. So, even if two CVTs, one passive and the other active type, comply
with the same transient class, the active type requires more extensive filtering in
order to avoid transient overreach.

To avoid overreach and at the same time achieve fast operate times, a
supplementary circular characteristic is implemented. A circular characteristic
exists for every measuring loop and quadrilateral/mho characteristic. There are no
specific reach settings for this circular zone. It uses the normal quadrilateral/mho
zone settings to determine a reach that will be appropriate. This implies that the
circular characteristic will always have somewhat shorter reach than the
quadrilateral/mho zone.

8.11.7.3 Phase-selection element GUID-1E718907-C321-4041-B0ED-D55104B2C9B4 v5

The operation of the phase-selection element is primarily based on current change

criteria (i.e. delta quantities) with significantly increased dependability. To handle
this, there is also a phase selection criterion operating in parallel which bases its
operation only on voltage and current phasors.

This continuous criteria will, in the vast majority of cases, operate in parallel and
carry on the fault indication after the current change phase has ended. Only in some
particularly difficult faults on heavily loaded lines, the continuous criteria might
not be sufficient, for example, when the estimated fault impedance resides within
the load area defined by the load encroachment characteristic. In this case, the
indication will be restricted to a pulse lasting for one or two power system cycles.

The phase-selection element can, owing to the current change criteria, distinguish
faults with minimum influence from load and fault impedance. In other words, it is
not restricted by a load encroachment characteristic during the current change
phase. This significantly improves performance for remote phase-to-earth faults on
heavily loaded lines. One exception, however, are three-phase faults to which the
load encroachment characteristic always has to be applied in order to distinguish
fault from load.

Phase-to-phase-earth faults (also called double earth faults) will practically always
activate phase-to-phase zone measurements. Measurement in two phase-to-earth
loops at the same time is associated with so-called simultaneous faults: two earth
faults at the same time, one each on the two circuits of a double line, or when the

404 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

zero sequence current is relatively high due to a source with low Z0/Z1 ratio. In
these situations zone measurement will be released both for the related phase-to-
earth loops and the phase-to-phase loop simultaneously. On the other hand,
simultaneous faults closer to the remote bus will gradually take on the properties of
a phase-to-phase-earth fault and the function will eventually use phase-to-phase
zone measurements also here.

In cases where the fault current infeed is more or less completely of zero sequence
nature (all phase currents in phase), the measurement will be performed in the
phase-to-earth loops only for a phase-to-phase-earth fault.

Should it be desirable to use phase-to-earth (and only phase-to-earth) zone

measurement for phase-to-phase-earth faults, there is a setting INReleasePE that
can be lowered from its excessive default value to the level above which phase-to-
earth measurement should be activated.

8.11.7.4 Directional criteria GUID-24431EEC-5037-41CD-BC4A-7AC196F158F3 v5

Several criteria are employed when making the directional decision. The basis is
provided by comparing a positive sequence based polarizing voltage with phase
currents. For extra security, especially in making a very fast decision, this method
is complemented with an equivalent comparison where, instead of the phase
current, the change in phase current is used. Moreover, a basic negative sequence
directional evaluation is taken into account as a reliable reference during high load
condition. Finally, a zero sequence directional evaluation is used whenever there is
more or less exclusive zero sequence in-feed.

The directional sectors that represent forward direction, one per measuring loop,
are defined by the following equations.

U PolL1
−15° < arg < 120°
I L1
IECEQUATION15059 V1 EN-US (Equation 98)

U PolL1L 2
−15° < arg < 120°
I L1L 2
IECEQUATION15060 V1 EN-US (Equation 99)

Where:
UPolL1 is the polarizing voltage for phase L1.

IL1 is the phase current in phase L1.

UPolL1L2 is the polarizing voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).

IL1L2 is the current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).

The corresponding reverse directional sectors range from 165 to -60 degrees.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 405

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Since the polarizing voltage is also used for the Mho distance characteristics, the
magnitude of the voltage is just as interesting as the phase. If there are symmetrical
conditions and the measured per phase positive sequence voltage magnitude is
above 75% of the base voltage before the fault, the pre-fault magnitude will be
memorized and used as long as there is a fault. The phase angle however will only
be memorized (locked) for 75 ms at a time, not to lose synchronism with the real
system voltage.

Should the positive sequence voltage drop below 2% of the base voltage, it will be
considered invalid. In this situation, directional signals and starts from Mho
elements will be sealed-in and kept static as long as there is a fault.

For ZMFCPDIS, when option SeriesComp is chosen for OperationSC, the voltages
of faulty phases will be discarded in order not to affect the polarizing voltage with
voltage reversal.

8.11.7.5 Fuse failure GUID-FA7B94D6-8BAF-4D05-8DC0-7FEBF0967D16 v3

The ZMFPDIS function has to be blocked by an additional function like the Fuse
failure supervision (FUFSPVC) or an equivalent external device. Typically, the
binary input VTSZ is used for this purpose.

A built-in supervision feature within high-speed distance protection itself, based on

phase current change, will ensure that the FUFSPVC blocking signal is received in
time. Namely, an intentional time delay will be introduced if no current magnitude
change greater than 5% of IBase has been detected for any of the three phase
currents.

8.11.7.6 Power swings GUID-4DFED278-014F-46C2-B124-2E0809D12FC3 v2

There is need for external blocking of the ZMFPDIS function during power
swings, either from the Power Swing Blocking function (ZMRPSB) or an external
device.

8.11.7.7 Measuring principles

Quadrilateral characteristic GUID-32E76D16-41ED-4CEF-B081-8413211AA783 v6

ZMFPDIS implements quadrilateral and mho characteristic in all the six zones
separately. Set OpModePEZx or OpModePPZx to Quadrilateral, to choose
particular measuring loop in a zone to work as quadrilateral distance protection.

All ZMFPDIS zones operate according to the non-directional impedance

characteristics presented in figure 178 and figure 177. The phase-to-earth
characteristic is given in ohms-per-loop domain while the phase-to-phase
characteristic is given in ohms-per-phase domain.

Zone 1 has individual positive sequence impedance settings for phase-to-phase and
phase-to-earth (X1PPZ1, R1PPZ1 and X1PEZ1, R1PEZ1). For the other zones, the

406 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

positive sequence impedance reach is common for phase-to-phase and phase-to-

earth (X1Zx, R1Zx).

X (Ohm/phase)

RFPPZx R1Zx RFPPZx

2 2

X1Zx

R (Ohm/phase)

RFPPZx RFPPZx
2 2

X1Zx

RFPPZx R1Zx RFPPZx

2 2
IEC11000416-2-en.vsdx
IEC11000416 V2 EN-US

Figure 177: ZMFPDIS Characteristic for phase-to-phase measuring, ohm/loop

domain

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 407

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/loop)

R1Zx+RNZx

RFPEZx RFPEZx

X0Zx-X1Zx
XNZx=
3

X1Zx+XNZx R0Zx-R1Zx
RNZx=
3
φN φN
R (Ohm/loop)

RFPEZx RFPEZx

X1Zx+XNZx

RFPEZx RFPEZx

R1Zx+RNZx IEC11000415-2-en.vsdx
IEC11000415 V2 EN-US

Figure 178: ZMFPDIS Characteristic for phase-to-earth measuring, ohm/loop

domain

The faulty loop in relation to the fault type can be presented as in figure 179. The
main intention with this illustration is to make clear how the fault resistive reach
should be interpreted and set. Note in particular that the setting RFPPZx always
represents the total fault resistance of the loop, regardless the fact that the fault
resistance (arc) may be divided into parts like for three-phase or phase-to-phase
faults. The R1Zx + jX1Zx represent the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location.

408 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

IL1 R1Zx + j X1Zx

Phase-to-earth
UL1
element

Phase-to-earth
RFPEZx
fault in phase L1
(Arc + tower
resistance)

0
IN (R0Zx-R1Zx)/3 +
j (X0Zx-X1Zx)/3 )

IL1 R1Zx + j X1Zx Phase-to-phase

UL1 element L1-L2
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase RFPPZx
L1-L2 IL2
UL2 (Arc resistance)
R1Zx + j X1Zx

IL1 R1Zx + j X1Zx 0.5·RFPPZx Phase-to-phase

UL1 element L1-L3
Three-phase
fault or Phase-to-
phase-earth fault IL3
UL3
R1Zx + j X1Zx 0.5·RFPPZx
IEC11000419-3-en.vsdx
IEC11000419 V3 EN-US

Figure 179: Fault loop model

Mho characteristic GUID-9269239B-3A04-44CD-BE00-FD850D42836B v2

ZMFPDIS implements quadrilateral and mho characteristic in all the six zones
separately. Set OpModePEZx or OpModePPZx setting to Mho or Offset, to choose
a particular measuring loop in a zone to work as mho (or Offset Mho) distance
protection.

Zones 3 to 5 can be selected to be either forward or reverse with positive sequence

polarized mho characteristic; alternatively self polarized offset mho characteristics.
The operating characteristic is in accordance to figure 180 where zone 5 is selected
offset mho.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 409

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

X
X

Z4
Z3
ZS=0
Z2
Z1 R
Z5 R

ZS=Z1
ZRV
ZS=2Z1

IEC15000056-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000056 V1 EN-US

Figure 180: Mho, offset mho characteristics and the source impedance
influence on the mho characteristic

The mho characteristic has a dynamic expansion due to the source impedance.
Instead of crossing the origin, as for the mho to the left of figure 180, which is only
valid where the source impedance (Zs) is zero, the crossing point is moved to the
coordinates of the negative source impedance given an expansion of the circle
shown to the right of figure 180. Z1 denotes the complex positive sequence
impedance.

The magnitude of the polarizing voltage is determined completely by the positive

sequence voltage magnitude from before the fault. This will give a somewhat less
dynamic expansion of the mho circle during faults. However, if the source
impedance is high, the dynamic expansion of the mho circle might lower the
security of the function too much with high loading and mild power swing
conditions.

Basic operation characteristics GUID-E6CC3CA7-72BE-40FC-A557-7BDB62F7BC1E v2

In ZMFPDIS, each zone measurement loop characteristic can be set to mho

characteristic or offset mho characteristic by setting OpModePEZx or
OpModePPZx (where x is 1-5 depending on selected zone).

ZMFPDIS fixes zone 1 and 2 in Forward mode and zone RV in Reverse mode.
Zone 3-5 can be set to Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by setting the
parameter DirModeZx (where x is 3-5 depending on selected zone).

If DirModeZx (where x is 3-5 depending on selected zone) is selected as Non-

directional, the directional element will not have any effect on the measurement
loop and operation of the function. When DirModeZx (where x is 3-5 depending on
selected zone) is selected as Forward or Reverse, directional lines are introduced.
Information about the directional lines is given from the directional element. Basic
Mho and offset Mho characteristics with different mode settings are indicated in
figure 181.

410 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

X X X
(a) Rset (b) (c) Rset

Xset Xset

R R R

Xset

(a)-(f)
Rset For phase-to-phase fault
Rset  R1Zx
Forward Reverse Non-directional
Xset  X 1Zx
Mho Characteristics For phase-to-earth fault
Rset  R1Zx  RNZx
Xset  X 1Zx  XNZx
(d) X
(e) X (f) X X 0 Zx  X 1Zx
XNZx 
3
R 0 Zx  R1Zx
RNZx 
Rset 3
Rset Rset

Xset Xset Xset

R R R

Xset Xset Xset

Rset Rset Rset

Forward Reverse Non-directional

Offset Mho Characteristics
(a) and (c) are for Zone 1, Zone 2 and Zone 3-5 when DirModeZ3-5 = Forward.
(b) and (d) are for ZoneRV and Zone 3-5 when DirModeZ3-5 = Reverse
(c) and (f) are for Zone 3-5 when DirModeZ3-5 = Non-Directional
IEC15000055-2-en.vsdx

IEC15000055 V2 EN-US

Figure 181: Mho and offset Mho characteristics

For each zone, the impedance is set in cartesian coordinates (resistance and
reactance) which is the same as for quadrilateral characteristic.

The ZMFPDIS function has only one set of reach setting so the reverse will be the
same as for the forward reach, meaning that the non-directional offset mho
characteristic will always be centered around the origin. In detail, for Zone 1, the
resistive and reactance reaches for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase fault are
set individually using the settings R1PPZ1, X1PPZ1, R1PEZ1, X1PEZ1, X0Z1 and
R0Z1. In Zone 2-5 and Zone RV, the same zone reach settings are used for phase-
to-earth fault and phase-to-phase (R1Zx, X1Zx, X0Zx and R0Zx, x=2-5 or RV).

Theory of operation SEMOD154224-46 v6

The mho algorithm is based on the phase comparison of an operating phasor and a
polarizing phasor. When the operating phasor leads the reference polarizing phasor
by 90 degrees or more, the function operates and gives a trip output.

Phase-to-phase fault SEMOD154224-240 v2

Mho GUID-D162893C-918A-4DDA-AAC2-0D0A814D85C1 v1

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 411

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

The plain Mho circle has the characteristic as in figure 182. The condition for
deriving the angle β is according to equation 100.

(
β = arg U L1L 2 − I L1L 2 ⋅ Z 1set − arg U pol ) ( )
IECEQUATION15027 V1 EN-US (Equation 100)

where

U L1L2 is the voltage vector difference between phases L1 and L2

EQUATION1790
EN-US V2

I L1L2 is the current vector difference between phases L1 and L2

EQUATION1791 V2
EN-US

is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault in zone direction
Z 1set

For Zone 1,

Z 1set = R1PPZ 1 + j ⋅ X 1PPZ 1

IECEQUATION15011 V1 EN-US (Equation 101)

where
R1PPZ1 is the positive sequence resistive reach for phase-to-phase fault for zone 1
X1PPZ1 is the positive sequence reactance reach for phase-to-phase fault for zone 1

For Zone 2-5 and RV

Z 1set = R1Zx + j ⋅ X 1Zx

IECEQUATION15012 V1 EN-US (Equation 102)

where
R1Zx is the positive sequence resistive reach for zone x (x=2-5 and RV)
X1Zx is the positive sequence reactance reach for zone x (x=2-5 and RV)
is the polarizing voltage
Upol

Operation occurs if 90°≤β≤270°

412 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

IL1L2  jX

I L1L 2  Z1set
UcompUL1L2 IL1L2 Z1set

UL1L2

U pol

I L1L 2  R

IEC15000060-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000060 V1 EN-US

Figure 182: Simplified mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase L1-to-
L2 fault

Offset Mho GUID-3E13E6D5-0832-4386-9677-9A40BFF42F8F v2

The characteristic for offset mho is a circle with origin as the center and magnitude
of Z 1set as the radius, where Z 1set is settable through the resistance and reactance
settings.

The condition for operation at phase-to-phase fault is that the angle β between the
two compensated voltages is greater than or equal to 90° (figure 183). The angle
will be 90° for fault location on the boundary of the circle.

The angle β for L1 to L2 fault can be defined according to equation below.

 U 
L1L 2  I L1L 2  Z 1set
  arg  
 
 U L1L 2   I L1L 2  Z1set  

IECEQUATION15008 V2 EN-US (Equation 103)

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 413

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

I L1L 2  jX

U comp1  U L1L 2  I L1L 2  Z1set

I L1L 2  Z1set

U L1L 2

U comp 2  U L1L 2  ( I L1L 2  Z1set )

I L1L 2  R

I L1L 2  Z1set

IEC15000058-2-en.vsdx

IEC15000058 V2 EN-US

Figure 183: Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vector for phase L1
to L2 fault

Operation occurs if 90°≤β≤270 °.

Phase-to-earth fault GUID-DB8CF641-0D3F-4F7A-A628-829F3DB0AC5B

SEMOD154224-283 v1
v2

The measuring of earth faults uses earth return compensation applied in a

conventional way. The compensation voltage is derived by considering the
influence from the earth return path.

Compensation for earth return path for faults involving earth is done by setting the
positive and zero sequence impedance of the line. It is known that the ground
compensation factor KN is,

414 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Z 0set − Z 1set
KN =
3 ⋅ Z 1set
IECEQUATION15017 V1 EN-US

Z 0set = R 0Zx + j ⋅ X 0 Zx
IECEQUATION15018 V1 EN-US

For Zone 1,
Z 1set = R1PEZ 1 + j ⋅ X 1PEZ 1
IECEQUATION15019 V1 EN-US

For Zone 2-5 and RV,

Z 1set = R1Zx + j ⋅ X 1Zx
IECEQUATION15020 V1 EN-US (Equation 104)

where
is the complex zero sequence impedance of the line in Ω/phase
Z 0set
is the complex positive sequence impedance of the line in Ω/phase
Z 1set
R1PEZ1 is the positive sequence resistive reach of the line in Ω/phase for
phase-to-earth fault for zone 1
X1PEZ1 is the positive sequence reactance reach of the line in Ω/phase for
phase-to-earth fault for zone 1
R0Zx is the zero sequence resistive reach of the line in Ω/phase for zone
x (x=2-5, or RV)
X0Zx is the zero sequence reactance reach of the line in Ω/phase for
zone x (x=2-5, or RV)

For an earth fault in phase L1, the angle β between the compensation voltage and
the polarizing voltage Upol is,

β = arg [U L1 − ( I L1 + 3I 0 ⋅ K N ) ⋅ Z 1set ] − arg(U pol )

IECEQUATION15021 V1 EN-US (Equation 105)

where
is the phase voltage in faulty phase L1
UL1
is the phase current in faulty phase L1
IL1
3I0 is the zero-sequence current in faulty phase L1

is the complex positive sequence impedance of the line in Ω/phase

Z 1set for phase-to-earth fault in zone direction

is the polarizing voltage for phase L1

Upol

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 415

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

IL1•jX

UcompUL1 (IL1 3I0 KN )  Z1set

3I0KN Z1set

U L1
I L1  Z1set
U pol

IL1•R
IEC15000059-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000059 V1 EN-US

Figure 184: Simplified offset mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase
L1-to-earth fault

Operation occurs if 90°≤β≤270°.

Offset mho GUID-B1EF3931-7B86-4C7B-BCEA-3034482BA240 v2

The condition for operation of offset mho at phase-to-earth fault is that the angle β
between the two compensated voltages is equal to or greater than 90°, see figure
185. The angle will be 90° for fault location on the boundary of the circle.

   
  arg U L1  ( I L1  3I 0  K N )  Z1set  arg U L1   ( I L1  3I 0  K N )  Z1set 

IECEQUATION15022 V2 EN-US (Equation 106)

416 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

IL1• jX

U comp1  U L1  ( I L1  3I 0 K N ) Z1set


( I L1  3I 0 K N ) Z1set
U L1

U comp 2  U L1  (( I L1  3I 0 K N ) Z1set )

IL1• R

( I L1  3I 0 K N ) Z1set

IEC15000057-2-en.vsdx

IEC15000057 V2 EN-US

Figure 185: Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vector for phase
L1-to-earth fault

Operation occurs if 90 °≤β≤270 °.

8.11.7.8 Load encroachment GUID-6785BF05-2775-4422-8077-A663D01C6C07 v6

In some cases the measured load impedance might enter the set zone characteristic
without any fault on the protected line. This phenomenon is called load
encroachment and it might occur when an external fault is cleared and high
emergency load is transferred onto the protected line. The effect of load
encroachment is illustrated on the left in figure 186. A load impedance within the
characteristic would cause an unwanted trip. The traditional way of avoiding this
situation is to set the distance zone resistive reach with a security margin to the
minimum load impedance. The drawback with this approach is that the sensitivity
of the protection to detect resistive faults is reduced.

The IED has a built in feature which shapes the characteristic according to the
characteristic shown in figure 186. The load encroachment algorithm will increase

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 417

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

the possibility to detect high fault resistances, especially for phase-to-earth faults at
the remote line end. For example, for a given setting of the load angle ArgLd, the
resistive blinder for the zone measurement can be set according to figure 186
affording higher fault resistance coverage without risk for unwanted operation due
to load encroachment. Separate resistive blinder settings are available in forward
and reverse direction.

The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavily loaded lines,
where there might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and
necessary sensitivity of the distance protection. The function can also preferably be
used on heavy loaded, medium long lines. For short lines, the major concern is to
get sufficient fault resistance coverage. Load encroachment is not a major
problem. .

Z1

ArgLd

[1]
RLdRv RLdFw

IEC09000248-3-en.vsdx

IEC09000248 V3 EN-US

Figure 186: Load encroachment phenomena and shaped load encroachment

characteristic
[1]

8.11.7.9 Simplified logic schemes GUID-B43F2F0B-C8A2-4CFD-A9DD-51E167A90B56 v5

PHSL1, PHSL2,...PHSL3L1 are internal binary logical signals from the Phase-
selection element. They correspond directly to the six loops of the distance zones
and determine which loops should be released to operate.

FWL1, FWL2,...FWL3L1 and RVL1, RVL2,...RVL3L1 are the internal binary

signals from the Directional element. An FW signal is activated if the criteria for a
forward fault or load is fulfilled for its particular loop. The equivalent applies to the
reverse (RV) signals.

The internal input 'IN present' is activated if the residual current (3I0) exceeds 10%
of the maximum phase current magnitude and at the same time is above 5% of

[1] RLdRv=RLdRvFactor*RLdFw

418 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

IBase. However, if current transformer saturation is detected, this criterion is

changed to residual voltage (3U0) exceeding 5% of UBase/sqrt(3) instead.

FW(Ln & LmLn)

FW(Ln & LmLn)

RV(Ln & LmLn)

DirModeZ3-5
TRUE (1)
FW(Ln & LmLn) Forward
RV(Ln & LmLn) Reverse

IEC12000137-2-en.vsd
IEC12000137 V3 EN-US

Figure 187: Connection of directional signals to Zones

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 419

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

ZML1Zx PEZx
OR
PHSL1
AND

DIRL1Zx AND
ZML2Zx
PHSL2
AND

DIRL2Zx AND
ZML3Zx L1Zx
OR
PHSL3
AND

DIRL3Zx AND

ZML1L2Zx L2Zx
PHSL1L2 OR
AND

DIRL1L2Zx AND
ZML2L3Zx
PHSL2L3 L3Zx
AND OR
DIRL2L3Zx AND
ZML3L1Zx
PHSL3L1
AND

DIRL3L1Zx AND

L1N
PPZx
L2N OR
L3N
RELCNDZx Integer L1L2
to Bool
L2L3
NDZx
L1L3 OR

IEC12000140-2-en.vsdx
IEC12000140 V2 EN-US

Figure 188: Intermediate logic

420 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

TimerModeZx =
Enable PhPh or
Ph-E PhPh
PPZx AND tPPZx
OR AND
AND t
PEZx
AND tPEZx OR
OR
AND t
AND

BLOCK
VTSZ
BLKZx OR
BLKTRZx
OR TimerLinksZx
LoopLink (tPP-tPE)
ZoneLinkStart LoopLink & ZoneLink
OR
Phase Selection No Links
1st starting zone
External start FALSE (0)
LNKZ2
LNKZx
AND
OR
TimerLinksZx =
LNKZ4 LoopLink & ZoneLink
LNKZ5

EXTNST

IEC12000139-4-en.vsdx
IEC12000139 V4 EN-US

Figure 189: Logic for linking of timers

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 421

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

15 ms
TZx
t TRIPZx
AND

TRL1Zx
OR AND
BLOCK
VTSZ TRL2Zx
OR AND
BLKZx
TRL3Zx
AND
15 ms
L1Zx
t STL1Zx
AND
15 ms
L2Zx
t STL2Zx
AND
15 ms
t STL3Zx
AND

PPZx 15 ms
PEZx OR t STARTZx
AND

15 ms
NDZx
t STNDZx
AND

IEC12000138-2-en.vsd

IEC12000138 V2 EN-US

Figure 190: Start and trip outputs

422 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

15 ms
OR t STPE
AND

15 ms
OR t
AND

15 ms
OR t STNDL2
PHSL1L2 AND

15 ms
OR t STNDL3
AND

15 ms
OR t STPP
AND

BLOCK STARTND
OR
VTSZ OR

STPHS
STNDPE
AND

IEC12000133-3-en.vsdx
IEC12000133 V3 EN-US

Figure 191: Additional start outputs 1

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 423

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

PHSL1
FWL1 AND
15 ms
FWL2 AND OR t
AND

FWL3 AND 15 ms
PHSL1L2 OR t STFWL2
AND
FWL1L2 AND
PHSL2L3 15 ms
FWL2L3 AND OR t STFWL3
AND
FWL3L1 AND
OR
STFWPE
IN present AND

STFW1PH
=1
BLOCK
VTSZ OR

STFW2PH
=2

STFW3PH
=3

IEC12000134-2-en.vsd
IEC12000134 V2 EN-US

Figure 192: Additional start outputs 2

PHSL1
RVL1 AND
15 ms
RVL2 AND OR t
AND

RVL3 AND 15 ms
PHSL1L2 OR t STRVL2
AND
RVL1L2 AND
PHSL2L3 15 ms
RVL2L3 AND OR t STRVL3
AND
RVL3L1 AND
OR
STRVPE
IN present AND

BLOCK
VTSZ OR

IEC12000141-2-en.vsdx
IEC12000141 V2 EN-US

Figure 193: Additional start outputs 3

424 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

8.11.7.10 Measurement

Measurement supervision SEMOD54417-130 v4

The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and
further process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-
processing blocks. The number of processed alternate measuring quantities
depends on the type of IED and built-in options.

The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different

locations:

• Locally by means of the local HMI

• Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM600 or over the station bus
• Internally by connecting the analogue output signals to the Disturbance Report
function
GUID-8568A19F-0100-4A1A-B3C3-444FD7D6F00B v1

X equals Z in the name of the below mentioned settings.

Zero point clamping GUID-4894EF16-3376-48EB-863F-9CE14487ACAB v1

Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the
noise in the input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a setting
(XZeroDb where X equals Z).

Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity SEMOD54417-140 v5

Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in the function
block by means of four defined operating thresholds, see figure 194. The
monitoring has two different modes of operating:

• Overfunction, when the measured quantity exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or
High-high limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
• Underfunction, when the measured quantity decreases under the Low limit
(XLowLim) or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.

X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 194.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 425

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Y = Magnitude of the Measured Quantity

X_RANGE = 3
High-high limit

X_RANGE= 1 Hysteresis
High limit

X_RANGE=0

X_RANGE=0 t

Low limit

X_RANGE=2

Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4

IEC05000657-3-en.vsdx
IEC05000657 V3 EN-US

Figure 194: Presentation of operating limits

Each analogue output has one corresponding supervision level output

(X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1:
High limit exceeded, 3: High-high limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below
Low-low limit).

The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 194.

The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference
between the operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for
each measuring channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating
values within one channel.

Actual value of the measured quantity SEMOD54417-150 v4

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The
measurement is continuous for each measured quantity separately, but the reporting
of the value to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The
following basic reporting modes are available:

• Cyclic reporting (Cyclic)

• Amplitude dead-band supervision (Dead band)
• Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)
• Amplitude Deadband and 5s cyclic
• Amplitude Deadband and 30s cyclic
• Amplitude Deadband and 1min cyclic

Cyclic reporting SEMOD54417-158 v3

The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting

(XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of amplitude or
integral dead-band reporting.

426 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

In addition to the normal cyclic reporting the IED also report spontaneously when
measured value passes any of the defined threshold limits.

Y
Value Reported Value Reported
Value Reported Value Reported
(1st)

Y3 Value Reported
Y2 Y4

Y1 Y5

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)

t
Value 1

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

Value 5
(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt IEC05000500-2-en.vsdx

IEC05000500 V2 EN-US

Figure 195: Periodic reporting

Amplitude dead-band supervision SEMOD54417-163 v6

If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the
change is larger than the ±ΔY pre-defined limits that are set by user (XDbRepInt),
then the measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level. This limits the
information flow to a minimum necessary. Figure 196 shows an example with the
amplitude dead-band supervision. The picture is simplified: the process is not
continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle
from each other.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 427

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Value Reported
Y

Value Reported Value Reported

Value Reported
(1st)
Y3 Y
Y
Y2 Y
Y
Y
Y
Y1

IEC99000529-2-en.vsdx

IEC99000529 V2 EN-US

Figure 196: Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting

After the new value is reported, the ±ΔY limits for dead-band are automatically set
around it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more
than defined by the ±ΔY set limits.

Integral dead-band reporting SEMOD54417-167 v4

The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-
set limit (XDbRepInt), figure 197, where an example of reporting with integral
dead-band supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not
continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle
from each other.

The last value reported, Y1 in figure 197 serves as a basic value for further
measurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly
measured value and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The
absolute values of these integral values are added until the pre-set value is
exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base for
the following measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).

The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals

with small variations that can last for relatively long periods.

428 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Y A1 >=
A >= pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value pre-set value
Y3 A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
Y2 A1 A2
A4 A6
Value Reported Y4 A3 A5 A7
Value
(1st) Value
A Reported Y5
Reported Value
Reported Value
Y1 Reported

t
IEC99000530-2-en.vsdx

IEC99000530 V2 EN-US

Figure 197: Reporting with integral dead-band supervision

Measurement ZMMMXU GUID-2DB6F5A4-A3C2-4BBA-8327-393B7F89EDC6 v4

The magnitude and angle of the impedance for each phase-to-earth and phase-to-
phase loop are available on local HMI, monitoring tools within PCM600 or to the
station level, for example, via IEC61850.

Phase-to-earth impedance measurement is calculated based on UL1/ IL1 , UL2 / IL2 ,

UL3 / IL3 and phase-to-phase impedance is calculated based on
U L1 
 UL 2 / IL1  IL 2  , UL2 
 UL 3 / IL 2  IL 3  , UL3 
 UL1 / IL 3  IL1  , where
ULX and ILX are phase-to-earth voltage and phase current.
When the operating current is too low, the impedance measurement can be
erroneous. To avoid such error, minimum operating current will be checked. For
phase-earth currents or phase-phase currents lower than 2% of IBase, the resistance
and reactance of the impedance are forced to 99 999 ohm, corresponding to a
magnitude at 141419 (99 999*√2) ohm and an angle at 45 degree.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 429

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.11.8 Technical data

GUID-6C2EF52A-8166-4A23-9861-38931682AA7D v7

Table 211: ZMFPDIS, ZMFCPDIS technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones 3 selectable -
directions, 3 fixed
directions
Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph (5-6000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
and Ph-E
Positive sequence reactance (0.01 - 3000.00) Pseudo
reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop ohm/p continuous ramp:
±2.0% of set value
Positive sequence resistance (0.00 - 1000.00) Conditions:
reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop ohm/p Voltage range: Ramp of shots:
Zero sequence reactance reach (0.01 - 9000.00) (0.1-1.1) x Ur ±2.0% of set value
ohm/p Current range: Conditions:
(0.5-30) x Ir IEC 60255-121
Zero sequence resistive reach (0.00 - 3000.00) Angle: At 0 point B
ohm/p degrees and 85
Fault resistance reach, Ph-E (0.01 -9000.00) ohm/l degrees
and Ph-Ph IEC 60255-121
points A,B,C,D,E
Dynamic overreach < 5% at 85 degrees -
measured with CVTs
and 0.5 < SIR < 30,
IEC 60255-121
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Directional blinders Forward: -15 – 120 Pseudo continuous ramp:
degrees ±2.0 degrees, IEC 60255-121
Reverse: 165 – -60
degrees
Resistance determining the load (0.01 - 5000.00) Pseudo Ramp of shots:
impedance area - forward ohm/p continuous ramp: ±5.0% of set value
±2.0% of set value Conditions:
Conditions: Tested at ArgLd =
Tested at ArgLd = 30 degrees
30 degrees
Angle determining the load 5 - 70 degrees Pseudo continuous ramp:
impedance area ±2.0 degrees
Conditions:
Tested at RLdFw = 20 ohm/p
Definite time delay to trip, Ph-E (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% of set value or ±35 ms whichever
and Ph-Ph operation is greater
Operate time 16 ms typically, IEC -
60255-121
Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach Min. = 20 ms -
Max. = 35 ms

430 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

8.12 High speed distance protection for series

compensated lines ZMFCPDIS GUID-ED71CF5A-1453-4F2F-9C64-3A73C59EA948 v4

8.12.1 Identification GUID-0F03DA72-0687-4762-91CB-EC8E59B86E06 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
High speed distance protection zone ZMFCPDIS 21
(zone 1-6)

S00346 V1 EN-US

8.12.2 Functionality GUID-C5C1ADD8-50A5-4485-848C-77D2222B56DC v7

High speed distance protection (ZMFCPDIS) provides sub-cycle, down towards

half-cycle, operate time for basic faults within 60% of the line length and up to
around SIR 5. At the same time, it is specifically designed for extra care during
difficult conditions in high voltage transmission networks, like faults on long
heavily loaded lines and faults generating heavily distorted signals. These faults are
handled with utmost security and dependability, although sometimes with reduced
operating speed.

High speed distance protection ZMFCPDIS is fundamentally the same function as

ZMFPDIS but provides more flexibility in zone settings to suit more complex
applications, such as series compensated lines. In operation for series compensated
networks, the parameters of the directional function are altered to handle voltage
reversal.

The ZMFCPDIS function is a six-zone full scheme protection with three fault loops
for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-earth faults for each of
the independent zones, which makes the function suitable in applications with
single-phase autoreclosing.

In each measurement zone, ZMFCPDIS function is designed with the flexibility to

operate in either quadrilateral or mho characteristic mode for separate phase-to-
ground or phase-to-phase loops.

The zones can operate independently of each other. Zones 3 to 5 in directional

(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. Zone1 and zone2 are designed to
measure in forward direction only, while one zone (ZRV) is designed to measure in
the reverse direction. This makes them suitable, together with a communication
scheme, for protection of power lines and cables in complex network
configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines, and so on.

A new built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of the

distance zones in the load exporting end during phase-to-earth faults on heavily
loaded power lines. It also reduces underreach in the importing end.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 431

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

The ZMFCPDIS function block incorporates a phase-selection element and a

directional element, contrary to previous designs in the IED series, where these
elements were represented with separate function blocks.

The operation of the phase-selection element is primarily based on current change

criteria, with significant increased dependability. There is also a part operating with
continuous criteria that operates in parallel.

The directional element utilizes a set of well-established quantities to provide fast

and correct directional evaluation during various conditions, including close-in
three-phase faults, simultaneous faults and faults with only zero-sequence in-feed.

8.12.3 Function block GUID-CBB51E18-15E5-4BC5-A002-6371A6DC725A v1

ZMFCPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRZ1
BLOCK TRL1Z1
VTSZ TRL2Z1
BLKZ1 TRL3Z1
BLKZ2 TRZ2
BLKZ3 TRL1Z2
BLKZ4 TRL2Z2
BLKZ5 TRL3Z2
BLKZRV TRZ3
BLKTRZ1 TRZ4
BLKTRZ2 TRZ5
BLKTRZ3 TRZRV
BLKTRZ4 START
BLKTRZ5 STZ1
BLKTRZRV STNDZ1
EXTNST STZ2
RELCNDZ1 STL1Z2
RELCNDZ2 STL2Z2
RELCNDZ3 STL3Z2
RELCNDZ4 STNDZ2
RELCNDZ5 STZ3
RELCNDZRV STNDZ3
STZ4
STNDZ4
STZ5
STNDZ5
STZRV
STL1ZRV
STL2ZRV
STL3ZRV
STNDZRV
STND
STNDL1
STNDL2
STNDL3
STNDPE
STFWL1
STFWL2
STFWL3
STFWPE
STRVL1
STRVL2
STRVL3
STRVP E
STFW1PH
STFW2PH
STFW3PH
STPE
STPP

IEC11000422-4-en.vsdx
IEC11000422 V4 EN-US

Figure 198: ZMFCPDIS function block

432 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

8.12.4 Signals
PID-6812-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 212: ZMFCPDIS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets timers and outputs of entire
function
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets timers and outputs of entire
function
BLKZ1 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 1 timers and outputs
BLKZ2 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 2 timers and outputs
BLKZ3 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 3 timers and outputs
BLKZ4 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 4 timers and outputs
BLKZ5 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 5 timers and outputs
BLKZRV BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets reverse zone timers and
outputs
BLKTRZ1 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 1 timers and trip outputs
BLKTRZ2 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 2 timers and trip outputs
BLKTRZ3 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 3 timers and trip outputs
BLKTRZ4 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 4 timers and trip outputs
BLKTRZ5 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 5 timers and trip outputs
BLKTRZRV BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets reverse zone timers and trip
outputs
EXTNST BOOLEAN 0 External start of zone timers
RELCNDZ1 INTEGER 127 Release word for the measuring loops of zone 1
RELCNDZ2 INTEGER 127 Release word for the measuring loops of zone 2
RELCNDZ3 INTEGER 127 Release word for the measuring loops of zone 3
RELCNDZ4 INTEGER 127 Release word for the measuring loops of zone 4
RELCNDZ5 INTEGER 127 Release word for the measuring loops of zone 5
RELCNDZRV INTEGER 127 Release word for the measuring loops of zone RV

PID-7070-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 213: ZMFCPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from any zone or
zones
TRZ1 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 1 -
forward direction
TRL1Z1 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L1 from zone 1 - forward direction
TRL2Z1 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L2 from zone 1 - forward direction
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 433

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Type Description

TRL3Z1 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L3 from zone 1 - forward direction
TRZ2 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 2 -
forward direction
TRL1Z2 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L1 from zone 2 - forward direction
TRL2Z2 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L2 from zone 2 - forward direction
TRL3Z2 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L3 from zone 2 - forward direction
TRZ3 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 3 - zone
direction
TRZ4 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 4 - zone
direction
TRZ5 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 5 - zone
direction
TRZRV BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone RV -
reverse direction
START BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from any zone or
zones
STZ1 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 1 -
forward direction
STNDZ1 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 1 - any
direction
STZ2 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 2 -
forward direction
STL1Z2 BOOLEAN Start in phase L1 from zone 2 - forward direction
STL2Z2 BOOLEAN Start in phase L2 from zone 2 - forward direction
STL3Z2 BOOLEAN Start in phase L3 from zone 2 - forward direction
STNDZ2 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 2 - any
direction
STZ3 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 3 - zone
direction
STNDZ3 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 3 - any
direction
STZ4 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 4 - zone
direction
STNDZ4 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 4 - any
direction
STZ5 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 5 - zone
direction
STNDZ5 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 5 - any
direction
STZRV BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone RV -
reverse direction
STL1ZRV BOOLEAN Start in phase L1 from zone RV - reverse
direction
STL2ZRV BOOLEAN Start in phase L2 from zone RV - reverse
direction
STL3ZRV BOOLEAN Start in phase L3 from zone RV - reverse
direction
Table continues on next page

434 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Name Type Description

STNDZRV BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone RV - any
direction
STND BOOLEAN Fault detected in any phase or phases - any
direction
STNDL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - any direction
STNDL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - any direction
STNDL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - any direction
STNDPE BOOLEAN Fault with earth connection detected in any phase
or phases - any direction
STFWL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - forward direction
STFWL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - forward direction
STFWL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - forward direction
STFWPE BOOLEAN Fault with earth connection detected - forward
direction
STRVL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - reverse direction
STRVL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - reverse direction
STRVL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - reverse direction
STRVPE BOOLEAN Fault with earth connection detected - reverse
direction
STFW1PH BOOLEAN Single-phase fault detected - forward direction
STFW2PH BOOLEAN Two-phase fault detected - forward direction
STFW3PH BOOLEAN Three-phase fault detected - forward direction
STPE BOOLEAN Ph-E zone measurement enabled - any direction
STPP BOOLEAN Ph-Ph zone measurement enabled - any direction

8.12.5 Settings
PID-7070-SETTINGS v2

Table 214: ZMFCPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
ZDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
ZMax 0.0 - 5000.0 Ohm 0.1 1500.0 Maximum value in ohm
ZRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band & 5s
Cyclic
Dead band & 30s
Cyclic
Dead band & 1min
Cyclic
ZAngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 435

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Table 215: ZMFCPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationSC NoSeriesComp - - NoSeriesComp Selection of series compensation
SeriesComp operation Off / On
RLdFw 0.01 - 5000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 60.00 Resistance determining the load
impedance area - forward
RLdRvFactor 1 - 1000 %RLdF 1 100 Resistance factor determining the load
w impedance area - reverse
XLd 0.01 - 10000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 400.00 Reactance determining the load
impedance area
ArgLd 5 - 70 Deg 1 30 Angle determining the load impedance
area
CVTType Any - - Passive type CVT selection determining the filtering of
Passive type the function
None (Magnetic)
OpModePPZ1 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for Ph-
Quadrilateral Ph loops, zone 1
Mho
MhoOffset
OpModePEZ1 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for Ph-
Quadrilateral E loops, zone 1
Mho
MhoOffset
X1FwPPZ1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, zone 1, forward direction
R1FwPPZ1 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, Ph-
Ph, zone 1, forward direction
RFPPZ1 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 1
X1RvPPZ1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, zone 1, reverse direction
X1FwPEZ1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, zone 1, forward direction
R1FwPEZ1 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, Ph-E,
zone 1, forward direction
X0FwPEZ1 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E,
zone 1, forward direction
R0FwPEZ1 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, Ph-E,
zone 1, forward direction
RFPEZ1 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 1
X1RvPEZ1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, zone 1, reverse direction
tPPZ1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 1
tPEZ1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 1
IMinOpPPZ1 10 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate Ph-Ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 1
IMinOpPEZ1 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 1
Table continues on next page

436 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OpModePPZ2 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for Ph-
Quadrilateral Ph loops, zone 2
Mho
MhoOffset
OpModePEZ2 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for Ph-
Quadrilateral E loops, zone 2
Mho
MhoOffset
X1FwPPZ2 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, zone 2, forward direction
R1FwPPZ2 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, Ph-
Ph, zone 2, forward direction
RFPPZ2 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 2
X1RvPPZ2 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, zone 2, reverse direction
X1FwPEZ2 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, zone 2, forward direction
R1FwPEZ2 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, Ph-E,
zone 2, forward direction
X0FwPEZ2 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E,
zone 2, forward direction
R0FwPEZ2 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, Ph-E,
zone 2, forward direction
RFPEZ2 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 2
X1RvPEZ2 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, zone 2, reverse direction
tPPZ2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 2
tPEZ2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 2
IMinOpPPZ2 10 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate Ph-Ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 2
IMinOpPEZ2 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 2
OpModePPZ3 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for Ph-
Quadrilateral Ph loops, zone 3
Mho
MhoOffset
OpModePEZ3 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for Ph-
Quadrilateral E loops, zone 3
Mho
MhoOffset
DirModeZ3 Non-directional - - Forward Direction of zone 3
Forward
Reverse
X1FwPPZ3 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, zone 3, zone direction
R1FwPPZ3 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, Ph-
Ph, zone 3, zone direction
RFFwPPZ3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 3,
zone direction
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 437

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

X1RvPPZ3 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, zone 3, opposite to zone dir
RFRvPPZ3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 3,
opposite to zone direction
X1FwPEZ3 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, zone 3, zone direction
R1FwPEZ3 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, Ph-E,
zone 3, zone direction
X0FwPEZ3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E,
zone 3, zone direction
R0FwPEZ3 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, Ph-E,
zone 3, zone direction
RFFwPEZ3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 3,
zone direction
X1RvPEZ3 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, zone 3, opposite to zone dir
RFRvPEZ3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 3,
opposite to zone direction
tPPZ3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 3
tPEZ3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 3
IMinOpPPZ3 10 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate Ph-Ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 3
IMinOpPEZ3 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 3
OpModePPZ4 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for Ph-
Quadrilateral Ph loops, zone 4
Mho
MhoOffset
OpModePEZ4 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for Ph-
Quadrilateral E loops, zone 4
Mho
MhoOffset
DirModeZ4 Non-directional - - Forward Direction of zone 4
Forward
Reverse
X1FwPPZ4 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, zone 4, zone direction
R1FwPPZ4 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, Ph-
Ph, zone 4, zone direction
RFFwPPZ4 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 4,
zone direction
X1RvPPZ4 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, zone 4, opposite to zone dir
RFRvPPZ4 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 4,
opposite to zone direction
X1FwPEZ4 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, zone 4, zone direction
R1FwPEZ4 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, Ph-E,
zone 4, zone direction
Table continues on next page

438 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

X0FwPEZ4 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E,
zone 4, zone direction
R0FwPEZ4 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, Ph-E,
zone 4, zone direction
RFFwPEZ4 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 4,
zone direction
X1RvPEZ4 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, zone 4, opposite to zone dir
RFRvPEZ4 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 4,
opposite to zone direction
tPPZ4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 4
tPEZ4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 4
IMinOpPPZ4 10 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate Ph-Ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 4
IMinOpPEZ4 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 4
OpModePPZ5 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for Ph-
Quadrilateral Ph loops, zone 5
Mho
MhoOffset
OpModePEZ5 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for Ph-
Quadrilateral E loops, zone 5
Mho
MhoOffset
DirModeZ5 Non-directional - - Forward Direction of zone 5
Forward
Reverse
X1FwPPZ5 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, zone 5, zone direction
R1FwPPZ5 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, Ph-
Ph, zone 5, zone direction
RFFwPPZ5 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 5,
zone direction
X1RvPPZ5 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, zone 5, opposite to zone dir
RFRvPPZ5 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 5,
opposite to zone direction
X1FwPEZ5 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, zone 5, zone direction
R1FwPEZ5 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, Ph-E,
zone 5, zone direction
X0FwPEZ5 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E,
zone 5, zone direction
R0FwPEZ5 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, Ph-E,
zone 5, zone direction
RFFwPEZ5 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 5,
zone direction
X1RvPEZ5 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, zone 5, opposite to zone dir
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 439

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

RFRvPEZ5 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 5,
opposite to zone direction
tPPZ5 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.600 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 5
tPEZ5 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.600 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 5
IMinOpPPZ5 10 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate Ph-Ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 5
IMinOpPEZ5 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 5
OpModePPZRV Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for Ph-
Quadrilateral Ph loops, zone RV
Mho
MhoOffset
OpModePEZRV Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for Ph-
Quadrilateral E loops, zone RV
Mho
MhoOffset
X1FwPPZRV 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, zone RV, reverse direction
R1FwPPZRV 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, Ph-
Ph, zone RV, reverse direction
RFPPZRV 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone RV
X1RvPPZRV 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, zone RV, forward direction
X1FwPEZRV 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, zone RV, reverse direction
R1FwPEZRV 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, Ph-E,
zone RV, reverse direction
X0FwPEZRV 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-E,
zone RV, reverse direction
R0FwPEZRV 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, Ph-E,
zone RV, reverse direction
RFPEZRV 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone RV
X1RvPEZRV 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-
E, zone RV, forward direction
tPPZRV 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone
RV
tPEZRV 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone RV
IMinOpPPZRV 10 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate Ph-Ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone RV
IMinOpPEZRV 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone RV

Table 216: ZMFCPDIS Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ZZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 100 0 Zero point clamping
ZHiHiLim 0.0 - 5000.0 Ohm 0.1 800.0 High High limit in ohm
ZHiLim 0.0 - 5000.0 Ohm 0.1 150.0 High limit in ohm
Table continues on next page

440 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ZLowLim 0.0 - 5000.0 Ohm 0.1 50.0 Low limit in ohm
ZLowLowLim 0.0 - 5000.0 Ohm 0.1 35.0 Low Low limit in ohm
ZMin 0.000 - 5000.000 Ohm 0.001 0.005 Minimum value in ohm
ZLimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 0.500 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits

Table 217: ZMFCPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
RLdFwMax 0.01 - 5000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5000.00 Maximum used resistance determining
the load impedance area, if RLdFw is
greater than RLdFwMax then RLdFw is
set to RLdFwMax
RLdFwMin 0.01 - 5000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 0.01 Minimum used resistance determining
the load impedance area, if RLdFw is
less than RLdFwMin then RLdFw is set
to RLdFwMin
ArgLdMax 5 - 70 Deg 1 70 Maximum used angle determining the
load impedance area, if ArgLd is greater
than ArgLdMax then ArgLd is set to
ArgLdMax
ArgLdMin 5 - 70 Deg 1 5 Minimum used angle determining the
load impedance area, if ArgLd is less
than ArgLdMin then ArgLd is set to
ArgLdMin
ZoneLinkStart Phase Selection - - Phase Selection Selection of start source for all
1st starting zone ZoneLinked trip delay timers
INReleasePE 5 - 400 %MaxIP 1 400 3I0 limit for releasing Phase-to-Earth
h measuring loops
TimerModeZ1 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E PhPh output, zone 1
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ1 LoopLink (tPP & - - LoopLink (tPP & How start of trip delay timers should be
tPE) tPE) linked for zone 1
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZ2 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E PhPh output, zone 2
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ2 LoopLink (tPP & - - LoopLink (tPP & How start of trip delay timers should be
tPE) tPE) linked for zone 2
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZ3 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E PhPh output, zone 3
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 441

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TimerLinksZ3 LoopLink (tPP & - - LoopLink (tPP & How start of trip delay timers should be
tPE) tPE) linked for zone 3
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZ4 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E PhPh output, zone 4
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ4 LoopLink (tPP & - - LoopLink (tPP & How start of trip delay timers should be
tPE) tPE) linked for zone 4
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZ5 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E PhPh output, zone 5
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ5 LoopLink (tPP & - - LoopLink (tPP & How start of trip delay timers should be
tPE) tPE) linked for zone 5
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZRV Disable all - - Enable Ph-E On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E PhPh output, zone RV
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZRV LoopLink (tPP & - - LoopLink (tPP & How start of trip delay timers should be
tPE) tPE) linked for zone RV
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links

8.12.6 Monitored data

PID-7070-MONITOREDDATA v1

Table 218: ZMFCPDIS Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
L1Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L2Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L3Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L1L2Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in loop L1L2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L2L3Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in loop L2L3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Table continues on next page

442 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

L3L1Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in loop L3L1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L1R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L1
L1X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L1
L2R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L2
L2X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L2
L3R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L3
L3X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L3
L12R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L1-
L2
L12X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L1-
L2
L23R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L2-
L3
L23X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L2-
L3
L31R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L3-
L1
L31X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L3-
L1
ZL1IMAG REAL - Ohm ZL1 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL1ANGIM REAL - deg ZL1 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL2IMAG REAL - Ohm ZL2 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL2ANGIM REAL - deg ZL2 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL3IMAG REAL - Ohm ZL3 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL3ANGIM REAL - deg ZL3 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL12IMAG REAL - Ohm ZL12 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL12ANGIM REAL - deg ZL12 Angle, magnitude
of instantaneous value
ZL23IMAG REAL - Ohm ZL23 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL23ANGIM REAL - deg ZL23 Angle, magnitude
of instantaneous value
ZL31IMAG REAL - Ohm ZL31 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL31ANGIM REAL - deg ZL31 Angle, magnitude
of instantaneous value

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 443

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.12.7 Operation principle GUID-913A0692-F0A7-4B4B-83B4-AC2A96B3A989 v3

Settings, input and output names are sometimes mentioned in the

following text without its zone suffix (i.e. BLKZx instead of
BLKZ3) when the description is equally valid for all zones.

8.12.7.1 Filtering GUID-0EA39CA3-6CDA-41B0-A178-E5800868A0C5 v1

Practically all voltage, current and impedance quantities used within the
ZMFCPDIS function are derived from fundamental frequency phasors filtered by a
half-cycle filter.

The phasor filter is frequency adaptive in the sense that its coefficients are changed
based on the estimated power system frequency.

A half-cycle filter will not be able to reject both even and odd harmonics. So, while
odd harmonics will be completely attenuated, accuracy will be affected by even
harmonics. Even harmonics will not cause the distance zones to overreach; instead
there will be a slightly variable underreach, on average in the same order as the
magnitude ratio between the harmonic and the fundamental component.

8.12.7.2 Distance measuring zones GUID-674FC410-9BA3-437E-8358-62E9B81D7B65 v3

The different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type, which means that
earth fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase faults for forward and
reverse faults are executed in parallel.

Figure 199 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the six distance
zones.

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 1

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 2

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 3

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 4

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 5

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

Zone RV

IEC05000458-2-en.vsd
IEC05000458 V2 EN-US

Figure 199: The different measuring loops at phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-
phase fault

444 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Transients from CVTs may have a significant impact on the transient overreach of
a distance protection. At the same time these transients can be very diverse in
nature from one type to the other; in fact, more diverse than can be distinguished
by the algorithm itself in the course of a few milliseconds. So, a setting is
introduced in order to inform the algorithm about the type of CVT applied and thus
providing the advantage of knowing how performance should be optimized, even
during the first turbulent milliseconds of the fault period.

There are two types of CVTs from the function point of view, the passive and the
active type, which refers to the type of ferro-resonance suppression device that is
employed. The active type requires more rigorous filtering which will have a
negative impact on operate times. However, this will be evident primarily at higher
source impedance ratios (SIRs), SIR 5 and above, or close to the reach limit.

The IEC 60044-5 transient classification is of little or no use in relation to this. It is

not primarily the damping of transients that is important; it is the frequency content
of the transients that is decisive, i.e. how difficult it is to filter out the specific
frequency. So, even if two CVTs, one passive and the other active type, comply
with the same transient class, the active type requires more extensive filtering in
order to avoid transient overreach.

To avoid overreach and at the same time achieve fast operate times, a
supplementary circular characteristic that includes some alternative processing is
implemented. One such circular characteristic exists for every measuring loop and
quadrilateral/mho characteristic. There are no specific reach settings for this
circular zone. It uses the normal quadrilateral/mho zone settings to determine a
reach that will be appropriate. This implies that the circular characteristic will
always have somewhat shorter reach than the quadrilateral/mho zone.

8.12.7.3 Phase-selection element GUID-2BCDB96F-39EE-4C14-9856-D23A4A1B6115 v4

The operation of the phase-selection element is primarily based on current change

criteria. The current change criteria itself can however only be relied on for a short
period following the fault inception (during what we will call the current change
phase). Subsequent switching in the network may render the change in current
invalid. To handle this, the phase-selection element also operates on continuous
criteria.

The phase-selection element can, owing to the current change criteria, distinguish
faults with minimum influence from load and fault impedance. In other words, it is
not restricted by a load encroachment characteristic during the current change
phase. This significantly improves performance for remote phase-to-earth faults on
heavily loaded lines. One exception, however, is three-phase faults, for which the
load encroachment characteristic always has to be applied, in order to distinguish
fault from load.

The continuous criteria will in the vast majority of cases operate in parallel and
carry on the fault indication after the current change phase has ended. Only in some
particularly difficult faults on heavily loaded lines the continuous criteria might not

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 445

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

be sufficient, for example, when the estimated fault impedance resides within the
load area defined by the load encroachment characteristic. In this case, the
indication will be restricted to a pulse lasting for one or two power system cycles.

Phase-to-phase-earth faults (also called double earth faults) will practically always
activate phase-to-phase zone measurements.Measurement in two phase-to-earth
loops at the same time is associated with so-called simultaneous faults: two earth
faults at the same time, one each on the two circuits of a double line, or when the
zero sequence current is relatively high due to a source with low Z0/Z1 ratio.In
these situations zone measurement will be released both for the related phase-to-
earth loops and the phase-to-phase loop simultaneously. On the other hand,
simultaneous faults closer to the remote bus will gradually take on the properties of
a phase-to-phase-earth fault and the function will eventually use phase-to-phase
zone measurements also here.

In cases where the fault current infeed is more or less completely lack of zero
sequence nature (all phase currents in phase), the measurement will be performed
in the phase-to-earth loops only for a phase-to-phase-earth fault.

Should it be desirable to use phase-to-earth (and only phase-to-earth) zone

measurement for phase-to-phase-earth faults, the setting INReleasePE can be
lowered from its excessive default value to the level above which phase-to-earth
measurement should be activated.

8.12.7.4 Directional criteria GUID-24431EEC-5037-41CD-BC4A-7AC196F158F3 v5

Several criteria are employed when making the directional decision. The basis is
provided by comparing a positive sequence based polarizing voltage with phase
currents. For extra security, especially in making a very fast decision, this method
is complemented with an equivalent comparison where, instead of the phase
current, the change in phase current is used. Moreover, a basic negative sequence
directional evaluation is taken into account as a reliable reference during high load
condition. Finally, a zero sequence directional evaluation is used whenever there is
more or less exclusive zero sequence in-feed.

The directional sectors that represent forward direction, one per measuring loop,
are defined by the following equations.

U PolL1
−15° < arg < 120°
I L1
IECEQUATION15059 V1 EN-US (Equation 107)

U PolL1L 2
−15° < arg < 120°
I L1L 2
IECEQUATION15060 V1 EN-US (Equation 108)

Where:
UPolL1 is the polarizing voltage for phase L1.

IL1 is the phase current in phase L1.

446 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

UPolL1L2 is the polarizing voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).

IL1L2 is the current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).

The corresponding reverse directional sectors range from 165 to -60 degrees.

Since the polarizing voltage is also used for the Mho distance characteristics, the
magnitude of the voltage is just as interesting as the phase. If there are symmetrical
conditions and the measured per phase positive sequence voltage magnitude is
above 75% of the base voltage before the fault, the pre-fault magnitude will be
memorized and used as long as there is a fault. The phase angle however will only
be memorized (locked) for 75 ms at a time, not to lose synchronism with the real
system voltage.

Should the positive sequence voltage drop below 2% of the base voltage, it will be
considered invalid. In this situation, directional signals and starts from Mho
elements will be sealed-in and kept static as long as there is a fault.

For ZMFCPDIS, when option SeriesComp is chosen for OperationSC, the voltages
of faulty phases will be discarded in order not to affect the polarizing voltage with
voltage reversal.

8.12.7.5 Fuse failure GUID-AB0D0D20-EF27-4475-8EC5-A3BF69FC5802 v2

The ZMFCPDIS function has to be blocked by an additional function like the Fuse
failure supervision (FUFSPVC) or an equivalent external device. Typically, the
binary input VTSZ is used for this purpose.

However, to guarantee that also very fast operation is blocked in a fuse failure
situation, there is a built-in supervision based on change in current that will delay
operation before the FUFSPVC blocking signal is received. The delay will be
introduced if no (vector) magnitude change greater than 5% of IBase has been
detected in any of the phase currents.

8.12.7.6 Power swings GUID-66627E0F-33AA-4570-9C27-4217EEECC2CE v1

There is need for external blocking of the ZMFCPDIS function during power
swings, either from the Power Swing Blocking function (ZMRPSB) or an external
device.

8.12.7.7 Measurement principles

Quadrilateral characteristic GUID-E1366EA0-B04E-4180-BC4C-F042CC8FA8E2 v4

ZMFCPDIS implements quadrilateral and mho characteristic in all the six zones
separately. Set OpModePEZx or OpModePPZx to Quadrilateral, to choose
particular measuring loop in a zone to work as quadrilateral distance protection.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 447

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

All ZMFCPDIS zones operate according to the non-directional impedance

characteristics presented in figure 200 and figure 201. The phase-to-earth
characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase
characteristic presents the per-phase reach.

X (Ohm/loop)

X0FwPEZx  X1FwPEZx
XNFwZx 
R1FwPEZx+RNFwZx 3
X1RvPEZx
XNRvZx  XNFwZx 
RFRvPEZx RFFwPEZx X1FwPEZx
R0FwPEZx  R1FwPEZx
RNFwZx 
3
X1RvPEZx
RNRvZx  RNFwZx 
X1FwPEZx
X1RvPEZx
X1FwPEZx+XNFwZx R1RvPEZx  R1FwPEZx 
X1FwPEZx

N N
R (Ohm/loop)

1) 1)
RFRvPEZx RFFwPEZx

X1RvPEZx+XNRvZx

N

RFRvPEZx RFFwPEZx

R1RvPEZx + RNRvZx IEC11000417-2-en.vsd

Settings RFRvPEZx and RFFwPEZx exists only for Zones 3 to 5.

1)
For Zone 1, 2 and RV, setting RFPEZx is applicable to both forward and reverse direction.
IEC11000417 V2 EN-US

Figure 200: ZMFCPDIS Characteristic for phase-to-earth measuring loops,

ohm/loop domain

448 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

R1FwPPZx
X (Ohm/phase)

RFRvPPZx RFFwPPZx
2 2

X1FwPPZx

N
R (Ohm/phase)

1) 1)
RFRvPPZx RFFwPPZx
2 2

X1RvPPZx

N

RFRvPPZx RFFwPPZx
2 2
X1RvPPZx IEC11000418-2-en.vsd
R1FwPPZx 
X1FwPPZx

Settings RFRvPPZx and RFFwPPZx exist only for Zones 3 to 5.

1)
For Zone 1, 2 and RV, setting RFPPZx is applicable to both forward and reverse direction.
IEC11000418 V2 EN-US

Figure 201: ZMFCPDIS Characteristic for the phase-to-phase measuring loops,

ohm/phase domain

Note that for ZMFCPDIS, the reverse zone ZRV, as well as any of
zones 3-5, that are set to DirMode=Reverse will get their operating
impedances inverted (rotated 180 degrees) internally in order to
make use of the main settings, which are the settings designated
‘Fw’. Therefore, a reverse zone will have its Fw-settings
(RFFwPPZRV, X1FwPEZ3, and so on) applied in the third
quadrant, that is, towards the busbar instead of the line.

The fault loop reach in relation to each fault type may also be presented as in figure
202. The main intention with this illustration is to make clear how the fault
resistive reach should be interpreted. Note in particular that the setting RFPP [2]
always represents the total fault resistance of the loop, even while the fault
resistance (arc) may be divided into parts like for three-phase or phase-to-phase-to-
earth faults. R1Zx and jX1Zx represent the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location.

[2] Represents all settings such as RFFwPPZRV, RFRvPPZ5 etc.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 449

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

IL1 R1Zx + j X1Zx

Phase-to-earth
UL1
element

Phase-to-earth
RFPEZx
fault in phase L1
(Arc + tower
resistance)

0
IN (R0Zx-R1Zx)/3 +
j (X0Zx-X1Zx)/3 )

IL1 R1Zx + j X1Zx Phase-to-phase

UL1 element L1-L2
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase RFPPZx
L1-L2 IL2
UL2 (Arc resistance)
R1Zx + j X1Zx

IL1 R1Zx + j X1Zx 0.5·RFPPZx Phase-to-phase

UL1 element L1-L3
Three-phase
fault or Phase-to-
phase-earth fault IL3
UL3
R1Zx + j X1Zx 0.5·RFPPZx
IEC11000419-3-en.vsdx
IEC11000419 V3 EN-US

Figure 202: Fault loop model

Mho characteristic GUID-DA87F1BC-8037-4E14-96E0-03BCD98ED6F2 v1

ZMFCPDIS implements quadrilateral and mho characteristic in all the six zones
separately. Set OpModePEZx or OpModePPZx setting to Mho or Offset, to choose
a particular measuring loop in a zone to work as mho (or Offset Mho) distance
protection.

Zones 3 to 5 can be selected to be either forward or reverse with positive sequence

polarized mho characteristic; alternatively self polarized offset mho characteristics.
The operating characteristic is in accordance to figure 203 where zone 5 is selected
offset mho.

450 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

X
X

Z4
Z3
ZS=0
Z2
Z1 R
Z5 R

ZS=Z1
ZRV
ZS=2Z1

IEC15000056-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000056 V1 EN-US

Figure 203: Mho, offset mho characteristics and the source impedance
influence on the mho characteristic

The mho characteristic has a dynamic expansion due to the source impedance.
Instead of crossing the origin, as for the mho to the left of figure 203, which is only
valid where the source impedance (Zs) is zero, the crossing point is moved to the
coordinates of the negative source impedance given an expansion of the circle
shown to the right of figure 203. Z1 denotes the complex positive sequence
impedance.

The magnitude of the polarized voltage is determined completely by the positive

sequence voltage magnitude from before the fault. This will give a somewhat less
dynamic expansion of the mho circle during faults. However, if the source
impedance is high, the dynamic expansion of the mho circle might lower the
security of the function too much with high loading and mild power swing
conditions.

Basic operation characteristics GUID-B9D7C3D8-811A-419B-8373-712EC122EB08 v2

In ZMFCPDIS, each zone measurement loop characteristic can be set to mho

characteristic or offset mho characteristic by setting OpModePEZx or
OpModePPZx (where x is 1-5 depending on selected zone).

ZMFCPDIS fixes zone 1 and 2 in Forward mode and zone RV in Reverse mode.
Zone 3-5 can be set to Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by setting the
parameter DirModeZx (where x is 3-5 depending on selected zone).

If DirModeZx (where x is 3-5 depending on selected zone) is selected as Non-

directional, the directional element will not have any effect on the measurement
loop and operation of the function. When DirModeZx (where x is 3-5 depending on
selected zone) is selected as Forward or Reverse, directional lines are introduced.
Information about the directional lines is given from the directional element. Basic
Mho and offset Mho characteristics with different mode settings are indicated in
figure 204.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 451

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

X X
(a) Rset
X (c)
(b) Rset

(a), (b) and (c)

For Phase-to-Phase fault
Xset Rset=R1FwPPZx; Xset=X1FwPPZx
Xset For Phase-to-earth fault
Rset=R1FwPEZx+RNFwZx
Xset=X1FwPEZx+XNFwZx
R R R X 0 PEZx  X 1 FwPEZx
XNFwZx
3
R 0PEZx  R1 FwPEZx
RNFwZx
Xset 3

Rset

Forward Reverse Non-directional

Mho Characteristics

(d), (e) and (f)

X (e) X (f) X For Phase-to-Phase fault
(d)
RsetFwZx=R1FwPPZx; XsetFwZx=X1FwPPZx
RsetFwZx RsetRvZx=R1RvPPZx; XsetFwZx=X1RvPPZx
RsetFwZx RsetFwZx
R1FwPPZx
R1RvPPZx  X 1 RvPPZx 
X 1FwPPZx
For Phase-to-Earth fault
XsetFwx XsetFwZx
XsetFwZx RsetFwZx  R1FwPEZx  RNFwZx
XsetFwZx  X 1FwPEZx  XNFwZx
R R R X 0FwPEZx  X 1FwPEZx
XNFwZx 
XsetRvZx 3
XsetRvZx XsetRvZx
R 0FwPEZx  R1FwPEZx
RNFwZx 
3
RsetRvZx RsetRvZx  R1RvPEZx  RNRvZx
RsetRvZx RsetRvZx
XsetRvZx  X 1RvPEZx  XNRvZx
R1 RvPEZx
RNRvZx  RNFwZx 
R1 FwPEZx
R1FwPEZx
Forward R1RvPEZx  X 1 RvPEZx 
Reverse Non-directional X 1FwPEZx
X 1RvPEZx
XNRvZx  XNFwZx 
X 1 FwPEZx
Offset Mho Characteristics

(a) and (c) are for Zone 1, Zone 2 and Zone 3-5 when DirModeZ3-5 = Forward
(b) and (d) are for ZoneRV and Zone 3-5 when DirModeZ3-5 = Reverse
(c) and (f) are for Zone 3-5 when DirModeZ3-5 = Non-Directional
IEC15000065‐2‐en.vsdx

IEC15000065 V2 EN-US

Figure 204: Mho and offset Mho characteristics

For each zone, the impedance is set in cartesian coordinates (resistance and
reactance) which is the same as for quadrilateral characteristic.

ZMFCPDIS function uses separate sets of reach settings in forward and reverse
directions for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase fault. These settings are
R1FwPPZx, X1FwPPZx, X1RvPPZx, R1FwPEZx, X1FwPEZx, X1RvPEZx,
R0FWPEZx, X0FwPPZx (x=1-5 or RV). Thus, the center of the Non-directional
offset mho circle can be arbitrarily located in the circle (figure 204).

Note that the reverse ZoneRV, as well as any of zones 3-5, that are set to
DirModeZx=Reverse will get their operating impedances inverted (rotated 180
degrees) internally in order to make use of the main settings, which are the settings
designated ‘Fw’. Therefore, a reverse zone will have its Fw-settings (R1FwPPZRV,
X1FwPEZ3, and so on) applied in the third quadrant, that is, towards the busbar
instead of the line.

In Non-directional mode, for both Mho and Quad, the reach settings are equal to
Forward mode in this respect. The ‘Fw’ settings apply in the first quadrant and the
‘Rv’ settings apply in the third quadrant.

452 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Theory of operation SEMOD154224-46 v6

The mho algorithm is based on the phase comparison of an operating phasor and a
polarizing phasor. When the operating phasor leads the reference polarizing phasor
by 90 degrees or more, the function operates and gives a trip output.

Phase-to-phase fault GUID-46762EB9-50CA-4045-9D39-80B604C66E0F

SEMOD154224-240 v2

The plain Mho circle has the characteristic as in figure 205. The condition for
deriving the angle β is according to equation 109.

(
β = arg U L1L 2 − I L1L 2 ⋅ Z 1set − arg U pol) ( )
IECEQUATION15027 V1 EN-US (Equation 109)

where

U L1L2 is the voltage vector difference between phases L1 and L2

V2 EN-US
EQUATION1790

I L1L2 is the current vector difference between phases L1 and L2

V2 EN-US
EQUATION1791

is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault in zone direction
Z 1set
is the polarizing voltage
Upol

Z 1set = R1FwPPZx + j ⋅ X 1FwPPZx

IECEQUATION15010 V1 EN-US (Equation 110)

where:
R1FwPPZx is the positive sequence resistive reach for phase-to-phase fault in zone direction for
zone x (x=1-5 and RV)
X1FwPPZx is the positive sequence reactance reach for phase-to-phase fault in zone direction for
zone x (x=1-5 and RV)

The polarized voltage consists of 100% memorized positive sequence voltage

(UL1L2 for phase L1 to L2 fault). The memorized voltage will prevent collapse of
the mho circle for close in faults.

Operation occurs if 90°≤β≤270°.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 453

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

IL1L2  jX

I L1L 2  Z1set
UcompUL1L2 IL1L2 Z1set

UL1L2

U pol

I L1L 2  R

IEC15000060-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000060 V1 EN-US

Figure 205: Simplified mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase L1-to-
L2 fault

Offset Mho GUID-2E84AD28-CA5F-4D19-B189-57354C8F7CF9 v2

The characteristic for offset mho is a circle where two points on the circle are given
by the two vectors Z 1set and Z 1RVset where Z 1set and Z 1RVset are settable
through the resistance and reactance settings in forward and reverse directions.

The condition for operation at phase-to-phase fault is that the angle β between the
two compensated voltages is greater than or equal to 90° (figure 206). The angle
will be 90° for fault location on the boundary of the circle.

The angle β for L1 to L2 fault can be defined according to equation 112.

 U 
L1L 2  I L1L 2  Z 1set
  arg  
 
 U L1L 2   I L1L 2  Z1set  

IECEQUATION15008 V2 EN-US (Equation 112)

where
is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault
Z 1RVset opposite to zone direction and is defined as

454 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Z 1RVset = R1RvPPZx + j ⋅ X 1RvPPZx

IECEQUATION15013 V1 EN-US (Equation 113)

where
X1RvPPZx is the positive sequence reactance reach for phase-to-phase fault
opposite to zone direction for zone x (x=1-5 and RV)
R1RvPPZx is the positive sequence resistive reach for phase-to-phase fault
opposite to zone direction for zone x (x=1-5 and RV) and is
internally calculated according to the equation below,

 R1FwPPZx 
R1RvPPZx = X 1RvPPZx ⋅  
 X 1FwPPZx 
IECEQUATION15014 V1 EN-US (Equation 114)

IL1L 2  jX

Ucomp1  UL1L 2  IL1L 2  Z1set

IL1L 2  Z1set

UL1L 2


Ucomp 2  UL1L 2  IL1L 2  Z1RVset 

IL1L 2  R
IL1L 2  Z1RVset

IEC16000207-1-en.vsdx

IEC16000207 V1 EN-US

Figure 206: Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vector for phase L1
to L2 fault

Operation occurs if 90°≤β≤270 °.

Phase-to-earth fault GUID-8A79E50E-9DC0-45DA-A3A7-DF3DBF59618C

SEMOD154224-283 v1
v2

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 455

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

The measuring of earth faults uses earth return compensation applied in a

conventional way. The compensation voltage is derived by considering the
influence from the earth return path.

Compensation for earth return path for faults involving earth is done by setting the
positive and zero sequence impedance of the line. It is known that the ground
compensation factor KN is,

Z 0set − Z 1set
KN =
3 ⋅ Z 1set
IECEQUATION15017 V1 EN-US

Z 0set = R 0 FwPEZx + j ⋅ X 0 FwPEZx

IECEQUATION15028 V1 EN-US

Z 1set = R1FwPEZx + j ⋅ X 1FwPEZx

IECEQUATION15029 V1 EN-US (Equation 115)

where
is the complex zero sequence impedance of the line in Ω/phase
Z 0set
is the complex positive sequence impedance of the line in Ω/phase
Z 1set
R0FwPEZx is the zero sequence resistive reach of the line in Ω/phase for
phase-to-earth fault in zone direction for zone x (x=1-5, or RV)
X0FwPEZx is the zero sequence reactance reach of the line in Ω/phase for
phase-to-earth fault in zone direction for zone x (x=1-5, or RV)
R1FwPEZx is the positive sequence resistive reach of the line in Ω/phase for
phase-to-earth fault in zone direction for zone x (x=1-5, or RV)
X1FwPEZx is the positive sequence reactance reach of the line in Ω/phase for
phase-to-earth fault in zone direction for zone x (x=1-5, or RV)

For an earth fault in phase L1, the angle β between the compensation voltage and
the polarizing voltage Upol is,

456 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

β = arg [U L1 − ( I L1 + 3I 0 ⋅ K N ) ⋅ Z 1set ] − arg(U pol )

IECEQUATION15021 V1 EN-US (Equation 116)

where
is the phase voltage in faulty phase L1
UL1
is the phase current in faulty phase L1
IL1
3I0 is the zero-sequence current in faulty phase L1

is the complex positive sequence impedance of the line in Ω/phase

Z 1set for phase-to-earth fault in zone direction

is the polarizing voltage in phase L1

Upol

IL1•jX

UcompUL1 (IL1 3I0 KN )  Z1set

3I0KN Z1set

U L1
I L1  Z1set
U pol

IL1•R
IEC15000059-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000059 V1 EN-US

Figure 207: Simplified offset mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase
L1-to-earth fault

Operation occurs if 90 °≤β≤270 °.

Offset mho GUID-1CD62635-A76A-41F7-A814-8BB493F5B051 v2

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 457

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

The condition for operation of offset mho at phase-to-earth fault is that the angle β
between the two compensated voltages is equal to or greater than 90°, see figure
208. The angle will be 90° for fault location on the boundary of the circle.

   
  arg U L1  ( I L1  3I 0  K N )  Z1set  arg U L1   ( I L1  3I 0  K N )  Z1set 

IECEQUATION15022 V2 EN-US (Equation 117)

where
is the complex positive sequence impedance of the line in Ω/phase
Z 1RVset for phase-to-earth fault opposite to zone direction and is defined as,

Z 1RVset = R1RvPEZx + j ⋅ X 1RvPEZx

IECEQUATION15023 V1 EN-US (Equation 118)

where
X1RvPEZx is the positive sequence reactance reach for phase-to-earth fault
opposite to zone direction for zone x (x=1-5 and RV)
R1RvPEZx is the positive sequence resistive reach for phase-to-earth fault
opposite to zone direction for zone x (x=1-5 and RV) and expressed
by,

 R1FwPEZx 
R1RvPEZx = X 1RvPEZx ⋅  
 X 1FwPEZx 
IECEQUATION15024 V1 EN-US (Equation 119)

458 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

IL1• jX

U comp1  U L1  ( I L1  3I 0  K N )  Z1set

( I L1  3I 0  K N )  Z 1set U L1

U comp 2  U L1   ( I L1  3I 0  K N )  Z 1RVset ) 

( I L1  3I 0  K N )  Z 1RVset
IL1• R

IEC16000207-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000208 V1 EN-US

Figure 208: Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vector for phase
L1-to-earth fault

Operation occurs if 90 °≤β≤270 °.

8.12.7.8 Load encroachment GUID-D846C3D9-4C79-40B5-9ED2-23934214AADB v6

In some cases the load impedance might enter the zone characteristic without any
fault on the protected line. The phenomenon is called load encroachment and it
might occur when an external fault is cleared and high emergency load is
transferred on the protected line. The effect of load encroachment is illustrated in
the left part of figure 209. A load impedance within the characteristic would cause
an unwanted trip. The traditional way of avoiding this situation is to set the
distance zone resistive reach with a security margin to the minimum load
impedance. The drawback with this approach is that the sensitivity of the
protection to detect resistive faults is reduced.

The IED has a built-in function which shapes the characteristic according to the
right part of figure 209. The load encroachment algorithm will increase the
possibility to detect high fault resistances, especially for phase-to-earth faults at the
remote line end. For example, for a given setting of the load angle ArgLd the
resistive blinder for the zone measurement can be expanded according to the right
part of the figure 209, given higher fault resistance coverage without risk for
unwanted operation due to load encroachment. This is valid in both directions.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 459

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavily loaded lines,
where there might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and
necessary sensitivity of the distance protection. The function can also preferably be
used on heavy loaded medium long lines. For short lines, the major concern is to
get sufficient fault resistance coverage. Load encroachment is not a major problem.
Nevertheless, always set RLdFw, RLdRv [3] and ArgLd according to the expected
maximum load since these settings are used internally in the function as reference
points to improve the performance of the phase selection.

Z1

ArgLd

[1]
RLdRv RLdFw

IEC09000248-3-en.vsdx

IEC09000248 V3 EN-US

Figure 209: Load encroachment phenomena and shaped load encroachment

characteristic

8.12.7.9 Simplified logic schemes GUID-486BDAF6-6AE2-4671-91AF-4D2F8EBE71AC v4

PHSL1, PHSL2,...PHSL3L1 are internal binary logical signals from the Phase-
selection element. They correspond directly to the six loops of the distance zones
and determine which loops should be released to possibly issue a start or a trip.

FWL1, FWL2,...FWL3L1 and RVL1, RVL2,...RVL3L1 are the internal binary

signals from the Directional element. An FW signal is set true if the criteria for a
forward fault or load is fulfilled for its particular loop. The equivalent applies to the
reverse (RV) signals.

The internal input 'IN present' is true if the residual current (3I0) exceeds 7% of
IBase. However, if current transformer saturation is detected, this criterion is
changed to residual voltage (3U0) exceeding 5% of UBase/sqrt(3) instead.

[3] RLdRv=RLdRvFactor*RLdFw.

460 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

FW(Ln & LmLn)

FW(Ln & LmLn)

RV(Ln & LmLn)

DirModeZ3-5
TRUE (1)
FW(Ln & LmLn) Forward
RV(Ln & LmLn) Reverse

IEC12000137-2-en.vsd
IEC12000137 V3 EN-US

Figure 210: Connection of directional signals to zones

ZML1Zx PEZx
OR
PHSL1
AND

DIRL1Zx AND
ZML2Zx
PHSL2
AND

DIRL2Zx AND
ZML3Zx L1Zx
OR
PHSL3
AND

DIRL3Zx AND

ZML1L2Zx L2Zx
PHSL1L2 OR
AND

DIRL1L2Zx AND
ZML2L3Zx
PHSL2L3 L3Zx
AND OR
DIRL2L3Zx AND
ZML3L1Zx
PHSL3L1
AND

DIRL3L1Zx AND

L1N
PPZx
L2N OR
L3N
RELCNDZx Integer L1L2
to Bool
L2L3
NDZx
L1L3 OR

IEC12000140-2-en.vsdx
IEC12000140 V2 EN-US

Figure 211: Intermediate logic

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 461

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

TimerModeZx =
Enable PhPh or
Ph-E PhPh
PPZx AND tPPZx
OR AND
AND t
PEZx
AND tPEZx OR
OR
AND t
AND

BLOCK
VTSZ
BLKZx OR
BLKTRZx
OR TimerLinksZx
LoopLink (tPP-tPE)
ZoneLinkStart LoopLink & ZoneLink
OR
Phase Selection No Links
1st starting zone
External start FALSE (0)
LNKZ2
LNKZx
AND
OR
TimerLinksZx =
LNKZ4 LoopLink & ZoneLink
LNKZ5

EXTNST

IEC12000139-4-en.vsdx
IEC12000139 V4 EN-US

Figure 212: Logic for linking of timers

462 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

15 ms
TZx
t TRIPZx
AND

TRL1Zx
OR AND
BLOCK
VTSZ TRL2Zx
OR AND
BLKZx
TRL3Zx
AND
15 ms
L1Zx
t STL1Zx
AND
15 ms
L2Zx
t STL2Zx
AND
15 ms
t STL3Zx
AND

PPZx 15 ms
PEZx OR t STARTZx
AND

15 ms
NDZx
t STNDZx
AND

IEC12000138-2-en.vsd

IEC12000138 V2 EN-US

Figure 213: Start and trip outputs

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 463

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

15 ms
OR t STPE
AND

15 ms
OR t
AND

15 ms
OR t STNDL2
PHSL1L2 AND

15 ms
OR t STNDL3
AND

15 ms
OR t STPP
AND

BLOCK STARTND
OR
VTSZ OR

STPHS
STNDPE
AND

IEC12000133-3-en.vsdx
IEC12000133 V3 EN-US

Figure 214: Additional start outputs 1

464 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

PHSL1
FWL1 AND
15 ms
FWL2 AND OR t
AND

FWL3 AND 15 ms
PHSL1L2 OR t STFWL2
AND
FWL1L2 AND
PHSL2L3 15 ms
FWL2L3 AND OR t STFWL3
AND
FWL3L1 AND
OR
STFWPE
IN present AND

STFW1PH
=1
BLOCK
VTSZ OR

STFW2PH
=2

STFW3PH
=3

IEC12000134-2-en.vsd
IEC12000134 V2 EN-US

Figure 215: Additional start outputs 2

PHSL1
RVL1 AND
15 ms
RVL2 AND OR t
AND

RVL3 AND 15 ms
PHSL1L2 OR t STRVL2
AND
RVL1L2 AND
PHSL2L3 15 ms
RVL2L3 AND OR t STRVL3
AND
RVL3L1 AND
OR
STRVPE
IN present AND

BLOCK
VTSZ OR

IEC12000141-2-en.vsdx
IEC12000141 V2 EN-US

Figure 216: Additional start outputs 3

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 465

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.12.7.10 Measurement

Measurement supervision SEMOD54417-130 v4

The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and
further process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-
processing blocks. The number of processed alternate measuring quantities
depends on the type of IED and built-in options.

The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different

locations:

• Locally by means of the local HMI

• Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM600 or over the station bus
• Internally by connecting the analogue output signals to the Disturbance Report
function

Zero point clamping GUID-4894EF16-3376-48EB-863F-9CE14487ACAB v1

Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the
noise in the input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a setting
(XZeroDb where X equals Z).

Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity SEMOD54417-140 v5

Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in the function
block by means of four defined operating thresholds, see figure 217. The
monitoring has two different modes of operating:

• Overfunction, when the measured quantity exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or
High-high limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
• Underfunction, when the measured quantity decreases under the Low limit
(XLowLim) or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.

X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 217.

466 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Y = Magnitude of the Measured Quantity

X_RANGE = 3
High-high limit

X_RANGE= 1 Hysteresis
High limit

X_RANGE=0

X_RANGE=0 t

Low limit

X_RANGE=2

Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4

IEC05000657-3-en.vsdx
IEC05000657 V3 EN-US

Figure 217: Presentation of operating limits

Each analogue output has one corresponding supervision level output

(X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1:
High limit exceeded, 3: High-high limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below
Low-low limit).

The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 217.

The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference
between the operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for
each measuring channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating
values within one channel.

Actual value of the measured quantity SEMOD54417-150 v4

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The
measurement is continuous for each measured quantity separately, but the reporting
of the value to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The
following basic reporting modes are available:

• Cyclic reporting (Cyclic)

• Amplitude dead-band supervision (Dead band)
• Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)
• Amplitude Deadband and 5s cyclic
• Amplitude Deadband and 30s cyclic
• Amplitude Deadband and 1min cyclic

Cyclic reporting SEMOD54417-158 v3

The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting

(XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of amplitude or
integral dead-band reporting.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 467

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

In addition to the normal cyclic reporting the IED also report spontaneously when
measured value passes any of the defined threshold limits.

Y
Value Reported Value Reported
Value Reported Value Reported
(1st)

Y3 Value Reported
Y2 Y4

Y1 Y5

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)

t
Value 1

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

Value 5
(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt IEC05000500-2-en.vsdx

IEC05000500 V2 EN-US

Figure 218: Periodic reporting

Amplitude dead-band supervision SEMOD54417-163 v6

If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the
change is larger than the ±ΔY pre-defined limits that are set by user (XDbRepInt),
then the measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level. This limits the
information flow to a minimum necessary. Figure 219 shows an example with the
amplitude dead-band supervision. The picture is simplified: the process is not
continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle
from each other.

468 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Value Reported
Y

Value Reported Value Reported

Value Reported
(1st)
Y3 Y
Y
Y2 Y
Y
Y
Y
Y1

IEC99000529-2-en.vsdx

IEC99000529 V2 EN-US

Figure 219: Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting

After the new value is reported, the ±ΔY limits for dead-band are automatically set
around it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more
than defined by the ±ΔY set limits.

Integral dead-band reporting SEMOD54417-167 v4

The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-
set limit (XDbRepInt), figure 220, where an example of reporting with integral
dead-band supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not
continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle
from each other.

The last value reported, Y1 in figure 220 serves as a basic value for further
measurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly
measured value and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The
absolute values of these integral values are added until the pre-set value is
exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base for
the following measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).

The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals

with small variations that can last for relatively long periods.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 469

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Y A1 >=
A >= pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value pre-set value
Y3 A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
Y2 A1 A2
A4 A6
Value Reported Y4 A3 A5 A7
Value
(1st) Value
A Reported Y5
Reported Value
Reported Value
Y1 Reported

t
IEC99000530-2-en.vsdx

IEC99000530 V2 EN-US

Figure 220: Reporting with integral dead-band supervision

Measurement ZMMMXU GUID-2DB6F5A4-A3C2-4BBA-8327-393B7F89EDC6 v4

The magnitude and angle of the impedance for each phase-to-earth and phase-to-
phase loop are available on local HMI, monitoring tools within PCM600 or to the
station level, for example, via IEC61850.

Phase-to-earth impedance measurement is calculated based on UL1/ IL1 , UL2 / IL2 ,

UL3 / IL3 and phase-to-phase impedance is calculated based on
U L1 
 UL 2 / IL1  IL 2  , UL2 
 UL 3 / IL 2  IL 3  , UL3 
 UL1 / IL 3  IL1  , where
ULX and ILX are phase-to-earth voltage and phase current.
When the operating current is too low, the impedance measurement can be
erroneous. To avoid such error, minimum operating current will be checked. For
phase-earth currents or phase-phase currents lower than 2% of IBase, the resistance
and reactance of the impedance are forced to 99 999 ohm, corresponding to a
magnitude at 141419 (99 999*√2) ohm and an angle at 45 degree.

470 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

8.12.8 Technical data

GUID-6C2EF52A-8166-4A23-9861-38931682AA7D v7

Table 219: ZMFPDIS, ZMFCPDIS technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones 3 selectable -
directions, 3 fixed
directions
Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph (5-6000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
and Ph-E
Positive sequence reactance (0.01 - 3000.00) Pseudo
reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop ohm/p continuous ramp:
±2.0% of set value
Positive sequence resistance (0.00 - 1000.00) Conditions:
reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop ohm/p Voltage range: Ramp of shots:
Zero sequence reactance reach (0.01 - 9000.00) (0.1-1.1) x Ur ±2.0% of set value
ohm/p Current range: Conditions:
(0.5-30) x Ir IEC 60255-121
Zero sequence resistive reach (0.00 - 3000.00) Angle: At 0 point B
ohm/p degrees and 85
Fault resistance reach, Ph-E (0.01 -9000.00) ohm/l degrees
and Ph-Ph IEC 60255-121
points A,B,C,D,E
Dynamic overreach < 5% at 85 degrees -
measured with CVTs
and 0.5 < SIR < 30,
IEC 60255-121
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Directional blinders Forward: -15 – 120 Pseudo continuous ramp:
degrees ±2.0 degrees, IEC 60255-121
Reverse: 165 – -60
degrees
Resistance determining the load (0.01 - 5000.00) Pseudo Ramp of shots:
impedance area - forward ohm/p continuous ramp: ±5.0% of set value
±2.0% of set value Conditions:
Conditions: Tested at ArgLd =
Tested at ArgLd = 30 degrees
30 degrees
Angle determining the load 5 - 70 degrees Pseudo continuous ramp:
impedance area ±2.0 degrees
Conditions:
Tested at RLdFw = 20 ohm/p
Definite time delay to trip, Ph-E (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% of set value or ±35 ms whichever
and Ph-Ph operation is greater
Operate time 16 ms typically, IEC -
60255-121
Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach Min. = 20 ms -
Max. = 35 ms

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 471

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.13 Power swing detection ZMRPSB IP14499-1 v3

8.13.1 Identification
M14853-1 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Power swing detection ZMRPSB 68

Zpsb

SYMBOL-EE V1 EN-US

8.13.2 Functionality M13873-3 v12

Power swings may occur after disconnection of heavy loads or trip of big
generation plants.

Power swing detection function (ZMRPSB ) is used to detect power swings and
initiate block of all distance protection zones. Occurrence of earth-fault currents
during a power swing inhibits the ZMRPSB function, to allow fault clearance.

8.13.3 Function block M13884-3 v5

ZMRPSB
I3P* START
U3P* ZOUT
BLOCK ZIN
BLKI01
BLKI02
BLK1PH
REL1PH
BLK2PH
REL2PH
I0CHECK
TRSP
EXTERNAL

IEC06000264-2-en.vsd
IEC06000264 V2 EN-US

Figure 221: ZMRPSB function block

8.13.4 Signals
PID-3663-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 220: ZMRPSB Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
Table continues on next page

472 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Name Type Default Description

BLKI01 BOOLEAN 0 Block inhibit of start output for slow swing
condition
BLKI02 BOOLEAN 0 Block inhibit of start output for subsequent
residual current detection
BLK1PH BOOLEAN 0 Block one-out-of-three-phase operating mode
REL1PH BOOLEAN 0 Release one-out-of-three-phase operating mode
BLK2PH BOOLEAN 0 Block two-out-of-three-phase operating mode
REL2PH BOOLEAN 0 Release two-out-of-three-phase operating mode
I0CHECK BOOLEAN 0 Residual current (3I0) detection used to inhibit
start output
TRSP BOOLEAN 0 Single-pole tripping command issued by tripping
function
EXTERNAL BOOLEAN 0 Input for external detection of power swing

PID-3663-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 221: ZMRPSB Output signals

Name Type Description
START BOOLEAN Power swing detected
ZOUT BOOLEAN Measured impedance within outer impedance
boundary
ZIN BOOLEAN Measured impedance within inner impedance
boundary

8.13.5 Settings
PID-3663-SETTINGS v6

Table 222: ZMRPSB Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
X1InFw 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Inner reactive boundary, forward
R1LIn 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Line resistance for inner characteristic
angle
R1FInFw 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance coverage to inner
resistive line, forward
X1InRv 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Inner reactive boundary, reverse
R1FInRv 0.01 - 1000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance line to inner resistive
boundary, reverse
OperationLdCh Off - - On Operation of load discrimination
On characteristic
RLdOutFw 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Outer resistive load boundary, forward
ArgLd 5 - 70 Deg 1 25 Load angle determining load impedance
area
RLdOutRv 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Outer resistive load boundary, reverse
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 473

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

kLdRFw 0.50 - 0.90 Mult 0.01 0.75 Multiplication factor for inner resistive
load boundary, forward
kLdRRv 0.50 - 0.90 Mult 0.01 0.75 Multiplication factor for inner resistive
load boundary, reverse
tEF 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Timer for overcoming single-pole
reclosing dead time
IMinOpPE 5 - 30 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate current in % of IBase

Table 223: ZMRPSB Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tP1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.045 Timer for detection of initial power swing
tP2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.015 Timer for detection of subsequent power
swings
tW 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.250 Waiting timer for activation of tP2 timer
tH 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 Timer for holding power swing START
output
tR1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Timer giving delay to inhibit by the
residual current
tR2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Timer giving delay to inhibit at very slow
swing

Table 224: ZMRPSB Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.13.6 Operation principle

M13877-4 v4

Power swing detection (ZMRPSB ) function comprises an inner and an outer

quadrilateral measurement characteristic with load encroachment, as shown in
figure 222.

Its principle of operation is based on the measurement of the time it takes for a
power swing transient impedance to pass through the impedance area between the
outer and the inner characteristics. Power swings are identified by transition times
longer than a transition time set on corresponding timers. The impedance
measuring principle is the same as that used for the distance protection zones. The
impedance and the characteristic passing times are measured in all three phases
separately.

One-out-of-three or two-out-of-three operating modes can be selected according to

the specific system operating conditions.

474 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

X1OutFw jX ZL R1LIn
X1InFw DFw

j
DRv
R1FInRv R1FInFw
DFw
ArgLd j

ArgLd
DRv
DFw

DFw

R
DFw
DRv

RLdInRv RLdInFw
DFw

DRv
RLdOutRv RLdOutFw

j DRv X1InRv
X1OutRv

IEC09000222_1_en.vsd
IEC09000222 V1 EN-US

Figure 222: Operating characteristic for ZMRPSB function (setting parameters

in italic)

The impedance measurement within ZMRPSB function is performed by solving

equation 120 and equation 121 (n = 1, 2, 3 for each corresponding phase L1, L2
and L3).

æ ULn ö
Re çç ÷÷ £ Rset
è I Ln ø
EQUATION1183 V2 EN-US (Equation 120)

æ ULn ö
Imçç ÷÷ £ Xset
è ILn ø
EQUATION1184 V2 EN-US (Equation 121)

The Rset and Xset are R and X boundaries.

8.13.6.1 Resistive reach in forward direction M13877-6 v3

To avoid load encroachment, the resistive reach is limited in forward direction by

setting the parameter RLdOutFw which is the outer resistive load boundary value
while the inner resistive boundary is calculated according to equation 122.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 475

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

RLdInFw = kLdRFw·RLdOutFw
EQUATION1185 V2 EN-US (Equation 122)

where:
kLdRFw is a settable multiplication factor less than 1

The slope of the load encroachment inner and outer boundary is defined by setting
the parameter ArgLd.

The load encroachment in the fourth quadrant uses the same settings as in the first
quadrant (same ArgLd and RLdOutFw and calculated value RLdInFw).

The quadrilateral characteristic in the first quadrant is tilted to get a better

adaptation to the distance measuring zones. The angle is the same as the line angle
and derived from the setting of the reactive reach inner boundary X1InFw and the
line resistance for the inner boundary R1LIn. The fault resistance coverage for the
inner boundary is set by the parameter R1FInFw.

From the setting parameter RLdOutFw and the calculated value RLdInFw a
distance between the inner and outer boundary, DFw, is calculated. This value is
valid for R direction in first and fourth quadrant and for X direction in first and
second quadrant.

8.13.6.2 Resistive reach in reverse direction M13877-15 v3

To avoid load encroachment in reverse direction, the resistive reach is limited by

setting the parameter RLdOutRv for the outer boundary of the load encroachment
zone. The distance to the inner resistive load boundary RLdInRv is determined by
using the setting parameter kLdRRv in equation 123.

RLdInRv = kLdRRv·RLdOutRv
EQUATION1187 V2 EN-US (Equation 123)

where:
kLdRRv is a settable multiplication factor less than 1

From the setting parameter RLdOutRv and the calculated value RLdInRv, a
distance between the inner and outer boundary, DRv, is calculated. This value is
valid for R direction in second and third quadrant and for X direction in third and
fourth quadrant.

The inner resistive characteristic in the second quadrant outside the load
encroachment part corresponds to the setting parameter R1FInRv for the inner
boundary. The outer boundary is internally calculated as the sum of DRv+R1FInRv.

476 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

The inner resistive characteristic in the third quadrant outside the load
encroachment zone consist of the sum of the settings R1FInRv and the line
resistance R1LIn. The argument of the tilted lines outside the load encroachment is
the same as the tilted lines in the first quadrant. The distance between the inner and
outer boundary is the same as for the load encroachment in reverse direction, that is
DRv.

8.13.6.3 Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction M13877-20 v3

The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in forward direction correspond to
the setting parameter X1InFw and the outer boundary is defined as X1InFw + DFw,

where:
DFw = RLdOutFw - KLdRFw · RLdOutFw

The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in reverse direction correspond to the
setting parameter X1InRv for the inner boundary and the outer boundary is defined
as X1InRv + DRv.

where:
DRv = RLdOutRv - KLdRRv · RLdOutRv

8.13.6.4 Basic detection logic M13877-24 v7

The operation of the Power swing detection ZMRPSB is only released if the
magnitude of the current is above the setting of the min operating current,
IMinOpPE.

ZMRPSB function can operate in two operating modes:

• The 1 out of 3 operating mode is based on detection of power swing in any of

the three phases. Figure 223 presents a composition of an internal detection
signal DET-L1 in this particular phase.
• The 2 out of 3 operating mode is based on detection of power swing in at least
two out of three phases. Figure 224 presents a composition of the detection
signals DET1of3 and DET2of3.

Signals ZOUTLn (outer boundary) and ZINLn (inner boundary) in figure 223 are
related to the operation of the impedance measuring elements in each phase
separately (n represents the corresponding L1, L2 and L3). They are internal
signals, calculated by ZMRPSB function.

The tP1 timer in figure 223 serve as detection of initial power swings, which are
usually not as fast as the later swings are. The tP2 timer become activated for the
detection of the consecutive swings, if the measured impedance exit the operate
area and returns within the time delay, set on the tW waiting timer. The upper part

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 477

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

of figure 223 (internal input signal ZOUTL1, ZINL1, AND-gates and tP-timers)
are duplicated for phase L2 and L3. All tP1 and tP2 timers in the figure have the
same settings.

ZOUTL1 AND
0-tP1
ZINL1 0 OR
-loop
0-tP2
-loop
AND
0
OR DET-L1
AND AND

ZOUTL2 OR
ZOUTL3

detected 0
0-tW

IEC05000113-2-en.vsd
IEC05000113 V2 EN-US

Figure 223: Detection of power swing in phase L1

DET-L1
DET-L2 DET1of3 - int.
>1
DET-L3

&

DET2of3 - int.
& >1

&

IEC01000057-2-en.vsd
IEC01000057-TIFF V2 EN-US

Figure 224: Detection of power swing for 1-of-3 and 2-of-3 operating mode

478 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

ZOUTL1 ZOUT
OR
ZOUTL2 ZINL1
ZIN
ZOUTL3 AND ZINL2 OR

ZINL3
tEF
TRSP
t AND

I0CHECK

10 ms
AND t
BLKI02 OR

tR1
AND t INHIBIT
OR
-loop
tR2
BLKI01 AND t
BLOCK
-loop
DET1of3 - int.
REL1PH
AND
BLK1PH
tH
DET2of3 - int. OR t
REL2PH
AND
BLK2PH OR START
AND
EXTERNAL

en05000114.vsd
IEC05000114 V1 EN-US

Figure 225: Simplified block diagram for ZMRPSB function

8.13.6.5 Operating and inhibit conditions M13877-38 v4

Figure 225 presents a simplified logic diagram for the Power swing detection
function ZMRPSB. The internal signals DET1of3 and DET2of3 relate to the
detailed logic diagrams in figure 223 and figure 224 respectively.

Selection of the operating mode is possible by the proper configuration of the

functional input signals REL1PH, BLK1PH, REL2PH, and BLK2PH.

The load encroachment characteristic can be switched off by setting the parameter
OperationLdCh = Off, but notice that the DFw and DRv will still be calculated from
RLdOutFw and RLdOutRv. The characteristic will in this case be only
quadrilateral.

There are four different ways to form the internal INHIBIT signal:

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 479

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

• Logical 1 on functional input BLOCK inhibits the output START signal

instantaneously.
• The INHIBIT internal signal is activated, if the power swing has been detected
and the measured impedance remains within its operate characteristic for the
time, which is longer than the time delay set on tR2 timer. It is possible to
disable this condition by connecting the logical 1 signal to the BLKI01
functional input.
• The INHIBIT internal signal is activated after the time delay, set on tR1 timer,
if an earth-fault appears during the power swing (input IOCHECK is high) and
the power swing has been detected before the earth-fault (activation of the
signal I0CHECK). It is possible to disable this condition by connecting the
logical 1 signal to the BLKI02 functional input.
• The INHIBIT logical signals becomes logical 1, if the functional input
I0CHECK appears within the time delay, set on tEF timer and the impedance
has been seen within the outer characteristic of ZMRPSB operate
characteristic in all three phases. This function prevents the operation of
ZMRPSB function in cases, when the circuit breaker closes onto persistent
single-phase fault after single-phase autoreclosing dead time, if the initial
single-phase fault and single-phase opening of the circuit breaker causes the
power swing in the remaining two phases.

8.13.7 Technical data

M16036-1 v10

Table 225: ZMRPSB technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Reactive reach (0.10-3000.00) W/phase ±2.0% static accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
Resistive reach (0.10–1000.00) W/loop
degrees
Power swing detection operate (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±10 ms whichever
time is greater
Second swing reclaim operate (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever
time is greater
Minimum operate current (5-30)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

8.14 Automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF SEMOD153633-1 v3

8.14.1 Identification
SEMOD155890-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF - -

480 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

8.14.2 Functionality SEMOD153644-5 v9

Automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF is a function that gives an

instantaneous trip when closing the breaker onto a fault. A dead-line detection
check is provided to activate ZCVPSOF when the line is de-energized.

Mho distance protections cannot operate for switch onto fault conditions when the
phase voltages are close to zero. An additional logic based on UI Level is used for
this purpose.

ZCVPSOF is a complementary function to the distance protection function. It is

enabled for operation either by the closing command to the circuit breaker
(normally closed auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker) to the BC input or
automatically by the dead-line detection. Once enabled, it remains active for tSOTF
duration after the enabling signal is reset. The protection function can be enabled
for tripping during the activated time by connecting the functions included in the
terminal to the ZACC input. Therefore, the start of the selected protection functions
connected to ZACC during the enabled condition results in an immediate TRIP
output from the function.

8.14.3 Function block SEMOD156265-4 v6

IEC06000459 V3 EN-US

Figure 226: ZCVPSOF function block

8.14.4 Signals SEMOD156281-1 v2

PID-3875-INPUTSIGNALS v10

Table 226: ZCVPSOF Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current DFT
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage DFT
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
START_DLYD BOOLEAN 0 Start from function to be accelerated with delay
by SOTF
BC BOOLEAN 0 External enabling of SOTF
ZACC BOOLEAN 0 Distance zone to be accelerated by SOTF

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 481

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

PID-3875-OUTPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 227: ZCVPSOF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip output

8.14.5 Settings IP15016-1 v2

PID-3875-SETTINGS v10

Table 228: ZCVPSOF Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
AutoInitMode DLD disabled - - DLD disabled Automatic switch onto fault initialization
Voltage
Current
Current & Voltage
Mode Impedance - - UILevel Mode of operation of SOTF Function
UILevel
UILvl&Imp
IPh< 1 - 100 %IB 1 20 Current level for detection of dead line in
% of IBase
UPh< 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Voltage level for detection of dead line in
% of UBase
tDuration 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Time delay for UI detection (s)
tSOTF 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Drop off delay time of switch onto fault
function
tDLD 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Delay time for activation of dead line
detection
tOperate 0.03 - 120.00 s 0.01 0.03 Time delay to operate of switch onto
fault function

Table 229: ZCVPSOF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.14.6 Monitored data

PID-3875-MONITOREDDATA v7

Table 230: ZCVPSOF Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A Current in phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current in phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current in phase L3
Table continues on next page

482 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UL1 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L1
UL2 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L2
UL3 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L3

8.14.7 Operation principle SEMOD153665-4 v8

The automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF can be activated externally (by
the breaker-closed input) or internally (automatically) with the dead-line detection
using the UI level-based logic. When the setting AutoInitMode is DLD disabled,
ZCVPSOF is activated by an external binary input BC. When the setting
AutoInitMode is set to Voltage, Current or Current & Voltage modes, ZCVPSOF is
activated by the dead-line detection.

The activation from the dead-line detection function is released if the internal
signal DeadLine from the UILevel Detector function is activated at the same
time as the inputs ZACC and START_DLYD are not activated at least for the
duration of tDLD. The internal signal DeadLine from the UILevel Detector
function is activated under any of the following conditions:
• If all three-phase currents are below the setting IPh< and the AutoInitMode
setting is set to Current
• If all three-phase voltages are below the setting UPh< and the AutoInitMode
setting is set to Voltage
• If all three-phase currents and voltages are below the settings IPh< and UPh<
and the AutoInitMode setting is set to Current & Voltage

Once the dead line drops off after energization or once BC drops off, the activated
signal is extended for the duration of tSOTF.

The internal signal SOTFUILevel is activated if the phase voltage is below the
set UPh< and the corresponding phase current is above the set IPh< for a time
longer than the duration set by tDuration.

To get the TRIP signal, one of the different operate modes must also be selected
with the Mode parameter:
• Mode = Impedance; TRIP is released if either the ZACC input (connected
normally to a nondirectional distance protection start zone) or the
START_DLYD input is activated. If START_DLD is activated, TRIP is
released after a delay of tOperate.
• Mode = UILevel; TRIP is released if UILevel detector is activated
• Mode = UILvl&Imp; TRIP is released based either on the impedance-
measured criteria or UILevel detection

The ZCVPSOF function can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 483

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

The measured phase voltages and currents are provided as service values.
BLOCK
15ms
BC TRIP
& t

ZACC tSOTF
tDLD t
START_DLYD ≥1
& t

≥1
tOperate
t

I3P
U3P

DeadLine
IPh< UILevel tDuration
Detector t
UPh<

AutoInitMode

&
Mode = Impedance

SOTFUILevel
& ≥1
Mode = UILevel

≥1
&
Mode = UILvl&Imp

IEC07000084 V3 EN-US

Figure 227: Simplified logic diagram for Automatic switch onto fault logic

8.14.8 Technical data SEMOD173230-1 v1

M16043-1 v12

Table 231: ZCVPSOF technical data

Parameter Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, detection of dead line (1–100)% of ±0.5% of Ur
UBase
Operate current, detection of dead line (1–100)% of ±1.0% of Ir
IBase
Time delay to operate for the switch onto fault (0.03-120.00) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms
function whichever is greater
Time delay for UI detection (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms
whichever is greater
Delay time for activation of dead line detection (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms
whichever is greater
Drop-off delay time of switch onto fault function (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms
whichever is greater

8.15 Power swing logic PSLPSCH SEMOD153597-1 v3

484 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

8.15.1 Identification
SEMOD175682-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Power swing logic PSLPSCH - -

8.15.2 Functionality SEMOD131350-4 v4

Power Swing Logic (PSLPSCH) is a complementary function to Power Swing

Detection (ZMRPSB) function. It provides possibility for selective tripping of
faults on power lines during system oscillations (power swings or pole slips), when
the distance protection function should normally be blocked. The complete logic
consists of two different parts:

• Communication and tripping part: provides selective tripping on the basis of

special distance protection zones and a scheme communication logic, which
are not blocked during the system oscillations.
• Blocking part: blocks unwanted operation of instantaneous distance protection
zone 1 for oscillations, which are initiated by faults and their clearing on the
adjacent power lines and other primary elements.

8.15.3 Function block SEMOD171917-4 v3

PSLPSCH
BLOCK TRIP
STZMUR STZMURPS
STZMOR BLKZMUR
STPSD BLKZMOR
STDEF CS
STZMPSD
CACC
AR1P1
CSUR
CR

IEC07000026-3-en.vsd
IEC07000026 V3 EN-US

Figure 228: PSLPSCH function block

8.15.4 Signals
PID-3664-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 232: PSLPSCH Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
STZMUR BOOLEAN 0 Start of the underreaching zone
STZMOR BOOLEAN 0 Start of the overreaching zone
STPSD BOOLEAN 0 Power swing detected
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 485

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Type Default Description

STDEF BOOLEAN 0 Start from Earth Fault Protection in forward or
reverse direction
STZMPSD BOOLEAN 0 Operation of Power Swing Detection external
characteristic
CACC BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching ZM zone to be accelerated
AR1P1 BOOLEAN 0 Single pole auto-reclosing in progress
CSUR BOOLEAN 0 Carrier send by the underreaching power-swing
zone
CR BOOLEAN 0 Carrier receive signal during power swing
detection operation

PID-3664-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 233: PSLPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip through Power Swing Logic
STZMURPS BOOLEAN Start of Underreaching zone controlled by PSL to
be used in configuration
BLKZMUR BOOLEAN Block trip of underreaching impedance zone
BLKZMOR BOOLEAN Block trip of overreaching distance protection
zones
CS BOOLEAN Carrier send signal controlled by the power swing

8.15.5 Settings
PID-3664-SETTINGS v6

Table 234: PSLPSCH Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
tDZ 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.050 Permitted max oper time diff between
higher and lower zone
tDZMUR 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Delay for oper of underreach zone with
detected diff in oper time
tCS 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Conditional timer for sending the CS at
power swings
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Conditional timer for tripping at power
swings
tBlkTr 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Timer for blocking the overreaching
zones trip

486 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

8.15.6 Operation principle

8.15.6.1 Communication and tripping logic SEMOD131352-4 v2

Communication and tripping logic as used by the power swing distance protection
zones is schematically presented in figure 229.

STDEF
AR1P1 &

STPSD tCS
CS
BLOCK & t &

CSUR
BLKZMPS
tBlkTr &
tTrip t
t

CACC TRIP
>1
CR &

en06000236.vsd
IEC06000236 V1 EN-US

Figure 229: Simplified logic diagram – power swing communication and tripping
logic

The complete logic remains blocked as long as there is a logical one on the
BLOCK functional input signal. Presence of the logical one on the STDEF
functional input signal also blocks the logic as long as this block is not released by
the logical one on the AR1P1 functional input signal. The functional output signal
BLKZMPS remains logical one as long as the function is not blocked externally
(BLOCK is logical zero) and the earth-fault is detected on protected line (STDEF
is logical one), which is connected in three-phase mode (AR1P1 is logical zero).
Timer tBlkTr prolongs the duration of this blocking condition, if the measured
impedance remains within the operate area of the Power Swing Detection
(ZMRPSB) function (STPSD input active). The BLKZMPS can be used to block
the operation of the power-swing zones.

Logical one on functional input CSUR, which is normally connected to the TRIP
functional output of a power swing carrier sending zone, activates functional output
CS, if the function is not blocked by one of the above conditions. It also activates
the TRIP functional output.

Initiation of the CS functional output is possible only, if the STPSD input has been
active longer than the time delay set on the security timer tCS.

Simultaneous presence of the functional input signals PLTR_CRD and CR (local

trip condition) also activates the TRIP functional output, if the function is not

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 487

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

blocked by one of the above conditions and the STPSD signal has been present
longer then the time delay set on the trip timer tTrip.

8.15.6.2 Blocking logic SEMOD131352-14 v2

Figure 230 presents the logical circuits, which control the operation of the
underreaching zone (zone 1) at power swings, caused by the faults and their
clearance on the remote power lines.

&

BLKZMH
&
STZML tZL
STZMLL
BLOCK & t >1
&
STMZH tDZ
STZMPSD & t
>1
STPSD

&
-loop

en06000237.vsd
IEC06000237 V1 EN-US

Figure 230: Control of underreaching distance protection (Zone 1) at power

swings caused by the faults and their clearance on adjacent lines
and other system elements

The logic is disabled by a logical one on functional input BLOCK. It can start only
if the following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:

• STPSD functional input signal must be a logical zero. This means, that Power
swing detection (ZMRPSB) function must not detect power swinging over the
protected power line.
• STZMPSD functional input must be a logical one. This means that the
impedance must be detected within the external boundary of ZMRPSB
function.
• STZMOR functional input must be a logical one. This means that the fault
must be detected by the overreaching distance protection zone, for example
zone 2.

The STZMURPS functional output, which can be used in complete terminal logic
instead of a normal distance protection zone 1, becomes active under the following
conditions:

488 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

• If the STZMUR signal appears at the same time as the STZMOR or if it

appears with a time delay, which is shorter than the time delay set on timer
tDZ.
• If the STZMUR signal appears after the STZMOR signal with a time delay
longer than the delay set on the tDZ timer, and remains active longer than the
time delay set on the tZL timer.

The BLKZMOR functional output signal can be used to block the operation of the
higher distance protection zone, if the fault has moved into the zone 1 operate area
after tDZ time delay.
SEMOD171935-5 v5

Table 235: PSLPSCH technical data

Function
Permitted maximum
operating time difference
between higher and lower
zone
Delay for operation of
underreach zone with
detected difference in
operating time
Conditional timer for sending
the CS at power swings
Conditional timer for tripping
at power swings
Timer for blocking the
overreaching zones trip
Range or value Accuracy
(0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms
whichever is greater
(0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms
whichever is greater
(0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms
whichever is greater
(0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms
whichever is greater
(0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms
whichever is greater

8.16 Pole slip protection PSPPPAM SEMOD156709-1 v2

8.16.1 Identification
SEMOD158949-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Pole slip protection PSPPPAM Ucos 78

8.16.2 Functionality
SEMOD143246-17 v7

Sudden events in an electric power system such as large changes in load, fault
occurrence or fault clearance, can cause power oscillations referred to as power
swings. In a non-recoverable situation, the power swings become so severe that the
synchronism is lost, a condition referred to as pole slipping. The main purpose of

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 489

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

the pole slip protection (PSPPPAM) is to detect, evaluate, and take the required
action for pole slipping occurrences in the power system.

8.16.3 Function block SEMOD172911-4 v3

PSPPPAM
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLKGEN START
BLKMOTOR ZONE1
EXTZONE1 ZONE2
GEN
MOTOR
SFREQ
SLIPZOHM
SLIPZPER
UCOS
UCOSPER

IEC10000045-1-en.vsd
IEC10000045 V1 EN-US

Figure 231: PSPPPAM function block

8.16.4 Signals
PID-3526-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 236: PSPPPAM Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current group connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage group connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKGEN BOOLEAN 0 Block operation in generating direction
BLKMOTOR BOOLEAN 0 Block operation in motor direction
EXTZONE1 BOOLEAN 0 Extension of zone1 with zone2 region

PID-3526-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 237: PSPPPAM Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip1 after the N1Limit slip in zone1
TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip2 after the N2Limit slip in zone2
START BOOLEAN Common start signal
ZONE1 BOOLEAN First slip in zone1 region
ZONE2 BOOLEAN First slip in zone2 region
GEN BOOLEAN Generator is faster than the system
MOTOR BOOLEAN Generator is slower than the system
Table continues on next page

490 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Name Type Description

SFREQ REAL Slip frequency
SLIPZOHM REAL Slip impedance in ohms
SLIPZPER REAL Slip impedance in percent of ZBase
UCOS REAL UCosPhi voltage
UCOSPER REAL UCosPhi voltage in percent of UBase

8.16.5 Settings
PID-3526-SETTINGS v3

Table 238: PSPPPAM Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation On / Off
On
OperationZ1 Off - - On Operation Zone1 On / Off
On
OperationZ2 Off - - On Operation Zone2 On / Off
On
ImpedanceZA 0.00 - 1000.00 % 0.01 10.00 Forward impedance in % of Zbase
ImpedanceZB 0.00 - 1000.00 % 0.01 10.00 Reverse impedance in % of Zbase
ImpedanceZC 0.00 - 1000.00 % 0.01 10.00 Impedance of zone1 limit in % of Zbase
AnglePhi 72.00 - 90.00 Deg 0.01 85.00 Angle of the slip impedance line
StartAngle 0.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 110.0 Rotor angle for the start signal
TripAngle 0.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 90.0 Rotor angle for the trip1 and trip2 signals
N1Limit 1 - 20 - 1 1 Count limit for the trip1 signal
N2Limit 1 - 20 - 1 3 Count limit for the trip2 signal

Table 239: PSPPPAM Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ResetTime 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time without slip to reset all signals

Table 240: PSPPPAM Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MeasureMode PosSeq - - PosSeq Measuring mode (PosSeq, L1L2, L2L3,
L1L2 L3L1)
L2L3
L3L1
InvertCTcurr No - - No Invert current direction
Yes
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 491

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.16.6 Monitored data

PID-3526-MONITOREDDATA v3

Table 241: PSPPPAM Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
SFREQ REAL - Hz Slip frequency
SLIPZOHM REAL - Ohm Slip impedance in ohms
SLIPZPER REAL - % Slip impedance in
percent of ZBase
UCOS REAL - kV UCosPhi voltage
UCOSPER REAL - % UCosPhi voltage in
percent of UBase

8.16.7 Operation principle SEMOD155755-4 v4

If the generator is faster than the power system, the rotor movement in the
impedance and voltage diagram is from right to left and generating is signaled. If
the generator is slower than the power system, the rotor movement is from left to
right and motoring is signaled (the power system drives the generator as if it were a
motor).

The movements in the impedance plane can be seen in Figure 232. The transient
behavior is described by the transient EMF's EA and EB, and by X'd, XT and the
transient system impedance ZS.

492 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Zone 1 Zone 2

EB X’d XT XS EA

IED
B A

jX

XS

Pole slip
impedance XT
d Apparent generator
movement impedance R

X’d

IEC06000437_2_en.vsd
IEC06000437 V2 EN-US

Figure 232: Movements in the impedance plain

where:
X'd = transient reactance of the generator

XT = short-circuit reactance of the step-up transformer

ZS = impedance of the power system A

The detection of rotor angle is enabled when:

• the minimum current exceeds 0.10 IN (IN is IBase parameter set under general
setting).
• the maximum voltage falls below 0.92 UBase
• the voltage Ucosφ (the voltage in phase with the generator current) has an
angular velocity of 0.2...8 Hz and
• the corresponding direction is not blocked.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 493

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

en07000004.vsd
IEC07000004 V1 EN-US

Figure 233: Different generator quantities as function of the angle between the
equivalent generators

An alarm is given when movement of the rotor is detected and the rotor angle
exceeds the angle set for 'WarnAngle'.

Slipping is detected when:

• a change of rotor angle of min. 50 ms is recognized

• the slip line is crossed between ZA and ZB.

When the impedance crosses the slip line between ZB and ZC it counts as being in
zone 1 and between ZC and ZA in zone 2. The entire distance ZA-ZB becomes zone
1 when signal EXTZONE1 is high (external device detects the direction of the
centre of slipping).

After the first slip, the signals ZONE1 or ZONE2 and – depending on the direction
of slip - either GEN or MOTOR are issued.

Every time pole slipping is detected, the impedance of the point where the slip line
is crossed and the instantaneous slip frequency are displayed as measurements.

Further slips are only detected, if they are in the same direction and if the rate of
rotor movement has reduced in relation to the preceding slip or the slip line is
crossed in the opposite direction outside ZA-ZB. A further slip in the opposite
direction within ZA-ZB resets all the signals and is then signalled itself as a first
slip.

494 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

The TRIP1 tripping command and signal are generated after N1 slips in zone 1,
providing the rotor angle is less than TripAngle. The TRIP2 signal is generated
after N2 slips in zone 2, providing the rotor angle is less than TripAngle.

All signals are reset if:

• the direction of movement reverses

• the rotor angle detector resets without a slip being counted or
• no rotor relative movement was detected during the time ResetTime.

Imin > 0.10 IBase

Ucos< 0.92 UBase AND

START
AND
0.2  Slip.Freq.  8 Hz

  startAngle

ZONE1
AND
Z cross line ZC - ZB

ZONE2
AND
Z cross line ZA - ZC

Counter
a
ab
N1Limit b TRIP1
AND

  tripAngle OR
TRIP

Counter
a
ab
N2Limit b TRIP2
AND

IEC07000005.vsd

IEC07000005 V2 EN-US

Figure 234: Simplified logic diagram for pole slip protection PSPPPAM

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 495

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.16.8 Technical data SEMOD175138-1 v1

GUID-88E02516-1BFE-4075-BEEB-027484814697 v2

Table 242: PSPPPAM technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Impedance reach (0.00 - 1000.00)% of Zbase ±2.0% of Ur/Ir

Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip counters (1 - 20) -

8.17 Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM GUID-667DAF85-B87B-47AA-9EAA-CD349E66F22F v3

8.17.1 Identification
GUID-BF2F1533-BA39-48F0-A55C-0B13A393F780 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM 78

<

8.17.2 Functionality GUID-BF2F7D4C-F579-4EBD-9AFC-7C03296BD5D4 v8

The out-of-step protection (OOSPPAM ) function in the IED can be used for both
generator protection and as well for line protection applications.

The main purpose of the OOSPPAM function is to detect, evaluate, and take the
required action during pole slipping occurrences in the power system.

The OOSPPAM function detects pole slip conditions and trips the generator as fast
as possible, after the first pole-slip if the center of oscillation is found to be in zone
1, which normally includes the generator and its step-up power transformer. If the
center of oscillation is found to be further out in the power system, in zone 2, more
than one pole-slip is usually allowed before the generator-transformer unit is
disconnected. A parameter setting is available to take into account the circuit
breaker opening time. If there are several out-of-step relays in the power system,
then the one which finds the center of oscillation in its zone 1 should operate first.

Two current channels I3P1 and I3P2 are available in OOSPPAM function to allow
the direct connection of two groups of three-phase currents; that may be needed for
very powerful generators, with stator windings split into two groups per phase,
when each group is equipped with current transformers. The protection function
performs a simple summation of the currents of the two channels I3P1 and I3P2.

496 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

8.17.3 Function block GUID-CB98C615-8A93-438D-9DF0-542F333198AC v4

OOSPPAM
I3P1* TRIP
I3P2* TRIPZ1
U3P* TRIPZ2
BLOCK START
BLKGEN GENMODE
BLKMOT MOTMODE
EXTZ1 R
X
SLIPFREQ
ROTORANG
UCOSPHI

IEC12000188-3-en.vsd
IEC12000188 V3 EN-US

Figure 235: OOSPPAM function block

8.17.4 Signals
PID-3539-INPUTSIGNALS v10

Table 243: OOSPPAM Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P1 GROUP - Group connection for three-phase current input 1
SIGNAL
I3P2 GROUP - Group connection for three-phase current input 2
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group connection for three-phase voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKGEN BOOLEAN 0 Block operation in generating direction
BLKMOT BOOLEAN 0 Block operation in motor direction
EXTZ1 BOOLEAN 0 Extension of zone1 reach to zone2 settings

PID-3539-OUTPUTSIGNALS v10

Table 244: OOSPPAM Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip, issued when either zone 1 or zone
2 give trip
TRIPZ1 BOOLEAN Zone 1 trip
TRIPZ2 BOOLEAN Zone 2 trip
START BOOLEAN Set when measured impedance enters lens
characteristic
GENMODE BOOLEAN Generator rotates faster than the system during
pole slip
MOTMODE BOOLEAN Generator rotates slower than the system during
pole slip
R REAL Real part of measured positive-sequence
impedance % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 497

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Type Description

X REAL Imaginary part of measured positive-seq
impedance % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)
SLIPFREQ REAL Slip frequency in Hz
ROTORANG REAL Rotor angle as estimated by the out-of-step
function
UCOSPHI REAL Estimated Ucos(Phi) voltage during pole slip, in V

8.17.5 Settings
PID-3539-SETTINGS v10

Table 245: OOSPPAM Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationZ1 Off - - On Operation Zone1 Off / On
On
ReachZ1 1.00 - 100.00 % ZFw 0.01 50.00 Percentage part of total forward
impedance; defines Z1 reach
OperationZ2 Off - - On Operation Zone2 Off / On
On
tBreaker 0.000 - 1.000 s 0.001 0.040 Breaker opening time; use default 0s
value if it is unknown

Table 246: OOSPPAM Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NoOfSlipsZ1 1 - 20 - 1 1 Number of pole-slips in zone 1 required
to get zone 1 trip
NoOfSlipsZ2 1 - 60 - 1 3 Number of pole-slips in zone 2 required
to get zone 2 trip
tReset 1.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 6.000 Time without any slip required to
completely reset function

Table 247: OOSPPAM Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
ForwardR 0.00 - 1000.00 %ZB 0.01 1.00 Real part of total forward impedance for
Z2, in % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)
ForwardX 0.00 - 1000.00 %ZB 0.01 10.00 Imag. part of total forward impedance for
Z2, in % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)
ReverseR 0.00 - 1000.00 %ZB 0.01 1.00 Real part of source impedance behind
relay, in % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)
ReverseX 0.00 - 1000.00 %ZB 0.01 10.00 Imag. part of source impedance behind
relay, in % of UBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)
InvertCTCurr No - - No Invert current direction
Yes

498 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Table 248: OOSPPAM Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
StartAngle 90.0 - 130.0 Deg 0.1 110.0 Angle between two rotors to get the start
signal, in deg
TripAngle 15.0 - 90.0 Deg 0.1 60.0 Maximum rotor angle to allow trip
signals, in deg

8.17.6 Monitored data

PID-3539-MONITOREDDATA v8

Table 249: OOSPPAM Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CURRENT REAL - A Magnitude of the
measured positive-
sequence current, in A
VOLTAGE REAL - kV Magnitude of the
measured positive-
sequence voltage, in V
R REAL - % Real part of measured
positive-sequence
impedance % of UBase/
(sqrt(3)*IBase)
X REAL - % Imaginary part of
measured positive-seq
impedance % of UBase/
(sqrt(3)*IBase)
SLIPFREQ REAL - Hz Slip frequency in Hz
ROTORANG REAL - deg Rotor angle as estimated
by the out-of-step
function
UCOSPHI REAL - kV Estimated Ucos(Phi)
voltage during pole slip,
in V

8.17.7 Operation principle

GUID-787EEB01-B760-4D4B-AB4E-1DCD6ABFFF5E v6

General
Under balanced and stable conditions, a generator operates with a constant rotor
angle (power angle), delivering active electrical power to the power system, which
is approximately equal to the input mechanical power on the generator axis.The
currents and voltages are constant and stable. An out-of-step condition is
characterized by periodic changes in the rotor angle, that leads to a wild flow of the
synchronizing power; so there are also periodic changes of rotational speed,
currents and voltages. When displayed in the complex impedance plane, these
changes are characterized by a cyclic change in the complex load impedance Z(R,
X) as measured at the terminals of the generator, or at the location of the

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 499

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

instrument transformers of a power line connecting two power subsystems. This is

shown in Figure 236.

1.5 ← trajectory
of Z(R, X)

to the 3rd
The 2nd pole-slip
Imaginary part (X) of Z in Ohms
1 The 1st X in Ohms
pole slip
pole slip
occurred Pre-disturbance
occurred
RE normal load
- - - - -
- - - - ----------- - - - - Z(R, X)
0.5 -
3 ----
--- ---- --
Zone 2 -- - 1 ---- - 0
- 2 -- -
- --- -
^ --^ ^ ^ ^ ---^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ --- -
-
- -- ^ ^--- ^ ^ ^ -^
Zone 1
0 -
- ---- -
-- -
-
- -
-- relay --
- -
- -
- -- - R in Ohms
limit of reach → -- --- - -
-- -- ---- -
-
--- -
lens determined - - → --- ------ 0- - - pre-disturbance Z(R, X)
-0.5 by the setting - - - -------- - - - →
- - -- - 1 → Z(R, X) under 3-phase fault
StartAngle = 120° SE 2 → Z(R, X) when fault cleared
3 → Z when pole-slip declared

-1
-1.5 -1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5
Real part (R) of Z in Ohms
IEC10000109-1-en.vsd
IEC10000109 V1 EN-US

Figure 236: Loci of the complex impedance Z(R, X) for a typical case of
generator losing step after a short circuit that was not cleared fast
enough

Under typical, normal load conditions, when the protected generator supplies the
active and the reactive power to the power system, the complex impedance Z(R, X)
is in the 1st quadrant, point 0 in Figure 236. One can see that under a three-phase
fault conditions, the centre of oscillation is at the point of fault, point 1, which is
logical, as all three voltages are zero or near zero at that point. Under the fault
conditions the generator accelerated and when the fault was finally cleared, the
complex impedance Z(R, X) jumped to the point 2. By that time, the generator has
already lost its step, Z(R, X) continues its way from the right-hand side to the left-
hand side, and the 1st pole-slip cannot be avoided. If the generator is not
immediately disconnected, it will continue pole-slipping — see Figure 236, where
two pole-slips (two pole-slip cycles) are shown. Under out-of-step conditions, the
centre of oscillation is where the locus of the complex impedance Z(R, X) crosses
the (impedance) line connecting the points SE (Sending End), and RE (Receiving
End). The point on the SE – RE line where the trajectory of Z(R, X) crosses the
impedance line can change with time and is mainly a function of the internal
induced voltages at both ends of the equivalent two-machine system, that is, at
points SE and RE.

Measurement of the magnitude, direction and rate-of-change of load impedance

relative to a generator’s terminals provides a convenient and generally reliable
means of detecting whether machines are out-of-step and pole-slipping is taking
place. Measurement of the rotor (power) angle δ is important as well.

500 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Rotor (power) angle δ can be thought of as the angle between the two lines,
connecting point 0 in Figure 236, that is, Z(R, X) under normal load, with the
points SE and RE, respectively. These two lines are not shown in Figure 236.
Normal values of the power angle, that is, under stable, steady-state, load
conditions, are from 30 to 60 electrical degrees. It can be observed in Figure 237
that the angle reaches 180 degrees when the complex impedance Z(R, X) crosses
the impedance line SE – RE. It then changes the sign, and continues from -180
degrees to 0 degrees, and so on. Figure 237 shows the rotor (power) angle and the
magnitude of Z(R, X) against time for the case from Figure 236.

4
|Z| in Ohms
rotor (power)
3 normal angle in rad
angle
Impe dance Z in Ohm and rotor a ngle in radian ®

load
Z(R, X) unde r fa ult lies |Z|
2
on the impe dance line
or nea r (for 3-ph faults )
1
0
0
fault 500 ms
-1 fa ult
occ urrs
Unde r 3-pha s e fa ult
condition rotor a ngle 3
-2
of a pp. ±180 de gre e s
is m e a s ure d ...
2
-3 Z(R,X) cros s e d
1 1 the im pe da nce line , Z-line ,
conne cting points S E - RE
-4
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400
Time in millis econds ®

IEC10000110-2-en.vsd
IEC10000110 V2 EN-US

Figure 237: Rotor (power) angle and magnitude of the complex impedance
Z(R, X) against the time

In order to be able to fully understand the principles of OOSPPAM, a stable case,

that is, a case where the disturbance does not make a generator to go out-of-step,
must be shown.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 501

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

1
SE RE
G X [Ohm]
0.8 Z(R,X) 20 ms
fault
relay after line out
- - - RE - - -
0.6 - - -- -
-- ---- ----- 4 - - pre-fault

Imaginary part (X) of Z in Ohms →

- -- ---
zone 2 - - - - -
-- --- - Z(R,X)
0.4 - ---- --- 2 -
- -
- -- -1 5
- ---- fault→ --- -
0.2 X-line → ^ -^ ^ ^ ^ ---^ ^ 3 -- -
- ^ ^ -
^ ^ ^ ^ ^-- ^ ^ ^ -^
-
--
- --- Z-line→ -- - 0
- --- --- - 6
0 - -- -- -
- --
- --- - R
limit of - -
-- relay lens → - -- -
-- -
-0.2 reach - -- 110° ---- -
zone 1- - --- - -
--- --- -
- --- --- -
-0.4 -- --- ------ -
-- -- -- --
- - -- - - -- - -
-0.6 SE
0 → pre-fault Z(R, X)
this circle forms 3 → Z(R, X) under fault
-0.8 the right-hand side 5 → Z 20 ms after line out
edge of the lens 6 → pow er line reclosed
-1
-1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5
Real part (R) of Z in Ohms → IEC10000111-1-en.vsd
IEC10000111 V1 EN-US

Figure 238: A stable case where the disturbance does not make the generator
to go out-of-step

It shall be observed that for a stable case, as shown in Figure 238, where the
disturbance does not cause the generator to lose step, the complex impedance Z(R,
X) exits the lens characteristic on the same side (point 4) it entered it (point 2), and
never re-enters the lens. In a stable case, where the protected generator remains in
synchronism, the complex impedance returns to quadrant 1, and, after the
oscillations fade, it returns to the initial normal load position (point 0), or near.

8.17.7.1 Lens characteristic GUID-F9BD3225-C87F-4FA6-A267-2248F0A4E707 v6

A precondition in order to be able to construct a suitable lens characteristic is that

the power system in which OOSPPAM is installed, is modeled as a two-machine
equivalent system, or as a single machine – infinite bus equivalent power system.
Then the impedances from the position of OOSPPAM in the direction of the
normal load flow (that is from the measurement point to the remote system) can be
taken as forward. The lens characteristic, as shown in Figure236 and Figure238, is
obtained so that two equal in size but differently offset Mho characteristics are set
to overlap. The resultant lens characteristic is the loci of complex impedance Z(R,
X) for which the rotor (power) angle is constant, for example 110 degrees or 120
degrees; if the rotor (power) angle approaches this value, then there is a high risk to
have an out of step condition. The limit-of- reach circle is constructed
automatically by the algorithm; it is about 10% wider than the the circle that has
the line SE-RE as diameter (that is the out-of-step characteristic which corresponds
to the rotor (power) angle of 90 degrees). Figure 239 illustrates construction of the
lens characteristic for a power system.

502 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

X
Position of the OOS
- - - RE- - -
0.6 - - - - relay is the origin of
- - --
- -- ----
- -- -the R - X plane
- - --- Ze --
---
-
- Zone 2 -- -
0.4 X-line - - - - -

Imaginary part (X) of Z in Ohms

--
- --
- -
-- -
determined -- Zline
- - -- -
by the → ^ ^- ^ -
- --
0.2 ^ ^ ^-- ^ - -
setting - - ^ ^ ^ ^ - -
--- ^ ^ ^ --- ^
ReachZ1 - -- -- ^ ^ ^-
Ztr
- --- -- - R
0 - Zone 1 -- --
- -
-- relay -
- -- 120° -- Z(R,X) -
- -- -- -
- ← Z-line ---
-0.2 - -- Zgen -
-- --
limit-of-reach → -
-
-- --- -
-- Lens is the - locus
-- ←
--
circle depends on - --
-- -- of constant
-
rotor (power)
-0.4 - -- --- -
the position of the -
- - -- - --- angle,
-
- e.g. 120°.
-
points SE and RE - - -- - - - - - -Lens' width determined
SE
-0.6 by the setting StartAngle

-0.8 -0.6 -0.4 -0.2 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1

Real part (R) of Z in Ohms
IEC10000112-1-en.vsd
IEC10000112 V1 EN-US

Figure 239: Construction of the lens characteristic for a power system

ReverseZ
ReverseZ(ReverseR, ReverseX)) ForwardZ(ForwardR, ForwardX)

Zgen(Rgen , Xgen) Ztr(Rtr, Xtr) Zline(Rline, Xline) Zeq(Req, Xeq)

Generator Transformer Infinite power

13.8 kV 13.8 / 220 kV system
Power line System
13.8 kV 220 kV equivalent
G d Y

SE RE

Out-Of-Step ReverseR = Rg ForwardR = Rtr + Rline + Req

REG ReverseX = Xd’ ForwardX = Xtr + Xline + Xeq
protection
OOSPPAM
All impedances must be referred to the generator voltage 13.8 kV

IEC10000113-2-en.vsd
IEC10000113 V2 EN-US

Figure 240: Example of an actual power system

To be able to automatically construct the lens characteristic for a system shown in

Figure 240, the actual power system must be modeled as a two-machine equivalent
system, or as a single machine – infinite bus equivalent system, the following
information is necessary: Zgen(Rgen, Xgen), Ztr(Rtr, Xtr), Zline(Rline, Xline),
Zeq(Req, Xeq), and the setting StartAngle , for example 120 degrees. All
impedances must be referred to the voltage level where the out-of-step protection
relay is placed; in the case shown in Figure 240 the relay is connected to the
terminals of the generator and, therefore, the previous quantities shall be referred to

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 503

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

the generator nominal voltage and nominal current. The impedances from the
position of the out-of-step protection in the direction of the normal load flow can
be taken as forward.

The out-of-step relay, as in Figure 240 looks into the system and the impedances in
that direction are forward impedances:
• ForwardX = Xtr + Xline + Xeq (All values referred to generator voltage)
• ForwardR = Rtr + Rline + Req (All values referred to generator voltage)

The impedances that can be measured in the reverse direction are:

• ReverseX = Xd' (Generator transient reactance suitable for this protection)
• ReverseR = Rg (Relatively very small, can often be neglected)

Resistances are much smaller than reactances, but in general can not be neglected.
The ratio (ForwardX + ReverseX) / (ForwardR + ReverseR) determines the
inclination of the Z-line, connecting the point SE (Sending End) and RE
(Receiving End), and is typically approximately 85 degrees. While the length of the
Z-line depends on the values of ForwardX, ReverseX, ForwardR, and ReverseR,
the width of the lens is a function of the setting StartAngle .The lens is broader for
smaller values of the StartAngle , and becomes a circle for StartAngle = 90 degrees.

When the complex impedance Z(R, X) enters the lens, pole slipping is imminent,
and a start signal is issued. The angle recommended to form the lens is 110 or 120
degrees, because it is this rotor (power) angle where problems with dynamic
stability usually begin. Rotor (power) angle 120 degrees is sometimes called “the
angle of no return” because if this angle is reached under generator power swings,
the generator is most likely to lose step.

8.17.7.2 Detecting an out-of-step condition GUID-5BBAE253-3D01-4C97-A7CF-A12084FD1810 v4

An out-of-step condition is characterized by periodic changes of the rotor angle,

that leads to a wild flow of the synchronizing power; so there are also periodic
changes of rotational speed, currents and voltages. When displayed in the complex
impedance plane, these changes are characterized by a cyclic change in the
complex load impedance Z(R, X) as measured at the terminals of the generator, or
at the location of the instrument transformers of a power line connecting two power
sub-systems. This was shown in Figure 236. When a synchronous machine is out-
of-step, pole-slips occur. To recognize a pole-slip, the complex impedance Z(R,X)
must traverse the lens from right to left in case of a generator and in the opposite
direction in case of a motor. Another requirement is that the travel across the lens
takes no less than a specific minimum traverse time, typically 40...60 milliseconds.
The above timing is used to discriminate a fault from an out-of-step condition. In
Figure 236, some important points on the trajectory of Z(R, X) are designated.
Point 0: the pre-fault, normal load Z(R, X). Point 1: impedance Z under a three-
phase fault with low fault resistance: Z lies practically on, or very near, the Z-line.
Transition of the measured Z from point 0 to point 1 takes app. 20 ms, due to
Fourier filters. Point 2: Z immediately after the fault has been cleared. Transition of

504 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

the measured Z from point 1 to point 2 takes approximately 20 ms, due to Fourier
filters. The complex impedance then travels in the direction from the right to the
left, and exits the lens on the opposite side. When the complex impedance exits the
lens on the side opposite to its entrance, the 1st pole-slip has already occurred and
more pole-slips can be expected if the generator is not disconnected. Figure 236
shows two pole-slips. Figures like Figure 236 and Figure 238 are always possible
to draw by means of the analog output data from the pole-slip function, and are of
great help with eventual investigations of the performance of the out-of-step
function.

8.17.7.3 Maximum slip frequency GUID-1311529F-21F8-40A0-8D01-0296BD9B4F00 v5

A pole-slip may be detected if it has a slip frequency lower than a maximum value
fsMax. The specific value of fsMax depends on the setting (parameter) StartAngle
(which determines the width of the lens characteristic). A parameter in this
calculation routine is the value of the minimum traverse time, traverseTimeMin.
The minimum traverse time is the minimum time that the travel of the complex
impedance Z(R, X) through the lens, from one side to the other, must last in order
to recognize that a pole-slip has occurred. The value of the internal constant
traverseTimeMin is a function of the set StartAngle.For values of StartAngle <=
110°, traverseTimeMin = 50 ms. For values StartAngle > 110°, traverseTimeMin =
40 ms. The expression which relates the maximum slip frequency fsMax and the
traverseTimeMin is as follows:

1000  StartAngle [°] 

fsMax [ Hz ] ≅ ⋅  1.000 - 
traverseTimeMin [ ms ]  180 [°] 
IECEQUATION2319 V1 EN-US (Equation 124)

The maximum slip frequency fsMax for traverseTimeMin = 50 ms is:

StartAngle = 90° → fsMax = 20 × 0.500 = 10.000 Hz

StartAngle = 100° → fsMax = 20 × 0.444 = 8.888 Hz
StartAngle = 110° → fsMax = 20 × 0.388 = 7.777 Hz (default 110°)

The maximum slip frequency fsMax for traverseTimeMin = 40 ms is:

StartAngle = 120° → fsMax = 25 × 0.333 = 8.333 Hz

StartAngle = 130° → fsMax = 25 × 0.277 = 6.944 Hz

The minimum value of fsMax is 6.994 Hz. When StartAngle = 110 degrees, fsMax
= 7.777 Hz. This implies, that the default StartAngle = 110 degrees covers 90% of
cases as, the typical final slip frequency is between 2 - 5Hz. In practice, however,
before the slip frequency, for example 7.777 Hz, is reached, at least three pole-slips
have occurred. In other words, if we consider a linear increase of frequency from
50 Hz to 57.777 Hz, at least three pole-slips will occur (in fact: (57.777 - 50) / 2 =
3.889). The exact instantaneous slip-frequency expressed in Hz (corresponding to

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 505

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

number of pole slips per second) is difficult to calculate. The easiest and most exact
method is to measure time between two successive pole slips. This means that, the
instantaneous slip-frequency is measured only after the second pole-slip, if the
protected machine is not already disconnected after the first pole-slip. The
measured value of slipsPerSecond (SLIPFREQ) is equal to the average slip-
frequency of the machine between the last two successive pole-slips.

8.17.7.4 Taking care of the circuit breaker GUID-35B49D7D-80AF-4DB0-A3C5-0CA0E54A9CA1 v4

Although out-of-step events are relatively rare, the out-of-step protection should
take care of the circuit breaker health. The electromechanical stress to which the
breaker is exposed shall be minimized. The maximum currents flowing under out-
of-step conditions can be even greater that those for a three-phase short circuit on
generator terminals; see Figure 242. The currents flowing are highest at rotor angle
180 degrees, and smallest at 0 degrees, where relatively small currents flow. To
open the circuit breaker at 180 degrees, when not only the currents are highest, but
the two internal (that is, induced) voltages at both ends are in opposition, could be
fatal for the circuit breaker. There are two methods available in order to minimize
the stress; the second method is more advanced than the first one.

The first method

The circuit breaker is only allowed to break the current when the rotor angle has
become less than the set value TripAngle, on its way to 0 electrical degrees. A
recommended value for the setting TripAngle is 90 degrees or less, for example 60
degrees. Figure 241 illustrates the case with TripAngle = 90 degrees. The offset
Mho circle represents loci of the complex impedance Z(R, X) for which the rotor
(power) angle is 90 degrees. If the circuit breaker must not open before the rotor
angle has reached 90 degrees on its way towards 0 degrees, then it is clear that the
circle delimits the R – X plane into a “no trip” and a “trip” region. For TripAngle =
90 degrees, the trip command will be issued at point 3 when the complex
impedance Z(R, X) exits the circle. By that time the relay logic had already
ascertained the loss of step, and the general decision to trip the generator has
already been taken.

The second method

This method is more exact. If the break-time of the circuit breaker is known, (and
specified as the setting tBreaker) than it is possible to initiate a trip (break)
command almost exactly tBreaker milliseconds before the rotor (power) angle
reaches 0 degrees, where the currents are at their minimum possible values. The
breaker contacts open at almost exactly 0 degrees, as illustrated in Figure 242 for
tBreaker = 0.060 s. The point in time when the breaker opening process must be
initiated is estimated by solving on-line the so called “synchronizer” differential
equation. Note that if tBreaker is left on the initial (default) value, which is zero
(0), then the alternative setting TripAngle decides when the trip command is given.
If specified tBreaker > 0, for example tBreaker = 0.040 second, then automatically,
the TripAngle is ignored and the second, more exact method applied.

506 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

X[Ohm]
0.6 trip RE - Receiving End (infinite bus)
region
loci of Z(R, X)
0.4 3

Imaginary part (X) of Z in Ohms →

no trip
region 1
here rotor here
0.2 2
angle rotor angle
is -90° no trip is +90°
rotor angle
region
= ±180°
0 no trip
relay
region R[Ohm]
inside ← Z - line connects
points SE & RE
-0.2 circle
← this circle
is loci of
outside the
the rotor
-0.4 circle is the trip
angle = 90°
region for
TripAngle <= 90° SE - Sending End (generator)

-0.6 -0.4 -0.2 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8

Real part (R) of Z in Ohms →
IEC10000114-1-en.vsd
IEC10000114 V1 EN-US

Figure 241: The imaginary offset Mho circle represents loci of the impedance
Z(R, X) for which the rotor angle is 90 degrees

35
very high currents due
Current in kA, trip command to CB, rotor angle in rad →

pos. seq. current in kA

to out-of-step condition
30 trip command to CB
rotor angle in radian
← after 1st
fault cleared → pole slip
25
← 2nd

20 current increases under

fault conditions
current decreases
15
fault
occurs
10 ← min. current
trip command →
issued here
← normal load current → ← tBreaker = 60 ms
5

← rotor angle
0
angle towards 0°

-5
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200
Time in milliseconds →
IEC10000115-1-en.vsd
IEC10000115 V1 EN-US

Figure 242: Trip initiation when the break-time of the circuit breaker is known

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 507

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.17.7.5 Design GUID-1615F014-3529-45D0-813B-153754DED1C7 v3

At every execution of the function the following is calculated: active power P,

reactive power Q, rotor angle ROTORANG, quantity UCOSPHI, the positive-
sequence current CURRENT and voltage VOLTAGE. All other quantities, that can as
well be read as outputs, are only calculated if the Z(R, X) enters the limit of reach
zone, which is a circle in the complex (R – X) plane. When the complex impedance
Z(R, X) enters the limit-of-reach region, the algorithm:
• determines in which direction the impedance Z moves, that is, the direction the
lens is traversed
• measures the time taken to traverse the lens from one side to the other one

If the traverse time is more than the limit 40 or 50 ms, a pole-slip is declared. If the
complex impedance Z(R, X) exits the lens on the same side it entered, then it is a
stable case and the protected machine is still in synchronism. If a pole-slip has been
detected, then it is determined in which zone the centre of oscillation is located. If
the number of actual pole-slips exceeds the maximum number of allowed pole-
slips in either of the zones, a trip command is issued taking care of the circuit
breaker safety.

R R
UPSRE Calculation of X X
UPSIM R and X parts
of the complex Z(R,X)
UPSMAG
positive-
IPSRE
sequence Z(R,X) NO
IPSIM
impedance within limit of Return
Z(R, X) reach?

YES UCOSPHI

Z(R,X) ROTORANG
within lens NO
Function alert
characteristic?
SLIPFREQ

YES GENMODE

Z(R,X) MOTMODE
LEFT Z(R,X) RIGHT NO
exited lens
entered lens
on the left- hand
from?
Motor losing Generator losing side?
step ? step ?
YES

Was
traverse time NO
more than
Calculation of 50 ms?
P
positive- sequence YES (pole- slip!)
active power P, Q TRIP
>= 1
reactive power Q, Number
ZONE 2 NO
rotor angle UCOSPHI
of pole- slips
ROTORANG exceeded in TRIPZ1
a zone? Open
and
ROTORANG circuit
UCOSPHI ZONE 1 TRIPZ2
breaker
safely

IEC10000116-3-en.vsd
IEC10000116 V3 EN-US

Figure 243: OOSPPAM Simplified function block

508 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

8.17.8 Technical data

SEMOD175136-2 v8

Table 250: OOSPPAM technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Impedance reach (0.00 - 1000.00)% of Zbase ±2.0% of Ur/(√3 ⋅ Ir)

Rotor start angle (90.0 - 130.0) degrees ±5.0 degrees

Rotor trip angle (15.0 - 90.0) degrees ±5.0 degrees
Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip counters (1 - 20) -

8.18 Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ SEMOD151920-1 v2

8.18.1 Identification
SEMOD151937-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ - -

8.18.2 Functionality SEMOD151924-4 v5

The Phase preference logic function PPLPHIZ is intended to be used in isolated or

high impedance earthed networks where there is a requirement to operate on only
one of the faulty lines during a cross-country fault. It can be used without
preference to restrain operation for single earth faults with a delayed zero-sequence
current release.

For cross-country faults, the logic selects either the leading or lagging phase-earth
loop for measurement. It initiates operation on the preferred fault based on the
selected phase preference. A number of different phase preference combinations
are available for selection.

PPLPHIZ provides an additional phase selection criteria, namely under voltage

criteria, suitable for cross-country faults. In radial networks, where there is no fault
current in the phase with the external fault, current or impedance based phase
selection methods become ineffective. Hence, only voltage can be used for phase
selection. The phase selection result will be the same for all bays on a bus since the
voltage is the same, which is an important condition for operating with phase
preference.

In meshed and stronger networks, it is difficult to find appropriate under-voltage or

phase selection settings. If PPLPHIZ is unable to detect both faulty phases, then it
is not possible to provide preference. The distance protection will still be released
however, without preference. The final result might be that both faulty feeders are

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 509

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

operated. In other words, operation is prioritized over strict adherence to

preference.

8.18.3 Function block SEMOD172690-4 v4

PPLPHIZ
I3P* START
U3P* ZREL
BLOCK
RELL1N
RELL2N
RELL3N
STCND

IEC07000029-2-en.vsd
IEC07000029 V2 EN-US

Figure 244: PPLPHIZ function block

8.18.4 Signals SEMOD172700-1 v2

PID-6808-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 251: PPLPHIZ Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
RELL1N BOOLEAN 0 Release condition for the L1 to earth loop
RELL2N BOOLEAN 0 Release condition for the L2 to earth loop
RELL3N BOOLEAN 0 Release condition for the L3 to earth loop
STCND INTEGER 0 Integer coded external release signals

PID-6808-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 252: PPLPHIZ Output signals

Name Type Description
START BOOLEAN Indicates start for earth fault(s), regardless of
direction
ZREL INTEGER Integer coded output release signal

510 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

8.18.5 Settings SEMOD172702-1 v2

PID-6808-SETTINGS v2

Table 253: PPLPHIZ Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
OperMode No Filter - - No Filter Operating mode (c=cyclic,a=acyclic)
NoPref
1231c
1321c
123a
132a
213a
231a
312a
321a
UPN< 0 - 100 %UB/sq 1 70 Operate value of phase undervoltage in
3 % of UBase/sqrt(3)
UPP< 0 - 100 %UB 1 50 Operate value of line to line
undervoltage (% of UBase)
3U0> 5 - 300 %UB/sq 1 20 Operate value of residual voltage in % of
3 UBase/sqrt(3)
IN> 10 - 200 %IB 1 20 Operate value of residual current (% of
IBase)
tUN 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Pickup-delay for residual voltage
tOffUN 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Dropoff-delay for residual voltage
tIN 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Pickup-delay for residual current

Table 254: PPLPHIZ Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.18.6 Operation principle SEMOD151916-4 v8

PPLPHIZ is connected between the Distance protection zones ZMQPDIS and

ZMQAPDIS and Phase selection FDPSPDIS, see Figure 245. Depending on the
setting, the original phase selection will be supplemented with an additional
voltage based phase selection inside PPLPHIZ and then filtered through the phase
preference logic in order to release only the preferred phases of the distance zones.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 511

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

ZMQAPDIS
FDPSPDIS
W2_CT_B_I3P I3P* TRIP
I3P* TRIP
W2_VT_B_U3P U3P* TRL1
U3P* START
FALSE BLOCK TRL2
BLOCK STFWL1 PHS_L1 W2_FSD1-BLKZ VTSZ TRL3
DIRCND STFWL2 PHS_L2 FALSE BLKTR START
STFWL3 PHS_L3 STCND STL1
STFWPE
DIRCND STL2
STRVL1
STL3
STRVL2
STND
STRVL3
STRVPE
STNDL1 ZMQPDIS
STNDL2 I3P* TRIP
W2_CT_B_I3P
STNDL3 U3P* TRL1
W2_VT_B_U3P
STNDPE FALSE BLOCK TRL2
STFW1PH VTSZ TRL3
W2_FSD1-BLKZ
STFW2PH
FALSE BLKTR START
STFW3PH
STCND STL1
STPE DIRCND STL2
STPP STL3
STCNDZ STND
STCNDLE

PPLPHIZ
W2_CT_B_I3P I3P* START
W2_VT_B_U3P U3P* ZREL
FALSE BLOCK
FALSE RELL1N
FALSE RELL2N
FALSE RELL3N
STCND
IEC06000552-3-en.vsd
IEC06000552 V3 EN-US

Figure 245: Phase preference logic overview

PPLPHIZ can be divided into three main parts:

• Residual current criteria
• Phase selection
• Preference logic

8.18.6.1 Residual current criteria GUID-982F5BF4-CB45-4404-94F5-9A24B891056B v1

The fundamental start criterion for a cross-country fault is a continuous residual

current (3I0) above setting level IN>.

Transient residual currents associated with single phase fault inception are not
allowed to release the distance protection. This is taken care of by a time-on-delay
tIN, which should be set longer than the expected duration of the transient.

If a single phase fault remains for some time, it is possible to bypass the tIN time
delay, since the next fault event is expected to be a two-phase fault. The criterion
for this bypass is that the residual voltage is greater than setting level 3U0> for a
time longer than setting tUN. The time-off-delay tOffUN is used to make sure that
the bypass is steady during the cross-country fault.

The time delay for residual current start is also bypassed as soon as two low
voltages are detected during the cross-country fault (startUPP). See Figure 246.

512 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

startUPP

OR
tUN tOffUN
3U0 > 3U0> t t
(Non delayed IN start)
AND

tIN startIN
OR
3I0>IN> t

IEC16000018-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000018 V1 EN-US

Figure 246: Residual current criteria

8.18.6.2 Phase selection GUID-975FB3BE-A7FE-4CD8-8954-6542870DF482 v1

During a cross-country fault, the phase with an external fault typically does not
carry any fault current, which will make it difficult for a conventional phase
selection function to detect the fault. Therefore, PPLPHIZ function provides an
additional phase selection based on voltage.

PPLPHIZ is designed to detect two-phase faults based on under-voltage in two

phases or between two phases.

ULx < UPN<

L1
L2 OR startU
AND
L3

3U0 > 3U0>

AND startUL1L2
OR

AND startUL2L3
OR
startUL1
OR
AND startUL3L1
ULxLy < UPP< OR
startUL2
L1L2 OR
L2L3
startUL3
L3L1 OR

IEC16000019-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000019 V1 EN-US

Figure 247: Phase selection

The voltage phase selection can be complemented with external phase selection
through inputs RELL1-3N.

Voltage phase selection is disabled in No Filter and NoPref

operating modes.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 513

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

startUL1
AND
startUL2
startUPP
AND OR
startUL3
AND
OperMode = No Filter
OR
AND
OperMode = NoPref

OR
RELL1N startL1
OR
OR
RELL2N startL2
OR
OR
RELL3N startL3
OR
OR
L1N
L2N
L3N
STCND Integer L1L2 zrelL1L2
to Bool
L2L3 zrelL2L3
L3L1 zrelL3L1

IEC16000105-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000105 V1 EN-US

Figure 248: Start

8.18.6.3 Preference logic GUID-A7FCCE03-C841-4BAD-98F8-EB9497D53687 v1

The different operating modes (selected with OperMode setting) determine how the
internal status is used to release the phases of the connected distance protection.

No Filter mode GUID-2D585104-E319-4B6D-82C7-3373CA7E87F7 v1

In No Filter mode, all phase starts of the phase selection will be passed through
without any preference or requirement on residual current or voltage.

No Filter mode is equivalent to connecting the phase selection directly to the

distance protection.

startL1 zrelL1

startL2 zrelL2

startL3 zrelL3

IEC16000106-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000106 V1 EN-US

Figure 249: No Filter mode

514 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

No Preference mode GUID-DA373F35-2082-4347-9A35-B34E23C03B01 v1

The ‘NoPref’ mode uses only the residual current criteria (startIN). There is no
preference provided in this mode. All three phase-to-earth loops of the distance
protection may be released when a residual current start has occurred.

startL1
zrelL1
AND
startL2
zrelL2
AND
startL3
zrelL3
AND

startIN

IEC16000107-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000107 V1 EN-US

Figure 250: No Preference mode

Preference modes GUID-BE61A451-E389-4136-8C0B-2C04888EEACE v1

In the preference modes (for example, ‘1231c’), the internal under-voltage phase
selection status is filtered with the selected preference scheme to achieve the
desired phase preference. Only the preferred phase-to-earth loop of the distance
protection is released to operate. In addition to the voltage phase selection, a
residual current start is required.

A logic is also included to handle the special case where only one start (startL1-3)
is present.

The internal under-voltage phase selection always issues a release in at least two
phases, but the inputs RELL1-3N can be activated with some time apart. If no
measures are taken, the phase activated first will pass through the preference
scheme and release the distance protection. Since it could a be non-preferred phase,
a time delay of 40 ms is provided to release if only one phase is detected, in order
to wait for the second phase to be activated. If no second phase is detected within
40 ms, the single phase is released without preference.

Additionaly, there are some cases where no release would be issued:

• All three phases are involved in the fault and a cyclic scheme is selected
• No faulty phase can be detected due to an insufficient voltage drop

In both cases, no release signals come from the phase preference scheme. For these
cases, an additional logic is provided that releases all phases if there is no output
from the preference scheme after 40 ms from the activation of the residual current
start.

Hence, if there is a residual current start, it is guaranteed that the distance

protection is released in at least one phase. This is valid for all phase preference
schemes.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 515

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Preference
OperMode Scheme
Sheme
startL1 prefL1
INL1 OUTL1
startL2 prefL2
INL2 OUTL2
startL3 INL3 OUTL3
prefL3

More
than
one stIN
AND
true
startIN
40 ms
stIN40ms
t

IEC16000023-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000023 V1 EN-US

Figure 251: Phase preference 1

prefL1
OR zrelL1
AND
prefL2
OR zrelL2
AND
prefL3
OR zrelL3
AND
OR

AND
stIN40ms
stIN OR

IEC16000024-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000024 V1 EN-US

Figure 252: Phase preference 2

Table 255 shows the preferred phase for each detected cross-country fault type and
operating mode (OperMode).
Table 255: Preferred phase for each cross-country fault type and operating mode
Operating mode start in L1 & L2 start in L2 & L3 start in L3 & L1
1231c L1 L2 L3
1321c L2 L3 L1
123a L1 L2 L1
132a L1 L3 L1
213a L2 L2 L1
231a L2 L2 L3
312a L1 L3 L3
321a L2 L3 L3

516 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

8.18.6.4 Output GUID-3D64237F-8D45-4CAE-8F2E-31F6741842C2 v1

All loop releasing signals are gathered in the binary coded integer output ZREL.
The value of ZREL can be calculated according to Equation 125.

ZREL L1N *1 L2N *2  L3N *4  L1L2*8  L2L3*16  L3L1*32

IECEQUATION16018 V1 EN-US (Equation 125)
For example, if only L1N is active, then the value is 1. If both start L1N and L3N
are active, then the value is 1+4=5.

The BLOCK input will only block the enabling signals for phase-
to-earth loops, phase-to-phase loops are still released. The
PPLPHIZ is designed not to have any influence on the phase-to-
phase loops of the distance protection.

startU
AND

zrelL1
AND
zrelL2
AND L1N
zrelL3 L2N
AND L3N
Bool to ZREL
zrelL1L2 L1L2 Integer
zrelL2L3 L2L3
BLOCK zrelL3L1 L3L1

IEC16000108-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000108 V1 EN-US

Figure 253: Output

GUID-BACA37F7-E945-40BC-BF9D-A65BFC96CA91 v8

Table 256: PPLPHIZ technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, phase-to-phase (1 - 100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
and phase-to-neutral
undervoltage
Reset ratio, undervoltage < 105% -
Operate value, residual voltage (5 - 300)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U
≤ Ur
±0.5% of U at U >
Ur

Reset ratio, residual voltage > 95% -

Operate value, residual current (10 - 200)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, residual current > 95% -

Independent time delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms
residual current at 0 to 2 x Iset whichever is
greater
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 517

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Independent time delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms
residual voltage at 0.8 x Uset to whichever is
1.2 x Uset greater

Independent dropoff-delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms

residual voltage at 1.2 x Uset to whichever is
0.8 x Uset greater

Operating mode No Filter, NoPref

Cyclic: 1231c, 1321c
Acyclic: 123a, 132a, 213a, 231a, 312a,
321a

8.19 Phase preference logic PPL2PHIZ GUID-80133640-FB3E-400C-B7FF-C2BB0AD1A045 v1

8.19.1 Identification
GUID-850E4134-E912-45EC-981E-E1A2C12A91A8 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Phase preference logic PPL2PHIZ - -

8.19.2 Functionality GUID-39785DEB-E5D7-447C-977B-9E940CA8E774 v1

The Phase preference logic function (PPL2PHIZ) is used with the high speed
distance protection, quad and mho characteristic (ZMFPDIS). It is intended to be
used in isolated or high impedance earthed networks where there is a requirement
to operate on only one of the faulty lines during a cross-country fault. It can be
used without preference to restrain operation for single earth faults with a delayed
zero-sequence current release.

For cross-country faults, the logic selects either the leading or lagging phase-earth
loop for measurement. It initiates operation on the preferred fault based on the
selected phase preference. A number of different phase preference combinations
are available for selection.

PPL2PHIZ provides an additional phase selection criteria, namely under voltage

criteria, suitable for cross-country faults. In radial networks, where there is no fault
current in the phase with the external fault, current or impedance based phase
selection methods become ineffective. Hence, only voltage can be used for phase
selection. The phase selection result will be the same for all bays on a bus since the
voltage is the same, which is an important condition for operating with phase
preference.

In meshed and stronger networks, it is difficult to find appropriate under-voltage or

phase selection settings. If PPL2PHIZ is unable to detect both faulty phases, then it
is not possible to provide preference. The distance protection will still be released
however, without preference. The final result might be that both faulty feeders are

518 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

operated. In other words, operation is prioritized over strict adherence to

preference.

8.19.3 Function block GUID-8C40D1F5-FE37-422D-B9E6-BE14E6A8FED8 v1

PPL2PHIZ
I3P* START
U3P* ZREL
BLOCK
RELL1N
RELL2N
RELL3N
IEC16000016-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000016 V1 EN-US

Figure 254: PPL2PHIZ function block

8.19.4 Signals
PID-6809-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 257: PPL2PHIZ Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
RELL1N BOOLEAN 0 Release condition for the L1 to earth loop
RELL2N BOOLEAN 0 Release condition for the L2 to earth loop
RELL3N BOOLEAN 0 Release condition for the L3 to earth loop

PID-6809-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 258: PPL2PHIZ Output signals

Name Type Description
START BOOLEAN Indicates start for earth fault(s), regardless of
direction
ZREL INTEGER Integer coded output release signal

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 519

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.19.5 Settings
PID-6809-SETTINGS v2

Table 259: PPL2PHIZ Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
OperMode No Filter - - No Filter Operating mode (c=cyclic,a=acyclic)
NoPref
1231c
1321c
123a
132a
213a
231a
312a
321a
UPN< 0 - 100 %UB/sq 1 70 Operate value of phase undervoltage in
3 % of UBase/sqrt(3)
UPP< 0 - 100 %UB 1 50 Operate value of line to line
undervoltage (% of UBase)
3U0> 5 - 300 %UB/sq 1 20 Operate value of residual voltage in % of
3 UBase/sqrt(3)
IN> 10 - 200 %IB 1 20 Operate value of residual current (% of
IBase)
tUN 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Pickup-delay for residual voltage
tOffUN 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Dropoff-delay for residual voltage
tIN 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Pickup-delay for residual current

Table 260: PPL2PHIZ Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.19.6 Operation principle GUID-B304D0D3-1E4E-482D-975F-229467905608 v1

The PPL2PHIZ function releases the phase selection inside the distance protection,
see Figure 255.

The phase selection inside the distance protection has to detect the
fault before an operation from the distance zones can be achieved,
even when the distance protection is released by PPL2PHIZ.

520 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

PPL2PHIZ ZMFPDIS
Phase
Phase selection
preference
Zone1
L1N relcndphs TRZ1
L1N bitwise enable
L2N AND
L2N
L3N Zone2
L3N Bool to ZREL bitwise
TRUE L1L2 Integer AND
enable
RELCNDZ1
TRUE L2L3
Zone3
TRUE L3L1 RELCNDZ2 bitwise
enable
AND
RELCNDZ3
Zone4
RELCNDZ4 bitwise
enable
TRZ4
AND
RELCNDZ5 Zone5
bitwise
enable
TRZ5
RELCNDZRV AND
ZoneRV
bitwise
enable
TRZRV
AND

IEC16000017-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000017 V1 EN-US

Figure 255: Phase preference logic overview

PPL2PHIZ can be divided into three main parts:

• Residual current criteria
• Phase selection
• Preference logic

8.19.6.1 Residual current criteria GUID-982F5BF4-CB45-4404-94F5-9A24B891056B v1

The fundamental start criterion for a cross-country fault is a continuous residual

current (3I0) above setting level IN>.

Transient residual currents associated with single phase fault inception are not
allowed to release the distance protection. This is taken care of by a time-on-delay
tIN, which should be set longer than the expected duration of the transient.

If a single phase fault remains for some time, it is possible to bypass the tIN time
delay, since the next fault event is expected to be a two-phase fault. The criterion
for this bypass is that the residual voltage is greater than setting level 3U0> for a
time longer than setting tUN. The time-off-delay tOffUN is used to make sure that
the bypass is steady during the cross-country fault.

The time delay for residual current start is also bypassed as soon as two low
voltages are detected during the cross-country fault (startUPP). See Figure 256.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 521

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

startUPP

OR
tUN tOffUN
3U0 > 3U0> t t
(Non delayed IN start)
AND

tIN startIN
OR
3I0>IN> t

IEC16000018-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000018 V1 EN-US

Figure 256: Residual current criteria

8.19.6.2 Phase selection GUID-A3B9F4A9-30D1-40E5-B0A8-6BB66093C27A v1

During a cross-country fault, the phase with an external fault typically does not
carry any fault current, which will make it difficult for a conventional phase
selection function to detect the fault. Therefore, PPL2PHIZ function provides an
additional phase selection based on voltage.

PPL2PHIZ is designed to detect two-phase faults based on under-voltage in two

phases or between two phases.

ULx < UPN<

L1
L2 OR startU
AND
L3

3U0 > 3U0>

AND startUL1L2
OR

AND startUL2L3
OR
startUL1
OR
AND startUL3L1
ULxLy < UPP< OR
startUL2
L1L2 OR
L2L3
startUL3
L3L1 OR

IEC16000019-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000019 V1 EN-US

Figure 257: Phase selection

The voltage phase selection can be complemented with external phase selection
through inputs RELL1-3N.

Voltage phase selection is disabled in No Filter and NoPref

operating modes.

522 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

startUL1
AND
startUL2
startUPP
AND OR
startUL3
AND
OperMode = No Filter
OR
OperMode = NoPref

startL1
RELL1N OR

startL2
RELL2N OR

startL3
RELL3N OR

IEC16000020-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000020 V1 EN-US

Figure 258: Start

8.19.6.3 Preference logic GUID-A7FCCE03-C841-4BAD-98F8-EB9497D53687 v1

The different operating modes (selected with OperMode setting) determine how the
internal status is used to release the phases of the connected distance protection.

No Filter mode GUID-BB45C4A8-890F-4716-940C-53BBB47710F3 v1

In No Filter mode, all distance protection phases are released constantly, leaving it
to the phase selection inside the distance protection to decide which distance zone
loops should be allowed to operate.

TRUE zrelL1

TRUE zrelL2

TRUE zrelL3

IEC16000021-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000021 V1 EN-US

Figure 259: No Filter mode

No Filter mode is equivalent to disconnecting the PPL2PHIZ from the distance

protection.

No Preference mode GUID-3D947DCA-7938-4C44-8BA6-4DA2789EDC98 v1

The ‘NoPref’ mode uses only the residual current criteria (startIN). There is no
preference provided in this mode. All three phase-to-earth loops of the distance
protection releases when a residual current start has occurred.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 523

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

TRUE
zrelL1
AND
TRUE
zrelL2
AND
TRUE
zrelL3
AND

startIN

IEC16000022-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000022 V1 EN-US

Figure 260: No Preference mode

Preference modes GUID-BE61A451-E389-4136-8C0B-2C04888EEACE v1

In the preference modes (for example, ‘1231c’), the internal under-voltage phase
selection status is filtered with the selected preference scheme to achieve the
desired phase preference. Only the preferred phase-to-earth loop of the distance
protection is released to operate. In addition to the voltage phase selection, a
residual current start is required.

A logic is also included to handle the special case where only one start (startL1-3)
is present.

The internal under-voltage phase selection always issues a release in at least two
phases, but the inputs RELL1-3N can be activated with some time apart. If no
measures are taken, the phase activated first will pass through the preference
scheme and release the distance protection. Since it could a be non-preferred phase,
a time delay of 40 ms is provided to release if only one phase is detected, in order
to wait for the second phase to be activated. If no second phase is detected within
40 ms, the single phase is released without preference.

Additionaly, there are some cases where no release would be issued:

• All three phases are involved in the fault and a cyclic scheme is selected
• No faulty phase can be detected due to an insufficient voltage drop

In both cases, no release signals come from the phase preference scheme. For these
cases, an additional logic is provided that releases all phases if there is no output
from the preference scheme after 40 ms from the activation of the residual current
start.

Hence, if there is a residual current start, it is guaranteed that the distance

protection is released in at least one phase. This is valid for all phase preference
schemes.

524 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Preference
OperMode Scheme
Sheme
startL1 prefL1
INL1 OUTL1
startL2 prefL2
INL2 OUTL2
startL3 INL3 OUTL3
prefL3

More
than
one stIN
AND
true
startIN
40 ms
stIN40ms
t

IEC16000023-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000023 V1 EN-US

Figure 261: Phase preference 1

prefL1
OR zrelL1
AND
prefL2
OR zrelL2
AND
prefL3
OR zrelL3
AND
OR

AND
stIN40ms
stIN OR

IEC16000024-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000024 V1 EN-US

Figure 262: Phase preference 2

Table 261 shows the preferred phase for each detected cross-country fault type and
operating mode (OperMode).
Table 261: Preferred phase for each cross-country fault type and operating mode
Operating mode start in L1 & L2 start in L2 & L3 start in L3 & L1
1231c L1 L2 L3
1321c L2 L3 L1
123a L1 L2 L1
132a L1 L3 L1
213a L2 L2 L1
231a L2 L2 L3
312a L1 L3 L3
321a L2 L3 L3

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 525

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.19.6.4 Output GUID-FCDCF1A9-A34D-4FD7-B488-3F31A93BE231 v1

All loop releasing signals are gathered in the binary coded integer output ZREL.
The value of ZREL can be calculated according to Equation 126.

ZREL L1N *1 L2N *2  L3N *4  L1L2*8  L2L3*16  L3L1*32

IECEQUATION16018 V1 EN-US (Equation 126)
For example, if only L1N is active, then the value is 1. If both start L1N and L3N
are active, then the value is 1+4=5.

The phase-to-phase loops are always released, that is, the value of
ZREL will always be at least 8+16+32=56. For example:
If only L1N is active, then the value is 1+56=57
If start L1N and L3N are active, then the value is 1+4+56=61

The BLOCK input will only block the enabling signals for phase-
to-earth loops, phase-to-phase loops are still released. The
PPL2PHIZ is designed not to have any influence on the phase-to-
phase loops of the distance protection.

startU
AND

zrelL1
AND
zrelL2
AND L1N
zrelL3 L2N
AND L3N
Bool to ZREL
TRUE L1L2 Integer
TRUE L2L3
BLOCK TRUE L3L1

IEC16000025-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000025 V1 EN-US

Figure 263: Output

526 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

8.19.7 Technical data

GUID-42119BFF-1756-431C-A5A1-0AB637213E96 v1

Table 262: PPL2PHIZ technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, phase-to-phase (1 - 100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
and phase-to-neutral
undervoltage
Reset ratio, undervoltage < 105% -
Operate value, residual voltage (5 - 300)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U
≤ Ur
±0.5% of U at U >
Ur

Reset ratio, residual voltage > 95% -

Operate value, residual current (10 - 200)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, residual current > 95% -

Independent time delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms
residual current at 0 to 2 x Iset whichever is
greater
Independent time delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms
residual voltage at 0.8 to 1.2 x whichever is
Uset greater

Independent dropoff-delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms

residual voltage at 1.2 to 0.8 x whichever is
Uset greater

Operating mode No Filter, NoPref

Cyclic: 1231c, 1321c
Acyclic: 123a, 132a, 213a, 231a, 312a,
321a

8.20 Under impedance protection for generators and

transformers ZGVPDIS GUID-1A3A4890-5CFA-417B-BDA4-EA001502AA60 v2

8.20.1 Identification GUID-752C21F4-972E-4E97-AB15-075FF720527F v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/

identification identification IEEEidentification
Under impedance function for ZGVPDIS 21G
generators and transformers

S00346 V1 EN-US

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 527

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

8.20.2 Functionality GUID-5D0E6F04-8B60-4F12-8DA6-7043BE09A3CC v5

The under impedance protection is a three zone full scheme impedance protection
using offset mho characteristics for detecting faults in the generator, generator-
transformer and transmission system. The three zones have fully independent
measuring loops and settings. The functionality also comprises an under voltage
seal-in feature to ensure issuing of a trip even if the current transformer goes into
saturation and, in addition, the positive-sequence-based load encroachment feature
for the second and the third impedance zone. Built-in compensation for the step-up
transformer vector group connection is available.

8.20.3 Function block GUID-8FA2E41C-1299-40F1-82E7-50EB7E0BE442 v3

ZGVPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRZ1
BLOCK TRZ2
BLKZ TRZ3
BLKUV TRUV
START
STZ1
STZ2
STZ3
STUV

IEC14000018-1-en.vsd
IEC14000018 V1 EN-US

Figure 264: ZGVPDIS function block

8.20.4 Signals
PID-3587-INPUTSIGNALS v8

Table 263: ZGVPDIS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Connection for current sample signals
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Connection for voltage sample signals
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of the function
BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Block due to fuse failure
BLKUV BOOLEAN 0 Block of the under voltage seal in

PID-3587-OUTPUTSIGNALS v8

Table 264: ZGVPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General Trip
TRZ1 BOOLEAN Trip signal Zone 1
TRZ2 BOOLEAN Trip signal Zone 2
TRZ3 BOOLEAN Trip signal Zone 3
Table continues on next page

528 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Name Type Description

TRUV BOOLEAN Trip from Under voltage seal in
START BOOLEAN General start
STZ1 BOOLEAN Start signal Zone 1
STZ2 BOOLEAN Start signal Zone 2
STZ3 BOOLEAN Start signal Zone 3
STUV BOOLEAN Start of under voltage seal in

8.20.5 Settings
PID-3587-SETTINGS v8

Table 265: ZGVPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
ImpedanceAng 5 - 90 Deg 1 80 Impedance angle in degrees, common
for all zones
IMinOp 5 - 80 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current
OpModeZ1 Off - - PP Loops Operation mode of Zone 1: Off/Ph-Ph
PP Loops loops
Z1Fwd 3.0 - 100.0 % Zb 0.1 8.0 Zone 1 forward reach in % of rated
impedance, 100%=full load
Z1Rev 3.0 - 100.0 % Zb 0.1 8.0 Zone 1 reverse reach in % of rated
impedance, 100%=full load
tZ1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to operate for Zone 1
OpModeZ2 Off - - EnhancedReach Operation mode of Zone 2: Off/Ph-Ph/
PP Loops EnhancedReach
EnhancedReach
Z2Fwd 3.0 - 200.0 % Zb 0.1 15.0 Zone 2 forward reach in % of rated
impedance, 100%=full load
Z2Rev 3.0 - 200.0 % Zb 0.1 8.0 Zone 2 reverse reach in % of rated
impedance, 100%=full load
tZ2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 Time delay to operate for Zone 2
OpModeZ3 Off - - EnhancedReach Operation mode of Zone 3: Off/Ph-Ph/
PP Loops EnhancedReach
EnhancedReach
Z3Fwd 3.0 - 200.0 % Zb 0.1 75.0 Zone 3 forward reach in % of rated
impedance, 100%=full load
Z3Rev 3.0 - 200.0 % Zb 0.1 8.0 Zone 3 reverse reach in % of rated
impedance, 100%=full load
tZ3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.500 Time delay to operate for Zone 3
OpModeU< Off - - Off Enable under voltage seal in (Off/
Z2Start Z2Start/Z3Start)
Z3Start
U< 5 - 90 %UB 1 70 Start value of under voltage seal in
tU< 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to operate for under voltage
seal in

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 529

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Table 266: ZGVPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
RLd 5 - 120 % Zb 1 50 Resistive reach in % for load
encroachment charateristics
ArgLd 5 - 85 Deg 1 38 Load encroachment inclination of load
angular sector
LoadEnchModZ2 Off - - Off Enable load encroachement for Zone 2
On Off/On
LoadEnchModZ3 Off - - On Enable load encroachement for Zone 3
On Off/On

Table 267: ZGVPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.20.6 Monitored data

PID-3587-MONITOREDDATA v7

Table 268: ZGVPDIS Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L1
UL2 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L2
UL3 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L3
IL1 REAL - A Current in phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current in phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current in phase L3

8.20.7 Operation principle GUID-DB4C0FEC-2D34-42AA-A105-E30B00CE1B7E v3

The full scheme backup distance element constitutes of three operating zones.
Zone1 has only the phase-to-phase loops enabled. Zone2 and zone3 can be selected
for phase –to-phase or Enhanced reach loop. Each measuring loop use the offset
mho characteristic

The base value of impedance can be calculated according to equation 127.

UBase
ZBase =
3 IBase
IECEQUATION1400024 V1 EN-US (Equation 127)

Where,
ZBase is the base value of impedance
UBase is the line-to-line voltage rating at the generator terminal

530 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

IBase is the line current rating at the generator terminal

The minimum operating current is provided using the setting IMinOp.

All the outputs will be blocked by activation of the BLOCK or BLKZ input.

Offset mho characteristic

ZGVPDIS consists of three distance elements operated for three zones separately.
Each zone consists of measuring loops which uses self-polarized offset mho
characteristics with both forward and reverse reach settings for the detection of the
fault in the respective zone. The operating characteristics of all the three zones are
shown in Figure 265. The ImpedanceAngle setting is common to all three zones.

jX

Offset Mho, Zone3

Offset Mho, Zone2

Offset Mho, Zone1

ImpedanceAng

IEC11000294-2-en.vsd
IEC11000294 V2 EN-US

Figure 265: Offset mho characteristics of three zones

The complete functionality is shown in figure 266.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 531

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

U3P STZ1
I3P ZONE 1 TRZ1
BLKZ OpModeZ1
Z1Fwd
BLOCK Z1Rev
tZ1 START
³1

ZONE 2 STZ2
OpModeZ2
Z2Fwd TRZ2
Z2Rev
tZ2
LoadEnchModZ2

OPERATE
³1
³1

STZ3
ZONE 3
OpModeZ3
Z3Fwd
Z3Rev
tZ3 TRZ3
LoadEnchModZ3

LoadEnch

RLd
ArgLd

UVSealIn TRUV

OpModeU< STUV
U<
tU<
BLCKUV

IEC11000295-3-en.vsd
IEC11000295 V2 EN-US

Figure 266: Block diagram of ZGVPDIS

8.20.7.1 Operation principle of zone 1 GUID-994DD2FC-3B69-4ED6-AB94-A0C0D4399637 v3

In general, the zone 1 must cover the generator winding, the cables or busbars and
step up transformer.

Under impedance functionality is provided as selective protection for the phase-to-

phase faults in zone 1. Hence the functionality of zone 1 includes only phase-to-
phase measuring loops.

Zone 1 functionality can be set to PP Loops or Off using the setting OpModeZ1.

Figure 267 shows the functionality of zone 1.

532 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

BLOCK

BLKZ

U3P Comparator
ZL1L2 <
I3P
OpModeZ1
Z1Fwd STZ1
Z1Rev
ImpedanceAng

tZ1
Comparator
³1 t TRZ1
ZL2L3 <
OPModeZ1
Z1Fwd
Z1Rev
ImpedanceAng

Comparator
ZL3L1 <
OpModeZ1
Z1Fwd
Z1Rev
ImpedanceAng

IEC11000297-3-en.vsd
IEC11000297 V3 EN-US

Figure 267: Block diagram of zone 1

The functionality included in zone 1:

• Comparator to detect, if the operating impedance has entered inside zone 1

offset mho characteristic.
• All three phase-to-phase loops are implemented separately.
• Forward and reverse reach values are provided in percentage of impedance
base value at generator.
• Operate time delay is provided.

Comparator characteristics
The comparator consists of offset mho characteristics. Three individual
comparators are provided in the three phase-to-phase loops. The offset mho
characteristic is as shown in figure 268.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 533

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

IL1L2 · jX
IL1L2 · Z 1Fwd
Ucomp1=UL1L2 - I L1L2 · Z1Fwd

Ucomp2=UL1L2 + IL1L2 · Z1REV

IL1L2 · R

- IL1L2· Z1REV
IEC11000296-2-en.vsd
IEC11000296 V2 EN-US

Figure 268: Simplified offset mho characteristics for L1-L2 fault in zone 1

Criteria: Operation occurs if 90° ≤ β ≤ 270°.

In the above characteristics, Z1Fwd and Z1Rev are the forward and reverse reach
percentage values and ImpedanceAng is the characteristic angle provided for the
zone 1 operation region.

Z 1Fwd = Z 1Fwd Ð ImpedanceAng

IECEQUATION14000025 V2 EN-US (Equation 128)

Z 1Rev = Z 1revÐ ImpedanceAng

IECEQUATION14000026 V2 EN-US (Equation 129)

Voltage and current phasors selected for phase-to-phase loops are:

Sl.No Phase-to-phase loop Voltage phasor Current phasor
L1-L2
1 UL1L 2 IL1L 2
L2-L3
2 UL 2 L3 IL 2 L3
L3-L1
3 UL3L1 IL3L1

Operate time
The operate time delay for zone 1 can be provided using the setting tZ1.

8.20.7.2 Operation principle of zone 2 GUID-AE603E22-FD38-46FD-BE31-301272BFD0E1 v5

Figure 269 shows the function block diagram describing the functionality of zone
2.

534 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Zero
sequence
Voltage
Compensation
U3P
Measuring Loop
I3P EnhancedReach

BLOCK OpModeZ2
Z2Fwd
Z2Rev
BLKZ ImpedanceAng

1

Measuring Loop
phase-to-phase STZ2
(ZL1L2<,ZL2L3<,ZL3L1<) &

OpModeZ2
tZ2
Z2Fwd
t TRZ2
Z2Rev
ImpedanceAng

LoadEnchModZ2
Load
Encroachment T
1 F
RLd
ArgLd

IEC11000298-3-en.vsd

IEC11000298 V3 EN-US

Figure 269: Block diagram of zone 2

Zone 2 can be used to cover up to the HV side of the transformer and the HV bus
bar. It also covers to some degree, the stator winding. The time to trip is provided
in order to coordinate with the zone 1 element on the shortest outgoing line from
the bus.

Zone 2 coverage provides backup for the phase-to-phase and three-phase faults in
generator. It also protects LV winding of generator transformer and phase-to-earth,
phase-to-phase and three-phase faults in the HV side of transformer and the bus. A
separate maximum current feature is provided in phase-to-earth loop selection
which gives correct reach measurement for phase-to-phase fault on HV side. Zero
sequence compensation for the phase voltages is given in phase-to-earth measuring
loops in order to prevent operation for the stator earth faults.

Zone 2 can be selected for different measuring loops using the setting OpModeZ2.
The OpModeZ2 can be selected as Off or PP Loops or EnhancedReach. If the
OpModeZ2 is selected as EnhancedReach, the loop used for measurements is the
phase-to-earth measuring loop (L1E, L2E and L3E) which is with maximum phase
current of all the three phase currents.

Figure 270 shows the logic to detect the phase to earth loop with maximum phase
current.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 535

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

A startPh1 &
i1Mag a
a==b
b
startPh2 & ³1 start
&

B
i2Mag a
a==b
b startPh3 &
&
³1
C
i3Mag a
a==b
b

MAX

IEC11000307_1_en.vsd
IEC11000307 V1 EN-US

Figure 270: Logic diagram for the selection of the maximum current loop

The phase-to-earth voltage is compensated with zero sequence voltage in order to

avoid the function operating for earth faults in zone 1, that is, complete generator
stator winding and LV winding of the power transformer.

The reach settings for zone 2 can be provided using the Z2Fwd, Z2Rev and
ImpedanceAng settings. The Z2Fwd is forward reach setting and Z2Rev is reverse
reach setting. The offset mho characteristic for phase-to-earth loop is shown in
Figure 271. The offset mho characteristics for phase-to-phase loop is shown in
Figure 272.

IL1  jX
IL1  Z 2 Fwd
Ucomp1  UL1E  U 0  IL1  Z 2 Fwd

Ucomp 2  U L1E  U 0  IL1  Z 2 REV

IL1  R

 IL1  Z 2 REV

IEC11000299-2-en.vsd
IEC11000299 V2 EN-US

Figure 271: Simplified offset mho characteristics for L1-to-E fault in zone 2

536 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

IL1L 2  jX
IL1L2  Z 2 Fwd
Ucomp1  UL1L2  IL1L2  Z 2 Fwd

Ucomp 2  UL1L 2  IL1L 2  Z 2 REV

IL1L 2  R

 IL1L 2  Z 2 REV

IEC11000300-2-en.vsd
IEC11000300 V2 EN-US

Figure 272: Simplified offset mho characteristics for L1-to-L2 fault in zone 2

Operation occurs if 90° ≤ β ≤ 270°.

Impedance defined in the Figure 271 and 272 is described in equation 130.

Z 2 Fwd = Z 2 Fwd Ð ImpedanceAng

Z 2 Rev = Z 2 RevÐ ImpedanceAng

GUID-007D6357-B7CF-4C21-B772-2245F06C83A2 V2 EN-US (Equation 130)

Voltage and current phasors selected for different measuring loops:

Phase Phase:
Sl.No Measuring Loop Voltage Phasor Current Phasor
L1-L2
1 UL1L 2 IL1L 2
L2-L3
2 UL 2 L3 IL 2 L3
L3-L1
3 UL3L1 IL3L1

Enhanced Reach:

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 537

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

Sl.No Measuring Loop Voltage Phasor Current Phasor

1 IL1 1)
UL1E - U 0 IL1

2 IL21)
UL 2 E - U 0 IL2

3 IL31)
UL3 E - U 0 IL3

1) Only the loop with maximum current is allowed to operate

Operate time
The operate time delay for zone 2 can be provided using the setting tZ2.

Zone 2 is provided load encroachment detection feature based on positive sequence

components measurements.. This feature avoids the function from operating due to
load encroachment. The load encroachment feature for zone 2 can be set using
LoadEnchModZ2 to On or Off.

8.20.7.3 Operation principle of zone 3 GUID-23971D73-2CDE-4757-82A7-14691C34CCCB v3

Zone 3 is used to cover up to the HV side of the transformer, interconnecting bus

network and outgoing lines. The time to trip should be provided in order to
coordinate with the transmission line protection.

The zone 3 will provide protection from phase-to-earth, phase-phase and three-
phase faults on the HV side of the system. The zone 3 functionality is same as zone
2 hence the explanation of zone 2 applies except the zone 3 has separate reach
(Z3Fwd, Z3Rev), operate timer (tZ3) and load encroachment enable
(LoadEnchModZ3) settings.

8.20.7.4 Load encroachment GUID-DA94E18E-983C-44FA-B643-CAF016CB87F7 v3

The load encroachment characteristics can be set for zone2 and zone3. Load
encroachment can be enabled for zone 2 by setting LoadEnchModZ2 to On.
Similarly the load encroachment for zone 3 can be enabled by setting
LoadEnchModZ3 to On.

The load encroachment characteristic is based on positive sequence quantities and

can be set using the settings RLd and ArgLd.

RLd is the positive sequence resistive reach value in percentage. ArgLd is angle in
degrees from the origin to the resistive axis as shown in Figure 273.

538 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 8
Impedance protection

Load encroachment characteristic

jX

ArgLd ArgLd

-RLd RLd R
ArgLd ArgLd

IEC11000304_1_en
IEC11000304 V1 EN-US

Figure 273: Load encroachment characteristics

8.20.7.5 Under voltage seal-in GUID-03357A87-A879-477C-ADBE-CC28AB54D34E v4

The under voltage seal-in logic ensures the trip under fault condition, where as
under impedance function will reset due to CT saturation. The start signal of zone 2
and zone 3 elements trigger the under voltage seal-in. This can be selected using
the setting OpModeU< . The setting OpModeU< can be selected as Off or Z2Start
or Z3Start. Select Z2Start to choose zone 2 for triggering the seal-in logic.
Similarly, select Z3Start to choose zone 3 for triggering the seal-in logic.

Under voltage seal-in is activated from the criterion based on line-to-line voltage
magnitude. The voltage criteria checks by comparing all three line-to-line voltage
levels with the level given by the setting parameter U<. If any loop detects lower
voltage, the under voltage seal-in logic gets triggered, provided the respective
selected zone start is also high. Once the under voltage seal-in logic is triggered,
the pick-up signal STUV becomes high. If it is constantly high for a time longer
than the setting tU<, the tripping signal TRUV is issued as a pulse signal with a
duration of one second.

Figure 274 shows the functionality of under voltage seal-in for zone 2 and zone 3.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 539

Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Impedance protection

- STUV
q1
BLOCK
BLKUV 1 tU<
TRUV
Zone 2 Start & t
tPulse = 1sec
&
OpModeU< =
10 ms -
0 = Off b0 1 q1
int 1 t
1 = Z2Start
2 = Z3Start b1
Drop-Off
& timer
Zone 3 Start

uP1P2 a
a<b
U< b

uP2P3 a
a<b 1
U< b

uP3P1 a
a< b
U< b

IEC11000306-3-en.vsd

IEC11000306 V3 EN-US

Figure 274: Under voltage seal-in for zone 2 and zone 3

8.20.8 Technical data

GUID-E8104D00-3183-4F55-89F9-A74B14BFE6FE v7

Table 269: ZGVPDIS technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones 3 -
±5.0% of set impedance
(3.0 - 200.0)% of Zr Conditions:
Forward reach Voltage range: (0.1 - 1.1) x Ur
where Zr=UBase/√3∗IBase
Current range: (0.5 - 30) x Ir

±5.0% of set impedance

(3.0 - 200.0)% of Zr Conditions:
Reverse reach Voltage range: (0.1 - 1.1) x Ur
where Zr=UBase/√3∗IBase
Current range: (0.5 - 30) x Ir

Impedance angle (5 - 90) degrees -

Reset ratio 105% typically -
Start time at 1.2 x set Min. = 15 ms
impedance to 0.8 x set -
impedance Max. = 35 ms

Independent time delay to

±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is
operate at 1.2 x set impedance (0.000 – 60.000) s
greater
to 0.8 x set impedance

540 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Section 9 Current protection

9.1 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection

PHPIOC IP14506-1 v6

9.1.1 Identification
M14880-1 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Instantaneous phase overcurrent PHPIOC 50
protection
3I>>

SYMBOL-Z V1 EN-US

9.1.2 Functionality M12910-3 v13

The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low transient overreach
and short tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit protection function.

9.1.3 Function block M12602-3 v6

PHPIOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK TRL1
ENMULT TRL2
TRL3

IEC04000391-2-en.vsd
IEC04000391 V2 EN-US

Figure 275: PHPIOC function block

9.1.4 Signals IP11433-1 v2

PID-6914-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 270: PHPIOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase current
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable current start value multiplier

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 541

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

PID-6914-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 271: PHPIOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal from any phase
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3

9.1.5 Settings IP11434-1 v2

PID-6914-SETTINGS v3

Table 272: PHPIOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode 2 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Select operation mode 2-out of 3 / 1-out
1 out of 3 of 3
IP>> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate phase current level in % of
IBase

Table 273: PHPIOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IP>>Min 5 - 2500 %IB 1 5 Minimum used operate phase current
level in % of IBase, if IP>> is less than
IP>>Min then IP>> is set to IP>>Min
IP>>Max 5 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum used operate phase current
level in % of IBase, if IP>> is greater
than IP>>Max then IP>> is set to
IP>>Max
StValMult 0.5 - 5.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for operate current level

Table 274: PHPIOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

9.1.6 Monitored data

PID-6914-MONITOREDDATA v3

Table 275: PHPIOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A Current in phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current in phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current in phase L3

542 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

9.1.7 Operation principle M12913-3 v8

The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter
(DFT) block. The RMS value of each phase current is derived from the
fundamental frequency components, as well as sampled values of each phase
current. These phase current values are fed to the instantaneous phase overcurrent
protection 3-phase output function PHPIOC. In a comparator the RMS values are
compared to the set operation current value of the function (IP>>).

If a phase current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the
comparator for this phase is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the
output signal TRLn (n=1,2,3) for this phase and the TRIP signal that is common
for all three phases.

There is an operation mode (OpMode) setting: 1 out of 3 or 2 out of 3. If the

parameter is set to 1 out of 3, any phase trip signal will be activated. If the
parameter is set to 2 out of 3, at least two phase signals must be activated for trip.

There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current
(StValMult) via a binary input (ENMULT). In some applications the operation
value needs to be changed, for example, due to transformer inrush currents.

The operation current value IP>>, is limited to be between IP>>Max and

IP>>Min. The default values of the limits are the same as the setting limits for
IP>>, and the limits can only be used for reducing the allowed range of IP>>.
This feature is used when remote setting of the operation current value is allowed,
making it possible to ensure that the operation value used is reasonable. If IP>> is
set outside IP>>Max and IP>>Min, the closest of the limits to IP>> is used by the
function. If IP>>Max is smaller then IP>>Min, the limits are swapped. The
principle of the limitation is shown in Figure 276.

IP>>Max
MAX hi

u y
IP>>_used
IP>>

MIN lo
IP>>Min
IEC17000016-1-en.vsdx
IEC17000016 V1 EN-US

Figure 276: Logic for limitation of used operation current value

PHPIOC can be blocked using the binary input BLOCK.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 543

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

9.1.8 Technical data IP11435-1 v1

M12336-1 v13

Table 276: PHPIOC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of IBase -

Operate time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Operate time at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 5 ms -

Max. = 15 ms
Reset time at 10 x Iset to 0 Min. = 25 ms -
Max. = 40 ms
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset -

Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -

9.2 Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps

OC4PTOC SEMOD129998-1 v8

9.2.1 Identification
M14885-1 v6

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Directional phase overcurrent OC4PTOC 51_67
protection, four steps

TOC-REVA V2 EN-US

9.2.2 Functionality M12846-3 v17

Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps (OC4PTOC) has an inverse or

definite time delay for each step.

All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available together with an
optional user defined time characteristic.

544 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

The directional function needs voltage as it is voltage polarized with memory. The
function can be set to be directional or non-directional independently for each of
the steps.

A second harmonic blocking level can be set for the function and can be used to
block each step individually.

9.2.3 Function block M12609-3 v8

OC4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TR1
BLOCK TR2
BLKTR TR3
BLKST1 TR4
BLKST2 TRL1
BLKST3 TRL2
BLKST4 TRL3
ENMULT1 TR1L1
ENMULT2 TR1L2
ENMULT3 TR1L3
ENMULT4 TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
TR3L1
TR3L2
TR3L3
TR4L1
TR4L2
TR4L3
START
ST1
ST2
ST3
ST4
STL1
STL2
STL3
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
ST3L1
ST3L2
ST3L3
ST4L1
ST4L2
ST4L3
ST2NDHRM
DIRL1
DIRL2
DIRL3
STDI RCND
IEC06000187-4-en.vsdx
IEC06000187 V4 EN-US

Figure 277: OC4PTOC function block

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 545

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

9.2.4 Signals
PID-6973-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 277: OC4PTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step1
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step2
BLKST3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step3
BLKST4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step4
ENMULT1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step1
ENMULT2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step2
ENMULT3 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step3
ENMULT4 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step4

PID-6973-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 278: OC4PTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TR2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
TR3 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step3
TR4 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step4
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
TR1L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L1
TR1L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L2
TR1L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L3
TR2L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L1
TR2L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L2
TR2L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L3
TR3L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step3 phase L1
TR3L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step3 phase L2
Table continues on next page

546 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Name Type Description

TR3L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step3 phase L3
TR4L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step4 phase L1
TR4L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step4 phase L2
TR4L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step4 phase L3
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step1
ST2 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step2
ST3 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step3
ST4 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step4
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
ST1L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L1
ST1L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L2
ST1L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L3
ST2L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L1
ST2L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L2
ST2L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L3
ST3L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step3 phase L1
ST3L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step3 phase L2
ST3L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step3 phase L3
ST4L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step4 phase L1
ST4L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step4 phase L2
ST4L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step4 phase L3
ST2NDHRM BOOLEAN Second harmonic detected
DIRL1 INTEGER Direction for phase1
DIRL2 INTEGER Direction for phase2
DIRL3 INTEGER Direction for phase3
STDIRCND INTEGER Binary coded start and directional information

9.2.5 Settings
PID-6973-SETTINGS v3

Table 279: OC4PTOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
AngleRCA 40 - 65 Deg 1 55 Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
AngleROA 40 - 89 Deg 1 80 Relay operation angle (ROA)
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 547

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

StartPhSel 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of
2 out of 3 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3)
3 out of 3
DirMode1 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for
ANSI Very inv. step 1
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I1> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 1000 Operating phase current level for step 1
in % of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Def time delay or add time delay for
inverse char of step 1
k1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
IMin1 1 - 10000 %IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step1 in %
of IBase
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
I1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for
step 1
DirMode2 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

548 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist2 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for
ANSI Very inv. step 2
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 500 Operating phase current level for step 2
in % of IBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Def time delay or add time delay for
inverse char of step 2
k2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 2
IMin2 1 - 10000 %IB 1 50 Minimum operate current for step2 in %
of IBase
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 2
I2Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for
step 2
DirMode3 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 3 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist3 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for
ANSI Very inv. step 3
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I3> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 250 Operating phase current level for step 3
in % of IBase
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Def time delay or add time delay for
inverse char of step 3
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 549

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

k3 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 3
IMin3 1 - 10000 %IB 1 33 Minimum operate current for step3 in %
of IBase
t3Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 3
I3Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for
step 3
DirMode4 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 4 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for
ANSI Very inv. step 4
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I4> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 175 Operating phase current level for step 4
in % of IBase
t4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Def time delay or add time delay for
inverse char of step 4
k4 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 4
IMin4 1 - 10000 %IB 1 17 Minimum operate current for step4 in %
of IBase
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 4
I4Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for
step 4

Table 280: OC4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IMinOpPhSel 1 - 100 %IB 1 7 Minimum current for phase selection in
% of IBase
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 % 1 20 Operate level of 2nd harmonic curr in %
of fundamental curr
I1>Min 5 - 2500 %IB 1 5 Minimum used operating phase current
level for step 1 in % of IBase, if I1> is
less than I1>Min then I1> is set to
I1>Min
Table continues on next page

550 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

I1>Max 5 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum used operating phase current
level for step 1 in % of IBase, if I1> is
greater than I1>Max then I1> is set to
I1>Max
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 1
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for step 1
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for step 1
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for step 1
HarmBlock1 Off - - Off Enable block of step 1 from harmonic
On restrain
I2>Min 5 - 2500 %IB 1 5 Minimum used operating phase current
level for step 2 in % of IBase, if I2> is
less than I2>Min then I2> is set to
I2>Min
I2>Max 5 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum used operating phase current
level for step 2 in % of IBase, if I2> is
greater than I2>Max then I2> is set to
I2>Max
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 2
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 2
tPCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 2
tACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 2
tBCrv2 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 2
tCCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 2
tPRCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for step 2
tTRCrv2 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for step 2
tCRCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for step 2
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 551

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

HarmBlock2 Off - - Off Enable block of step 2 from harmonic
On restrain
I3>Min 5 - 2500 %IB 1 5 Minimum used operating phase current
level for step 3 in % of IBase, if I3> is
less than I3>Min then I3> is set to
I3>Min
I3>Max 5 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum used operating phase current
level for step 3 in % of IBase, if I3> is
greater than I3>Max then I3> is set to
I3>Max
ResetTypeCrv3 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 3
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 3
tPCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 3
tACrv3 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 3
tBCrv3 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 3
tCCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 3
tPRCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for step 3
tTRCrv3 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for step 3
tCRCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for step 3
HarmBlock3 Off - - Off Enable block of step 3 from harmonic
On restrain
I4>Min 5 - 2500 %IB 1 5 Minimum used operating phase current
level for step 4 in % of IBase, if I4> is
less than I4>Min then I4> is set to
I4>Min
I4>Max 5 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum used operating phase current
level for step 4 in % of IBase, if I4> is
greater than I4>Max then I4> is set to
I4>Max
ResetTypeCrv4 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 4
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 4
tPCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 4
tACrv4 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 4
tBCrv4 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 4
tCCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 4
Table continues on next page

552 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tPRCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for step 4
tTRCrv4 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for step 4
tCRCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for step 4
HarmBlock4 Off - - Off Enable block of step 4 from harmonic
On restrain

Table 281: OC4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MeasType DFT - - DFT Selection between DFT and RMS
RMS measurement
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

9.2.6 Monitored data

PID-6973-MONITOREDDATA v3

Table 282: OC4PTOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
DIRL1 INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction for phase1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
DIRL2 INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction for phase2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
DIRL3 INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction for phase3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
IL1 REAL - A Current in phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current in phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current in phase L3

9.2.7 Operation principle M12883-3 v10

Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps OC4PTOC is divided into four
different sub-functions. For each step x , where x is step 1, 2, 3 and 4, an operation
mode is set by DirModex: Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse.

The protection design can be divided into four parts:

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 553

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

• The direction element

• The harmonic restraint blocking function
• The four step overcurrent function
• The mode selection

If VT inputs are not available or not connected, setting parameter

DirModex shall be left to default value, Non-directional.

4 step overcurrent
Direction dirPh1Flt element faultState
faultState
Element One element for each
dirPh2Flt step
I3P dirPh3Flt START

U3P

TRIP

Harmonic harmRestrBlock
Restraint
Element

enableDir
Mode Selection
enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4

IEC05000740-3-en.vsdx

IEC05000740 V3 EN-US

Figure 278: Functional overview of OC4PTOC

M12883-16 v11

A common setting for all steps, StartPhSel, is used to specify the number of phase
currents to be high to enable operation. These settings can be chosen: 1 out of 3, 2
out of 3 or 3 out of 3.

Using a parameter setting MeasType within the general settings for the function
OC4PTOC, it is possible to select the type of the measurement used for all
overcurrent stages. Either discrete Fourier filter (DFT) or true RMS filter (RMS)
can be selected.

If the DFT option is selected, only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency
component of each phase current is derived. The influence of the DC current
component and higher harmonic current components are almost completely
suppressed. If the RMS option is selected, then the true RMS value is used. The
true RMS value includes the contribution from the current DC component as well
as from the higher current harmonic in addition to the fundamental frequency
component.

554 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

In a comparator, the DFT or RMS values are compared to the set operation current
value of the function (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>) for each phase current. If a phase
current is larger than the set operation current, outputs START, STx, STL1, STL2
and STL3 are activated without delay. Output signals STL1, STL2 and STL3 are
common for all steps. This means that the lowest set step will initiate the
activation. The START signal is common for all three phases and all steps. It shall
be noted that the selection of measured value (DFT or RMS) do not influence the
operation of directional part of OC4PTOC.

Service values for individually measured phase currents are available on the local
HMI for OC4PTOC function, which simplifies testing, commissioning and in
service operational checking of the function.

A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in
relation to the fundamental current is used.

The function can be directional.The direction of a fault is given as the current angle
in relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage for the
directional function are dependent on the fault type. The selection of the measured
value (DFT or RMS) does not influence the operation of the directional part of
OC4PTOC. To enable directional measurement at close-in faults, causing a low
measured voltage, the polarization voltage is a combination of the apparent voltage
(85%) and a memory voltage (15%). The following combinations are used.

Phase-phase short circuit:

U refL1L 2 = U L1 - U L 2 I dirL1L 2 = I L1 - I L 2
EQUATION1449 V1 EN-US (Equation 131)

U refL 2 L 3 = U L 2 - U L 3 I dirL 2 L 3 = I L 2 - I L 3
EQUATION1450 V1 EN-US (Equation 132)

U refL 3 L1 = U L 3 - U L1 I dirL 3 L1 = I L 3 - I L1
EQUATION1451 V1 EN-US (Equation 133)

Phase-earth short circuit:

U refL1 = U L1 I dirL1 = I L1
EQUATION1452 V1 EN-US (Equation 134)

U refL 2 = U L 2 I dirL 2 = I L 2
EQUATION1453 V1 EN-US (Equation 135)

U refL 3 = U L 3 I dirL 3 = I L 3
EQUATION1454 V1 EN-US (Equation 136)

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 555

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage

exceeds 5% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can be used
for all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.

For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.

The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored.

After 100 ms, the following occurs:

• If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current (7%
of the set terminal rated current IBase), the condition seals in.
• If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.
• If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element
in the reverse direction remains in operation.
• If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory
resets until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

The directional setting is given as a characteristic angle AngleRCA for the function
and an angle window ROADir.

Reverse

Uref

RCA
ROA

ROA Forward

Idir

en05000745.vsd
IEC05000745 V1 EN-US

Figure 279: Directional characteristic of the phase overcurrent protection

556 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

The default value of AngleRCA is –55°. The parameter AngleROA gives the
angular distance from AngleRCA to define the directional borders.

A minimum current for the directional phase start current signal can be set.
IMinOpPhSel is the start level for the directional evaluation of IL1, IL2 and IL3.
The directional signals release the overcurrent measurement in the respective
phases if their current amplitudes are higher than the start level (IMinOpPhSel) and
the direction of the current is according to the set direction of the step.

If no blocking signals are active, the start signal will start the timer of the steps.
The time characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or an
inverse time delay characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time delay
characteristics is available. It is also possible to create a tailor made time
characteristic.

The possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in section "Inverse
characteristics".

Characteristx=DefTime
|IOP| AND
tx TRx
a OR
a>b
Ix> b

AND
STx

txmin
BLKSTx AND
BLOCK
Inverse

Characteristx=Inverse

DirModex=Off OR STAGEx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse

AND
REVERSE_Int

IEC12000008.vsd
IEC12000008.vsd

IEC12000008 V2 EN-US

Figure 280: Simplified logic diagram for OC4PTOC

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 557

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

I3P
DFWDLx

U3P DFWDLxx

DREVLx
Directional
Element
AngleRCA DREVLxx FORWARD_int

Directional
AngleROA Release REVERSE_int
Block

STLx

Greater
IMinOpPhSel Comparator
x‐ means three phases 1,2 and 3
xx – means phase to phase 12,23,31

IEC15000266-2-en.vsdx
IEC15000266 V2 EN-US

Figure 281: OC4 directional release block diagram

Different types of reset time can be selected as described in section "Inverse

characteristics".

There is a possibility to activate a preset change (IxMult x= 1, 2, 3 or 4) of the set

operation current via a binary input ENMULTx (enable multiplier). In some
applications the operation value needs to be changed, for example due to changed
network switching state.

The operation current value Ix>, is limited to be between Ix>Max and Ix>Min. The
default values of the limits are the same as the setting limits for Ix>, and the limits
can only be used for reducing the allowed range of Ix>. This feature is used when
remote setting of the operation current value is allowed, making it possible to
ensure that the operation value used is reasonable. If Ix> is set outside Ix>Max and
Ix>Min, the closest of the limits to Ix> is used by the function. If Ix>Max is
smaller then Ix>Min, the limits are swapped. The principle of the limitation is
shown in Figure 282.

Ix>Max
MAX hi

u y
Ix>_used
Ix>

MIN lo
Ix>Min

IEC17000018-1-en.vsdx
IEC17000018 V1 EN-US

Figure 282: Logic for limitation of used operation current value

558 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

The STDIRCND output provides an integer signal that depends on the start and
directional evaluation and is derived from a binary coded signal as described in
Table 283.
Table 283: Code description for STDIRCND output signal
STDIRCND Description
bit 0 (1) General start
bit 1 (2) Direction detected in forward
bit 2 (4) Direction detected in reverse
bit 3 (8) Start in phase L1
bit 4 (16) Forward direction detected in phase L1
bit 5 (32) Reverse direction detected in phase L1
bit 6 (64) Start in phase L2
bit 7 (128) Forward direction detected in phase L2
bit 8 (256) Reverse direction detected in phase L2
bit 9 (512) Start in phase L3
bit 10 (1024) Forward direction detected in phase L3
bit 11 (2048) Reverse direction detected in phase L3

All four steps in OC4PTOC can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The
binary input BLKSTx (x=1, 2, 3 or 4) blocks the operation of the respective step.

The start signals from the function can be blocked by the binary input BLKST.The
trip signals from the function can be blocked by the binary input BLKTR.
GUID-E3980B2D-EEDA-4BF1-A07D-E7B721130554 v5

A harmonic restrain of the directional phase overcurrent protection function

OC4PTOC can be chosen. If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to
the fundamental frequency component in a phase current exceeds the preset level
defined by the parameter 2ndHarmStab setting, any of the four overcurrent stages
can be selectively blocked by the parameter HarmBlockx setting. When the 2nd
harmonic restraint feature is active, the OC4PTOC function output signal
ST2NDHRM will be set to the logical value one.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 559

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

BLOCK

a
a>b
0.07*IBase b

a
a>b
b
Extract second AND
IOP
harmonic current a
a>b
component b

2ndH_BLOCK_Int
Extract
fundamental
current component
X
2ndHarmStab

IEC13000014-2-en.vsd
IEC13000014 V2 EN-US

Figure 283: Second harmonic blocking

9.2.8 Technical data

M12342-1 v20

Table 284: OC4PTOC technical data

Function Setting range Accuracy
Operate current, step 1-4 (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of lBase -

Minimum operate current, step 1-4 (1-10000)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Relay characteristic angle (RCA) (40.0–65.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees

Relay operating angle (ROA) (40.0–89.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Second harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ±2.0% of Ir

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset, step (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms

1-4 whichever is
greater
Minimum operate time for inverse curves , (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
step 1-4 whichever is
greater
Inverse time characteristics, see table 1130, 16 curve types See table 1130,
table 1131 and table 1132 table 1131 and
table 1132
Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to 2 x Min. = 15 ms -
Iset
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start non-directional at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to 10 Min. = 5 ms -
x Iset Max. = 20 ms

Reset time, start non-directional at 10 x Iset to Min. = 20 ms -

0 Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

560 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

9.3 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection

EFPIOC IP14508-1 v3

9.3.1 Identification
M14887-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Instantaneous residual overcurrent EFPIOC 50N
protection
IN>>

IEF V1 EN-US

9.3.2 Functionality M12701-3 v16

The Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (EFPIOC) has a low transient

overreach and short tripping times to allow use for instantaneous earth-fault
protection, with the reach limited to less than typical eighty percent of the
transformer impedance at minimum source impedance. EFPIOC can be configured
to measure the residual current from the three-phase current inputs or the current
from a separate current input.

9.3.3 Function block M12614-3 v6

EFPIOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK
BLKAR
ENMULT

IEC06000269-3-en.vsdx
IEC06000269 V3 EN-US

Figure 284: EFPIOC function block

9.3.4 Signals IP11448-1 v2

PID-6915-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 285: EFPIOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase currents
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKAR BOOLEAN 0 Block input for auto reclose
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable current multiplier

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 561

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

PID-6915-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 286: EFPIOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal

9.3.5 Settings IP11449-1 v2

PID-6915-SETTINGS v4

Table 287: EFPIOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IN>> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate residual current level in % of
IBase

Table 288: EFPIOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IN>>Min 5 - 2500 %IB 1 5 Minimum used operate residual current
level in % of IBase, if IN>> is less than
IN>>Min then IN>> is set to IN>>Min
IN>>Max 5 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum used operate residual current
level in % of IBase, if IN>> is greater
than IN>>Max then IN>> is set to
IN>>Max
StValMult 0.5 - 5.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for operate current level

Table 289: EFPIOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

9.3.6 Monitored data

PID-6915-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 290: EFPIOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IN REAL - A Residual current

9.3.7 Operation principle M12704-3 v8

The sampled analog residual currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter
(DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of the residual current,
as well as from the sample values the equivalent RMS value is derived. This

562 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

current value is fed to the Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (EFPIOC).

In a comparator the RMS value is compared to the set operation current value of
the function (IN>>).

If the residual current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the
comparator is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal
TRIP.

There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current
via a binary input (enable multiplier ENMULT). In some applications the operation
value needs to be changed, for example, due to transformer inrush currents.

The operation current value IN>>, is limited to be between IN>>Max and

IN>>Min. The default values of the limits are the same as the setting limits for
IN>>, and the limits can only be used for reducing the allowed range of IN>>.
This feature is used when remote setting of the operation current value is allowed,
making it possible to ensure that the operation value used is reasonable. If IN>> is
set outside IN>>Max and IN>>Min, the closest of the limits to IN>> is used by
the function. If IN>>Max is smaller then IN>>Min, the limits are swapped. The
principle of the limitation is shown in Figure 285.

IN>>Max
MAX hi

u y
IN>>_used
IN>>

MIN lo
IN>>Min

IEC17000015-1-en.vsdx
IEC17000015 V1 EN-US

Figure 285: Logic for limitation of used operation current value

EFPIOC function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The trip signals
from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKAR, that can be
activated during single pole trip and autoreclosing sequences.

9.3.8 Technical data IP11450-1 v1

M12340-2 v9

Table 291: EFPIOC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of lBase -

Operate time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 563

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Operate time at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 5 ms -

Max. = 15 ms
Reset time at 10 x Iset to 0 Min. = 25 ms -
Max. = 35 ms
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset -

Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -

9.4 Directional residual overcurrent protection, four

steps EF4PTOC IP14509-1 v8

9.4.1 Identification
M14881-1 v6

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Directional residual overcurrent EF4PTOC 51N_67N
4(IN>)
protection, four steps
4
alt
4
TEF-REVA V2 EN-US

9.4.2 Functionality M13667-3 v19

EF4PTOC has an inverse or definite time delay independent for each step.

All IEC and ANSI time-delayed characteristics are available together with an
optional user-defined characteristic.

EF4PTOC can be set to be directional or non-directional independently for each

step.

IDir, UPol and IPol can be independently selected to be either zero sequence or
negative sequence.

A second harmonic blocking can be set individually for each step.

The residual current can be calculated by summing the three-phase currents or

taking the input from the neutral CT.

564 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

9.4.3 Function block M12619-3 v8

EF4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRIN1
I3PPOL* TRIN2
I3PDIR* TRIN3
BLOCK TRIN4
BLKTR TRSOTF
BLKST1 START
BLKST2 STIN1
BLKST3 STIN2
BLKST4 STIN3
ENMULT1 STIN4
ENMULT2 STSOTF
ENMULT3 STFW
ENMULT4 STRV
CBPOS 2NDHARMD
CLOSECB
OPENCB
IEC06000424-5-en.vsdx
IEC06000424 V5 EN-US

Figure 286: EF4PTOC function block

9.4.4 Signals IP11453-1 v2

PID-6967-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 292: EF4PTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group connection for operate current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group connection for polarizing voltage
SIGNAL
I3PPOL GROUP - Group connection for polarizing current
SIGNAL
I3PDIR GROUP - Group connection for directional current
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 (Start and trip)
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 (Start and trip)
BLKST3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 3 (Start and trip)
BLKST4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 4 (Start and trip)
ENMULT1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step1
ENMULT2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step2
ENMULT3 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step3
ENMULT4 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step4
CBPOS BOOLEAN 0 Breaker position
CLOSECB BOOLEAN 0 Breaker close command
OPENCB BOOLEAN 0 Breaker open command

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 565

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

PID-6967-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 293: EF4PTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TRIN1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TRIN2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
TRIN3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 3
TRIN4 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 4
TRSOTF BOOLEAN Trip signal from earth fault switch onto fault
function
START BOOLEAN General start signal
STIN1 BOOLEAN Start signal step 1
STIN2 BOOLEAN Start signal step 2
STIN3 BOOLEAN Start signal step 3
STIN4 BOOLEAN Start signal step 4
STSOTF BOOLEAN Start signal from earth fault switch onto fault
function
STFW BOOLEAN Start signal forward direction
STRV BOOLEAN Start signal reverse direction
2NDHARMD BOOLEAN 2nd harmonic block signal

9.4.5 Settings IP11454-1 v2

PID-6967-SETTINGS v3

Table 294: EF4PTOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
EnDir Disable - - Enable Enabling the Directional calculation
Enable
AngleRCA -180 - 180 Deg 1 65 Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA)
polMethod Voltage - - Voltage Type of polarization
Current
Dual
UPolMin 1 - 100 %UB 1 1 Minimum voltage level for polarization in
% of UBase
IPolMin 2 - 100 %IB 1 5 Minimum current level for polarization in
% of IBase
RNPol 0.50 - 1000.00 Ohm 0.01 5.00 Real part of source impedance used for
current polarisation
XNPol 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm 0.01 40.00 Imaginary part of source imp. used for
current polarisation
IN>Dir 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Residual current level in % of IBase for
Direction release
Table continues on next page

566 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 % 1 20 Operate level of 2nd harmonic curr in %
of fundamental curr
BlkParTransf Off - - Off Enable blocking at energizing of parallel
On transformers
UseStartValue IN1> - - IN4> Current level blk at parallel transf (step1,
IN2> 2, 3 or 4)
IN3>
IN4>
SOTF Off - - Off SOTF operation mode (Off/SOTF/
SOTF Undertime/SOTF&Undertime)
UnderTime
SOTF&UnderTime
ActivationSOTF Open - - Open Select signal to activate SOTF: CB-
Closed Open/ -Closed/ -Close cmd
CloseCommand
StepForSOTF Step 2 - - Step 2 Select start from step 2 or 3 to start
Step 3 SOTF
HarmBlkSOTF Off - - Off Enable harmonic restrain function in
On SOTF
tSOTF 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay for SOTF
t4U 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Switch-onto-fault active time
ActUnderTime CB position - - CB position Select signal to activate under time (CB
CB command Pos / CB Command)
tUnderTime 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay for under time
DirMode1 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (Off, Non-dir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 1
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IN1> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 100 Residual current operate level for step 1
in % of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Def time delay or add time delay for
inverse char of step 1
k1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 1 selected
time characteristic
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 567

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IMin1 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 100.00 Minimum operate residual current for
step 1 in % of IBase
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 1
IN1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for the residual current setting
value for step 1
HarmBlock1 Off - - On Enable block of step 1 from harmonic
On restrain
DirMode2 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 (Off, Non-dir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist2 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 2
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IN2> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 50 Residual current operate level for step 2
in % of IBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Def time delay or add time delay for
inverse char of step 2
k2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 2 selected
time characteristic
IMin2 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 50 Minimum operate residual current for
step 2 in % of IBase
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 2
IN2Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for the residual current setting
value for step 2
HarmBlock2 Off - - On Enable block of step 2 from harmonic
On restrain
DirMode3 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 3 (Off, Non-dir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

568 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist3 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 3
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IN3> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 33 Residual current operate level for step 3
in % of IBase
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Def time delay or add time delay for
inverse char of step 3
k3 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 3 selected
time characteristic
IMin3 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 33 Minimum operate residual current for
step 3 in % of IBase
t3Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 3
IN3Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for the residual current setting
value for step 3
HarmBlock3 Off - - On Enable block of step 3 from harmonic
On restrain
DirMode4 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 4 (Off, Non-dir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 4
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IN4> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 17 Residual current operate level for step 4
in % of IBase
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 569

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

t4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Def time delay or add time delay for
inverse char of step 4
k4 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 4 selected
time characteristic
IMin4 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 17 Minimum operate residual current for
step 4 in % of IBase
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 4
IN4Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for the residual current setting
value for step 4
HarmBlock4 Off - - On Enable block of step 4 from harmonic
On restrain

Table 295: EF4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IN1>Min 1 - 2500 %IB 1 1 Minimum used operate residual current
level for step 1 in % of IBase, if IN1> is
less than IN1>Min then IN1> is set to
IN1>Min
IN1>Max 1 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum used operate residual current
level for step 1 in % of IBase, if IN1> is
greater than IN1>Max then IN1> is set to
IN1>Max
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step1
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 1
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 1
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 1
IN2>Min 1 - 2500 %IB 1 1 Minimum used operate residual current
level for step 2 in % of IBase, if IN2> is
less than IN2>Min then IN2> is set to
IN2>Min
IN2>Max 1 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum used operate residual current
level for step 2 in % of IBase, if IN2> is
greater than IN2>Max then IN2> is set to
IN2>Max
Table continues on next page

570 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step2
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 2
tPCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tBCrv2 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tCCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tPRCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
tTRCrv2 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
tCRCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
IN3>Min 1 - 2500 %IB 1 1 Minimum used operate residual current
level for step 3 in % of IBase, if IN3> is
less than IN3>Min then IN3> is set to
IN3>Min
IN3>Max 1 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum used operate residual current
level for step 3 in % of IBase, if IN3> is
greater than IN3>Max then IN3> is set to
IN3>Max
ResetTypeCrv3 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step3
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 3
tPCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tACrv3 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tBCrv3 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tCCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tPRCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 3
tTRCrv3 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 3
tCRCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 3
IN4>Min 1 - 2500 %IB 1 1 Minimum used operate residual current
level for step 4 in % of IBase, if IN4> is
less than IN4>Min then IN4> is set to
IN4>Min
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 571

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IN4>Max 1 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum used operate residual current
level for step 4 in % of IBase, if IN4> is
greater than IN4>Max then IN4> is set to
IN4>Max
ResetTypeCrv4 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step4
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 4
tPCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
tACrv4 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
tBCrv4 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
tCCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
tPRCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 4
tTRCrv4 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 4
tCRCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 4

Table 296: EF4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
SeqTypeIDir Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for directional
Neg seq current
SeqTypeIPol Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for polarizing
Neg seq current
SeqTypeUPol Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for polarizing
Neg seq voltage

9.4.6 Monitored data

PID-6967-MONITOREDDATA v3

Table 297: EF4PTOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IOp REAL - A Operating current level
UPol REAL - kV Polarizing voltage level
IPol REAL - A Polarizing current level
UPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing angle
between voltage and
current
IPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing current angle

572 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

9.4.7 Operation principle IP12992-1 v2

M13941-51 v7

This function has the following four analog inputs on its function block in the
configuration tool:

1. I3P, input used for the operating quantity. Supplies the zero-sequence
magnitude measuring functionality.
2. U3P, input used for the voltage polarizing quantity. Supplies either the zero or
the negative sequence voltage to the directional functionality
3. I3PPOL, input used for the current polarizing quantity. Provides polarizing
current to the directional functionality. This current is normally taken from the
grounding of a power transformer.
4. I3PDIR, input used for directional detection. Supplies either the zero or the
negative sequence current to the directional functionality.

These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks
in the configuration tool in PCM600.

9.4.7.1 Operating quantity within the function M13941-58 v9

The function always uses residual current (3I0) for its operating quantity. The
residual current can be:

1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in

PCM600 to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to
EF4PTOC function input I3P). This dedicated IED CT input can be, for
example, connected to:
• parallel connection of current instrument transformers in all three phases
(Holm-Green connection).
• one single core balance current instrument transformer (cable CT).
• one single current instrument transformer located between power system
star point and earth (current transformer located in the star point of a star
connected transformer winding).
• one single current instrument transformer located between two parts of a
protected object (current transformer located between two star points of
double star shunt capacitor bank).
2. calculated from three-phase current input within the IED (when the fourth
analog input of the pre-processing block, connected to EF4PTOC function
Analog Input I3P, is not connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in
PCM600). In such a case, the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the
first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula
(will take 3I0 from SMAI AI3P and will be connected to I3PDIR and I3P
inputs.

If the zero sequence current is selected,

Iop = 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

EQUATION1874 V2 EN-US (Equation 137)

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 573

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of
the fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. The
phasor magnitude is used within the EF4PTOC protection to compare it with the
set operation current value of the four steps (IN1>, IN2>, IN3> or IN4>).

If the residual current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in
non-directional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This
signal will, without delay, activate the output signal STINx (x=step 1-4) for this
step and a common START signal.

9.4.7.2 Internal polarizing M13941-82 v11

A polarizing quantity is used within the protection in order to determine the

direction to the earth fault (forward/reverse).

The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual
polarizing.

Voltage polarizing
When voltage polarizing is selected, the protection will use the residual voltage
-3U0 as the polarizing quantity U3P.

This voltage can be:

1. directly measured (when a dedicated VT input of the IED is connected in

PCM600 to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to
EF4PTOC function input U3P). This dedicated IED VT input shall be then
connected to the open delta winding of a three-phase main VT.
2. calculated from three-phase voltage input within the IED (when the fourth
analog input of the pre-processing block, connected to EF4PTOC analog
function input U3P, is NOT connected to a dedicated VT input of the IED in
PCM600). In such a case, the pre-processing block will calculate -3U0 from
the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following
formula:

UPol = -3U 0 = -(UL1 + UL2 + UL3)

EQUATION1875 V2 EN-US (Equation 139)

where:
UL1, UL2 and UL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.

In order to use this, all three phase-to-earth voltages must be connected to three IED VT
inputs.

574 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

The residual voltage is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus, the phasor
of the fundamental frequency component of the residual voltage is derived.

This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating directional current, in
order to determine the direction to the earth fault (Forward/Reverse). In order to
enable voltage polarizing the magnitude of polarizing voltage shall be bigger than a
minimum level defined by setting parameter UPolMin.

It shall be noted that residual voltage (-3U0) or negative sequence voltage (-3U2) is
used to determine the location of the earth fault. This ensures the required inversion
of the polarizing voltage within the earth-fault function.

Current polarizing
When current polarizing is selected, the function will use an external residual
current (3I0) as the polarizing quantity IPol. This current can be:

1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in

PCM600 to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block, connected to
EF4PTOC function input I3PPOL). This dedicated IED CT input is then
typically connected to one single current transformer located between power
system star point and earth (current transformer located in the star point of a
star connected transformer winding).
• For some special line protection applications, this dedicated IED CT
input can be connected to a parallel connection of current transformers in
all three phases (Holm-Green connection).
2. calculated from three phase current input within the IED (when the fourth
analog input into the pre-processing block, connected to EF4PTOC function
analog input I3PPOL, is NOT connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in
PCM600). In such case, the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the
first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:

IPol = 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

EQUATION2018 V2 EN-US (Equation 141)

where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus the phasor of
the fundamental frequency component of the polarizing current is derived. This
phasor is then multiplied with the pre-set equivalent zero-sequence source
impedance in order to calculate the equivalent polarizing voltage UIPol in
accordance with the following formula:

UIPol = Z 0s × IPol = (RNPol + j × XNPol) × IPol

EQUATION1877 V2 EN-US (Equation 142)

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 575

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order
to determine the direction to the earth fault (forward/reverse).

In order to enable current polarizing, the magnitude of the polarizing current shall
be bigger than a minimum level defined by setting parameter IPolMin.

Dual polarizing
When dual polarizing is selected, the function will use the vectorial sum of the
voltage based and current based polarizing in accordance with the following
formula:

UTotPol=UPol  UIPol=UPol  Z 0s  IPol  UPol   RNPol  jXNPol   Ipol

IECEQUATION2408 V2 EN-US (Equation 143)

UPol and IPol can be either zero sequence component or negative sequence
component depending upon the user selection.

Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage UTotPol will be used, together with
the phasor of the operating current, to determine the direction of the earth fault
(forward/reverse).

9.4.7.3 External polarizing for earth-fault function M13941-144 v6

The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this
setting is selected, it is possible via the function binary input BLKSTx to provide
external directional control (that is, torque control) by, for example, using one of
the following functions if available in the IED:

1. Distance protection directional function.

2. Negative sequence polarized general current and voltage multi purpose
protection function.

9.4.7.4 Directional detection for earth fault function GUID-FC382DD3-E2C8-455E-8CD5-1DE1793DD178 v6

Zero sequence components will be used for detecting directionality for the earth
fault function. In some cases, zero sequence quantities might detect directionality
incorrectly. In such a scenario, negative sequence quantities will be used. The user
can select either zero sequence components or negative sequence components for
detecting directionality with the parameter SeqTypeIPol. I3PDIR input is always
connected to the same source as I3P input.

9.4.7.5 Base quantities within the protection M13941-152 v6

The base quantities are entered as global settings for all functions in the IED. Base
current (IBase) shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in
primary amperes. Base voltage (UBase) shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase
voltage of the protected object in primary kV.

576 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

9.4.7.6 Internal earth-fault protection structure M13941-157 v5

The protection is internally divided into the following parts:

1. Four residual overcurrent steps.

2. Directional supervision element for residual overcurrent steps with integrated
directional comparison step for communication based earth-fault protection
schemes (permissive or blocking).
3. Second harmonic blocking element with additional feature for sealed-in
blocking during switching of parallel transformers.
4. Switch on to fault feature with integrated Under-Time logic for detection of
breaker problems during breaker opening or closing sequence.

9.4.7.7 Four residual overcurrent steps M13941-166 v8

Each overcurrent step uses operating quantity Iop (residual current) as the
measuring quantity. Each of the four residual overcurrent steps has the following
built-in facilities:

• Directional mode can be set to Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse. By this

parameter setting the directional mode of the step is selected.
• Residual current start value.
• Type of operating characteristic (inverse or definite time). By this parameter
setting it is possible to select inverse or definite time delay for the earth-fault
protection. Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are
available. For the complete list of available inverse curves, please refer to
section "Inverse characteristics".
• Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset / ANSI Reset). By this
parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the step. For
the complete list of available reset curves, please refer to section "Inverse
characteristics".
• Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like
definite time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time
delay and parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
• Supervision by second harmonic blocking feature (On/Off). By this parameter
setting it is possible to prevent operation of the step if the second harmonic
content in the residual current exceeds the preset level.
• Multiplier for scaling of the set residual current pickup value by external
binary signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase residual
current pickup value when function binary input ENMULTx has logical value
1.
• The operation current value INx>, is limited to be between INx>Max and
INx>Min. The default values of the limits are the same as the setting limits for
INx>, and the limits can only be used for reducing the allowed range of INx>.
This feature is used when remote setting of the operation current value is
allowed, making it possible to ensure that the operation value used is
reasonable. If INx> is set outside INx>Max and INx>Min, the closest of the
limits to INx> is used by the function. If INx>Max is smaller then INx>Min,
the limits are swapped. The principle of the limitation is shown in Figure 287.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 577

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

INx>Max
MAX hi

u y
INx>_used
INx>

MIN lo
INx>Min
IEC17000017-1-en.vsdx
IEC17000017 V1 EN-US

Figure 287: Logic for limitation of used operation current value

Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent step is shown in Figure 288.

BLKTR
EMULTX

IMinx Characteristx=DefTime
X T b
a>b
F a
tx TRINx
AND AND
|IOP|
a OR t
a>b
b

STINx
INxMult AND
X T
INx> F
AND Inverse
BLKSTx
AND
BLOCK Characteristx=Inverse

txmin
2ndHarm_BLOCK_Int
OR t
HarmRestrainx=Off

DirModex=Off OR STEPx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse

AND
REVERSE_Int

IEC10000008.vsd

IEC10000008 V5 EN-US

Figure 288: Simplified logic diagram for residual overcurrent step x, where x = step 1, 2, 3 or 4

The protection can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. Output
signals for respective step, and STINx and TRINx, can be blocked from the binary
input BLKSTx. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary
input BLKTR.

9.4.7.8 Directional supervision element with integrated directional

comparison function M13941-179 v11

At least one of the four residual overcurrent steps shall be set as

directional in order to enable execution of the directional

578 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

supervision element and the integrated directional comparison

function.

The protection has an integrated directional feature. As the operating quantity

current Iop is always used, the polarizing method is determined by the parameter
setting polMethod. The polarizing quantity will be selected by the function in one
of the following three ways:

1. When polMethod = Voltage, UPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

2. When polMethod = Current, IPol will be used as polarizing quantity.
3. When polMethod = Dual, UPol + IPol · ZNPol will be used as polarizing
quantity.

The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element,
as shown in Figure 289, in order to determine the direction of the earth fault.

Operating area

STRV
0.6 * IN>DIR
Characteristic for reverse
release of measuring steps
-RCA -85 deg
Characteristic
for STRV 40% of
IN>DIR RCA +85 deg

RCA
65° Upol = -3U 0

-RCA +85 deg

RCA -85 deg

Characteristic for forward
release of measuring steps
IN>DIR

STFW

I op = 3I0

Operating area
Characteristic
for STFW IEC11000243-1-en.ai
IEC11000243 V1 EN-US

Figure 289: Operating characteristic for earth-fault directional element using

the zero sequence components

The relevant setting parameters for the directional supervision element are:

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 579

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

• The directional element will be internally enabled to operate as soon as Iop is

bigger than 40% of IN>Dir and the directional condition is fulfilled in the set
direction.
• The relay characteristic angle AngleRCA, which defines the position of
forward and reverse areas in the operating characteristic.

The directional comparison will set the output binary signals:

1. STFW=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos(φ - AngleRCA) is

bigger than setting parameter IN>Dir and directional supervision element
detects fault in forward direction.
2. STRV=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos(φ - AngleRCA) is
bigger than 60% of setting parameter IN>Dir and directional supervision
element detects fault in reverse direction.

These signals shall be used for communication based earth-fault teleprotection

communication schemes (permissive or blocking).

Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated

directional comparison step is shown in Figure 290:

580 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

| IopDir |
a
a>b STRV
b AND
REVERSE_Int
0.6
X
a
a>b STFW
IN>Dir b AND
FORWARD_Int

X
0.4

FWD
AND FORWARD_Int
AngleRCA
polMethod=Voltage
OR

Characteristic
UPolMin

Directional
polMethod=Dual UPol IPolMin
T
I3PDIR
polMethod=Current 0.0 F
OR
UTotPol
IPol AND REVERSE_Int
T RVS
0.0 F

UIPol STAGE1_DIR_Int
RNPol Complex X T STAGE2_DIR_Int
XNPol Number 0.0 F STAGE3_DIR_Int OR
STAGE4_DIR_Int
BLOCK AND

IEC07000067-6-en.vsdx

IEC07000067 V6 EN-US

Figure 290: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step

9.4.7.9 Second harmonic blocking element M13941-200 v8

A harmonic restrain can be chosen for each step by a parameter setting

HarmBlockx. If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the
fundamental frequency component in the residual current exceeds the preset level
(defined by parameter 2ndHarmStab), output signal 2NDHARMD is set to logical
value one and the harmonic restraining feature to the function block will be
applicable.

Blocking from the 2nd harmonic element activates if all of three criteria are
satisfied:

1. The fundamental frequency component of the current > 1% of IBase

2. The second harmonic component > 1% of IBase
3. The ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental
frequency component in the residual current exceeds the preset level defined
by the parameter 2ndHarmStab setting

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 581

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

In addition to the basic functionality explained above, the 2nd harmonic blocking
can be set in such way to seal-in until residual current disappears. This feature
might be required to stabilize EF4PTOC during switching of parallel transformers
in the station. In case of parallel transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush
current. If one of the transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer is
switched in, the asymmetric inrush current of the switched-in transformer will
cause partial saturation of the transformer already in service. This is called
transferred saturation. The 2nd harmonic of the inrush currents of the two
transformers is in phase opposition. The summation of the two currents thus gives a
small 2nd harmonic current. The residual fundamental current is however
significant. The inrush current of the transformer in service before the parallel
transformer energizing, is a little delayed compared to the first transformer.
Therefore, we have high 2nd harmonic current component initially. After a short
period this current is however small and the normal 2nd harmonic blocking resets.
If the BlkParTransf function is activated, the 2nd harmonic restrain signal is latched
as long as the residual current measured by the relay is larger than a selected step
current level by using setting UseStartValue.

This feature has been called Block for Parallel Transformers. This 2nd harmonic
seal-in feature is activated when all of the following three conditions are
simultaneously fulfilled:

1. Feature is enabled by entering setting parameter BlkParTransf = On.

2. Basic 2nd harmonic restraint feature has been active for at least 70ms.
3. Residual current magnitude is higher than the set start value for one of the four
residual overcurrent stages. By a parameter setting UseStartValue it is possible
to select which one of the four start values that will be used (IN1> or IN2> or
IN3> or IN4>).

Once Block for Parallel Transformers is activated, the basic 2nd harmonic blocking
signal is sealed-in until the residual current magnitude falls below a value defined
by parameter setting UseStartValue (see condition 3 above).

Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature is shown in Figure 291.

582 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

BLOCK

a
a>b
0.07*IBase b

a
a>b
b
Extract second AND
IOP
harmonic current a
a>b
component b

Extract
fundamental
current component
X
2ndHarmStab

q-1

t=70ms OR
t AND OR 2ndH_BLOCK_Int

BlkParTransf=On

a
a>b
b
UseStartValue
IN1>
IN2>
IN3>
IN4>

q-1 = unit delay

IEC13000015-4-en.vsdx

IEC13000015 V4 EN-US

Figure 291: Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature and Block for Parallel Transformers
feature

9.4.7.10 Switch on to fault feature M13941-211 v5

Integrated in the four step residual overcurrent protection are the switch on to fault
logic (SOTF) and the under-time logic. The setting parameter SOTF is set to
activate SOTF, the under-time logic or both. When the circuit breaker is closing
there is a risk to close it onto a permanent fault, for example during an
autoreclosing sequence. The SOTF logic will enable fast fault clearance during
such situations. The time during which SOTF and under-time logics will be active
after activation is defined by the setting parameter t4U.

The SOTF logic uses the start signal from step 2 or step 3 for its operation, selected
by setting parameter StepForSOTF. The setting parameter ActivationSOTF can be
set for activation of CB position open change, CB position closed change or CB
close command. In case of a residual current start from step 2 or 3 (dependent on

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 583

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

setting) the function will give a trip after a set delay tSOTF. This delay is normally
set to a short time (default 200 ms).

The under-time logic acts as a circuit breaker pole-discordance protection, but it is

only active immediately after breaker switching. The under-time logic can only be
used in solidly or low impedance grounded systems.

The under-time logic always uses the start signal from the step 4. The under-time
logic will normally be set to operate for a lower current level than the SOTF
function. The under-time logic can also be blocked by the 2nd harmonic restraint
feature. This enables high sensitivity even if power transformer inrush currents can
occur at breaker closing. This logic is typically used to detect asymmetry of CB
poles immediately after switching of the circuit breaker. The under-time logic is
activated either from change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker
close and open command pulses. This selection is done by setting parameter
ActUnderTime. In case of a start from step 4 this logic will give a trip after a set
delay tUnderTime. This delay is normally set to a relatively short time (default 300
ms).

SOTF

Open
t4U
Closed
ActivationSOTF
Close command
tSOTF
AND
AND t
STIN2

StepForSOTF
STIN3

SOTF
BLOCK
OFF
SOTF
UNDERTIME TRIP
UnderTime

tUnderTime
SOTF or
2nd Harmonic AND
HarmResSOFT t UnderTime

OR

Open
Close OR

t4U

Close command ActUnderTime

AND

STIN4

IEC06000643-5-en.vsdx
IEC06000643 V5 EN-US

Figure 292: Simplified logic diagram for SOTF and under-time features
M13941-3 v6

Simplified logic diagram for the complete EF4PTOC function is shown in Figure
293:

584 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

signal to
commu nica tion
sche me
Directio nal Che ck
Elemen t

4 step over current

INP ol Directio n
ope ratin gCurrent elemen t TRIP
Elemen t
3U0 One ele me nt fo r ea ch
earthFaultDir ection step
3I0
ang leValid
I3PDIR
DirMode
ena bleDir

harmRestrB lock
3I0 Harmonic
Restrain t 1
Elemen t

star t step 2, 3 and 4

Blocking at par allel

transfor mer s
SwitchO nTo Fa ult
TRIP

CB
DirMode pos
or cmd
ena bleDir
Mode
Sele ction ena bleStep1-4

Directio nalMode1-4

IEC06000376-2-en.vsd
IEC06000376 V3 EN-US

Figure 293: Functional overview of EF4PTOC

9.4.8 Technical data IP11455-1 v1

M15223-1 v17

Table 298: EF4PTOC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current, step 1-4 (1-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (10-2500)% of IBase -

Relay characteristic angle (-180 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees
(RCA)
Operate current for directional release (1–100)% of IBase For RCA ±60
degrees:
±2.5% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±2.5% of I at I > Ir

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset, step (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms

1-4 whichever is
greater
Minimum operate time for inverse curves, (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
step 1-4 whichever is
greater
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 585

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Inverse time characteristics, see Table 1130, 16 curve types See Table 1130,
Table 1131 and Table 1132 Table 1131 and
Table 1132
Second harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ±2.0% of Ir

Minimum polarizing voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Minimum polarizing current (2-100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Real part of source Z used for current (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -

polarization
Imaginary part of source Z used for current (0.50–3000.00) W/phase -
polarization
Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to 2 x Min. = 15 ms -
Iset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start non-directional at 2 x Iset to Min. = 15 ms -

0 Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to 10 Min. = 5 ms -

x Iset Max. = 20 ms

Reset time, start non-directional at 10 x Iset Min. = 20 ms -

to 0 Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

9.5 Four step directional negative phase sequence

overcurrent protection NS4PTOC GUID-E8CF8AA2-AF54-4FD1-A379-3E55DCA2FA3A v1

9.5.1 Identification
GUID-E1720ADA-7F80-4F2C-82A1-EF2C9EF6A4B4 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Four step negative sequence NS4PTOC 46I2
overcurrent protection I2
4
alt
4
IEC10000053 V1 EN-US

9.5.2 Functionality GUID-485E9D36-0032-4559-9204-101539A32F47 v6

Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent protection (NS4PTOC)

has an inverse or definite time delay independent for each step separately.

All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an
optional user defined characteristic.

586 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

The directional function is voltage polarized.

NS4PTOC can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of the

steps.

9.5.3 Function block GUID-8EDB8B12-0D86-4F6B-A1FB-F5D0C72AA545 v2

NS4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
I3PDIR* TR1
U3P* TR2
BLOCK TR3
BLKTR TR4
BLKST1 START
BLKST2 ST1
BLKST3 ST2
BLKST4 ST3
ENMULT1 ST4
ENMULT2 STFW
ENMULT3 STRV
ENMULT4

IEC10000054-2-en.vsd
IEC10000054 V2 EN-US

Figure 294: NS4PTOC function block

9.5.4 Signals
PID-4151-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 299: NS4PTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group connection for operate current
SIGNAL
I3PDIR GROUP - Group connection for directional current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group connection for polarizing voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 (Start and trip)
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 (Start and trip)
BLKST3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 3 (Start and trip)
BLKST4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 4 (Start and trip)
ENMULT1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step1
ENMULT2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step2
ENMULT3 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step3
ENMULT4 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step4

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 587

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

PID-4151-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 300: NS4PTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TR1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TR2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
TR3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 3
TR4 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 4
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Start signal step 1
ST2 BOOLEAN Start signal step 2
ST3 BOOLEAN Start signal step 3
ST4 BOOLEAN Start signal step 4
STFW BOOLEAN Forward directional start signal
STRV BOOLEAN Reverse directional start signal

9.5.5 Settings
PID-4151-SETTINGS v4

Table 301: NS4PTOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
EnDir Disable - - Enable Enabling the Directional calculation
Enable
AngleRCA -180 - 180 Deg 1 65 Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
UPolMin 1 - 100 %UB 1 5 Minimum voltage level for polarization in
% of UBase
I2>Dir 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Residual current level in % of IBase for
Direction release
DirMode1 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

588 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 1
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2-1> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 100 Negative sequence current op level for
step 1 in % of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of step 1 when definite time
char. is selected
k1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 1 selected
time characteristic
IMin1 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 100.00 Minimum current for step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 1
I1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for step 1
DirMode2 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist2 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 2
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2-2> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 50 Negative sequence current op level for
step 2 in % of IBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Time delay of step 2 when definite time
char. is selected
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 589

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

k2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 2 selected
time characteristic
IMin2 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 50 Minimum current for step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 2
I2Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for step 2
DirMode3 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 3 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist3 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 3
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2-3> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 33 Negative sequence current op level for
step 3 in % of IBase
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Time delay of step 3 when definite time
char. is selected
k3 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 3 selected
time characteristic
IMin3 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 33 Minimum current for step 3
t3Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 3
I3Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for step 3
DirMode4 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 4 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

590 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 4
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2-4> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 17 Negative sequence current op level for
step 4 in % of IBase
t4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Time delay of step 4 when definite time
char. is selected
k4 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 4 selected
time characteristic
IMin4 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 17 Minimum current for step 4
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 4
I4Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for step 4

Table 302: NS4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step1
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 1
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 1
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 591

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step2
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 2
tPCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tBCrv2 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tCCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tPRCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
tTRCrv2 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
tCRCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
ResetTypeCrv3 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step3
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 3
tPCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tACrv3 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tBCrv3 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tCCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tPRCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 3
tTRCrv3 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 3
tCRCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 3
ResetTypeCrv4 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step4
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 4
tPCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
tACrv4 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
tBCrv4 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
tCCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
Table continues on next page

592 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tPRCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 4
tTRCrv4 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 4
tCRCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 4

Table 303: NS4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

9.5.6 Monitored data

PID-4151-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 304: NS4PTOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IOp REAL - A Operating current level
UPol REAL - kV Polarizing voltage level
UPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing angle
between voltage and
current

9.5.7 Operation principle GUID-8923EC0B-A5BA-431B-9699-EB67E2637560 v3

Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function has the
following three “Analog Inputs” on its function block in the configuration tool:

1. I3P, input used for “Operating Quantity”.

2. U3P, input used for “Polarizing Quantity”.
3. I3PDIR, input used for "Directional finding"

These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks
in the Configuration Tool within PCM600.

9.5.7.1 Operating quantity within the function GUID-8F0A5BDE-AC98-4188-9085-42A8DF00C476 v3

Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function always

uses negative sequence current (I2) for its operating quantity. The negative
sequence current is calculated from three-phase current input within the IED. The
pre-processing block calculates I2 from the first three inputs into the pre-
processing block by using the following formula:

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 593

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

1
I2 = (
× IL1 + a × IL 2 + a × IL 3
2
)
3
EQUATION2266 V2 EN-US (Equation 144)

where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
a is so called operator which gives a phase shift of 120 deg, that is, a = 1∠120 deg

a2 similarly gives a phase shift of 240 deg, that is, a2 = 1∠240 deg

The phasor magnitude is used within the NS4PTOC protection to compare it with
the set operation current value of the four steps (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If the
negative sequence current is larger than the set operation current and the step is
used in non-directional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to
true. This signal, without delay, activates the output signal STx (x=1 - 4) for this
step and a common START signal.

9.5.7.2 Internal polarizing facility of the function GUID-B00FE98B-F269-4F1B-AC03-68250798851B v3

A polarizing quantity is used within the protection to determine the direction to the
fault (Forward/Reverse).

Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function uses the
voltage polarizing method.

NS4PTOC uses the negative sequence voltage -U2 as polarizing quantity U3P.
This voltage is calculated from three phase voltage input within the IED. The pre-
processing block calculates -U2 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing
block by using the following formula:

1
UPol = -U 2 = - × (UL1 + a 2 × UL 2 + a × UL3 )
3
EQUATION2267 V2 EN-US

where:
UL1, UL2 and UL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.

To use this all three phase-to-earth voltages must be connected to three IED VT inputs.

This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to
determine the direction to the fault (Forward/Reverse).To enable voltage polarizing

594 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

the magnitude of polarizing voltage must be bigger than a minimum level defined
by setting UpolMin.

Note that –U2 is used to determine the location of the fault. This ensures the
required inversion of the polarizing voltage within the function.

9.5.7.3 External polarizing for negative sequence function GUID-21930E81-1B40-4BA4-B1D8-3B365327AEF6 v1

The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this
setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKSTx (where x
indicates the relevant step within the protection) to provide external directional
control (that is, torque control) by for example using one of the following functions
if available in the IED:

• Distance protection directional function

• Negative sequence polarized general current and voltage multi purpose
protection function

9.5.7.4 Internal negative sequence protection structure GUID-A6B9B3F1-A1FE-4653-A8AF-61FCCF19CE95 v1

The protection is internally divided into the following parts:

• Four negative sequence overcurrent steps

• Directional supervision element for negative sequence overcurrent steps with
integrated directional comparison step for communication based negative
sequence protection schemes (permissive or blocking)

Each part is described separately in the following sections.

9.5.7.5 Four negative sequence overcurrent stages GUID-D8ACB136-2BA6-4ADA-A096-5C38BD12DB72 v2

Each overcurrent stage uses Operating Quantity I2 (negative sequence current) as

measuring quantity. Every of the four overcurrent stage has the following built-in
facilities:

• Operating mode (Off/ Non-directional /Forward / Reverse). By this parameter

setting the operating mode of the stage is selected. Note that the directional
decision (Forward/Reverse) is not made within the overcurrent stage itself.
The direction of the fault is determined in common “Directional Supervision
Element” described in the next paragraph.
• Negative sequence current pickup value.
• Type of operating characteristic (Inverse or Definite Time). By this parameter
setting it is possible to select Inverse or definite time delay for negative
sequence overcurrent function. Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse
characteristics are available. For the complete list of available inverse curves,
refer to Chapter "Inverse characteristics"
• Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset /ANSI reset).By this
parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the stage. For
Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 595
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

the complete list of available reset curves, refer to Chapter "Inverse

characteristics"
• Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like
definite time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time
delay and parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
• Multiplier for scaling of the set negative sequence current pickup value by
external binary signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase
negative sequence current pickup value when function binary input
ENMULTx has logical value 1.

Simplified logic diagram for one negative sequence overcurrent stage is shown in
the following figure:

BLKTR

Characteristx=DefTime AND
TRx
|IOP| AND
tx
a OR
a>b
ENMULTx b

STx
IxMult AND
X T
Ix> F
txmin
BLKSTx AND
BLOCK
Inverse

Characteristx=Inverse

DirModex=Off OR STAGEx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse

AND
REVERSE_Int

IEC09000683.vsd
IEC09000683 V3 EN-US

Figure 295: Simplified logic diagram for negative sequence overcurrent stage x , where x=1, 2, 3 or 4

NS4PTOC can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start
signals from NS4PTOC for each stage can be blocked from the binary input
BLKSTx. The trip signals from NS4PTOC can be blocked from the binary input
BLKTR.

9.5.7.6 Directional supervision element with integrated directional

comparison function GUID-F54E21F7-7C99-41D6-BEC6-2D6EC6D2B2A3 v3

At least one of the four negative sequence overcurrent steps must

be set as directional in order to enable execution of the directional

596 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

supervision element and the integrated directional comparison

function.

The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element,
as shown in figure 296, to determine the direction of the fault.

Reverse
Area

AngleRCA Upol=-U2

Forward
Area
Iop = I2

IEC10000031-1-en.vsd
IEC10000031 V1 EN-US

Figure 296: Operating characteristic for fault directional element

Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:

• Directional element is internally enable to operate as soon as Iop is bigger than

40% of I>Dir and the directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
• Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA which defines the position of forward
and reverse areas in the operating characteristic.

Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, set

NS4PTOC output binary signals:

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 597

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

1. STFW=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in forward

area, see fig 296 (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than setting I>Dir)
2. STRV=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in the reverse
area, see fig 296. (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than 60% of setting
I>Dir)

These signals must be used for communication based fault teleprotection

communication schemes (permissive or blocking).

Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated

directional comparison step is shown in figure 297:

|Iop|
a a>
STRV
b b REVERSE_Int
AND
0.6
X
a a>
STFW
I>Dir b b FORWARD_Int
AND

X
0.4

FWD
AND FORWARD_Int
AngleRCA
C h a r a c e ri s ti c
D i r e c ti o n a l

UPolMin

IPolMin
t

Iop

UPol
AND REVERSE_Int
RVS

STAGE1_DIR_Int
STAGE2_DIR_Int
STAGE3_DIR_Int OR
STAGE4_DIR_Int
BLOCK AND

IEC07000067-4.vsd

IEC07000067-4 V2 EN-US

Figure 297: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step

598 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

9.5.8 Technical data GUID-10E9194D-3AE9-4D0F-867E-473E6F4BF443 v1

GUID-E83AD807-8FE0-4244-A50E-86B9AF92469E v6

Table 305: NS4PTOC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current, step 1 - 4 (1-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (10-2500)% of IBase -

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset, (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
step 1 - 4 whichever is greater

Minimum operate time for inverse curves, (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
step 1 - 4 whichever is greater
Inverse time characteristics, see table 16 curve types See table 1130,
1130, table 1131 and table 1132 table 1131 and table
1132
Minimum operate current, step 1 - 4 (1.00 - 10000.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Relay characteristic angle (RCA) (-180 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees

Operate current for directional release (1–100)% of IBase For RCA ±60 degrees:
±2.5% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±2.5% of I at I > Ir

Minimum polarizing voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Real part of negative sequence source (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -

impedance used for current polarization
Imaginary part of negative sequence (0.50–3000.00) W/phase -
source impedance used for current
polarization
Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to Min. = 15 ms -
2 x Iset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start non-directional at 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -

to 0 Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to Min. = 5 ms -

10 x Iset Max. = 20 ms

Reset time, start non-directional at 10 x Min. = 20 ms -

Iset to 0 Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Transient overreach <10% at τ = 100 ms -

9.6 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power

protection SDEPSDE SEMOD171436-1 v4

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 599

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

9.6.1 Identification
SEMOD172025-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Sensitive directional residual over SDEPSDE - 67N
current and power protection

9.6.2 Functionality SEMOD171959-4 v12

In networks with high impedance earthing, the phase-to-earth fault current is

significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty for earth
fault protection is that the magnitude of the phase-to-earth fault current is almost
independent of the fault location in the network.

Directional residual current can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-
to-earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the
residual current component 3I0 · cos φ, where φ is the angle between the residual
current and the residual voltage (-3U0), compensated with a characteristic angle.
Alternatively, the function can be set to strict 3I0 level with a check of angle φ.

Directional residual power can also be used to detect and give selective trip of
phase-to-earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the
residual power component 3I0 · 3U0 · cos φ, where φ is the angle between the
residual current and the reference residual voltage, compensated with a
characteristic angle.

A normal non-directional residual current function can also be used with definite or
inverse time delay.

A backup neutral point voltage function is also available for non-directional

residual overvoltage protection.

In an isolated network, that is, the network is only coupled to earth via the
capacitances between the phase conductors and earth, the residual current always
has -90º phase shift compared to the residual voltage (3U0). The characteristic
angle is chosen to -90º in such a network.

In resistance earthed networks or in Petersen coil earthed, with a parallel resistor,

the active residual current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be
used for the earth fault detection. In such networks, the characteristic angle is
chosen to 0º.

As the amplitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location, the
selectivity of the earth fault protection is achieved by time selectivity.

When should the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection be used and
when should the sensitive directional residual power protection be used? Consider
the following:

600 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

• Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection gives possibility for better

sensitivity. The setting possibilities of this function are down to 0.25 % of
IBase, 1 A or 5 A. This sensitivity is in most cases sufficient in high
impedance network applications, if the measuring CT ratio is not too high.
• Sensitive directional residual power protection gives possibility to use inverse
time characteristics. This is applicable in large high impedance earthed
networks, with large capacitive earth fault currents. In such networks, the
active fault current would be small and by using sensitive directional residual
power protection, the operating quantity is elevated. Therefore, better
possibility to detect earth faults. In addition, in low impedance earthed
networks, the inverse time characteristic gives better time-selectivity in case of
high zero-resistive fault currents.

Phase
currents
IN

Phase-
ground
voltages
UN

IEC13000013-1-en.vsd
IEC13000013 V1 EN-US

Figure 298: Connection of SDEPSDE to analog preprocessing function block

Overcurrent functionality uses true 3I0, i.e. sum of GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and
GRPxL3. For 3I0 to be calculated, connection is needed to all three phase inputs.

Directional and power functionality uses IN and UN. If a connection is made to

GRPxN this signal is used, else if connection is made to all inputs GRPxL1,
GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 the internally calculated sum of these inputs (3I0 and 3U0)
will be used.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 601

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

9.6.3 Function block SEMOD172780-4 v6

SDEPSDE
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRDIRIN
BLOCK TRNDIN
BLKTR TRUN
BLKTRDIR START
BLKNDN STDIRIN
BLKUN STNDIN
STUN
STFW
STRV
STDIR
UNREL

IEC07000032-2-en.vsd
IEC07000032 V2 EN-US

Figure 299: SDEPSDE function block

9.6.4 Signals
PID-3892-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 306: SDEPSDE Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the outputs of the function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the trip outputs of the function
BLKTRDIR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the directional operate outputs of the
function
BLKNDN BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the Non directional current residual
outputs
BLKUN BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the Non directional voltage residual
outputs

PID-3892-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 307: SDEPSDE Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip of the function
TRDIRIN BOOLEAN Trip of the directional residual over current
function
TRNDIN BOOLEAN Trip of non directional residual over current
TRUN BOOLEAN Trip of non directional residual over voltage
START BOOLEAN General start of the function
STDIRIN BOOLEAN Start of the directional residual over current
function
STNDIN BOOLEAN Start of non directional residual over current
STUN BOOLEAN Start of non directional residual over voltage
Table continues on next page

602 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Name Type Description

STFW BOOLEAN Start of directional function for a fault in forward
direction
STRV BOOLEAN Start of directional function for a fault in reverse
direction
STDIR INTEGER Direction of fault. A general signal common to all
three mode of residual over current protection
UNREL BOOLEAN Residual voltage release of operation of all
directional modes

9.6.5 Settings
PID-3892-SETTINGS v7

Table 308: SDEPSDE Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode 3I0Cosfi - - 3I0Cosfi Selection of operation mode for
3I03U0Cosfi protection
3I0 and fi
DirMode Forward - - Forward Direction of operation forward or reverse
Reverse
RCADir -179 - 180 Deg 1 -90 Relay characteristic angle RCA, in deg
RCAComp -10.0 - 10.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Relay characteristic angle compensation
ROADir 0 - 90 Deg 1 90 Relay open angle ROA used as release
in phase mode, in deg
INCosPhi> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 1.00 Set level for 3I0cosFi, directional res
over current in % of IBase
SN> 0.25 - 200.00 %SB 0.01 10.00 Set level for 3I03U0cosFi, starting inv
time count in % of SBase
INDir> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 5.00 Set level for directional residual over
current prot in % of IBase
tDef 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Definite time delay directional residual
overcurrent, in sec
SRef 0.03 - 200.00 %SB 0.01 10.00 Reference value of res power for inverse
time count in % of SBase
kSN 0.00 - 2.00 - 0.01 0.10 Time multiplier setting for directional
residual power mode
OpINNonDir> Off - - Off Operation of non-directional residual
On overcurrent protection
INNonDir> 1.00 - 400.00 %IB 0.01 10.00 Set level for non directional residual over
current in % of IBase
tINNonDir 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time delay for non-directional residual
over current, in sec
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 603

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TimeChar ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Norm. inv. Operation curve selection for IDMT
ANSI Very inv. operation
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
tMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.040 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT
curves, in sec
kIN 0.05 - 2.00 - 0.01 1.00 IDMT time mult for non-dir res over
current protection
OpUN> Off - - Off Operation of non-directional residual
On overvoltage protection
UN> 1.00 - 200.00 %UB 0.01 20.00 Set level for non-directional residual over
voltage in % of UBase
tUN 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for non-directional residual
over voltage, in sec
INRel> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 1.00 Residual release current for all
directional modes in % of IBase
UNRel> 1.00 - 300.00 %UB 0.01 3.00 Residual release voltage for all direction
modes in % of UBase

Table 309: SDEPSDE Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.040 Time delay used for reset of definite
timers, in sec
tPCrv 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Setting P for customer programmable
curve
tACrv 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Setting A for customer programmable
curve
tBCrv 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Setting B for customer programmable
curve
tCCrv 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Setting C for customer programmable
curve
ResetTypeCrv Immediate - - IEC Reset Reset mode when current drops off.
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Table continues on next page

604 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tPRCrv 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Setting PR for customer programmable
curve
tTRCrv 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Setting TR for customer programmable
curve
tCRCrv 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Setting CR for customer programmable
curve

Table 310: SDEPSDE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Global base selection for function groups

Table 311: SDEPSDE Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
RotResU 0 deg - - 180 deg Setting for rotating polarizing quantity if
180 deg necessary

9.6.6 Monitored data

PID-3892-MONITOREDDATA v6

Table 312: SDEPSDE Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
INCOSPHI REAL - A Magnitude of residual
current along the
polarizing quantity
3I0cos(Fi-RCA)
IN REAL - A Measured magnitude of
the residual current 3I0
UN REAL - kV Measured magnitude of
the residual voltage 3U0
SN REAL - MVA Measured magnitude of
residual power
3I03U0cos(Fi-RCA)
ANG FI-RCA REAL - deg Angle between 3U0 and
3I0 minus RCA (Fi-RCA)

9.6.7 Operation principle

9.6.7.1 Function inputs SEMOD171963-4 v5

The function is using phasors of the residual current and voltage. Group signals I3P
and U3P containing phasors of residual current and voltage which are taken from
pre-processor blocks.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 605

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

The sensitive directional earth fault protection has the following sub-functions
included:

Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0·cos φ

SEMOD171963-8 v7

φ is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage
(|φ=ang(3I0)-ang(Uref)|). The reference voltage (Uref) is the polarizing quantity
which is used for directionality and is defined as Uref = -3U0 e—jRCADir, that is
-3U0 inversely rotated by the set characteristic angle RCADir. RCADir is normally
set equal to 0 in a high impedance earthed network with a neutral point resistor as
the active current component is appearing out on the faulted feeder only. RCADir is
set equal to -90° in an isolated network as all currents are mainly capacitive. The
function operates when 3I0·cos φ gets larger than the set value.

RCADir = 0o,ROADir = 90o

3I0

j = ang(3I0 ) - ang(3Uref )
-3U0 = Uref
3I0 × cosj

IEC06000648-4-en.vsd
IEC06000648 V4 EN-US

Figure 300: RCADir set to 0°

606 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Uref
RCADir = −90 , ROADir = 90

3I0

3I0 ⋅ cos ϕ

ϕ = ang (3I0 ) − ang (Uref )

−3U0

IEC06000649_3_en.vsd
IEC06000649 V3 EN-US

Figure 301: RCADir set to -90°

For trip, the operating quantity 3I0 cos φ, the residual current 3I0, and the residual
voltage 3U0 must be larger than the set levels : INCosPhi>, INRel> and UNRel>.
Refer to the simplified logical diagram in Figure 305.

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.

When the function picks up, binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the output signals START and STDIRIN remain active for the set
delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated. The trip
from this sub-function has definite time delay.

ROADir is Relay Operating Angle. ROADir is identifying a window around the

reference direction in order to detect directionality. Figure 302 shows the
restrictions made by the ROADir.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 607

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

RCADir = 0o

3I0
Operate area

j
-3U0 = Uref
3I0 × cos j

ROADir

IEC06000650_2_en.vsd
IEC06000650 V2 EN-US

Figure 302: Characteristic with ROADir restriction

The function indicates forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is

defined as 3I0·cos (φ + 180°) ≥ the set value.

It is also possible to tilt the characteristic to compensate for current transformer

angle error with a setting RCAComp as shown in the Figure 303:

608 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

RCADir = 0º

Operate area

-3U0 =Uref

Instrument
transformer
angle error 
RCAcomp
Characteristic after
angle compensation

3I0 (prim) 3I0 (to prot)

IEC06000651-3-en.vsd

IEC06000651 V3 EN-US

Figure 303: Explanation of RCAComp

Directional residual power protection measuring 3I0 · 3U0 · cos φ

SEMOD171963-32 v6

φ is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage
(Uref = -3U0 e-jRCA) compensated with the set characteristic angle RCADir (|
φ=ang(3I0)—ang(Uref)|). The function operates when 3I0 · 3U0 · cos φ gets larger
than the set value SN>. Refer to the simplified logical diagram in Figure 305.

For trip, the residual power 3I0 · 3U0 · cos φ, the residual current 3I0 and the
release voltage 3U0, shall be larger than the set levels (SN>, INRel> and UNRel>).

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.

When the function picks up, binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the output signals START and STDIRIN remain active for the set
delay tDef or after the inverse time delay (setting kSN) the binary output signals
TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated.

The function shall indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction
is defined as 3I0 · 3U0·cos (φ + 180°) ³ the set value.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 609

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse
time delay.

The inverse time delay is defined as:

kSN × (3I0 × 3U 0 × cos j(reference))

t inv =
3I0 × 3U 0 × cos j(measured)
EQUATION1942 V2 EN-US (Equation 145)

Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 and φ

SEMOD171963-48 v4

The function will operate if the residual current is larger than the set value and the
angle |φ = ang(3I0)-ang(Uref)| is within the sector RCADir ± ROADir

RCADir = 0º

ROADir = 80º

Operate area

3I0

-3U0

IEC06000652-3-en.vsd
IEC06000652 V3 EN-US

Figure 304: Example of characteristic

For trip, Residual current 3I0 shall be larger than both INRel> and INDir>, and
residual voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the UNRel>. In addition, the angle φ shall
be in the set area defined by ROADir and RCADir. Refer to the simplified logical
diagram in Figure 305.

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.

When the function picks up, binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the output signals START and STDIRIN remain active for the set
delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated.

The function indicates forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is

defined as φ is within the angle sector: RCADir + 180° ± ROADir

This variant has definite time delay.

610 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Directional functions SEMOD171963-60 v4

For all the directional functions there are directional start signals STFW: fault in
the forward direction, and STRV: fault in the reverse direction. Even if the
directional function is set to operate for faults in the forward direction, a fault in the
reverse direction will give the start signal STRV. Also if the directional function is
set to operate for faults in the reverse direction, a fault in the forward direction will
give the start signal STFW.

Non-directional earth fault current protection SEMOD171963-63 v6

This function will measure the residual current without checking the phase angle.
The function will be used to detect cross-country faults. This function can serve as
alternative or backup to distance protection with phase preference logic. To assure
selectivity the distance protection can block the non-directional earth fault current
function via the input BLKNDN.

The non-directional function is using the calculated residual current, derived as

sum of the phase currents. This will give a better ability to detect cross-country
faults with high residual current, also when dedicated core balance CT for the
sensitive earth fault protection will saturate.

This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse
time delay (TimeChar parameter). The inverse time delay shall be according to IEC
60255-3.

For trip, the residual current 3I0 shall be larger than the set level (INNonDir>).

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKNDN.

When the function picks up, binary output signal STNDIN is activated. If the
output signal STNDIN remains active for the set delay tINNonDir or after the
inverse time delay the binary output signals TRIP and TRNDIN get activated.

Residual overvoltage release and protection SEMOD171963-72 v8

All the directional functions shall be released when the residual voltage gets higher
than a set level UNRel>.

In addition, there is also a separate non-directional residual over voltage protection,

with its own definite time delay tUN and set level UN>.

For trip, the residual voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the set level (UN>).

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKUN.

When the function picks up, binary output signal STUN is activated. If the output
signal STUN is active for the set delay tUNNonDir, the binary output signals TRIP
and TRUN get activated. A simplified logical diagram of the total function is
shown in Figure 305.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 611

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

OpINNonDir> = On
STNDIN
&
INNonDir>
t
TRNDIN
TimeChar IN
OpUN> = On
STUN
&
UN>
tUN TRUN
t

OpMode = 3I0Cosfi
INRel>

UNRel> & &

tDef
INCosPhi> t

OpMode = 3I0 and fi

& ³ STDIRIN
INDir> &
1

tDef ³ TRDIRIN
t 1
OpMode = 3I03U0Cosfi
& &
SN>
t
³ S
1 N
STFW
RCADir Direction &
Detection
RCAComp Logic STRV
&
ROADir

DirMode = Forward

DirMode = Reverse
IEC06000653.vsd

IEC06000653 V4 EN-US

Figure 305: Simplified logical diagram of the sensitive earth fault current protection

9.6.8 Technical data SEMOD173352-1 v1

SEMOD173350-2 v16

Table 313: SDEPSDE technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate level for 3I0·cosj directional residual (0.25-200.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
overcurrent ±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Operate level for ·3I0·3U0 cosj directional (0.25-200.00)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr at S £ Sr

residual power ±1.0% of S at S > Sr

Operate level for 3I0 and j residual (0.25-200.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at £ Ir

overcurrent ±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Operate level for non-directional overcurrent (1.00-400.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Table continues on next page

612 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate level for non-directional residual (1.00-200.00)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U £ Ur
overvoltage ±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Residual release current for all directional (0.25-200.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

modes ±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Residual release voltage for all directional (1.00-300.00)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U £ Ur

modes ±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Operate time for non-directional residual Min. = 40 ms

overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
Max. = 65 ms
Reset time for non-directional residual Min. = 40 ms
overcurrent at 2 x Iset to 0
Max. = 65 ms
Operate time for directional residual Min. = 110 ms
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
Max. = 160 ms
Reset time for directional residual Min. = 20 ms
overcurrent at 2 x Iset to 0
Max. = 60 ms
Independent time delay for non-directional (0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 75 ms
residual overvoltage at 0.8 x Uset to 1.2 x whichever is greater
Uset

Independent time delay for non-directional (0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 75 ms

residual overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset whichever is greater

Independent time delay for directional (0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 170 ms

residual overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset whichever is greater

Inverse characteristics, see table 1133, 16 curve types See Table 1133,
Table 1134 and Table 1135 Table 1134 and Table
1135
Relay characteristic angle (RCADir) (-179 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Relay operate angle (ROADir) (0 to 90) degrees ±2.0 degrees

9.7 Thermal overload protection, one time constant,

Celsius/Fahrenheit LCPTTR/LFPTTR IP14512-1 v7

9.7.1 Identification
M17106-1 v7

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Thermal overload protection, one time LCPTTR 26
constant, Celsius

Thermal overload protection, one time LFPTTR 26

constant, Fahrenheit

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 613

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

9.7.2 Functionality M12020-4 v14

The increasing utilization of the power system closer to the thermal limits has
generated a need of a thermal overload protection for power lines.

A thermal overload will often not be detected by other protection functions and the
introduction of the thermal overload protection can allow the protected circuit to
operate closer to the thermal limits.

The three-phase current measuring protection has an I2t characteristic with settable
time constant and a thermal memory. The temperature is displayed in either Celsius
or Fahrenheit, depending on whether the function used is Thermal overload
protection (LCPTTR) (Celsius) or (LFPTTR) (Fahrenheit).

An alarm level gives early warning to allow operators to take action well before the
line is tripped.

Estimated time to trip before operation, and estimated time to reclose after
operation are presented.

9.7.3 Function block M12627-3 v8

LCPTTR
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR ALARM
ENMULT LOCKOUT
AMBTEMP
SENSFLT
RESET

IEC13000199-1-en.vsd
IEC13000199 V1 EN-US
LFPTTR
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR ALARM
ENMULT LOCKOUT
AMBTEMP
SENSFLT
RESET

IEC13000301-1-en.vsd
IEC13000301 V1 EN-US

Figure 306: LCPTTR/LFPTTR function bloc

9.7.4 Signals
PID-3908-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 314: LCPTTR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
Table continues on next page

614 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Name Type Default Description

ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Current multiplyer used when THOL is for two or
more lines
AMBTEMP REAL 0 Ambient temperature from external temperature
sensor
SENSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Validity status of ambient temperature sensor
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of internal thermal load counter

PID-3909-INPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 315: LFPTTR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Current multiplyer used when THOL is for two or
more lines
AMBTEMP REAL 0 Ambient temperature from external temperature
sensor
SENSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Validity status of ambient temperature sensor
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of internal thermal load counter

PID-3908-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 316: LCPTTR Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
START BOOLEAN Start Signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Lockout signal

PID-3909-OUTPUTSIGNALS v8

Table 317: LFPTTR Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
START BOOLEAN Start Signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Lockout signal

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 615

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

9.7.5 Settings
PID-3908-SETTINGS v7

Table 318: LCPTTR Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
TRef 0 - 300 Deg C 1 90 End temperature rise above ambient of
the line when loaded with IRef
IRef 0 - 400 %IB 1 100 The load current (in % of IBase) leading
to TRef temperature
IMult 1-5 - 1 1 Current multiplier when function is used
for two or more lines
Tau 1 - 1000 Min 1 45 Time constant of the line in minutes.
AlarmTemp 0 - 200 Deg C 1 80 Temperature level for start (alarm)
TripTemp 0 - 300 Deg C 1 90 Temperature level for trip
ReclTemp 0 - 300 Deg C 1 75 Temperature for reset of lockout after trip
tPulse 0.05 - 0.30 s 0.01 0.10 Operate pulse length. Minimum one
execution cycle
AmbiSens Off - - Off External temperature sensor available
On
DefaultAmbTemp -50 - 100 Deg C 1 20 Ambient temperature used when
AmbiSens is set to Off.
DefaultTemp -50 - 300 Deg C 1 50 Temperature raise above ambient
temperature at startup

Table 319: LCPTTR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

PID-3909-SETTINGS v8

Table 320: LFPTTR Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
TRef 0 - 600 Deg F 1 160 End temperature rise above ambient of
the line when loaded with IRef
IRef 0 - 400 %IB 1 100 The load current (in % of IBase) leading
to TRef temperature
IMult 1-5 - 1 1 Current multiplier when function is used
for two or more lines
Tau 1 - 1000 Min 1 45 Time constant of the line in minutes.
AlarmTemp 0 - 400 Deg F 1 175 Temperature level for start (alarm)
TripTemp 0 - 600 Deg F 1 195 Temperature level for trip
Table continues on next page

616 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ReclTemp 0 - 600 Deg F 1 170 Temperature for reset of lockout after trip
tPulse 0.05 - 0.30 s 0.01 0.10 Operate pulse length. Minimum one
execution cycle
AmbiSens Off - - Off External temperature sensor available
On
DefaultAmbTemp -50 - 250 Deg F 1 60 Ambient temperature used when
AmbiSens is set to Off.
DefaultTemp -50 - 600 Deg F 1 100 Temperature raise above ambient
temperature at startup

Table 321: LFPTTR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

9.7.6 Monitored data

PID-3908-MONITOREDDATA v7

Table 322: LCPTTR Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TTRIP INTEGER - - Estimated time to trip (in
min)
TENRECL REAL - - Estimated time to reset
of lockout (in min)
TEMP REAL - deg Calculated temperature
of the device
TEMPAMB REAL - deg Ambient temperature
used in the calculations
TERMLOAD REAL - - Temperature relative to
operate temperature

PID-3909-MONITOREDDATA v7

Table 323: LFPTTR Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TTRIP INTEGER - - Estimated time to trip (in
min)
TENRECL REAL - - Estimated time to reset
of lockout (in min)
TEMP REAL - Temperature Calculated temperature
Fahrenheit of the device
TEMPAMB REAL - Temperature Ambient temperature
Fahrenheit used in the calculations
TERMLOAD REAL - - Temperature relative to
operate temperature

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 617

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

9.7.7 Operation principle M12018-3 v10

The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current
the RMS value is derived. These phase current values are fed to the thermal
overload protection, one time constant LCPTTR/LFPTTR function. The
temperature is displayed either in Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on whether
LCPTTR/LFPTTR function is selected.

From the largest of the three-phase currents a final temperature is calculated

according to the expression:

2
æ I ö
Q final =ç ÷÷ × Tref
ç I ref
è ø
EQUATION1167 V1 EN-US (Equation 146)

where:
I is the largest phase current,
Iref is a given reference current and

Tref is steady state temperature rise corresponding to Iref

The ambient temperature is added to the calculated final temperature. If this

temperature is larger than the set operate temperature level, TripTemp, a START
output signal is activated.

The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:

æ Dt
ö
Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) × ç1 - e t ÷
-

è ø
EQUATION1168 V1 EN-US (Equation 147)

where:
Qn is the calculated present temperature,

Qn-1 is the calculated temperature at the previous time step,

Qfinal is the calculated final temperature with the actual current,

Dt is the time step between calculation of the actual temperature and

t is the set thermal time constant for the protected device (line or cable)

The actual temperature of the protected component (line or cable) is calculated by

adding the ambient temperature to the calculated temperature, as shown above. The
ambient temperature can be taken from a separate sensor or can be given a constant

618 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

value. The calculated component temperature is available as a real figure signal,

TEMP.

When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level AlarmTemp the
output signal ALARM is set. When the component temperature reaches the set trip
level TripTemp the output signal TRIP is set.

There is also a calculation of the present time to operate with the present current.
This calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above
the operation temperature:

æQ - Qoperate ö
toperate = -t × ln ç final
ç Q final - Q n ÷÷
è ø
EQUATION1169 V1 EN-US (Equation 148)

The calculated time to trip is available as a real figure signal, TTRIP.

After a trip, caused by the thermal overload protection, there can be a lockout to
reconnect the tripped circuit. The output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated
when the device temperature is above the set lockout release temperature setting
ReclTemp.

The time to lockout release is calculated by the following cooling time calculation.
The thermal content of the function can be reset with input RESET.

æQ - Qlockout _ release ö
tlockout _ release = -t × ln ç final ÷÷
ç Q final - Q n
è ø
EQUATION1170 V1 EN-US (Equation 149)

In the above equation, the final temperature is equal to the set or measured ambient
temperature. The calculated time to reset of lockout is available as a real figure
signal, TENRECL. This signal is enabled when the LOCKOUT output is activated.

In some applications the measured current can involve a number of parallel lines.
This is often used where one bay connects several parallel cables. By setting the
parameter IMult to the number of parallel lines (cables) the actual current on one
line is used in the protection algorithm by dividing the measured current by the
total number of cables. To activate this option the input ENMULT must be
activated.

The protection has a reset input: RESET. By activating this input the calculated
temperature is reset to its default initial value. This is useful during testing when
secondary injected current has given a calculated “false” temperature level.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 619

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

START
Final Temp > Trip Temp

TEMP
Calculation of actual
temperature

AMBTEMP ALARM
Actual Temp > Alarm Temp

I3P

Calculation of final
temperature
ENMULT
TRIP

Actual Temp > Trip Temp

SENSFLT

LOCKOUT
Lockout logic

Actual Temp < Recl Temp

BLOCK

TTRIP
Calculation of time to trip
BLKTR

TENRECL
Calculation of time to reset
of lockout

IEC09000637-2-en.vsd
IEC09000637 V2 EN-US

Figure 307: Functional overview of LCPTTR/LFPTTR

620 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

9.7.8 Technical data

M12352-1 v14

Table 324: LCPTTR/LFPTTR technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Reference current (2-400)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Reference temperature (0-300)°C, (0 - 600)°F ±1.0°C, ±2.0°F

Operate time: Time constant t = (1–1000) IEC 60255-149,
minutes ±5.0% or ±200
ms whichever is
é ù greater
ê I - Ip
2 2 ú
t = t ln ê ú
ê 2 2 TTrip - TAmb 2 ú
ê I - Ip - T × I ref
ú
ë ref û
EQUATION13000039 V2 EN-US (Equation 150)

TTrip= set operate temperature

TAmb = ambient temperature
Tref = temperature rise above ambient at Iref
Iref = reference load current
I = actual measured current
Ip = load current before overload occurs

Alarm temperature (0-200)°C, (0-400)°F ±2.0°C, ±4.0°F

Operate temperature (0-300)°C, (0-600)°F ±2.0°C, ±4.0°F
Reset level temperature (0-300)°C, (0-600)°F ±2.0°C, ±4.0°F

9.8 Thermal overload protection, two time constants

TRPTTR IP14513-1 v4

9.8.1 Identification
M14877-1 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Thermal overload protection, two time TRPTTR 49
constants

SYMBOL-A V1 EN-US

9.8.2 Functionality M13243-3 v11

If a power transformer reaches very high temperatures the equipment might be

damaged. The insulation within the transformer will experience forced ageing. As a

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 621

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

consequence of this the risk of internal phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth faults will

increase.

The thermal overload protection estimates the internal heat content of the
transformer (temperature) continuously. This estimation is made by using a thermal
model of the transformer with two time constants, which is based on current
measurement.

Two warning levels are available. This enables actions in the power system to be
done before dangerous temperatures are reached. If the temperature continues to
increase to the trip value, the protection initiates a trip of the protected transformer.

The estimated time to trip before operation is presented.

9.8.3 Function block M13299-3 v5

TRPTTR
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
COOLING ALARM1
ENMULT ALARM2
RESET LOCKOUT
WARNING

IEC06000272_2_en.vsd
IEC06000272 V2 EN-US

Figure 308: TRPTTR function block

9.8.4 Signals
PID-4148-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 325: TRPTTR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
COOLING BOOLEAN 0 Cooling input Off / On. Changes Ib setting and
time constant
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable Multiplier for currentReference setting
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function

PID-4148-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 326: TRPTTR Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip Signal
START BOOLEAN Start signal
ALARM1 BOOLEAN First level alarm signal
Table continues on next page

622 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Name Type Description

ALARM2 BOOLEAN Second level alarm signal
LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Lockout signal
WARNING BOOLEAN Warning signal: Trip within set warning time

9.8.5 Settings
PID-4148-SETTINGS v4

Table 327: TRPTTR Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IRef 10.0 - 1000.0 %IB 1.0 100.0 Reference current in % of IBase
IRefMult 0.01 - 10.00 - 0.01 1.00 Multiplication Factor for reference
current
IBase1 30.0 - 250.0 %IB 1.0 100.0 Base current,IBase1 without Cooling
input in % of IBase
IBase2 30.0 - 250.0 %IB 1.0 100.0 Base Current,IBase2, with Cooling input
ON in % of IBase
Tau1 1.0 - 500.0 Min 1.0 60.0 Time constant without cooling input in
min, with IBase1
Tau2 1.0 - 500.0 Min 1.0 60.0 Time constant with cooling input in min,
with IBase2
IHighTau1 30.0 - 250.0 %IB1 1.0 100.0 Current Sett, in % of IBase1 for rescaling
TC1 by TC1-IHIGH
Tau1High 5 - 2000 %tC1 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC1 when current is >
IHIGH-TC1
ILowTau1 30.0 - 250.0 %IB1 1.0 100.0 Current Set, in % of IBase1 for rescaling
TC1 by TC1-ILOW
Tau1Low 5 - 2000 %tC1 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC1 when current is <
ILOW-TC1
IHighTau2 30.0 - 250.0 %IB2 1.0 100.0 Current Set, in % of IBase2 for rescaling
TC2 by TC2-IHIGH
Tau2High 5 - 2000 %tC2 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC2 when current is
>IHIGH-TC2
ILowTau2 30.0 - 250.0 %IB2 1.0 100.0 Current Set, in % of IBase2 for rescaling
TC2 by TC2-ILOW
Tau2Low 5 - 2000 %tC2 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC2 when current is <
ILOW-TC2
ITrip 50.0 - 250.0 %IBx 1.0 110.0 Steady state operate current level in %
of IBasex
Alarm1 50.0 - 99.0 %Itr 1.0 80.0 First alarm level in % of heat content trip
value
Alarm2 50.0 - 99.0 %Itr 1.0 90.0 Second alarm level in % of heat content
trip value
ResLo 10.0 - 95.0 %Itr 1.0 60.0 Lockout reset level in % of heat content
trip value
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 623

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ThetaInit 0.0 - 95.0 % 1.0 50.0 Initial Heat content, in % of heat content
trip value
Warning 1.0 - 500.0 Min 0.1 30.0 Time setting, below which warning would
be set (in min)
tPulse 0.01 - 0.30 s 0.01 0.10 Length of the pulse for trip signal (in
sec).

Table 328: TRPTTR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

9.8.6 Monitored data

PID-4148-MONITOREDDATA v3

Table 329: TRPTTR Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
HEATCONT REAL - % Percentage of the heat
content of the
transformer
I-MEASUR REAL - % Current measured by the
function in % of the rated
current
TTRIP INTEGER - - Estimated time to trip (in
min)
TRESLO INTEGER - - Estimated time to reset
of the function (in min)
TTRIPCAL INTEGER 0=Not Active - Calculated time status to
1=Long Time trip: not active/long time/
2=Active active
TRESCAL INTEGER 0=Not Active - Calculated time status to
1=Long Time reset: not active/long
2=Active time/active

9.8.7 Operation principle M13249-3 v8

The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current
the true RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values
are fed to the protection function.

From the largest of the three phase currents a relative final temperature (heat
content) is calculated according to the expression:

624 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

2
æ I ö
Q final =ç ÷÷
ç I ref
è ø
EQUATION1171 V1 EN-US (Equation 151)

where:
I is the largest phase current
Iref is a given reference current

If this calculated relative temperature is larger than the relative temperature level
corresponding to the set operate (trip) current, then the start output signal START
will be activated.

The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:

If Q final > Q n
EQUATION1172 V1 EN-US (Equation 152)

æ Dt
ö
Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) × ç1 - e t ÷
-

è ø
EQUATION1173 V1 EN-US (Equation 153)

If Q final < Qn
EQUATION1174 V1 EN-US (Equation 154)

Dt
Qn = Q final - ( Q final - Qn -1 ) × e
-
t

EQUATION1175 V1 EN-US (Equation 155)

where:
Qn is the calculated present temperature

Qn-1 is the calculated temperature at the previous time step

Qfinal is the calculated final (steady state) temperature with the actual current

Dt is the time step between calculation of the actual and final temperature
t is the thermal time constant of the protected circuit given in minutes. There are
different time constants depending on the cooling used. Please refer to
manufacturer's manuals for details

The calculated transformer relative temperature can be monitored and it is exported

from the function as a real figure HEATCONT.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 625

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

When the transformer temperature reaches any of the set alarm levels Alarm1 or
Alarm2 the corresponding output signal ALARM1 or ALARM2 is activated. When
the temperature of the object reaches the set trip level which corresponds to
continuous current equal to ITrip the output signal TRIP is activated.

There is also a calculation of the time to operation with the present current. This
calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the
operation temperature:

æQ - Qoperate ö
toperate = -t × ln ç final
ç Q final - Q n ÷÷
è ø
EQUATION1176 V1 EN-US (Equation 156)

The calculated time to trip can be monitored and it is exported from the function as
an integer output TTRIP.

After a trip there can be a lockout to inhibit reconnecting the tripped circuit. The
output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated when the temperature of the object is
above the set lockout release temperature setting ResLo.

The time to lockout release is calculated by the following cooling time calculation.

æQ - Qlockout _ release ö
tlockout _ release = -t × ln ç final ÷÷
ç Q final - Q n
è ø
EQUATION1177 V1 EN-US (Equation 157)

In the above equation, the final temperature is calculated according to equation

151. The calculated component temperature can be monitored as it is exported
from the function as a real figure, TRESLO.

When the current is so high that it has given a start signal START, the estimated
time to trip is continuously calculated and given as analogue output TTRIP. If this
calculated time get less than the setting time Warning, set in minutes, the output
WARNING is activated.

In case of trip a pulse with a set duration tPulse is activated.

626 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Final Temp START

> TripTemp

RESET HEATCONT
Calculation
of heat
content

I3P
Calculation
ENMULT of final
temperature
ALARM1
Actual Temp >
Alarm1,Alarm2
ALARM2
Temp

Current base used

TRIP
Actual Temp
> TripTemp

S LOCKOUT
Management of R
COOLING setting
parameters: Tau,
Actual Temp
IBase Tau used
< Recl
Temp

TTRIP
Calculation
of time to
WARNING
trip

Calculation
of time to TRESCAL
reset of
lockout

IEC05000833-2-en.vsd

IEC05000833 V2 EN-US

Figure 309: Functional overview of TRPTTR

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 627

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

9.8.8 Technical data IP13072-1 v1

M13266-2 v8

Table 330: TRPTTR technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Base current 1 and 2 (30–250)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Operate time: Ip = load current before overload ±5.0% or ±200 ms whichever

occurs is greater
æ I 2 - I p2 ö Time constant τ = (0.10–500.00)
t = t × ln ç ÷ minutes
ç I 2 - I ref 2 ÷
è ø
EQUATION1356 V2 EN-US (Equation 158)

I = actual measured current

Ip = load current before overload
occurs
Iref = reference load current
Alarm level 1 and 2 (50–99)% of heat content ±2.0% of heat content trip
operate value
Operate current (50–250)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Reset level temperature (10–95)% of heat content trip ±2.0% of heat content trip

9.9 Breaker failure protection CCRBRF IP14514-1 v6

9.9.1 Identification
M14878-1 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Breaker failure protection, 3-phase CCRBRF 50BF
activation and output
3I>BF

SYMBOL-U V1 EN-US

9.9.2 Functionality M11550-6 v17

Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF) ensures a fast backup tripping of the

surrounding breakers in case the own breaker fails to open. CCRBRF can be
current-based, contact-based or an adaptive combination of these two conditions.

A current check with extremely short reset time is used as check criterion to
achieve high security against unwanted operation.

Contact check criteria can be used where the fault current through the breaker is
small.

628 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

CCRBRF can be single- or three-phase initiated to allow use with single phase
tripping applications. For the three-phase version of CCRBRF the current criteria
can be set to operate only if two out of four for example, two phases or one phase
plus the residual current start. This gives a higher security to the back-up trip
command.

CCRBRF function can be programmed to give a single- or three-phase re-trip of its

own breaker to avoid unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an incorrect
initiation due to mistakes during testing.

9.9.3 Function block M11944-3 v7

CCRBRF
I3P* TRBU
BLOCK TRBU2
START TRRET
STL1 TRRETL1
STL2 TRRETL2
STL3 TRRETL3
CBCLDL1 CBALARM
CBCLDL2
CBCLDL3
CBFLT

IEC06000188-2-en.vsd
IEC06000188 V2 EN-US

Figure 310: CCRBRF function block

9.9.4 Signals
PID-3562-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 331: CCRBRF Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
START BOOLEAN 0 Three phase start of breaker failure protection
function
STL1 BOOLEAN 0 Start signal of phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN 0 Start signal of phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN 0 Start signal of phase L3
CBCLDL1 BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed in phase L1
CBCLDL2 BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed in phase L2
CBCLDL3 BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed in phase L3
CBFLT BOOLEAN 0 CB faulty, unable to trip. Back-up trip
instantaneously

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 629

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

PID-3562-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 332: CCRBRF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRBU BOOLEAN Back-up trip by breaker failure protection function
TRBU2 BOOLEAN Second back-up trip by breaker failure protection
function
TRRET BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function
TRRETL1 BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function
phase L1
TRRETL2 BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function
phase L2
TRRETL3 BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function
phase L3
CBALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for faulty circuit breaker

9.9.5 Settings
PID-3562-SETTINGS v7

Table 333: CCRBRF Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
FunctionMode Current - - Current Detection for trip based on Current/
Contact Contact/Current&Contact
Current/Contact
BuTripMode 2 out of 4 - - 1 out of 3 Back-up trip modes: 2 out of 4 or 1 out of
1 out of 3 3 or 1 out of 4
1 out of 4
RetripMode Retrip Off - - Retrip Off Oper mode of re-trip logic: OFF/CB Pos
CB Pos Check Check/No CB Pos Check
No CBPos Check
IP> 5 - 200 %IB 1 10 Operate phase current level in % of
IBase
IN> 2 - 200 %IB 1 10 Operate residual current level in % of
IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of re-trip
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Time delay of back-up trip
t2MPh 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Time delay of back-up trip at multi-phase
start
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Trip pulse duration

630 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Table 334: CCRBRF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
I>BlkCont 5 - 200 %IB 1 20 I> in % of IBase block operation using
Function Mode Contact
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.030 Additional time delay to t2 for a second
back-up trip
tCBAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay for alarm when faulty circuit
breaker indicated

Table 335: CCRBRF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

9.9.6 Monitored data

PID-3562-MONITOREDDATA v7

Table 336: CCRBRF Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A Measured current in
phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Measured current in
phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Measured current in
phase L3
IN REAL - A Measured residual
current

9.9.7 Operation principle M16914-3 v9

Breaker failure protection CCRBRF is initiated from the protection trip command,
either from protection functions within the IED or from external protection devices.

The start signal can be phase selective or general (for all three phases). Phase
selective start signals enable single pole re-trip function. This means that a second
attempt to open the breaker is done. The re-trip attempt is made after a set time
delay t1. For transmission lines, single pole trip and autoreclosing is often used.
The re-trip function can be phase selective if it is initiated from phase selective line
protection. The re-trip function can be done with or without current check. With the
current check, the re-trip is only performed if the current through the circuit
breaker is larger than the operate current level.

The re-trip function can be done with or without CB position check according to
table 337.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 631

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

Table 337: Dependencies between parameters RetripMode and FunctionMode

RetripMode FunctionMode Description
Retrip Off N/A The re-trip function is not
activated.
CB Pos Check Current The re-trip will follow the
function mode.
Contact
Current/Contact
No CBPos Check Current The re-trip is done
unconditionally.
Contact
Current/Contact

The start signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. This signal will
start the back-up trip timer. The function detects the successful breaker opening,
either by detection of low current through RMS evaluation and a special adapted
current algorithm or by open contact indication. The special algorithm enables a
very fast detection of successful breaker opening, that is, fast resetting of the
current measurement. If the current and/or contact detection has not detected
breaker opening before the back-up timer has run its time a back-up trip is initiated.

Further the following possibilities are available:

• The minimum length of the re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-
up trip pulse 2 are settable. The re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the
back-up trip pulse 2 will however sustain as long as there is an indication of
closed breaker.
• In the current detection it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3
where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out
of 4 where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or
high residual current and 2 out of 4 where at least two current (phase current
and/or residual current) shall be high for breaker failure detection.
• The current detection level for the residual current can be set different from the
setting of phase current detection.
• It is possible to have different back-up time delays for single-phase faults and
for multi-phase faults.
• The back-up trip can be made without current check. It is possible to have this
option activated for small load currents only.
• It is possible to have instantaneous back-up trip function if a signal is high if
the circuit breaker is incapable to clear faults, for example at low gas pressure.

632 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

30 ms
START
STL1 OR BFP Started L1
150 ms
AND S
SR Q t
R
BLOCK
OR Retrip Time Out L1 AND
Time out L1
Reset L1
BackupTrip L1

IEC09000976-2-en.vsd
IEC09000976 V2 EN-US

Figure 311: Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF starting logic

IP>
a
a>b
b

FunctionMode Current
OR AND Reset L1
OR

1 Contact Time out L1

Current and Contact OR
AND
Current High L1
IL1
BFP Started L1 AND CB Closed L1
OR

a AND AND
a>b OR AND
I>BlkCont b

CBCLDL1 Contact Closed L1

AND

IEC09000977-2-en.vsd

IEC09000977 V2 EN-US

Figure 312: Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF , CB position evaluation

t1 TRRETL3
BFP Started L1 From other
t Retrip Time Out L1
phases TRRETL2 OR
TRRET

tPulse
RetripMode No CBPos Check AND
OR TRRETL1
OR

1 30ms
OR

CB Pos Check
AND
CB Closed L1
CBFLT

IEC09000978-4-en.vsd
IEC09000978 V4 EN-US

Figure 313: Simplified logic scheme of the retrip logic function

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 633

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

BUTripMode
1 out of 3
2 out of 4
OR
1 1 out of 4 AND

Current high L1

BFP Started L1
AND
IN
a
a>b
IN> b

Contact Closed L1
OR

OR
Current High L2
From other AND Backup Time Out L1
Current High L3
phases
Current High L1
CBFLT
AND

t2
30ms Backup Trip L1
BFP Started L1 t AND
OR
t2MPh

AND t

AND
OR OR
tPulse
From other Backup Trip L2 OR TRBU
OR
phases Backup Trip L3
From other BFP Started L2 AND

phases OR tPulse
BFP Started L3
t3
OR
TRBU2
S Q
SR
t
AND R

IEC09000979-4-en.vsd

IEC09000979 V4 EN-US

Figure 314: Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip logic function

The internal logical signals Current High L1, Current High L2, Current High L3
have logical value 1 when the current in the respective phase has the magnitude
larger than the setting parameter IP>.

9.9.8 Technical data IP10269-1 v1

M12353-1 v14

Table 338: CCRBRF technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate phase current (5-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, phase current > 95% -

Operate residual current (2-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, residual current > 95% -

Phase current level for blocking of contact (5-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
function ±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% -

Operate time for current detection 10 ms typically -
Reset time for current detection 15 ms maximum -
Table continues on next page

634 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Time delay for re-trip at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
whichever is greater
Time delay for back-up trip at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
whichever is greater
Time delay for back-up trip at multi-phase start at (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms
0 to 2 x Iset whichever is greater

Additional time delay for a second back-up trip at (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms
0 to 2 x Iset whichever is greater

Time delay for alarm for faulty circuit breaker (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
whichever is greater

9.10 Stub protection STBPTOC IP14515-1 v3

9.10.1 Identification
M17108-1 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Stub protection STBPTOC 50STB

3I>STUB

SYMBOL-T V1 EN-US

9.10.2 Functionality M12902-3 v10

When a power line is taken out of service for maintenance and the line
disconnector is opened in multi-breaker arrangements the voltage transformers will
mostly be outside on the disconnected part. The primary line distance protection
will thus not be able to operate and must be blocked.

The stub protection (STBPTOC) covers the zone between the current transformers
and the open disconnector. The three-phase instantaneous overcurrent function is
released from a normally open, NO (b) auxiliary contact on the line disconnector.

9.10.3 Function block M12524-3 v5

STBPTOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR
RELEASE

IEC05000678-2-en.vsd
IEC05000678 V2 EN-US

Figure 315: STBPTOC function block

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 635

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

9.10.4 Signals
PID-6931-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 339: STBPTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase currents
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
RELEASE BOOLEAN 0 Release of stub protection

PID-6931-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 340: STBPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip
START BOOLEAN General start

9.10.5 Settings
PID-6931-SETTINGS v1

Table 341: STBPTOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
ReleaseMode Release - - Release Release of stub protection
Continuous
I> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate current level in % of IBase

Table 342: STBPTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay

Table 343: STBPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

636 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

9.10.6 Monitored data

PID-3462-MONITOREDDATA v5

Table 344: STBPTOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A Current in phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current in phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current in phase L3

9.10.7 Operation principle M12905-3 v5

The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter
(DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current
the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed
to a comparator in the stub protection function STBPTOC. In a comparator the
RMS values are compared to the set operating current value of the function I>.

If a phase current is larger than the set operating current the signal from the
comparator for this phase is activated. This signal will, in combination with the
release signal from line disconnection (RELEASE input), activate the timer for the
TRIP signal. If the fault current remains during the timer delay t, the TRIP output
signal is activated. The function can be blocked by activation of the BLOCK input.

STUB PROTECTION FUNCTION

BLOCK

TRIP
STIL1 AND

STIL2 OR

STIL3

RELEASE

en05000731.vsd
IEC05000731 V1 EN-US

Figure 316: Simplified logic diagram for Stub protection

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 637

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

9.10.8 Technical data

M12350-1 v12

Table 345: STBPTOC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating current (5-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (50-2500)% of IBase -

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms
whichever is greater
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 10 ms -
Max. = 20 ms
Reset time, start at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 10 ms -
Max. = 20 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

9.11 Pole discordance protection CCPDSC IP14516-1 v5

9.11.1 Identification
M14888-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Pole discordance protection CCPDSC 52PD

PD

SYMBOL-S V1 EN-US

9.11.2 Functionality M13269-3 v15

An open phase can cause negative and zero sequence currents which cause thermal
stress on rotating machines and can cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or
negative sequence current functions.

Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct such a situation. If the situation
persists the surrounding breakers should be tripped to clear the unsymmetrical load
situation.

The Pole discordance protection function (CCPDSC) operates based on

information from auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker for the three phases with
additional criteria from unsymmetrical phase currents when required.

638 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

9.11.3 Function block M17149-3 v6

CCPDSC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKDBYAR
CLOSECMD
OPENCMD
EXTPDIND
POLE1OPN
POLE1CL
POLE2OPN
POLE2CL
POLE3OPN
POLE3CL

IEC13000305-1-en.vsd
IEC13000305 V1 EN-US

Figure 317: CCPDSC function block

9.11.4 Signals
PID-3525-INPUTSIGNALS v8

Table 346: CCPDSC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase currents
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKDBYAR BOOLEAN 0 Block of function at CB single phase auto re-
closing cycle
CLOSECMD BOOLEAN 0 Close order to CB
OPENCMD BOOLEAN 0 Open order to CB
EXTPDIND BOOLEAN 0 Pole discordance signal from CB logic
POLE1OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole one opened indication from CB
POLE1CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole one closed indication from CB
POLE2OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole two opened indication from CB
POLE2CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole two closed indication from CB
POLE3OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole three opened indication from CB
POLE3CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole three closed indication from CB

PID-3525-OUTPUTSIGNALS v8

Table 347: CCPDSC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal to CB
START BOOLEAN Trip condition TRUE, waiting for time delay

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 639

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

9.11.5 Settings
PID-3525-SETTINGS v8

Table 348: CCPDSC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay between trip condition and
trip signal
ContSel Off - - Off Contact function selection
PD signal from CB
Pole pos aux cont.
CurrSel Off - - Off Current function selection
CB oper monitor
Continuous
monitor
CurrUnsymLevel 0 - 100 % 1 80 Unsym magn of lowest phase current
compared to the highest.
CurrRelLevel 0 - 100 %IB 1 10 Current magnitude for release of the
function in % of IBase

Table 349: CCPDSC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

9.11.6 Monitored data

PID-3525-MONITOREDDATA v6

Table 350: CCPDSC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IMin REAL - A Lowest phase current
IMax REAL - A Highest phase current

9.11.7 Operation principle

M13273-3 v6

The detection of pole discordance can be made in two different ways. If the contact
based function is used an external logic can be made by connecting the auxiliary
contacts of the circuit breaker so that a pole discordance is indicated, see figure
318.

640 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

circuit breaker

Pole discordance signal from circuit breaker

en05000287.vsd

IEC05000287 V2 EN-US

Figure 318: Pole discordance external detection logic

This binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance of this
signal will start a timer that will give a trip signal after the set time delay.

There is also a possibility to connect all phase selective auxiliary contacts (phase
contact open and phase contact closed) to binary inputs of the IED, see figure 319.

C.B.

poleOneClosed from C.B.

poleTwoClosed from C.B.

poleThreeClosed from C.B.

+
poleOneOpened from C.B.

poleTwoOpened from C.B.

poleThreeOpened from C.B.

en05000288.vsd
IEC05000288 V1 EN-US

Figure 319: Pole discordance signals for internal logic

In this case the logic is realized within the function. If the inputs are indicating pole
discordance the trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set
delay.

Pole discordance can also be detected by means of phase selective current

measurement. The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete
Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each
phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. The smallest and the
largest phase current are derived. If the smallest phase current is lower than the
setting CurrUnsymLevel times the largest phase current the settable trip timer
(tTrip) is started. The tTrip timer gives a trip signal after the set delay. The TRIP
signal is a pulse 150 ms long. The current based pole discordance function can be

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 641

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

set to be active either continuously or only directly in connection to breaker open

or close command.

The function also has a binary input that can be configured from the autoreclosing
function, so that the pole discordance function can be blocked during sequences
with a single pole open if single pole autoreclosing is used.
M13946-3 v7

The simplified block diagram of the current and contact based Pole discordance
protection function CCPDSC is shown in figure 320.

BLOCK
OR
BLKDBYAR

PolPosAuxCont

AND
POLE1OPN
POLE1CL
POLE2OPN
Discordance
POLE2CL
detection
POLE3OPN
POLE3CL t 150 ms
t TRIP
AND
OR

PD Signal from CB
AND
EXTPDIND

CLOSECMD t+200 ms
OR
OPENCMD

AND

Unsymmetry current
detection

en05000747.vsd
IEC05000747 V1 EN-US

Figure 320: Simplified block diagram of pole discordance function CCPDSC -

contact and current based

CCPDSC is blocked if:

• The IED is in TEST mode and CCPDSC has been blocked from the local HMI
• The input signal BLOCK is high
• The input signal BLKDBYAR is high

The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discordance
protection. It can be connected to a binary input in the IED in order to receive a
block command from external devices or can be software connected to other
internal functions in the IED itself in order to receive a block command from
internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and
internal function outputs.

The BLKDBYAR signal blocks the pole discordance operation when a single phase
autoreclosing cycle is in progress. It can be connected to the output signal 1PT1 on
SMBRRECfunction block. If the autoreclosing function is an external device, then
BLKDBYAR has to be connected to a binary input in the IED and this binary input

642 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

is connected to a signalization “1phase autoreclosing in progress” from the external

autoreclosing device.

If the pole discordance protection is enabled, then two different criteria can
generate a trip signal TRIP:

• Pole discordance signaling from the circuit breaker.

• Unsymmetrical current detection.

9.11.7.1 Pole discordance signaling from circuit breaker M13946-18 v4

If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close the pole
discordance status, then the function input EXTPDIND is activated from the pole
discordance signal derived from the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts (one NO
contact for each phase connected in parallel, and in series with one NC contact for
each phase connected in parallel) and, after a settable time interval tTrip (0-60 s), a
150 ms trip pulse command TRIP is generated by the Polediscordance function.

9.11.7.2 Unsymmetrical current detection M13946-21 v4

Unsymmetrical current indicated if:

• any phase current is lower than CurrUnsymLevel of the highest current in the
three phases.
• the highest phase current is greater than CurrRelLevel of IBase.

If these conditions are true, an unsymmetrical condition is detected and the internal
signal INPS is turned high. This detection is enabled to generate a trip after a set
time delay tTrip if the detection occurs in the next 200 ms after the circuit breaker
has received a command to open trip or close and if the unbalance persists. The 200
ms limitation is for avoiding unwanted operation during unsymmetrical load
conditions.

The pole discordance protection is informed that a trip or close command has been
given to the circuit breaker through the inputs CLOSECMD (for closing command
information) and OPENCMD (for opening command information). These inputs
can be connected to terminal binary inputs if the information are generated from
the field (that is from auxiliary contacts of the close and open push buttons) or may
be software connected to the outputs of other integrated functions (that is close
command from a control function or a general trip from integrated protections).

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 643

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

9.11.8 Technical data

M13279-1 v10

Table 351: CCPDSC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (0–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Independent time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 30 ms whichever

between trip condition and trip is greater
signal

9.12 Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP SEMOD156693-1 v4

9.12.1 Identification
SEMOD158941-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP 37
P<
2
SYMBOL-LL V2 EN-US

9.12.2 Functionality SEMOD155787-4 v6

The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available

as a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.

Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that
it does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous
generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the
rest of the power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous
machines operate as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator
under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may
be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system.

Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous
state. The task of the low forward power protection is to protect the turbine and not
to protect the generator itself.

Figure 321 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with
underpower and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a
higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk
for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One
should set the underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less

644 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

than about 2%. One should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from
the network to the generator is higher than 1% depending on the type of turbine.

When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more
sensitive value (e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).

Underpower IED Overpower IED

Operate
Q Q
Operate
Line Line

Margin Margin
P P

Operating point Operating point

without without
turbine torque turbine torque

IEC06000315-2-en.vsd
IEC06000315 V2 EN-US

Figure 321: Protection with underpower IED and overpower IED

9.12.3 Function block SEMOD172623-4 v4

GUPPDUP
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLOCK1 START
BLOCK2 START1
START2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT

IEC07000027-2-en.vsd
IEC07000027 V2 EN-US

Figure 322: GUPPDUP function block

9.12.4 Signals
PID-3709-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 352: GUPPDUP Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current group connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage group connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLOCK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 1
BLOCK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 2

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 645

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

PID-3709-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 353: GUPPDUP Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 1
TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 2
START BOOLEAN Common start
START1 BOOLEAN Start of stage 1
START2 BOOLEAN Start of stage 2
P REAL Active Power in MW
PPERCENT REAL Active power in % of SBase
Q REAL Reactive power in MVAr
QPERCENT REAL Reactive power in % of SBase

9.12.5 Settings
PID-3709-SETTINGS v6

Table 354: GUPPDUP Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode1 Off - - UnderPower Operation mode for stage 1 Off / On
UnderPower
Power1 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 1.0 Stage 1 underpower setting in Angle1
direction in % of SBase
Angle1 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power
senistivity stage 1
TripDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 1
DropDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 1
OpMode2 Off - - UnderPower Operation mode for stage 2 Off / On
UnderPower
Power2 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 1.0 Power setting for stage 2 in % of SBase
Angle2 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power
senistivity stage 2
TripDelay2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 2
DropDelay2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 2

646 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Table 355: GUPPDUP Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
k 0.000 - 0.999 - 0.001 0.000 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, P and Q
Hysteresis1 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in %
SBase
Hysteresis2 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in %
SBase
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 5% of Ir
IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 30% of Ir
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 100% of Ir
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 5% of Ur
UAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 30% of Ur
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 100% of Ur
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 5% of Ir
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 30% of Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 100% of Ir

Table 356: GUPPDUP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
Mode L1, L2, L3 - - Pos Seq Selection of measured current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 647

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

9.12.6 Monitored data

PID-3709-MONITOREDDATA v5

Table 357: GUPPDUP Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
P REAL - MW Active Power in MW
PPERCENT REAL - % Active power in % of
SBase
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power in MVAr
QPERCENT REAL - % Reactive power in % of
SBase

9.12.7 Operation principle

SEMOD172136-4 v4

A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is

shown in figure 323. The function has two stages with individual settings.

Chosen current
phasors P

Complex Derivation of S(angle)

S(angle) < t TRIP1
power S(composant)
Chosen voltage Power1
calculation in Char angle
phasors Q
START1

S(angle) < t TRIP2

Power2
START2

P = POWRE

Q = POWIM

IEC09000018-2-en.vsd
IEC09000018 V2 EN-US

Figure 323: Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function

The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing
blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as
shown in table 358.

648 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Table 358: Complex power calculation

Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation
L1, L2, L3
S = U L1 × I L1* + U L 2 × I L 2* + U L 3 × I L 3*
EQUATION1697 V1 EN-US (Equation 159)
Arone
S = U L1L 2 × I L1* - U L 2 L 3 × I L 3*
EQUATION1698 V1 EN-US (Equation 160)
PosSeq
S = 3 × U PosSeq × I PosSeq*
EQUATION1699 V1 EN-US (Equation 161)
L1L2
S = U L1L 2 × ( I L1* - I L 2* )
EQUATION1700 V1 EN-US (Equation 162)
L2L3
S = U L 2 L 3 × ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
EQUATION1701 V1 EN-US (Equation 163)
L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 × ( I L 3* - I L1* )
EQUATION1702 V1 EN-US (Equation 164)
L1
S = 3 × U L1 × I L1*
EQUATION1703 V1 EN-US (Equation 165)
L2
S = 3 × U L 2 × I L 2*
EQUATION1704 V1 EN-US (Equation 166)
L3
S = 3 × U L 3 × I L 3*
EQUATION1705 V1 EN-US (Equation 167)

The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.

The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is

calculated. If this angle is 0° the active power component P is calculated. If this
angle is 90° the reactive power component Q is calculated.

The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting

Power1(2). For directional underpower protection, a start signal START1(2) is
activated if the calculated power component is smaller than the pick up value. For
directional overpower protection, a start signal START1(2) is activated if the
calculated power component is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay
TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the start signal is still active. At
activation of any of the two stages a common signal START will be activated. At
trip from any of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated.

To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The

absolute hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) + drop-
power1(2)). For generator low forward power protection the power setting is very

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 649

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

low, normally down to 0.02 p.u. of rated generator power. The hysteresis should
therefore be set to a smaller value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be
calculated with the Power1(2), Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) +
Hysteresis1(2)

For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop-
power1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 ·
Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value.

If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value, the function will
reset after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop
out and that the timer of the stage will reset.

9.12.7.1 Low pass filtering SEMOD172136-39 v3

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is

possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S
(P, Q). This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the
measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following
recursive formula:

S = k × SOld + (1 - k ) × SCalculated
EQUATION1959 V1 EN-US (Equation 168)

Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
TD

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for
k=0.92 in case of slow operating functions.

9.12.7.2 Calibration of analog inputs SEMOD172136-57 v3

Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get
class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle
compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation
below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure
324.

650 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

IEC05000652 V2 EN-US

Figure 324: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference
and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

Analog outputs (Monitored data) from the function can be used for service values
or in the disturbance report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in
percent of base power: PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value:
Q, or in percent of base power: QPERCENT.

9.12.8 Technical data SEMOD175153-1 v1

SEMOD175152-2 v11

Table 359: GUPPDUP technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Power level (0.0–500.0)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr
for Step 1 and Step 2 ±1.0% of S at S > Sr
where

S r = 1.732 × U r × I r

Characteristic angle (-180.0–180.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees

for Step 1 and Step 2
Independent time delay to operate for Step 1 (0.01-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms
and Step 2 at 2 x Sr to 0.5 x Sr and k=0.000 whichever is greater

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 651

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

9.13 Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP SEMOD172360-1 v4

9.13.1 Identification
SEMOD176574-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP 32
P>
2
DOCUMENT172362-IMG158942
V2 EN-US

9.13.2 Functionality SEMOD172356-4 v5

The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available

as a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.

Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that
it does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous
generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the
rest of the power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous
machines operate as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator
under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may
be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system.

Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous
state. The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to
protect the generator itself.

Figure 325 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with
underpower and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a
higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk
for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One
should set the underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less
than about 2%. One should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from
the network to the generator is higher than 1%.

When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more
sensitive value (e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).

652 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Underpower IED Overpower IED

Operate
Q Q
Operate
Line Line

Margin Margin
P P

Operating point Operating point

without without
turbine torque turbine torque

IEC06000315-2-en.vsd
IEC06000315 V2 EN-US

Figure 325: Reverse power protection with underpower IED and overpower
IED

9.13.3 Function block SEMOD172667-4 v4

GOPPDOP
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLOCK1 START
BLOCK2 START1
START2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT

IEC07000028-2-en.vsd
IEC07000028 V2 EN-US

Figure 326: GOPPDOP function block

9.13.4 Signals
PID-3710-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 360: GOPPDOP Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current group connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage group connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLOCK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 1
BLOCK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 2

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 653

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

PID-3710-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 361: GOPPDOP Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 1
TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 2
START BOOLEAN Common start
START1 BOOLEAN Start of stage 1
START2 BOOLEAN Start of stage 2
P REAL Active power P in MW
PPERCENT REAL Active power P in % of SBase
Q REAL Reactive power Q in MVAr
QPERCENT REAL Reactive power Q in % of SBase

9.13.5 Settings
PID-3710-SETTINGS v7

Table 362: GOPPDOP Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode1 Off - - OverPower Operation mode for stage 1 Off / On
OverPower
Power1 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 Stage 1 overpower setting in Angle1
direction in % of SBase
Angle1 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power
senistivity stage 1
TripDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 1
DropDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 1
OpMode2 Off - - OverPower Operation mode for stage 2 Off / On
OverPower
Power2 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 Stage 2 overpower setting in Angle2
direction in % of SBase
Angle2 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power
senistivity stage 2
TripDelay2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 2
DropDelay2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 2

654 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Table 363: GOPPDOP Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
k 0.000 - 0.999 - 0.001 0.000 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, P and Q
Hysteresis1 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % of
SBase
Hysteresis2 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % of
SBase
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 5% of Ir
IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 30% of Ir
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 100% of Ir
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 5% of Ur
UAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 30% of Ur
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 100% of Ur
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 5% of Ir
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 30% of Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 100% of Ir

Table 364: GOPPDOP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
Mode L1, L2, L3 - - Pos Seq Selection of measured current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 655

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

9.13.6 Monitored data

PID-3710-MONITOREDDATA v6

Table 365: GOPPDOP Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
P REAL - MW Active power P in MW
PPERCENT REAL - % Active power P in % of
SBase
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power Q in
MVAr
QPERCENT REAL - % Reactive power Q in %
of SBase

9.13.7 Operation principle

SEMOD172154-4 v3

A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is

shown in figure 327. The function has two stages with individual settings.

Chosen current
phasors P

Complex Derivation of S(angle)

S(angle) > t TRIP1
power S(composant)
Chosen voltage Power1
calculation in Char angle
phasors Q
START1

S(angle) > t TRIP2

Power2
START2

P = POWRE

Q = POWIM

IEC06000567-2-en.vsd
IEC06000567 V2 EN-US

Figure 327: Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function

The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing
blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as
shown in table 366.

656 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Table 366: Complex power calculation

Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation
L1, L2, L3
S = U L1 × I L1* + U L 2 × I L 2* + U L 3 × I L 3*
EQUATION1697 V1 EN-US (Equation 169)
Arone
S = U L1L 2 × I L1* - U L 2 L 3 × I L 3*
EQUATION1698 V1 EN-US (Equation 170)
PosSeq
S = 3 × U PosSeq × I PosSeq*
EQUATION1699 V1 EN-US (Equation 171)
L1L2
S = U L1L 2 × ( I L1* - I L 2* )
EQUATION1700 V1 EN-US (Equation 172)
L2L3
S = U L 2 L 3 × ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
EQUATION1701 V1 EN-US (Equation 173)
L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 × ( I L 3* - I L1* )
EQUATION1702 V1 EN-US (Equation 174)
L1
S = 3 × U L1 × I L1*
EQUATION1703 V1 EN-US (Equation 175)
L2
S = 3 × U L 2 × I L 2*
EQUATION1704 V1 EN-US (Equation 176)
L3
S = 3 × U L 3 × I L 3*
EQUATION1705 V1 EN-US (Equation 177)

The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.

The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is

calculated. If this angle is 0° the active power component P is calculated. If this
angle is 90° the reactive power component Q is calculated.

The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting

Power1(2). A start signal START1(2) is activated if the calculated power
component is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a
trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the start signal is still active. At activation of
any of the two stages a common signal START will be activated. At trip from any
of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated.

To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The

absolute hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) – drop-
power1(2)). For generator reverse power protection the power setting is very low,
normally down to 0.02 p.u. of rated generator power. The hysteresis should
therefore be set to a smaller value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 657

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

calculated with the Power1(2), Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) –

Hysteresis1(2)

For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop-
power1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 ·
Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value.

If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value the function will reset
after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop out
ant that the timer of the stage will reset.

9.13.7.1 Low pass filtering SEMOD172154-37 v4

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is

possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S
(P, Q). This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the
measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following
recursive formula:

S = k × SOld + (1 - k ) × SCalculated
EQUATION1959 V1 EN-US (Equation 178)

Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k =
0.92 in case of slow operating functions.

9.13.7.2 Calibration of analog inputs SEMOD172154-55 v2

Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get
class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle
compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation
below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure
328.

658 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

IEC05000652 V2 EN-US

Figure 328: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference
and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the
disturbance report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in percent of
base power: PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value: Q, or in
percent of base power: QPERCENT.

9.13.8 Technical data SEMOD175160-1 v1

SEMOD175159-2 v9

Table 367: GOPPDOP technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Power level (0.0–500.0)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr
for Step 1 and Step 2 ±1.0% of S at S > Sr

Characteristic angle (-180.0–180.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees

for Step 1 and Step 2
Operate time, start at 0.5 x Sr to 2 x Sr and Min. =10 ms
k=0.000
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, start at 2 x Sr to 0.5 x Sr and Min. = 35 ms
k=0.000
Max. = 55 ms
Independent time delay to operate for Step 1 (0.01-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms
and Step 2 at 0.5 x Sr to 2 x Sr and k=0.000 whichever is greater

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 659

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

9.14 Broken conductor check BRCPTOC SEMOD171761-1 v3

9.14.1 Identification
SEMOD172362-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC - 46

9.14.2 Functionality SEMOD171805-5 v6

Conventional protection functions cannot detect the broken conductor condition.

Broken conductor check BRCPTOC function, consisting of continuous phase
selective current unsymmetrical check on the line where the IED is connected,
gives an alarm or trip at detecting broken conductors.

9.14.3 Function block SEMOD171906-11 v4

BRCPTOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR

IEC07000034-2-en.vsd
IEC07000034 V2 EN-US

Figure 329: BRCPTOC function block

9.14.4 Signals
PID-3479-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 368: BRCPTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip

PID-3479-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 369: BRCPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Operate signal of the protection logic
START BOOLEAN Start signal of the protection logic

660 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

9.14.5 Settings
PID-3479-SETTINGS v7

Table 370: BRCPTOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
Iub> 50 - 90 %IM 1 50 Highest and lowest phase currents
difference in % of highest phase current
IP> 5 - 100 %IB 1 20 Minimum phase current for operation of
Iub> in % of IBase
tOper 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Operate time delay

Table 371: BRCPTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tReset 0.010 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay in reset

Table 372: BRCPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

9.14.6 Monitored data

PID-3479-MONITOREDDATA v6

Table 373: BRCPTOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IUNBAL REAL - - Measured unbalance of
phase currents

9.14.7 Operation principle SEMOD171791-5 v5

Broken conductor check (BRCPTOC) detects a broken conductor condition by

detecting the asymmetry between currents in the three phases. The current-
measuring elements continuously measure the three-phase currents.

The current asymmetry signal output START is set on if:

• The difference in currents between the phase with the lowest current and the
phase with the highest current is greater than set percentage Iub> of the
highest phase current
• The highest phase current is greater than the minimum setting value IP>.
• The lowest phase current is below 50% of the minimum setting value IP>

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 661

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

The third condition is included to avoid problems in systems involving parallel

lines. If a conductor breaks in one phase on one line, the parallel line will
experience an increase in current in the same phase. This might result in the first
two conditions being satisfied. If the unsymmetrical detection lasts for a period
longer than the set time tOper the TRIP output is activated.

The simplified logic diagram of the broken conductor check function is shown in
figure 330

BRCPTOC is disabled (blocked) if:

• The IED is in TEST status and the function has been blocked from the local
HMI test menu (BlockBRC=Yes).
• The input signal BLOCK is high.

The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive
a block command from external devices, or can be software connected to other
internal functions of the IED itself to receive a block command from internal
functions.

The output trip signal TRIP is a three-phase trip. It can be used to command a trip
to the circuit breaker or for alarm purpose only.

TEST

TEST-ACTIVE
and
Block BRCPTOC=Yes
START

Function Enable
BLOCK or
tOper
TRIP
and t
Unsymmetrical
Current Detection
STI

IL1<50%IP>

IL2<50%IP> or

IL3<50%IP>

IEC09000158-3-en.vsd
IEC09000158 V3 EN-US

Figure 330: Simplified logic diagram for Broken conductor check BRCPTOC

662 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

9.14.8 Technical data SEMOD171939-1 v1

SEMOD175200-2 v7

Table 374: BRCPTOC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Minimum phase current for operation (5–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Unbalance current operation (50–90)% of maximum current ±1.0% of Ir

Independent operate time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms

whichever is greater
Independent reset time delay (0.010-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms
whichever is greater
Start time at current change from Ir to 0 Min. = 25 ms -
Max. = 35 ms
Reset time at current change from 0 to Ir Min. = 5 ms -
Max. = 20 ms

9.15 Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC GUID-41731DCF-840C-4717-9F51-899FC648F881 v2

9.15.1 Identification
GUID-67FC8DBF-4391-4562-A630-3F244CBB4A33 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC - -

9.15.2 Functionality GUID-D55CEBF7-9377-4E36-BD8B-533609048A1E v3

Shunt Capacitor Banks (SCB) are used in a power system to provide reactive
power compensation and power factor correction. They are as well used as integral
parts of Static Var Compensators (SVC) or Harmonic Filters installations.
Capacitor bank protection (CBPGAPC) function is specially designed to provide
protection and supervision features for SCBs.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 663

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

9.15.3 Function block

GUID-338FBDF8-0360-4EA4-8663-D2D30F845B44 v1

CBPGAPC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK TROC
BLKTR TRUC
BLKOC TRQOL
BLKUC TRHOL
BLKUCCUT START
BLKQOL STOC
BLKHOL STUC
STQOL
STHOL
STOCL1
STOCL2
STOCL3
STUCL1
STUCL2
STUCL3
STQOLL1
STQOLL2
STQOLL3
STHDTL1
STHDTL2
STHDTL3
STHIDML1
STHIDML2
STHIDML3
RECNINH

IEC14000046-1-en.vsd
IEC08000500 V2 EN-US

Figure 331: CBPGAPC function block

9.15.4 Signals
PID-3580-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 375: CBPGAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three Phase Current Input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block the complete function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block all trip output signals
BLKOC BOOLEAN 0 Block over current functionality
BLKUC BOOLEAN 0 Block under current functionality
BLKUCCUT BOOLEAN 0 Block UC function when the capacitor bank is
disconnected
BLKQOL BOOLEAN 0 Block reactive power over load functionality
BLKHOL BOOLEAN 0 Block harmonic over load functionality

664 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

PID-3580-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 376: CBPGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TROC BOOLEAN Trip signal for over current
TRUC BOOLEAN Trip signal for under current
TRQOL BOOLEAN Trip signal for reactive power over load
TRHOL BOOLEAN Trip signal for harmonic over load
START BOOLEAN General start signal
STOC BOOLEAN Start signals for over current
STUC BOOLEAN Start signal for under current
STQOL BOOLEAN Start signal for reactive power over load
STHOL BOOLEAN Start signal for harmonic over load
STOCL1 BOOLEAN Start signal for over current of phase L1
STOCL2 BOOLEAN Start signal for over current of phase L2
STOCL3 BOOLEAN Start signal for over current of phase L3
STUCL1 BOOLEAN Start signal for under current of phase L1
STUCL2 BOOLEAN Start signal for under current of phase L2
STUCL3 BOOLEAN Start signal for under current of phase L3
STQOLL1 BOOLEAN Start signal for reactive power over load of phase
L1
STQOLL2 BOOLEAN Start signal for reactive power over load of phase
L2
STQOLL3 BOOLEAN Start signal for reactive power over load of phase
L3
STHDTL1 BOOLEAN Start signal harmonic over load Definite Time
stage phase L1
STHDTL2 BOOLEAN Start signal harmonic over load Definite Time
stage phase L2
STHDTL3 BOOLEAN Start signal harmonic over load Definite Time
stage phase L3
STHIDML1 BOOLEAN Start signal for harmonic over load IDMT stage of
phase L1
STHIDML2 BOOLEAN Start signal for harmonic over load IDMT stage of
phase L2
STHIDML3 BOOLEAN Start signal for harmonic over load IDMT stage of
phase L3
RECNINH BOOLEAN Capacitor bank reconnection inhibit signal

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 665

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

9.15.5 Settings
PID-3580-SETTINGS v5

Table 377: CBPGAPC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
OperationRecIn Off - - On Inhibit reconnection for operation Off/On
On
IRecnInhibit< 4 - 1000 %IB 1 10 Current in % of IBase below which the
SCB is disconnected
tReconnInhibit 1.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 300.00 Time delay for Capacitor Bank voltage to
discharge to <5%
OperationOC Off - - On Operation over current Off/On
On
IOC> 10 - 900 %IB 1 135 Start level for over current operation, %
of IBase
tOC 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Time delay for over current operation
OperationUC Off - - Off Operation under current Off/On
On
IUC< 5 - 100 %IB 1 70 Start level for under current operation in
% of IBase
tUC 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Time delay for under current operation
OperationQOL Off - - On Operation reactive power over load
On Off/On
QOL> 10 - 900 % 1 130 Start level for reactive power over load in
%
tQOL 1.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 60.00 Time delay for reactive power overload
operation
OperationHOL Off - - On Operation harmonic over load Off/On
On
HOLDTU> 10 - 500 % 1 200 Start value of voltage in % for DT
harmonic voltage overload
tHOLDT 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 10.00 Time delay for operation of harmonic
voltage overload
HOLIDMTU> 80 - 200 % 1 110 Start value of voltage in % for IDMT
harm. voltage overload
kHOLIDMT 0.50 - 1.50 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier for harmonic voltage
overload IDMT curve
tMaxHOLIDMT 0.05 - 6000.00 s 0.01 2000.00 Maximum trip delay for harmonic voltage
overload
tMinHOLIDMT 0.05 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Minimum trip delay for harmonic voltage
overload

Table 378: CBPGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

666 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

9.15.6 Monitored data

PID-3580-MONITOREDDATA v5

Table 379: CBPGAPC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IPEAKL1 REAL - A Equivalant RMS current
for phase L1
IPEAKL2 REAL - A Equivalant RMS current
for phase L2
IPEAKL3 REAL - A Equivalant RMS current
for phase L3
URMSL1 REAL - % Calculated voltage RMS
for phase L1
URMSL2 REAL - % Calculated voltage RMS
for phase L2
URMSL3 REAL - % Calculated voltage RMS
for phase L3
QL1 REAL - % Reactive power value for
phase L1
QL2 REAL - % Reactive power value for
phase L2
QL3 REAL - % Reactive power value for
phase L3

9.15.7 Operation principle GUID-07CD9DBD-5ACB-4091-A480-7D0EEF76C241 v3

Capacitor bank protection (CBPGAPC) function measures the SCB three-phase

current. CBPGAPC has several built-in features:
• Overcurrent stage
• Undercurrent stage
• Reconnection inhibit
• Harmonic overload
• Reactive power overload

9.15.7.1 Measured quantities GUID-48C0B6DE-2DAD-4631-A967-72DF92A72B0B v2

Three-phase input current from the SCB is connected via the preprocessing block
to CBPGAPC function. From this preprocessing block CBPGAPC function obtains
the following quantities for every phase:

• Current sample values with sampling rate of 1 kHz in 50 Hz power system and
1.2 kHz in 60 Hz power system (that is, 20 samples in fundamental power
system cycle). These samples correspond to the instantaneous current
waveform of the protected SCB and in further text will be marked with symbol
“i~”
• Equivalent RMS current value based on Peak Current measurement. This
value is obtained as maximum absolute current sample value over last power

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 667

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

system cycle divided by √2 and in further text will be marked with symbol
“IpeakRMS”
• Equivalent true RMS current value based on the following formula:

åi 2
~m

I TRMS = m =1

N
EQUATION2232 V1 EN-US (Equation 179)

where N is used number of samples in one power system cycle (that is, 20) and i~m
are last N samples of the current waveform. In further text this equivalent true rms
current quantity will be marked with symbol ITRMS.

Note that the measured IpeakRMS value is available as a service value in primary
amperes for every phase from the function.

From the measured SCB currents, voltage value across every SCB phase is
calculated. This is done by continuous integration of the measured current
waveform by using the following principal equation:

1
u (t ) = × i ( t ) × ¶t
ò
C
EQUATION2233 V1 EN-US (Equation 180)

Where:
u(t) is voltage waveform across capacitor
i(t) is capacitor current waveform
C is capacitance in Farads

By using this integration procedure and subsequent filtering the following

quantities for every phase are calculated within the function:

• Voltage sample values with rate of 1 kHz in 50 Hz power system and 1.2 kHz
in 60 Hz power system (that is, 20 samples in fundamental power system
cycle). These samples correspond to the instantaneous voltage waveform
across the protected SCB and in further text will be marked with symbol u~
• Equivalent rms voltage value based on Peak Voltage measurement. This value
is obtained as maximum absolute voltage sample value over last power system
cycle divided by √2 and in further text will be marked with symbol UpeakRMS
• Equivalent true RMS voltage value based on the following formula:

668 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

åu 2
~m

U TRMS = m =1

N
EQUATION2234 V1 EN-US (Equation 181)

Where:
N is used number of samples in one power system cycle (for example, 20)
u~m are last N samples of the voltage waveform

In further text this equivalent true RMS voltage quantity will be marked with
symbol UTRMS

Some additional filtering of the calculated voltage quantities is additionally

performed within the function in order to avoid equivalent RMS voltage values
overshooting during capacitor switching.

In order to avoid dependence of the current integration on exact value of the

protected capacitor bank capacitance the whole integration process is done in per
unit system. In order to convert measured current in primary amperes into per unit
value the base current for the protected capacitor bank shall be known. This value
is set as parameter IBase and it represents the rated SCB current in primary
amperes at fundamental frequency. This value is calculated for a three-phase SCB
as follows:

1000 × Q [ MVAr ]
IBase =
3 × U [ kV ]
EQUATION2235 V1 EN-US (Equation 182)

Where:
IBase is base current for the function in primary amperes
Q[MVAr] is shunt capacitor bank MVAr rating
U[kV] is shunt capacitor bank rated phase-to-phase voltage in kV

Once the base current is known the internal voltage calculations can be performed.
Note that the calculated UpeakRMS value is available as a service value in percent
for every phase from the function.

Generated reactive power (Q) by the capacitor bank is calculated within the
function for every phase as given by the following equation:

Q =U TRMS ×I TRMS

EQUATION2236 V1 EN-US (Equation 183)

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 669

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

Where:
Q is generated reactive power in per-unit
UTRMS is capacitor equivalent true RMS voltage in per-unit

ITRMS is capacitor equivalent true RMS current in per-unit

Additional filtering of the calculated Q quantity is performed within the function in

order to avoid overshooting during capacitor switching. Note that the calculated Q
value is available as a service value in percent for every phase from the function.

Simplified logic diagram about used analog quantities within one phase of the
capacitor bank protection function are shown in figure 332.

I3P I PeakRMS [A]

Overcurrent

Undercurrent

I TRMS[A]
Reconnection Inhibit

TRMS UTRMS[pu] Reactive Power Overload

FILTER
i~ [A]
IBase
 u~ [pu] PEAK UPeakRMS[pu]
Harmonic Overload
FILTER

IEC09000746-2-en.vsd

IEC09000746 V2 EN-US

Figure 332: Simplified logic diagram about used analog quantities within one
phase

9.15.7.2 Reconnection inhibit feature GUID-00A2F589-AAE4-47A3-A8F3-85A01D072254 v2

This feature determines that capacitor banks are disconnected from the power
system and is used to prevent reconnection of a charged capacitor bank to a live
network. The IRMS values of the three phase currents are compared with the
IRecnInhibit< parameter in order to determine when the capacitor bank is
energized or disconnected. The simplified logic diagram is shown in fig 333.

670 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

currentRMS a 0.02 s
CapBank Energised
a>b t
b
IRecnInhibit<

CAPDISC
Phx
NOT

IEC08000345-1-en.vsd
IEC08000345 V1 EN-US

Figure 333: Capacitor bank energization check for one phase. Similar for all
three phases

When SCB is disconnected in all three phases, the reconnection inhibit signal will
be given. This signal will be active until the preset time elapsed and is used to
inhibit the reconnection of charged capacitor bank to live network. The internal
logic diagram for the inhibit feature is shown in figure 334.

CAPDISC

CAPDISC
_ Ph1

CAPDISC Ph2 tReconnInhibit

AND
AND RECNINH
CAPDISC Ph3
AND
Z-2

Z-2

en08000346.vsd
IEC08000346 V1 EN-US

Figure 334: Capacitor bank reconnection inhibit

9.15.7.3 Overcurrent feature GUID-4182050D-0CEC-4570-B90A-5BCEDF535595 v2

The overcurrent protection feature protects the capacitor bank from excessive
current conditions. The sub function takes the current peakRMS value from the
preprocessing block in the IED as input. The peakRMS value of the current is
compared with the setting of parameter IOC>. Whenever the peakRMS value of
the current crosses the set level the function sends a START signal as output. The
signal is passed through the definite timer for giving the TRIP signal. Each phase
will have its own START and TRIP signals for overcurrent. The internal logic for
the overcurrent feature is shown in fig 335.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 671

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

IPeakRMS a
a>b tOC
IOC> b TROC
AND t AND

OperationOC=On
STOC

BLKTR

BLKOC

BLOCK OR

IEC08000350-1-en.vsd
IEC08000350 V1 EN-US

Figure 335: Capacitor bank overcurrent protection

9.15.7.4 Undercurrent feature GUID-6D21DA11-BCBC-4A03-91CF-723883386224 v2

Undercurrent protection feature is used to disconnect the capacitor bank from the
rest of the power system when the voltage at the capacitor bank terminals is too
low for too long period of time. This sub function uses the current peakRMS value
from the preprocessing block in the IED as input. The peakRMS value of the
current is compared to the set value of the parameter IUC<. Whenever the
peakRMS value of the current falls below the set undercurrent level, the function
will send a START signal as output. The function can be blocked when the current
falls below the cut off level. The capacitor bank disconnected signals are used for
this blocking. This feature will help to prevent trip operation when the capacitor
bank is disconnected from the power system. The TRIP output signal is delayed by
a definite timer. Each phase will have its own START and TRIP signals for
undercurrent. The internal logic for the undercurrent feature is shown in fig 336.

IPeakRMS
a
b>a
IUC< b
tUC

AND t
AND TRUC
OperationUC=On

BLKUC
STUC
BLOCK
OR
CAPDISC

BLKTR

en08000351.vsd
IEC08000351 V1 EN-US

Figure 336: Capacitor bank undercurrent protection

9.15.7.5 Capacitor harmonic overload feature GUID-8F40ED8B-2276-4C44-B06A-8FE9C099357C v3

Harmonic overload protection feature will protect the capacitor from over load
conditions caused by harmonics. The sub-function protects the capacitor in two
stages, first stage is Inverse time delay (IDMT) based and a second stage is based
on Definite Time (DT) delay.

672 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

IDMT curve has adjustable k factor and inverse time characteristic is shown in
figure 337, where k = 1. The IDMT curve starts only when the equivalent RMS
voltage value is higher than set value of parameter HOLIDMTU> and stays active
until the value falls below the reset value.

2.3
Voltage Peak RMS [pu]

2.1

1.9

1.7

1.5

1.3

1.1
0.1 1 10 100 1000 10000
Operate Time [s]
IEC08000352-1-en.vsd
IEC08000352 V1 EN-US

Figure 337: IDMT curve for harmonic overload (kHOLIDMT=1.0)

Main seven operating points for this IDMT curve are defined by IEC/ANSI
standards and they are shown in above figure and summarized in the following
table:
Table 380: Main operating points for IDMT curve

UpeakRMS 1.15 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.7 2.0 2.2

[pu]
Time [s] 1800 300 60 15 1.0 0.3 0.12

Note the following regarding this IDMT curve:

1. When parameter kHOLIDMT has different value from 1.0 operating time is
proportionally changed (for example, when kHOLIDMT =0.9 operating times
will be 90% of the values shown in above figure 337 and table 380)
2. Between the seven main points in table 380, the operate time is calculate by
using linear interpolation in the logarithmic scale
3. Integration process is used to calculate the operate time for varying voltage
condition
4. By setting parameter tMinHOLIDMT =0.1s standard requirements for
minimum operating time of 100ms for harmonic overload IDMT curve can be
fluffed
5. By setting parameter tMaxHOLIDMT =2000s operation for small harmonics
overload condition when UpeakRMS is in-between 1.1pu and 1.2pu is assured

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 673

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

Harmonic overload definite time curve has settings facilities for independent
pickup and time delay. It can be used as separate tripping stage or as an alarm
stage.

Both of these two harmonic overload stages are active during capacitor bank
energizing and are capable to properly measure and operate up to and including 9th
harmonic.

The internal logic for harmonic overload feature is shown in figure 338:

STHDTLx
UPeakRMS [pu]
a
a>b
HOLDTU> b

tHOLDT
t
OperationHOL=On AND
OR TRHOL
AND

BLKHOL

BLOCK
OR OR STHOL

BLKTR

OperationHOL=On AND
TR
UPeakRMS [pu]
a
a>b kHOLIDMT IDMT
HOLIDMTU> b
tMaxHOLIDMT
STHIDMLx
tMinHOLIDMT ST

UPeakRMS [pu]

IEC09000752-1-en.vsd
IEC09000752 V1 EN-US

Figure 338: Simplified logic diagram for harmonic overload

9.15.7.6 Capacitor reactive power overload feature GUID-894B9C67-71F7-48B1-8D54-1816CB3F79A9 v2

Reactive power overload protection feature will protect the capacitor bank from
reactive power overload conditions.

The sub-function will use the reactive power values as input. The reactive power
input values are calculated from the true RMS value of voltage and current. The
reactive power value is compared with the QOL> setting. When the reactive power
value exceeds the QOL> setting the STQOL signal will be activated. The start
signal is delayed by the definite timer before activating the TRQOL signal. The
internal logic diagram for this feature is shown in figure 339.

674 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Q [pu]
a
a>b
QOL> b

tQOL
t
OperationQOL=On AND
TRQOL
AND
BLKTR

BLKQOL
STQOL
BLOCK
OR

en08000353.vsd
IEC08000353 V1 EN-US

Figure 339: Capacitor bank reactive power overload protection

9.15.8 Technical data

GUID-6A7DA510-E145-4C5B-A7DC-97BC4258E621 v9

Table 381: CBPGAPC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, overcurrent (10-900)% of lBase ±2.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±2.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, overcurrent >95% at (100-900)% of IBase -

Start time, overcurrent, at 0.5 x Iset Min. = 5 ms -
to 2 x Iset Max. = 20 ms
Reset time, overcurrent, at 2 x Iset to Min. = 25 ms -
0.5 x Iset Max. = 40 ms
Critical impulse time, overcurrent 2 ms typically at 0.5 x Iset to 2 x Iset -
protection start 1 ms typically at 0.5 x Iset to 10 x
Iset
Impulse margin time, overcurrent 10 ms typically
protection start
Operate value, undercurrent (5-100)% of IBase ±2.0% of Ir

Reset ratio, undercurrent <105% at (30-100)% of IBase -

Operate value, reconnection inhibit (4-1000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
function ±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Operate value, reactive power (10-900)% ±1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr

overload function ±1.0% of S at S > Sr

Operate value, voltage protection (10-500)% ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤

function for harmonic overload Ur
(Definite time) ±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Operate value, voltage protection (80-200)% ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤

function for harmonic overload Ur
(Inverse time) ±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Inverse time characteristic According to IEC 60871-1 (2005) ±20% or ±200 ms

and IEEE/ANSI C37.99 (2000) whichever is greater
Maximum trip delay, harmonic (0.05-6000.00) s ±20% or ±200 ms
overload IDMT whichever is greater
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 675

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Minimum trip delay, harmonic (0.05-60.00) s ±20% or ±200 ms
overload IDMT whichever is greater
Independent time delay, overcurrent (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms
at 0 to 2 x Iset whichever is greater
Independent time delay, (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±60 ms
undercurrent at 2 x Iset to 0 whichever is greater
Independent time delay, reactive (1.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±100 ms
power overload function at 0 to 2 x whichever is greater
QOL>
Independent time delay, harmonic (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
overload at 0 to 2 x HOL> whichever is greater

9.16 Negativ sequence time overcurrent protection for

machines NS2PTOC GUID-25821361-229A-44BB-A60F-FC6DD9F4F140 v2

9.16.1 Identification GUID-19BB1653-55AE-44D1-B964-F59AED5350C4 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Negative sequence time overcurrent NS2PTOC 2I2> 46I2
protection for machines

9.16.2 Functionality GUID-DBF3EC07-D947-4483-ABD1-4F7D29F48D61 v7

Negative-sequence time overcurrent protection for machines (NS2PTOC) is

intended primarily for the protection of generators against possible overheating of
the rotor caused by negative sequence current in the stator current.

The negative sequence currents in a generator may, among others, be caused by:

• Unbalanced loads
• Line to line faults
• Line to earth faults
• Broken conductors
• Malfunction of one or more poles of a circuit breaker or a disconnector

NS2PTOC can also be used as a backup protection, that is, to protect the generator
in case line protections or circuit breakers fail to clear unbalanced system faults.

To provide an effective protection for the generator for external unbalanced

conditions, NS2PTOC is able to directly measure the negative sequence current.
NS2PTOC also has a time delay characteristic which matches the heating
2
characteristic of the generator I 2 t = K as defined in standard IEEE C50.13.

676 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

where:
I2 is negative sequence current expressed in per unit of the rated
generator current
t is operating time in seconds
K is a constant which depends of the generators size and design

NS2PTOC has a wide range of K settings and the sensitivity and capability of
detecting and tripping for negative sequence currents down to the continuous
capability of a generator.

In order to match the heating characteristics of the generator a reset time parameter
can be set.

A separate definite time delayed output is available as an alarm feature to warn the
operator of a potentially dangerous situation.

9.16.3 Function block GUID-7071A62D-AB87-43C4-922A-1DD2E6DD5623 v2

NS2PTOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKST1 TR2
BLKST2 START
BLKTR ST1
ST2
ALARM
NSCURR
IEC08000359.vsdx

IEC08000359-1-EN V3 EN-US

Figure 340: NS2PTOC function block

9.16.4 Signals
PID-3854-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 382: NS2PTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group connection for neg seq.
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip signals

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 677

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

PID-3854-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 383: NS2PTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TR1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TR2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
START BOOLEAN Common start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 1
ST2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 2
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
NSCURR REAL Negative sequence current in primary amps

9.16.5 Settings
PID-3854-SETTINGS v5

Table 384: NS2PTOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
tAlarm 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 3.00 Time delay for Alarm (operated by
START signal), in sec
OpStep1 Off - - On Enable execution of step 1
On
I2-1> 3 - 500 %IB 1 10 Negative sequence current level for step
1 in % of IBase
CurveType1 Definite - - Definite Selection of definite or inverse time-
Inverse characteri. for step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 10.00 Definite time delay for trip of step 1, in
sec
tResetDef1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset of definite timer of
step 1, in sec
K1 1.0 - 99.0 s 0.1 10.0 Neg. seq. capability value of generator
for step 1, in sec
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
t1Max 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1000.00 Maximum trip delay for step 1, in sec
ResetMultip1 0.01 - 20.00 - 0.01 1.00 Reset multiplier for K1, defines reset
time of inverse curve
OpStep2 Off - - On Enable execution of step 2
On
I2-2> 3 - 500 %IB 1 10 Negative sequence current level for step
2 in % of IBase
CurveType2 Definite - - Definite Selection of definite or inverse time-
Inverse characteri. for step 2
t2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 10.00 Definite time delay for trip of step 2, in
sec
Table continues on next page

678 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tResetDef2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset of definite timer of
step 2, in sec
K2 1.0 - 99.0 s 0.1 10.0 Neg. seq. capability value of generator
for step 2, in sec
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 2
t2Max 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1000.00 Maximum trip delay for step 2, in sec
ResetMultip2 0.01 - 20.00 - 0.01 1.00 Reset multiplier for K2, defines reset
time of inverse curve

Table 385: NS2PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

9.16.6 Monitored data

PID-3854-MONITOREDDATA v5

Table 386: NS2PTOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
NSCURR REAL - A Negative sequence
current in primary amps

9.16.7 Operation principle

GUID-0DEE12AC-2CA3-4E10-8DD0-888000BD898A v4

The negative sequence time overcurrent protection for machines (NS2PTOC)

function directly measures the amplitude of the negative phase sequence
component of the measured current. NS2PTOC sets the START, ST1 or ST2
outputs active and starts to count trip time only when the measured negative
sequence current value rises above the set value of parameters I2-1> or I2-2>
respectively.

To avoid oscillation in the output signals, a certain hysteresis has been included.
For both steps, the reset ratio is 0.97.

Step 1 of NS2PTOC can operate in the Definite Time (DT) or Inverse Time
(IDMT) mode depending on the selected value for the CurveType1 parameter. If
CurveType1= Definite, NS2PTOC operates with a Definite Time Delay
characteristic and if CurveType1 = Inverse, NS2PTOC operates with an Inverse
Time Delay characteristic. Step 2 is operating in an analogous way as Step 1.

Definite time delay is not dependent on the magnitude of measured negative

sequence current. Once the measured negative sequence current exceeds the set
level, the settable definite timer t1 or t2 respectively, starts to count and the
corresponding trip signal gets activated after the pre-set definite time delay has

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 679

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

elapsed. Reset time in definite time mode is determined by the setting parameters
tResetDef1 or tResetDef2 respectively. If NS2PTOC has already started but not
tripped and measured negative sequence current drops below the start value, the
start outputs remains active for the time defined by the resetting parameters.

A BLOCK input signal resets NS2PTOC momentarily.

When the parameter CurveType1 is set to Inverse, an inverse curve is selected

according to selected value for parameter K1. The minimum trip time setting of
parameter t1Min and reset time parameter ResetMultip1 also influence step
operation. However, to match the heating characteristics of the generator, the reset
time is depending on the setting of parameter K1, which must be set according to
the generators negative sequence current capacity.

K = I 2 2t
EQUATION2112 V1 EN-US

Where:
I2 is negative sequence current expressed in per unit of the rated generator current

t is operating time in seconds

K is a constant [s], which depends on generator size and design

Operate
time

t1Max
(Default= 1000 s)

t1Min
(Default= 5 s)

K1

Current I2-1>
IEC09000691-2-en.vsd
IEC09000691 V2 EN-US

Figure 341: Inverse time characteristic with t1Min and t1Max

For a detailed description of inverse time characteristic, see chapter "Inverse

characteristics".

680 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

The reset time is exponential and is given by the following expression:

 
 
ResetTime [ s ] =  ResetMultip 
⋅K
  I 2 
  NS  − 1 
  I Start  
EQUATION2111 V4 EN-US (Equation 184)

Where
INS is the measured negative sequence current

IStart is the desired start level in pu of rated generator current

ResetMultip is multiplier of the generator capability constant K equal to setting K1 and thus
defines reset time of inverse time characteristic

9.16.7.1 Start sensitivity GUID-1D038486-7086-466F-A92F-30E1A47D0298 v3

The trip start levels Current I2-1> and I2-2> of NS2PTOC are freely settable over
a range of 3 to 500 % of rated generator current IBase. The wide range of start
setting is required in order to be able to protect generators of different types and
sizes.

After start, a certain hysteresis is used before resetting start levels. For both steps
the reset ratio is 0.97.

9.16.7.2 Alarm function GUID-1B932D89-3233-4841-977A-5B61346B057B v2

The alarm function is operated by START signal and used to warn the operator for
an abnormal situation, for example, when generator continuous negative sequence
current capability is exceeded, thereby allowing corrective action to be taken
before removing the generator from service. A settable time delay tAlarm is
provided for the alarm function to avoid false alarms during short-time unbalanced
conditions.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 681

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

9.16.7.3 Logic diagram GUID-71553DAF-374C-4980-82D8-D3AF79861C5B v3

CurveType1=Definite
AND t1 TR1
OR
Negative sequence current a
a>b
b Inverse
I2-1>

Operation=ON AND
t1Min AND
BLKST1

BLOCK

CurveType1=Inverse
t1Max
AND
ST1

IEC080004661-4-en.vsdx

IEC08000466-1-EN V4 EN-US

Figure 342: Simplified logic diagram for step 1 of Negative sequence time
overcurrent protection for machines (NS2PTOC)

Step 2 for Negative sequence time overcurrent protection for machines

(NS2PTOC) is similar to step 1.

ST1
START
ST2 OR

tAlarm ALARM

TR1
TRIP
TR2 OR

IEC09000690-2-en.vsd
IEC09000690 V2 EN-US

Figure 343: Simplified logic diagram for the START, ALARM and TRIP signals
for NS2PTOC

9.16.8 Technical data

GUID-E5718F80-556D-4852-A8F2-90E0F578D763 v9

Table 387: NS2PTOC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current, step 1 - 2 (3-500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio >95% -

Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 5 ms -
Max. = 20 ms
Table continues on next page

682 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Reset time, start at 10 x Iset to 0 Min. = 20 ms -
Max. = 35 ms
Time characteristics Definite or Inverse -
Inverse time characteristic, step 1 - 2 K=1.0-99.0 ±2.0% or ±40 ms
whichever is greater
I 22t = K
Reset time, inverse characteristic, Reset Multiplier = 0.01-20.00 ±5.0% or ±40 ms
step 1 - 2 whichever is greater

I 22t = K
Minimum operate time for inverse (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
time characteristic, step 1 - 2 whichever is greater
Maximum trip delay at 0.5 x Iset to 2 (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
x Iset, step 1 - 2 whichever is greater

Independent time delay at 0.5 x Iset (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms

to 2 x Iset, step 1 - 2 whichever is greater

Independent time delay for Alarm at (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms

0.5 x Iset to 2 x Iset whichever is greater

9.17 Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection

VRPVOC GUID-613620B1-4092-4FB6-901D-6810CDD5C615 v4

9.17.1 Identification GUID-7835D582-3FF4-4587-81CE-3B40D543E287 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent VRPVOC I>/U< 51V
protection

9.17.2 Functionality GUID-935E1CE8-601F-40E2-8D22-2FF68420FADF v6

Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection (VRPVOC) function can be used as

generator backup protection against short-circuits.

The overcurrent protection feature has a settable current level that can be used
either with definite time or inverse time characteristic. Additionally, it can be
voltage controlled/restrained.

One undervoltage step with definite time characteristic is also available within the
function in order to provide functionality for overcurrent protection with
undervoltage seal-in.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 683

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

9.17.3 Function block GUID-6B4EB1A4-2226-4397-A6FD-14F9DD02B12E v4

VRPVOC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TROC
BLOCK TRUV
BLKOC START
BLKUV STOC
STUV

IEC12000184-1-en.vsd
IEC12000184 V1 EN-US

Figure 344: VRPVOC function block

9.17.4 Signals
PID-3858-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 388: VRPVOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function both stages
BLKOC BOOLEAN 0 Block of voltage restraint overcurrent stage (ANSI
51V)
BLKUV BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function

PID-3858-OUTPUTSIGNALS v8

Table 389: VRPVOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TROC BOOLEAN Trip signal from voltage restrained overcurrent
stage
TRUV BOOLEAN Trip signal from undervoltage function
START BOOLEAN General start signal
STOC BOOLEAN Start signal from voltage restrained overcurrent
stage
STUV BOOLEAN Start signal from undervoltage function

684 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

9.17.5 Settings
PID-3858-SETTINGS v7

Table 390: VRPVOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
StartCurr 2.0 - 5000.0 %IB 1.0 120.0 Start current level in % of IBase
Characterist ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Norm. inv. Time delay curve type for 51V Voltage
ANSI Very inv. restrained overcurrent
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
tDef_OC 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Definite time delay for Over Current
k 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier for Inverse Definite
Minimum Time curves
tMin 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for Inverse
Definite Minimum Time curve
Operation_UV Off - - Off Operation of under-voltage stage (ANSI
On 27) Off / On
StartVolt 2.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage for start of under-voltage stage
in % of UBase
tDef_UV 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Definite time time delay when used for
Under-Voltage
EnBlkLowV Off - - Off Enable internal low voltage level
On blocking for Under-Voltage
BlkLowVolt 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 3.0 Internal low voltage level for blocking of
UV in % of UBase

Table 391: VRPVOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
VDepMode Step - - Slope Voltage dependent mode OC (step,
Slope slope)
VDepFact 5.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 25.0 Start current level in % of pickup when
U< 25% of UBase
UHighLimit 30.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage high limit setting in % of UBase

Table 392: VRPVOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 685

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

9.17.6 Monitored data

PID-3858-MONITOREDDATA v6

Table 393: VRPVOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IMAX REAL - A Maximum phase current
magnitude
UUMIN REAL - kV Minimum ph-to-ph
voltage magnitude

9.17.7 Operation principle

9.17.7.1 Measured quantities GUID-0D511C03-3750-4F61-9555-69DAD96CDC21 v5

The voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC function is always

connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration
tool (ACT), but it will always measure the maximum of the three-phase currents
and the minimum of the three phase-to-phase voltages. If frequency tracking mode
for preprocessing blocks is used, then the function operates properly in wide
frequency range (e.g. 10-90 Hz).

9.17.7.2 Base quantities GUID-08944177-73CF-4FB4-818E-3B7AC4F625EE v4

GlobalBaseSel defines the particular Global Base Values Group where the base
quantities of the function are set. In that Global Base Values Group:

IBase shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary
amperes.

UBase shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in

primary kV.

9.17.7.3 Overcurrent protection GUID-7BB29872-EBC1-4628-AFB5-7A15E2EC41A8 v2

The overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current
quantity with the set start level. The overcurrent step starts if the magnitude of the
measured current quantity is higher than the set level.

Voltage restraint/control feature GUID-E7C59BAD-47A1-46C2-8929-7E589548045C v3

The overcurrent protection operation is made dependent of a measured voltage

quantity. This means that the start level of the overcurrent step is not constant but
decreases with the decrease in magnitude of the measured voltage quantity. This
feature affects the start current value of both definite time and inverse time IDMT
overcurrent protection; in particular the overcurrent with IDMT curve operates
faster during low voltage conditions. Two different types of dependencies are
available:

686 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

• Voltage restrained overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode = Slope);

the start level of the overcurrent stage changes according to the Figure 345.
The voltage restrained characteristic is defined by the two points:
(0.25*UBase ; VDepFact *StartCurr/100*IBase) and (UHighLimit/
100*UBase; StartCurr/100*IBase). In the first point the factor 0.25 that
multiply UBase cannot be changed.

Start level of the current

StartCurr

VDepFact * StartCurr

0,25 UHighLimit
UBase
IEC10000123-2-en.vsd
IEC10000123 V2 EN-US

Figure 345: Example for start level of the current variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation

• Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode = Step);

the start level of the overcurrent stage changes according to the Figure 346.

Start level of the current

StartCurr

VDepFact * StartCurr

UHighLimit UBase

IEC10000124-2-en.vsd
IEC10000124 V2 EN-US

Figure 346: Example for start level of the current variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 687

Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Current protection

9.17.7.4 Logic diagram GUID-0A1565A4-74E1-4171-968B-50529AABF192 v2

DEF time
selected
TROC
OR

MaxPhCurr
a STOC
a>b
b

StartCurr
X Inverse

Inverse
Voltage time
control or selected
restraint
feature

MinPh-PhVoltage

IEC10000214-1-en.vsd

IEC10000214 V1 EN-US

Figure 347: Simplified internal logic diagram for overcurrent function

DEF time
selected TRUV

MinPh-phVoltage a
b>a
b STUV
AND
StartVolt

Operation_UV=On

BLKUV

IEC10000213-1-en.vsd

IEC10000213 V1 EN-US

Figure 348: Simplified internal logic diagram for undervoltage function

9.17.7.5 Undervoltage protection GUID-96171DC7-9F8E-47B4-BE0D-E1B9EE214612 v5

The undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the lowest measured
phase-phase voltage quantity with the set start level. The undervoltage step starts if
the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is lower than the set level.

The start signal starts a definite time delay. If the value of the start signal is logical
TRUE for longer than the set time delay, the undervoltage step sets its trip signal to
logical TRUE.

688 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 9
Current protection

This undervoltage functionality together with additional ACT logic can be used to
provide functionality for overcurrent protection with undervoltage seal-in.

9.17.8 Technical data

GUID-7EA9731A-8D56-4689-9072-D72D9CDFD795 v8

Table 394: VRPVOC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Start overcurrent (2.0 - 5000.0)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, overcurrent > 95% -

Operate time, start overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start overcurrent at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start overcurrent at 0 to 10 x Min. = 5 ms -
Iset Max. = 20 ms

Reset time, start overcurrent at 10 x Iset to 0 Min. = 20 ms -

Max. = 35 ms
Independent time delay to operate at 0 to 2 x (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
Iset whichever is
greater
Inverse time characteristics, 13 curve types See tables 1130
see tables 1130 and 1131 and 1131
Minimum operate time for inverse time (0.00 - 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
characteristics whichever is
greater
High voltage limit, voltage dependent (30.0 - 100.0)% of UBase ±1.0% of Ur
operation
Start undervoltage (2.0 - 100.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Reset ratio, undervoltage < 105% -

Operate time start undervoltage at 2 x Uset to Min. = 15 ms -
0
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time start undervoltage at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Independent time delay to operate, (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
undervoltage at 2 x Uset to 0 whichever is
greater
Internal low voltage blocking (0.0 - 5.0)% of UBase ±0.25% of Ur

Overcurrent: -
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically
Undervoltage: -
Critical impulse time 10ms typically at 2 x Uset to 0
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 689

Technical manual
690
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

Section 10 Voltage protection

10.1 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV IP14544-1 v3

10.1.1 Identification
M16876-1 v7

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 27

3U<

V2 EN-US
SYMBOL-R-2U-GREATER-THAN

10.1.2 Functionality M13789-3 v12

Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions.
The two-step undervoltage protection function (UV2PTUV) can be used to open
circuit breakers to prepare for system restoration at power outages or as a long-time
delayed back-up to the primary protection.

UV2PTUV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.

It has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to the system service voltage.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 691

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

10.1.3 Function block M13794-3 v6

UV2PTUV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR1L1
BLKST1 TR1L2
BLKTR2 TR1L3
BLKST2 TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3

IEC06000276-2-en.vsd
IEC06000276 V2 EN-US

Figure 349: UV2PTUV function block

10.1.4 Signals
PID-3586-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 395: UV2PTUV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase voltages
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 1
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 2
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

PID-3586-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 396: UV2PTUV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TR1L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L1
TR1L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L2
TR1L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L3
TR2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
TR2L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L1
TR2L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L2
TR2L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L3
Table continues on next page

692 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

Name Type Description

START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step1
ST1L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L1
ST1L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L2
ST1L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L3
ST2 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step2
ST2L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L1
ST2L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L2
ST2L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L3

10.1.5 Settings
PID-3586-SETTINGS v7

Table 397: UV2PTUV Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationStep1 Off - - On Enable execution of step 1
On
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 1
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode1 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of
2 out of 3 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1
3 out of 3
U1< 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in
% of UBase, step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definitive time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
k1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
IntBlkSel1 Off - - Off Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 1
Block of trip
Block all
IntBlkStVal1 1 - 50 %UB 1 20 Voltage setting for internal blocking in %
of UBase, step 1
tBlkUV1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of internal (low level)
blocking for step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step
1
OperationStep2 Off - - On Enable execution of step 2
On
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 693

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 2
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode2 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of
2 out of 3 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2
3 out of 3
U2< 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in
% of UBase, step 2
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definitive time delay of step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 2
k2 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 2
IntBlkSel2 Off - - Off Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 2
Block of trip
Block all
IntBlkStVal2 1 - 50 %UB 1 20 Voltage setting for internal blocking in %
of UBase, step 2
tBlkUV2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of internal (low level)
blocking for step 2
HystAbs2 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step
2

Table 398: UV2PTUV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type
Frozen timer for step 1
Linearly decreased
tIReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 1
BCrv1 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 1
DCrv1 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for step 1
PCrv1 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CrvSat1 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. under voltage
IDMT curve, step 1
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type
Frozen timer for step 2
Linearly decreased
Table continues on next page

694 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tIReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2
ACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 2
BCrv2 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 2
CCrv2 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 2
DCrv2 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for step 2
PCrv2 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 2
CrvSat2 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. under voltage
IDMT curve, step 2

Table 399: UV2PTUV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ConnType PhN DFT - - PhN DFT Group selector for connection type
PhPh RMS
PhN RMS
PhPh DFT
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

10.1.6 Monitored data

PID-3586-MONITOREDDATA v6

Table 400: UV2PTUV Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L1
UL2 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L2
UL3 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L3

10.1.7 Operation principle M15326-3 v9

Two-step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV) is used to detect low power system

voltage. If one, two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value, a
corresponding START signal is generated. The parameters OpMode1 and
OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the START outputs: the measured
voltages 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3, or 3 out of 3 have to be lower than the corresponding
set point to issue the corresponding START signal.

UV2PTUV has two voltage-measuring steps with separate time delays. If the
voltage remains below the set value for the chosen time delay, the corresponding
trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to the disconnection of the
related high-voltage equipment, a voltage-controlled blocking of the function is

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 695

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

available: if the voltage is lower than the set blocking level, the function is blocked
and no START or TRIP signal is generated. The time delay characteristic is
individually chosen for each step and can be either definite time delay or inverse
time delay.

To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

10.1.7.1 Measurement principle M15326-6 v7

Depending on the value of the ConnType parameter, UV2PTUV can be set to

measure phase-to-earth fundamental value, phase-to-phase fundamental value,
phase-to-earth true RMS value or phase-to-phase true RMS value, and compares it
against the set values, U1< and U2<. The voltage-related settings are made in
percentage of the base voltage which is set in kV phase-to-phase voltage. This
means operation for phase-to-earth voltage under:

UBase(kV )
U (%) ·
3
EQUATION1429 V3 EN-US (Equation 185)

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage under:

U < (%) × UBase(kV)

EQUATION1990 V1 EN-US (Equation 186)

When the phase-to-earth voltage measurement is selected, the

function automatically introduces division of the base value by the
square root of three.

10.1.7.2 Time delay M15326-10 v11

The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse
time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay three different modes are available:
• inverse curve A
• inverse curve B
• customer programmable inverse curve

The type A curve is described as:

k
t=
æ Un < -U ö
ç ÷
è Un < ø
EQUATION1431 V2 EN-US (Equation 187)

696 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

where:
Un< Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage

The type B curve is described as:

k × 480
t= 2.0
+ 0.055
æ Un < - U ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è Un < ø
EQUATION1432 V2 EN-US (Equation 188)

The customer programmable curve can be created as:

é ù
ê ú
ê k×A ú
t=ê pú
+D
ê æ Un < - U ö ú
êçB × -C÷ ú
ëè Un < ø û
EQUATION1433 V2 EN-US (Equation 189)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be
infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter
CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un<
down to Un< · (1.0 – CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Un< · (1.0 – CrvSatn/
100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100
EQUATION1435 V1 EN-US (Equation 190)

The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The
details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse
characteristics".

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 697

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

Voltage

UL1
UL2
UL3

IDMT Voltage

Time

IEC12000186-1-en.vsd

IEC12000186 V1 EN-US

Figure 350: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration

Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least
the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite
time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the
inverse time mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured
voltage, ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user-
defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and
tIReset2 pickup for the inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset. After
leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not
sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. For the
undervoltage function the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the
voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to
reset the timer: the timer is reset instantaneously, the timer value is frozen during
the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See
figure 351 and figure 352.

698 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

tIReset1

Voltage
tIReset1
Measured
START Voltage
HystAbs1
TRIP

U1<

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Frozen Timer

Time
Linearly
Instantaneous
decreased IEC05000010-4-en.vsd

IEC05000010 V4 EN-US

Figure 351: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 699

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

tIReset1
Voltage
tIReset1
START
START
HystAbs1 Measured Voltage
TRIP

U1<

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Frozen Timer

Time
Instantaneous Linearly decreased
IEC05000011-en-3.vsd

IEC05000011 V3 EN-US

Figure 352: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types

Definite timer delay

When definite time delay is selected the function will operate as shown in figure
353. Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown
in figure 354 and figure 355 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s,
instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured.

700 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

ST1

U t1
a tReset1
TR1
t
a<b t
U1< R
b
AND

IEC09000785-3-en.vsd
IEC09000785 V3 EN-US

Figure 353: Logic diagram for step 1, DT operation

U1<

ST1

TR1

tReset1

t1

IEC10000039-3-en.vsd
IEC10000039 V3 EN-US

Figure 354: Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 reset

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 701

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

U1<

ST1

TR1

tReset1

t1

IEC10000040-3-en.vsd
IEC10000040 V3 EN-US

Figure 355: Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 operation

10.1.7.3 Blocking M15326-20 v8

It is possible to block Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV partially or

completely, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTR1: blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLKST1: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1
BLKTR2: blocks all trip outputs of step 2
BLKST2: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 2

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1, either the
trip output of step 1, or both the trip and the START outputs of step 1, are blocked.
The characteristic of the blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter. This internal
blocking can also be set to Off resulting in no voltage based blocking.
Corresponding settings and functionality are valid also for step 2.

In case of disconnection of the high voltage component the measured voltage will
get very low. The event will START both the under voltage function and the
blocking function, as seen in figure 356. The delay of the blocking function must
be set less than the time delay of under voltage function.

702 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

U Disconnection

Normal voltage

U1<

U2<

tBlkUV1 <
t1,t1Min
IntBlkStVal1
tBlkUV2 <
t2,t2Min
IntBlkStVal2

Time

Block step 1

Block step 2
en05000466.vsd

IEC05000466 V1 EN-US

Figure 356: Blocking function

10.1.7.4 Design M15326-35 v9

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-neutral

voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive fourier filters or true RMS
filters of input voltage signals are used. The voltages are individually compared to
the set value, and the lowest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic
integration. A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 and 3
out of 3 criteria to fulfill the START condition. The design of Two step
undervoltage protection UV2PTUV is schematically shown in Figure 357.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 703

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

UL1 Comparator ST1L1

UL1 < U1< Voltage Phase Phase 1
Selector
OpMode1 ST1L2
UL2 Comparator Phase 2
1 out of 3
UL2 < U1< 2 out of 3 ST1L3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 Start t1
UL3 Comparator t1Reset
UL3 < U1< IntBlkStVal1 &
OR ST1
Trip
Output
START Logic TR1L1

Step 1 TR1L2
Time integrator TRIP
MinVoltSelector tIReset1
ResetTypeCrv1 TR1L3

TR1
OR

Comparator ST2L1
UL1 < U2< Voltage Phase Phase 1
Selector
OpMode2 ST2L2
Comparator Phase 2
UL2 < U2< 1 out of 3
2 out of 3 Start t2 ST2L3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 t2Reset
Comparator IntBlkStVal2 &
UL3 < U2< Trip ST2
Output OR
Logic
START TR2L1

Step 2
TR2L2
Time integrator TRIP
MinVoltSelector tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2 TR2L3

TR2
OR
START
OR

TRIP
OR

IEC05000834-2-en.vsd
IEC05000834 V2 EN-US

Figure 357: Schematic design of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV

10.1.8 Technical data IP13001-1 v1

M13290-1 v15

Table 401: UV2PTUV technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, low and high step (1.0–100.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Internal blocking level, step 1 and step 2 (1–50)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Table continues on next page

704 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Inverse time characteristics for step 1 - See table 1139
and step 2, see table 1139
Definite time delay, step 1 at 1.2 x Uset to (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40ms
0 whichever is greater

Definite time delay, step 2 at 1.2 x Uset to (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40ms

0 whichever is greater

Minimum operate time, inverse (0.000–60.000) s ±0.5% or ±40ms

characteristics whichever is greater
Operate time, start at 2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start at 1.2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 5 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 35 ms
Critical impulse time 5 ms typically at 1.2 x Uset to 0 -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

10.2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV IP14545-1 v3

10.2.1 Identification
M17002-1 v8

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification device number
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 59

3U>

SYMBOL-C-2U-SMALLER-THAN V2 EN-US

10.2.2 Functionality OV2PTOV M13798-3 v15

Overvoltages may occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as
sudden power loss, tap changer regulating failures, and open line ends on long
lines.

Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV) function can be used to detect open
line ends, normally then combined with a directional reactive over-power function
to supervise the system voltage. When triggered, the function will cause an alarm,
switch in reactors, or switch out capacitor banks.

OV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each of them with inverse or definite time
delayed.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 705

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

OV2PTOV has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.

10.2.3 Function block M13803-3 v6

OV2PTOV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR1L1
BLKST1 TR1L2
BLKTR2 TR1L3
BLKST2 TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3

IEC06000277-2-en.vsd
IEC06000277 V2 EN-US

Figure 358: OV2PTOV function block

10.2.4 Signals
PID-3535-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 402: OV2PTOV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 1
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 2
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

PID-3535-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 403: OV2PTOV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TR1L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L1
TR1L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L2
TR1L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L3
TR2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
TR2L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L1
Table continues on next page

706 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

Name Type Description

TR2L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L2
TR2L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L3
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step1
ST1L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L1
ST1L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L2
ST1L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L3
ST2 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step2
ST2L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L1
ST2L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L2
ST2L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L3

10.2.5 Settings
PID-3535-SETTINGS v7

Table 404: OV2PTOV Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationStep1 Off - - On Enable execution of step 1
On
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 1
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode1 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of
2 out of 3 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1
3 out of 3
U1> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in
% of UBase, step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definitive time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
k1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step
1
OperationStep2 Off - - On Enable execution of step 2
On
Characterist2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 2
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 707

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OpMode2 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of
2 out of 3 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2
3 out of 3
U2> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in
% of UBase, step 2
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definitive time delay of step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 2
k2 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 2
HystAbs2 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step
2

Table 405: OV2PTOV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type
Frozen timer for step 1
Linearly decreased
tIReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 1
BCrv1 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 1
DCrv1 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for step 1
PCrv1 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CrvSat1 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 1
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type
Frozen timer for step 2
Linearly decreased
tIReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2
ACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 2
BCrv2 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 2
CCrv2 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 2
Table continues on next page

708 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

DCrv2 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for step 2
PCrv2 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 2
CrvSat2 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 2

Table 406: OV2PTOV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ConnType PhN DFT - - PhN DFT Group selector for connection type
PhPh DFT
PhN RMS
PhPh RMS
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

10.2.6 Monitored data

PID-3535-MONITOREDDATA v6

Table 407: OV2PTOV Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L1
UL2 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L2
UL3 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L3

10.2.7 Operation principle M15330-3 v11

Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV is used to detect high power system
voltage. OV2PTOV has two steps with separate time delays. If one-, two- or three-
phase voltages increase above the set value, a corresponding START signal is
issued. OV2PTOV can be set to START/TRIP, based on 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3
out of 3 of the measured voltages, being above the set point. If the voltage remains
above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the
corresponding trip signal is issued.

The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps, and can be
either definite time or inverse time delayed.

The voltage related settings are made in percent of the global set base voltage
UBase, which is set in kV, phase-to-phase.

OV2PTOV can be set to measure phase-to-earth fundamental value, phase-to-phase

fundamental value, phase-to-earth RMS value or phase-to-phase RMS value. The
choice of measuring is done by the parameter ConnType.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 709

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

The setting of the analog inputs are given as primary phase-to-earth or phase-to-
phase voltage. OV2PTOV will operate if the voltage gets higher than the set
percentage of the set base voltage UBase. This means operation for phase-to-earth
voltage over:

U > (%) × UBase( kV )

3
EQUATION1434 V1 EN-US (Equation 191)

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage over:

U > (%) × UBase(kV)

EQUATION1993 V1 EN-US (Equation 192)

When phase-to-earth voltage measurement is selected the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square
root of three.

10.2.7.1 Measurement principle M15330-6 v6

All the three voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set
values, U1> for Step 1 and U2> for Step 2. The parameters OpMode1 and
OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the START outputs. Either 1 out of
3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be higher than the
corresponding set point to issue the corresponding START signal.

To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis is included.

10.2.7.2 Time delay M15330-10 v11

The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse
time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:
• inverse curve A
• inverse curve B
• inverse curve C
• customer programmable inverse curve

The type A curve is described as:

k
t=
æ U - Un > ö
ç ÷
è Un > ø
IECEQUATION2422 V1 EN-US (Equation 193)

710 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

where:
Un> Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage

The type B curve is described as:

k  480
t 2.0
 0.035
 U  Un  
 32   0.5 
 Un  

IECEQUATION2423 V2 EN-US (Equation 194)

The type C curve is described as:

k × 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
æ U - Un > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è U n > ø
IECEQUATION2425 V1 EN-US (Equation 195)

The customer programmable curve is defined by the below equation, where A, B,

C, D, k and p are settings:

k×A
t= p
+D
æ U -Un > ö
çB× -C÷
è Un > ø
EQUATION1439 V2 EN-US (Equation 196)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be
infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore, a tuning parameter
CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un> up
to Un> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Un> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100).
If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100
EQUATION1435 V1 EN-US (Equation 197)

The highest phase (or phase-to-phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time
delay integration, see figure 359. The details of the different inverse time
characteristics are shown in section "Inverse characteristics".

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 711

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

Voltage
IDMT Voltage

UL1
UL2
UL3

Time

IEC05000016-2-en.vsd

IEC05000016 V2 EN-US

Figure 359: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration

Operation of the trip signal requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at
least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for
definite time mode (DT) and by selected voltage level dependent time curves for
the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the START condition, with respect to the
measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a
user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and
tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding START output is reset, after that
the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the
hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient
for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. The hysteresis value for
each step is settable HystAbsn (where n means either 1 or 2 respectively) to allow a
high and accurate reset of the function. For OV2PTOV the IDMT reset time is
constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off
period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer: either the timer is reset
instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer
value is linearly decreased during the reset time.

712 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

tIReset1

tIReset1
Voltage
START
TRIP

U1>

HystAbs1 Measured
Voltage

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Linearly decreased
Frozen Timer
t

Instantaneous Time
IEC09000055-2-en.vsd
IEC09000055 V2 EN-US

Figure 360: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 713

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

tIReset1
Voltage tIReset1
START TRIP
START HystAbs1

U1>

Measured
Voltage

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Frozen Timer

Time
Linearly
Instantaneous decreased IEC05000020-3-en.vsd

IEC05000020 V3 EN-US

Figure 361: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types

Definite time delay

When definite time delay is selected, the function will operate as shown in figure
362. Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown
in figure 363 and figure 364 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s
(where n means either 1 or 2 respectively), instantaneous reset of the definite time
delayed stage is ensured.

714 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

ST1

U tReset1 t1
a
a>b t t
TR1
U1>
b AND
OFF ON
Delay Delay

IEC10000100-2-en.vsd
IEC10000100 V2 EN-US

Figure 362: Logic diagram for step 1, definite time delay, DT operation

U1>

START

TRIP

tReset1

t1

IEC10000037-2-en.vsd
IEC10000037 V2 EN-US

Figure 363: Example for step 1, Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 715

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

U1>

START

TRIP

tReset1

t1

IEC10000038-2-en.vsd
IEC10000038 V2 EN-US

Figure 364: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 operation

10.2.7.3 Blocking M15330-20 v8

It is possible to block Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV partially or

completely, by binary input signals where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTR1: blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLKST1: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1
BLKTR2: blocks all trip outputs of step 2
BLKST2: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 2

10.2.7.4 Design M15330-34 v8

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-earth

voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive Fourier filters or true RMS
filters of input voltage signals are used. The phase voltages are individually
compared to the set value, and the highest voltage is used for the inverse time
characteristic integration. A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out
of 3 or 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the START condition. The design of Two step
overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV) is schematically described in figure 365.

716 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

UL1 Comparator ST1L1

UL1 > U1> Phase 1
Voltage Phase
Selector ST1L2
UL2 Comparator OpMode1 Phase 2
UL2 > U1> 1 out of 3
Start ST1L3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 t1
UL3 Comparator t1Reset
UL3 > U1> & ST1
OR
Trip
START Output TR1L1
Logic

Time integrator Step 1 TR1L2

TRIP
MaxVoltSelect tIreset1
ResetTypeCrv1 TR1L3

OR TR1

Comparator ST2L1
UL1 > U2> Phase 1
Voltage Phase
Selector ST2L2
Comparator OpMode2 Phase 2
UL2 > U2> 1 out of 3
Start ST2L3
2 out of 3
Phase 3 t2
3 out of 3
Comparator t2Reset
UL3 > U2> & ST2
OR
Trip
START Output TR2L1
Logic

Time integrator Step 2 TR2L2

MaxVoltSelect tIreset2 TRIP
ResetTypeCrv2 TR2L3

TR2
OR

START
OR

TRIP
OR

IEC05000013-2-en.vsd

IEC05000013-WMF V2 EN-US

Figure 365: Schematic design of Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV

10.2.8 Technical data IP13013-1 v1

M13304-1 v14

Table 408: OV2PTOV technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, step 1 and 2 (1.0-200.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Inverse time characteristics for steps 1 - See table 1138

and 2, see table 1138
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 717

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Definite time delay, low step (step 1) at 0 (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
to 1.2 x Uset whichever is greater

Definite time delay, high step (step 2) at 0 (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms

to 1.2 x Uset whichever is greater

Minimum operate time, Inverse (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms

characteristics whichever is greater
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start at 2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 20 ms -
Max. = 35 ms
Reset time, start at 1.2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 5 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

10.3 Two step residual overvoltage protection

ROV2PTOV IP14546-1 v4

10.3.1 Identification
SEMOD54295-2 v6

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Two step residual overvoltage ROV2PTOV 59N
protection
2(U0>)

IEC15000108 V1 EN-US

10.3.2 Functionality M13808-3 v11

Residual voltages may occur in the power system during earth faults.

Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV) function calculates the

residual voltage from the three-phase voltage input transformers or measures it
from a single voltage input transformer fed from an open delta or neutral point
voltage transformer.

ROV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.

A reset delay ensures operation for intermittent earth faults.

718 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

10.3.3 Function block M13812-3 v6

ROV2PTOV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR2
BLKST1 START
BLKTR2 ST1
BLKST2 ST2

IEC06000278-2-en.vsd
IEC06000278 V2 EN-US

Figure 366: ROV2PTOV function block

10.3.4 Signals
PID-3531-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 409: ROV2PTOV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase voltages
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 1
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 2
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

PID-3531-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 410: ROV2PTOV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TR2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step1
ST2 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step2

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 719

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

10.3.5 Settings
PID-3531-SETTINGS v5

Table 411: ROV2PTOV Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationStep1 Off - - On Enable execution of step 1
On
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 1
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
U1> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 30.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT),
step 1 in % of UBase
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definitive time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
k1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step
1
OperationStep2 Off - - On Enable execution of step 2
On
Characterist2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 2
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
U2> 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 45.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT),
step 2 in % of UBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definitive time delay of step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 2
k2 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 2
HystAbs2 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step
2

Table 412: ROV2PTOV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type
Frozen timer for step 1
Linearly decreased
tIReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1
Table continues on next page

720 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 1
BCrv1 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 1
DCrv1 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for step 1
PCrv1 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CrvSat1 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 1
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in DT reset (s), step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type
Frozen timer for step 2
Linearly decreased
tIReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2
ACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 2
BCrv2 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 2
CCrv2 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 2
DCrv2 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for step 2
PCrv2 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 2
CrvSat2 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 2

Table 413: ROV2PTOV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

10.3.6 Monitored data

PID-3531-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 414: ROV2PTOV Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
ULevel REAL - kV Magnitude of measured
voltage

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 721

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

10.3.7 Operation principle M15331-3 v8

Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV is used to detect a high

residual voltage. The residual voltage can be measured directly from a voltage
transformer in the neutral of a power transformer or from a three-phase voltage
transformer, where the secondary windings are connected in an open delta. Another
possibility is to measure the three phase-to-earth voltages, and calculate the
corresponding residual voltage internally in the IED. ROV2PTOV has two steps
with separate time delays. If the residual voltage remains above the set value for a
time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding TRIP signal
is issued.

The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be
either definite time delay or inverse time delay.

The voltage-related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in
kV, phase-phase. The set UBase value is divided by sqrt(3) before the set value is
calculated.

10.3.7.1 Measurement principle M15331-6 v6

The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values,
U1> and U2>.

To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a settable hysteresis has been
included.

10.3.7.2 Time delay M15331-10 v11

The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse
time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:
• inverse curve A
• inverse curve B
• inverse curve C
• customer programmable inverse curve

The type A curve is described as:

k
t=
æ U - Un > ö
ç ÷
è Un > ø
IECEQUATION2422 V1 EN-US (Equation 198)

where:
Un> Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage

722 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

The type B curve is described as:

k  480
t 2.0
 0.035
 U  Un  
 32   0.5 
 U n  

IECEQUATION2423 V2 EN-US (Equation 199)

The type C curve is described as:

k × 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
æ U - Un > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è U> ø
IECEQUATION2421 V1 EN-US (Equation 200)

The customer programmable curve can be created as:

k×A
t= p
+D
æ U -Un > ö
çB× -C÷
è Un > ø
EQUATION1439 V2 EN-US (Equation 201)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero, the time delay will be
infinite. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter
CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un> up
to Un> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Un> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100).
If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100
EQUATION1440 V1 EN-US (Equation 202)

The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section
"Inverse characteristics".

TRIP signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at
least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for
definite time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves
for the inverse time mode (IDMT).

If the START condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the
delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and
tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the
corresponding START output is reset, after the defined reset time has elapsed.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 723

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the START condition
must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to
the hysteresis area. Also, notice that for the overvoltage function, IDMT reset time
is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off
period.

There are three ways to reset the timer: the timer is reset instantaneously, the timer
value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during
the reset time. See figure 367 and figure 368.

tIReset1

tIReset1
Voltage
START
TRIP

U1>

HystAbs1 Measured
Voltage

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Linearly decreased
Frozen Timer
t

Instantaneous Time
IEC09000055-2-en.vsd

IEC09000055 V2 EN-US

Figure 367: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay

724 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

tIReset1
Voltage tIReset1
START TRIP
START HystAbs1

U1>

Measured
Voltage

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Frozen Timer

Time
Linearly
Instantaneous decreased IEC05000020-3-en.vsd

IEC05000020 V3 EN-US

Figure 368: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay

Definite time delay

When definite time delay is selected, the function will operate as shown in figure
369. Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown
in figure 370 and figure 371 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s,
instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 725

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

ST1

U tReset1 t1
a
a>b t t
TR1
U1>
b AND
OFF ON
Delay Delay

IEC10000100-2-en.vsd
IEC10000100 V2 EN-US

Figure 369: Logic diagram for step 1, Definite time delay, DT operation

U1<

ST1

TR1

tReset1

t1

IEC10000039-3-en.vsd
IEC10000039 V3 EN-US

Figure 370: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset

726 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

U1<

ST1

TR1

tReset1

t1

IEC10000040-3-en.vsd
IEC10000040 V3 EN-US

Figure 371: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 operation

10.3.7.3 Blocking M15331-18 v7

It is possible to block two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV

partially or completely by binary input signals where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTR1: blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLKST1: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1
BLKTR2: blocks all trip outputs of step 2
BLKST2: blocks all start and trip inputs related to step 2

10.3.7.4 Design M15331-32 v7

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage.

Recursive Fourier filters filter the input voltage signal for the rated frequency. The
residual voltage is compared to the set value, and is also used for the inverse time
characteristic integration. The design of the function is schematically described in
figure 372.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 727

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

UN Comparator Phase 1 ST1

UN > U1>
Start TR1
START t1
tReset1
&
Trip
Time integrator Output
tIReset1 TRIP
Logic
ResetTypeCrv1
Step 1

ST2
Comparator Phase 1
UN > U2> TR2
Start
t2
START tReset2
& START
Trip OR
Time integrator Output
TRIP Logic
tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2 TRIP
Step 2 OR

IEC05000748_2_en.vsd
IEC05000748 V2 EN-US

Figure 372: Schematic design of Two step residual overvoltage protection

ROV2PTOV

10.3.8 Technical data

M13317-2 v14

Table 415: ROV2PTOV technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, step 1 - step 2 (1.0-200.0)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U ≤
Ur
± 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U ≤

Ur
± 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Inverse time characteristics for low and - See table 1140

high step, see table 1140
Definite time delay low step (step 1) at 0 (0.00–6000.00) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms
to 1.2 x Uset whichever is greater

Definite time delay high step (step 2) at 0 (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms

to 1.2 x Uset whichever is greater

Table continues on next page

728 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Minimum operate time (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms
whichever is greater
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start at 2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 20 ms -
Max. = 35 ms
Reset time, start at 1.2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 5 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

10.4 Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH IP14547-1 v3

10.4.1 Identification
M14867-1 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH 24

U/f >

SYMBOL-Q V1 EN-US

10.4.2 Functionality M13319-3 v9

When the laminated core of a power transformer or generator is subjected to a

magnetic flux density beyond its design limits, stray flux will flow into non-
laminated components that are not designed to carry flux. This will cause eddy
currents to flow. These eddy currents can cause excessive heating and severe
damage to insulation and adjacent parts in a relatively short time. The function has
settable inverse operating curves and independent alarm stages.

10.4.3 Function block M13326-3 v5

OEXPVPH
I3P* TRIP
U3P* START
BLOCK ALARM
RESET

IEC05000329-2-en.vsd
IEC05000329 V3 EN-US

Figure 373: OEXPVPH function block

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 729

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

10.4.4 Signals
PID-3514-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 416: OEXPVPH Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset operation

PID-3514-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 417: OEXPVPH Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip from overexcitation function
START BOOLEAN Overexcitation above set operate level
(instantaneous)
ALARM BOOLEAN Overexcitation above set alarm level (delayed)

10.4.5 Settings
PID-3514-SETTINGS v6

Table 418: OEXPVPH Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
V/Hz> 100.0 - 180.0 %UB/f 0.1 110.0 Operate level of V/Hz at no load and
rated freq in % of (UBase/frated)
V/Hz>> 100.0 - 200.0 %UB/f 0.1 140.0 High level of V/Hz above which tMin is
used, in % of (UBase/frated)
XLeak 0.000 - 200.000 Ohm 0.001 0.000 Winding leakage reactance in primary
ohms
TrPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Length of the pulse for trip signal (in sec)
tMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 7.000 Minimum trip delay for V/Hz inverse
curve, in sec
tMax 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 1800.00 Maximum trip delay for V/Hz inverse
curve, in sec
tCooling 0.10 - 9000.00 s 0.01 1200.00 Transformer magnetic core cooling time
constant, in sec
CurveType IEEE - - IEEE Inverse time curve selection, IEEE/Tailor
Tailor made made
kForIEEE 1 - 60 - 1 1 Time multiplier for IEEE inverse type
curve
AlarmLevel 50.0 - 120.0 % 0.1 100.0 Alarm operate level as % of operate
level
tAlarm 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Alarm time delay, in sec

730 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

Table 419: OEXPVPH Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t1Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 7200.00 Time delay t1 (longest) for tailor made
curve, in sec
t2Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 3600.00 Time delay t2 for tailor made curve, in
sec
t3Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 1800.00 Time delay t3 for tailor made curve, in
sec
t4Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 900.00 Time delay t4 for tailor made curve, in
sec
t5Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 450.00 Time delay t5 for tailor made curve, in
sec
t6Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 225.00 Time delay t6 (shortest) for tailor made
curve, in sec

Table 420: OEXPVPH Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MeasuredU PosSeq - - L1L2 Selection of measured voltage
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
MeasuredI L1L2 - - L1L2 Selection of measured current
L2L3
L3L1
PosSeq
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

10.4.6 Monitored data

PID-3514-MONITOREDDATA v5

Table 421: OEXPVPH Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TMTOTRIP REAL - s Calculated time to trip for
overexcitation, in sec
VPERHZ REAL - V/Hz Voltage to frequency
ratio in per-unit
THERMSTA REAL - % Overexcitation thermal
status in % of trip level

10.4.7 Operation principle

M5854-3 v8

The importance of Overexcitation protection (OEXPVPH) function is growing as

the power transformers as well as other power system elements today operate near
their designated limits most of the time.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 731

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

Modern design transformers are more sensitive to overexcitation than earlier types.
This is a result of the more efficient designs and designs which rely on the
improvement in the uniformity of the excitation level of modern systems. If an
emergency that causes overexcitation does occur, transformers may be damaged
unless corrective action is taken. Transformer manufacturers recommend an
overexcitation protection as a part of the transformer protection system.

Overexcitation results from excessive applied voltage, possibly in combination

with below-normal frequency. Such conditions may occur when a transformer unit
is loaded, but are more likely to arise when the transformer is unloaded, or when
loss of load occurs. Transformers directly connected to generators are in particular
danger to experience overexcitation conditions. It follows from the fundamental
transformer equation, see equation 203, that the peak flux density Bmax is directly
proportional to induced voltage E, and inversely proportional to frequency f and
turns n.

E = 4.44 × f × n × Bmax× A
EQUATION898 V2 EN-US (Equation 203)

The relative excitation M is therefore according to equation 204.

E f
M ( p.u.) =
( Ur ) ( fr )
IECEQUATION2296 V1 EN-US (Equation 204)

Disproportional variations in quantities E and f may give rise to core overfluxing.

If the core flux density Bmax increases to a point above saturation level (typically
1.9 Tesla), the flux will no longer be contained within the core, but will extend into
other (non-laminated) parts of the power transformer and give rise to eddy current
circulations.

Overexcitation will result in:

• overheating of the non-laminated metal parts

• a large increase in magnetizing currents
• an increase in core and winding temperature
• an increase in transformer vibration and noise

Protection against overexcitation is based on calculation of the relative volt per

hertz (V/Hz) ratio. Protection initiates a reduction of excitation, and if this fails, or
if this is not possible, the TRIP signal will disconnect the transformer from the
source after a delay ranging from seconds to minutes, typically 5-10 seconds.

Overexcitation protection may be of particular concern on directly connected

generator unit transformers. Directly connected generator-transformers are
subjected to a wide range of frequencies during the acceleration and deceleration of
the turbine. In such cases, OEXPVPH (24) may trip the field breaker during a start-
up of a machine, by means of the overexcitation ALARM signal. If this is not

732 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

possible, the power transformer can be disconnected from the source, after a delay,
by the TRIP signal.

The IEC 60076 - 1 standard requires that transformers operate continuously at not
more than 10% above rated voltage at no load, and rated frequency. At no load, the
ratio of the actual generator terminal voltage to the actual frequency should not
exceed 1.1 times the ratio of transformer rated voltage to the rated frequency on a
sustained basis, see equation 205.

E
---- £ 1.1 × Ur
------
f fr
EQUATION900 V1 EN-US (Equation 205)

or equivalently, with 1.1 · Ur = V/Hz> according to equation 206.

E V Hz >
£
f fr
IECEQUATION2297 V2 EN-US (Equation 206)

where:
V/Hz> is the maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency.

V/Hz> is a setting parameter. The setting range is 100% to 180%. If the user does
not know exactly what to set, then the default value for V/Hz> = 110 % given by
the IEC 60076-1 standard shall be used.

In OEXPVPH, the relative excitation M is expressed according to equation 207.

E f
M ( p.u.) =
Ur fr
IECEQUATION2299 V1 EN-US (Equation 207)

It is clear from the above formula that, for an unloaded power transformer, M = 1
for any E and f, where the ratio E/f is equal to Ur/fr. A power transformer is not
overexcited as long as the relative excitation is M ≤ V/Hz>, V/Hz> expressed in %
of Ur/fr.

The overexcitation protection algorithm is fed with an input voltage U which is in

general not the induced voltage E from the fundamental transformer equation. For
no load condition, these two voltages are the same, but for a loaded power
transformer the internally induced voltage E may be lower or higher than the
voltage U which is measured and fed to OEXPVPH , depending on the direction of
the power flow through the power transformer, the power transformer side where
OEXPVPH is applied, and the power transformer leakage reactance of the winding.
It is important to specify in the application configuration on which side of the
power transformer OEXPVPH is placed.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 733

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

As an example, at a transformer with a 15% short circuit impedance Xsc, the full
load, 0.8 power factor, 105% voltage on the load side, the actual flux level in the
transformer core, will not be significantly different from that at the 110% voltage,
no load, rated frequency, provided that the short circuit impedance X can be
equally divided between the primary and the secondary winding: Xleak = Xleak1 =
Xleak2 = Xsc / 2 = 0.075 pu.

OEXPVPH calculates the internal induced voltage E if Xleak (meaning the leakage
reactance of the winding where OEXPVPH is connected) is known to the user. The
assumption taken for two-winding power transformers that Xleak = Xsc / 2 is
unfortunately most often not true. For a two-winding power transformer the
leakage reactances of the two windings depend on how the windings are located on
the core with respect to each other. In the case of three-winding power transformers
the situation is still more complex. If a user has the knowledge on the leakage
reactance, then it should applied. If a user has no idea about it, Xleak can be set to
Xc/2. OEXPVPH protection will then take the given measured voltage U, as the
induced voltage E.

It is assumed that overexcitation is a symmetrical phenomenon, caused by events

such as loss-of-load, etc. A high phase-to-earth voltage does not mean
overexcitation. For example, in an unearthed power system, a single phase-to-earth
fault means high voltages of the “healthy” two phases-to-earth, but no
overexcitation on any winding. The phase-to-phase voltages will remain essentially
unchanged. The important voltage is the voltage between the two ends of each
winding.

10.4.7.1 Measured voltage M5854-39 v8

If one phase-to-phase voltage is available from the side where overexcitation

protection is applied, then Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH shall be set to
measure this voltage, MeasuredU. The particular voltage which is used determines
the two currents that must be used. This must be chosen with the setting
MeasuredI.

It is extremely important that MeasuredU and MeasuredI are set to

same value.

If, for example, voltage UL1L2 is fed to OEXPVPH, then currents IL1, and IL2
must be applied. From these two input currents, current IL1L2 = IL1 - IL2 is
calculated internally by the OEXPVPH algorithm. The phase-to-phase voltage
must be higher than 70% of the rated value, otherwise the protection algorithm
exits without calculating the excitation. ERROR output is set to 1, and the
displayed value of relative excitation V/Hz shows 0.000.

If three phase-to-earth voltages are available from the side where overexcitation is
connected, then OEXPVPH shall be set to measure positive sequence voltage and
current. In this case the positive sequence voltage and the positive sequence current
are used by OEXPVPH. A check is made if the positive sequence voltage is higher

734 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

than 70% of rated phase-to-earth voltage, when below this value, OEXPVPH exits
immediately, and no excitation is calculated. ERROR output is set to 1, and the
displayed value of relative excitation V/Hz shows 0.000.

• OEXPVPH can be connected to any power transformer side, independent from

the power flow.
• The side with a possible load tap changer must not be used.

10.4.7.2 Operate time of the overexcitation protection M5854-52 v7

The operate time of OEXPVPH is a function of the relative overexcitation.

Basically there are two different delay laws available to choose between:

• the so called IEEE law, and

• a tailor-made law.

The so called IEEE law approximates a square law and has been chosen based on
analysis of the various transformers’ overexcitation capability characteristics. They
can match the transformer core capability well.

The square law is according to equation 208.

0.18 × k 0.18 × k
top = 2
= 2
æ M ö overexcitation
ç V Hz> - 1 ÷
è ø
IECEQUATION2298 V2 EN-US (Equation 208)

where:
M the relative excitation
V/Hz> is maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency, in pu and
k is time multiplier for inverse time functions, see figure 375.
Parameter k (“time multiplier setting”) selects one delay curve from the family of curves.

The relative excitation M is calculated using equation209

æ Umeasured ö
ç ÷ Umeasured frated
=è
fmeasured ø
M = ×
æ UBase ö UBase fmeasured
ç ÷
è frated ø
IECEQUATION2404 V1 EN-US (Equation 209)

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 735

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

An analog overexcitation relay would have to evaluate the following integral

expression, which means to look for the instant of time t = top according to
equation 210.

top

ò (M (t) - V Hz > ) dt ³ 0.18 × k

2

IECEQUATION2300 V1 EN-US (Equation 210)

A digital, numerical relay will instead look for the lowest j (that is, j = n) where it
becomes true that:

n
2
Dt × å ( M(j) – V/Hz> ) ³ 0.18 × k
j=k
EQUATION906 V1 EN-US (Equation 211)

where:
Dt is the time interval between two successive executions of OEXPVPH and
M(j) - V/Hz> is the relative excitation at (time j) in excess of the normal (rated) excitation which is
given as Ur/fr.

As long as M > V/Hz> (that is, overexcitation condition), the above sum can only
be larger with time, and if the overexcitation persists, the protected transformer will
be tripped at j = n.

Inverse delays as per figure 375, can be modified (limited) by two special definite
delay settings, namely tMax and tMin, see figure 374.

delay in s

tMax

under - inverse delay law

excitation

overexcitation
tMin
0 Mmax - V/Hz> Overexcitation M-V/Hz>

M=V/Hz> Mmax Excitation M

V/Hz> Emax E (only if f = fr = const)

99001067.vsd
IEC99001067 V1 EN-US

Figure 374: Restrictions imposed on inverse delays by tMax and tMin

736 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

A definite maximum time, tMax, can be used to limit the operate time at low
degrees of overexcitation. Inverse delays longer than tMax will not be allowed. In
case the inverse delay is longer than tMax, OEXPVPH trips after tMax seconds.

A definite minimum time, tMin, can be used to limit the operate time at high
degrees of overexcitation. In case the inverse delay is shorter than tMin,
OEXPVPH function trips after tMin seconds. The inverse delay law is not valid for
values exceeding Mmax. The delay will be tMin, irrespective of the overexcitation
level, when values exceed Mmax (that is, M>V/Hz>).

Time (s) IEEE OVEREXCITATION CURVES

1000

100

k = 60

k = 20

k = 10
10 k=9
k=8
k=7
k=6
k=5
k=4
k=3

k=2

k=1
1
1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40

OVEREXCITATION IN % (M-Emaxcont)*100)

en01000373.vsd
IEC01000373 V1 EN-US

Figure 375: Delays inversely proportional to the square of the overexcitation

The critical value of excitation M is determined indirectly via OEXPVPH setting

V/Hz>>. V/Hz>> can be thought of as a no-load voltage at rated frequency, where
the inverse law should be replaced by a short definite delay, tMin. If, for example,
V/Hz>> = 140 %, then M is according to equation 212.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 737

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

(V Hz>> ) / f
M= = 1.40
Ur/fr
IECEQUATION2286 V1 EN-US (Equation 212)

The Tailor-Made law allows a user to design an arbitrary delay characteristic. In

this case the interval between M = V/Hz>, and M = Mmax is automatically divided
into five equal subintervals, with six delays. (settings t1, t2, t3, t4, t5 and t6) as
shown in figure 376. These times should be set so that t1 => t2 => t3 => t4 => t5
=> t6.

delay in s

tMax

under- tMin
excitation Overexcitation M-Emaxcont
0 Mmax - Emaxcont Excitation M

Emaxcont Mmax
99001068.vsd
IEC99001068 V1 EN-US

Figure 376: An example of a Tailor-Made delay characteristic

Delays between two consecutive points, for example t3 and t4, are obtained by
linear interpolation.

Should it happen that tMax be lower than, for example, delays t1, and t2, the actual
delay would be tMax. Above Mmax, the delay can only be tMin.

10.4.7.3 Cooling M5854-92 v6

Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH is basically a thermal protection; therefore a

cooling process has been introduced. Exponential cooling process is applied.
Parameter Setting tool is an OEXPVPH setting, with a default time constant
tCooling of 20 minutes. This means that if the voltage and frequency return to their
previous normal values (no more overexcitation), the normal temperature is
assumed to be reached not before approximately 5 times tCooling minutes. If an
overexcitation condition would return before that, the time to trip will be shorter
than it would be otherwise.

10.4.7.4 Overexcitation protection function measurands M5854-95 v8

A monitored data value, TMTOTRIP, is available on the local HMI and in

PCM600. This value is an estimation of the remaining time to trip (in seconds), if
the overexcitation remained on the level it had when the estimation was done. This
information can be useful during small or moderate overexcitation situations.

738 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

If the overexcitation is so low that the valid delay is tMax, then the estimation of
the remaining time to trip is done against tMax.

The relative excitation M, shown on the local HMI and in PCM600 has a
monitored data value VPERHZ and is calculated from the expression:

E f
M ( p.u.) =
Ur fr
IECEQUATION2299 V1 EN-US (Equation 213)

If VPERHZ value is less than setting V/Hz> (in %), the power transformer is
underexcited. If VPERHZ is equal to V/Hz> (in %), the excitation is exactly equal
to the power transformer continuous capability. If VPERHZ is higher than V/Hz>,
the protected power transformer is overexcited. For example, if VPERHZ = 1.100,
while V/Hz> = 110 %, then the power transformer is exactly on its maximum
continuous excitation limit.

The monitored data value THERMSTA shows the thermal status of the protected
power transformer iron core. THERMSTA gives the thermal status in % of the trip
value which corresponds to 100%. THERMSTA should reach 100% at the same
time, as TMTOTRIP reaches 0 seconds. If the protected power transformer is then
for some reason not switched off, THERMSTA shall go over 100%.

If the delay as per IEEE law, or Tailor-made Law, is limited by tMax, and/or tMin,
then the Thermal status will generally not reach 100% at the same time, when
tTRIP reaches 0 seconds. For example, if, at low degrees of overexcitation, the
very long delay is limited by tMax, then the OEXPVPH TRIP output signal will be
set to 1 before the Thermal status reaches 100%.

10.4.7.5 Overexcitation alarm M5854-123 v6

A separate step, AlarmLevel, is provided for alarming purpose. It is normally set

2% lower than (V/Hz>) and has a definite time delay, tAlarm. This will give the
operator an early warning.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 739

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

10.4.7.6 Logic diagram M13333-9 v4

BLOCK
AlarmLevel
tAlarm ALARM
&
t

M>V/Hz>
TRIP
&
V/Hz>
U3P Calculation
Ei k
M
of internal M=
I3P induced (Ei / f) IEEE law &
voltage Ei (Ur / fr) tMax ³1
M t
Tailor-made law
M>V/Hz>>
tMin
Xleak
t
V/Hz>>

M = relative V/Hz as service value

IEC05000162-3-en.vsd
IEC05000162 V3 EN-US

Figure 377: A simplified logic diagram of the Overexcitation protection

OEXPVPH

Simplification of the diagram is in the way the IEEE and Tailor-made delays are
calculated. The cooling process is not shown. It is not shown that voltage and
frequency are separately checked against their respective limit values.

10.4.8 Technical data

M13338-2 v11

Table 422: OEXPVPH technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, start (100–180)% of (UBase/frated) ±0.5% of U

Operate value, alarm (50–120)% of start level ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Operate value, high level (100–200)% of (UBase/frated) ±0.5% of U

Curve type IEEE or customer defined ±5.0 % or ±45 ms,

whichever is greater
(0.18 × k )
IEEE : t =
( M - 1) 2

EQUATION1319 V1 EN-US (Equation 214)

where M = (E/f)/(Ur/fr)
Minimum time delay for inverse (0.000–60.000) s ±1.0% or ±45 ms,
function whichever is greater
Maximum time delay for inverse (0.00–9000.00) s ±1.0% or ±45 ms,
function whichever is greater
Alarm time delay (0.00–9000.00) ±1.0% or ±45 ms,
whichever is greater

740 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

10.5 Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV SEMOD153860-1 v2

10.5.1 Identification
SEMOD167723-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV - 60

10.5.2 Functionality SEMOD153862-5 v7

A voltage differential monitoring function is available. It compares the voltages

from two three phase sets of voltage transformers and has one sensitive alarm step
and one trip step.

10.5.3 Function block SEMOD159374-4 v2

VDCPTOV
U3P1* TRIP
U3P2* START
BLOCK ALARM
U1LOW
U2LOW
UL1DIFF
UL2DIFF
UL3DIFF

IEC06000528-2-en.vsd
IEC06000528 V2 EN-US

Figure 378: VDCPTOV function block

10.5.4 Signals
PID-3591-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 423: VDCPTOV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P1 GROUP - Bus voltage
SIGNAL
U3P2 GROUP - Capacitor voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 741

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

PID-3591-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 424: VDCPTOV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Voltage differential protection operated
START BOOLEAN Start of voltage differential protection
ALARM BOOLEAN Voltage differential protection alarm
U1LOW BOOLEAN Loss of U1 voltage
U2LOW BOOLEAN Loss of U2 voltage
UL1DIFF REAL Differential Voltage phase L1
UL2DIFF REAL Differential Voltage phase L2
UL3DIFF REAL Differential Voltage phase L3

10.5.5 Settings
PID-3591-SETTINGS v6

Table 425: VDCPTOV Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
BlkDiffAtULow No - - Yes Block operation at low voltage
Yes
UDTrip 2.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 5.0 Operate level, in % of UBase
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time delay for voltage differential
operate, in seconds
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for voltage differential reset,
in seconds
UDAlarm 2.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 2.0 Alarm level, in % of UBase
tAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Time delay for voltage differential alarm,
in seconds
U1Low 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Input 1 undervoltage level, in % of
UBase
U2Low 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Input 2 undervoltage level, in % of
UBase
tBlock 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time for undervoltage block

Table 426: VDCPTOV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
RFL1 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Ratio compensation factor phase L1
U2L1*RFL1=U1L1
RFL2 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Ratio compensation factor phase L2
U2L2*RFL2=U1L2
RFL3 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Ratio compensation factor phase L3
U2L3*RFL3=U1L3

742 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

Table 427: VDCPTOV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

10.5.6 Monitored data

PID-3591-MONITOREDDATA v6

Table 428: VDCPTOV Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1DIFF REAL - kV Differential Voltage
phase L1
UL2DIFF REAL - kV Differential Voltage
phase L2
UL3DIFF REAL - kV Differential Voltage
phase L3

10.5.7 Operation principle SEMOD153866-61 v4

The Voltage differential protection function VDCPTOV (60) is based on

comparison of the amplitudes of the two voltages connected in each phase.
Possible differences between the ratios of the two Voltage/Capacitive voltage
transformers can be compensated for with a ratio correction factors RFLx. The
voltage difference is evaluated and if it exceeds the alarm level UDAlarm or trip
level UDATrip signals for alarm (ALARM output) or trip (TRIP output) is given
after definite time delay tAlarm respectively tTrip. The two three phase voltage
supplies are also supervised with undervoltage settings U1Low and U2Low. The
outputs for loss of voltage U1LOW resp U2LOW will be activated. The U1 voltage
is supervised for loss of individual phases whereas the U2 voltage is supervised for
loss of all three phases.

Loss of all U1 or all U2 voltages will block the differential measurement. This
blocking can be switched off with setting BlkDiffAtULow = No.

VDCPTOV function can be blocked from an external condition with the binary
BLOCK input. It can, for example, be activated from Fuse failure supervision
function FUFSPVC.

To allow easy commissioning the measured differential voltage is available as

service value. This allows simple setting of the ratio correction factor to achieve
full balance in normal service.

The principle logic diagram is shown in figure 379.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 743

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

UDTripL1>
AND

UDTripL2> O tReset tTrip

AND
R t t
AND TRIP

UDTripL3>
AND
AND START

UDAlarmL1>
AND

UDAlarmL2> O tAlarm
AND
R t AND ALARM

UDAlarmL3>
AND

U1<L1
tAlarm
U1<L2 AND t U1LOW
AND

U1<L3 AND

OR
BlkDiffAtULow

U2<L1
t1
U2<L2 AND t U2LOW
AND

U2<L3

BLOCK

en06000382-2.vsd

IEC06000382 V3 EN-US

Figure 379: Principle logic for Voltage differential function VDCPTOV

10.5.8 Technical data

SEMOD166919-2 v7

Table 429: VDCPTOV technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage difference for alarm and trip (2.0–100.0) % of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Under voltage level (1.0–100.0) % of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Independent time delay for voltage (0.000–60.000)s ±0.2% or ±40 ms

differential alarm at 0.8 x UDAlarm to 1.2 x whichever is greater
UDAlarm
Independent time delay for voltage (0.000–60.000)s ±0.2% or ±40 ms
differential trip at 0.8 x UDTrip to 1.2 x whichever is greater
UDTrip
Independent time delay for voltage (0.000–60.000)s ±0.2% or ±40 ms
differential reset at 1.2 x UDTrip to 0.8 x whichever is greater
UDTrip

744 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

10.6 Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV SEMOD171453-1 v3

10.6.1 Identification
SEMOD171954-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV - 27

10.6.2 Functionality SEMOD171457-5 v8

Loss of voltage check (LOVPTUV ) is suitable for use in networks with an

automatic system restoration function. LOVPTUV issues a three-pole trip
command to the circuit breaker, if all three phase voltages fall below the set value
for a time longer than the set time and the circuit breaker remains closed.

The operation of LOVPTUV is supervised by the fuse failure supervision

FUFSPVC.

10.6.3 Function block SEMOD171785-4 v4

LOVPTUV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
CBOPEN
VTSU

IEC07000039-2-en.vsd
IEC07000039 V2 EN-US

Figure 380: LOVPTUV function block

10.6.4 Signals
PID-3519-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 430: LOVPTUV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Voltage connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block the all outputs
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker open
VTSU BOOLEAN 0 Block from voltage circuit supervision

PID-3519-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 431: LOVPTUV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal
START BOOLEAN Start signal

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 745

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

10.6.5 Settings
PID-3519-SETTINGS v6

Table 432: LOVPTUV Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
UPE 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate voltage in % of base voltage
UBase
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 7.000 Operate time delay

Table 433: LOVPTUV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tPulse 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Duration of TRIP pulse
tBlock 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to block when all 3ph
voltages are not low
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Time delay for enable the function after
restoration

Table 434: LOVPTUV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

10.6.6 Operation principle SEMOD171765-4 v6

The operation of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV is based on line voltage

measurement. LOVPTUV is provided with a logic, which automatically recognizes
if the line was restored for at least tRestore before starting the tTrip timer. All three
phases are required to be low before the output TRIP is activated. The START
output signal indicates start.

Additionally, LOVPTUV is automatically blocked if only one or two phase

voltages have been detected low for more than tBlock.

LOVPTUV operates again only if the line has been restored to full voltage for at
least tRestore. Operation of the function is also inhibited by fuse failure and open
circuit breaker information signals, by their connection to dedicated inputs of the
function block.

Due to undervoltage conditions being continuous the trip pulse is limited to a

length set by setting tPulse.

The operation of LOVPTUV is supervised by the fuse-failure function (BLKU

input) and the information about the open position (CBOPEN) of the associated
circuit breaker.

746 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 10
Voltage protection

The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive
a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other
internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from
internal functions. LOVPTUV is also blocked when the IED is in TEST status and
the function has been blocked from the HMI test menu. (Blocked=Yes).

TEST

TEST-ACTIVE
&
Blocked = Yes

START
BLOCK >1
Function Enable tTrip tPulse TRIP
STUL1N & t

STUL2N &
only 1 or 2 phases are low for
Latched at least 10 s (not three)
STUL3N Enable
&

tBlock
>1 t

CBOPEN Reset Enable

>1
&
VTSU
tRestore
>1 Set Enable
t
>1
Line restored for
at least 3 s

IEC07000089_2_en.vsd

IEC07000089 V2 EN-US

Figure 381: Simplified diagram of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 747

Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Voltage protection

10.6.7 Technical data

SEMOD175210-2 v6

Table 435: LOVPTUV technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Pulse timer when disconnecting (0.050–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is

all three phases greater
Time delay for enabling the (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
functions after restoration greater
Operate time delay when (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
disconnecting all three phases greater
Time delay to block when all (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
three phase voltages are not low greater

748 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 11
Frequency protection

Section 11 Frequency protection

11.1 Underfrequency protection SAPTUF IP15746-1 v3

11.1.1 Identification
M14865-1 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF 81

f<

SYMBOL-P V1 EN-US

11.1.2 Functionality M13349-3 v13

Underfrequency occurs as a result of a lack of generation in the network.

Underfrequency protection (SAPTUF) measures frequency with high accuracy, and

is used for load shedding systems, remedial action schemes, gas turbine startup and
so on. Separate definite time delays are provided for operate and restore.

SAPTUF is provided with undervoltage blocking.

The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two
phase-phase or three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about
how to connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/
Analog inputs/Setting guidelines.

11.1.3 Function block M13352-3 v6

SAPTUF
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTRIP RESTORE
BLKREST BLKDMAGN
FREQ

IEC06000279_2_en.vsd
IEC06000279 V2 EN-US

Figure 382: SAPTUF function block

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 749

Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Frequency protection

11.1.4 Signals
PID-6752-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 436: SAPTUF Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocking operate output
BLKREST BOOLEAN 0 Blocking restore output

PID-6752-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 437: SAPTUF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
START BOOLEAN General start signal
RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Blocking indication due to low amplitude
FREQ REAL Measured frequency

11.1.5 Settings
PID-6752-SETTINGS v2

Table 438: SAPTUF Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
StartFrequency 35.00 - 75.00 Hz 0.01 48.80 Frequency set value
IntBlockLevel 0.0 - 100.0 %UB 1.0 50.0 Internal blocking level in % of UBase
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate time delay
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Restore time delay
RestoreFreq 45.00 - 65.00 Hz 0.01 49.90 Restore frequency value
TimerMode Definite timer - - Definite timer Setting for choosing timer mode
Volt based timer
UNom 50.0 - 150.0 %UB 1.0 100.0 Nominal voltage for voltage based timer
in % of UBase
UMin 50.0 - 150.0 %UB 1.0 90.0 Lower operation limit for voltage based
timer in % of UBase
Exponent 0.0 - 5.0 - 0.1 1.0 For calculation of the curve form for
voltage based timer
tMax 0.010 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Maximum time operation limit for voltage
based timer
tMin 0.010 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Minimum time operation limit for voltage
based timer

750 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 11
Frequency protection

Table 439: SAPTUF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

11.1.6 Operation principle M13354-3 v9

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF is used to detect low power system frequency.

SAPTUF can either have a definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent
time delay. If the voltage magnitude dependent time delay is applied, the time
delay will be longer if the voltage is higher, and the delay will be shorter if the
voltage is lower. If the frequency remains below the set value for a time period
corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To
avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage
magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, that is, if the
voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage IntBlockLevel, the function is
blocked and no START or TRIP signal is issued.

11.1.6.1 Measurement principle M13354-6 v8

The fundamental frequency of the measured input voltage is measured

continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFrequency. The frequency
function is dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases
below the setting IntBlockLevel, SAPTUF gets blocked, and the output
BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the setting
UBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV.

To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

11.1.6.2 Time delay M13354-10 v9

The time delay for underfrequency protection SAPTUF can be either a settable
definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay, where the time
delay depends on the voltage level; a high voltage level gives a longer time delay
and a low voltage level causes a short time delay. For the definite time delay, the
setting tDelay sets the time delay.

For the voltage dependent time delay the measured voltage level and the settings
UNom, UMin, Exponent, tMax and tMin set the time delay according to figure 383
and equation . The setting TimerMode is used to decide what type of time delay to
apply.

Trip signal issuing requires that the underfrequency condition continues for at least
the user set time delay tDelay. If the START condition, with respect to the
measured frequency ceases during this user set delay time, and is not fulfilled again
within a user defined reset time, tReset, the START output is reset, after that the
defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 751

Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Frequency protection

hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient
for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.

The total time delay consists of the set value for time delay plus the
minimum operate time of the start function (80-90 ms).

On the RESTORE output of SAPTUF a 100ms pulse is issued, after a time delay
corresponding to the setting of tRestore, when the measured frequency returns to
the level corresponding to the setting RestoreFreq, after an issue of the TRIP
output signal. If tRestore is se to 0.000 s the restore functionality is disabled, and
no output will be given.

11.1.6.3 Voltage dependent time delay M13354-19 v5

Since the fundamental frequency in a power system is the same all over the system,
except some deviations during power oscillations, another criterion is needed to
decide, where to take actions, based on low frequency. In many applications the
voltage level is very suitable, and in most cases is load shedding preferable in areas
with low voltage. Therefore, a voltage dependent time delay has been introduced,
to make sure that load shedding, or other actions, take place at the right location. At
constant voltage, U, the voltage dependent time delay is calculated according to
equation 215. At non-constant voltage, the actual time delay is integrated in a
similar way as for the inverse time characteristic for the undervoltage and
overvoltage functions.
Exponent
é U - UMin ù
t=ê × ( tMax - tMin ) + tMin
ë UNom - UMin úû
EQUATION1182 V1 EN-US (Equation 215)

where:
t is the voltage dependent time delay (at constant voltage),
U is the measured voltage
Exponent is a setting,
UMin, UNom are voltage settings corresponding to
tMax, tMin are time settings.

The inverse time characteristics are shown in figure 383, for:

UMin = 90%
UNom = 100%
tMax = 1.0 s
tMin = 0.0 s
Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4

752 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 11
Frequency protection

1
0
1
Exponenent

TimeDlyOperate [s]
2
3
0.5 4

0
90 95 100

U [% of UBase]
en05000075.vsd
IEC05000075 V1 EN-US

Figure 383: Voltage dependent inverse time characteristics for underfrequency

protection SAPTUF. The time delay to operate is plotted as a
function of the measured voltage, for the Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4
respectively.

11.1.6.4 Blocking M13354-50 v7

It is possible to block underfrequency protection SAPTUF partially or completely,

by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLOCK: blocks the START, TRIP and

RESTORE outputs
BLKTRIP: blocks the TRIP output
BLKREST: blocks the RESTORE output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the
START and the TRIP outputs are blocked.

11.1.6.5 Design M13354-63 v10

The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the

positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The
frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults. The
time integrator can operate either due to a definite delay time or to the special
voltage dependent delay time. When the frequency has returned back to the setting
of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued after the time delay tRestore. The
design of underfrequency protection SAPTUF is schematically described in
figure 384.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 753

Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Frequency protection

BLKDMAGN

BLOCK

block START
OR

U < IntBlockLevel

Start
&
start Trip
Voltage
output
Definite timer
logic TRIP
or
Voltage based timer
Frequency
f < StartFrequency
tReset trip
tDelay RESTORE
AND

BLKTRIP

f > RestoreFreq tRestore

restore
AND
BLKREST

IEC16000041-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000041 V1 EN-US

Figure 384: Simplified logic diagram for SAPTUF

11.1.7 Technical data

M13360-1 v15

Table 440: SAPTUF technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, start function, at symmetrical three (35.00-75.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz
phase voltage
Operate time, start at fset + 0.02 Hz to fset - 0.02 Hz Min. = 80 ms
fn = 50 Hz
Max. = 95 ms
-
Min. = 65 ms
fn = 60 Hz
Max. = 80 ms
Reset time, start at fset - 0.02 Hz to fset + 0.02 Hz Min. = 15 ms
-
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, definite time function at fset + 0.02 Hz (0.000-60.000)s ±0.2% or
to fset - 0.02 Hz ±100 ms
whichever
is greater
Table continues on next page

754 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 11
Frequency protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Reset time, definite time function at fset - 0.02 Hz to (0.000-60.000)s ±0.2% or
fset + 0.02 Hz ±120 ms
whichever
is greater
Voltage dependent time delay Settings: ±1.0% or
UNom=(50-150)% of Ubase ±100 ms
UMin=(50-150)% of Ubase whichever
Exponent=0.0-5.0 is greater
tMax=(0.010–60.000)s
tMin=(0.010–60.000)s

Exponent
é U - UMin ù
t=ê × ( tMax - tMin ) + tMin
ë UNom - UMin úû
EQUATION1182 V1 EN-US (Equation 216)

U=Umeasured

11.2 Overfrequency protection SAPTOF IP15747-1 v3

11.2.1 Identification
M14866-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF 81

f>

SYMBOL-O V1 EN-US

11.2.2 Functionality M14953-3 v12

Overfrequency protection function (SAPTOF) is applicable in all situations, where

reliable detection of high fundamental power system frequency is needed.

Overfrequency occurs because of sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power
network. Close to the generating plant, generator governor problems can also cause
over frequency.

SAPTOF measures frequency with high accuracy, and is used mainly for
generation shedding and remedial action schemes. It is also used as a frequency
stage initiating load restoring. A definite time delay is provided for operate.

SAPTOF is provided with an undervoltage blocking.

The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two
phase-phase or three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 755

Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Frequency protection

how to connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/

Analog inputs/Setting guidelines.

11.2.3 Function block M14956-3 v5

SAPTOF
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTRIP BLKDMAGN
FREQ

IEC06000280_2_en.vsd
IEC06000280 V2 EN-US

Figure 385: SAPTOF function block

11.2.4 Signals
PID-6751-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 441: SAPTOF Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocking operate output

PID-6751-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 442: SAPTOF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
START BOOLEAN General start signal
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Blocking indication due to low amplitude
FREQ REAL Measured frequency

11.2.5 Settings
PID-6751-SETTINGS v2

Table 443: SAPTOF Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
StartFrequency 35.00 - 90.00 Hz 0.01 51.20 Frequency set value
IntBlockLevel 0.0 - 100.0 %UB 1.0 50.0 Internal blocking level in % of UBase
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Operate time delay
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset

756 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 11
Frequency protection

Table 444: SAPTOF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

11.2.6 Operation principle M14958-3 v7

Overfrequency protection SAPTOF is used to detect high power system frequency.

SAPTOF has a settable definite time delay. If the frequency remains above the set
value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding
TRIP signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted TRIP due to uncertain frequency
measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the
function is available, that is, if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage
IntBlockLevel, the function is blocked and no START or TRIP signal is issued.

11.2.6.1 Measurement principle M14958-6 v9

The fundamental frequency of the positive sequence voltage is measured

continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFrequency. Overfrequency
protection SAPTOF is dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage
magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlockLevel, SAPTOF is blocked and the
output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the
UBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV. To avoid oscillations of
the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

11.2.6.2 Time delay M14958-9 v8

The time delay for Overfrequency protection SAPTOF is a settable definite time
delay, specified by the setting tDelay.

TRIP signal issuing requires that the overfrequency condition continues for at least
the user set time delay, tDelay. If the START condition, with respect to the
measured frequency ceases during this user set delay time, and is not fulfilled again
within a user defined reset time, tReset, the START output is reset, after that the
defined reset time has elapsed. It is to be noted that after leaving the hysteresis
area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the
signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.

The total time delay consists of the set value for time delay plus
minimum operate time of the start function (80 - 90 ms).

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 757

Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Frequency protection

11.2.6.3 Blocking M14958-13 v7

It is possible to block overfrequency protection SAPTOF partially or completely,

by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLOCK: blocks the START and TRIP outputs

BLKTRIP: blocks the TRIP output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the
START and the TRIP outputs are blocked.

11.2.6.4 Design M14958-24 v9

The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the

positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The
frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the
power system. The time integrator operates due to a definite delay time. The design
of overfrequency protection SAPTOF is schematically described in figure 386.

BLKDMAGN

BLOCK

block START
OR

U < IntBlockLevel

Start
&
start Trip
Voltage
output
logic TRIP
Definite timer
Frequency
f > StartFrequency tReset
trip
tDelay

AND

BLKTRIP

IEC16000042-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000042 V1 EN-US

Figure 386: Simplified logic diagram for SAPTOF

758 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 11
Frequency protection

11.2.7 Technical data

M14964-1 v12

Table 445: SAPTOF technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, start function (35.00-90.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz
at symmetrical three-phase
voltage
Operate time, start at fset Min. = 80 ms -
fn = 50Hz
-0.02 Hz to fset +0.02 Hz Max. = 95 ms
Min. = 65 ms
fn = 60 Hz
Max. = 80 ms
Reset time, start at fset +0.02 Min. = 15 ms -
Hz to fset -0.02 Hz Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, definite time (0.000-60.000)s ±0.2% ±100 ms

function at fset -0.02 Hz to fset whichever is greater
+0.02 Hz
Reset time, definite time (0.000-60.000)s ±0.2% ±120 ms,
function at fset +0.02 Hz to whichever is greater
fset -0.02 Hz

11.3 Rate-of-change of frequency protection SAPFRC IP15748-1 v4

11.3.1 Identification
M14868-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Rate-of-change of frequency protection SAPFRC 81

df/dt >
<

SYMBOL-N V1 EN-US

11.3.2 Functionality M14965-3 v13

The rate-of-change of frequency protection function (SAPFRC ) gives an early

indication of a main disturbance in the system. SAPFRC measures frequency with
high accuracy, and can be used for generation shedding, load shedding and
remedial action schemes. SAPFRC can discriminate between a positive or negative
change of frequency. A definite time delay is provided for operate.

SAPFRC is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation is based on

positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phase-phase or three
phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about how to connect

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 759

Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Frequency protection

analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/Analog inputs/

Setting guidelines.

11.3.3 Function block M14968-3 v6

SAPFRC
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTRIP RESTORE
BLKREST BLKDMAGN

IEC06000281-2-en.vsd
IEC06000281 V2 EN-US

Figure 387: SAPFRC function block

11.3.4 Signals
PID-6754-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 446: SAPFRC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocking operate output
BLKREST BOOLEAN 0 Blocking restore output

PID-6754-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 447: SAPFRC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal
START BOOLEAN Start signal
RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Blocking indication due to low amplitude

11.3.5 Settings
PID-6754-SETTINGS v2

Table 448: SAPFRC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
StartFreqGrad -10.00 - 10.00 Hz/s 0.01 0.50 Frequency gradient start value, the sign
defines direction
IntBlockLevel 0.0 - 100.0 %UB 1.0 50.0 Internal blocking level in % of UBase
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate time delay
Table continues on next page

760 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 11
Frequency protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

RestoreFreq 45.00 - 65.00 Hz 0.01 49.90 Restore frequency value
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Restore time delay
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset

Table 449: SAPFRC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

11.3.6 Operation principle M14970-3 v9

Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC is used to detect fast power system

frequency changes at an early stage. SAPFRC has a settable definite time delay. If
the rate-of-change of frequency remains below the set value, for negative rate-of-
change, for a time period equal to the chosen time delay, the TRIP signal is issued.
If the rate-of-change of frequency remains above the set value, for positive rate-of-
change, for a time period equal to the chosen time delay, the TRIP signal is issued.
To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage
magnitude a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, that is, if the
voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage IntBlockLevel the function is blocked
and no START or TRIP signal is issued. If the frequency recovers, after a
frequency decrease, a restore signal is issued.

11.3.6.1 Measurement principle M14970-6 v8

The rate-of-change of the fundamental frequency of the selected voltage is

measured continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFreqGrad. Rate-of-
change frequency protection SAPFRC is also dependent on the voltage magnitude.
If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlockLevel, SAPFRC is
blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. The sign of the setting
StartFreqGrad, controls if SAPFRC reacts on a positive or on a negative change in
frequency. If SAPFRC is used for decreasing frequency that is, the setting
StartFreqGrad has been given a negative value, and a trip signal has been issued,
then a 100 ms pulse is issued on the RESTORE output, when the frequency
recovers to a value higher than the setting RestoreFreq. A positive setting of
StartFreqGrad, sets SAPFRC to START and TRIP for frequency increases.

To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

11.3.6.2 Time delay M14970-10 v7

Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC has a settable definite time delay,

tDelay.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 761

Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Frequency protection

Trip signal issuing requires that the rate-of-change of frequency condition

continues for at least the user set time delay, tDelay. If the START condition, with
respect to the measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled
again within a user defined reset time, tReset, the START output is reset, after that
the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the
hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient
for the signal to only return back into the hysteresis area.

The RESTORE output of SAPFRC is set, after a time delay equal to the setting of
tDelay, when the measured frequency has returned to the level corresponding to
RestoreFreq, after an issue of the TRIP output signal. If tRestore is set to 0.000 s
the restore functionality is disabled, and no output will be given. The restore
functionality is only active for lowering frequency conditions and the restore
sequence is disabled if a new negative frequency gradient is detected during the
restore period, defined by the settings RestoreFreq and tRestore.

11.3.6.3 Blocking M14970-23 v6

Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC) can be partially or totally blocked,

by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLOCK: blocks the START and TRIP outputs

BLKTRIP: blocks the TRIP output
BLKREST: blocks the RESTORE output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the
START and the TRIP outputs are blocked.

11.3.6.4 Design M14970-34 v7

Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC) measuring element continuously

measures the frequency of the selected voltage and compares it to the setting
StartFreqGrad. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to power
system switchings and faults. The time integrator operates with a definite delay
time. When the frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the
RESTORE output is issued after the time delay tRestore, if the TRIP signal has
earlier been issued. The sign of the setting StartFreqGrad is essential, and controls
if the function is used for raising or lowering frequency conditions. The design of
SAPFRC is schematically described in figure 388.

762 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 11
Frequency protection

BLKDMAGN

BLOCK
block
OR
Voltage
U < IntBlockLevel

START

Start
Rate-of-change
&
of Frequency start
If Trip
[StartFreqGrad<0 output
AND logic
Definite timer
df/dt < StartFreqGrad]
start TRIP
OR
tReset
[StartFreqGrad>0
AND
tDelay
df/dt > StartFreqGrad]
Then
START trip
AND
BLKTRIP
RESTORE

Frequency restore
f > RestoreFreq
> tRestore
AND
BLKREST

IEC16000040-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000040 V1 EN-US

Figure 388: Simplified logic diagram for SAPFRC

11.3.7 Technical data

M14976-1 v9

Table 450: SAPFRC Technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, start function (-10.00-10.00) Hz/s ±10.0 mHz/s
Operate value, restore (45.00-65.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz
enable frequency
Definite restore time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever is
greater
Definite time delay for (0.200-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±120 ms whichever is
frequency gradient trip greater
Definite reset time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever is
greater

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 763

Technical manual
764
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 12
Multipurpose protection

Section 12 Multipurpose protection

12.1 General current and voltage protection CVGAPC IP14552-1 v2

12.1.1 Identification
M14886-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
General current and voltage protection CVGAPC 2(I>/U<) -

12.1.2 Functionality
M13083-3 v6

The protection module is recommended as a general backup protection with many

possible application areas due to its flexible measuring and setting facilities.

The built-in overcurrent protection feature has two settable current levels. Both of
them can be used either with definite time or inverse time characteristic. The
overcurrent protection steps can be made directional with selectable voltage
polarizing quantity. Additionally they can be voltage and/or current controlled/
restrained. 2nd harmonic restraining facility is available as well. At too low
polarizing voltage the overcurrent feature can be either blocked, made non
directional or ordered to use voltage memory in accordance with a parameter
setting.

Additionally two overvoltage and two undervoltage steps, either with definite time
or inverse time characteristic, are available within each function.

The general function suits applications with underimpedance and voltage

controlled overcurrent solutions. The general function can also be utilized for
generator transformer protection applications where positive, negative or zero
sequence components of current and voltage quantities are typically required.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 765

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

12.1.3 Function block M13748-3 v3

CVGAPC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TROC1
BLOCK TROC2
BLKOC1 TRUC1
BLKOC1TR TRUC2
ENMLTOC1 TROV1
BLKOC2 TROV2
BLKOC2TR TRUV1
ENMLTOC2 TRUV2
BLKUC1 START
BLKUC1TR STOC1
BLKUC2 STOC2
BLKUC2TR STUC1
BLKOV1 STUC2
BLKOV1TR STOV1
BLKOV2 STOV2
BLKOV2TR STUV1
BLKUV1 STUV2
BLKUV1TR BLK2ND
BLKUV2 DIROC1
BLKUV2TR DIROC2
UDIRLOW
CURRENT
ICOSFI
VOLTAGE
UIANGLE

IEC05000372-2-en.vsd
IEC05000372 V2 EN-US

Figure 389: CVGAPC function block

12.1.4 Signals
PID-3857-INPUTSIGNALS v8

Table 451: CVGAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKOC1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over current function OC1
BLKOC1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over current function OC1
ENMLTOC1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
OC1
BLKOC2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over current function OC2
BLKOC2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over current function OC2
ENMLTOC2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
OC2
BLKUC1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under current function UC1
BLKUC1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under current function UC1
BLKUC2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under current function UC2
BLKUC2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under current function UC2
BLKOV1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over voltage function OV1
Table continues on next page

766 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 12
Multipurpose protection

Name Type Default Description

BLKOV1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over voltage function OV1
BLKOV2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over voltage function OV2
BLKOV2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over voltage function OV2
BLKUV1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function UV1
BLKUV1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under voltage function UV1
BLKUV2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function UV2
BLKUV2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under voltage function UV2

PID-3857-OUTPUTSIGNALS v8

Table 452: CVGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TROC1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overcurrent function OC1
TROC2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overcurrent function OC2
TRUC1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undercurrent function UC1
TRUC2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undercurrent function UC2
TROV1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overvoltage function OV1
TROV2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overvoltage function OV2
TRUV1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undervoltage function UV1
TRUV2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undervoltage function UV2
START BOOLEAN General start signal
STOC1 BOOLEAN Start signal from overcurrent function OC1
STOC2 BOOLEAN Start signal from overcurrent function OC2
STUC1 BOOLEAN Start signal from undercurrent function UC1
STUC2 BOOLEAN Start signal from undercurrent function UC2
STOV1 BOOLEAN Start signal from overvoltage function OV1
STOV2 BOOLEAN Start signal from overvoltage function OV2
STUV1 BOOLEAN Start signal from undervoltage function UV1
STUV2 BOOLEAN Start signal from undervoltage function UV2
BLK2ND BOOLEAN Block from second harmonic detection
DIROC1 INTEGER Directional mode of OC1 (nondir,
forward,reverse)
DIROC2 INTEGER Directional mode of OC2 (nondir,
forward,reverse)
UDIRLOW BOOLEAN Low voltage for directional polarization
CURRENT REAL Measured current value
ICOSFI REAL Measured current multiplied with cos (Phi)
VOLTAGE REAL Measured voltage value
UIANGLE REAL Angle between voltage and current

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 767

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

12.1.5 Settings
PID-3857-SETTINGS v9

Table 453: CVGAPC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
CurrentInput phase1 - - MaxPh Select current signal which will be
phase2 measured inside function
phase3
PosSeq
NegSeq
3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
VoltageInput phase1 - - MaxPh Select voltage signal which will be
phase2 measured inside function
phase3
PosSeq
-NegSeq
-3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
OperHarmRestr Off - - Off Operation of 2nd harmonic restrain Off /
On On
l_2nd/l_fund 10.0 - 50.0 % 1.0 20.0 Ratio of second to fundamental current
harmonic in %
BlkLevel2nd 10 - 5000 %IB 1 5000 Harm analyse disabled above this
current level in % of fundamental current
EnRestrainCurr Off - - Off Enable current restrain function On / Off
On
RestrCurrInput PosSeq - - PosSeq Select current signal which will be used
NegSeq for curr restrain
3*ZeroSeq
Max
RestrCurrCoeff 0.00 - 5.00 - 0.01 0.00 Restraining current coefficient
RCADir -180 - 180 Deg 1 -75 Relay Characteristic Angle
ROADir 1 - 90 Deg 1 75 Relay Operate Angle
LowVolt_VM 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Below this level in % of UBase setting
ActLowVolt takes over
Operation_OC1 Off - - Off Operation OC1 Off / On
On
Table continues on next page

768 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 12
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

StartCurr_OC1 2.0 - 5000.0 %IB 1.0 120.0 Operate current level for OC1 in % of
IBase
CurveType_OC1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for
ANSI Very inv. OC1
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
tDef_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay of OC1
k_OC1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for OC1
IMin1 1 - 10000 %IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step1 in %
of IBase
tMin_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT
curves for OC1
VCntrlMode_OC1 Voltage control - - Off Control mode for voltage controlled OC1
Off function
VDepMode_OC1 Step - - Step Voltage dependent mode OC1 (step,
Slope slope)
VDepFact_OC1 0.02 - 5.00 - 0.01 1.00 Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC1
is U dependent
ULowLimit_OC1 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage low limit setting OC1 in % of
UBase
UHighLimit_OC1 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage high limit setting OC1 in % of
UBase
HarmRestr_OC1 Off - - Off Enable block of OC1 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain
DirMode_OC1 Non-directional - - Non-directional Directional mode of OC1 (nondir,
Forward forward, reverse)
Reverse
DirPrinc_OC1 I&U - - I&U Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for
IcosPhi&U OC1
ActLowVolt1_VM Non-directional - - Non-directional Low voltage level action for Dir_OC1
Block (Nodir, Blk, Mem)
Memory
Operation_OC2 Off - - Off Operation OC2 Off / On
On
StartCurr_OC2 2.0 - 5000.0 %IB 1.0 120.0 Operate current level for OC2 in % of
IBase
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 769

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CurveType_OC2 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for
ANSI Very inv. OC2
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
tDef_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay of OC2
k_OC2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for OC2
IMin2 1 - 10000 %IB 1 50 Minimum operate current for step2 in %
of IBase
tMin_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT
curves for OC2
VCntrlMode_OC2 Voltage control - - Off Control mode for voltage controlled OC2
Off function
VDepMode_OC2 Step - - Step Voltage dependent mode OC2 (step,
Slope slope)
VDepFact_OC2 0.02 - 5.00 - 0.01 1.00 Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC2
is U dependent
ULowLimit_OC2 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage low limit setting OC2 in % of
UBase
UHighLimit_OC2 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage high limit setting OC2 in % of
UBase
HarmRestr_OC2 Off - - Off Enable block of OC2 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain
DirMode_OC2 Non-directional - - Non-directional Directional mode of OC2 (nondir,
Forward forward, reverse)
Reverse
DirPrinc_OC2 I&U - - I&U Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for
IcosPhi&U OC2
ActLowVolt2_VM Non-directional - - Non-directional Low voltage level action for Dir_OC2
Block (Nodir, Blk, Mem)
Memory
Operation_UC1 Off - - Off Operation UC1 Off / On
On
EnBlkLowI_UC1 Off - - Off Enable internal low current level blocking
On for UC1
BlkLowCurr_UC1 0 - 150 %IB 1 20 Internal low current blocking level for
UC1 in % of IBase
StartCurr_UC1 2.0 - 150.0 %IB 1.0 70.0 Operate undercurrent level for UC1 in %
of IBase
Table continues on next page

770 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 12
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tDef_UC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay of UC1
tResetDef_UC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve UC1
HarmRestr_UC1 Off - - Off Enable block of UC1 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain
Operation_UC2 Off - - Off Operation UC2 Off / On
On
EnBlkLowI_UC2 Off - - Off Enable internal low current level blocking
On for UC2
BlkLowCurr_UC2 0 - 150 %IB 1 20 Internal low current blocking level for
UC2 in % of IBase
StartCurr_UC2 2.0 - 150.0 %IB 1.0 70.0 Operate undercurrent level for UC2 in %
of IBase
tDef_UC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay of UC2
HarmRestr_UC2 Off - - Off Enable block of UC2 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain
Operation_OV1 Off - - Off Operation OV1 Off / On
On
StartVolt_OV1 2.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 Operate voltage level for OV1 in % of
UBase
CurveType_OV1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A OV1
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite
time use of OV1
tMin_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
for OV1
k_OV1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for OV1
Operation_OV2 Off - - Off Operation OV2 Off / On
On
StartVolt_OV2 2.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 Operate voltage level for OV2 in % of
UBase
CurveType_OV2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A OV2
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite
time use of OV2
tMin_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
for OV2
k_OV2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for OV2
Operation_UV1 Off - - Off Operation UV1 Off / On
On
StartVolt_UV1 2.0 - 150.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Operate undervoltage level for UV1 in %
of UBase
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 771

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CurveType_UV1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A UV1
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite
time use of UV1
tMin_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
for UV1
k_UV1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for UV1
EnBlkLowV_UV1 Off - - On Enable internal low voltage level
On blocking for UV1
BlkLowVolt_UV1 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Internal low voltage blocking level for
UV1 in % of UBase
Operation_UV2 Off - - Off Operation UV2 Off / On
On
StartVolt_UV2 2.0 - 150.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Operate undervoltage level for UV2 in %
of UBase
CurveType_UV2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A UV2
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite
time use of UV2
tMin_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
for UV2
k_UV2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for UV2
EnBlkLowV_UV2 Off - - On Enable internal low voltage level
On blocking for UV2
BlkLowVolt_UV2 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Internal low voltage blocking level for
UV2 in % of UBase

Table 454: CVGAPC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CurrMult_OC1 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for OC1
ResCrvType_OC1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OC1
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tResetDef_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve OC1
P_OC1 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for OC1
A_OC1 0.000 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for OC1
B_OC1 0.000 - 99.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for OC1
Table continues on next page

772 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 12
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

C_OC1 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for OC1
PR_OC1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for OC1
TR_OC1 0.005 - 600.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for OC1
CR_OC1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for OC1
CurrMult_OC2 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for OC2
ResCrvType_OC2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OC2
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tResetDef_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve OC2
P_OC2 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for OC2
A_OC2 0.000 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for OC2
B_OC2 0.000 - 99.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for OC2
C_OC2 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for OC2
PR_OC2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for OC2
TR_OC2 0.005 - 600.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for OC2
CR_OC2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for OC2
tResetDef_UC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve UC2
ResCrvType_OV1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OV1
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tResetDef_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite time
use of OV1
tResetIDMT_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves
for OV1
A_OV1 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for OV1
B_OV1 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for OV1
C_OV1 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for OV1
D_OV1 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for OV1
P_OV1 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for OV1
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 773

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ResCrvType_OV2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OV2
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tResetDef_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite time
use of OV2
tResetIDMT_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves
for OV2
A_OV2 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for OV2
B_OV2 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for OV2
C_OV2 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for OV2
D_OV2 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for OV2
P_OV2 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for OV2
ResCrvType_UV1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for UV1
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tResetDef_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite time
use of UV1
tResetIDMT_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves
for UV1
A_UV1 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for UV1
B_UV1 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for UV1
C_UV1 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for UV1
D_UV1 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for UV1
P_UV1 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for UV1
ResCrvType_UV2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for UV2
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tResetDef_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite time
use of UV2
tResetIDMT_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves
for UV2
A_UV2 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for UV2
B_UV2 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for UV2
C_UV2 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for UV2
D_UV2 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for UV2
P_UV2 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for UV2

774 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 12
Multipurpose protection

Table 455: CVGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

12.1.6 Monitored data

PID-3857-MONITOREDDATA v7

Table 456: CVGAPC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
DIROC1 INTEGER 1=Forward - Directional mode of OC1
0=Non- (nondir, forward,reverse)
directional
2=Reverse
DIROC2 INTEGER 1=Forward - Directional mode of OC2
0=Non- (nondir, forward,reverse)
directional
2=Reverse
CURRENT REAL - A Measured current value
ICOSFI REAL - A Measured current
multiplied with cos (Phi)
VOLTAGE REAL - kV Measured voltage value
UIANGLE REAL - deg Angle between voltage
and current

12.1.7 Operation principle

12.1.7.1 Measured quantities within CVGAPC M13751-3 v3

General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function is always connected to

three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool, but it
will always measure only one current and one voltage quantity selected by the end
user in the setting tool.

The user can select to measure one of the current quantities shown in table 457.
Table 457: Current selection for CVGAPC function
Set value for the
parameter Comment
CurrentInput
1 Phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L1 current phasor
2 Phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L2 current phasor
3 Phase3 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L3 current phasor
4 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence
current phasor
5 NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative
sequence current phasor
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 775

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

Set value for the

parameter Comment
CurrentInput
6 3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence
current phasor multiplied by factor 3
7 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with
maximum magnitude
8 MinPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with
minimum magnitude
9 UnbalancePh CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which
is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between
the current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and current
phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set
to 0° all the time
10 Phase1-Phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated
as the vector difference between the phase L1 current phasor and
phase L2 current phasor (IL1-IL2)

11 Phase2-Phase3 CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated
as the vector difference between the phase L2 current phasor and
phase L3 current phasor (IL2-IL3)

12 Phase3-Phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated
as the vector difference between the phase L3 current phasor and
phase L1 current phasor ( IL3-IL1)

13 MaxPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the
maximum magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the
minimum magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which
is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between
the ph-ph current phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph current
phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0° all the
time

The user can select to measure one of the voltage quantities shown in table 458:
Table 458: Voltage selection for CVGAPC function
Set value for the
parameter Comment
VoltageInput
1 Phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L1 voltage phasor
2 Phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L2 voltage phasor
3 Phase3 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L3 voltage phasor
4 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence
voltage phasor
5 -NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative
sequence voltage phasor. This voltage phasor will be intentionally
rotated for 180° in order to enable easier settings for the directional
feature when used.
6 -3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence
voltage phasor multiplied by factor 3. This voltage phasor will be
intentionally rotated for 180° in order to enable easier settings for the
directional feature when used.
Table continues on next page

776 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 12
Multipurpose protection

Set value for the

parameter Comment
VoltageInput
7 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with
maximum magnitude
8 MinPh CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with
minimum magnitude
9 UnbalancePh CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage,
which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference
between the voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude
and voltage phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase
angle will be set to 0° all the time
10 Phase1-Phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally
calculated as the vector difference between the phase L1 voltage
phasor and phase L2 voltage phasor (UL1-UL2)

11 Phase2-Phase3 CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally

calculated as the vector difference between the phase L2 voltage
phasor and phase L3 voltage phasor (UL2-UL3)

12 Phase3-Phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally

calculated as the vector difference between the phase L3 voltage
phasor and phase L1 voltage phasor ( UL3-UL1)

13 MaxPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the
maximum magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the
minimum magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage,
which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference
between the ph-ph voltage phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-
ph voltage phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to
0° all the time

It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 458 is always
applicable regardless the actual external VT connections. The three-phase VT
inputs can be connected to IED as either three phase-to-ground voltages UL1, UL2
& UL3 or three phase-to-phase voltages UL1L2, UL2L3 & UL3L1). This information
about actual VT connection is entered as a setting parameter for the pre-processing
block, which will then take automatic care about it.

The user can select one of the current quantities shown in table 459 for built-in
current restraint feature:
Table 459: Restraint current selection for CVGAPC function
Set value for the
parameter RestrCurr Comment
1 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence
current phasor
2 NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative
sequence current phasor
3 3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence
current phasor multiplied by factor 3
4 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with
maximum magnitude

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 777

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

12.1.7.2 Base quantities for CVGAPC function M13751-133 v3

The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (100%) for
pickup levels of all measuring stages, shall be entered as setting parameters for
every CVGAPC function.

Base current shall be entered as:

1. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the
measured Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 457.
2. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by
√3 (1.732*Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to
15, as shown in table 457.

Base voltage shall be entered as:

1. rated phase-to-earth voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 458.
2. rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 458.

12.1.7.3 Built-in overcurrent protection steps M13751-136 v3

Two overcurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.

Overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity
(see table 457) with the set pickup level. Non-directional overcurrent step will
pickup if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is bigger than this set
level. However depending on other enabled built-in features this overcurrent
pickup might not cause the overcurrent step start signal. Start signal will only come
if all of the enabled built-in features in the overcurrent step are fulfilled at the same
time.

Second harmonic feature M13751-254 v2

The overcurrent protection step can be restrained by a second harmonic component

in the measured current quantity (see table 457). However it shall be noted that this
feature is not applicable when one of the following measured currents is selected:

• PosSeq (positive sequence current)

• NegSeq (negative sequence current)
• UnbalancePh (unbalance phase current)
• UnbalancePh-Ph (unbalance ph-ph current)

This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step start if the second-to-first
harmonic ratio in the measured current exceeds the set level.

778 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 12
Multipurpose protection

Directional feature M13751-263 v5

The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent on the relevant
phase angle between measured current phasor (see table 457) and measured voltage
phasor (see table 458). In protection terminology it means that the General currrent
and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function can be made directional by enabling
this built-in feature. In that case overcurrent protection step will only operate if the
current flow is in accordance with the set direction (Forward, which means
towards the protected object, or Reverse, which means from the protected object).
For this feature it is of the outmost importance to understand that the measured
voltage phasor (see table 458) and measured current phasor (see table 457) will be
used for directional decision. Therefore it is the sole responsibility of the end user
to select the appropriate current and voltage signals in order to get a proper
directional decision. CVGAPC function will NOT do this automatically. It will
simply use the current and voltage phasors selected by the end user to check for the
directional criteria.

Table 460 gives an overview of the typical choices (but not the only possible ones)
for these two quantities from traditional directional relays.
Table 460: Typical current and voltage choices for directional feature
Set value for the Set value for the
parameter parameter Comment
CurrentInput VoltageInput
PosSeq PosSeq Directional positive sequence overcurrent function is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from 45° to
90° depending on the power system voltage level
(X/R ratio)
NegSeq -NegSeq Directional negative sequence overcurrent function is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from 45° to
90° depending on the power system voltage level
(X/R ratio)
3ZeroSeq -3ZeroSeq Directional zero sequence overcurrent function is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from 0° to 90°
depending on the power system earthing (that is,
solidly earthed, earthed via resistor)
Phase1 Phase2-Phase3 Directional overcurrent function for the first phase is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30° or +45°
Phase2 Phase3-Phase1 Directional overcurrent function for the second phase
is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30° or
+45°
Phase3 Phase1-Phase2 Directional overcurrent function for the third phase is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30° or +45°

Unbalance current or voltage measurement shall not be used when the directional
feature is enabled.

Two types of directional measurement principles are available, I & U and

IcosPhi&U. The first principle, referred to as "I & U" in the parameter setting tool,
checks that:

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 779

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

• the magnitude of the measured current is bigger than the set pick-up level
• the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by
the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 390).

U=-3U0
RCADir

Ipickup ROADir I=3Io

Operate region
mta line

en05000252.vsd
IEC05000252 V1 EN-US

Figure 390: I & U directional operating principle for CVGAPC function

where:
RCADir is 75°
ROADir is 50°

The second principle, referred to as "IcosPhi&U" in the parameter setting tool,

checks that:

• that the product I·cos(Φ) is bigger than the set pick-up level, where Φ is angle
between the current phasor and the mta line
• that the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined
by the I·cos(Φ) straight line and the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter
setting; see figure 390).

780 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 12
Multipurpose protection

U=-3U0
RCADir

Ipickup ROADir F I=3Io

Operate region
mta line

en05000253.vsd
IEC05000253 V1 EN-US

Figure 391: CVGAPC, IcosPhi&U directional operating principle

where:
RCADir is 75°
ROADir is 50°

Note that it is possible to decide by a parameter setting how the directional feature
shall behave when the magnitude of the measured voltage phasor falls below the
pre-set value. User can select one of the following three options:

• Non-directional (operation allowed for low magnitude of the reference

voltage)
• Block (operation prevented for low magnitude of the reference voltage)
• Memory (memory voltage shall be used to determine direction of the current)

It shall also be noted that the memory duration is limited in the algorithm to 100
ms. After that time the current direction will be locked to the one determined
during memory time and it will re-set only if the current fails below set pickup
level or voltage goes above set voltage memory limit.

Voltage restraint/control feature M13751-326 v4

The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent of a measured

voltage quantity (see table 458). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent
step is not constant but instead decreases with the decrease in the magnitude of the
measured voltage quantity. Two different types of dependencies are available:

• Voltage restraint overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Slope)

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 781

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

OC1 Stage Pickup Level

StartCurr_OC1

VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1

ULowLimit_OC1 UHighLimit_OC1
Selected Voltage
Magnitude
en05000324.vsd
IEC05000324 V1 EN-US

Figure 392: Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation

• Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter

VDepMode_OC1=Step)

OC1 Stage Pickup Level

StartCurr_OC1

VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1

UHighLimit_OC1 Selected Voltage Magnitude

en05000323.vsd
IEC05000323 V1 EN-US

Figure 393: Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation

This feature will simply change the set overcurrent pickup level in accordance with
magnitude variations of the measured voltage. It shall be noted that this feature will
as well affect the pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT
curves (overcurrent with IDMT curve will operate faster during low voltage
conditions).

782 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 12
Multipurpose protection

Current restraint feature M13751-338 v3

The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent of a restraining

current quantity (see table 459). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent
step is not constant but instead increases with the increase in the magnitude of the
restraining current.

IMeasured
ea ain
ar tr
te es
e ra ff *Ir
Op oe
s trC
e
I>R
IsetHigh

IsetLow

atan(RestrCoeff)

Restraint
en05000255.vsd
IEC05000255 V1 EN-US

Figure 394: Current pickup variation with restraint current magnitude

This feature will simply prevent overcurrent step to start if the magnitude of the
measured current quantity is smaller than the set percentage of the restrain current
magnitude. However this feature will not affect the pickup current value for
calculation of operate times for IDMT curves. This means that the IDMT curve
operate time will not be influenced by the restrain current magnitude.

When set, the start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time
delay in accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for
longer time than the set time delay, the overcurrent step will set its trip signal to
one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in
accordance with the end user setting.

12.1.7.4 Built-in undercurrent protection steps M13751-231 v2

Two undercurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here. Undercurrent step simply compares the
magnitude of the measured current quantity (see table 457) with the set pickup
level. The undercurrent step will pickup and set its start signal to one if the
magnitude of the measured current quantity is smaller than this set level. The start
signal will start definite time delay with set time delay. If the start signal has value
one for longer time than the set time delay the undercurrent step will set its trip
signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in
accordance with the setting.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 783

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

12.1.7.5 Built-in overvoltage protection steps M13751-234 v3

Two overvoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.

Overvoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity
(see table 458) with the set pickup level. The overvoltage step will pickup if the
magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is bigger than this set level.

The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer
time than the set time delay, the overvoltage step will set its trip signal to one.
Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance
with the end user setting.

12.1.7.6 Built-in undervoltage protection steps M13751-239 v3

Two undervoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.

Undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage

quantity (see table 458) with the set pickup level. The undervoltage step will
pickup if the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is smaller than this set
level.

The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer
time than the set time delay, the undervoltage step will set its trip signal to one.
Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance
with the end user setting.

12.1.7.7 Logic diagram M13085-3 v6

The simplified internal logics, for CVGAPC function are shown in the following
figures.

784 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 12
Multipurpose protection

IED
ADM CVGAPC function

Current and voltage selection

settings

Phasor calculation of
scaling with CT ratio

individual currents
A/D conversion
Selection of which current Selected current
and voltage shall be given to

Phasors &
samples
the built-in protection Selected voltage
elements

Restraint current selection

Selected restraint current

A/D conversion scaling

Selection of restraint current

Phasor calculation of
individual voltages
with CT ratio

Phasors &
samples

IEC05000169_2_en.vsd

IEC05000169 V2 EN-US

Figure 395: Treatment of measured currents and voltages within IED for CVGAPC function

Figure 395 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done for
multipurpose protection function

The following currents and voltages are inputs to the multipurpose protection
function. They must all be expressed in true power system (primary) Amperes and
kilovolts.

1. Instantaneous values (samples) of currents & voltages from one three-phase

current and one three-phase voltage input.
2. Fundamental frequency phasors from one three-phase current and one three-
phase voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.
3. Sequence currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one three-
phase voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.

The multipurpose protection function:

1. Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 457) for
internally measured current.
2. Selects one voltage from the three-phase input system (see table 458) for
internally measured voltage.
3. Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 459) for
internally measured restraint current.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 785

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

CURRENT

UC1
nd TRUC1
2 Harmonic
Selected current restraint
STUC2
UC2
TRUC2
2nd Harmonic
restraint

STOC1
OC1 TROC1

2nd Harmonic BLK2ND

restraint ³1
Selected restraint current
Current restraint
DIROC1
Directionality
Voltage control /
restraint

STOC2
OC2 TROC2

2nd Harmonic
restraint
Current restraint ³1
UDIRLOW

Directionality DIROC2

Voltage control /
restraint

STOV1
OV1 TROV1

STOV2
OV2 TROV2

STUV1
Selected voltage
UV1 TRUV1

STUV2
UV2 TRUV2

VOLTAGE

en05000170.vsd
IEC05000170 V1 EN-US

Figure 396: CVGAPC function main logic diagram for built-in protection
elements

786 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 12
Multipurpose protection

Logic in figure 396 can be summarized as follows:

1. The selected currents and voltage are given to built-in protection elements.
Each protection element and step makes independent decision about status of
its START and TRIP output signals.
2. More detailed internal logic for every protection element is given in the
following four figures.
3. Common START and TRIP signals from all built-in protection elements &
steps (internal OR logic) are available from multipurpose function as well.

a
a>b AND
BlkLevel2nd b

Enable
second Second harmonic
harmonic check DEF time BLKTRO C1 TROC1
selected DEF AND
OR
a
a>b
b
OC1=On STOC1
AND
StartCurr_OC1 BLKOC1
X
Inverse

Voltage Directionali ty DIR_OK Inverse

control or time
check selected
restrai nt
feature

Selected v oltage
Curren t
Restrai nt
Feature
Selected restrain current Imea sure d > k Irestra int

IEC05000831-2-en.vsdx

IEC05000831 V2 EN-US

Figure 397: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overcurrent step that is, OC1 (step OC2 has the
same internal logic)

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 787

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

Bin input: BLKUC1TR

Selected current a TRUC1

b>a
DEF AND
b
StartCurr_UC1
AND

Operation_UC1=On
STUC1

Bin input: BLKUC1

en05000750.vsd

IEC05000750 V1 EN-US

Figure 398: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undercurrent step that is, UC1 (step UC2 has
the same internal logic)

DEF time BLKTROV1

selected DEF TROV1
AND
OR
Selected voltage a
a>b
b STOV1
StartVolt_OV1
AND

Inverse
Operation_OV1=On
Inverse time
BLKOV1 selected

en05000751.vsd

IEC05000751 V1 EN-US

Figure 399: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overvoltage step OV1 (step OV2 has the same
internal logic)

788 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 12
Multipurpose protection

DEF time BLKTRUV

selected DEF 1 TRUV1
AND
OR
Selected voltage a
b>a
b STUV1
AND
StartVolt_UV1

Inverse
Operation_UV1=On
Inverse time
BLKUV1 selected

en05000752.vsd

IEC05000752 V1 EN-US

Figure 400: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undervoltage step UV1 (step UV2 has the same
internal logic)

12.1.8 Technical data

M13095-2 v8

Table 461: CVGAPC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Measuring current input phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, - -
NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh,
MinPh, UnbalancePh, phase1-
phase2, phase2-phase3, phase3-
phase1, MaxPh-Ph, MinPh-Ph,
UnbalancePh-Ph
Measuring voltage input phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, - -
NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh,
MinPh, UnbalancePh, phase1-
phase2, phase2-phase3, phase3-
phase1, MaxPh-Ph, MinPh-Ph,
UnbalancePh-Ph
Start overcurrent, step 1 - 2 (2 - 5000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤
Ir
±1.0% of I at I >
Ir

Start undercurrent, step 1 - 2 (2 - 150)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤

Ir
±1.0% of I at I >
Ir

Independent time delay, overcurrent at 0 (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35

to 2 x Iset, step 1 - 2 ms whichever is
greater
Independent time delay, undercurrent at (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35
2 x Iset to 0, step 1 - 2 ms whichever is
greater
Overcurrent (non-directional):
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 789

Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Start time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Start time at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 5 ms -
Max. = 20 ms
Reset time at 10 x Iset to 0 Min. = 20 ms -
Max. = 35 ms
Undercurrent:
Start time at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Overcurrent:
Inverse time characteristics, see table 16 curve types See table 1130,
1130, 1131 and table 1132 1131 and table
1132
Overcurrent:
Minimum operate time for inverse (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35
curves, step 1 - 2 ms whichever is
greater
Voltage level where voltage memory (0.0 - 5.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
takes over
Start overvoltage, step 1 - 2 (2.0 - 200.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U
≤ Ur
±0.5% of U at U
> Ur

Start undervoltage, step 1 - 2 (2.0 - 150.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U

≤ Ur
±0.5% of U at U
> Ur

Independent time delay, overvoltage at (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35

0.8 x Uset to 1.2 x Uset, step 1 - 2 ms whichever is
greater
Independent time delay, undervoltage at (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35
1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset, step 1 - 2 ms whichever is
greater
Overvoltage:
Start time at 0.8 x Uset to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Undervoltage:
Start time at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Overvoltage:
Inverse time characteristics, see table 4 curve types See table 1138
1138
Table continues on next page

790 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 12
Multipurpose protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Undervoltage:
Inverse time characteristics, see table 3 curve types See table 1139
1139
High and low voltage limit, voltage (1.0 - 200.0)% of UBase ±1.0% of Ur at U
dependent operation, step 1 - 2 ≤ Ur
±1.0% of U at U
> Ur

Directional function Settable: NonDir, forward and -

reverse
Relay characteristic angle (-180 to +180) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Relay operate angle (1 to 90) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Reset ratio, overcurrent > 95% -
Reset ratio, undercurrent < 105% -
Reset ratio, overvoltage > 95% -
Reset ratio, undervoltage < 105% -
Overcurrent:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Undercurrent:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 2 x Iset to 0 -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Overvoltage:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0.8 x Uset to 1.2 x -
Uset

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Undervoltage:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x -
Uset

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 791

Technical manual
792
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 13
System protection and control

Section 13 System protection and control

13.1 Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC GUID-6B541154-D56B-452F-B143-4C2A1B2D3A1F v1

13.1.1 Identification GUID-8224B870-3DAA-44BF-B790-6600F2AD7C5D v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC - -

13.1.2 Functionality GUID-EB0B11C3-FF79-4B8D-A335-649623E832F9 v3

The multi-purpose filter function block (SMAIHPAC) is arranged as a three-phase

filter. It has very much the same user interface (e.g. inputs and outputs) as the
standard pre-processing function block SMAI. However the main difference is that
it can be used to extract any frequency component from the input signal. Thus it
can, for example, be used to build sub-synchronous resonance protection for
synchronous generator.

13.1.3 Function block GUID-FA590757-0DB1-4605-9DE2-20FA8304795F v1

SMAIHPAC
BLOCK AI3P
G3P* AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4

IEC13000180-1-en.vsd
IEC13000180 V1 EN-US

13.1.4 Signals GUID-DF7C833A-9AB9-40CA-867B-950AC1F662B5 v1

PID-6733-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 462: SMAIHPAC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
G3P GROUP - Analog input group from SMAI
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 793

Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
System protection and control

PID-6733-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 463: SMAIHPAC Output signals

Name Type Description
AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Analog input 3-phase group
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Analog input 1
AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Analog input 2
AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Analog input 3
AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Analog input 4

13.1.5 Settings GUID-5EA398AD-66E2-4240-8918-4332995CED11 v1

PID-6733-SETTINGS v1

Table 464: SMAIHPAC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ConnectionType Ph - Ph - - Ph - N Analogue input connection type
Ph - N
SetFrequency 2.0 - 500.0 Hz 0.1 50.0 Desired frequency to be extracted by the
filter
FreqBandWidth 0.0 - 60.0 Hz 0.1 0.0 Extra added frequency band around the
set frequency
FilterLength 0.1 s - - 1.0 s Approximate length of the filtering
0.2 s window in seconds
0.5 s
1.0 s
2.0 s
4.0 s
OverLap 0 - 95 % 5 20 Filtering window overlap between two
calculations in percent

13.1.6 Operation principle GUID-262C1783-3A0A-46B6-99FC-1202AE8E7519 v2

For all four analogue input signals into this filter (i.e. three phases and the residual
quantity) the input samples from the TRM module which are coming at rate of 20
samples per fundamental system cycle are first stored. When enough samples are
available in the internal memory, the phasor values at set frequency defined by the
setting parameter SetFrequency are calculated. The following values are internally
available for each of the calculated phasors:
• Magnitude
• Phase angle
• Exact frequency of the extracted signal

Note that the special filtering algorithm is used to extract these phasors. This
algorithm is different from the standard one-cycle Digital Fourier Filter typically
used by the numerical IEDs. This filter provides extremely good accuracy of
measurement and excellent noise rejection, but at the same time it has much slower

794 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 13
System protection and control

response time. It is capable to extract phasor (i.e. magnitude, phase angle and
actual frequency) of any signal (e.g. 37,2Hz) present in the waveforms of the
connected CTs and/or VTs. The magnitude and the phase angle of this phasor are
calculated with very high precision. For example the magnitude and phase angle of
the phasor can be estimated even if it has magnitude of one per mille (i.e. 1‰ ) in
comparison to the dominating signal (e.g. the fundamental frequency component).
Several instances of this function block are provided. These instances are fully
synchronized between each-other in respect of phase angle calculation. Thus if two
multi-purpose filters are used for some application, one for current and the second
one for the voltage signals, the power values (i.e. P & Q) at the set frequency can
be calculated from them by the over-/under-power function or CVMMXN
measurement function block.

In addition to these phasors the following quantities are internally calculated as

well:
• Phasors for the individual phases as well as phase-to-phase phasors
• True RMS value of the input signal over all samples available in the memory
• Positive sequence phasor
• Negative sequence phasor
• Zero sequence phasor
• etc.

In order to properly calculate phase-to-phase phasors from the individual phase

phasors or vice versa, the setting parameters ConnectionType is provided. It
defines what quantities (i.e. individual phases or phase-to-phase quantities) are
physically connected to the IED analogue inputs by wiring. Then the IED knows
which one of them are the measured quantities and the other one is then internally
calculated. This setting is only important for the VT inputs, because the CTs are
typically star connected all the time.

Thus when this filter is used in conjunction with multi-purpose protection function
or overcurrent function or over-voltage function or over-power function many
different protection applications can be arranged. For example the following
protection, monitoring or measurement features can be realized:
• Sub-synchronous resonance protection for turbo generators
• Sub-synchronous protection for wind turbines/wind farms
• Detection of sub-synchronous oscillation between HVDC links and
synchronous generators
• Super-synchronous protection
• Detection of presence of the geo-magnetic induced currents
• Overcurrent or overvoltage protection at specific frequency harmonic, sub-
harmonic, inter-harmonic etc.
• Presence of special railway frequencies (e.g. 16.7Hz or 25Hz) in the three-
phase power system

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 795

Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
System protection and control

• Sensitive reverse power protection

• Stator or rotor earth fault protection for special injection frequencies (e.g.
25Hz)
• etc.

The filter output can also be connected to the measurement function blocks such as
CVMMXN (Measurements), CMMXU (Phase current measurement), VMMXU
(Phase-phase voltage measurement), etc.

The filter has as well additional capability to report the exact frequency of the
extracted signal. Thus the user can check the actual frequency of some
phenomenon in the power system (e.g. frequency of the sub-synchronous currents)
and compare it with expected value obtained previously by either calculation or
simulation. For the whole three-phase filter group the frequency of the signal
connected to the first input (i.e. phase L1) is reported. This value can be then used
either by over-/under-frequency protections or reported to the built-in HMI or any
other external client via the measurement blocks such is the CVMMXN.

How many samples in the memory are used for the phasor calculation depends on
the setting parameter FilterLength. Table 465 gives overview of the used number
of samples for phasor calculation by the filter. Note that the used number of
samples is always a power of number two.
Table 465: Length of the filtering window
Value for parameter Used No of samples for Corresponding length of Corresponding length of
FilterLength calculation (fixed, the input waveform in the input waveform in
independent from rated miliseconds for 50Hz miliseconds for 60Hz
frequency) power system power system
0.1 s 128 = 27 128 ms 107 ms

0.2 s 256 = 28 256 ms 213 ms

0.5 s 512 = 29 512 ms 427 ms

1.0 s 1024 = 210 1024 ms 853 ms

2.0 s 2048 = 211 2048 ms 1707 ms

4.0 s 4096 = 212 4096 ms 3413 ms

Note that the selected value for the parameter FilterLength automatically defines
certain filter properties as described below:

First in order to secure proper filter operation the selected length of the filter shall
always be longer than three complete periods of the signal which shall be extracted.
Actually the best results are obtained if at least five complete periods are available
within the filtering window. Thus, this filter feature will limit which filter lengths
can be used to extract low frequency signals. For example if 16,7 Hz signal shall be
extracted the minimum filter length in milliseconds shall be:

796 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 13
System protection and control

1000
3× = 180ms
16.7
EQUATION000028 V1 EN-US (Equation 217)

Thus based on the data from Table 465 the minimum acceptable value for this
parameter would be “FilterLength = 0.2 s” but more accurate results will be
obtained by using “FilterLength = 0.5 s”

Second feature which is determined by the selected value for parameter

FilterLength is the capability of the filter to separate the desired signal from the
other disturbing signals which may have similar frequency value. Note that the
filter output will be the phasor with the highest magnitude within certain “pass
frequency band” around the SetFrequency. Table 466 defines the natural size of
this pass frequency band for the filter, depending on the selected value for
parameter FilterLength.
Table 466: Pass frequency band due to FilterLength
Value for parameter FilterLength For 50Hz power system For 60Hz power system
0.1 s ±22.5 Hz ±27.0 Hz
0.2 s ±11.5 Hz ±14.0 Hz
0.5 s ±6.0 Hz ±7.2 Hz
1.0 s ±3.0 Hz ±3.6 Hz
2.0 s ±1.5 Hz ±1.8 Hz
4.0 s ±0.8 Hz ±1.0 Hz

Thus the longer length of the filter the better capability it has to reject the
disturbing signals close to the required frequency component and any other noise
present in the input signal waveform. For example if 46 Hz signal wants to be
extracted in 50Hz power system, then from Table 466 it can be concluded that
“FilterLength=1,0 s” shall be selected as a minimum value. However if frequency
deviation of the fundamental frequency signal in the power system are taken into
account it may be advisable to select “FilterLength=2,0 s” for such application.

Note that in case when no clear magnitude peak exist in the set pass frequency
band the filter will return zero values for the phasor magnitude and angle while the
signal frequency will have value minus one. Finally the set value for parameter
FilterLength also defines the response time of the filter after a step change of the
measured signal. The filter will correctly estimate the new signal magnitude once
75% of the filter length has been filed with the new signal value (i.e. after the
change).

If for any reason this natural frequency band shall be extended (e.g. to get accurate
but wider filter) it is possible to increase the pass band by entering the value
different from zero for parameter FreqBandWidth. In such case the total filter pass
band can be defined as:

± (value given in Table 466 + one-half of the set FreqBandWidth value)

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 797

Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
System protection and control

Example if in 60Hz system the selected values are “FilterLength =1.0 s” and
“FreqBandWidth = 5.0” the total filter pass band will be ±(3.6+5.0/2)= ± 6.1 Hz.

It shall be noted that the phasor calculation is relatively computation demanding

(required certain amount of the CPU processing time). In order to control the CPU
usage for this filter, the setting parameter OverLap is used. This setting parameter
defines how often the new phasor value is calculated during time period defined by
the set value for the parameter FilterLength (see Table 465). The following list
gives some examples how this parameter influence the calculation rate for the
extracted phasor:
• when OverLap=0% the new phasor value is calculated only once per
FilterLength
• when OverLap=50% the new phasor value is calculated two times per
FilterLength
• when OverLap=75% the new phasor value is calculated four times per
FilterLength
• when OverLap=90% the new phasor value is calculated ten times per
FilterLength

13.1.7 Filter calculation example GUID-F5828B0A-CED3-483E-B5B1-F389C3C2AEFB v3

In the following Figure an example from an installation of this filter on a large, 50

Hz turbo generator with a rating in excess of 1000 MVA is presented. In this
installation filter is used to measure the stator sub-synchronous resonance currents.
For this particular installation the following settings were used for the filter:
• SetFrequency= 31.0 Hz
• FilterLength= 1.0 s
• OverLap = 75%
• FreqBandWidth= 0.0 Hz

798 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 13
System protection and control

IEC13000178-2-en.vsd
IEC13000178 V3 EN-US

Figure 401: Example of filter calculation

The data shown in the Figure comes from the comtrade file captured by the IED.
The following traces are presented in this Figure.

a) Waveforms of the stator three-phase currents given in primary kA.

b) RMS value of the sub-synchronous resonance current extracted by the filter in

primary amperes.

c) Frequency of the extracted sub-synchronous resonance current provided by the

filter in Hz.

Note the very narrow scale on the y-axle for b) and c). Such small scale as well
indicates with which precision and consistency the filter calculates the phasor
magnitude and frequency of the extracted stator sub-synchronous current
component.

The following can be observed in the Figure:

• The stator total RMS current value is around 33 kA primary.
• The measured magnitude of the sub-synchronous current is around 173 A
primary (that is, 0.5% of the fundamental 50 Hz component).
• The frequency of this sub-synchronous current component is 31.24 Hz.

With above given settings the sub-synchronous current magnitude and frequency
are calculated approximately four times per second (that is, correct value is four
times per 1024 ms).

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 799

Technical manual
800
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 14
Secondary system supervision

Section 14 Secondary system supervision

14.1 Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC IP14555-1 v5

14.1.1 Identification
M14870-1 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC - 87

14.1.2 Functionality M12444-3 v10

Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of
many protection functions such as differential, earth-fault current and negative-
sequence current functions.

Current circuit supervision (CCSSPVC) compares the residual current from a three
phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate
input taken from another set of cores on the current transformer.

A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to

block protection functions expected to give inadvertent tripping.

14.1.3 Function block M12436-3 v9

CCSSPVC
I3P* FAIL
IREF* ALARM
BLOCK
IEC13000304-1-en.vsd
IEC13000304 V1 EN-US

Figure 402: CCSSPVC function block

Signal ISIREF must be connected in the configuration.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 801

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

14.1.4 Signals
PID-6806-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 467: CCSSPVC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase current input
SIGNAL
IREF GROUP - Residual reference current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

PID-6806-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 468: CCSSPVC Output signals

Name Type Description
FAIL BOOLEAN Detection of current circuit failure
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for current circuit failure

14.1.5 Settings
PID-6806-SETTINGS v2

Table 469: CCSSPVC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IMinOp 10 - 200 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate current differential
level in % of IBase

Table 470: CCSSPVC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Ip>Block 20 - 500 %IB 1 150 Block of the function at high phase
current, in % of IBase

Table 471: CCSSPVC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

14.1.6 Operation principle M12396-5 v10

Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC compares the absolute value of the vectorial
sum of the three phase currents |ΣIphase| and the absolute value of the residual
current |Iref| from another current transformer set, see figure 403.

802 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 14
Secondary system supervision

The FAIL output will be set to high when the following criteria are fulfilled:

• The numerical value of the difference |ΣIphase| – |Iref| is higher than 80% of
the numerical value of the sum |ΣIphase| + |Iref|.
• The numerical value of the current |ΣIphase| – |Iref| is equal to or higher than
the set operate value IMinOp.
• No phase current has exceeded Ip>Block during the last 10 ms.
• CCSSPVC is enabled by setting Operation = On.

The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being
activated for more than 20 ms. If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms an ALARM
will be issued. In this case the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after
the AND-gate resets. This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function
when phase current supervision element(s) operate, for example, during a fault.

I>Ip>Block
BLOCK
IL1 IL1 I>IMinOp
IL2 +å
IL2 å
IL3 IL3 -
+å +å
I ref Iref + x -
0,8
1,5 x Ir
AND OR FAIL
10 ms

20 ms 100 ms

150 ms 1s ALARM
OPERATION
BLOCK

en05000463.tif
IEC05000463 V2 EN-US

Figure 403: Simplified logic diagram for Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC

The operate characteristic is percentage restrained, which is shown in Figure 404.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 803

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

| åI phase | - | I ref |

Slope = 1

Operation
Slope = 0.8
area
I MinOp

| åI phase | + | I ref |
99000068.vsd
IEC99000068 V1 EN-US

Figure 404: Operate characteristics

Due to the formulas for the axis compared, |SIphase | - |I ref | and |S
I phase | + | I ref | respectively, the slope can not be above 1.

14.1.7 Technical data

M12358-1 v10

Table 472: CCSSPVCtechnical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (10-200)% of IBase ±10.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±10.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, Operate current >90%

Block current (20-500)% of IBase ±5.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±5.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, Block current >90% at (50-500)% of IBase

14.2 Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC IP14556-1 v3

14.2.1 Identification
M14869-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC - -

804 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 14
Secondary system supervision

14.2.2 Functionality SEMOD113820-4 v12

The aim of the fuse failure supervision function (FUFSPVC) is to block voltage
measuring functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage
transformer and the IED in order to avoid inadvertent operations that otherwise
might occur.

The fuse failure supervision function basically has three different detection
methods, negative sequence and zero sequence based detection and an additional
delta voltage and delta current detection.

The negative sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in

isolated or high-impedance earthed networks. It is based on the negative-sequence
quantities.

The zero sequence detection is recommended for IEDs used in directly or low
impedance earthed networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring quantities.

The selection of different operation modes is possible by a setting parameter in

order to take into account the particular earthing of the network.

A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to
the fuse failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure,
which in practice is more associated with voltage transformer switching during
station operations.

14.2.3 Function block M13678-3 v9

FUFSPVC
I3P* BLKZ
U3P* BLKU
BLOCK 3PH
CBCLOSED DLD1PH
MCBOP DLD3PH
DISCPOS STDI
BLKTRIP STDIL1
STDIL2
STDIL3
STDU
STDUL1
STDUL2
STDUL3

IEC14000065-1-en.vsd
IEC14000065 V1 EN-US

Figure 405: FUFSPVC function block

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 805

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

14.2.4 Signals
PID-3492-INPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 473: FUFSPVC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
CBCLOSED BOOLEAN 0 Active when circuit breaker is closed
MCBOP BOOLEAN 0 Active when external MCB opens protected
voltage circuit
DISCPOS BOOLEAN 0 Active when line disconnector is open
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocks operation of function when active

PID-3492-OUTPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 474: FUFSPVC Output signals

Name Type Description
BLKZ BOOLEAN Start of current and voltage controlled function
BLKU BOOLEAN General start of function
3PH BOOLEAN Three-phase start of function
DLD1PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in at least one phase
DLD3PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in all three phases
STDI BOOLEAN Common start signal of sudden change in current
STDIL1 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in current, phase
L1
STDIL2 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in current, phase
L2
STDIL3 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in current, phase
L3
STDU BOOLEAN Common start signal of sudden change in voltage
STDUL1 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in voltage, phase
L1
STDUL2 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in voltage, phase
L2
STDUL3 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in voltage, phase
L3

806 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 14
Secondary system supervision

14.2.5 Settings
PID-3492-SETTINGS v9

Table 475: FUFSPVC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode Off - - UZsIZs Operating mode selection
UNsINs
UZsIZs
UZsIZs OR
UNsINs
UZsIZs AND
UNsINs
OptimZsNs
3U0> 1 - 100 %UB 1 30 Operate level of residual overvoltage
element in % of UBase
3I0< 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of residual undercurrent
element in % of IBase
3U2> 1 - 100 %UB 1 30 Operate level of neg seq overvoltage
element in % of UBase
3I2< 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of neg seq undercurrent
element in % of IBase
OpDUDI Off - - Off Operation of change based function
On Off/On
DU> 1 - 100 %UB 1 60 Operate level of change in phase voltage
in % of UBase
DI< 1 - 100 %IB 1 15 Operate level of change in phase current
in % of IBase
UPh> 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate level of phase voltage in % of
UBase
IPh> 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of phase current in % of
IBase
SealIn Off - - On Seal in functionality Off/On
On
USealln< 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate level of seal-in phase voltage in
% of UBase
IDLD< 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Operate level for open phase current
detection in % of IBase
UDLD< 1 - 100 %UB 1 60 Operate level for open phase voltage
detection in % of UBase

Table 476: FUFSPVC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 807

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

14.2.6 Monitored data

PID-3492-MONITOREDDATA v8

Table 477: FUFSPVC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3I0 REAL - A Magnitude of zero
sequence current
3I2 REAL - A Magnitude of negative
sequence current
3U0 REAL - kV Magnitude of zero
sequence voltage
3U2 REAL - kV Magnitude of negative
sequence voltage

14.2.7 Operation principle

14.2.7.1 Zero and negative sequence detection M13677-3 v5

The zero and negative sequence function continuously measures the currents and
voltages in all three phases and calculates, see figure 406:

• the zero-sequence voltage 3U0

• the zero-sequence current 3I0
• the negative sequence current 3I2
• the negative sequence voltage 3U2

The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3U0> and
3I0<, 3U2> and 3I2<.

The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetZeroSeq if the measured zero-
sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U0> and the measured zero-
sequence current is below the set value 3I0<.

The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetNegSeq if the measured

negative sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U2> and the measured
negative sequence current is below the set value 3I2<.

A drop out delay of 100 ms for the measured zero-sequence and negative sequence
current will prevent a false fuse failure detection at un-equal breaker opening at the
two line ends.

808 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 14
Secondary system supervision

Sequence Detection
3I0< CurrZeroSeq
IL1
Zero 3I0
sequence
filter 100 ms CurrNegSeq
a
IL2 a>b t
b
Negative 3I2
sequence
IL3 filter FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND
100 ms
a
a>b t
3I2< b
FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND
3U0>
VoltZeroSeq
UL1
Zero
sequence a 3U0
a>b
b
filter
UL2 VoltNegSeq

Negative
sequence a 3U2
a>b
UL3 filter b

3U2>

IEC10000036-2-en.vsd
IEC10000036 V2 EN-US

Figure 406: Simplified logic diagram for sequence detection part

The calculated values 3U0, 3I0, 3I2 and 3U2 are available as service values on
local HMI and monitoring tool in PCM600.

Input and output signals M13677-19 v6

The output signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ as well as the signals DLD1PH and
DLD3PH from dead line detections are blocked if any of the following conditions
occur:

• The input BLOCK is activated

• The input BLKTRIP is activated and the internal signal FuseFailStarted is not
present
• The operation mode selector OpMode is set to Off
• The IED is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been
blocked from the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)

The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure
supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to
receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to
other internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from
internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and
internal function outputs.

The input BLKTRIP is intended to be connected to the trip output from any of the
protection functions included in the IED. When activated for more than 20 ms, the
operation of the fuse failure is blocked; a fixed drop-out timer prolongs the block
for 100 ms. The aim is to increase the security against unwanted operations during

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 809

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

the opening of the breaker, which might cause unbalance conditions for which the
fuse failure might operate.

The output signal BLKZ will also be blocked if the internal dead line detection is
activated. The dead line detection signal has a 200 ms drop-out time delay.

The input signal MCBOP is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input
to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT
secondary circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in
order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent
of the setting of OpMode selector. The additional drop-out timer of 150 ms
prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of
voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of
the miniature circuit breaker.

The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input
to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the
output signal BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line
disconnector is open. The impedance protection function is not affected by the
position of the line disconnector since there will be no line currents that can cause
malfunction of the distance protection. If DISCPOS=0 it signifies that the line is
connected to the system and when the DISCPOS=1 it signifies that the line is
disconnected from the system and the block signal BLKU is generated.

The output BLKU can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functions
(undervoltage protection, energizing check and so on) except for the impedance
protection.

The function output BLKZ shall be used for blocking the impedance protection
function.

14.2.7.2 Delta current and delta voltage detection M13685-3 v7

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 407. The calculation of
the changes of currents and voltages is based on a sample analysis algorithm. The
calculated delta quantities are compared with their respective set values DI< and
DU>. The algorithm detects a fuse failure if a sufficient change in voltage without
a sufficient change in current is detected in each phase separately. The following
quantities are calculated in all three phases:

• The change in voltage DU

• The change in current DI

The internal FuseFailDetDUDI signal is activated if the following conditions are

fulfilled:

810 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 14
Secondary system supervision

• The magnitude of the phase-ground voltage has been above UPh> for more
than 1.5 cycles (i.e. 30 ms in a 50 Hz system)
• The magnitudes of DU in three phases are higher than the corresponding
setting DU>
• The magnitudes of DI in three phases are below the setting DI<

In addition to the above conditions, at least one of the following conditions shall be
fulfilled in order to activate the internal FuseFailDetDUDI signal:

• The magnitude of the phase currents in three phases are higher than the setting
IPh>
• The circuit breaker is closed (CBCLOSED = True)

The first criterion means that detection of failure in three phases together with high
current for the three phases will set the output. The measured phase current is used
to reduce the risk of false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected line
is low, a voltage drop in the system (not caused by fuse failure) may be followed
by current change lower than the setting DI<, and therefore a false fuse failure
might occur.

The second criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled at the same
time as circuit breaker is closed. If CBCLOSED input is connected to FALSE ,
then only the first criterion can enable the delta function.If the DUDI detections of
three phases set the internal signal FuseFailDetDUDI at the level high, then the
signal FuseFailDetDUDI will remain high as long as the voltages of three phases
are lower then the setting Uph>.

In addition to fuse failure detection, two internal signals DeltaU and DeltaI are also
generated by the delta current and delta voltage DUDI detection algorithm. The
internal signals DelatU and DeltaI are activated when a sudden change of voltage,
or respectively current, is detected. The detection of the sudden change is based on
a sample analysis algorithm. In particular DelatU is activated if at least three
consecutive voltage samples are higher then the setting DU>. In a similar way
DelatI is activated if at least three consecutive current samples are higher then the
setting DI<. When DeltaU or DeltaI are active, the output signals STDUL1,
STDUL2, STDUL3 and respectively STDIL1, STDIL2, STDIL3, based on a
sudden change of voltage or current detection, are activated with a 20 ms time off
delay. The common start output signals STDU or STDI are activated with a 60 ms
time off delay, if any sudden change of voltage or current is detected.

The delta function (except the sudden change of voltage and current
detection) is deactivated by setting the parameter OpDUDI to Off.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 811

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

DUDI Detection
DUDI detection Phase 1
DeltaIL1
IL1
IL2
IL3 DI detection based on sample analysis OR

DI<

UL1

DU detection based on sample analysis

AND
DU>
1.5 cycle 20 ms DeltaUL1
a
a>b t t
UPh> b

IL1 DeltaIL2
IL2 DUDI detection Phase 2
DeltaUL2
IL3
UL2 Same logic as for phase 1

IL1 DeltaIL3
DUDI detection Phase 3
IL2
DeltaUL3
IL3
UL3 Same logic as for phase 1

UL1
a
a<b
b

IL1
a
a>b
IPh> b AND

OR AND
CBCLOSED AND OR

UL2
a
a<b
b

IL2
a
a>b
b AND

OR AND
AND OR

UL3
a
a<b
b

IL3
a
a>b
b AND

OR AND
AND OR FuseFailDetDUDI
AND

IEC12000166-3-en.vsd

IEC12000166 V3 EN-US

Figure 407: Simplified logic diagram for the DU/DI detection part

812 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 14
Secondary system supervision

intBlock
STDI
AND

20 ms
DeltaIL1 STDIL1
t AND
OR
20 ms
DeltaIL2
t STDIL2
AND
20 ms
DeltaIL3
t
STDIL3
AND

STDU
AND

20 ms
DeltaUL1 STDUL1
t AND
OR
20 ms
DeltaUL2
t STDUL2
AND
20 ms
DeltaUL3
t
STDUL3
AND

IEC12000165-1-en.vsd
IEC12000165 V1 EN-US

Figure 408: Internal signals DeltaU or DeltaI and the corresponding output
signals

14.2.7.3 Dead line detection M13679-44 v4

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 409. A dead phase
condition is indicated if both the voltage and the current in one phase is below their
respective setting values UDLD< and IDLD<. If at least one phase is considered to
be dead the output DLD1PH and the internal signal DeadLineDet1Ph is activated.
If all three phases are considered to be dead the output DLD3PH is activated

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 813

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

Dead Line Detection

IL1
a
a<b AllCurrLow
b
AND
IL2
a
a<b
b

IL3
a
a<b
b

IDLD<
DeadLineDet1Ph
UL1
a AND
a<b
b OR DLD1PH
AND
UL2
a AND
a<b
b
AND DLD3PH
UL3 AND
a AND
a<b
b

UDLD<

intBlock

IEC10000035-1-en.vsd
IEC10000035 V2 EN-US

Figure 409: Simplified logic diagram for Dead Line detection part

14.2.7.4 Main logic GUID-D474A49E-D3A8-438C-B7E4-E527FEC2F335 v6

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 410. The fuse failure
supervision function (FUFSPVC) can be switched on or off by the setting
parameter Operation to On or Off.

For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements an operation mode

selector, OpMode, has been introduced to make it possible to select different
operating modes for the negative and zero sequence based algorithms. The
different operation modes are:

• Off. The negative and zero sequence function is switched off.

• UNsINs. Negative sequence is selected.
• UZsIZs. Zero sequence is selected.
• UZsIZs OR UNsINs. Both negative and zero sequence are activated and work
in parallel (OR-condition for operation).
• UZsIZs AND UNsINs. Both negative and zero sequence are activated and work
in series (AND-condition for operation).
• OptimZsNs. Optimum of negative and zero sequence current (the function that
has the highest magnitude of measured negative and zero sequence current will
be activated).

The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OpDUDI to On. When
selected it operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithms.

814 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 14
Secondary system supervision

As soon as any fuse failure situation is detected, signals FuseFailDetZeroSeq,

FuseFailDetNegSeq or FuseFailDetDUDI, and the specific functionality is
released, the function will activate the output signal BLKU. The output signal
BLKZ will be activated as well if the internal dead phase detection,
DeadLineDet1Ph, is not activated at the same time. The output BLKU can be used
for blocking voltage related measuring functions (under voltage protection,
energizing check, and so on). The output BLKZ shall be used to block the
impedance protection functions.

If the fuse failure situation is present for more than 5 seconds and the setting
parameter SealIn is set to On it will be sealed in as long as at least one phase
voltages is below the set value USealIn<. This will keep the BLKU and BLKZ
signals activated as long as any phase voltage is below the set value USealIn<. If
all three phase voltages drop below the set value USealIn< and the setting
parameter SealIn is set to On the output signal 3PH will also be activated. The
signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ will now be active as long as any phase voltage is
below the set value USealIn<.

If SealIn is set to On the fuse failure condition lasting more then 5 seconds is stored
in the non-volatile memory in the IED. At start-up of the IED (due to auxiliary
power interruption or re-start due to configuration change) it uses the stored value
in its non-volatile memory and re-establishes the conditions that were present
before the shut down. All phase voltages must be restored above USealIn< before
fuse failure is de-activated and resets the signals BLKU, BLKZ and 3PH.

The output signal BLKU will also be active if all phase voltages have been above
the setting USealIn< for more than 60 seconds, the zero or negative sequence
voltage has been above the set value 3U0> and 3U2> for more than 5 seconds, all
phase currents are below the setting IDLD< (criteria for open phase detection) and
the circuit breaker is closed (input CBCLOSED is activated).

If a MCB is used then the input signal MCBOP is to be connected via a binary
input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the
VT secondary circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ
in order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open
independent of the setting of OpMode or OpDUDI. An additional drop-out timer of
150 ms prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation
of voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts
of the miniature circuit breaker.

The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input
to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the
output signal BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line
disconnector is open. The impedance protection function does not have to be
affected since there will be no line currents that can cause malfunction of the
distance protection.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 815

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

Fuse failure detection

Main logic
TEST

TEST ACTIVE
AND
BlocFuse = Yes

BLOCK intBlock
OR
BLKTRIP 20 ms 100 ms
AND t t
FusefailStarted

All UL < USealIn<

OR
AND
3PH
AND
SealIn = On AND

AND
Any UL < UsealIn<

FuseFailDetDUDI
AND 5s
OpDUDI = On
OR t
FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND

AND

FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND

UNsINs OR
UZsIZs OR
UZsIZs OR UNsINs
OpMode
UZsIZs AND UNsINs
OptimZsNs
OR
CurrZeroSeq
a AND
CurrNegSeq a>b
b

AND

DeadLineDet1Ph 200 ms
AND BLKZ
t OR AND
150 ms
MCBOP t

AND BLKU
60 s
t OR OR
All UL > UsealIn<
AND

VoltZeroSeq 5s
VoltNegSeq OR t

AllCurrLow
CBCLOSED

DISCPOS IEC10000033-2-en.vsd

IEC10000033 V2 EN-US

Figure 410: Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, Main
logic

816 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 14
Secondary system supervision

14.2.8 Technical data

M16069-1 v12

Table 478: FUFSPVCtechnical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, zero sequence (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Operate current, zero sequence (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir

Operate voltage, negative sequence (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Operate current, negative sequence (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir

Operate voltage change level (1-100)% of UBase ±10.0% of Ur

Operate current change level (1–100)% of IBase ±10.0% of Ir

Operate phase voltage (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Operate phase current (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir

Operate phase dead line voltage (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Operate phase dead line current (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir

Operate time, start, 1 ph, at 1 x Ur to 0 Min. = 10 ms -

Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, start, 1 ph, at 0 to 1 x Ur Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms

14.3 Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC GUID-9C5BA1A7-DF2F-49D4-A13A-C6B483DDFCDC v2

14.3.1 Identification GUID-109434B0-23E5-4053-9E6E-418530A07F9C v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC VTS 60

14.3.2 Functionality GUID-6AF2219A-264F-4971-8D03-3B8A9D0CB284 v5

Different protection functions within the protection IED operates on the basis of
measured voltage at the relay point. Some example of protection functions are:

• Distance protection function.

• Undervoltage function.
• Energisation function and voltage check for the weak infeed logic.

These functions can operate unintentionally, if a fault occurs in the secondary

circuits between voltage instrument transformers and the IED. These unintentional
operations can be prevented by fuse failure supervision (VDSPVC).

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 817

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

VDSPVC is designed to detect fuse failures or faults in voltage measurement

circuit, based on phase wise comparison of voltages of main and pilot fused
circuits. VDSPVC blocking output can be configured to block functions that need
to be blocked in case of faults in the voltage circuit.

14.3.3 Function block GUID-0C4A6C94-E0D7-4E36-AB49-D74A5E330D36 v2

VDSPVC
U3P1* MAINFUF
U3P2* PILOTFUF
BLOCK U1L1FAIL
U1L2FAIL
U1L3FAIL
U2L1FAIL
U2L2FAIL
U2L3FAIL

IEC14000048-1-en.vsd
IEC12000142 V2 EN-US

Figure 411: VDSPVC function block

14.3.4 Signals
PID-3485-INPUTSIGNALS v8

Table 479: VDSPVC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P1 GROUP - Main fuse voltage
SIGNAL
U3P2 GROUP - Pilot fuse voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

PID-3485-OUTPUTSIGNALS v8

Table 480: VDSPVC Output signals

Name Type Description
MAINFUF BOOLEAN Block of main fuse failure
PILOTFUF BOOLEAN Alarm of pilot fuse failure
U1L1FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Main fuse group phase L1
U1L2FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Main fuse group phase L2
U1L3FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Main fuse group phase L3
U2L1FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Pilot fuse group phase L1
U2L2FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Pilot fuse group phase L2
U2L3FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Pilot fuse group phase L3

818 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 14
Secondary system supervision

14.3.5 Settings
PID-3485-SETTINGS v8

Table 481: VDSPVC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode Off / On
On
Ud>MainBlock 10.0 - 80.0 %UB 0.1 20.0 Blocking picked up voltage level in % of
UBase when main fuse fails
Ud>PilotAlarm 10.0 - 80.0 %UB 0.1 30.0 Alarm picked up voltage level in % of
UBase when pilot fuse fails
SealIn Off - - On Seal in functionality Off/On
On
USealIn 0.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Operate level of seal-in voltage in % of
UBase

Table 482: VDSPVC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Table 483: VDSPVC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ConTypeMain Ph-N - - Ph-N Selection of connection type for main
Ph-Ph fuse group
ConTypePilot Ph-N - - Ph-N Selection of connection type for pilot
Ph-Ph fuse group

14.3.6 Monitored data

PID-3485-MONITOREDDATA v7

Table 484: VDSPVC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1DIF_A REAL - kV Differential voltage
phase L1 for alarm
functionality
UL2DIF_A REAL - kV Differential voltage
phase L2 for alarm
functionality
UL3DIF_A REAL - kV Differential voltage
phase L3 for alarm
functionality
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 819

Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UL1DIF_B REAL - kV Differential voltage
phase L1 for block
functionality
UL2DIF_B REAL - kV Differential voltage
phase L2 for block
functionality
UL3DIF_B REAL - kV Differential voltage
phase L3 for block
functionality

14.3.7 Operation principle GUID-06BC0CC0-8A4F-4D84-A0B1-506E433F72F3 v4

VDSPVC requires six voltage inputs, which are the three phase voltages on main
and pilot fuse groups. The initial voltage difference between the two groups is
theoretical zero in the healthy condition. Any subsequent voltage difference will be
due to a fuse failure.

If the main fuse voltage becomes smaller than the pilot fuse voltage (vMainL1 <
vPilotL1 or vMainL2 < vPilotL2 or vMainL3 < vPilotL3) and the voltage
difference exceeds the operation level (Ud>MainBlock), a blocking signal will be
initiated to indicate the main fuse failure and block the voltage-dependent
functions. In addition, the function also indicates the phase in which the voltage
reduction has occurred.

If the pilot fuse voltage becomes smaller than the main fuse voltage (vPilotL1 <
vMainL1 or vPilotL2 < vMainL2 or vPilotL3 < vMainL3) and the voltage
difference exceeds the operation level (Ud>PilotAlarm), an alarm signal will be
initiated to indicate the pilot fuse failure and also the faulty phase where the
voltage reduction occurred.

When SealIn is set to On and the fuse failure has last for more than 5 seconds, the
blocked protection functions will remain blocked until normal voltage conditions
are restored above the USealIn setting. Fuse failure outputs are deactivated when
normal voltage conditions are restored.

820 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 14
Secondary system supervision

5s
a
a<b AND OR t
USealIn b

SealIn=0

vPilotL1
+
vMainL1 -
å MAX a U1L1FAIL
OR
a>b AND
Ud>MainBlock b MAINFAIL
OR
0

MIN ABS a
a>b AND U2L1FAIL
Ud> PilotAlarm b
BLOCK
OR PILOTFAIL

vPilotL2 U1L2FAIL
vMainL2 Phase L2, same as Phase L1 U2L2FAIL

vPilotL3 U1L3FAIL
vMainL3 Phase L3, same as Phase L1 U2L3FAIL

IEC12000144-1-en.vsd
IEC12000144 V1 EN-US

Figure 412: Simplified logic diagram VDSPVC

14.3.8 Technical data

GUID-E2EA8017-BB4B-48B0-BEDA-E71FEE353774 v5

Table 485: VDSPVC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, block of main fuse failure (10.0-80.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Reset ratio <110%
Operate time, block of main fuse failure at 1 x Ur to 0 Min. = 5 ms –
Max. = 15 ms
Reset time, block of main fuse failure at 0 to 1 x Ur Min. = 15 ms –
Max. = 30 ms
Operate value, alarm for pilot fuse failure (10.0-80.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Reset ratio <110% –
Operate time, alarm for pilot fuse failure at 1 x Ur to 0 Min. = 5 ms –
Max. = 15 ms
Reset time, alarm for pilot fuse failure at 0 to 1 x Ur Min. = 15 ms –
Max. = 30 ms

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 821

Technical manual
822
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Section 15 Control

15.1 Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing

SESRSYN IP14558-1 v4

15.1.1 Identification
M14889-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and SESRSYN 25
synchronizing
sc/vc

SYMBOL-M V1 EN-US

15.1.2 Functionality M12480-3 v16

The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous networks at the correct

moment including the breaker closing time, which improves the network stability.

Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing (SESRSYN) function checks

that the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with at
least one side dead to ensure that closing can be done safely.

SESRSYN function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus and
1½ breaker or ring busbar arrangements.

Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and
can have different settings.

For systems, which can run asynchronously, a synchronizing feature is also

provided. The main purpose of the synchronizing feature is to provide controlled
closing of circuit breakers when two asynchronous systems are in phase and can be
connected. The synchronizing feature evaluates voltage difference, phase angle
difference, slip frequency and frequency rate of change before issuing a controlled
closing of the circuit breaker. Breaker closing time is a setting.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 823

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

15.1.3 Function block M12431-3 v7

SESRSYN
U3PBB1* SYNOK
U3PBB2* AUTOSYOK
U3PLN1* AUTOENOK
U3PLN2* MANSYOK
BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
BLKSC TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG TSTMANSY
B1QOPEN TSTENOK
B1QCLD USELFAIL
B2QOPEN B1SEL
B2QCLD B2SEL
LN1QOPEN LN1SEL
LN1QCLD LN2SEL
LN2QOPEN SYNPROGR
LN2QCLD SYNFAIL
UB1OK UOKSYN
UB1FF UDIFFSYN
UB2OK FRDIFSYN
UB2FF FRDIFFOK
ULN1OK FRDERIVA
ULN1FF UOKSC
ULN2OK UDIFFSC
ULN2FF FRDIFFA
STARTSYN PHDIFFA
TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
AENMODE UDIFFME
MENMODE FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
UBUS
ULINE
MODEAEN
MODEMEN

IEC10000046-1-en.vsd
IEC10000046 V1 EN-US

Figure 413: SESRSYN function block

15.1.4 Signals
PID-6724-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 486: SESRSYN Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3PBB1 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,
SIGNAL busbar 1
U3PBB2 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,
SIGNAL busbar 2
U3PLN1 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,
SIGNAL line 1
U3PLN2 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,
SIGNAL line 2
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Block synchronizing
BLKSC BOOLEAN 0 Block synchro check
BLKENERG BOOLEAN 0 Block energizing check
Table continues on next page

824 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Name Type Default Description

B1QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus1
B1QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus1
B2QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus2
B2QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus2
LN1QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
line1
LN1QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
line1
LN2QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
line2
LN2QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
line2
UB1OK BOOLEAN 0 Bus1 voltage transformer OK
UB1FF BOOLEAN 0 Bus1 voltage transformer fuse failure
UB2OK BOOLEAN 0 Bus2 voltage transformer OK
UB2FF BOOLEAN 0 Bus2 voltage transformer fuse failure
ULN1OK BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer OK
ULN1FF BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure
ULN2OK BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer OK
ULN2FF BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure
STARTSYN BOOLEAN 0 Start synchronizing
TSTSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Set synchronizing in test mode
TSTSC BOOLEAN 0 Set synchro check in test mode
TSTENERG BOOLEAN 0 Set energizing check in test mode
AENMODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of automatic energizing mode
MENMODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of manual energizing mode

PID-6724-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 487: SESRSYN Output signals

Name Type Description
SYNOK BOOLEAN Synchronizing OK output
AUTOSYOK BOOLEAN Auto synchro check OK
AUTOENOK BOOLEAN Automatic energizing check OK
MANSYOK BOOLEAN Manual synchro check OK
MANENOK BOOLEAN Manual energizing check OK
TSTSYNOK BOOLEAN Synchronizing OK test output
TSTAUTSY BOOLEAN Auto synchro check OK test output
TSTMANSY BOOLEAN Manual synchro check OK test output
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 825

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

Name Type Description

TSTENOK BOOLEAN Energizing check OK test output
USELFAIL BOOLEAN Selected voltage transformer fuse failed
B1SEL BOOLEAN Bus1 selected
B2SEL BOOLEAN Bus2 selected
LN1SEL BOOLEAN Line1 selected
LN2SEL BOOLEAN Line2 selected
SYNPROGR BOOLEAN Synchronizing in progress
SYNFAIL BOOLEAN Synchronizing failed
UOKSYN BOOLEAN Voltage amplitudes for synchronizing above set
limits
UDIFFSYN BOOLEAN Voltage difference out of limit for synchronizing
FRDIFSYN BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for synchronizing
FRDIFFOK BOOLEAN Frequency difference in band for synchronizing
FRDERIVA BOOLEAN Frequency derivative out of limit for synchronizing
UOKSC BOOLEAN Voltage amplitudes above set limits
UDIFFSC BOOLEAN Voltage difference out of limit
FRDIFFA BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Auto
operation
PHDIFFA BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Auto
operation
FRDIFFM BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Manual
operation
PHDIFFM BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Manual
Operation
INADVCLS BOOLEAN Inadvertent circuit breaker closing
UDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of voltage in p.u of set
voltage base value
FRDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of frequency
PHDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of phase angle
UBUS REAL Bus voltage
ULINE REAL Line voltage
MODEAEN INTEGER Selected mode for automatic energizing
MODEMEN INTEGER Selected mode for manual energizing

826 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

15.1.5 Settings
PID-6724-SETTINGS v2

Table 488: SESRSYN Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationSynch Off - - Off Operation for synchronizing function
On Off/On
UHighBusSynch 50.0 - 120.0 %UBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for synchronizing
in % of UBaseBus
UHighLineSynch 50.0 - 120.0 %UBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for synchronizing
in % of UBaseLine
UDiffSynch 0.02 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.10 Voltage difference limit for synchronizing
in p.u of set voltage base value
FreqDiffMin 0.003 - 0.250 Hz 0.001 0.010 Minimum frequency difference limit for
synchronizing
FreqDiffMax 0.050 - 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.200 Maximum frequency difference limit for
synchronizing
CloseAngleMax 15.0 - 30.0 Deg 1.0 15.0 Maximum closing angle between bus
and line for synchronizing
FreqRateChange 0.000 - 0.500 Hz/s 0.001 0.300 Maximum allowed frequency rate of
change
tBreaker 0.000 - 1.000 s 0.001 0.080 Closing time of the breaker
tClosePulse 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Breaker closing pulse duration
tMaxSynch 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 600.00 Resets synch if no close has been made
before set time
tMinSynch 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Minimum time to accept synchronizing
conditions
OperationSC Off - - On Operation for synchronism check
On function Off/On
UHighBusSC 50.0 - 120.0 %UBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for synchrocheck
in % of UBaseBus
UHighLineSC 50.0 - 120.0 %UBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for synchrocheck
in % of UBaseLine
UDiffSC 0.02 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.15 Voltage difference limit for synchrocheck
in p.u of set voltage base value
FreqDiffA 0.003 - 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.010 Frequency difference limit between bus
and line Auto
FreqDiffM 0.003 - 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.010 Frequency difference limit between bus
and line Manual
PhaseDiffA 5.0 - 90.0 Deg 1.0 25.0 Phase angle difference limit between
bus and line Auto
PhaseDiffM 5.0 - 90.0 Deg 1.0 25.0 Phase angle difference limit between
bus and line Manual
tSCA 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay output for synchrocheck Auto
tSCM 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay output for synchrocheck
Manual
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 827

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

AutoEnerg Off - - DLLB Automatic energizing check mode
DLLB
DBLL
Both
ManEnerg Off - - Both Manual energizing check mode
DLLB
DBLL
Both
ManEnergDBDL Off - - Off Manual dead bus, dead line energizing
On
UHighBusEnerg 50.0 - 120.0 %UBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for energizing
check in % of UBaseBus
UHighLineEnerg 50.0 - 120.0 %UBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for energizing
check in % of UBaseLine
ULowBusEnerg 10.0 - 80.0 %UBB 1.0 40.0 Voltage low limit bus for energizing
check in % of UBaseBus
ULowLineEnerg 10.0 - 80.0 %UBL 1.0 40.0 Voltage low limit line for energizing
check in % of UBaseLine
UMaxEnerg 50.0 - 180.0 %UB 1.0 115.0 Maximum voltage for energizing in % of
UBase, Line and/or Bus
tAutoEnerg 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for automatic energizing
check
tManEnerg 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for manual energizing check

Table 489: SESRSYN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SelPhaseBus1 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for busbar1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
GblBaseSelBus 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups, Bus
GblBaseSelLine 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups, Line
SelPhaseBus2 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for busbar2
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
Table continues on next page

828 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SelPhaseLine1 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for line1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
SelPhaseLine2 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for line2
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
CBConfig No voltage sel. - - No voltage sel. Select CB configuration
Double bus
1 1/2 bus CB
1 1/2 bus alt. CB
Tie CB

Table 490: SESRSYN Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PhaseShift -180 - 180 Deg 1 0 Additional phase angle for selected line
voltage

15.1.6 Monitored data

PID-6724-MONITOREDDATA v1

Table 491: SESRSYN Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UDIFFME REAL - - Calculated difference of
voltage in p.u of set
voltage base value
FRDIFFME REAL - Hz Calculated difference of
frequency
PHDIFFME REAL - deg Calculated difference of
phase angle
UBUS REAL - kV Bus voltage
ULINE REAL - kV Line voltage

15.1.7 Operation principle

15.1.7.1 Basic functionality M14832-3 v8

The synchrocheck feature measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and
compares them to set limits. The output for closing operation is given when all
measured quantities are simultaneously within their set limits.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 829

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

The energizing check feature measures the bus and line voltages and compares
them to both high and low threshold detectors. The output is given only when the
actual measured quantities match the set conditions.

The synchronizing feature measures the conditions across the circuit breaker, and
also determines the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the circuit
breaker, from the measured slip frequency. The output is given only when all
measured conditions are simultaneously within their set limits. The closing of the
output is timed to give closure at the optimal time including the time needed for the
circuit breaker and the closing circuit operation.

The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are
measured in the IED centrally and are available for the SESRSYN function for
evaluation. By setting the phases used for SESRSYN, with the settings
SelPhaseBus1, SelPhaseBus2, SelPhaseLine1 and SelPhaseLine2, a compensation
is made automatically for the voltage amplitude difference and the phase angle
difference caused if different setting values are selected for both sides of the
breaker. If needed, an additional phase angle adjustment can be done for selected
line voltage with the PhaseShift setting.

For double bus single circuit breaker and 1½ circuit breaker arrangements, the
SESRSYN function blocks have the capability to make the necessary voltage
selection. For double bus single circuit breaker arrangements, selection of the
correct voltage is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors. For 1½
circuit breaker arrangements, correct voltage selection is made using auxiliary
contacts of the bus disconnectors as well as the circuit breakers.

The internal logic for each function block as well as, the input and outputs, and the
setting parameters with default setting and setting ranges is described in this
document. For application related information, please refer to the application
manual.

15.1.7.2 Logic diagrams IP14739-1 v1

M14833-3 v5

The logic diagrams that follow illustrate the main principles of the SESRSYN
function components such as Synchrocheck, Synchronizing, Energizing check and
Voltage selection, and are intended to simplify the understanding of the function.

Synchrocheck M14834-3 v15

When the function is set to OperationSC = On, the measuring will start.

The function will compare the bus and line voltage values with the set values for
UHighBusSC and UHighLineSC.

If both sides are higher than the set values, the measured values are compared with
the set values for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage difference:
FreqDiffA, FreqDiffM, PhaseDiffA, PhaseDiffM and UDiffSC. If additional phase
angle adjustment is done with the PhaseShift setting, the adjustment factor is
deducted from the line voltage before the comparison of the phase angle values.

830 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The
frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than ±5Hz. The
frequency difference between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured
and may not exceed the set value FreqDiff.

Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are
available and used for the manual closing and autoreclose functions respectively, as
required.

The inputs BLOCK and BLKSC are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function and selective block of the Synchrocheck function respectively.
Input TSTSC will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are
connected to a separate test output.

The outputs MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured
conditions match the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can
be delayed independently for MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK conditions.

A number of outputs are available as information about fulfilled checking

conditions. UOKSC shows that the voltages are high, UDIFFSC, FRDIFFA,
FRDIFFM, PHDIFFA, PHDIFFM shows when the voltage difference, frequency
difference and phase angle difference are out of limits.

Output INADVCLS, inadvertent circuit breaker closing, indicates that the circuit
breaker has been closed at wrong phase angle by mistake. The output is activated,
if the voltage conditions are fulfilled at the same time the phase angle difference
between bus and line is suddenly changed from being larger than 60 degrees to
smaller than 5 degrees.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 831

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

Note! Similar logic for Manual Synchrocheck.

OperationSC = On
AND TSTAUTSY
AND

invalidSelection AND
OR AUTOSYOK
AND
0-60 s
AND t
tSCA

UDiffSC 50 ms
AND t
UHighBusSC
UOKSC
AND
UHighLineSC
UDIFFSC
1

1
FRDIFFA
FreqDiffA

1
PHDIFFA
PhaseDiffA

UDIFFME
voltageDifferenceValue
FRDIFFME
frequencyDifferenceValue
PHDIFFME
phaseAngleDifferenceValue

32 ms 100 ms
AND t INADVCLS
PhDiff > 60° AND

PhDiff < 5°

IEC07000114-6-en.vsdx

IEC07000114 V6 EN-US

Figure 414: Simplified logic diagram for the auto synchrocheck function

Synchronizing SEMOD171603-4 v12

When the function is set to OperationSynch = On the measuring will be performed.

The function will compare the values for the bus and line voltage with the set
values for UHighBusSynch and UHighLineSynch, which is a supervision that the
voltages are both live. Also the voltage difference is checked to be smaller than the
set value for UDiffSynch, which is a p.u value of set voltage base values. If both
sides are higher than the set values and the voltage difference between bus and line
is acceptable, the measured values are compared with the set values for acceptable
frequency FreqDiffMax and FreqDiffMin, rate of change of frequency
FreqRateChange and phase angle CloseAngleMax.

The measured frequencies between the settings for the maximum and minimum
frequency will initiate the measuring and the evaluation of the angle change to
allow operation to be sent at the right moment including the set tBreaker time. The

832 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

calculation of the operation pulse sent in advance is using the measured

SlipFrequency and the set tBreaker time. To prevent incorrect closing pulses, a
maximum closing angle between bus and line is set with CloseAngleMax. Table
492 below shows the maximum settable value for tBreaker when CloseAngleMax
is set to 15 or 30 degrees, at different allowed slip frequencies for synchronizing.
To minimize the moment stress when synchronizing near a power station, a
narrower limit for CloseAngleMax needs to be used.
Table 492: Dependencies between tBreaker and SlipFrequency with different CloseAngleMax
values
tBreaker [s] (max settable value) tBreaker [s] (max settable value) SlipFrequency [Hz]
with CloseAngleMax = 15 degrees with CloseAngleMax = 30 degrees (BusFrequency -
[default value] [max value] LineFrequency)
0.040 0.080 1.000
0.050 0.100 0.800
0.080 0.160 0.500
0.200 0.400 0.200
0.400 0.810 0.100
1.000 0.080
0.800 0.050
1.000 0.040

At operation the SYNOK output will be activated with a pulse tClosePulse and the
function resets. The function will also reset if the synchronizing conditions are not
fulfilled within the set tMaxSynch time. This prevents that the function is, by
mistake, maintained in operation for a long time, waiting for conditions to be
fulfilled.

The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function and block of the Synchronizing function respectively.
TSTSYNCH will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are
connected to a separate output.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 833

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

OperationSynch=On

TSTSYNCH

STARTSYN

invalidSelection
SYNPROGR
AND
BLOCK AND
S
BLKSYNCH OR
R

UDiffSynch
50 ms SYNOK
AND
UHighBusSynch AND t

UHighLineSynch OR

FreqDiffMax TSTSYNOK
AND
FreqDiffMin

tClosePulse
FreqRateChange
AND

fBus&fLine ± 5Hz
tMaxSynch
CloseAngleMax AND
SYNFAIL

PhaseDiff=Close pulse in advance

FreqDiff
Close pulse
in advance
tBreaker

=IEC06000636=5=en=Original.vsd
IEC06000636 V5 EN-US

Figure 415: Simplified logic diagram for the synchronizing function

Energizing check M14835-3 v12

Voltage values are measured in the IED and are available for evaluation by the
Energizing check function.

The function measures voltages on the busbar and the line to verify whether they
are live or dead. This is done by comparing with the set values UHighBusEnerg
and ULowBusEnerg for bus energizing and UHighLineEnerg and ULowLineEnerg
for line energizing.

The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The
frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz.

The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the
Automatic functions respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs
AUTOENOK and MANENOK respectively will be activated if the fuse
supervision conditions are fulfilled. The output signal can be delayed
independently for MANENOK and AUTOENOK conditions. The Energizing
direction can also be selected by an integer input AENMODE respective
MENMODE, which for example, can be connected to a Binary to Integer function

834 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

block (B16I). Integers supplied shall be 1=Off, 2=DLLB, 3=DBLL and 4= Both.
Not connected input will mean that the setting is done from Parameter Setting tool.
The active position can be read on outputs MODEAEN resp MODEMEN. The
modes are 0=OFF, 1=DLLB, 2=DBLL and 3=Both.

The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function respective block of the Energizing check function.
TSTENERG will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are
connected to a separate test output.

manEnergOpenBays
MANENOK
OR

TSTENERG

BLKENERG
OR
BLOCK

selectedFuseOK

UHighBusEnerg
DLLB tManEnerg
AND
OR t
AND
OR
ULowLineEnerg AND

ManEnerg BOTH

ULowBusEnerg
DBLL
AND

UHighLineEnerg

TSTENOK
ManEnergDBDL AND AND

UMaxEnerg
fBus and fLine ±5 Hz

IEC14000031-1-en.vsd
IEC14000031 V1 EN-US

Figure 416: Manual energizing

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 835

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

TSTENERG

BLKENERG
OR
BLOCK

selectedFuseOK

UHighBusEnerg
DLLB tAutoEnerg
AND
OR t
AND OR
AUTOENOK
ULowLineEnerg AND

AutoEnerg BOTH

ULowBusEnerg
DBLL
AND

UHighLineEnerg

TSTENOK
UMaxEnerg AND

fBus and fLine ±5 Hz

IEC14000030-1-en.vsd
IEC14000030 V1 EN-US

Figure 417: Automatic energizing

BLKENERG
BLOCK OR manEnergOpenBays
AND

ManEnerg

1½ bus CB
CBConfig AND

B1QOPEN
LN1QOPEN AND
OR
B1QCLD
B2QOPEN
AND

LN2QOPEN

1½ bus alt. CB AND OR

AND
OR

B2QCLD
AND

Tie CB
AND
AND
OR

AND

IEC14000032-1-en.vsd
IEC14000032 V1 EN-US

Figure 418: Open bays

836 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Fuse failure supervision M14837-3 v11

External fuse failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are
connected to binary inputs that are configured to the inputs of SESRSYN function
in the IED. Alternatively, the internal signals from fuse failure supervision can be
used when available. There are two alternative connection possibilities. Inputs
labelled OK must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage
circuit is healthy. Inputs labelled FF must be connected if the available contact
indicates that the voltage circuit is faulty.

The UB1OK/UB2OK and UB1FF/UB2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage
and the ULN1OK/ULN2OK and ULN1FF/ULN2FF inputs are related to the line
voltage. Configure them to the binary input or function outputs that indicate the
status of the external fuse failure of the busbar and line voltages. In the event of a
fuse failure, the energizing check function is blocked. The synchronizing and the
synchrocheck function requires full voltage on both sides, thus no blocking at fuse
failure is needed.

Voltage selection M14836-3 v9

The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage

transformers for the different arrangements is a basic part of the SESRSYN
function and determines the voltages fed to the Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and
Energizing check functions. This includes the selection of the appropriate Line and
Bus voltages and MCB supervision.

The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig.

If No voltage sel. is set the voltages used will be U-Line1 and U-Bus1. This setting
is also used in the case when external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure
supervision for the used inputs must also be connected.

The voltage selection function, selected voltages, and fuse conditions are used for
the Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizing check inputs.

For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type
contacts to supply Disconnector Open and Closed positions but, it is also possible
to use an inverter for one of the positions.

If breaker or disconnector positions not are available for deciding if energizing is

allowed, it is considered to be allowed to manually energize. This is only allowed
for manual energizing in 1½ breaker and Tie breaker arrangements. Manual
energization of a completely open diameter in 1 1/2 CB switchgear is allowed by
internal logic.

Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double busbars M14838-3 v9

The setting CBConfig selected for Double Bus activates the voltage selection for
single CB and double busbars. This function uses the binary input from the
disconnectors auxiliary contacts B1QOPEN-B1QCLD for Bus 1, and B2QOPEN-
B2QCLD for Bus 2 to select between bus 1 and bus 2 voltages. If the disconnector
connected to bus 1 is closed and the disconnector connected to bus 2 is opened the

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 837

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

bus 1 voltage is used. All other combinations use the bus 2 voltage. The outputs
B1SEL and B2SEL respectively indicate the selected Bus voltage.

The function checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2 and line voltage
transformers. Inputs UB1OK-UB1FF supervise the MCB for Bus 1 and UB2OK-
UB2FF supervises the MCB for Bus 2. ULN1OK and ULN1FF supervises the
MCB for the Line voltage transformer. The inputs fail (FF) or healthy (OK) can
alternatively be used dependent on the available signal. If a VT failure is detected
in the selected voltage source an output signal USELFAIL is set. This output signal
is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a VT failure. This output as well as
the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function logic
diagram is shown in figure 419.

B1QOPEN
B1SEL
B1QCLD AND

B2QOPEN B2SEL
AND
1
B2QCLD
invalidSelection
AND

bus1Voltage busVoltage

bus2Voltage

UB1OK AND
UB1FF OR
OR selectedFuseOK
AND
UB2OK AND
UB2FF OR USELFAIL
AND

ULN1OK
ULN1FF OR

BLOCK

en05000779-2.vsd
IEC05000779 V2 EN-US

Figure 419: Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit breaker with double busbars

Voltage selection for a 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement M14839-3 v8

Note that with 1½ breaker schemes three Synchrocheck functions must be used for
the complete diameter. Below, the scheme for one Bus breaker and the Tie breaker
is described.

838 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

With the setting parameter CBConfig the selection of actual CB location in the 1
1/2 circuit breaker switchgear is done. The settings are: 1 1/2 Bus CB, 1 1/2 alt.
Bus CB or Tie CB.

This voltage selection function uses the binary inputs from the disconnectors and
circuit breakers auxiliary contacts to select the right voltage for the SESRSYN
function. For the bus circuit breaker one side of the circuit breaker is connected to
the busbar and the other side is connected either to line 1, line 2 or the other busbar
depending on the best selection of voltage circuit.

Inputs LN1QOPEN-LN1QCLD, B1QOPEN-B1QCLD, B2QOPEN-B2QCLD,

LN2QOPEN-LN2QCLD are inputs for the position of the Line disconnectors
respectively the Bus and Tie breakers. The outputs LN1SEL, LN2SEL and B2SEL
will give indication of the selected Line voltage as a reference to the fixed Bus 1
voltage, which indicates B1SEL.

The fuse supervision is connected to ULN1OK-ULN1FF, ULN2OK-ULN2FF and

with alternative Healthy or Failing fuse signals depending on what is available
from each fuse (MCB).

The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 voltage on one side and
the other side is connected either to bus 2 or line 2 voltage. Four different output
combinations are possible, bus to bus, bus to line, line to bus and line to line.

• The line 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is closed.

• The bus 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is open and the bus 1
circuit breaker is closed.
• The line 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is closed.
• The bus 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is open and the bus 2
circuit breaker is closed.

The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2, line 1 and line 2.
If a VT failure is detected in the selected voltage an output signal USELFAIL is
set. This output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a MCB trip.
This output as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK.
The function block diagram for the voltage selection of a bus circuit breaker is
shown in figure 420 and for the tie circuit breaker in figure 421.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 839

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

LN1QOPEN
AND
LN1SEL
LN1QCLD

B1QOPEN
LN2SEL
B1QCLD AND AND
B2SEL
OR
LN2QOPEN
AND invalidSelection
LN2QCLD AND
AND
B2QOPEN
B2QCLD AND

line1Voltage lineVoltage

line2Voltage

bus2Voltage

UB1OK
UB1FF OR

OR selectedFuseOK
UB2OK AND
AND
UB2FF OR

USELFAIL
ULN1OK AND
AND
ULN1FF OR

ULN2OK
AND
ULN2FF OR

BLOCK

en05000780-2.vsd

IEC05000780 V2 EN-US

Figure 420: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a 1 1/2
breaker arrangement

840 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

LN1QOPEN
AND
LN1SEL
LN1QCLD
B1SEL
1

B1QOPEN AND
AND
B1QCLD AND

line1Voltage busVoltage

bus1Voltage
LN2QOPEN
LN2SEL
LN2QCLD AND
B2SEL
1
invalidSelection
OR
B2QOPEN AND
AND
B2QCLD AND

line2Voltage lineVoltage

bus2Voltage

UB1OK AND
UB1FF OR

OR selectedFuseOK
UB2OK AND
AND
UB2FF OR

USELFAIL
ULN1OK AND
AND
ULN1FF OR

ULN2OK
AND
ULN2FF OR

BLOCK

en05000781-2.vsd

IEC05000781 V2 EN-US

Figure 421: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in 1 1/2
breaker arrangement.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 841

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

15.1.8 Technical data

M12359-1 v15

Table 493: SESRSYN technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Phase shift, jline - jbus (-180 to 180) degrees -

Voltage high limit for (50.0-120.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

synchronizing and ±0.5% of U at U > Ur
synchrocheck
Reset ratio, synchrocheck > 95% -
Frequency difference limit (0.003-1.000) Hz ±2.5 mHz
between bus and line for
synchrocheck
Phase angle difference limit (5.0-90.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees
between bus and line for
synchrocheck
Voltage difference limit (0.02-0.5) p.u ±0.5% of Ur
between bus and line for
synchronizing and
synchrocheck
Time delay output for (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
synchrocheck when angle greater
difference between bus and
line jumps from “PhaseDiff”
+ 2 degrees to “PhaseDiff” -
2 degrees
Frequency difference (0.003-0.250) Hz ±2.5 mHz
minimum limit for
synchronizing
Frequency difference (0.050-1.000) Hz ±2.5 mHz
maximum limit for
synchronizing
Maximum allowed frequency (0.000-0.500) Hz/s ±10.0 mHz/s
rate of change
Maximum closing angle (15-30) degrees ±2.0 degrees
between bus and line for
synchronizing
Breaker closing pulse (0.050-1.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
duration greater
tMaxSynch, which resets (0.000-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
synchronizing function if no greater
close has been made before
set time
Minimum time to accept (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
synchronizing conditions greater
Voltage high limit for (50.0-120.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
energizing check ±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Reset ratio, voltage high limit > 95% -

Voltage low limit for (10.0-80.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
energizing check
Reset ratio, voltage low limit < 105% -
Table continues on next page

842 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Function Range or value Accuracy

Maximum voltage for (50.0-180.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
energizing ±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Time delay for energizing (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever is

check when voltage jumps greater
from 0 to 90% of Urated
Operate time for Min. = 15 ms –
synchrocheck function when Max. = 30 ms
angle difference between
bus and line jumps from
“PhaseDiff” + 2 degrees to
“PhaseDiff” - 2 degrees
Operate time for energizing Min. = 70 ms –
function when voltage jumps Max. = 90 ms
from 0 to 90% of Urated

15.2 Interlocking IP15572-1 v2

15.2.1 Functionality M15106-3 v7

The interlocking functionality blocks the possibility to operate high-voltage

switching devices, for instance when a disconnector is under load, in order to
prevent material damage and/or accidental human injury.

Each control IED has interlocking functions for different switchyard arrangements,
each handling the interlocking of one bay. The interlocking functionality in each
IED is not dependent on any central function. For the station-wide interlocking, the
IEDs communicate via the station bus or by using hard wired binary inputs/outputs.

The interlocking conditions depend on the circuit configuration and status of the
system at any given time.

15.2.2 Operation principle M13528-4 v7

The interlocking function consists of software modules located in each control

IED. The function is distributed and not dependent on any central function.
Communication between modules in different bays is performed via the station
bus.

The reservation function (see section "Functionality") is used to ensure that HV

apparatuses that might affect the interlock are blocked during the time gap, which
arises between position updates. This can be done by means of the communication
system, reserving all HV apparatuses that might influence the interlocking
condition of the intended operation. The reservation is maintained until the
operation is performed.

After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has complete data
on the status of all apparatuses in the switchyard that are affected by the selection.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 843

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

Other operators cannot interfere with the reserved apparatus or the status of
switching devices that may affect it.

The open or closed positions of the HV apparatuses are inputs to software modules
distributed in the control IEDs. Each module contains the interlocking logic for a
bay. The interlocking logic in a module is different, depending on the bay function
and the switchyard arrangements, that is, double-breaker or 1 1/2 breaker bays have
different modules. Specific interlocking conditions and connections between
standard interlocking modules are performed with an engineering tool. Bay-level
interlocking signals can include the following kind of information:

• Positions of HV apparatuses (sometimes per phase)

• Valid positions (if evaluated in the control module)
• External release (to add special conditions for release)
• Line voltage (to block operation of line earthing switch)
• Output signals to release the HV apparatus

The interlocking module is connected to the surrounding functions within a bay as

shown in figure 422.

Apparatus control
Interlocking
modules
modules in
SCILO SCSWI
other bays SXSWI

Apparatus control
modules
Interlocking SCILO SCSWI SXCBR
module

Apparatus control
modules
en04000526.vsd SCILO SCSWI SXSWI

IEC04000526 V1 EN-US

Figure 422: Interlocking module on bay level

Bays communicate via the station bus and can convey information regarding the
following:

• Unearthed busbars
• Busbars connected together
• Other bays connected to a busbar
• Received data from other bays is valid

Figure 423 illustrates the data exchange principle.

844 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Station bus

Bay 1 Bay n Bus coupler

Disc QB1 and QB2 closed Disc QB1 and QB2 closed WA1 unearthed
WA1 unearthed
WA1 and WA2 interconn

...
WA1 not earthed WA1 not earthed
WA2 not earthed WA2 not earthed WA1 and WA2 interconn
WA1 and WA2 interconn WA1 and WA2 interconn in other bay

..
WA1

WA2
QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2 QC1 QC2

QA1 QA1 QA1

QB9 QB9

en05000494.vsd
IEC05000494 V1 EN-US

Figure 423: Data exchange between interlocking modules

When invalid data such as intermediate position, loss of a control IED, or input
board error are used as conditions for the interlocking condition in a bay, a release
for execution of the function will not be given.

On the local HMI an override function exists, which can be used to bypass the
interlocking function in cases where not all the data required for the condition is
valid.

For all interlocking modules these general rules apply:

• The interlocking conditions for opening or closing of disconnectors and

earthing switches are always identical.
• Earthing switches on the line feeder end, for example, rapid earthing switches,
are normally interlocked only with reference to the conditions in the bay where
they are located, not with reference to switches on the other side of the line. So
a line voltage indication may be included into line interlocking modules. If
there is no line voltage supervision within the bay, then the appropriate inputs
must be set to no voltage, and the operator must consider this when operating.
• Earthing switches can only be operated on isolated sections for example,
without load/voltage. Circuit breaker contacts cannot be used to isolate a
section, that is, the status of the circuit breaker is irrelevant as far as the
earthing switch operation is concerned.
• Disconnectors cannot break power current or connect different voltage
systems. Disconnectors in series with a circuit breaker can only be operated if
the circuit breaker is open, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel with other
closed connections. Other disconnectors can be operated if one side is
completely isolated, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel to other closed
connections, or if they are earthed on both sides.
• Circuit breaker closing is only interlocked against running disconnectors in its
bay or additionally in a transformer bay against the disconnectors and earthing

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 845

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

switch on the other side of the transformer, if there is no disconnector between

CB and transformer.
• Circuit breaker opening is only interlocked in a bus-coupler bay, if a bus bar
transfer is in progress.

To make the implementation of the interlocking function easier, a number of

standardized and tested software interlocking modules containing logic for the
interlocking conditions are available:

• Line for double and transfer busbars, ABC_LINE

• Bus for double and transfer busbars, ABC_BC
• Transformer bay for double busbars, AB_TRAFO
• Bus-section breaker for double busbars, A1A2_BS
• Bus-section disconnector for double busbars, A1A2_DC
• Busbar earthing switch, BB_ES
• Double CB Bay, DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE, DB_BUS_B
• 1 1/2-CB diameter, BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN, BH_LINE_B

The interlocking conditions can be altered, to meet the customer specific

requirements, by adding configurable logic by means of the graphical configuration
tool PCM600. The inputs Qx_EXy on the interlocking modules are used to add
these specific conditions.

The input signals EXDU_xx shall be set to true if there is no transmission error at
the transfer of information from other bays. Required signals with designations
ending in TR are intended for transfer to other bays.

15.2.3 Logical node for interlocking SCILO IP14138-1 v2

15.2.3.1 Identification
GUID-3EC5D7F1-FDA0-4F0E-9391-08D357689E0C v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logical node for interlocking SCILO - 3

15.2.3.2 Functionality M15048-3 v6

The Logical node for interlocking SCILO function is used to enable a switching
operation if the interlocking conditions permit. SCILO function itself does not
provide any interlocking functionality. The interlocking conditions are generated in
separate function blocks containing the interlocking logic.

846 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

15.2.3.3 Function block M15049-3 v6

SCILO
POSOPEN EN_OPEN
POSCLOSE EN_CLOSE
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN

IEC05000359-2-en.vsd
IEC05000359 V2 EN-US

Figure 424: SCILO function block

15.2.3.4 Signals
PID-3487-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 494: SCILO Input signals

Name Type Default Description
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open position of switch device
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Closed position of switch device
OPEN_EN BOOLEAN 0 Open operation from interlocking logic is enabled
CLOSE_EN BOOLEAN 0 Close operation from interlocking logic is enabled

PID-3487-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 495: SCILO Output signals

Name Type Description
EN_OPEN BOOLEAN Open operation at closed or interm. or bad pos. is
enabled
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN Close operation at open or interm. or bad pos. is
enabled

15.2.3.5 Logic diagram M15086-3 v6

The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if
the interlocking conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch has a
defined end position for example, open, then the appropriate enable signal (in this
case EN_OPEN) is false. The enable signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be
true at the same time only in the intermediate and bad position state and if they are
enabled by the interlocking function. The position inputs come from the logical
nodes Circuit breaker/Circuit switch (SXCBR/SXSWI) and the enable signals
come from the interlocking logic. The outputs are connected to the logical node
Switch controller (SCSWI). One instance per switching device is needed.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 847

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

POSOPEN SCILO
POSCLOSE =1 1
EN_OPEN
&
>1
&

OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN & EN_CLOSE
>1
&
en04000525.vsd

IEC04000525 V1 EN-US

Figure 425: SCILO function logic diagram

15.2.4 Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES IP14164-1 v4

15.2.4.1 Identification
GUID-F3CBAFDC-3723-429F-9183-45229A6F0A12 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES - 3

15.2.4.2 Functionality M15015-3 v7

The interlocking for busbar earthing switch (BB_ES) function is used for one
busbar earthing switch on any busbar parts according to figure 426.

QC

en04000504.vsd
IEC04000504 V1 EN-US

Figure 426: Switchyard layout BB_ES

15.2.4.3 Function block M15069-3 v6

BB_ES
QC_OP QCREL
QC_CL QCITL
BB_DC_OP BBESOPTR
VP_BB_DC BBESCLTR
EXDU_BB

IEC05000347-2-en.vsd
IEC05000347 V2 EN-US

Figure 427: BB_ES function block

848 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

15.2.4.4 Logic diagram M15103-3 v4

BB_ES
VP_BB_DC QCREL
BB_DC_OP QCITL
EXDU_BB & 1

QC_OP BBESOPTR
QC_CL BBESCLTR
en04000546.vsd

IEC04000546 V1 EN-US

15.2.4.5 Signals
PID-3494-INPUTSIGNALS v10

Table 496: BB_ES Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QC_OP BOOLEAN 0 Busbar earthing switch QC is in open position
QC_CL BOOLEAN 0 Busbar earthing switch QC is in closed position
BB_DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on this busbar part are open
VP_BB_DC BOOLEAN 0 Status for all disconnectors on this busbar part
are valid
EXDU_BB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays with disc on this
busbar part

PID-3494-OUTPUTSIGNALS v10

Table 497: BB_ES Output signals

Name Type Description
QCREL BOOLEAN Switching of QC is allowed
QCITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC is forbidden
BBESOPTR BOOLEAN QC on this busbar part is in open position
BBESCLTR BOOLEAN QC on this busbar part is in closed position

15.2.5 Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS IP14154-1 v2

15.2.5.1 Identification
GUID-29EF1F25-E10A-4C82-A6B7-FA246D9C6CD2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS - 3

15.2.5.2 Functionality M15110-3 v7

The interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS) function is used for one bus-
section circuit breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 428. The

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 849

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

function can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit
breaker.

WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

QC1 QB1 QB2 QC2

QA1

QC3 QC4

en04000516.vsd
A1A2_BS
IEC04000516 V1 EN-US

Figure 428: Switchyard layout A1A2_BS

15.2.5.3 Function block M13535-3 v6

A1A2_BS
QA1_OP QA1OPREL
QA1_CL QA1OPITL
QB1_OP QA1CLREL
QB1_CL QA1CLITL
QB2_OP QB1REL
QB2_CL QB1ITL
QC3_OP QB2REL
QC3_CL QB2ITL
QC4_OP QC3REL
QC4_CL QC3ITL
S1QC1_OP QC4REL
S1QC1_CL QC4ITL
S2QC2_OP S1S2OPTR
S2QC2_CL S1S2CLTR
BBTR_OP QB1OPTR
VP_BBTR QB1CLTR
EXDU_12 QB2OPTR
EXDU_ES QB2CLTR
QA1O_EX1 VPS1S2TR
QA1O_EX2 VPQB1TR
QA1O_EX3 VPQB2TR
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2

IEC05000348-2-en.vsd
IEC05000348 V2 EN-US

Figure 429: A1A2_BS function block

850 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

15.2.5.4 Logic diagram M15098-3 v4

A1A2_BS
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
S1QC1_OP
S1QC1_CL =1 VPS1QC1
S2QC2_OP
S2QC2_CL =1 VPS2QC2
VPQB1
QB1_OP QA1OPREL
& >1
QA1O_EX1 QA1OPITL
1
VPQB2
QB2_OP
&
QA1O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP
&
EXDU_12
QA1O_EX3

VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC3 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC4 QB1ITL
1
VPS1QC1
QA1_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
S1QC1_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1

VPQC3
VPS1QC1
&
QC3_CL
S1QC1_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2

en04000542.vsd

IEC04000542 V1 EN-US

VPQA1
VPQC3 QB2REL
VPQC4 & >1
QB2ITL
VPS2QC2 1
QA1_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
S2QC2_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQC4
VPS2QC2
&
QC4_CL
S2QC2_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2

VPQB1 QC3REL
VPQB2 QC3ITL
QB1_OP & 1
QC4REL
QB2_OP
QC4ITL
1

QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR

QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB1_OP S1S2OPTR
QB2_OP >1 S1S2CLTR
QA1_OP 1
VPQB1
VPS1S2TR
VPQB2 &
VPQA1
en04000543.vsd

IEC04000543 V1 EN-US

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 851

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

15.2.5.5 Signals
PID-3498-INPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 498: A1A2_BS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC4_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in open position
QC4_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in closed position
S1QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position
S1QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position
S2QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 on bus section 2 is in open position
S2QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 on bus section 2 is in closed position
BBTR_OP BOOLEAN 0 No busbar transfer is in progress
VP_BBTR BOOLEAN 0 Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar
transfer
EXDU_12 BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay connected to
busbar 1 and 2
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays containing earth. sw.
QC1 or QC2
QA1O_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2

PID-3498-OUTPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 499: A1A2_BS Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1OPREL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is allowed
QA1OPITL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is forbidden
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
Table continues on next page

852 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Name Type Description

QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QC4REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC4 is allowed
QC4ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC4 is forbidden
S1S2OPTR BOOLEAN No bus section connection between bus section 1
and 2
S1S2CLTR BOOLEAN Bus coupler connection between bus section 1
and 2 exists
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
VPS1S2TR BOOLEAN Status of the app. between bus section 1 and 2
are valid
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

15.2.6 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC IP14159-1 v2

15.2.6.1 Identification
GUID-0A0229EB-5ECD-405C-B706-6A54CBBDB49D v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Interlocking for bus-section A1A2_DC - 3
disconnector

15.2.6.2 Functionality M13544-3 v7

The interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC) function is used for one
bus-section disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 430.
A1A2_DC function can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section
disconnector.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 853

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

QB
WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

QC1 QC2

A1A2_DC en04000492.vsd

IEC04000492 V1 EN-US

Figure 430: Switchyard layout A1A2_DC

15.2.6.3 Function block M13541-3 v6

A1A2_DC
QB_OP QBOPREL
QB_CL QBOPITL
S1QC1_OP QBCLREL
S1QC1_CL QBCLITL
S2QC2_OP DCOPTR
S2QC2_CL DCCLTR
S1DC_OP VPDCTR
S2DC_OP
VPS1_DC
VPS2_DC
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BB
QBCL_EX1
QBCL_EX2
QBOP_EX1
QBOP_EX2
QBOP_EX3

IEC05000349-2-en.vsd
IEC05000349 V2 EN-US

Figure 431: A1A2_DC function block

854 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

15.2.6.4 Logic diagram M15099-3 v5

A1A2_DC
QB_OP
VPQB VPDCTR
QB_CL =1
DCOPTR
DCCLTR
S1QC1_OP
VPS1QC1
S1QC1_CL =1
S2QC2_OP
VPS2QC2
S2QC2_CL =1
VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
VPS1_DC & >1 QBOPREL
S1QC1_OP QBOPITL
1
S2QC2_OP
S1DC_OP
EXDU_ES

EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX1

VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
VPS2_DC &
S1QC1_OP
S2QC2_OP
S2DC_OP
EXDU_ES

EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX2

VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
S1QC1_CL &
S2QC2_CL
EXDU_ES
QBOP_EX3

en04000544.vsd

IEC04000544 V1 EN-US

IEC04000545 V1 EN-US

15.2.6.5 Signals
PID-3499-INPUTSIGNALS v10

Table 500: A1A2_DC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QB_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB is in open position
QB_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB is in closed position
S1QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position
S1QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 855

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

Name Type Default Description

S2QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 on bus section 2 is in open position
S2QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 on bus section 2 is in closed position
S1DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on bus section 1 are in open
position
S2DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on bus section 2 are in open
position
VPS1_DC BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 1
are valid
VPS2_DC BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 2
are valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays containing earth. sw.
QC1 or QC2
EXDU_BB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays with disc conn to
section 1 and 2
QBCL_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External close condition for section disconnector
QB
QBCL_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External close condition for section disconnector
QB
QBOP_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector
QB
QBOP_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector
QB
QBOP_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector
QB

PID-3499-OUTPUTSIGNALS v10

Table 501: A1A2_DC Output signals

Name Type Description
QBOPREL BOOLEAN Opening of QB is allowed
QBOPITL BOOLEAN Opening of QB is forbidden
QBCLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QB is allowed
QBCLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QB is forbidden
DCOPTR BOOLEAN The bus section disconnector is in open position
DCCLTR BOOLEAN The bus section disconnector is in closed position
VPDCTR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB is valid (open or closed)

15.2.7 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC IP14144-1 v2

15.2.7.1 Identification
GUID-8149EE0A-E2A4-431C-9D07-D1A0BD296743 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC - 3

856 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

15.2.7.2 Functionality M13555-3 v8

The interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) function is used for a bus-coupler
bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 432. The
function can also be used for a single busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or
double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1 QB2 QB20 QB7
QC1

QA1

QC2

en04000514.vsd
IEC04000514 V1 EN-US

Figure 432: Switchyard layout ABC_BC

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 857

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

15.2.7.3 Function block M13552-3 v6

ABC_BC
QA1_OP QA1OPREL
QA1_CL QA1OPITL
QB1_OP QA1CLREL
QB1_CL QA1CLITL
QB2_OP QB1REL
QB2_CL QB1ITL
QB7_OP QB2REL
QB7_CL QB2ITL
QB20_OP QB7REL
QB20_CL QB7ITL
QC1_OP QB20REL
QC1_CL QB20ITL
QC2_OP QC1REL
QC2_CL QC1ITL
QC11_OP QC2REL
QC11_CL QC2ITL
QC21_OP QB1OPTR
QC21_CL QB1CLTR
QC71_OP QB220OTR
QC71_CL QB220CTR
BBTR_OP QB7OPTR
BC_12_CL QB7CLTR
VP_BBTR QB12OPTR
VP_BC_12 QB12CLTR
EXDU_ES BC12OPTR
EXDU_12 BC12CLTR
EXDU_BC BC17OPTR
QA1O_EX1 BC17CLTR
QA1O_EX2 BC27OPTR
QA1O_EX3 BC27CLTR
QB1_EX1 VPQB1TR
QB1_EX2 VQB220TR
QB1_EX3 VPQB7TR
QB2_EX1 VPQB12TR
QB2_EX2 VPBC12TR
QB2_EX3 VPBC17TR
QB20_EX1 VPBC27TR
QB20_EX2
QB7_EX1
QB7_EX2

IEC05000350-2-en.vsd
IEC05000350 V2 EN-US

Figure 433: ABC_BC function block

858 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

15.2.7.4 Logic diagram M15095-3 v4

ABC_BC
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB20_OP
QB20_CL =1 VPQB20
QB7_OP
QB7_CL =1 VPQB7
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
QC71_OP
QC71_CL =1 VPQC71
VPQB1
QB1_OP QA1OPREL
& >1 QA1OPITL
QA1O_EX1 1
VPQB20
QB20_OP &
QA1O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP &
EXDU_12
QA1O_EX3
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 QA1CLITL
VPQB7 & 1
VPQB20
en04000533.vsd

IEC04000533 V1 EN-US

VPQA1
VPQB2 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB1ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2
VP_BC_12
&
QB2_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX3

en04000534.vsd

IEC04000534 V1 EN-US

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 859

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

VPQA1
VPQB1 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB2ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1
VP_BC_12
&
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC21
&
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3

en04000535.vsd

IEC04000535 V1 EN-US

VPQA1
VPQB20 QB7REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB7ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC71
QA1_OP
QB20_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC71
&
QC2_CL
QC71_CL
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX2
VPQA1
VPQB7 QB20REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB20ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB7_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB20_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC21
&
QC2_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB20_EX2

en04000536.vsd

IEC04000536 V1 EN-US

860 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB20 QC1ITL
& 1
VPQB7
QC2REL
VPQB2
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB20_OP
QB7_OP
QB2_OP
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB20_OP QB220OTR
QB2_OP & QB220CTR
VPQB20 1
VQB220TR
VPQB2 &
QB7_OP QB7OPTR
QB7_CL QB7CLTR
VPQB7 VPQB7TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
QA1_OP BC12OPTR
QB1_OP >1 BC12CLTR
QB20_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC12TR
VPQB1 &
VPQB20
QA1_OP BC17OPTR
QB1_OP >1 BC17CLTR
QB7_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC17TR
VPQB1 &
VPQB7
QA1_OP BC27OPTR
QB2_OP >1 BC27CLTR
QB7_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC27TR
VPQB2 &
VPQB7
en04000537.vsd

IEC04000537 V1 EN-US

15.2.7.5 Signals
PID-3500-INPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 502: ABC_BC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QB7_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in open position
QB7_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in closed position
QB20_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB20 is in open position
QB20_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB20 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open
position
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 861

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

Name Type Default Description

QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed
position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open
position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed
position
QC71_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in open
position
QC71_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in closed
position
BBTR_OP BOOLEAN 0 No busbar transfer is in progress
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA1 and WA2
VP_BBTR BOOLEAN 0 Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar
transfer
VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and
WA2 are valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay containing earthing
switches
EXDU_12 BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay connected to
WA1/WA2 busbars
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any other bus coupler
bay
QA1O_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB20_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB20
QB20_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB20
QB7_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7

PID-3500-OUTPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 503: ABC_BC Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1OPREL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is allowed
QA1OPITL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is forbidden
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
Table continues on next page

862 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Name Type Description

QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QB7REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB7 is allowed
QB7ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB7 is forbidden
QB20REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB20 is allowed
QB20ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB20 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
QB220OTR BOOLEAN QB2 and QB20 are in open position
QB220CTR BOOLEAN QB2 or QB20 or both are not in open position
QB7OPTR BOOLEAN QB7 is in open position
QB7CLTR BOOLEAN QB7 is in closed position
QB12OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 and QB2 are not in open position
BC12OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between
WA1 and WA2
BC12CLTR BOOLEAN Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between
WA1 and WA2
BC17OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between
WA1 and WA7
BC17CLTR BOOLEAN Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between
WA1 and WA7
BC27OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between
WA2 and WA7
BC27CLTR BOOLEAN Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between
WA2 and WA7
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VQB220TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 and QB20 are valid (open
or closed)
VPQB7TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB7 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB12TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or
closed)
VPBC12TR BOOLEAN Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and
WA2 are valid
VPBC17TR BOOLEAN Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and
WA7 are valid
VPBC27TR BOOLEAN Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and
WA7 are valid

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 863

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

15.2.8 Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB BH IP14173-1 v3

15.2.8.1 Identification
GUID-03F1A3BB-4A1E-49E8-88C6-10B3876F64DA v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter BH_CONN - 3
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter BH_LINE_A - 3
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter BH_LINE_B - 3

15.2.8.2 Functionality M13570-3 v6

The interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter (BH_CONN, BH_LINE_A,

BH_LINE_B) functions are used for lines connected to a 1 1/2 breaker diameter
according to figure 434.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1 QC1

QA1 QA1

QC2 QC2

QB6 QB6

QC3 QC3
BH_LINE_A BH_LINE_B

QB61 QA1 QB62

QB9 QB9
QC1 QC2
QC9 QC9

BH_CONN
en04000513.vsd

IEC04000513 V1 EN-US

Figure 434: Switchyard layout 1 1/2 breaker

M13570-7 v4

Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A and
BH_LINE_B are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN is the

864 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

connection between the two lines of the diameter in the 1 1/2 breaker switchyard
layout.

15.2.8.3 Function blocks IP14412-1 v1

M13574-3 v6

BH_LINE_A
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB6_OP QB6REL
QB6_CL QB6ITL
QB1_OP QB1REL
QB1_CL QB1ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QC3REL
QC3_CL QC3ITL
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9ITL
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9ITL
CQA1_OP QB1OPTR
CQA1_CL QB1CLTR
CQB61_OP VPQB1TR
CQB61_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7

IEC05000352-2-en.vsd
IEC05000352 V2 EN-US

Figure 435: BH_LINE_A function block

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 865

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

M13578-3 v6

BH_LINE_B
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB6_OP QB6REL
QB6_CL QB6ITL
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QC3REL
QC3_CL QC3ITL
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9ITL
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9ITL
CQA1_OP QB2OPTR
CQA1_CL QB2CLTR
CQB62_OP VPQB2TR
CQB62_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7

IEC05000353-2-en.vsd
IEC05000353 V2 EN-US

Figure 436: BH_LINE_B function block

M13582-3 v6

BH_CONN
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB61_OP QB61REL
QB61_CL QB61ITL
QB62_OP QB62REL
QB62_CL QB62ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
1QC3_OP
1QC3_CL
2QC3_OP
2QC3_CL
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2

IEC05000351-2-en.vsd
IEC05000351 V2 EN-US

Figure 437: BH_CONN function block

866 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

15.2.8.4 Logic diagrams IP14413-1 v1

M13577-1 v5

BH_CONN
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
1QC3_OP
1QC3_CL =1 VP1QC3
2QC3_OP
2QC3_CL =1 VP2QC3
VPQB61 QA1CLREL
VPQB62 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB61REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB61ITL
1
VP1QC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
1QC3_OP
QB61_EX1
VPQC1
VP1QC3
&
QC1_CL
1QC3_CL
QB61_EX2
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB62REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB62ITL
1
VP2QC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
2QC3_OP
QB62_EX1
VPQC2
VP2QC3
&
QC2_CL
2QC3_CL
QB62_EX2
VPQB61 QC1REL
VPQB62 QC1ITL
& 1
QB61_OP QC2REL
QB62_OP QC2ITL
1
en04000560.vsd

IEC04000560 V1 EN-US

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 867

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

BH_LINE_A
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB6_OP
QB6_CL =1 VPQB6
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
CQA1_OP
CQA1_CL =1 VPCQA1
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL =1 VPCQC1
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL =1 VPCQC2
CQB61_OP
CQB61_CL =1 VPCQB61
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB6 QA1CLITL
& 1
VPQB9
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB6REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB6ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB6_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB6_EX2
en04000554.vsd

IEC04000554 V1 EN-US

868 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

VPQA1
VPQC1 QB1REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB1ITL
1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1

VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2

VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB6 QC1ITL
QB1_OP & 1
QC2REL
QB6_OP QC2ITL
VPQB6 1
VPQB9 QC3REL
VPCQB61 &
QC3ITL
1
QB6_OP
QB9_OP
CQB61_OP
VPQA1 QB9REL
VPQB6 QB9ITL
VPQC9 & >1 1

VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPCQA1
VPCQB61
VPCQC1
VPCQC2
QB9_EX1
QB6_OP
QB9_EX2
>1
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP &
QB9_EX3

en04000555.vsd

IEC04000555 V1 EN-US

CQB61_OP
QB9_EX4
>1 & >1
CQA1_OP
CQC1_OP
CQC2_OP &
QB9_EX5
QC9_OP
QC3_OP
QB9_EX6
VPQC9
VPQC3
&
QC9_CL
QC3_CL
QB9_EX7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT QC9ITL
QB9_OP & 1

VOLT_OFF
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
en04000556.vsd

IEC04000556 V1 EN-US

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 869

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

BH_LINE_B
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QB6_OP
QB6_CL =1 VPQB6
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
CQA1_OP
CQA1_CL =1 VPCQA1
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL =1 VPCQC1
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL =1 VPCQC2
CQB62_OP
CQB62_CL =1 VPCQB62
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQB2 QA1CLREL
VPQB6 QA1CLITL
& 1
VPQB9
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB6REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB6ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB6_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB6_EX2
en04000557.vsd

IEC04000557 V1 EN-US

870 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

VPQA1
VPQC1 QB2REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB2ITL
1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1

VPQC1
VPQC21
&
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2

VPQB2 QC1REL
VPQB6 QC1ITL
QB2_OP & 1
QC2REL
QB6_OP QC2ITL
VPQB6 1
VPQB9 QC3REL
VPCQB62 &
QC3ITL
1
QB6_OP
QB9_OP
CQB62_OP
VPQA1 QB9REL
VPQB6 QB9ITL
VPQC9 & >1 1

VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPCQA1
VPCQB62
VPCQC1
VPCQC2
QB9_EX1
QB6_OP
QB9_EX2
>1
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP &
QB9_EX3

en04000558.vsd

IEC04000558 V1 EN-US

CQB62_OP
QB9_EX4
>1 & >1
CQA1_OP
CQC1_OP
CQC2_OP &
QB9_EX5
QC9_OP
QC3_OP
QB9_EX6
VPQC9
VPQC3
&
QC9_CL
QC3_CL
QB9_EX7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT QC9ITL
QB9_OP & 1

VOLT_OFF
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
en04000559.vsd

IEC04000559 V1 EN-US

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 871

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

15.2.8.5 Signals
PID-3593-INPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 504: BH_LINE_A Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB6_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in open position
QB6_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in close position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in closed position
CQA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB61 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open
position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed
position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse)
failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse)
failure
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing earthing
switch QC11
QB6_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB6_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
Table continues on next page

872 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Name Type Default Description

QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX5 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX6 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX7 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9

PID-3593-OUTPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 505: BH_LINE_A Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB6REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB6 is allowed
QB6ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB6 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)

PID-3594-INPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 506: BH_LINE_B Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB6_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in open position
QB6_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in close position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 873

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

Name Type Default Description

QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in closed position
CQA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB62 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB62 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open
position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed
position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse)
failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse)
failure
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing earthing
switch QC21
QB6_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB6_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX5 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX6 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX7 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9

874 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

PID-3594-OUTPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 507: BH_LINE_B Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB6REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB6 is allowed
QB6ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB6 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is forbidden
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

PID-3501-INPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 508: BH_CONN Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in open position
QB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in closed position
QB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in open position
QB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
1QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 1 is in open position
1QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 1 is in closed position
2QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 2 is in open position
2QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 2 is in closed position
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 875

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

Name Type Default Description

QB61_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB61_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB62_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB62
QB62_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB62

PID-3501-OUTPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 509: BH_CONN Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB61REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB61 is allowed
QB61ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB61 is forbidden
QB62REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB62 is allowed
QB62ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB62 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden

15.2.9 Interlocking for double CB bay DB IP14167-1 v2

15.2.9.1 Identification
GUID-D6D10255-2818-44E4-A44E-DF623161C486 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_BUS_A - 3
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_BUS_B - 3
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_LINE - 3

15.2.9.2 Functionality M13585-3 v10

The interlocking for a double busbar double circuit breaker bay including
DB_BUS_A, DB_BUS_B and DB_LINE functions are used for a line connected to
a double busbar arrangement according to figure 438.

876 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1 QC4

QA1 QA2

DB_BUS_A DB_BUS_B
QC2 QC5

QB61 QB62

QC3

QB9
DB_LINE

QC9

en04000518.vsd
IEC04000518 V1 EN-US

Figure 438: Switchyard layout double circuit breaker

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 877

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

15.2.9.3 Logic diagrams IP14633-1 v1

M15105-1 v4

DB_BUS_A
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
VPQB61 QA1CLREL
VPQB1 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB61REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB61ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB61_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB61_EX2
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB1ITL
1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1

VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2

en04000547.vsd

IEC04000547 V1 EN-US

VPQB61 QC1REL
VPQB1 QC1ITL
& 1
QB61_OP QC2REL
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
en04000548.vsd

IEC04000548 V1 EN-US

878 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

DB_BUS_B
QA2_OP
QA2_CL =1 VPQA2
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
QC5_OP
QC5_CL =1 VPQC5
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VPQB62 QA2CLREL
VPQB2 & QA2CLITL
1
VPQA2
VPQC4 QB62REL
& >1
VPQC5 QB62ITL
1
VPQC3
QA2_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC3_OP
QB62_EX1
VPQC5
VPQC3
&
QC5_CL
QC3_CL
QB62_EX2
VPQA2
VPQC4 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC5 QB2ITL
1
VPQC21
QA2_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1

VPQC4
VPQC21
&
QC4_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2

en04000552.vsd

IEC04000552 V1 EN-US

VPQB62 QC4REL
VPQB2 QC4ITL
& 1
QB62_OP QC5REL
QB2_OP QC5ITL
1
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
en04000553.vsd

IEC04000553 V1 EN-US

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 879

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

DB_LINE
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QA2_OP
QA2_CL =1 VPQA2
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
QC5_OP
QC5_CL =1 VPQC5
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQA1
VPQA2 QB9REL
VPQC1 & >1
QB9ITL
1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC9
QA1_OP
QA2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX1

& en04000549.vsd

IEC04000549 V1 EN-US

VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2 & >1
VPQC3
VPQC9
VPQB62
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC9_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_EX2
VPQA2
VPQB61
&
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC9
QA2_OP
QB61_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX3
VPQC3
VPQC9
&
VPQB61
VPQB62
QC3_OP
QC9_OP
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_EX4
VPQC3
VPQC9
&
QC3_CL
QC9_CL
QB9_EX5
en04000550.vsd

IEC04000550 V1 EN-US

880 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

VPQB61
VPQB62 QC3REL
VPQB9 &
QC3ITL
1
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_OP
VPQB9
VPVOLT QC9REL
QB9_OP &
QC9ITL
1
VOLT_OFF
en04000551.vsd

IEC04000551 V1 EN-US

15.2.9.4 Function block IP14391-1 v1

M13591-3 v6

DB_BUS_A
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB1_OP QB61REL
QB1_CL QB61ITL
QB61_OP QB1REL
QB61_CL QB1ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QB1OPTR
QC3_CL QB1CLTR
QC11_OP VPQB1TR
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2

IEC05000354-2-en.vsd
IEC05000354 V2 EN-US

Figure 439: DB_BUS_A function block

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 881

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

M15107-3 v6

DB_LINE
QA1_OP QB9REL
QA1_CL QB9ITL
QA2_OP QC3REL
QA2_CL QC3ITL
QB61_OP QC9REL
QB61_CL QC9ITL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QC4_OP
QC4_CL
QC5_OP
QC5_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5

IEC05000356-2-en.vsd
IEC05000356 V2 EN-US

Figure 440: DB_LINE function block

M13596-3 v6

DB_BUS_B
QA2_OP QA2CLREL
QA2_CL QA2CLITL
QB2_OP QB62REL
QB2_CL QB62ITL
QB62_OP QB2REL
QB62_CL QB2ITL
QC4_OP QC4REL
QC4_CL QC4ITL
QC5_OP QC5REL
QC5_CL QC5ITL
QC3_OP QB2OPTR
QC3_CL QB2CLTR
QC21_OP VPQB2TR
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2

IEC05000355-2-en.vsd
IEC05000355 V2 EN-US

Figure 441: DB_BUS_B function block

882 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

15.2.9.5 Signals
PID-3598-INPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 510: DB_BUS_A Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in open position
QB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open
position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed
position
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing earthing
switch QC11
QB61_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB61_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1

PID-3598-OUTPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 511: DB_BUS_A Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB61REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB61 is allowed
QB61ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB61 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 883

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

Name Type Description

QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)

PID-3601-INPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 512: DB_BUS_B Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA2 is in open position
QA2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA2 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in open position
QB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in closed position
QC4_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in open position
QC4_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in closed position
QC5_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC5 is in open position
QC5_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC5 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open
position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed
position
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing earthing
switch QC21
QB62_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB62
QB62_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB62
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2

PID-3601-OUTPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 513: DB_BUS_B Output signals

Name Type Description
QA2CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA2 is allowed
QA2CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA2 is forbidden
QB62REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB62 is allowed
QB62ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB62 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC4REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC4 is allowed
Table continues on next page

884 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Name Type Description

QC4ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC4 is forbidden
QC5REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC5 is allowed
QC5ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC5 is forbidden
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

PID-3508-INPUTSIGNALS v10

Table 514: DB_LINE Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QA2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA2 is in open position
QA2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA2 is in closed position
QB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in open position
QB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in open position
QB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in closed position
QC4_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in open position
QC4_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in closed position
QC5_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC5 is in open position
QC5_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC5 is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in closed position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse)
failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse)
failure
QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX5 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 885

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

PID-3508-OUTPUTSIGNALS v10

Table 515: DB_LINE Output signals

Name Type Description
QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is forbidden

15.2.10 Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE IP14139-1 v2

15.2.10.1 Identification
GUID-BEA26EA4-F402-4385-9238-1361E862D987 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE - 3

15.2.10.2 Functionality M13561-3 v8

The interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE) function is used for a line connected to
a double busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 442. The
function can also be used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar
or a single busbar arrangement with/without transfer busbar.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1 QB2 QB7
QC1

QA1

QC2

QB9
QC9

en04000478.vsd
IEC04000478 V1 EN-US

Figure 442: Switchyard layout ABC_LINE

886 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

15.2.10.3 Function block M15108-3 v6

ABC_LINE
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9ITL
QB1_OP QB1REL
QB1_CL QB1ITL
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2ITL
QB7_OP QB7REL
QB7_CL QB7ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9ITL
QC11_OP QB1OPTR
QC11_CL QB1CLTR
QC21_OP QB2OPTR
QC21_CL QB2CLTR
QC71_OP QB7OPTR
QC71_CL QB7CLTR
BB7_D_OP QB12OPTR
BC_12_CL QB12CLTR
BC_17_OP VPQB1TR
BC_17_CL VPQB2TR
BC_27_OP VPQB7TR
BC_27_CL VPQB12TR
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_12
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BPB
EXDU_BC
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3
QB7_EX1
QB7_EX2
QB7_EX3
QB7_EX4

IEC05000357-2-en.vsd
IEC05000357 V2 EN-US

Figure 443: ABC_LINE function block

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 887

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

15.2.10.4 Logic diagram M15089-3 v5

ABC_LINE
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QA1CLREL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1 QA1CLITL
& 1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QB7_OP
QB7_CL =1 VPQB7
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
QC71_OP
QC71_CL =1 VPQC71
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB9REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB9ITL
1
VPQC9
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC9
&
QC2_CL
QC9_CL
QB9_EX2

en04000527.vsd
IEC04000527 V1 EN-US

888 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

VPQA1 QB1REL
& ³1
VPQB2
VPQC1 1 QB1ITL
VPQC2
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES

QB1_EX1

VPQB2 &
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC

QB1_EX2

VPQC1 &
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES

QB1EX3

en04000528.vsd

IEC04000528 V1 EN-US

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 889

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

VPQA1 QB2REL
& ³1
VPQB1
VPQC1 1 QB2ITL
VPQC2
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES

QB2_EX1

VPQB1 &
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC

QB2_EX2

VPQC1 &
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES

QB2_EX3

en04000529.vsd

IEC04000529 V1 EN-US

890 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

VPQC9 QB7REL
& >1
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D 1 QB7ITL
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
QC9_OP
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB

BC_17_OP
BC_27_OP
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX1

VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQC9
&
VPQB9
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_17
QA1_CL
QB1_CL
QC9_OP
QB9_CL
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_CL

EXDU_BC

QB7_EX2

IEC04000530 V1 EN-US

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 891

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

VPQA1
VPQB2
& >1
VPQC9
VPQB9
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_27
QA1_CL
QB2_CL
QC9_OP
QB9_CL
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_27_CL
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX3
VPQC9
VPQC71
&
QC9_CL
QC71_CL
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX4
VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB2 QC1ITL
VPQB9 & 1
QC2REL
QB1_OP
QB2_OP QC2ITL
1
QB9_OP
VPQB7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT &
QC9ITL
QB7_OP 1
QB9_OP
VOLT_OFF
en04000531.vsd
IEC04000531 V1 EN-US

892 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB7_OP QB7OPTR
QB7_CL QB7CLTR
VPQB7 VPQB7TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
en04000532.vsd
IEC04000532 V1 EN-US

15.2.10.5 Signals
PID-3509-INPUTSIGNALS v10

Table 516: ABC_LINE Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QB7_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in open position
QB7_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open
position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed
position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open
position
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 893

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

Name Type Default Description

QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed
position
QC71_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in open
position
QC71_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in closed
position
BB7_D_OP BOOLEAN 0 Disconnectors on busbar WA7 except in the own
bay are open
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA1 and WA2
BC_17_OP BOOLEAN 0 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA1 and WA7
BC_17_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA1 and WA7
BC_27_OP BOOLEAN 0 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA2 and WA7
BC_27_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA2 and WA7
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse)
failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse)
failure
VP_BB7_D BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of the disconnectors on busbar
WA7 are valid
VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and
WA2 are valid
VP_BC_17 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and
WA7 are valid
VP_BC_27 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and
WA7 are valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay containing earthing
switches
EXDU_BPB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay with disconnectors
on WA7
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB7_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7

894 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

PID-3509-OUTPUTSIGNALS v10

Table 517: ABC_LINE Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QB7REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB7 is allowed
QB7ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB7 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
QB7OPTR BOOLEAN QB7 is in open position
QB7CLTR BOOLEAN QB7 is in closed position
QB12OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 and QB2 are not in open position
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB7TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB7 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB12TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or
closed)

15.2.11 Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO IP14149-1 v2

15.2.11.1 Identification
GUID-AD839CAA-531B-43BC-B508-39AED3D0A97D v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO - 3

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 895

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

15.2.11.2 Functionality M13567-3 v7

The interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO) function is used for a

transformer bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 444.
The function is used when there is no disconnector between circuit breaker and
transformer. Otherwise, the interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE) function can be
used. This function can also be used in single busbar arrangements.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1

QA1
AB_TRAFO
QC2

QC3

QA2
QA2 and QC4 are not
QC4 used in this interlocking

QB3 QB4

en04000515.vsd
IEC04000515 V1 EN-US

Figure 444: Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO

896 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

15.2.11.3 Function block M13565-3 v6

AB_TRAFO
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB1_OP QB1REL
QB1_CL QB1ITL
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QB3_OP QB1OPTR
QB3_CL QB1CLTR
QB4_OP QB2OPTR
QB4_CL QB2CLTR
QC3_OP QB12OPTR
QC3_CL QB12CLTR
QC11_OP VPQB1TR
QC11_CL VPQB2TR
QC21_OP VPQB12TR
QC21_CL
BC_12_CL
VP_BC_12
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BC
QA1_EX1
QA1_EX2
QA1_EX3
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3

IEC05000358-2-en.vsd
IEC05000358 V2 EN-US

Figure 445: AB_TRAFO function block

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 897

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

15.2.11.4 Logic diagram M15097-3 v4

AB_TRAFO
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QB3_OP
QB3_CL =1 VPQB3
QB4_OP
QB4_CL =1 VPQB4
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 QA1CLITL
VPQC1 & 1

VPQC2
VPQB3
VPQB4
VPQC3
QA1_EX2
QC3_OP
QA1_EX3
QC1_CL >1
QC2_CL
QC3_CL &
QA1_EX1

en04000538.vsd

IEC04000538 V1 EN-US

VPQA1
VPQB2 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB1ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC3
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2
VPQC3
&
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
QC3_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC2
&
VPQC3
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX3

en04000539.vsd

IEC04000539 V1 EN-US

898 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

VPQA1
VPQB1 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB2ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC3
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1
VPQC3
&
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
QC3_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC2
&
VPQC3
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3

en04000540.vsd

IEC04000540 V1 EN-US

VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB2 QC1ITL
& 1
VPQB3
QC2REL
VPQB4
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB2_OP
QB3_OP
QB4_OP
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
en04000541.vsd

IEC04000541 V1 EN-US

15.2.11.5 Signals
PID-3510-INPUTSIGNALS v10

Table 518: AB_TRAFO Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 899

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

Name Type Default Description

QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QB3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB3 is in open position
QB3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB3 is in closed position
QB4_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB4 is in open position
QB4_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB4 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA1 and WA2
VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and
WA2 are valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay containing earthing
switches
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
QA1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QA1
QA1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QA1
QA1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QA1
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2

PID-3510-OUTPUTSIGNALS v10

Table 519: AB_TRAFO Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
Table continues on next page

900 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Name Type Description

QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
QB12OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 and QB2 are not in open position
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB12TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or
closed)

15.2.12 Position evaluation POS_EVAL GUID-F20A8939-E91E-44F6-920C-083E5D3FCDFD v2

15.2.12.1 Identification
GUID-3C4B9379-C861-406C-9295-0309014D548E v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Position evaluation POS_EVAL - -

15.2.12.2 Functionality GUID-C3D07B40-FF01-45C5-A083-EED5643A5FCC v4

Position evaluation (POS_EVAL) function converts the input position data signal
POSITION, consisting of value, time and signal status, to binary signals
OPENPOS or CLOSEPOS.

The output signals are used by other functions in the interlocking scheme.

15.2.12.3 Function block GUID-B5EF4A28-9C9F-4558-8CD6-453FB480314B v2

POS_EVAL
POSITION OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS

IEC09000079_1_en.vsd
IEC09000079 V1 EN-US

Figure 446: POS_EVAL function block

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 901

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

15.2.12.4 Logic diagram GUID-F0EF8D38-031B-4A8E-BD7D-60314F5DCD59 v2

POS_EVAL
Position including quality POSITION OPENPOS
Open/close position of
CLOSEPOS switch device

IEC08000469-1-en.vsd
IEC08000469-1-EN V1 EN-US

Only the value, open/close, and status is used in this function. Time information is
not used.
Input position (Value) Signal quality Output OPENPOS Output CLOSEPOS
0 (Breaker Good 0 0
intermediate)
1 (Breaker open) Good 1 0
2 (Breaker closed) Good 0 1
3 (Breaker faulty) Good 0 0
Any Invalid 0 0
Any Oscillatory 0 0

15.2.12.5 Signals
PID-3555-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 520: POS_EVAL Input signals

Name Type Default Description
POSITION INTEGER 0 Position status including quality

PID-3555-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 521: POS_EVAL Output signals

Name Type Description
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Close position

15.3 Apparatus control APC IP14560-1 v2

15.3.1 Functionality M13444-3 v15

The apparatus control functions are used for control and supervision of circuit
breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches within a bay. Permission to operate
is given after evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking,
synchrocheck, operator place selection and external or internal blockings.

902 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Apparatus control features:

• Select-Execute principle to give high reliability
• Selection function to prevent simultaneous operation
• Selection and supervision of operator place
• Command supervision
• Block/deblock of operation
• Block/deblock of updating of position indications
• Substitution of position and quality indications
• Overriding of interlocking functions
• Overriding of synchrocheck
• Operation counter
• Suppression of mid position

Two types of command models can be used:

• Direct with normal security
• SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security

Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting
position is not supervised. Enhanced security means that the command is evaluated
with an additional supervision of the status value of the control object. The
command sequence with enhanced security is always terminated by a
CommandTermination service primitive and an AddCause telling if the command
was successful or if something went wrong.

Control operation can be performed from the local HMI with authority control if so
defined.

15.3.2 Operation principle M13423-4 v8

A bay can handle, for example a power line, a transformer, a reactor, or a capacitor
bank. The different primary apparatuses within the bay can be controlled via the
apparatus control functions directly by the operator or indirectly by automatic
sequences.

Because a primary apparatus can be allocated to many functions within a

Substation Automation system, the object-oriented approach with a function block
that handles the interaction and status of each process object ensures consistency in
the process information used by higher-level control functions.

Primary apparatuses such as breakers and disconnectors are controlled and

supervised by one function block (SCSWI) each. Because the number and type of
signals used for the control of a breaker or a disconnector are almost the same, the
same function block type is used to handle these two types of apparatuses.

The SCSWI function block is connected either to an SXCBR function block (for
circuit breakers) or to an SXSWI function block (for disconnectors and earthing

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 903

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

switches). The physical process in the switchyard is connected to these two

function blocks via binary inputs and outputs.

Four types of function blocks are available to cover most of the control and
supervision within the bay. These function blocks are interconnected to form a
control function reflecting the switchyard configuration. The total number used
depends on the switchyard configuration. These types are:

• Bay control QCBAY

• Switch controller SCSWI
• Circuit breaker SXCBR
• Circuit switch SXSWI

Another function block type for supervision and control is the XLNPROXY. It is
used for interfacing a switch with its primary representation in a breaker IED.
XLNPROXY facilitates a common interface with the SXCBR and SXSWI
functions towards the SCSWI function, especially for command response and error
handling.

The functions Local Remote (LOCREM) and Local Remote Control

(LOCREMCTRL), to handle the local/remote switch, and the functions Bay
reserve (QCRSV) and Reservation input (RESIN), for the reservation function, also
belong to the apparatus control function.

The principles of operation, function blocks, input and output signals and setting
parameters for all these functions are described below.

15.3.3 Error handling GUID-6C31D291-74E8-46A3-8FC2-D3959C2458A5 v6

Depending on the error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal
will be set with a value. Table 522 describes the cause values given on local HMI.
The translation to AddCause values specified in IEC 61850-8-1 is shown in Table
523. For IEC 61850-8-1 edition 2 only addcauses defined in the standard are used,
for edition 1 also a number of vendor specific causes are used. The values are
available in the command response to commands from IE C61850-8-1 clients. An
output L_CAUSE on the function block for Switch controller (SCSWI), Circuit
breaker (SXCBR) and Circuit switch (SXSWI) indicates the value of the cause
during the latest command if the function specific command evaluation has been
started. The causes that are not always reflected on the output L_CAUSE, with
description of the typical reason are listed in table 524.
Table 522: Values for "cause" signal
Cause Name Description Supported
number
0 None Control action successfully executed X
1 Not-supported Given for Cancel request with Direct Control in Ready X
state
2 Blocked-by- Not successful since one of the downstream Loc X
switching-hierarchy switches like in CSWI has the value TRUE
Table continues on next page

904 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Cause Name Description Supported

number
3 Select-failed Cancelled due to an unsuccessful selection (select X
service)
4 Invalid-position Control action is aborted due to invalid switch position X
(Pos in XCBR or XSWI)
5 Position-reached Switch is already in the intended position (Pos in X
XCBR or XSWI)
6 Parameter-change- Control action is blocked due to running parameter X
in-execution change
7 Step-limit Control action is blocked, because tap changer has X
reached the limit (EndPosR or EndPosL in YLTC)
8 Blocked-by-Mode Control action is blocked, because the LN (CSWI or X
XCBR/XSWI) is in a mode (Mod) which doesn’t allow
any switching
9 Blocked-by-process Control action is blocked due to some external event at X
process level that prevents a successful operation, for
example blocking indication (EEHealth in XCBR or
XSWI)
10 Blocked-by- Control action is blocked due to interlocking of X
interlocking switching devices (in CILO attribute
EnaOpn.stVal=”FALSE” or EnaCls.stVal=”FALSE”
11 Blocked-by- Control action with synchrocheck is aborted due to X
synchrocheck exceed of time limit and missing synchronism condition
12 Command-already- Control, select or cancel service is rejected, because X
in-execution control action is already running
13 Blocked-by-health Control action is blocked due to some internal event X
that prevents a successful operation (Health)
14 1-of-n-control Control action is blocked because another control X
action in a domain (for example, substation) is already
running (in any XCBR or XSWI of that domain, the
DPC.stSeld=”TRUE”)
15 Abortion-by-cancel Control action is aborted due to cancel service X
16 Time-limit-over Control action is terminated due to exceed of some X
time limit
17 Abortion-by-trip Control action is aborted due to a trip (PTRC with X
ACT.general=”TRUE”)
18 Object-not-selected Control action is rejected, because control object was X
not selected
19 Object-already- Select action is not executed because the addressed X
selected object is already selected
20 No-access-authority Control action is blocked due to lack of access X
authority
21 Ended-with- Control action executed but the end position has
overshoot overshoot
22 Abortion-due-to- Control action is aborted due to deviation between the
deviation command value and the measured value
23 Abortion-by- Control action is aborted due to the loss of connection
communication-loss with the client that issued the control
24 Blocked-by- Control action is blocked due to the data attribute X
command CmdBlk.stVal is TRUE
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 905

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

Cause Name Description Supported

number
26 Inconsistent- The parameters between successive control services X
parameters are not consistent, for example the ctlNum of Select
and Operate service are different
27 Locked-by-other- Another client has already reserved the object X
client
-22 Wrong-Ctl-model Command from client uses wrong control model X
-24 Blocked-for-open- Blocked for Open command X
cmd
-25 Blocked-for-close- Blocked for Close Command X
cmd
-30 Long-operation-time Operation time too long X
-31 Switch-not-start- Switch did not start moving X
moving
-32 Persistent- Switch stopped in intermediate state X
intermediate-state
-33 Switch-returned-to- Switch returned to the initial position X
init-pos
-34 Switch-in-bad-state Switch is in a bad position state X
-35 Not-expected-final- Switch did not reach the expected final position X
position

Table 523: Translation of cause values for IEC 61850 edition 2 and edition 1
Internal Cause AddCause in IEC 61850-8-1 Name
Number
Ed 2 Ed 1
0 25 0 None
1 1 1 Not-supported
2 2 2 Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy
3 3 3 Select-failed
4 4 4 Invalid-position
5 5 5 Position-reached
6 6 6 Parameter-change-in-execution
7 7 7 Step-limit
8 8 8 Blocked-by-Mode
9 9 9 Blocked-by-process
10 10 10 Blocked-by-interlocking
11 11 11 Blocked-by-synchrocheck
12 12 12 Command-already-in-execution
13 13 13 Blocked-by-health
14 14 14 1-of-n-control
15 15 1 Abortion-by-cancel
16 16 16 Time-limit-over
17 17 17 Abortion-by-trip
Table continues on next page

906 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Internal Cause AddCause in IEC 61850-8-1 Name

Number
Ed 2 Ed 1
18 18 18 Object-not-selected
19 19 3 Object-already-selected
20 20 3 No-access-authority
24 24 -23 Blocked-by-command
26 26 6 Inconsistent-parameters
27 27 12 Locked-by-other-client
-22 0 -22 Wrong-Ctl-model
-24 9 -24 Blocked-for-open-cmd
-25 9 -25 Blocked-for-close-cmd
-30 16 -30 Long-operation-time
-31 16 -31 Switch-not-start-moving
-32 4 -32 Persistent-intermediate-state
-33 22 -33 Switch-returned-to-init-pos
-34 4 -34 Switch-in-bad-state
-35 22 -35 Not-expected-final-position

Table 524: Cause values not reflected on the output L_CAUSE

Cause number Cause description Conditions
3 Select-failed Canceled due to an unsuccessful selection
(select service)
8 Blocked-by-Mode Control action is blocked because the LN
(CSWI) is in a mode (Mod) which doesn’t
allow any switching or does not match the
mode of the command.
12 Command-already-in-execution Control, select or cancel service is rejected
because control action is already running.
13 Blocked-by-health Control action is blocked due to some
internal event that prevents a successful
operation (Health).
16 Time-limit-over Control action is terminated due to exceed
of some time limit.
18 Object-not-selected Control action is rejected because control
object was not selected.
19 Object-already-selected Select action is not executed because the
addressed object is already selected.
20 No-access-authority Control action is blocked due to lack of
access authority.
26 Inconsistent-parameters The parameters between successive
control services are not consistent, for
example the ctlNum of Select and Operate
service are different.
27 Locked-by-other-client Another client has already reserved the
object.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 907

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

15.3.4 Bay control QCBAY IP15597-1 v2

15.3.4.1 Functionality M13447-3 v8

The Bay control (QCBAY) function is used together with Local remote and local
remote control functions to handle the selection of the operator place per bay.
QCBAY also provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different
apparatuses within the bay.

15.3.4.2 Function block M13469-3 v4

QCBAY
LR_OFF PSTO
LR_LOC UPD_BLKD
LR_REM CMD_BLKD
LR_VALID LOC
BL_UPD STA
BL_CMD REM
IEC10000048-3-en.vsdx
IEC10000048 V3 EN-US

Figure 447: QCBAY function block

15.3.4.3 Signals
PID-4086-INPUTSIGNALS v8

Table 525: QCBAY Input signals

Name Type Default Description
LR_OFF BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Off position
LR_LOC BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Local position
LR_REM BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Remote
position
LR_VALID BOOLEAN 0 Data representing the L/R switch position is valid
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the position updates
BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the command

PID-4086-OUTPUTSIGNALS v8

Table 526: QCBAY Output signals

Name Type Description
PSTO INTEGER Value for the operator place allocation
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position is blocked
CMD_BLKD BOOLEAN Function is blocked for commands
LOC BOOLEAN Local operation allowed
STA BOOLEAN Station operation allowed
REM BOOLEAN Remote operation allowed

908 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

15.3.4.4 Settings
PID-4086-SETTINGS v8

Table 527: QCBAY Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AllPSTOValid Priority - - Priority Override Priority of originators,
No priority commands from both local, station and
remote are allowed
RemoteIncStation No - - No Both Station and Remote control are
Yes allowed but not Local when local remote
switch is in remote

15.3.4.5 Operation principle

M13446-4 v7

The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) and
blocking conditions to other functions within the bay for example, switch control
functions and voltage control functions. The functionality of the Bay control
(QCBAY) function is mainly described by the LLN0 node in the IEC 61850-8-1
edition 2 standard, applied to one bay. In IEC 61850 edition 1 the functionality is
not described by the LLN0 node or any other node, therefore the Bay control
function is represented as a vendor specific node in edition 1.

Local panel switch M13446-7 v7

The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection. The
switch connected to this function can have three positions (remote/local/off). The
positions are here defined so that remote means that operation is allowed from
station and/or remote level and local means that operation is allowed from the IED
level. The local/remote switch is also on the control/protection IED itself, which
means that the position of the switch and its validity information are connected
internally, not via I/O boards. When the switch is mounted separately from the IED
the signals are connected to the function via I/O boards.

When the local panel switch (or LHMI selection, depending on the set source to
select this) is in Off position, all commands from remote and local level will be
ignored. If the position for the local/remote switch is not valid the PSTO output
will always be set to faulty state (3), which means no possibility to operate.

To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch,
the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL are needed and connected to
QCBAY.

Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) M13446-16 v9

The actual state of the operator place is presented by the value of the Permitted
Source To Operate, PSTO signal. The PSTO value is evaluated from the local/
remote switch position according to Table 528. In addition, there are two settings
and one command that affect the value of the PSTO signal.

If the setting AllPSTOValid is set to No Priority and the LR-switch position is in

Local or Remote state, the PSTO output is set to 5 (all), that is, it is permitted to

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 909

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

operate from local, station and remote level without any priority. When the external
panel switch is in Off position, the PSTO output shows the actual state of the
switch that is, 0. In this case, it is not possible to control anything. The LocSta
command value is forced to FALSE if AllPSTOValid is set to No priority.

If the setting RemoteIncStation is set to Yes and the LR-switch position is in

Remote state, the PSTO output is set to 2 (Station or Remote), that is, it is
permitted to operate from both station and remote level without any priority.

If the LR-switch position is in Remote state, and AllPSTOValid is set to Priority

and RemoteIncStation is set to No, the switching between station and remote level
control is done through the command LocSta. The command is accessible only
through the IEC 61850 Edition 2 protocol.
Table 528: PSTO values for different Local panel switch positions
Local panel AllPSTOValid RemoteInc LocSta.CtlVal PSTO LED indications Possible
switch positions (setting) Station (command) value on LHMI locations that
(setting) shall be able to
operate
0 = Off - - - 0 Remote and Not possible
Local Off to operate
1 = Local Priority - - 1 Remote Off, Local Panel
Local On
1 = Local No priority - - 5 Remote and Local, Station
Local On or Remote
level without
any priority
2 = Remote Priority No TRUE 6 Remote On, Station level
Local Off
2 = Remote Priority No FALSE 7 Remote On, Remote level
Local Off
2 = Remote Priority Yes - 2 Remote On, Station or
Local Off Remote level
2 = Remote No priority - - 5 Remote and Local, Station
Local On or Remote
level without
any priority
3 = Faulty - - - 3 Remote and Not possible
Local to operate
Flashing

Blockings M13446-50 v5

The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide
the possibility for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured
within a complete bay.

The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following:

910 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

• Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs
related to apparatus positions for all configured functions within the bay.
• Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all
configured functions within the bay.

The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level.
The password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have
been defined in the IED, otherwise the default authority level can handle the
control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the IED Users
tool in PCM600.

15.3.5 Local/Remote switch LOCREM IP16319-1 v3

M17086-3 v8

The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch are
connected via the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL to the Bay
control QCBAY function block. The parameter ControlMode in function block
LOCREM is set to choose if the switch signals are coming from the local HMI or
from an external hardware switch connected via binary inputs.

15.3.5.1 Function block M17088-3 v3

LOCREM
CTRLOFF OFF
LOCCTRL LOCAL
REMCTRL REMOTE
LHMICTRL VALID
IEC05000360-3-en.vsdx
IEC05000360 V3 EN-US

Figure 448: LOCREM function block

LOCREMCTRL
^PSTO1 HMICTR1
^PSTO2 HMICTR2
^PSTO3 HMICTR3
^PSTO4 HMICTR4
^PSTO5 HMICTR5
^PSTO6 HMICTR6
^PSTO7 HMICTR7
^PSTO8 HMICTR8
^PSTO9 HMICTR9
^PSTO10 HMICTR10
^PSTO11 HMICTR11
^PSTO12 HMICTR12
IEC05000361-3-en.vsdx
IEC05000361 V3 EN-US

Figure 449: LOCREMCTRL function block

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 911

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

15.3.5.2 Signals
PID-3944-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 529: LOCREM Input signals

Name Type Default Description
CTRLOFF BOOLEAN 0 Disable control
LOCCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Local in control
REMCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Remote in control
LHMICTRL INTEGER 0 LHMI control

PID-3944-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 530: LOCREM Output signals

Name Type Description
OFF BOOLEAN Control is disabled
LOCAL BOOLEAN Local control is activated
REMOTE BOOLEAN Remote control is activated
VALID BOOLEAN Outputs are valid

PID-3943-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 531: LOCREMCTRL Input signals

Name Type Default Description
PSTO1 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 1
PSTO2 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 2
PSTO3 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 3
PSTO4 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 4
PSTO5 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 5
PSTO6 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 6
PSTO7 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 7
PSTO8 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 8
PSTO9 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 9
PSTO10 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 10
PSTO11 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 11
PSTO12 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 12

PID-3943-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 532: LOCREMCTRL Output signals

Name Type Description
HMICTR1 INTEGER Bitmask output 1 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR2 INTEGER Bitmask output 2 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR3 INTEGER Bitmask output 3 to local remote LHMI input
Table continues on next page

912 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Name Type Description

HMICTR4 INTEGER Bitmask output 4 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR5 INTEGER Bitmask output 5 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR6 INTEGER Bitmask output 6 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR7 INTEGER Bitmask output 7 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR8 INTEGER Bitmask output 8 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR9 INTEGER Bitmask output 9 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR10 INTEGER Bitmask output 10 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR11 INTEGER Bitmask output 11 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR12 INTEGER Bitmask output 12 to local remote LHMI input

15.3.5.3 Settings
PID-3944-SETTINGS v7

Table 533: LOCREM Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ControlMode Internal LR-switch - - Internal LR-switch Control mode for internal/external LR-
External LR-switch switch

PID-3943-SETTINGS v2

15.3.5.4 Operation principle M17087-3 v8

The function block Local remote (LOCREM) handles the signals coming from the
local/remote switch. The connections are seen in Figure 450, where the inputs on
function block LOCREM are connected to binary inputs if an external switch is
used. When the local HMI is used, the inputs are not used. The switching between
external and local HMI source is done through the parameter ControlMode. The
outputs from the LOCREM function block control the output PSTO (Permitted
Source To Operate) on Bay control (QCBAY).

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 913

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

LOCREM QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_ OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_ VALID LOC
BL_ UPD STA
BL_ CMD REM

LOCREM QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_ OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_ VALID LOC
BL_ UPD STA
BL_ CMD REM

LOCREMCTRL
PSTO1 HMICTR1
PSTO2 HMICTR2
PSTO3 HMICTR3
PSTO4 HMICTR4
PSTO5 HMICTR5
PSTO6 HMICTR6
PSTO7 HMICTR7
PSTO8 HMICTR8
PSTO9 HMICTR9
PSTO 10 HMICTR 10
PSTO 11 HMICTR 11
PSTO 12 HMICTR 12

IEC10000052-1-en.vsd
IEC10000052 V2 EN-US

Figure 450: Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local HMI with two
bays and two screen pages

If the IED contains control functions for several bays, the local/remote position can
be different for the included bays. When the local HMI is used the position of the
local/remote switch can be different depending on which single line diagram screen
page that is presented on the local HMI. The function block Local remote control
(LOCREMCTRL) controls the presentation of the LEDs for the local/remote
position to applicable bay and screen page.

The switching of the local/remote switch requires at least system operator level.
The password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have
been defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can
handle the control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the
IED Users tool in PCM600.

15.3.6 Switch controller SCSWI IP15603-1 v2

914 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

15.3.6.1 Functionality M13486-3 v8

The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all functions to properly
select and operate switching primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may
handle and operate on one multi-phase device or up to three one-phase devices.

15.3.6.2 Function block M13482-3 v5

SCSWI
BLOCK EXE_OP
PSTO EXE_CL
L_SEL SEL_OP
L_OPEN SEL_CL
L_CLOSE SELECTED
AU_OPEN RES_RQ
AU_CLOSE START_SY
BL_CMD CANC_SY
RES_GRT POSITION
RES_EXT OPENP OS
SY_INPRO CLOSEPOS
SYNC_OK POLEDISC
EN_OPEN CMD_BLK
EN_CLOSE L_CAUSE
XPOSL1* POS_INTR
XPOSL2* XOU T
XPOSL3*
IEC05000337-5-en-us.vsdx
IEC05000337 V5 EN-US

Figure 451: SCSWI function block

15.3.6.3 Signals
PID-6798-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 534: SCSWI Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 2 Operator place selection
L_SEL BOOLEAN 0 Select signal from local panel
L_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open signal from local panel
L_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close signal from local panel
AU_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open signal from local automation function
AU_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close signal from local automation function
BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the command
RES_GRT BOOLEAN 0 Positive acknowledge that all reservations are
made
RES_EXT BOOLEAN 0 Reservation is made externally
SY_INPRO BOOLEAN 0 Synchronizing function in progress
SYNC_OK BOOLEAN 0 Closing is permitted at set to true by the
synchrocheck
EN_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Enables open operation
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Enables close operation
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 915

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

Name Type Default Description

XPOSL1 GROUP - Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase
SIGNAL
XPOSL2 GROUP - Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase
SIGNAL
XPOSL3 GROUP - Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase
SIGNAL

PID-6798-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 535: SCSWI Output signals

Name Type Description
SELECTED BOOLEAN Select conditions are fulfilled
RES_RQ BOOLEAN Request signal to the reservation function
START_SY BOOLEAN Starts the external synchronizing function
CANC_SY BOOLEAN Cancels the external synchronizing function,
started through START_SY
POSITION INTEGER Position indication
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Open position indication
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Closed position indication
POLEDISC BOOLEAN The positions for poles L1-L3 are not equal after
a set time
CMD_BLK BOOLEAN Commands are blocked
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during
command
POS_INTR BOOLEAN Stopped in intermediate position
XEXINF GROUP SIGNAL Execution information to XCBR, XSWI &
XLNPROXY

GUID-7DABB496-EABE-48A4-8078-7ED5D6D4FE14 v2

AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE are used to issue automated

commands as e.g. for load shedding for opening respectively
closing to the SCSWI function. They work without regard to how
the operator place selector, PSTO, is set. In order to have effect on
the outputs EXE_OP and EXE_CL, the corresponding enable input,
EN_OPEN respectively EN_CLOSE must be set, and that no
interlocking is active.

L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE are used for local command

sequence connected to binary inputs. In order to have effect, the
operator place selector, PSTO, must be set to local or to remote
with no priority. If the control model used is Select before operate,
Also the corresponding enable input must be set, and no
interlocking is active. The L_SEL input must be set before

916 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

L_OPEN or L_CLOSE is operated, if the control model is Select

before operate.

If one multi-phase XCBR/XSWI or two single-phase XCBR/XSWI

are used for a two- or three-phase system, two or more of the inputs
XPOSL1, XPOSL2 and XPOSL3 are connected to the same source.

15.3.6.4 Settings
PID-6798-SETTINGS v3

Table 536: SCSWI Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CtlModel Dir Norm - - SBO Enh Specifies control model type
SBO Enh
PosDependent Always permitted - - Always permitted Permission to operate depending on the
Not perm at 00/11 position
tSelect 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum time between select and
execute signals
tResResponse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Allowed time from reservation request to
reservation granted
tSynchrocheck 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 10.00 Allowed time for synchrocheck to fulfil
close conditions
tSynchronizing 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 0.00 Supervision time to get the signal
synchronizing in progress
tExecutionFB 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum time from command execution
to termination
tPoleDiscord 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Allowed time to have discrepancy
between the poles
SuppressMidPos Off - - On Mid-position is suppressed during time
On tIntermediate; tIntermediate is set on
each connected XCBR/XSWI function
individually
InterlockChk Sel & Op phase - - Sel & Op phase Selection if interlock check should be
Op phase done in select phase

15.3.6.5 Operation principle

M13484-4 v4

The Switch controller (SCSWI) is provided with verification checks for the select -
execute sequence, that is, checks the conditions prior each step of the operation are
fulfilled. The involved functions for these condition verifications are interlocking,
reservation, blockings and synchrocheck.

Control handling M13484-6 v7

.
Two types of control models can be used. The two control models are "direct with
normal security" and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security". The

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 917

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

parameter CtlModel defines which one of the two control models is used. The
control model "direct with normal security" does not require a select whereas, the
"SBO with enhanced security" command model requires a select before execution.
The command sequence for a command with control mode SBO with enhanced
security is shown in figure 452, with control mode direct with normal security is
shown in figure 453.
Reservation SXCBR /
Client SCSWI
logic SXSWI
select

SEL_CL = TRUE

RES_RQ = TRUE
tReservation
Response

tSelect

RES_GRT = TRUE
SELECTED = TRUE
selectAck/AddCause = 0

requestedPosition = 10

opRcvd = TRUE
EXE_CL

opOK = TRUE, tOpOk

operateAck/AddCause = 0
operateAck/AddCause = 0
tExecutionFB

POSITION = 00, timeStamp

POSITION = 00, timeStamp
POSITION = 10, timeStamp
cmdTermination/AddCause = 0

POSITION = 10, timeStamp

cmdTermination/AddCause = 0
SELECTED = FALSE
SEL_CL = FALSE

RES_RQ = FALSE

RES_GRT = FALSE

IEC15000416-2-EN.vsdx

IEC15000416 V2 EN-US

Figure 452: Example of command sequence for a successful close command

when the control model SBO with enhanced security is used

918 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Reservation SwitchCtrl Switch

client
core core core

requestedPosition = 10

opRcvd = TRUE

RES_RQ

tReservation
Response
RES_GRT = TRUE
EXE_CL

opOK = TRUE, tOpOk

operateAck/AddCause = 0 operateAck/AddCause = 0

POSITION = 00, timeStamp POSITION = 00, timeStamp

POSITION = 10, timeStamp

cmdTermination/
POSITION = 10, timeStamp AddCause = 0

RES_RQ = FALSE

RES_GRT = FALSE

IEC15000417-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000417 V1 EN-US

Figure 453: Example of command sequence for a successful close command

when the control model direct with normal security is used

Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting
position is not supervised. Enhanced security means that the command sequence is
supervised in three steps, the selection, command evaluation and the supervision of
position. Each step ends up with a pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step
in the command sequence is finished. If an error occurs in one of the steps in the
command sequence, the sequence is terminated. The last error (L_CAUSE) can be
read from the function block and used for example at commissioning.

There is no relation between the command direction and the actual

position. For example, if the switch is in closed position it is
possible to execute a close command.

Before an execution command, an evaluation of the position is done. If the

parameter PosDependent is true and the position is in intermediate state or in bad
state no execution command is sent. If the parameter is false the execution
command is sent independent of the position value.

Evaluation of position M13484-14 v5

The position output from the switches (SXCBR or SXSWI) is connected to the
switch controller SCSWI. The XPOSL1, XPOSL2 and XPOSL3 input signals
receive the position, time stamps and quality attributes of the position which is
used for further evaluation.

In the case when there are two or more one-phase switches connected to the switch
control function, the switch control will "merge" the position of the switches to the
resulting multi-phase position. In the case when the position differ between the
one-phase switches, following principles will be applied:

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 919

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

All switches in open position: switch control position = open

All switches in closed position:
At least one switch in open position and the
other(s) in closed position:
Any switch in intermediate position:
Any switch in bad state:
switch control position = closed
switch control position = intermediate
switch control position = intermediate
switch control position = bad state

The time stamp of the output multi-phase position from switch control will have
the time stamp of the last changed phase when it reaches the end position. When it
goes to intermediate position or bad state, it will get the time stamp of the first
changed phase.

In addition, there is also the possibility that one of the one-phase switches will
change position at any time due to a trip. Such situation is here called pole
discordance and is supervised by this function. In case of a pole discordance
situation, that is, the positions of the one-phase switches are not equal for a time
longer than the setting tPoleDiscord, an error signal POLEDISC will be set.

In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the "cause"
values from the switch modules circuit breaker (SXCBR)/circuit switch (SXSWI).
At error the "cause" value with highest priority is shown.

Blocking principles M13484-37 v5

The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY)
and via the IEC 61850 communication from the operator place.

The different blocking possibilities are:

• Block/deblock of command. It is used to block command for operation of

position.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK. If the BLOCK signal is set, it means that the
function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control
commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The different block conditions will only affect the operation of this
function, that is, no blocking signals will be "forwarded" to other
functions. The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile
memory.

Dependence on operator place GUID-AB327F15-AF44-4ACC-8FA5-2A52AE4AE090 v3

For the commands from a communication protocol, such as IEC 61850-8-1 and
DNP, and through the inputs L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE, the operator place is
evaluated, and only the commands from enabled operator places are accepted, see
Table 528. Commands through the inputs L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE are
always from the local operator place. For commands through the inputs AU_OPEN

920 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

and AU_CLOSE, the operator place is not evaluated. If the operator place is set to
Off, the commands through the inputs AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE are not accepted.

Interaction with synchrocheck and synchronizing functions M13484-47 v5

The Switch controller (SCSWI) works in conjunction with the synchrocheck and
the synchronizing function (SESRSYN). It is assumed that the synchrocheck
function is continuously in operation and gives the result to SCSWI. The result
from the synchrocheck function is evaluated during the close execution. If the
operator performs an override of the synchrocheck, the evaluation of the
synchrocheck state is omitted. When there is a positive confirmation from the
synchrocheck function, SCSWI will send the close signal EXE_CL to the switch
function Circuit breaker (SXCBR).

When there is no positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function, SCSWI

will send a start signal START_SY to the synchronizing function, which will send
the closing command to SXCBR when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled,
see Figure 454. If no synchronizing function is included, the timer for supervision
of the "synchronizing in progress signal" is set to 0, which means no start of the
synchronizing function. SCSWI will then set the attribute "blocked-by-
synchrocheck" in the "cause" signal. See also the time diagram in Figure 458.

SCSWI SXCBR
EXE_CL
OR CLOSE

SYNC_OK
START_SY
CANC_SY
SY_INPRO
SESRSYN

CLOSECB
Synchro Synchronizing
check function

IEC09000209-2-en.vsd
IEC09000209 V2 EN-US

Figure 454: Example of interaction between SCSWI, SESRSYN (synchrocheck

and synchronizing function) and SXCBR function

Time diagrams M13484-51 v6

The Switch controller (SCSWI) function has timers for evaluating different time
supervision conditions. These timers are explained here.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 921

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the
execute command signal, that is, the time the operator has to perform the command
execution after the selection of the object to operate.

select
execute command
tSelect
timer t1 t1>tSelect, then long-
operation-time in 'cause'
is set

en05000092.vsd
IEC05000092 V1 EN-US

Figure 455: tSelect

The Long-operation-time cause is only given on the output

L_CAUSE. It is not sent on protocols since the selection has
already received a positive response, and no operation has been
issued. If an operation is issued after the time out, the negative
response is Object-not-selected.

The parameter tResResponse is used to set the maximum allowed time to make the
reservation, that is, the time between reservation request and the feedback
reservation granted from all bays involved in the reservation function.

select

reservation request RES_RQ

reservation granted RES_GRT

t1>tResResponse, then 1-
tResResponse
of-n-control in 'cause' is
timer t1
set
IEC05000093-2-en.vsd
IEC05000093 V2 EN-US

Figure 456: tResResponse

The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the
command termination, see Figure 457.

922 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

execute command

position L1 open

close

position L2 open

close

position L3 open

close

cmd termination L1

cmd termination L2

cmd termination L3

cmd termination *

position open

close

t1>tExecutionFB, then
tExecutionFB timer long-operation-time in
t1 'cause' is set

* The cmd termination will be delayed one execution sample . APCtExecutionFB=IEC0

5000094=2=en=Original
.vsd
IEC05000094 V2 EN-US

Figure 457: tExecutionFB

The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between
the execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true
at the time the execute command signal is received, the timer "tSynchrocheck" will
not start. The start signal for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchrocheck
conditions are not fulfilled.

The parameter tSynchronizing is used to define the maximum allowed time

between the start signal for synchronizing and the confirmation that synchronizing
is in progress.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 923

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

execute command

SYNC_OK

tSynchrocheck
t1
START_SY

SY_INPRO

tSynchronizing t2>tSynchronizing, then

t2 blocked-by-synchrocheck in
'cause' is set

en05000095.vsd
IEC05000095 V1 EN-US

Figure 458: tSynchroCheck and tSynchronizing

15.3.6.6 Interaction with switch on process bus GUID-1E243260-55FC-4DA6-A314-649E0B95A2B9 v1

When the switches are modelled and controlled in a breaker IED, the information
from the switches is limited to those described in the IEC 61850 standard.

Since there is no expression for distributing the cause of failure over GOOSE, the
XLNPROXY function is used for evaluating the causes normally evaluated by the
SXCBR and SXSWI functions.

Further, in some cases selection may also be used on the model of the switch in the
breaker IED, in case multiple controllers may access it via GOOSE. In such a case,
if the input for the stSeld data attribute in the XLNPROXY function is connected,
SCSWI automatically awaits that the switch is selected before accepting the
selection. Also, if the seSeld data attribute is set before the selection is requested,
the selection request fails.

924 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Reservation
Client SCSWI XLNPROXY XCBR/XSWI
logic
select

SEL_CL = TRUE SelCls.stVal = TRUE

RES_RQ = TRUE SEL_CL = TRUE

tReservation
Response

tSelect
RES_GRT = TRUE
SELECTED = TRUE Pos.stSeld = TRUE
SELECTED = TRUE
selectAck/AddCause = 0

requestedPosition = 10

opRcvd = TRUE
OpCls.stVal = TRUE

opOK = TRUE, tOpOk Pos.OpRcvd = TRUE

operateAck/AddCause = 0 operateAck/AddCause = 0 Pos.OpOk = TRUE

POSITION = 00
tExecutionFB

timeStamp = Pos.t Pos.stVal = 00, Pos.t

POSITION = 00, timeStamp
POSITION = 10,
timeStamp = Pos.t
cmdTermination/AddCause = 0 Pos.stVal = 10, Pos.t

POSITION = 10, timeStamp SELECTED = FALSE Pos.stSeld = FALSE

cmdTermination/AddCause = 0
SELECTED = FALSE
SEL_CL = FALSE

RES_RQ = FALSE

RES_GRT = FALSE

IEC16000069-1-EN.vsdx

IEC16000069 V1 EN-US

Figure 459: Example of command sequence for a successful close command

when the control model SBO with enhanced security is used and
selection is used for the XCBR/XSWI in the breaker IED

15.3.7 Circuit breaker SXCBR IP15614-1 v3

15.3.7.1 Functionality M13489-3 v6

The purpose of Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is to provide the actual status of positions
and to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary
apparatuses in the form of circuit breakers via binary output boards and to
supervise the switching operation and position.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 925

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

15.3.7.2 Function block M13500-3 v5

SXCBR
BLOCK XPOS
LR_SWI EXE_OP
OPEN EXE_CL
CLOSE OP_BLKD
BL_OPEN CL_BLKD
BL_CLOSE UPD_BLKD
BL_UPD OPENP OS
POSOP EN CLOSEPOS
POSCLOSE TR_POS
CBOPCAP CNT_VAL
TR_OPEN L_CAUSE
TR_CLOSE EEHEALTH
RS_CNT CBOPCAP
EEH_WARN
EEH_ALM
XIN*
IEC05000338-4-en.vsdx
IEC05000338 V5 EN-US

Figure 460: SXCBR function block

15.3.7.3 Signals
PID-6799-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 537: SXCBR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the
switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the
switch
BL_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
CBOPCAP INTEGER 3 Breaker operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 =
CO, 4 = OCO, 5 = COCO, 6+ = More
TR_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of truck from I/O
TR_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of truck from I/O
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
EEH_WARN BOOLEAN 0 Warning from external equipment
EEH_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Alarm from external equipment
XIN GROUP - Execution information from CSWI
SIGNAL

926 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

PID-6799-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 538: SXCBR Output signals

Name Type Description
XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI for XCBR and XSWI
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for open
commands
CL_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for close
commands
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position indication is blocked
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
TR_POS INTEGER Truck position indication
CNT_VAL INTEGER Operation counter value
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during
command
EEHEALTH INTEGER External equipment health. 1=No warning or
alarm, 2=Warning, 3=Alarm
CBOPCAP INTEGER Breaker operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 =
CO, 4 = OCO, 5 = COCO, 6+ = More

15.3.7.4 Settings
PID-6799-SETTINGS v2

Table 539: SXCBR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Supervision time for the apparatus to
move after a command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Allowed time for intermediate position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive - - Not adaptive Output resets when a new correct end
Adaptive position is reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for open command
tClosePulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for close command
InitialCount 0 - 20000 - 1 0 Initial number of operations (Initial count
value)

15.3.7.5 Operation principle

M13487-4 v7

The circuit breaker function (SXCBR) is used by other functions such as, for
example, switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or an IEC
61850 client residing in another IED or the operator place. This switch function
executes commands, evaluates block conditions and evaluates different time
supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 927

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

allowed, the function performs the execution command. In case of erroneous

conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause" value, see Table 522.

SXCBR has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter
value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from local
HMI, a binary input or remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal
from the Single Point Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC) for example. The
health of the external equipment, the switch, can be monitored according to IEC
61850-8-1. The operation counter functionality and the external equipment health
supervision are independent sub-functions of the circuit breaker function.

Local/Remote switch M13487-7 v4

One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXCBR to indicate the local/
remote switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is
set to TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard
level. If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher
level is permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of
position) are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are rejected.
The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in Figure 461.

Local= Operation at
UE switch yard level
TR

From I/O switchLR

FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level

en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN-US

Figure 461: Local/Remote switch

Blocking principles M13487-12 v6

SXCBR includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking
signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example, switch
controller, protection functions and autoreclosure.

The blocking possibilities are:

• Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for the open
command.
• Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for the close
command.
• Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position
values. Other signals related to the position will be reset.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK. If BLOCK signal is set, it means that the
function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control
commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

928 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Substitution M13487-22 v5

The substitution part in SXCBR is used for manual set of the position and quality
of the switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual
value because that the real process value is erroneous for some reason. SXCBR
will then use the manually entered value instead of the value for positions
determined by the process.

It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the

position indication and the status information of the I/O board.
When substitution is enabled, the other signals related to the
position follow the substituted position. The substituted values are
stored in a non-volatile memory. If the function is blocked or
blocked for update when the substitution is released, the position
value is kept the same as the last substitution value, but the quality
is changed to "questionable, old data", indicating that the value is
old and not reliable.

When the position of the SXCBR is substituted, its IEC 61850-8-1

data object is marked as “substituted", in addition to the substituted
quality, but the position quality of the connected SCSWI is not
dependent on the substitution indication in the quality, so it does not
show that it is derived from a substituted value.

Time diagrams M13487-28 v5

There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and
tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the
execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for
intermediate position. Figure 462 explains these two timers during the execute
phase.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 929

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

EXE_CL AdaptivePulse = TRUE

Close pulse duration

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

if t1 > tStartMove then

tStartMove timer "switch-not-start-moving"
t1 attribute in 'cause' is set
tStartMove

if t2 > tIntermediate then

tIntermediate timer "persisting-intermediate-state"
t2 attribute in 'cause' is set
tIntermediate

en05000097.vsd

IEC05000097 V1 EN-US

Figure 462: The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses
to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close
command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be
adaptive with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 463 shows the
principle of the execute output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have effect
on both execute output pulses.

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd
IEC05000098 V1 EN-US

Figure 463: Execute output pulse

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed
tOpenPulse or tClosePulse.

The execute output pulses are reset when:

930 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

• the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
• the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
• an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has
elapsed.

If the breaker reaches the final position before the execution pulse
time has elapsed, and AdaptivePulse is not true, the function waits
for the end of the execution pulse before telling the activating
function that the command is completed.

There is one exception to the first item above: if the primary device is in open
position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in closed
position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional
condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output
pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the
configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false, the execution output remains
active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed.

If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and

CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed, the execute output
pulse resets only when timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has
elapsed.

An example of when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is

shown in Figure 464 .

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=FALSE

tOpenPulse

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=TRUE

tOpenPulse

tStartMove timer

en05000099.vsd
IEC05000099 V1 EN-US

Figure 464: Open command with open position indication

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 931

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

15.3.8 Circuit switch SXSWI IP15620-1 v2

15.3.8.1 Functionality M16492-3 v6

The purpose of Circuit switch (SXSWI) function is to provide the actual status of
positions and to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to
primary apparatuses in the form of disconnectors or earthing switches via binary
output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position.

15.3.8.2 Function block M13504-3 v5

SXSWI
BLOCK XPOS
LR_SWI EXE_OP
OPEN EXE_CL
CLOSE OP_BLKD
BL_OPEN CL_BLKD
BL_CLOSE UPD_BLKD
BL_UPD OPENP OS
POSOP EN CLOSEPOS
POSCLOSE CNT_VAL
SWOPCAP L_CAUSE
RS_CNT EEHEALTH
EEH_WARN SWOPCAP
EEH_ALM
XIN*
IEC05000339-4-en.vsdx
IEC05000339 V4 EN-US

Figure 465: SXSWI function block

15.3.8.3 Signals
PID-6800-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 540: SXSWI Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the
switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the
switch
BL_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
SWOPCAP INTEGER 4 Switch operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 =
C, 4 = O and C
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
Table continues on next page

932 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Name Type Default Description

EEH_WARN BOOLEAN 0 Warning from external equipment
EEH_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Alarm from external equipment
XIN GROUP - Execution information from CSWI
SIGNAL

PID-6800-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 541: SXSWI Output signals

Name Type Description
XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI for XCBR and XSWI
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for open
commands
CL_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for close
commands
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position indication is blocked
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
CNT_VAL INTEGER Operation counter value
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during
command
EEHEALTH INTEGER External equipment health. 1=No warning or
alarm, 2=Warning, 3=Alarm
SWOPCAP INTEGER Switch operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 =
C, 4 = O and C

15.3.8.4 Settings
PID-6800-SETTINGS v3

Table 542: SXSWI Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Supervision time for the apparatus to
move after a command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 15.000 Allowed time for intermediate position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive - - Not adaptive Output resets when a new correct end
Adaptive position is reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for open command
tClosePulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for close command
SwitchType Load Break - - Disconnector 1=LoadBreak,2=Disconnector,
Disconnector 3=EarthSw,4=HighSpeedEarthSw
Earthing Switch
HS Earthing Switch
InitialCount 0 - 20000 - 1 0 Initial number of operations (Initial count
value)

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 933

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

15.3.8.5 Operation principle

M16494-3 v7

The users of the Circuit switch (SXSWI) are other functions such as for example,
switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function, or a 61850 client
residing in another IED or the operator place. SXSWI executes commands,
evaluates block conditions and evaluates different time supervision conditions.
Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, SXSWI performs
the execution command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an
appropriate "cause" value, see Table 522.

SXSWI has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter
value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a
binary input or remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal from the
Single Point Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC), for example.

Also, the health of the external equipment, the switch, can be monitored according
to IEC 61850-8-1.

Local/Remote switch M16494-6 v4

One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXSWI to indicate the local/remote
switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to
TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If
the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is
permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position)
from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection
functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in
Figure 466.

Local= Operation at
UE switch yard level
TR

From I/O switchLR

FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level

en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN-US

Figure 466: Local/Remote switch

Blocking principles M16494-11 v6

SXSWI includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking
signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example, switch
controller, protection functions and autorecloser.

The blocking possibilities are:

934 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

• Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open

command.
• Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close
command.
• Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position
values. Other signals related to the position will be reset.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK. If BLOCK signal is set, it means that the
function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control
commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Substitution M16494-21 v7

The substitution part in SXSWI is used for manual set of the position and quality of
the switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value
because the real process value is erroneous of some reason. SXSWI will then use
the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the
process.

It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the

position indication and the status information of the I/O board.
When substitution is enabled, the other signals related to the
position follow the substituted position. The substituted values are
stored in a non-volatile memory. If the function is blocked or
blocked for update when the substitution is released, the position
value is kept the same as the last substitution value, but the quality
is changed to "questionable, old data", indicating that the value is
old and not reliable.

When the position of the SXSWI is substituted, its IEC 61850-8-1

data object is marked as “substituted", in addition to the substituted
quality, but the position quality of the connected SCSWI is not
dependent on the substitution indication in the quality, so it does not
show that it is derived from a substituted value.

Time diagrams M16494-26 v6

There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and
tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the
execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for
intermediate position. Figure 467 explains these two timers during the execute
phase.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 935

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

EXE_CL AdaptivePulse = TRUE

Close pulse duration

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

if t1 > tStartMove then

tStartMove timer "switch-not-start-moving"
t1 attribute in 'cause' is set
tStartMove

if t2 > tIntermediate then

tIntermediate timer "persisting-intermediate-state"
t2 attribute in 'cause' is set
tIntermediate

en05000097.vsd

IEC05000097 V1 EN-US

Figure 467: The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses
to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close
command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be
adaptive with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 468 shows the
principle of the execute output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have effect
on both execute output pulses.

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd
IEC05000098 V1 EN-US

Figure 468: Execute output pulse

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed
tOpenPulse or tClosePulse.

The execute output pulses are reset when:

936 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

• the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
• the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
• an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has
elapsed.

If the controlled primary device reaches the final position before the
execution pulse time has elapsed, and AdaptivePulse is not true, the
function waits for the end of the execution pulse before telling the
activating function that the command is completed.

There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open
position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close
position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional
condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output
pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the
configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains
active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed.

If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and

CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output
pulse resets only when timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has
elapsed.

An example when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is

shown in Figure 469.

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=FALSE

tOpenPulse

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=TRUE

tOpenPulse

tStartMove timer

en05000099.vsd
IEC05000099 V1 EN-US

Figure 469: Open command with open position indication

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 937

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

15.3.9 Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE

XLNPROXY

15.3.9.1 Functionality GUID-11F9CA1C-8E20-489B-822B-34DACC59553A v1

The proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE (XLNPROXY) gives an
internal representation of the position status and control response for a switch
modelled in a breaker IED. This representation is identical to that of an SXCBR or
SXSWI function.

15.3.9.2 Function block GUID-408513CD-A87E-45E8-8E44-24E153947F02 v1

XLNPROXY
BEH* XPOS
BEH_VALID* SELECTED
LOC* OP_BLKD
LOC_VALID* CL_BLKD
BLKOPN* OPENPOS
BLKOPN_V* CLOSEPOS
BLKCLS* CNT_VAL
BLKCLS_V* L_CAUSE
POSVAL* EEHEALTH
POSVAL_V* OPCAP
OPCNT*
OP_CNT_V*
BLK
BLK_VAL
STSELD
STSELD_V
OPRCVD
OPRCVD_V
OPOK
OPOK_VAL
EEHEALTH
EEH_VAL
OPCAP
OPCAP_V
COMMVALID
XIN

IEC16000043-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000043 V1 EN-US

Figure 470: XLNPROXY function block

15.3.9.3 Signals
PID-6712-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 543: XLNPROXY Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BEH INTEGER -1 Behaviour
BEH_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on BEH input
LOC BOOLEAN 0 Local control behaviour
LOC_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on LOC input
BLKOPN BOOLEAN 0 Block opening
BLKOPN_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on BLKOPN input
BLKCLS BOOLEAN 0 Block closing
Table continues on next page

938 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Name Type Default Description

BLKCLS_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on BLKCLS input
POSVAL INTEGER 0 Switch position, Pos.stVal
POSVAL_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on POSVAL input
OPCNT INTEGER -1 Operation counter
OPCNT_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on OPCNT input
BLK BOOLEAN 0 Dynamic blocking of function described by the LN
BLK_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on BLK input
STSELD BOOLEAN 0 The controllable data is in the status "selected”
STSELD_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on STSELD input
OPRCVD BOOLEAN 0 Operate command for a controllable data object
received
OPRCVD_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on OPRCVD input
OPOK BOOLEAN 0 Operate command for a controllable data object
accepted
OPOK_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on OPOK input
EEHEALTH INTEGER -1 External equipment health
EEHEALTH_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on EEHEALTH input
OPCAP INTEGER -1 Operating capability
OPCAP_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on OPCAP input
COMMVALID BOOLEAN 0 Communication valid
XIN GROUP - Execution information from CSWI
SIGNAL

PID-6712-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 544: XLNPROXY Output signals

Name Type Description
XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI
SELECTED BOOLEAN Select conditions are fulfilled
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for open
commands
CL_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for close
commands
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
CNT_VAL INTEGER Operation counter value
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during
command
EEHEALTH INTEGER External equipment health. 1=No warning or
alarm, 2=Warning, 3=Alarm
OPCAP INTEGER Switch / breaker operating capability

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 939

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

15.3.9.4 Settings
PID-6712-SETTINGS v3

Table 545: XLNPROXY Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SwitchType Circuit Breaker - - Circuit Breaker 0 = CB, 1 = Load Break, 2 =
Load Break Disconnector, 3 = Earthing Switch, 4 =
Disconnector High Speed Earthing Switch
Earthing Switch
HS Earth Switch
tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Supervision time for the apparatus to
move after a command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Allowed time for intermediate position

GUID-A4CCC681-D4D8-4534-905D-1D8AD40E923B v1

The default values of the inputs BEH, OPCNT, EEHEALTH and

OPCAP are set to -1 to denote that they are not connected.

15.3.9.5 Operation principle GUID-D2679E0E-ABB5-46F0-AD9C-F6E8E8099534 v1

The proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE (XLNPROXY) is
intended to be used when the switch (XCBR/XSWI) is modelled and controlled in
a breaker IED or similar unit on the process bus. XLNPROXY packages the signals
from the GOOSE receive function, normally GOOSEXLNRCV, into the same
format as used from SXCBR and SXSWI to SCSWI. It makes a similar evaluation
of the command response as SXCBR and SXSWI when a command is issued from
the connected SCSWI.

15.3.9.6 Position supervision GUID-95C72346-A577-4F0A-8584-8E1593B9B947 v1

XLNPROXY has two outputs for position indication: OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS.
Position is a double point indication and the OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS are binary
outputs intended to be used for condition logics to protection and control functions

Normally, the position outputs, OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS, follow the value of
the input POSVAL. However, if the POSVAL_V input is FALSE, the
communication is lost (COMMVALID = FALSE), or the quality of the position
received is bad, the OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS are both set to FALSE.

15.3.9.7 Command response evaluation GUID-A2CDC1AE-A6F5-478B-B6E5-3442C54212D8 v1

The command evaluation is triggered through the group input XIN that is
connected to the SCSWI function controlling the switch.

If an operation is initiated by the SCSWI, the XLNPROXY function checks if the

switch is blocked for the operation direction and that the position moves to the

940 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

desired position within the two time limits tStartMove and tIntermediate. The
default values for tStartMove and tIntermediate are for a breaker. The typical
values for a disconnector are:

• tStartMove = 3s
• tIntermediate = 15s

In most cases, tStartMove and tIntermediate can be set to the same

values as in the source XCBR or XSWI function. However, if the
time limits are set very close to the actual movement times of the
apparatus, compensation may be needed for the communication
delays and differences in cycle time of the XLNPROXY function
and the source function. The compensation should be in the range
of 0 - 5ms.

When the switch has started moving, it issues a response to the SCSWI function
that the operation has started. If it does not start moving within tStartMove, the
command is deemed as failed, and a cause is raised on the L_CAUSE output and
sent to the SCSWI. The different causes it can identify are listed in order of priority
in table 1. The detection of the different ways of blocking is done while waiting for
movement of the switch, but the cause is not given until the tStartMove has
elapsed.
Table 546: Possible cause values from XLNPROXY
Cause Cause Description Conditions
No
8 Blocked-by-Mode The BEH input is 5.
2 Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy The LOC input indicates that only local commands are
allowed for the breaker IED function.
-24 Blocked-for-open-cmd The BLKOPN is active indicating that the switch is
blocked for open commands.
-25 Blocked-for-close-cmd The BLKCLS is active indicating that the switch is
blocked for close commands.
9 Blocked-by-process If the Blk input is connected and active indicating that the
switch is dynamically blocked. Or if the OPCAP input is
connected, it indicates that the operation capability of the
switch is not enough to perform the command.
5 Position-reached Switch is already in the intended position.
-31 Switch-not-start-moving Switch did not start moving within tStartMove.
-32 Persistent-intermediate-state The switch stopped in intermediate state for longer than
tIntermediate.
-33 Switch-returned-to-init-pos Switch returned to the initial position.
-34 Switch-in-bad-state Switch is in a bad position.
-35 Not-expected-final-position Switch did not reach the expected final position.

The L_CAUSE output keeps its output value until a new command sequence has
been started.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 941

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

If the quality of the position or the communication becomes bad, the command
evaluation replaces the uncertain position value with intermediate position. Thus,
as long as the quality is bad, all commands will result in the cause Persistant-
intermediate-state, -32.

If the switch in the merging unit has the behaviour set to Test or Test
blocked, when the IED has the behaviour On or Blocked, all data from the
switch is regarded as invalid. Thus, any command will fail with the cause
PersistantiIntermediate-state, -32, and if selection is used for the switch, all
attempts to select the connected SCSWI will fail with the cause Select-failed, 3,
from the SCSWI.

It is possible to speed up the command response for when the command has been
started by the switch in the breaker IED by connecting the inputs OPOK and
OPOK_VAL. Then the blocking check is only done until OPOK is activated and
confirmation of that the command has been started is given to the SCSWI function.

If the inputs STSELD and STSELD_V are connected, the switch in the breaker
IED is assumed to use selection. Then the SCSWI will wait for a selected
indication, STSELD input of XLNPROXY, before accepting selection, this
information is transferred to the SCSWI function from the XLNPROXY through
the group connection XPOS. If STSELD is not activated within tSelect of the
SCSWI function, the selection is deemed failed and it gives a negative selection
acknowledgement to the command issuer with the cause Select-failed. Further, if
the communication is lost, or the data received is deemed invalid, the selection will
also fail with cause Select-failed from the SCSWI.

15.3.10 Bay reserve QCRSV IP15629-1 v2

15.3.10.1 Functionality M13506-3 v4

The purpose of the reservation function is primarily to transfer interlocking

information between IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a bay,
switchyard part, or complete substation.

942 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

15.3.10.2 Function block M13509-3 v3

QCRSV
EXCH_IN RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLOCK ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT
IEC05000340-3-en.vsdx
IEC05000340 V3 EN-US

Figure 471: QCRSV function block

15.3.10.3 Signals
PID-3561-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 547: QCRSV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
EXCH_IN INTEGER 0 Used for exchange signals between different
BayRes blocks
RES_RQ1 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 1 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ2 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 2 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ3 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 3 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ4 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 4 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ5 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 5 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ6 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 6 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ7 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 7 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ8 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 8 that requests to do a reservation
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Reservation is not possible and the output signals
are reset
OVERRIDE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to override the reservation
RES_DATA INTEGER 0 Reservation data coming from function block
ResIn

PID-3561-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 548: QCRSV Output signals

Name Type Description
RES_GRT1 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 1 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT2 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 2 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT3 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 3 is allowed to
operate
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 943

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

Name Type Description

RES_GRT4 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 4 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT5 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 5 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT6 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 6 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT7 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 7 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT8 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 8 is allowed to
operate
RES_BAYS BOOLEAN Request for reservation of other bays
ACK_TO_B BOOLEAN Acknowledge to other bays that this bay is
reserved
RESERVED BOOLEAN Indicates that the bay is reserved
EXCH_OUT INTEGER Used for exchange signals between different
BayRes blocks

15.3.10.4 Settings
PID-3561-SETTINGS v7

Table 549: QCRSV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tCancelRes 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Supervision time for canceling the
reservation
ParamRequest1 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 1
ParamRequest2 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 2
ParamRequest3 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 3
ParamRequest4 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 4
ParamRequest5 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 5
ParamRequest6 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 6
ParamRequest7 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 7
ParamRequest8 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 8

15.3.10.5 Operation principle

M13505-4 v3

The Bay reserve (QCRSV) function handles the reservation. QCRSV function
starts to operate in two ways. It starts when there is a request for reservation of the
own bay or if there is a request for reservation from another bay. It is only possible

944 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

to reserve the function if it is not currently reserved. The signal that can reserve the
own bay is the input signal RES_RQx (x=1-8) coming from switch controller
(SCWI). The signals for request from another bay are the outputs RE_RQ_B and
V_RE_RQ from function block RESIN. These signals are included in signal
EXCH_OUT from RESIN and are connected to RES_DATA in QCRSV.

The parameters ParamRequestx (x=1-8) are chosen at reservation of the own bay
only (TRUE) or other bays (FALSE). To reserve the own bay only means that no
reservation request RES_BAYS is created.

Reservation request of own bay M13505-7 v2

If the reservation request comes from the own bay, the function QCRSV has to
know which apparatus the request comes from. This information is available with
the input signal RES_RQx and parameter ParamRequestx (where x=1-8 is the
number of the requesting apparatus). In order to decide if a reservation request of
the current bay can be permitted QCRSV has to know whether the own bay already
is reserved by itself or another bay. This information is available in the output
signal RESERVED.

If the RESERVED output is not set, the selection is made with the output
RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus), which is
connected to switch controller SCSWI. If the bay already is reserved the command
sequence will be reset and the SCSWI will set the attribute "1-of-n-control" in the
"cause" signal.

Reservation of other bays M13505-11 v2

When the function QCRSV receives a request from an apparatus in the own bay
that requires other bays to be reserved as well, it checks if it already is reserved. If
not, it will send a request to the other bays that are predefined (to be reserved) and
wait for their response (acknowledge). The request of reserving other bays is done
by activating the output RES_BAYS.

When it receives acknowledge from the bays via the input RES_DATA, it sets the
output RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). If not
acknowledgement from all bays is received within a certain time defined in SCSWI
(tResResponse), the SCSWI will reset the reservation and set the attribute "1-of-n-
control" in the "cause" signal.

Reservation request from another bay M13505-15 v2

When another bay requests for reservation, the input BAY_RES in corresponding
function block RESIN is activated. The signal for reservation request is grouped
into the output signal EXCH_OUT in RESIN, which is connected to input
RES_DATA in QCRSV. If the bay is not reserved, the bay will be reserved and the
acknowledgment from output ACK_T_B is sent back to the requested bay. If the
bay already is reserved the reservation is kept and no acknowledgment is sent.

Blocking and overriding of reservation M13505-18 v4

If QCRSV function is blocked (input BLOCK is set to true) the reservation is

blocked. That is, no reservation can be made from the own bay or any other bay.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 945

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

This can be set, for example, via a binary input from an external device to prevent
operations from another operator place at the same time.

The reservation function can also be overridden in the own bay with the
OVERRIDE input signal, that is, reserving the own bay without waiting for the
external acknowledge.

Bay with more than eight apparatuses M13505-22 v6

If only one instance of QCRSV is used for a bay that is, use of up to eight
apparatuses, the input EXCH_IN must be set to zero.

If there are more than eight apparatuses in the bay, there has to be one additional
QCRSV. The two QCRSV functions have to communicate and this is done through
the input EXCH_IN and EXCH_OUT according to Figure 472. If more than one
QCRSV are used, the execution order is very important. The execution order must
be in the way that the first QCRSV has a lower number than the next one.

QCRSV
EXCH_IN RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLOCK ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT

QCRSV
EXCH_IN RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_BAYS
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3 1
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6 ACK_TO_B
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7 1
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS

1
BLOCK ACK_TO_B RESERVED
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT

IEC05000088-3-en.vsdx
IEC05000088 V3 EN-US

Figure 472: Connection of two QCRSV function blocks

15.3.11 Reservation input RESIN IP15650-1 v2

946 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

15.3.11.1 Functionality M16501-3 v5

The Reservation input (RESIN) function receives the reservation information from
other bays. The number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays
(up to 60 instances are available).

15.3.11.2 Function block M13512-3 v3

RESIN1
BAY_ACK ACK_F_B
BAY_VAL ANY_ACK
BAY_RES VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT

IEC05000341-2-en.vsd
IEC05000341 V2 EN-US

Figure 473: RESIN1 function block

RESIN2
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
IEC09000807_1_en.vsd
IEC09000807 V1 EN-US

Figure 474: RESIN2 function block

15.3.11.3 Signals
PID-3629-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 550: RESIN1 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BAY_ACK BOOLEAN 0 Another bay has acknow. the reservation req.
from this bay
BAY_VAL BOOLEAN 0 The reserv. and acknow. signals from another
bay are valid
BAY_RES BOOLEAN 0 Request from other bay to reserve this bay

PID-3629-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 551: RESIN1 Output signals

Name Type Description
ACK_F_B BOOLEAN All other bays have acknow. the reserv. req. from
this bay
ANY_ACK BOOLEAN Any other bay has acknow. the reserv. req. from
this bay
VALID_TX BOOLEAN The reserv. and acknow. signals from other bays
are valid
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 947

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

Name Type Description

RE_RQ_B BOOLEAN Request from other bay to reserve this bay
V_RE_RQ BOOLEAN Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid
EXCH_OUT INTEGER Used for exchange signals between different
ResIn blocks

PID-3630-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 552: RESIN2 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
EXCH_IN INTEGER 5 Used for exchange signals between different
ResIn blocks
BAY_ACK BOOLEAN 0 Another bay has acknow. the reservation req.
from this bay
BAY_VAL BOOLEAN 0 The reserv. and acknow. signals from another
bay are valid
BAY_RES BOOLEAN 0 Request from other bay to reserve this bay

PID-3630-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 553: RESIN2 Output signals

Name Type Description
ACK_F_B BOOLEAN All other bays have acknow. the reserv. req. from
this bay
ANY_ACK BOOLEAN Any other bay has acknow. the reserv. req. from
this bay
VALID_TX BOOLEAN The reserv. and acknow. signals from other bays
are valid
RE_RQ_B BOOLEAN Request from other bay to reserve this bay
V_RE_RQ BOOLEAN Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid
EXCH_OUT INTEGER Used for exchange signals between different
ResIn blocks

15.3.11.4 Settings
PID-3629-SETTINGS v7

Table 554: RESIN1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FutureUse Bay in use - - Bay in use The bay for this ResIn block is for future
Bay future use use

PID-3630-SETTINGS v7

Table 555: RESIN2 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FutureUse Bay in use - - Bay in use The bay for this ResIn block is for future
Bay future use use

948 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

15.3.11.5 Operation principle M16503-3 v6

The reservation input (RESIN) function is based purely on Boolean logic

conditions. The logic diagram in Figure 475 shows how the output signals are
created. The inputs of the function block are connected to a receive function block
representing signals transferred over the station bus from another bay.

EXCH_IN INT

BIN

ACK_F_B
&
FutureUse
³1

ANY_ACK
BAY_ACK ³1

VALID_TX
&

BAY_VAL ³1

RE_RQ_B
³1

BAY_RES &
V _RE_RQ
³1

BIN
EXCH_OUT
INT

en05000089.vsd
IEC05000089 V1 EN-US

Figure 475: Logic diagram for RESIN

Figure 476 describes the principle of the data exchange between all RESIN
modules in the current bay. There is one RESIN function block per "other bay"
used in the reservation mechanism. The output signal EXCH_OUT in the last
RESIN functions are connected to the module bay reserve (QCRSV) that handles
the reservation function in the own bay.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 949

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

RESIN
BAY_ACK ACK_F_B
Bay 1 BAY_VAL ANY_ACK
BAY_RES VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT

RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
Bay 2 BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT

RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
Bay n BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B QCRSV
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT RES_DATA

en05000090.vsd
IEC05000090 V2 EN-US

Figure 476: Diagram of the chaining principle for RESIN

15.4 Voltage control SEMOD158732-1 v2

15.4.1 Identification
SEMOD173054-2 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Automatic voltage control for tap TR1ATCC 90
changer, single control
U

IEC10000165 V1 EN-US

Automatic voltage control for tap TR8ATCC 90

changer, parallel control
U

IEC10000166 V1 EN-US

Tap changer control and supervision, 6 TCMYLTC - 84

binary inputs
Tap changer control and supervision, TCLYLTC - 84
32 binary inputs

950 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

15.4.2 Functionality M5864-3 v12

Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control (TR1ATCC), Automatic
voltage control for tap changer, parallel control (TR8ATCC), Tap changer control
and supervision, 6 binary inputs (TCMYLTC) and Tap changer control and
supervision, 32 binary inputs (TCLYLTC) are used for control of power
transformers with an on-load tap changer. The functions provide automatic
regulation of the voltage on the secondary side of transformers or alternatively on a
load point further out in the network.

Control of a single transformer, as well as control of up to eight transformers in

parallel is possible. For parallel control of power transformers, three alternative
methods are available: the master-follower method, the circulating current method
and the reverse reactance method. The first two methods require exchange of
information between the parallel transformers and this is provided for within IEC
61850-8-1.

Voltage control includes many extra features such as the possibility to avoid
simultaneous tapping of parallel transformers, hot stand by regulation of a
transformer in a group which regulates it to a correct tap position even though the
LV CB is open, compensation for a possible capacitor bank on the LV side bay of a
transformer, extensive tap changer monitoring including contact wear and hunting
detection, monitoring of the power flow in the transformer so that, for example, the
voltage control can be blocked if the power reverses, etc.

15.4.3 Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR1ATCC and

TR8ATCC SEMOD158820-1 v2

SEMOD158823-5 v4

The Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR1ATCC for single control and
TR8ATCC for parallel control function controls the voltage on the LV side of a
transformer either automatically or manually. The automatic control can be either
for a single transformer, or for a group of parallel transformers.

15.4.3.1 Operation principle

SEMOD158880-5 v4

The LV-side of the transformer is used as the voltage measuring point. If necessary,
the LV side current is used as load current to calculate the line-voltage drop to the
regulation point. This current is also used when parallel control with the circulating
current method is used.

In addition, all three-phase currents from the HV-winding (usually the winding
where the tap changer is situated) are used by the Automatic voltage control for tap
changer TR1ATCC for single control and TR8ATCC for parallel control function
for over current blocking.

The setting MeasMode is a selection of single-phase, or phase-phase, or positive

sequence quantity. It is to be used for voltage and current measurement on the LV-

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 951

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

side. The involved phases are also selected. Thus, single-phases as well as phase-
phase or three-phase feeding on the LV-side is possible but it is commonly selected
for current and voltage.

The analog input signals are normally common for other functions in the IED for
example, protection functions.

The LV-busbar voltage is designated UB, load current IL and for

load point voltage UL will be used in the text to follow.

Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control TR1ATCC SEMOD158887-4 v5

Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control TR1ATCC measures the
magnitude of the busbar voltage UB. If no other additional features are enabled
(line voltage drop compensation), this voltage is further used for voltage
regulation.

TR1ATCC then compares this voltage with the set voltage, USet and decides which
action should be taken. To avoid unnecessary switching around the setpoint, a
deadband (degree of insensitivity) is introduced. The deadband is symmetrical
around USet, see figure 477, and it is arranged in such a way that there is an outer
and an inner deadband. Measured voltages outside the outer deadband start the
timer to initiate tap commands, whilst the sequence resets when the measured
voltage is once again back inside the inner deadband. One half of the outer
deadband is denoted ΔU. The setting of ΔU, setting Udeadband should be set to a
value near to the power transformer’s tap changer voltage step (typically 75–125%
of the tap changer step).

Security Range

*) *) *)
Raise Cmd DU DU Lower Cmd
DUin DUin

0 Ublock Umin U1 Uset U2 Umax Voltage Magnitude

*) Action in accordance with setting

IEC06000489_2_en.vsd
IEC06000489 V2 EN-US

Figure 477: Control actions on a voltage scale

During normal operating conditions the busbar voltage UB, stays within the outer
deadband (interval between U1 and U2 in figure 477). In that case no actions will
be taken by the TR1ATCC. However, if UB becomes smaller than U1, or greater
than U2, an appropriate lower or raise timer will start. The timer will run as long as
the measured voltage stays outside the inner deadband. If this condition persists
longer than the preset time delay, TR1ATCC will initiate that the appropriate
ULOWER or URAISE command will be sent from Tap changer control and
supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC, or 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC to the
transformer load tap changer. If necessary, the procedure will be repeated until the

952 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

magnitude of the busbar voltage again falls within the inner deadband. One half of
the inner deadband is denoted ΔUin. The inner deadband ΔUin, setting
UDeadbandInner should be set to a value smaller than ΔU. It is recommended to
set the inner deadband to 25-70% of the ΔU value.

This way of working is used by TR1ATCC while the busbar voltage is within the
security range defined by settings Umin and Umax

A situation where UB falls outside this range will be regarded as an abnormal

situation.

Instead of controlling the voltage at the LV busbar in the same substation as the
transformer itself, it is possible to control the voltage at a load point out in the
network, downstream from the transformer. The Line Voltage Drop Compensation
(LDC) can be selected by a setting parameter, and it works such that the voltage
drop from the transformer location to the load point is calculated based on the
measured load current and the known line impedance.

In order to prevent unnecessary load tap changer operations caused by temporary

voltage fluctuations and to coordinate load tap changer operations in radial
networks, a time delay is used for the tapping command to the load tap changer.
The time delay can be either definite time or inverse time and two time settings are
used, the first (t1) for the initial delay of a tap command, and the second (t2) for
consecutive tap commands.

Automatic control for tap changer, parallel control TR8ATCC SEMOD158887-54 v3

Parallel control of power transformers means control of two or more power

transformers connected to the same busbar on the LV side and in most cases also
on the HV side. Special measures must be taken in order to avoid a runaway
situation where the tap changers on the parallel transformers gradually diverge and
end up in opposite end positions.

Three alternative methods can be used for parallel control with Automatic control
for tap changer, parallel control TR8ATCC:
• master-follower method
• reverse reactance method
• circulating current method.

Parallel control with the master-follower method SEMOD158887-59 v4

In the master-follower method, one of the transformers is selected to be master, and

will regulate the voltage in accordance with the principles Automatic voltage
control for a tap changer. Selection of the master is made by activating the binary
input FORCMAST in the TR8ATCC function block for one of the transformers in
the group.

The followers can act in one of two alternative ways selected by a setting
parameter:

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 953

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

1. Raise and lower commands (URAISE and ULOWER) generated by the

master, initiates the corresponding command in all follower TR8ATCCs
simultaneously, and consequently they will blindly follow the master
commands irrespective of their individual tap positions.
2. The followers read the tap position of the master and adapt to the same tap
position or to a tap position with an offset relative to the master. In this mode,
the followers can also be time delayed relative to the master.

Parallel control with the reverse reactance method SEMOD158887-64 v5

In the reverse reactance method, the LDC (Line voltage drop compensation) is
used. The purpose of which is normally to control the voltage at a load point
further out in the network. The very same function can also be used here but with a
completely different objective. Whereas the LDC, when used to control the voltage
at a load point, gives a voltage drop along a line from the busbar voltage UB to a
load point voltage UL, the LDC, when used in the reverse reactance parallel control
of transformers, gives a voltage increase (actually, by adjusting the ratio XL/RL
with respect to the power factor, the length of the vector UL will be approximately
equal to the length of UB) from UB up towards the transformer itself.

When the voltage at a load point is controlled by using LDC, the line impedance
from the transformer to the load point is defined by the setting Xline. If a negative
reactance is entered instead of the normal positive line reactance, parallel
transformers will act in such a way that the transformer with a higher tap position
will be the first to tap down when the busbar voltage increases, and the transformer
with a lower tap position will be the first to tap up when the busbar voltage
decreases. The overall performance will then be that a runaway tap situation will be
avoided and that the circulating current will be minimized.

Parallel control with the circulating current method SEMOD158887-78 v5

This method requires extensive exchange of data between the TR8ATCC function
blocks (one TR8ATCC function for each transformer in the parallel group). The
TR8ATCC function block can either be located in the same IED, where they are
configured in PCM600 to co-operate, or in different IEDs. If the functions are
located in different IEDs they must communicate via GOOSE interbay
communication on the IEC 61850 communication protocol.

If the functions are located in different IEDs they must communicate via GOOSE
interbay communication on the IEC 61850 communication protocol. Complete
exchange of TR8ATCC data, analog as well as binary, via GOOSE is made
cyclically every 300 ms.

The main objectives of the circulating current method for parallel voltage control
are:

1. Regulate the busbar or load voltage to the preset target value.

2. Minimize the circulating current in order to achieve optimal sharing of the
reactive load between parallel transformers.

954 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

The busbar voltage UB is measured individually for each transformer in the parallel
group by its associated TR8ATCC function. These measured values will then be
exchanged between the transformers, and in each TR8ATCC block, the mean value
of all UB values will be calculated. The resulting value UBmean will then be used in
each IED instead of UB for the voltage regulation, thus assuring that the same value
is used by all TR8ATCC functions, and thereby avoiding that one erroneous
measurement in one transformer could upset the voltage regulation. At the same
time, supervision of the VT mismatch is also performed.

Figure 478 shows an example with two transformers connected in parallel. If

transformer T1 has higher no load voltage it will drive a circulating current which
adds to the load current in T1 and subtracts from the load current in T2.

UT1 ICC...T2 UT2

ICC...T2
+ +
T1 T2 ZT1 IT1 IT2 ZT2
ICC...T1 ICC...T1

IT1 IT2
UB
IL IL

UL Load UL Load

IEC06000484_3_en.vsd
IEC06000484 V3 EN-US

Figure 478: Circulating current in a parallel group of two transformers

It can be shown that the magnitude of the circulating current in this case can be
approximately calculated with the formula:

UT1 - UT 2
I cc _ T 1 = I cc _ T 2 =
ZT 1 + ZT 2
EQUATION1866 V1 EN-US (Equation 218)

Because the transformer impedance is dominantly inductive, it is possible to use

just the transformer reactances in the above formula. At the same time this means
that T1 circulating current lags the busbar voltage by almost 90°, while T2
circulating current leads the busbar voltage by almost 90°.

See figure 479.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 955

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

UT1 CT1*ICC_T1*ZT1

UB
CT2*ICC_T2*ZT2

UT2

IL

IT2 IT1

2*Udeadband

ICC_T2 ICC_T1
T2 Receives Cir_Curr T1 Produces Cir_Curr

IL = IT1+ IT2
Icc_T1 = Imag {IT1- (ZT2/(ZT1+ZT2)) * IL}
Icc_T2 = Imag {IT2- (ZT1/(ZT1+ZT2)) * IL}
en06000525.vsd
IEC06000525 V1 EN-US

Figure 479: Vector diagram for two power transformers working in parallel

Thus, by minimizing the circulating current flow through transformers, the total
reactive power flow is optimized as well. In the same time, at this optimum state
the apparent power flow is distributed among the transformers in the group in
proportion to their rated power.

In order to calculate the circulating current, measured current values for the
individual transformers must be communicated between the participating
TR8ATCC functions. It should be noted that the Fourier filters in different IEDs
run asynchronously, which means that current and voltage phasors cannot be
exchanged and used for calculation directly between the IEDs. In order to
“synchronize” measurements within all IEDs in the parallel group, a common
reference must be chosen. The most suitable reference quantity for all transformers,
belonging to the same parallel group, is the busbar voltage. This means that the
measured busbar voltage is used as a reference phasor in all IEDs, and the position
of the current phasors in a complex plane is calculated in respect to this reference.
This is a simple and effective solution, which eliminates any additional need for
synchronization between the IEDs regarding TR8ATCC function.

At each transformer bay, the real and imaginary parts of the current on the
secondary side of the transformer are calculated from measured values, and
distributed to the TR8ATCC functions belonging to the same parallel group.

As mentioned before, only the imaginary part (reactive current component) of the
individual transformer current is needed for the circulating current calculations.
The real part of the current will, however, be used to calculate the total through
load current and will be used for the line voltage drop compensation.

956 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

The total load current is defined as the sum of all individual transformer currents:

k
I L = å Ii
i =1

EQUATION1867 V1 EN-US (Equation 219)

where the subscript i signifies the transformer bay number and k the number of
parallel transformers in the group (k≤ 8). Next step is to extract the circulating
current Icc_i that flows in bay i. It is possible to identify a term in the bay current
which represents the circulating current. The magnitude of the circulating current
in bay i, Icc_i , can be calculated as:

I cc _ i = - Im( I i - K i ´ I L )
EQUATION1868 V1 EN-US (Equation 220)

where Im signifies the imaginary part of the expression in brackets and Ki is a

constant which depends on the number of transformers in the parallel group and
their short-circuit reactances. The TR8ATCC function automatically calculates this
constant based on the transformer reactances which are setting parameters, and
shall be given in primary ohms calculated from each transformer rating plate. The
minus sign is added in the above equation in order to get a positive value of the
circulating current for the transformer that generates it.

In this way each TR8ATCC function calculates the circulating current of its own
bay.

A plus sign means that the transformer produces circulating current while, a minus
sign means that the transformer receives circulating current.

As a next step, it is necessary to estimate the value of the no-load voltage in each
transformer. To do that the magnitude of the circulating current in each bay is first
converted to a voltage deviation, Udi, with the following formula:

U di = Ci ´ I cc _ i ´ X i
EQUATION1869 V1 EN-US (Equation 221)

where Xi is the short-circuit reactance for transformer i and Ci, is a setting

parameter named Comp which serves the purpose of alternatively increasing or
decreasing the impact of the circulating current in the TR8ATCC control
calculations. It should be noted that Udi will have positive values for transformers
that produce circulating current and negative values for transformers that receive
circulating current.

Now the magnitude of the no-load voltage for each transformer can be
approximated with:

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 957

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

U i = U Bmean + U di
EQUATION1870 V1 EN-US (Equation 222)

Generally speaking, this value for the no-load voltage can then be put into the
voltage control function in a similar way as for the single transformer described
previously. Ui would then be regarded similarly to the single transformer measured
busbar voltage, and further control actions taken.

For the transformer producing/receiving the circulating current, the calculated no-
load voltage will be greater/smaller than the measured voltage UBmean. The
calculated no-load voltage will thereafter be compared with the set voltage USet. A
steady deviation which is outside the outer deadband will result in ULOWER or
URAISE being initiated alternatively. In this way the overall control action will
always be correct since the position of a tap changer is directly related to the
transformer no-load voltage. The sequence resets when UBmean is inside the inner
deadband at the same time as the calculated no-load voltages for all transformers in
the parallel group are inside the outer deadband. The example in figure 480,is a
fabricated case and not very realistic, but it illustrates some details on how the
described regulation works.

T1 T2 T3 T4

UBmean
T1 No-load voltage

DB1

DB2
USet

DB2

DB1

IEC06000526_2_en.vsd
IEC06000526 V2 EN-US

Figure 480: Selection of transformer to tap

In the figure 480, voltage is considered as increasing above the line denoted USet,
and decreasing below that line.

In the TR8ATCC function for T1 and T4, the calculated no-load voltage for T1 and
T4 respectively, is above the upper limit of DB1 and thus outside the deadband.

958 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

In the TR8ATCC function for T2, the calculated no-load voltage for T2, viewed
from the upper DB1, is not outside (above) the deadband, but as viewed from the
lower DB1 it is outside (below) the deadband. However, there is a restriction in a
situation like this, when the measured busbar voltage, UBmean, is on the opposite
side of the USet line (in figure 480), then UBmean must be inside DB1 if the
calculated no-load voltage for that transformer shall qualify as a candidate for
tapping. Thus in the example above, the calculated no-load voltage for T2,
although below DB1, would not be considered for tapping in this case.

In the TR8ATCC function for T3, the calculated no-load voltage for T3, is above
the upper limit of DB1 and thus outside the deadband. However, viewed from the
upper limit DB1, transformers with negative voltage deviation, Udi, are disregarded
and similarly, viewed from the lower limit DB1, transformers with positive voltage
deviation, Udi, are disregarded. Thus in the example above, the calculated no-load
voltage for T3, although above DB1, would not be considered in this case. Thus in
the example above, the calculated no-load voltage for T3, although above DB1,
would not be considered for tapping in this case.

It is possible to avoid simultaneous tapping, and to distribute tapping actions

evenly among the parallel transformers in a busbar group. This is a selected by a
setting parameter, and the algorithm in the TR8ATCC function will then select the
transformer with the greatest voltage deviation Udi to tap first that is, after time
delay t1. Thereafter, the transformer with the then greatest value of Udi amongst the
remaining transformers in the group will tap after a further time delay t2, and so
on. This is made possible as the calculation of Icc is updated every time the
measured values are exchanged on the horizontal communication (every 300 ms).
If two transformers have equal magnitude of Udi, then there is a predetermined
order governing which one is going to tap first.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 959

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

Logic diagrams SEMOD158887-166 v1

AUTO

UL a
a<b
< &
U1 INNER DB b &

a
a>b
>
U2 INNER DB b &

a
a<b
>1 URAISE
<
U1 DB b

a
a>b
>1
> >1 ULOWER
U2 DB b

UB a
a>b
>
U MAX b &

FSD &

en06000509.vsd
IEC06000509 V1 EN-US

Figure 481: Simplified logic for automatic control in single mode operation

AUTO

PARALLEL START
&
OPERSIMTAP

UL a
a<b
< &
U1 INNER DB b &
&
a
a>b
>
U2 INNER DB b &
U CIRCCOMP
&
MIN a
a<b
>1 URAISE
<
U1 DB b >1
U CIRCCOMP
MAX a
a>b
>1
> >1 ULOWER
U2 DB b >1

UB a
a>b
>
U MAX b &

FSD &

en06000511.vsd
IEC06000511 V1 EN-US

Figure 482: Simplified logic for parallel control in the circulating current mode

960 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

UCCT4 a
a=b
b &
T4PG &
T4
UCCT3 a 1
a=b & ³1
b & & &
T3PG T3 SIMLOWER
³1
UCCT2 a
a=b
1 &
b & &
T2
T2PG

UCCT1 a &
a=b
1 &
& T1
b

MAX
T1PG

a
a=b
b &
&
T1
a 1
a=b & ³1
b & & &
T2PG T2 SIMRAISE
³1
a
a=b
1 &
b & &
T3
T3PG

a &
a=b
1 &
T4
b &
T4PG

MIN

ADAPT

a
³1
a=b
ActualUser S b

³1 1
³1
Udeadband S a
a=b
b
LoadVoltage

HOMING

OperSimTap
1
en06000521.vsd
IEC06000521 V1 EN-US

Figure 483: Simplified logic for simultaneous tapping prevention

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 961

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

From the Master via

horizontal comm.

relativePosition a
a<b
<
raiseVoltageOut
b &
&
lowerVoltageOut
a
a>b
> =
b & URAISE
& 1
Follow Tap

&
& =
ULOWER
1 1
YLTCOUT ® ATCCIN

tapPosition &
&
tapInHighVoltPos

tapInLowVoltPos

en06000510.vsd
IEC06000510 V1 EN-US

Figure 484: Simplified logic for parallel control in Master-Follower mode

15.4.4 Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs

TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC SEMOD171455-1 v5

SEMOD171466-5 v5

The Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs (TCMYLTC) and 32
binary inputs TCLYLTC gives the tap commands to the tap changer, and supervises
that commands are carried through correctly. It has built-in extensive possibilities
for tap changer position measurement, as well as supervisory and monitoring
features. This is used in the voltage control and can also give information about tap
position to the transformer differential protection.

15.4.4.1 Operation principle

Reading of tap changer position SEMOD159170-10 v3

The tap changer position can be received to the tap changer control and
supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC or 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC function
block in the following ways:

1. Via binary input signals, one per tap position (max. 6 or 32 positions).
2. Via coded binary (Binary), binary coded decimal (BCD) signals, or Gray
coded binary signals.
3. Via a mA input signal.

962 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Via binary input signals, one per tap position SEMOD159170-21 v5

In this option, each tap position has a separate contact that is hard wired to a binary
input in the IED. Via the Signal Matrix tool in PCM600, the contacts on the binary
input card are then directly connected to the
• inputs B1 – B6 on TCMYLTC function
• or inputs B1 – B32 on TCLYLTC function.

Via coded binary (Binary), binary coded decimal (BCD) signals or Gray
coded binary signals SEMOD159170-24 v3

The Tap changer control and supervision, (TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC) decodes

binary data from up to six binary inputs to an integer value. The input pattern may
be decoded either as BIN, BCD or GRAY format depending on the setting of the
parameter CodeType.

It is also possible to use even parity check of the input binary signal. Whether the
parity check shall be used or not is set with the setting parameter UseParity.

The input BIERR on (TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC) can be used as supervisory input

for indication of any external error ( Binary Input Module) in the system for
reading of tap changer position. Likewise, the input OUTERR can be used as a
supervisory of the Binary Input Module.

The truth table (see table 556) shows the conversion for Binary, Binary Coded
Decimal, and Gray coded signals.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 963

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

Table 556: Binary, BCD and Gray conversion

IEC06000522 V1 EN-US

The Gray code conversion above is not complete and therefore the conversion from
decimal numbers to Gray code is given below.

964 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Table 557: Gray code conversion

IEC06000523 V1 EN-US

Via a mA input signal SEMOD159170-35 v3

Any of the six inputs on the mA card (MIM) can be used for the purpose of tap
changer position reading connected to the Tap changer control and supervision, 6
binary inputs TCMYLTC or 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 965

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

The measurement of the tap changer position via MIM module is based on the
principle that the specified mA input signal range (usually 4-20 mA) is divided into
N intervals corresponding to the number of positions available on the tap changer.
All mA values within one interval are then associated with one tap changer
position value.

The number of available tap changer positions N is defined by the setting

parameters LowVoltTap and HighVoltTap, which define the tap position for lowest
voltage and highest voltage respectively.

15.4.5 Connection between TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC and

TCMYLTCor TCLYLTC SEMOD159211-5 v6

The two function blocks Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control
TR1ATCC and parallel control TR8ATCC and Tap changer control and
supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC and 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC are
connected to each other according to figure 485 below.

966 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

(Rmk. In case of
parallel control,
this signal shall
TR8ATCC TCLYLTC also be connected
I3P1 ATCCOUT YLTCIN URAISE to HORIZx input of
I3P2 MAN TCINPROG ULOWER the parallel
U3P2 AUTO INERR HIPOSAL transformer
BLOCK IBLK RESETERR LOPOSAL TR8ATCC function
MANCTRL PGTFWD OUTERR POSERRAL
block)
AUTOCTRL PLTREV RS_CLCNT CMDERRAL
PSTO QGTFWD RS_OPCNT TCERRAL
RAISEV QLTREV PARITY POSOUT
LOWERV REVACBLK BIERR CONVERR
EAUTOBLK UHIGH B1 NEWPOS
DEBLKAUT ULOW B2 HIDIFPOS
LVA1 UBLK B3 INVALPOS
LVA2 HOURHUNT B4 YLTCOUT
LVA3 DAYHUNT B5
LVA4 HUNTING B6
LVARESET SINGLE B7
RSTERR PARALLEL B8
DISC HOMING B9
Q1ON ADAPT B10
Q2ON TOTBLK B11
Q3ON AUTOBLK B12
SNGLMODE MASTER B13
T1INCLD FOLLOWER B14
T2INCLD MFERR B15
T3INCLD OUTOFPOS B16
T4INCLD COMMERR B17
T5INCLD ICIRC B18
T6INCLD TRFDISC B19
T7INCLD VTALARM B20
T8INCLD T1PG B21
FORCMAST T2PG B22
RSTMAST T3PG B23
ATCCIN T4PG B24
HORIZ1 T5PG B25
HORIZ2 T6PG B26
HORIZ3 T7PG B27
HORIZ4 T8PG B28
HORIZ5 B29
HORIZ6 B30
HORIZ7 B31
HORIZ8 B32
MA

IEC06000507_2_en.vsd

IEC06000507 V2 EN-US

Figure 485: Connection between TR8ATCC and TCLYLTC

The TR8ATCC and TR1ATCC function blocks have an output signal ATCCOUT,
which is connected to input YLTCIN on TCMYLTC. The data set sent from
ATCCOUT to YLTCIN contains 5 binary signals, one “word” containing 10 binary
signals and 1 analog signal. For TR8ATCC data is also sent from output
ATCCOUT to other TR8ATCC function input HORIZx, when the master-follower
or circulating current mode is used.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 967

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

Table 558: Binary signals: ATCCOUT / YLTCIN

Signal Description
raiseVolt Order to TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC to make a raise command
lowerVolt Order to TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC to make a lower command
automaticCtrl The regulation is in automatic control
extRaiseBlock Block raise commands
extLowerBlock Block lower commands

Table 559: Binary signals contained in word “enableBlockSignals”: ATCCOUT / YLTCIN

Signal Description
CircCurrBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of high circulating current
CmdErrBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of command error
OCBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of over current
MFPosDiffBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because the tap difference between a
follower and the master is greater than the set value
OVPartBl Alarm/Block raise commands because the busbar voltage is above Umax
RevActPartBl Alarm/Block raise commands because reverse action is activated
TapChgBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of tap changer error
TapPosBl Alarm/Block commands in one direction because the tap changer has
reached an end position, or Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of
tap changer error
UVBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because the busbar voltage is below
Ublock
UVPartBl Alarm/Block lower commands because the busbar voltage is between Umin
and Ublock

Table 560: Analog signal: ATCCOUT / YLTCIN

Signal Description
currAver Value of current in the phase with the highest current value

In case of parallel control of transformers, the data set sent from output signal
ATCCOUT to other TR8ATCC blocks input HORIZx contains one "word"
containing 10 binary signals and 6 analog signals:
Table 561: Binary signals contained in word “status”: ATCCOUT / HORIZx
Signal Description
TimerOn This signal is activated by the transformer that has started its timer and is
going to tap when the set time has expired.
automaticCTRL Activated when the transformer is set in automatic control
mutualBlock Activated when the automatic control is blocked
disc Activated when the transformer is disconnected from the busbar
receiveStat Signal used for the horizontal communication
Table continues on next page

968 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Signal Description
TermIsForcedMaster Activated when the transformer is selected Master in the master-follower
parallel control mode
TermIsMaster Activated for the transformer that is master in the master-follower parallel
control mode
termReadyForMSF Activated when the transformer is ready for master-follower parallel control
mode
raiseVoltageOut Order from the master to the followers to tap up
lowerVoltageOut Order from the master to the followers to tap down

Table 562: Analog signals: ATCCOUT / HORIZx

Signal Description
voltageBusbar Measured busbar voltage for this transformer
ownLoad Currim Measured load current imaginary part for this transformer
ownLoadCurrre Measured load current real part for this transformer
reacSec Transformer reactance in primary ohms referred to the LV side
relativePosition The transformer's actual tap position
voltage Setpoint The transformer's set voltage (USet) for automatic control

The TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC function blocks have an output YLTCOUT. As

shown in figure 485, this output shall be connected to the input ATCCIN and it
contains 10 binary signals and 4 integer signals:
Table 563: Binary signals: YLTCOUT / ATCCIN
Signal Description
tapInOperation Tap changer in operation, changing tap position
direction Direction, raise or lower, for the most recent tap changer operation
tapInHighVoltPos Tap changer in high end position
tapInLowVoltPos Tap changer in low end position
tapPositionError Error in reading of tap position ( tap position out of range, more than one
step change, BCD code error (unaccepted combination), parity fault, mA out
of range, hardware fault for example, BIM etc.)
tapChgError This is set high when the tap changer has not carried through a raise/lower
command within the expected max. time, or if the tap changer starts tapping
without a given command.
cmdError This is set high if a given raise/lower command is not followed by a tap
position change within the expected max. time
raiseVoltageFb Feedback to TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC that a raise command shall be
executed
lowerVoltageFb Feedback to TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC that a lower command shall be
executed
timeOutTC Setting value of tTCTimeout that tTCTimeout has timed out.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 969

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

Table 564: Integer signals: YLTCOUT / ATCCIN

Signal
tapPosition
numberOfOperations
tapPositionMaxVolt
tapPositionMinVolt
Description
Actual tap position as reported from the load tap changer
Accumulated number of tap changer operations
Tap position for highest voltage
Tap position for lowest voltage

15.4.6 Function block SEMOD172939-1 v2

SEMOD173000-4 v4

TR1ATCC
I3P1* ATCCOUT
I3P2* MAN
U3P2* AUTO
BLOCK IBLK
MANCTRL PGTFWD
AUTOCTRL PLTREV
PSTO QGTFWD
RAISEV QLTREV
LOWERV REVACBLK
EAUTOBLK UHIGH
DEBLKAUT ULOW
LVA1 UBLK
LVA2 HOURHUNT
LVA3 DAYHUNT
LVA4 HUNTING
LVARESET TIMERON
RSTERR TOTBLK
ATCCIN AUTOBLK
UGTUPPDB
ULTLOWDB

IEC07000041_2_en.vsd
IEC07000041 V2 EN-US

Figure 486: TR1ATCC function block

970 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

SEMOD172997-4 v5

TR8ATCC
I3P1* ATCCOUT
I3P2* MAN
U3P2* AUTO
BLOCK IBLK
MANCTRL PGTFWD
AUTOCTRL PLTREV
PSTO QGTFWD
RAISEV QLTREV
LOWERV REVACBLK
EAUTOBLK UHIGH
DEBLKAUT ULOW
LVA1 UBLK
LVA2 HOURHUNT
LVA3 DAYHUNT
LVA4 HUNTING
LVARESET SINGLE
RSTERR PARALLEL
DISC TIMERON
Q1ON HOMING
Q2ON ADAPT
Q3ON TOTBLK
SNGLMODE AUTOBLK
T1INCLD MASTER
T2INCLD FOLLOWER
T3INCLD MFERR
T4INCLD OUTOFPOS
T5INCLD UGTUPPDB
T6INCLD ULTLOWDB
T7INCLD COMMERR
T8INCLD ICIRC
FORCMAST TRFDISC
RSTMAST VTALARM
ATCCIN T1PG
HORIZ1 T2PG
HORIZ2 T3PG
HORIZ3 T4PG
HORIZ4 T5PG
HORIZ5 T6PG
HORIZ6 T7PG
HORIZ7 T8PG
HORIZ8

IEC07000040_2_en.vsd
IEC07000040 V2 EN-US

Figure 487: TR8ATCC function block

SEMOD173008-4 v4

TCMYLTC
YLTCIN* URAISE
TCINPROG ULOWER
INERR HIPOSAL
RESETERR LOPOSAL
OUTERR POSERRAL
RS_CLCNT CMDERRAL
RS_OPCNT TCERRAL
PARITY POSOUT
BIERR CONVERR
B1 NEWPOS
B2 HIDIFPOS
B3 INVALPOS
B4 YLTCOUT
B5
B6
MA
IEC07000038-3-en.vsdx
IEC07000038 V3 EN-US

Figure 488: TCMYLTC function block

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 971

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

SEMOD173023-4 v3

TCLYLTC
YLTCIN* URAISE
TCINPROG ULOWER
INERR HIPOSAL
RESETERR LOPOSAL
OUTERR POSERRAL
RS_CLCNT CMDERRAL
RS_OPCNT TCERRAL
PARITY POSOUT
BIERR CONVERR
B1 NEWPOS
B2 HIDIFPOS
B3 INVALPOS
B4 TCPOS
B5 YLTCOUT
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
MA

IEC07000037_2_en.vsd
IEC07000037 V2 EN-US

Figure 489: TCLYLTC function block

SEMOD173145-4 v3

VCTRRCV
BLOCK VCTR_REC
COMVALID
DATVALID

IEC07000045-2-en.vsd
IEC07000045 V2 EN-US

Figure 490: VCTRRCV function block

972 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

15.4.7 Signals
PID-6562-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 565: TR1ATCC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P1 GROUP - Input group for current on HV side
SIGNAL
I3P2 GROUP - Input group for current on LV side
SIGNAL
U3P2 GROUP - Input group for voltage on LV side
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
MANCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Binary "MAN" command
AUTOCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Binary "AUTO" command
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
RAISEV BOOLEAN 0 Binary "UP" command
LOWERV BOOLEAN 0 Binary "DOWN" command
EAUTOBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block the voltage control in automatic control
mode
DEBLKAUT BOOLEAN 0 Binary "Deblock Auto" command
LVA1 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 1
LVA2 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 2
LVA3 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 3
LVA4 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 4
LVARESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset LVA adjustment to 0
RSTERR BOOLEAN 0 Resets the automatic control commands raise
and lower
ATCCIN GROUP - Group connection from YLTCOUT
SIGNAL

PID-6562-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 566: TR1ATCC Output signals

Name Type Description
ATCCOUT GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to horizontal communication
and YLTCIN
MAN BOOLEAN The control is in manual mode
AUTO BOOLEAN Automatic control mode is active
IBLK BOOLEAN One phase current is above the settable limit
PGTFWD BOOLEAN Active power above the settable limit
powerActiveForw
PLTREV BOOLEAN Active power below the settable limit
powerActiveRev
QGTFWD BOOLEAN Reactive power above the settable limit
powerReactiveForw
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 973

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

Name Type Description

QLTREV BOOLEAN Reactive power below the settable limit
powerReactiveRev
REVACBLK BOOLEAN Block caused by reversed action
UHIGH BOOLEAN Busbar voltage above the settable limit
voltBusbMaxLimit
ULOW BOOLEAN Busbar voltage below the settable limit
voltBusbMinLimit
UBLK BOOLEAN Busbar voltage below the settable limit
voltBusbBlockLimit
HOURHUNT BOOLEAN Alarm for too many tap changer operations during
the last hour
DAYHUNT BOOLEAN Alarm for too many tap changer operations during
the last 24 hours
HUNTING BOOLEAN Alarm for too many contradictory tap changer
operations within the time sliding window
TIMERON BOOLEAN Raise or lower command to the tap activated
TOTBLK BOOLEAN Block of auto and manual commands
AUTOBLK BOOLEAN Block of auto commands
UGTUPPDB BOOLEAN Voltage greater than deadband-high, ULOWER
command to come
ULTLOWDB BOOLEAN Voltage lower than deadband-low, URAISE
command to come

PID-6559-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 567: TR8ATCC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P1 GROUP - Input group for current on HV side
SIGNAL
I3P2 GROUP - Input group for current on LV side
SIGNAL
U3P2 GROUP - Input group for voltage on LV side
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
MANCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Binary "MAN" command
AUTOCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Binary "AUTO" command
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
RAISEV BOOLEAN 0 Binary "UP" command
LOWERV BOOLEAN 0 Binary "DOWN" command
EAUTOBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block the voltage control in automatic control
mode
DEBLKAUT BOOLEAN 0 Binary "Deblock Auto" command
LVA1 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 1
LVA2 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 2
LVA3 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 3
Table continues on next page

974 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Name Type Default Description

LVA4 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 4
LVARESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset LVA adjustment to 0
RSTERR BOOLEAN 0 Resets the automatic control commands raise
and lower
DISC BOOLEAN 0 Disconnected transformer
Q1ON BOOLEAN 0 Capacitor or reactor bank 1 connected
Q2ON BOOLEAN 0 Capacitor or reactor bank 2 connected
Q3ON BOOLEAN 0 Capacitor or reactor bank 3 connected
SNGLMODE BOOLEAN 0 The voltage control in single control
T1INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer1 included in parallel group
T2INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer2 included in parallel group
T3INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer3 included in parallel group
T4INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer4 included in parallel group
T5INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer5 included in parallel group
T6INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer6 included in parallel group
T7INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer7 included in parallel group
T8INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer8 included in parallel group
FORCMAST BOOLEAN 0 Force transformer to master
RSTMAST BOOLEAN 0 Reset forced master transformer to default
ATCCIN GROUP - Group connection from YLTCOUT
SIGNAL
HORIZ1 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication
SIGNAL from T1
HORIZ2 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication
SIGNAL from T2
HORIZ3 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication
SIGNAL from T3
HORIZ4 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication
SIGNAL from T4
HORIZ5 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication
SIGNAL from T5
HORIZ6 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication
SIGNAL from T6
HORIZ7 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication
SIGNAL from T7
HORIZ8 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication
SIGNAL from T8

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 975

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

PID-6559-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 568: TR8ATCC Output signals

Name Type Description
ATCCOUT GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to horizontal communication
and YLTCIN
MAN BOOLEAN The control is in manual mode
AUTO BOOLEAN Automatic control mode is active
IBLK BOOLEAN One phase current is above the settable limit
PGTFWD BOOLEAN Active power above the settable limit
powerActiveForw
PLTREV BOOLEAN Active power below the settable limit
powerActiveRev
QGTFWD BOOLEAN Reactive power above the settable limit
powerReactiveForw
QLTREV BOOLEAN Reactive power below the settable limit
powerReactiveRev
REVACBLK BOOLEAN Block caused by reversed action
UHIGH BOOLEAN Busbar voltage above the settable limit
voltBusbMaxLimit
ULOW BOOLEAN Busbar voltage below the settable limit
voltBusbMinLimit
UBLK BOOLEAN Busbar voltage below the settable limit
voltBusbBlockLimit
HOURHUNT BOOLEAN Alarm for too many tap changer operations during
the last hour
DAYHUNT BOOLEAN Alarm for too many tap changer operations during
the last 24 hours
HUNTING BOOLEAN Alarm for too many contradictory tap changer
operations within the time sliding window
SINGLE BOOLEAN The transformer operates in single mode
PARALLEL BOOLEAN The transformer operates in parallel mode
TIMERON BOOLEAN Raise or lower command to the tap activated
HOMING BOOLEAN Transformer is in homing conditions
ADAPT BOOLEAN The transformer is adapting
TOTBLK BOOLEAN Block of auto and manual commands
AUTOBLK BOOLEAN Block of auto commands
MASTER BOOLEAN The transformer is master
FOLLOWER BOOLEAN This transformer is a follower
MFERR BOOLEAN The number of masters is different from one
OUTOFPOS BOOLEAN To high difference in tap positions
UGTUPPDB BOOLEAN Voltage greater than deadband-high, ULOWER
command to come
ULTLOWDB BOOLEAN Voltage lower than deadband-low, URAISE
command to come
COMMERR BOOLEAN Communication error
ICIRC BOOLEAN Block from high circulating current
Table continues on next page

976 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Name Type Description

TRFDISC BOOLEAN The transformer is disconnected
VTALARM BOOLEAN VT supervision alarm
T1PG BOOLEAN Transformer1 included in parallel group
T2PG BOOLEAN Transformer2 included in parallel group
T3PG BOOLEAN Transformer3 included in parallel group
T4PG BOOLEAN Transformer4 included in parallel group
T5PG BOOLEAN Transformer5 included in parallel group
T6PG BOOLEAN Transformer6 included in parallel group
T7PG BOOLEAN Transformer7 included in parallel group
T8PG BOOLEAN Transformer8 included in parallel group

PID-6506-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 569: TCMYLTC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
YLTCIN GROUP - Input group connection for YLTC
SIGNAL
TCINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Indication that tap is moving
INERR BOOLEAN 0 Supervision signal of the input board
RESETERR BOOLEAN 0 Reset of command and tap error
OUTERR BOOLEAN 0 Supervision off the digital output board
RS_CLCNT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of the contact life counter
RS_OPCNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
PARITY BOOLEAN 0 Parity bit from tap changer for the tap position
BIERR BOOLEAN 0 Error bit from tap changer for the tap position
B1 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 1 from tap changer for the tap position
B2 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 2 from tap changer for the tap position
B3 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 3 from tap changer for the tap position
B4 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 4 from tap changer for the tap position
B5 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 5 from tap changer for the tap position
B6 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 6 from tap changer for the tap position
MA REAL 0 mA from tap changer for the tap position

PID-6506-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 570: TCMYLTC Output signals

Name Type Description
URAISE BOOLEAN Raise voltage command to tap changer
ULOWER BOOLEAN Lower voltage command to tap changer
HIPOSAL BOOLEAN Alarm for tap in highest volt position
LOPOSAL BOOLEAN Alarm for tap in lowest volt position
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 977

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

Name Type Description

POSERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm that indicates a problem with the position
indication
CMDERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm for a command without an expected
position change
TCERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm for none or illegal tap position change
POSOUT BOOLEAN Tap position outside min and max position
CONVERR BOOLEAN General tap position conversion error
NEWPOS BOOLEAN A new tap position is reported, 1 sec pulse
HIDIFPOS BOOLEAN Tap position has changed more than one position
INVALPOS BOOLEAN Last position change was an invalid change
YLTCOUT GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to ATCCIN

PID-3668-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 571: TCLYLTC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
YLTCIN GROUP - Input group connection for YLTC
SIGNAL
TCINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Indication that tap is moving
INERR BOOLEAN 0 Supervision signal of the input board
RESETERR BOOLEAN 0 Reset of command and tap error
OUTERR BOOLEAN 0 Supervision off the digital output board
RS_CLCNT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of the contact life counter
RS_OPCNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
PARITY BOOLEAN 0 Parity bit from tap changer for the tap position
BIERR BOOLEAN 0 Error bit from tap changer for the tap position
B1 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 1 from tap changer for the tap position
B2 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 2 from tap changer for the tap position
B3 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 3 from tap changer for the tap position
B4 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 4 from tap changer for the tap position
B5 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 5 from tap changer for the tap position
B6 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 6 from tap changer for the tap position
B7 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 7 from tap changer for the tap position
B8 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 8 from tap changer for the tap position
B9 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 9 from tap changer for the tap position
B10 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 10 from tap changer for the tap position
B11 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 11 from tap changer for the tap position
B12 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 12 from tap changer for the tap position
B13 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 13 from tap changer for the tap position
B14 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 14 from tap changer for the tap position
B15 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 15 from tap changer for the tap position
Table continues on next page

978 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Name Type Default Description

B16 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 16 from tap changer for the tap position
B17 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 17 from tap changer for the tap position
B18 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 18 from tap changer for the tap position
B19 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 19 from tap changer for the tap position
B20 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 20 from tap changer for the tap position
B21 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 21 from tap changer for the tap position
B22 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 22 from tap changer for the tap position
B23 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 23 from tap changer for the tap position
B24 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 24 from tap changer for the tap position
B25 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 25 from tap changer for the tap position
B26 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 26 from tap changer for the tap position
B27 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 27 from tap changer for the tap position
B28 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 28 from tap changer for the tap position
B29 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 29 from tap changer for the tap position
B30 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 30 from tap changer for the tap position
B31 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 31 from tap changer for the tap position
B32 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 32 from tap changer for the tap position
MA REAL 0 mA from tap changer for the tap position

PID-3668-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 572: TCLYLTC Output signals

Name Type Description
URAISE BOOLEAN Raise voltage command to tap changer
ULOWER BOOLEAN Lower voltage command to tap changer
HIPOSAL BOOLEAN Alarm for tap in highest volt position
LOPOSAL BOOLEAN Alarm for tap in lowest volt position
POSERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm that indicates a problem with the position
indication
CMDERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm for a command without an expected
position change
TCERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm for none or illegal tap position change
POSOUT BOOLEAN Tap position outside min and max position
CONVERR BOOLEAN General tap position conversion error
NEWPOS BOOLEAN A new tap position is reported, 1 sec pulse
HIDIFPOS BOOLEAN Tap position has changed more than one position
INVALPOS BOOLEAN Last position change was an invalid change
CNT_VAL INTEGER Number of operations on tap changer
TCPOS INTEGER Integer value corresponding to actual tap position
YLTCOUT GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to ATCCIN

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 979

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

PID-923-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 573: VCTRRCV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

PID-923-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 574: VCTRRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
VCTR_REC GROUP SIGNAL Received data from horizontal communication
COMVALID BOOLEAN Communication is valid
DATVALID BOOLEAN Data valid

15.4.8 Settings
PID-6562-SETTINGS v3

Table 575: TR1ATCC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
MeasMode L1 - - PosSeq Selection of measured voltage and
L2 current
L3
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
PosSeq
TotalBlock Off - - Off Total block of the voltage control function
On
AutoBlock Off - - Off Block of the automatic mode in voltage
On control function
FSDMode Off - - Off Fast step down function activation mode
Auto
AutoMan
tFSD 1.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 15.0 Time delay for lower command when
fast step down mode is activated
USet 85.0 - 120.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage control set voltage, % of rated
voltage
UDeadband 0.2 - 9.0 %UB 0.1 1.2 Outer voltage deadband, % of rated
voltage
UDeadbandInner 0.1 - 9.0 %UB 0.1 0.9 Inner voltage deadband, % of rated
voltage
Umax 80 - 180 %UB 1 105 Upper lim of busbar voltage, % of rated
voltage
Umin 70 - 120 %UB 1 80 Lower lim of busbar voltage, % of rated
voltage
Ublock 50 - 120 %UB 1 80 Undervoltage block level, % of rated
voltage
Table continues on next page

980 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

t1Use Constant - - Constant Activation of long inverse time delay
Inverse
t1 3 - 1000 s 1 60 Time delay (long) for automatic control
commands
t2Use Constant - - Constant Activation of short inverse time delay
Inverse
t2 1 - 1000 s 1 15 Time delay (short) for automatic control
commands
tMin 3 - 120 s 1 5 Minimum operating time in inverse mode
OperationLDC Off - - Off Operation line voltage drop
On compensation
OperCapaLDC Off - - Off LDC compensation for capacitive load
On
Rline 0.00 - 150.00 ohm 0.01 0.0 Line resistance, primary values, in ohm
Xline -150.00 - 150.00 ohm 0.01 0.0 Line reactance, primary values, in ohm
LVAConst1 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Constant 1 for LVA, % of regulated
voltage
LVAConst2 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Constant 2 for LVA, % of regulated
voltage
LVAConst3 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Constant 3 for LVA, % of regulated
voltage
LVAConst4 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Constant 4 for LVA, % of regulated
voltage
VRAuto -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Load voltage auto correction, % of rated
voltage
OperationRA Off - - Off Enable block from reverse action
On supervision
tRevAct 30 - 6000 s 1 60 Duration time for the reverse action
block signal
RevActLim 0 - 100 %IB1 1 95 Current limit for reverse action block in
% of I1Base
Iblock 5 - 250 %IB1 1 150 Overcurrent block level, % of rated
current
HourHuntDetect 0 - 30 Op/H 1 30 Level for number of counted raise/lower
within one hour
DayHuntDetect 0 - 100 Op/D 1 100 Level for number of counted raise/lower
within 24 hour
tWindowHunt 1 - 120 Min 1 60 Time window for hunting alarm, minutes
NoOpWindow 3 - 30 Op/W 1 30 Hunting detection alarm, max
operations/window
P> -9999.99 - 9999.99 MW 0.01 1000 Alarm level of active power in forward
direction
P< -9999.99 - 9999.99 MW 0.01 -1000 Alarm level of active power in reverse
direction
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 981

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Q> -9999.99 - 9999.99 MVAr 0.01 1000 Alarm level of reactive power in forward
direction
Q< -9999.99 - 9999.99 MVAr 0.01 -1000 Alarm level of reactive power in reverse
direction
tPower 1 - 6000 s 1 10 Time delay for alarms from power
supervision

Table 576: TR1ATCC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UseCmdUSet Off - - Off Enable command input for voltage
On control set voltage

Table 577: TR1ATCC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Xr2 0.1 - 200.0 Ohm 0.1 0.5 Transformer reactance in primary ohms
on ATCC side
CmdErrBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block command error
Auto&Man Block
OCBk Alarm - - Auto&Man Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block overcurrent
Auto&Man Block
OVPartBk Alarm - - Auto&Man Block Alarm or auto&man partial block for
Auto&Man Block overvoltage
RevActPartBk Alarm - - Alarm Alarm or auto partial block for reverse
Auto Block action
TapChgBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block tap changer error
Auto&Man Block
TapPosBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto or auto&man block for pos
Auto Block sup
Auto&Man Block
UVBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block undervoltage
Auto&Man Block
UVPartBk Alarm - - Alarm Alarm or auto&man partial block for
Auto&Man Block undervoltage
GlobalBaseSel1 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups, winding 1
GlobalBaseSel2 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups, winding 2

982 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

PID-6559-SETTINGS v3

Table 578: TR8ATCC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
MeasMode L1 - - PosSeq Selection of measured voltage and
L2 current
L3
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
PosSeq
Q1 -9999.99 - 9999.99 MVAr 0.01 0 Size of cap/reactor bank 1 in MVAr, >0
for C and <0 for L
Q2 -9999.99 - 9999.99 MVAr 0.01 0 Size of cap/reactor bank 2 in MVAr, >0
for C and <0 for L
Q3 -9999.99 - 9999.99 MVAr 0.01 0 Size of cap/reactor bank 3 in MVAr, >0
for C and <0 for L
TotalBlock Off - - Off Total block of the voltage control function
On
AutoBlock Off - - Off Block of the automatic mode in voltage
On control function
FSDMode Off - - Off Fast step down function activation mode
Auto
AutoMan
tFSD 1.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 15.0 Time delay for lower command when
fast step down mode is activated
USet 85.0 - 120.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage control set voltage, % of rated
voltage
UDeadband 0.2 - 9.0 %UB 0.1 1.2 Outer voltage deadband, % of rated
voltage
UDeadbandInner 0.1 - 9.0 %UB 0.1 0.9 Inner voltage deadband, % of rated
voltage
Umax 80 - 180 %UB 1 105 Upper lim of busbar voltage, % of rated
voltage
Umin 70 - 120 %UB 1 80 Lower lim of busbar voltage, % of rated
voltage
Ublock 50 - 120 %UB 1 80 Undervoltage block level, % of rated
voltage
t1Use Constant - - Constant Activation of long inverse time delay
Inverse
t1 3 - 1000 s 1 60 Time delay (long) for automatic control
commands
t2Use Constant - - Constant Activation of short inverse time delay
Inverse
t2 1 - 1000 s 1 15 Time delay (short) for automatic control
commands
tMin 3 - 120 s 1 5 Minimum operating time in inverse mode
OperationLDC Off - - Off Operation line voltage drop
On compensation
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 983

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OperCapaLDC Off - - Off LDC compensation for capacitive load
On
Rline 0.00 - 150.00 ohm 0.01 0.0 Line resistance, primary values, in ohm
Xline -150.00 - 150.00 ohm 0.01 0.0 Line reactance, primary values, in ohm
LVAConst1 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Constant 1 for LVA, % of regulated
voltage
LVAConst2 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Constant 2 for LVA, % of regulated
voltage
LVAConst3 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Constant 3 for LVA, % of regulated
voltage
LVAConst4 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Constant 4 for LVA, % of regulated
voltage
VRAuto -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Load voltage auto correction, % of rated
voltage
OperationRA Off - - Off Enable block from reverse action
On supervision
tRevAct 30 - 6000 s 1 60 Duration time for the reverse action
block signal
RevActLim 0 - 100 %IB1 1 95 Current limit for reverse action block in
% of I1Base
Iblock 5 - 250 %IB1 1 150 Overcurrent block level, % of rated
current
HourHuntDetect 0 - 30 Op/H 1 30 Level for number of counted raise/lower
within one hour
DayHuntDetect 0 - 100 Op/D 1 100 Level for number of counted raise/lower
within 24 hour
tWindowHunt 1 - 120 Min 1 60 Time window for hunting alarm, minutes
NoOpWindow 3 - 30 Op/W 1 30 Hunting detection alarm, max
operations/window
P> -9999.99 - 9999.99 MW 0.01 1000 Alarm level of active power in forward
direction
P< -9999.99 - 9999.99 MW 0.01 -1000 Alarm level of active power in reverse
direction
Q> -9999.99 - 9999.99 MVAr 0.01 1000 Alarm level of reactive power in forward
direction
Q< -9999.99 - 9999.99 MVAr 0.01 -1000 Alarm level of reactive power in reverse
direction
tPower 1 - 6000 s 1 10 Time delay for alarms from power
supervision
OperationPAR Off - - Off Parallel operation, Off/
CC CirculatingCurrent/MasterFollower
MF
OperCCBlock Off - - On Enable block from circulating current
On supervision
CircCurrLimit 0.0 - 20000.0 %IB2 0.1 100.0 Block level for circulating current
tCircCurr 0 - 1000 s 1 30 Time delay for block from circulating
current
Table continues on next page

984 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Comp 0 - 2000 % 1 100 Compensation parameter in % for
Circulating Current
OperSimTap Off - - Off Simultaneous tapping prohibited
On
OperUsetPar Off - - Off Use common voltage set point for
On parallel operation
OperHoming Off - - Off Activate homing function
On
VTmismatch 0.5 - 10.0 %UB 0.1 10.0 Alarm level for VT supervision, % of
rated voltage
tVTmismatch 1 - 600 s 1 10 Time delay for VT supervision alarm
T1RXOP Off - - Off Receive block operation from parallel
On transformer1
T2RXOP Off - - Off Receive block operation from parallel
On transformer2
T3RXOP Off - - Off Receive block operation from parallel
On transformer3
T4RXOP Off - - Off Receive block operation from parallel
On transformer4
T5RXOP Off - - Off Receive block operation from parallel
On transformer5
T6RXOP Off - - Off Receive block operation from parallel
On transformer6
T7RXOP Off - - Off Receive block operation from parallel
On transformer7
T8RXOP Off - - Off Receive block operation from parallel
On transformer8
TapPosOffs -5 - 5 - 1 0 Tap position offset in relation to the
master
MFPosDiffLim 1 - 20 - 1 1 Limit for tap pos difference from master
tMFPosDiff 0 - 6000 s 1 60 Time for tap pos difference from master

Table 579: TR8ATCC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UseCmdUSet Off - - Off Enable command input for voltage
On control set voltage

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 985

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

Table 580: TR8ATCC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrfId T1 - - T1 Identity of transformer
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
Xr2 0.1 - 200.0 Ohm 0.1 0.5 Transformer reactance in primary ohms
on ATCC side
tAutoMSF 0 - 60 s 1 10 Time delay for command for auto
follower
OperationAdapt Off - - Off Enable adapt mode
On
MFMode Follow Cmd - - Follow Cmd Select follow tap or follow command
Follow Tap
CircCurrBk Alarm - - Alarm Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block high circ current
Auto&Man Block
CmdErrBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block command error
Auto&Man Block
OCBk Alarm - - Auto&Man Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block overcurrent
Auto&Man Block
MFPosDiffBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm or auto block for tap position
Auto Block difference in MF
OVPartBk Alarm - - Auto&Man Block Alarm or auto&man partial block for
Auto&Man Block overvoltage
RevActPartBk Alarm - - Alarm Alarm or auto partial block for reverse
Auto Block action
TapChgBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block tap changer error
Auto&Man Block
TapPosBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto or auto&man block for pos
Auto Block sup
Auto&Man Block
UVBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block undervoltage
Auto&Man Block
UVPartBk Alarm - - Alarm Alarm or auto&man partial block for
Auto&Man Block undervoltage
GlobalBaseSel1 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups, winding 1
GlobalBaseSel2 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups, winding 2

986 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

PID-6506-SETTINGS v5

Table 581: TCMYLTC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
LowVoltTap 1 - 63 - 1 1 Tap position for lowest voltage
HighVoltTap 1 - 63 - 1 33 Tap position for highest voltage
mALow 0.000 - 25.000 mA 0.001 4.000 mA for lowest voltage tap position
mAHigh 0.000 - 25.000 mA 0.001 20.000 mA for highest voltage tap position
CodeType BIN - - BIN Type of code conversion
BCD
Gray
SINGLE
mA
UseParity Off - - Off Enable parity check
On
tStable 1 - 60 s 1 2 Time after position change before the
value is accepted
CLFactor 1.0 - 3.0 - 0.1 2.0 Adjustable factor for contact life function
InitCLCounter 0 - 9999999 - 1 250000 CL counter start value
EnabTapCmd Off - - On Enable commands to tap changer
On
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Table 582: TCMYLTC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
tTCTimeout 1 - 120 s 1 5 Tap changer constant time-out
tPulseDur 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.5 Raise/lower command output pulse
duration

PID-3668-SETTINGS v6

Table 583: TCLYLTC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
LowVoltTap 1 - 63 - 1 1 Tap position for lowest voltage
HighVoltTap 1 - 63 - 1 33 Tap position for highest voltage
mALow 0.000 - 25.000 mA 0.001 4.000 mA for lowest voltage tap position
mAHigh 0.000 - 25.000 mA 0.001 20.000 mA for highest voltage tap position
CodeType BIN - - BIN Type of code conversion
BCD
Gray
SINGLE
mA
UseParity Off - - Off Enable parity check
On
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 987

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tStable 1 - 60 s 1 2 Time after position change before the
value is accepted
CLFactor 1.0 - 3.0 - 0.1 2.0 Adjustable factor for contact life function
InitCLCounter 0 - 9999999 s 1 250000 CL counter start value
EnabTapCmd Off - - On Enable commands to tap changer
On
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Table 584: TCLYLTC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
tTCTimeout 1 - 120 s 1 5 Tap changer constant time-out
tPulseDur 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.5 Raise/lower command output pulse
duration

15.4.9 Monitored data

PID-6562-MONITOREDDATA v3

Table 585: TR1ATCC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
BUSVOLT REAL - kV The average of the
measured busbar
voltage (service value)
VOLTDEV REAL - % Voltage deviation
compared to dead band
(%)
TRLDCURR REAL - A Amplitude of own load
current
USETOUT REAL - kV Voltage setpoint used in
single mode (service
value)
ULOAD REAL - kV Calculated compensated
voltage (service value)
P REAL - MW Calculated active power
(service value)
Q REAL - MVAr Calculated reactive
power (service value)
IPRIM REAL - A Max of 3 phase currents
(service value)

988 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

PID-6559-MONITOREDDATA v3

Table 586: TR8ATCC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
BUSVOLT REAL - kV The average of the
measured busbar
voltage (service value)
VOLTDEV REAL - % Voltage deviation
compared to dead band
(%)
TRLDCURR REAL - A Amplitude of own load
current
USETOUT REAL - kV Voltage setpoint used in
single mode (service
value)
ULOAD REAL - kV Calculated compensated
voltage (service value)
P REAL - MW Calculated active power
(service value)
Q REAL - MVAr Calculated reactive
power (service value)
IPRIM REAL - A Max of 3 phase currents
(service value)
CCAVolt REAL - kV Circulating Current
Adjusted Voltage
USETPAR REAL - kV Average voltage setpoint
used in parallel mode
ICIRCUL REAL - A Circulating current

PID-6506-MONITOREDDATA v5

Table 587: TCMYLTC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TCPOS INTEGER - - Integer value
corresponding to actual
tap position

PID-3669-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 588: TCMYLTC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CNT_VAL INTEGER - - Number of operations on
tap changer
CLCNT_VAL REAL - - Remaining number of
operations at rated load
TCPOS INTEGER - - Integer value
corresponding to actual
tap position

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 989

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

PID-3668-MONITOREDDATA v6

Table 589: TCLYLTC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TCPOS INTEGER - - Integer value
corresponding to actual
tap position

15.4.10 Operation principle M6500-430 v8

The voltage control function is built up by two function blocks. Both are logical
nodes in IEC 61850-8-1.

• Automatic voltage control for tap changer

• TR1ATCC for single control
• TR8ATCC for parallel control
• Tap changer control and supervision
• TCMYLTC, 6 binary inputs
• TCLYLTC, 32 binary inputs

TR1ATCCand TR8ATCC are designed to automatically maintain the voltage at the

LV-side side of a power transformer within given limits around a set target voltage.
A raise or lower command is generated whenever the measured voltage, for a given
period of time, deviates from the set target value by more than the preset deadband
value that is, degree of insensitivity. A time-delay (inverse or definite time) is set to
avoid unnecessary operation during shorter voltage deviations from the target
value, and in order to coordinate with other automatic voltage controllers in the
system.

TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC are an interface between TR1ATCC and TR8ATCC and
the transformer load tap changer. More specifically this means that it receives
information from TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC and based on this it gives command-
pulses to a power transformer motor driven on-load tap changer and also receives
information from the load tap changer regarding tap position, progress of given
commands, and so on.

TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC also serve the purpose of giving information about tap
position to the transformer differential protection T2WPDIF and T3WPDIF.

990 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

15.4.11 Technical data

SEMOD175215-2 v14

Table 590: TR1ATCC/TR8ATCC, TCMYLTC/TCLYLTC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Transformer reactance (0.1–200.0) Ω, primary -
Time delay for lower (1.0–100.0) s -
command when fast step
down mode is activated
Voltage control set voltage (85.0–120.0)% of UBase ±0.25% of Ur

Outer voltage deadband (0.2–9.0)% of UBase -

Inner voltage deadband (0.1–9.0)% of UBase -
Upper limit of busbar (80–180)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
voltage
Lower limit of busbar (70–120)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
voltage
Undervoltage block level (50–120)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Time delay (long) for (3–1000) s ±0.2% or ±600 ms

automatic control
commands
Time delay (short) for
automatic control
commands
Minimum operating time in
inverse mode
Line resistance
Line reactance
Load voltage adjustment
constants
Load voltage auto correction
Duration time for the reverse
action block signal
Current limit for reverse
action block
Overcurrent block level
whichever is greater
(1–1000) s ±0.2% or ±600 ms
whichever is greater
(3–120) s ±0.2% or ±600 ms
whichever is greater
(0.00–150.00) Ω, primary -
(-150.00–150.00) Ω, primary -
(-20.0–20.0)% of UBase -
(-20.0–20.0)% of UBase -
(30–6000) s ±0.2% or ±600 ms
whichever is greater
(0–100)% of I1Base -
(5–250)% of I1Base ±1.0% of Ir at I≤Ir
±1.0% of I at I>Ir

Level for number of counted (0–30) operations/hour -

raise/lower within one hour
Level for number of counted (0–100) operations/day -
raise/lower within 24 hours
Time window for hunting (1–120) minutes -
alarm
Hunting detection alarm, (3–30) operations/window -
max. operations/window
Alarm level of active power (-9999.99–9999.99) MW ±1.0% of Sr
in forward and reverse
direction at (10-200)% of Sr
and (85-120)% of UBase
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 991

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

Function Range or value Accuracy

Alarm level of reactive (-9999.99–9999.99) MVAr ±1.0% of Sr
power in forward and
reverse direction at
(10-200)% of Sr and
(85-120)% of UBase
Time delay for alarms from (1–6000) s ±0.2% or ±600 ms
power supervision whichever is greater
Tap position for lowest and (1–63) -
highest voltage
mA for lowest and highest (0.000–25.000) mA -
voltage tap position
Type of code conversion BIN, BCD, GRAY, SINGLE, mA -
Time after position change (1–60) s ±0.2% or ±200 ms
before the value is accepted whichever is greater
Tap changer constant time- (1–120) s ±0.2% or ±200 ms
out whichever is greater
Raise/lower command (0.5–10.0) s ±0.2% or ±200 ms
output pulse duration whichever is greater

15.5 Logic rotating switch for function selection and

LHMI presentation SLGAPC SEMOD114936-1 v4

15.5.1 Identification
SEMOD167845-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logic rotating switch for function SLGAPC - -
selection and LHMI presentation

15.5.2 Functionality SEMOD114908-4 v10

The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGAPC)
(or the selector switch function block) is used to get an enhanced selector switch
functionality compared to the one provided by a hardware selector switch.
Hardware selector switches are used extensively by utilities, in order to have
different functions operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches are however
sources for maintenance issues, lower system reliability and an extended purchase
portfolio. The selector switch function eliminates all these problems.

992 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

15.5.3 Function block SEMOD114954-4 v6

SLGAPC
BLOCK ^P01
PSTO ^P02
UP ^P03
DOWN ^P04
^P05
^P06
^P07
^P08
^P09
^P10
^P11
^P12
^P13
^P14
^P15
^P16
^P17
^P18
^P19
^P20
^P21
^P22
^P23
^P24
^P25
^P26
^P27
^P28
^P29
^P30
^P31
^P32
SWPOSN

IEC14000005-1-en.vsd
IEC14000005 V1 EN-US

Figure 491: SLGAPC function block

15.5.4 Signals
PID-6641-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 591: SLGAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
UP BOOLEAN 0 Binary "UP" command
DOWN BOOLEAN 0 Binary "DOWN" command

PID-6641-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 592: SLGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
P01 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 1
P02 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 2
P03 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 3
P04 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 4
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 993

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

Name Type Description

P05 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 5
P06 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 6
P07 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 7
P08 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 8
P09 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 9
P10 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 10
P11 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 11
P12 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 12
P13 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 13
P14 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 14
P15 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 15
P16 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 16
P17 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 17
P18 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 18
P19 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 19
P20 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 20
P21 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 21
P22 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 22
P23 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 23
P24 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 24
P25 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 25
P26 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 26
P27 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 27
P28 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 28
P29 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 29
P30 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 30
P31 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 31
P32 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 32
SWPOSN INTEGER Switch position (integer)

15.5.5 Settings
PID-6641-SETTINGS v3

Table 593: SLGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
NrPos 2 - 32 - 1 32 Number of positions in the switch
OutType Pulsed - - Steady Output type, steady or pulse
Steady
Table continues on next page

994 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate pulse duration, in [s]
tDelay 0.000 - 60000.000 s 0.010 0.000 Time delay on the output, in [s]
StopAtExtremes Disabled - - Disabled Stop when min or max position is
Enabled reached

15.5.6 Monitored data

PID-6641-MONITOREDDATA v3

Table 594: SLGAPC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
SWPOSN INTEGER - - Switch position (integer)

15.5.7 Operation principle

SEMOD114931-4 v7

The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGAPC)
function has two operating inputs – UP and DOWN. When a signal is received on
the UP input, the function will activate the output next to the present activated
output, in ascending order (for example if the present activated output is P03 and
one activates the UP input then the output P04 will be activated). When a signal is
received on the DOWN input, the function will activate the output next to the
present activated output, in descending order (for example if the present activated
output is P03 and one activates the DOWN input then the output P02 will be
activated). Depending on the output settings the output signals can be steady or
pulsed. In case of steady signals, the output will be active till the time it receives
next operation of UP/DOWN inputs. Also, depending on the settings one can have
a time delay between activation of the UP or DOWN input signals and the output
activation.

Besides the inputs visible in the application configuration in the Application

Configuration Tool, there are other possibilities that will allow an user to set the
desired position directly (without activating the intermediate positions), either
locally or remotely, using a “select before execute” dialog. One can block the
function operation, by activating the BLOCK input. In this case, the present
position will be kept and further operation will be blocked. The operator place
(local or remote) is specified through the PSTO input. If any operation is allowed
the signal INTONE from the Fixed signal function block can be connected.
SLGAPC function block has also an integer value output, that generates the actual
position number. The positions and the block names are fully settable by the user.
These names will appear in the menu, so the user can see the position names
instead of a number.

15.5.7.1 Graphical display SEMOD114931-35 v4

There are two possibilities for SLGAPC

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 995

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

• if it is used just for the monitoring, the switches will be listed with their actual
position names, as defined by the user (max. 13 characters).
• if it is used for control, the switches will be listed with their actual positions,
but only the first three letters of the name will be used.

In both cases, the switch full name will be shown, but the user has to redefine it
when building the Graphical Display Editor, under the "Caption". If used for the
control, the following sequence of commands will ensure:

From the graphical display:

Control
Control Sing le Line Diagram
Measurements Comma nds
Events
Disturb ance r eco rds
Settings
Diagno stics
Test
Chang e to the "Switche s" pag e Reset
of the SLD by left-righ t arrows. Authori zation
Sele ct switch by up-down Lan guage
arro ws

../Control/SLD/Switch
O I ../Control/SLD/Switch

SMBRREC control SMBRREC control

WFM Sele ct switch. Pre ss the
WFM
I or O key. A dialo g b ox
Pilo t se tup app ears.
Pilo t se tup
OFF OFF

Damage control
P: Disc N: Disc Fe
DAL
The pos will not b e mod ified
(outputs will not b e activa ted) unt il OK Cancel
you press the Enter button for O.K.

../Control/SLD/Switch

SMBRREC control
WFM

Pilo t se tup
OFF

Damage control
DFW

IEC06000421-3-en.vsdx
IEC06000421 V3 EN-US

Figure 492: Example 2 on handling the switch from the local HMI.
From the single line diagram on local HMI.

15.6 Selector mini switch VSGAPC SEMOD158754-1 v3

996 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

15.6.1 Identification
SEMOD167850-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Selector mini switch VSGAPC - 43

15.6.2 Functionality SEMOD158756-5 v9

The Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function block is a multipurpose function

used for a variety of applications, as a general purpose switch.

VSGAPC can be controlled from the menu, from a symbol on the single line
diagram (SLD) on the local HMI or from Binary inputs

15.6.3 Function block SEMOD158768-4 v3

VSGAPC
BLOCK BLOCKED
PSTO POSITION
IPOS1 POS1
IPOS2 POS2
CMDPOS12
CMDPOS21

IEC14000066-1-en.vsd
IEC14000066 V1 EN-US

Figure 493: VSGAPC function block

15.6.4 Signals
PID-6504-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 595: VSGAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
IPOS1 BOOLEAN 0 Position 1 indicating input
IPOS2 BOOLEAN 0 Position 2 indicating input

PID-6504-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 596: VSGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The function is active but the functionality is
blocked
POSITION INTEGER Position indication, integer
POS1 BOOLEAN Position 1 indication, logical signal
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 997

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

Name Type Description

POS2 BOOLEAN Position 2 indication, logical signal
CMDPOS12 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 1 to position 2
CMDPOS21 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 2 to position 1

15.6.5 Settings
PID-6504-SETTINGS v6

Table 597: VSGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
CtlModel Dir Norm - - Dir Norm Specifies the type for control model
SBO Enh according to IEC 61850
Mode Steady - - Pulsed Operation mode
Pulsed
tSelect 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 30.000 Max time between select and execute
signals
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Command pulse lenght

15.6.6 Operation principle SEMOD158762-4 v6

Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function can be used for double purpose, in the
same way as switch controller (SCSWI) functions are used:

• for indication on the single line diagram (SLD). Position is received through
the IPOS1 and IPOS2 inputs and distributed in the configuration through the
POS1 and POS2 outputs, or to IEC 61850 through reporting, or GOOSE.
• for commands that are received via the local HMI or IEC 61850 and
distributed in the configuration through outputs CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21.
The output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command
from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command
from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.

It is important for indication in the SLD that a symbol is associated

with a controllable object, otherwise the symbol won't be displayed
on the screen. A symbol is created and configured in GDE tool in
PCM600.

The PSTO input is connected to the Local remote switch to have a selection of
operators place, operation from local HMI (Local) or through IEC 61850 (Remote).
An INTONE connection from Fixed signal function block (FXDSIGN) will allow
operation from local HMI.

998 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

As it can be seen, both indications and commands are done in double-bit

representation, where a combination of signals on both inputs/outputs generate the
desired result.

The following table shows the relationship between IPOS1/IPOS2 inputs and the
name of the string that is shown on the SLD. The value of the strings are set in
PST.
IPOS1 IPOS2 Name of displayed Default string value
string
0 0 PosUndefined P00
1 0 Position1 P01
0 1 Position2 P10
1 1 PosBadState P11

15.7 Generic communication function for Double Point

indication DPGAPC SEMOD55384-1 v4

15.7.1 Identification
GUID-E16EA78F-6DF9-4B37-A92D-5C09827E2297 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Generic communication function for DPGAPC - -
Double Point indication

15.7.2 Functionality SEMOD55850-5 v7

Generic communication function for Double Point indication (DPGAPC) function

block is used to send double point position indications to other systems, equipment
or functions in the substation through IEC 61850-8-1 or other communication
protocols. It is especially intended to be used in the interlocking station-wide
logics.

15.7.3 Function block SEMOD54710-4 v5

IEC13000081 V1 EN-US

Figure 494: DPGAPC function block

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 999

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

15.7.4 Signals SEMOD55883-1 v2

PID-4139-INPUTSIGNALS v12

Table 598: DPGAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open indication
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close indication
VALID BOOLEAN 0 Valid indication

PID-4139-OUTPUTSIGNALS v11

Table 599: DPGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
POSITION INTEGER Double point indication

15.7.5 Settings ABBD8E283863 v3

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

15.7.6 Operation principle SEMOD55861-5 v7

When receiving the input signals, DPGAPC sends the signals over IEC 61850-8-1
to the systems, equipment or functions that requests and thus subscribes on these
signals. To be able to get the signals into other systems, equipment or functions,
one must use other tools, described in the Engineering manual, and define which
function block in which systems, equipment or functions should receive this
information.

More specifically, DPGAPC function reports a combined double point position

indication output POSITION, by evaluating the value and the timestamp attributes
of the inputs OPEN and CLOSE, together with the logical input signal VALID.

When the input signal VALID is active, the values of the OPEN and CLOSE inputs
determine the two-bit integer value of the output POSITION. The timestamp of the
output POSITION will have the latest updated timestamp of the inputs OPEN and
CLOSE.

When the input signal VALID is inactive, DPGAPC function forces the position to
intermediated state.

When the value of the input signal VALID changes, the timestamp of the output
POSITION will be updated as the time when DPGAPC function detects the
change.

Refer to Table 600 for the description of the input-output relationship in terms of
the value and the quality attributes.

1000 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Table 600: Description of the input-output relationship

POSITION
VALID OPEN CLOSE
Value Description
0 - - 0 Intermediate
1 0 0 0 Intermediate
1 1 0 1 Open
1 0 1 2 Closed
1 1 1 3 Bad State

15.8 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC SEMOD176448-1 v3

15.8.1 Identification
SEMOD176456-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC - -

15.8.2 Functionality SEMOD176462-4 v10

The Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC) function block is a

collection of 8 single point commands that can be used for direct commands for
example reset of LEDs or putting IED in "ChangeLock" state from remote. In this
way, simple commands can be sent directly to the IED outputs, without
confirmation. Confirmation (status) of the result of the commands is supposed to
be achieved by other means, such as binary inputs and SPGAPC function blocks.
The commands can be pulsed or steady with a settable pulse time.

15.8.3 Function block SEMOD176479-4 v5

SPC8GAPC
BLOCK ^OUT1
PSTO ^OUT2
^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT7
^OUT8

IEC07000143-3-en.vsd
IEC07000143 V3 EN-US

Figure 495: SPC8GAPC function block

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1001

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

15.8.4 Signals
PID-3575-INPUTSIGNALS v8

Table 601: SPC8GAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the function operation
PSTO INTEGER 1 Operator place selection

PID-3575-OUTPUTSIGNALS v8

Table 602: SPC8GAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Command output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Command output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Command output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Command output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Command output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Command output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Command output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Command output 8

15.8.5 Settings
PID-3575-SETTINGS v8

Table 603: SPC8GAPC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
PulseMode1 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 1
tPulse1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 1
PulseMode2 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 2
tPulse2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 2
PulseMode3 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 3
tPulse3 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 3
PulseMode4 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 4
tPulse4 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 4
PulseMode5 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 5
tPulse5 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 5
Table continues on next page

1002 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

PulseMode6 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 6
tPulse6 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 6
PulseMode7 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 7
tPulse7 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 7
PulseMode8 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 8
tPulse8 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 8

15.8.6 Operation principle SEMOD176471-4 v7

The PSTO input selects the operator place (LOCAL, REMOTE or ALL). One of
the eight outputs is activated based on the command sent from the operator place
selected. The settings Latchedx and tPulsex (where x is the respective output) will
determine if the signal will be pulsed (and how long the pulse is) or latched
(steady). BLOCK will block the operation of the function – in case a command is
sent, no output will be activated.

PSTO is the universal operator place selector for all control

functions. Although, PSTO can be configured to use LOCAL or
ALL operator places, only REMOTE operator place is used in
SPC8GAPC function.

15.9 AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0

AUTOBITS SEMOD158589-1 v3

15.9.1 Identification
GUID-C3BB63F5-F0E7-4B00-AF0F-917ECF87B016 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
AutomationBits, command function for
AUTOBITS - -
DNP3

15.9.2 Functionality SEMOD158591-5 v8

Automation bits function for DNP3 (AUTOBITS) is used within PCM600 to get
into the configuration of the commands coming through the DNP3 protocol. The

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1003

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

AUTOBITS function plays the same role as functions GOOSEBINRCV (for IEC
61850) and MULTICMDRCV (for LON).

15.9.3 Function block SEMOD158603-4 v3

AUTOBITS
BLOCK ^CMDBIT1
PSTO ^CMDBIT2
^CMDBIT3
^CMDBIT4
^CMDBIT5
^CMDBIT6
^CMDBIT7
^CMDBIT8
^CMDBIT9
^CMDBIT10
^CMDBIT11
^CMDBIT12
^CMDBIT13
^CMDBIT14
^CMDBIT15
^CMDBIT16
^CMDBIT17
^CMDBIT18
^CMDBIT19
^CMDBIT20
^CMDBIT21
^CMDBIT22
^CMDBIT23
^CMDBIT24
^CMDBIT25
^CMDBIT26
^CMDBIT27
^CMDBIT28
^CMDBIT29
^CMDBIT30
^CMDBIT31
^CMDBIT32

IEC09000925-1-en.vsd
IEC09000925 V1 EN-US

Figure 496: AUTOBITS function block

15.9.4 Signals
PID-3776-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 604: AUTOBITS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection

PID-3776-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 605: AUTOBITS Output signals

Name Type Description
CMDBIT1 BOOLEAN Command out bit 1
CMDBIT2 BOOLEAN Command out bit 2
CMDBIT3 BOOLEAN Command out bit 3
CMDBIT4 BOOLEAN Command out bit 4
Table continues on next page

1004 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

Name Type Description

CMDBIT5 BOOLEAN Command out bit 5
CMDBIT6 BOOLEAN Command out bit 6
CMDBIT7 BOOLEAN Command out bit 7
CMDBIT8 BOOLEAN Command out bit 8
CMDBIT9 BOOLEAN Command out bit 9
CMDBIT10 BOOLEAN Command out bit 10
CMDBIT11 BOOLEAN Command out bit 11
CMDBIT12 BOOLEAN Command out bit 12
CMDBIT13 BOOLEAN Command out bit 13
CMDBIT14 BOOLEAN Command out bit 14
CMDBIT15 BOOLEAN Command out bit 15
CMDBIT16 BOOLEAN Command out bit 16
CMDBIT17 BOOLEAN Command out bit 17
CMDBIT18 BOOLEAN Command out bit 18
CMDBIT19 BOOLEAN Command out bit 19
CMDBIT20 BOOLEAN Command out bit 20
CMDBIT21 BOOLEAN Command out bit 21
CMDBIT22 BOOLEAN Command out bit 22
CMDBIT23 BOOLEAN Command out bit 23
CMDBIT24 BOOLEAN Command out bit 24
CMDBIT25 BOOLEAN Command out bit 25
CMDBIT26 BOOLEAN Command out bit 26
CMDBIT27 BOOLEAN Command out bit 27
CMDBIT28 BOOLEAN Command out bit 28
CMDBIT29 BOOLEAN Command out bit 29
CMDBIT30 BOOLEAN Command out bit 30
CMDBIT31 BOOLEAN Command out bit 31
CMDBIT32 BOOLEAN Command out bit 32

15.9.5 Settings
PID-3776-SETTINGS v6

Table 606: AUTOBITS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1005

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

15.9.6 Operation principle SEMOD158597-4 v5

AutomationBits function (AUTOBITS) has 32 individual outputs which each can

be mapped as a Binary Output point in DNP3. The output is operated by a "Object
12" in DNP3. This object contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and
off-time. To operate an AUTOBITS output point, send a control-code of latch-On,
latch-Off, pulse-On, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The remaining parameters will be
regarded were appropriate. ex: pulse-On, on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5
would give 5 positive 100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart.

There is a BLOCK input signal, which will disable the operation of the function, in
the same way the setting Operation: On/Off does. That means that, upon activation
of the BLOCK input, all 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set to 0. The BLOCK acts
like an overriding, the function still receives data from the DNP3 master. Upon
deactivation of BLOCK, all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set by the DNP3
master again, momentarily. For AUTOBITS , the PSTO input determines the
operator place. The command can be written to the block while in “Remote”. If
PSTO is in “Local” then no change is applied to the outputs.

15.10 Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD SEMOD119849-1 v2

15.10.1 Identification
GUID-2217CCC2-5581-407F-A4BC-266CD6808984 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD - -

15.10.2 Functionality M12446-6 v5

The IEDs can receive commands either from a substation automation system or
from the local HMI. The command function block has outputs that can be used, for
example, to control high voltage apparatuses or for other user defined functionality.

1006 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 15
Control

15.10.3 Function block SEMOD116040-4 v2

SINGLECMD
BLOCK ^OUT1
^OUT2
^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT7
^OUT8
^OUT9
^OUT10
^OUT11
^OUT12
^OUT13
^OUT14
^OUT15
^OUT16

IEC05000698-2-en.vsd
IEC05000698 V3 EN-US

Figure 497: SINGLECMD function block

15.10.4 Signals
PID-6189-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 607: SINGLECMD Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block single command function

PID-6189-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 608: SINGLECMD Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Single command output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Single command output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Single command output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Single command output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Single command output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Single command output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Single command output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Single command output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Single command output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Single command output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Single command output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Single command output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Single command output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Single command output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Single command output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Single command output 16

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1007

Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Control

15.10.5 Settings
PID-6189-SETTINGS v6

Table 609: SINGLECMD Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
Steady
Pulsed

15.10.6 Operation principle M12447-3 v3

Single command, 16 signals (SINGLECMD) function has 16 binary output signals.

The outputs can be individually controlled from a substation automation system or
from the local HMI. Each output signal can be given a name with a maximum of
13 characters in PCM600.

The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. This configuration
setting is done via the local HMI or PCM600 and is common for the whole
function block. The length of the output pulses are 100 ms. In steady mode,
SINGLECMD function has a memory to remember the output values at power
interruption of the IED. Also a BLOCK input is available used to block the
updating of the outputs.

The output signals, OUT1 to OUT16, are available for configuration to built-in
functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the IED.

1008 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 16
Scheme communication

Section 16 Scheme communication

16.1 Scheme communication logic for distance or

overcurrent protection ZCPSCH IP15749-1 v3

16.1.1 Identification
M14854-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Scheme communication logic for ZCPSCH - 85
distance or overcurrent protection

16.1.2 Functionality M13860-3 v10

To achieve instantaneous fault clearance for all line faults, scheme communication
logic is provided. All types of communication schemes for permissive
underreaching, permissive overreaching, blocking, delta based blocking,
unblocking and intertrip are available.

The built-in communication module (LDCM) can be used for scheme

communication signaling when included.

16.1.3 Function block M13866-3 v7

ZCPSCH
I3P* TRIP
U3P* CS
BLOCK CHSTOP
BLKTR CRL
BLKCS LCG
CSBLK
CACC
CSOR
CSUR
CR
CRG
CBOPEN

IEC09000004

IEC09000004 V4 EN-US

Figure 498: ZCPSCH function block

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1009

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Scheme communication

16.1.4 Signals
PID-3766-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 610: ZCPSCH Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current group connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage group connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Signal for block of trip output from communication
logic
BLKCS BOOLEAN 0 Block of carrier send in permissive OR and
blocking schemes
CSBLK BOOLEAN 0 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal
CACC BOOLEAN 0 Permissive distance protection zone signal
CSOR BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching distance protection zone signal
CSUR BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching distance protection zone signal
CR BOOLEAN 0 Carrier Signal Received
CRG BOOLEAN 0 Carrier guard signal received
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Indicates that the breaker is open

PID-3766-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 611: ZCPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip output
CS BOOLEAN Carrier Send signal
CHSTOP BOOLEAN Stops the blocking signal to remote end
CRL BOOLEAN Carrier signal received or missing carrier guard
signal
LCG BOOLEAN Loss of carrier guard signal

1010 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 16
Scheme communication

16.1.5 Settings
PID-3766-SETTINGS v7

Table 612: ZCPSCH Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
SchemeType Intertrip - - Permissive UR Scheme type
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
DeltaBlocking
tCoord 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Co-ordination time for blocking
communication scheme
tSendMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Minimum duration of a carrier send
signal

Table 613: ZCPSCH Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Unblock Off - - Off Operation mode of unblocking logic
NoRestart
Restart
DeltaI 0 - 200 %IB 1 10 Current change level in % of IBase for
fault inception detection
DeltaU 0 - 100 %UB 1 5 Voltage change level in % of UB for fault
inception detection
Delta3I0 0 - 200 %IB 1 10 Zero seq current change level in % of
IBase
Delta3U0 0 - 100 %UB 1 5 Zero seq voltage change level in % of
UBase
tSecurity 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Security timer for loss of carrier guard
detection

Table 614: ZCPSCH Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSelector 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

16.1.6 Operation principle

M13893-3 v5

Depending on whether a reverse or forward directed impedance zone is used to

issue the send signal, the communication schemes are divided into blocking and
permissive schemes, respectively.

A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false
tripping than a blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depends

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1011

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Scheme communication

on a received signal for a fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a
blocking scheme.

16.1.6.1 Blocking scheme M13893-6 v7

The principle of operation for a blocking scheme is that an overreaching zone is

allowed to trip instantaneously after the settable co-ordination time tCoord has
elapsed, when no signal is received from the remote IED.

The received signal, which shall be connected to CR, is used to block the zone to
be accelerated to clear the fault instantaneously (after time tCoord). The forward
overreaching zone to be accelerated is connected to the input CACC, see
figure 499.

In case of external faults, the blocking signal (CR) must be received before the
settable timer tCoord elapses to prevent a false trip, see figure 499.

The function can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK. Tripping can
be blocked by activating the input BLKTR. Signal send can be blocked by
activating the input BLKCS.

tCoord
CACC
t TRIP
CR AND

en05000512.vsd
IEC05000512 V1 EN-US

Figure 499: Basic logic for trip signal in blocking scheme

Channels for communication in each direction must be available.

16.1.6.2 Delta blocking scheme GUID-22E3BFAC-82E9-4434-B761-AD63BCFC68D5 v2

In order to avoid delays due to carrier coordination times, the initiation of sending
of blocking signal to remote end is done by a fault inception detection element
based on delta quantities of currents and voltages. The delta based fault detection is
very fast and if the channel is fast there is no need for delaying the operation of the
remote distance element. The received blocking signal arrives well before the
distance element has started. If the fault is in forward direction the sending is
immediately stopped by a forward directed distance, directional current or
directional earth fault element.

The fault inception detection element detects instantaneous changes in any phase
currents or zero sequence current in combination with a change in the
corresponding phase voltage or zero sequence voltage. The criterion for the fault
inception detection is if the change of any phase voltage and current exceeds the
settings DeltaU and DeltaI respectively, or if the change of zero sequence voltage
and zero sequence current exceeds the settings Delta3U0,Delta3I0 respectively.
The schemeType is selected as DeltaBlocking.

1012 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 16
Scheme communication

If the fault inception function has detected a system fault, a block signal CS will be
issued and sent to remote end in order to block the overreaching zones. Different
criteria has to be fulfilled for sending the CS signal:
1. The breaker has to be in closed condition, that is, the input signal CBOPEN is
deactivated.
2. A fault inception should have been detected while the carrier send signal is not
blocked, that is, the input signal BLKCS is not activated.

If it is later detected that it was an internal fault that made the function issue the CS
signal, the function will issue a CHSTOP signal to unblock the remote end.

The received signal, which is connected to the CR input, is not used to accelerate
the release of the overreaching zone to clear the fault instantaneously. The
overreaching zone to be accelerated is connected to the input CACC, see Figure
500.

In case of external faults, the blocking signal (CR) must be received before the
settable timer tCoord elapses, to prevent a false trip, see Figure 500.

The function can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK, block of trip
by activating the input BLKTR, block of carrier send by activating the input
BLKCS.

tCoord
CACC
t TRIP
CR AND

en05000512.vsd
IEC05000512 V1 EN-US

Figure 500: Basic logic for trip signal in delta blocking scheme

Channels for communication in each direction must be available.

16.1.6.3 Permissive underreaching scheme M13893-13 v6

In a permissive underreaching scheme, a forward directed underreaching

measuring element (normally zone1) sends a permissive signal CS to the remote
end if a fault is detected.in forward direction. The received signal CR is used to
allow an overreaching zone to trip after the tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord
in permissive underreaching schemes is normally set to zero.

The logic for trip signal in permissive scheme is shown in figure 501.

tCoord
CACC
t TRIP
CR AND

en05000513.vsd
IEC05000513 V1 EN-US

Figure 501: Logic for trip signal in permissive scheme

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1013

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Scheme communication

The function can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK. Tripping can
be blocked by activating the input BLKTR. Signal send can be blocked by
activating the input BLKCS.

16.1.6.4 Permissive overreaching scheme M13893-22 v6

In a permissive overreaching scheme, a forward directed overreaching measuring

element (normally zone2) sends a permissive signal CS to the remote end if a fault
is detected in forward direction. The received signal CR is used to allow an
overreaching zone to trip after the settable tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord in
permissive overreaching schemes is normally set to zero.

The logic for trip signal in permissive scheme is shown in figure 501.

tCoord
CACC
t TRIP
CR AND

en05000513.vsd
IEC05000513 V1 EN-US

Figure 502: Logic for trip signal in permissive scheme

The function can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK. Tripping can
be blocked by activating the input BLKTR. Signal send can be blocked by
activating the input BLKCS.e.

16.1.6.5 Unblocking scheme M13893-31 v8

In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability of a permissive scheme is overcome

by using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally
create a receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less
reliable power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used.

The unblocking function uses a guard signal CRG, which must always be present,
even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal for a time
longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 503. This
enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal
transmission. The CRG signal is only used in unblocking schemes.

The received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the
security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for
signalling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard
signal is present again.

1014 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 16
Scheme communication

CR
tSecurity CRL
t >1
1
CRG
200 ms 150 ms
t OR t AND
AND
LCG

en05000746.vsd
IEC05000746 V1 EN-US

Figure 503: Guard signal logic with unblocking scheme and with setting
Unblock = Restart

CR
CRL
tSecurity OR
CRG t
1

IEC11000253-1-en.vsd
IEC11000253 V1 EN-US

Figure 504: Guard signal logic with unblocking scheme and with setting
Unblock = NoRestart

The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):

Off The unblocking function is out of operation

No restart Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored
If CRG disappears a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic
There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG)
Restart Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored
It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CRG signal
The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure
If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be recurrent
signalling

16.1.6.6 Intertrip scheme M13893-36 v5

In the direct intertrip scheme, the send signal CS is sent from an underreaching
zone that is tripping the line.

The received signal CR is directly transferred to a trip for tripping without local
criteria. The signal is further processed in the tripping logic.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1015

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Scheme communication

In case of single-pole tripping in multi-phase systems, a phase selection is

performed.

16.1.6.7 Simplified logic diagram M13893-40 v4

The simplified logic diagram for the complete logic is shown in figure 505.

Unblock =Off

CR

Unblock =
OR CRL
NoRestart AND
CRL
Unblock =
tSecurit
Restart
y
CRG 1 t AND

200 ms 150 ms LCG

AND
t OR AND t

SchemeType =
Intertrip

CSUR
tSendMi
n AND
OR

BLOCK AND
CSBLK OR
CRL

Schemetype =
Permissive UR AND CS
OR

tCoord
AND 25 ms
OR
t TRIP
CACC t

Schemetype =
Permissive OR

CSOR OR AND

AND

tSendMin
OR
AND
SchemeType =
Blocking

BLKCS

AND

IEC05000515-2-en.vsd
IEC05000515 V2 EN-US

Figure 505: Scheme communication logic for distance or overcurrent

protection, simplified logic diagram

1016 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 16
Scheme communication

16.1.7 Technical data

M16038-1 v14

Table 615: ZCPSCH technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Scheme type Off -
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
DeltaBlocking
Operate voltage, Delta U (0–100)% of UBase ±5.0% of ΔU
Operate current, Delta I (0–200)% of IBase ±5.0% of ΔI
Operate zero sequence voltage, (0–100)% of UBase ±10.0% of Δ3U0
Delta 3U0
Operate zero sequence current, (0–200)% of IBase ±10.0% of Δ3I0
Delta 3I0
Co-ordination time for blocking (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
communication scheme whichever is greater
Minimum duration of a carrier send (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
signal whichever is greater
Security timer for loss of guard (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
signal detection whichever is greater
Operation mode of unblocking logic Off -
NoRestart
Restart

16.2 Phase segregated scheme communication logic for

distance protection ZC1PPSCH SEMOD141690-1 v2

16.2.1 Identification
SEMOD141699-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Phase segregated Scheme ZC1PPSCH - 85
communication logic for distance
protection

16.2.2 Functionality SEMOD141686-4 v3

Communication between line ends is used to achieve fault clearance for all faults
on a power line. All possible types of communication schemes for example,
permissive underreach, permissive overreach and blocking schemes are available.
To manage problems with simultaneous faults on parallel power lines phase
segregated communication is needed. This will then replace the standard Scheme
communication logic for distance or Overcurrent protection (ZCPSCH) on

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1017

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Scheme communication

important lines where three communication channels (in each subsystem) are
available for the distance protection communication.

The main purpose of the Phase segregated scheme communication logic for
distance protection (ZC1PPSCH) function is to supplement the distance protection
function such that:

• fast clearance of faults is also achieved at the line end for which the faults are
on the part of the line not covered by its underreaching zone.
• correct phase selection can be maintained to support single-pole tripping for
faults occurring anywhere on the entire length of a double circuit line.

To accomplish this, three separate communication channels, that is, one per phase,
each capable of transmitting a signal in each direction is required.

ZC1PPSCH can be completed with the current reversal and WEI logic for phase
segregated communication, when found necessary in Blocking and Permissive
overreaching schemes.

16.2.3 Function block SEMOD155566-4 v2

ZC1PPSCH
BLOCK TRIP
BLKTR TRL1
BLKTRL1 TRL2
BLKTRL2 TRL3
BLKTRL3 CSL1
CACCL1 CSL2
CACCL2 CSL3
CACCL3 CSMPH
CSURL1 CRLL1
CSURL2 CRLL2
CSURL3 CRLL3
CSORL1
CSORL2
CSORL3
CSBLKL1
CSBLKL2
CSBLKL3
BLKCSL1
BLKCSL2
BLKCSL3
CRL1
CRL2
CRL3
CRMPH

IEC06000427-2-en.vsd
IEC06000427 V2 EN-US

Figure 506: ZC1PPSCH function block

1018 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 16
Scheme communication

16.2.4 Signals
PID-3523-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 616: ZC1PPSCH Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Common signal for block of trip output from
communication logic in all phases
BLKTRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for block of trip output from communication
logic in Phase L1
BLKTRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for block of trip output from communication
logic in Phase L2
BLKTRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for block of trip output from communication
logic in Phase L3
CACCL1 BOOLEAN 0 Accelerated Distance protection zone start in
Phase L1
CACCL2 BOOLEAN 0 Accelerated Distance protection zone signal in
Phase L2
CACCL3 BOOLEAN 0 Accelerated Distance protection zone signal in
Phase L3
CSURL1 BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching distance protection zone signal in
Phase L1
CSURL2 BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching distance protection zone signal in
Phase L2
CSURL3 BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching distance protection zone signal in
Phase L3
CSORL1 BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching distance protection zone signal in
Phase L1
CSORL2 BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching distance protection zone signal in
Phase L2
CSORL3 BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching distance protection zone signal in
Phase L3
CSBLKL1 BOOLEAN 0 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal
in Phase L1
CSBLKL2 BOOLEAN 0 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal
in Phase L2
CSBLKL3 BOOLEAN 0 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal
in Phase L3
BLKCSL1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking
schemes in Phase L1
BLKCSL2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking
schemes in Phase L2
BLKCSL3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking
schemes in Phase L3
CRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier signal received in Phase L1
CRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier signal received in Phase L2
CRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier signal received in Phase L3
CRMPH BOOLEAN 0 Carrier Signal received for multiphase fault

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1019

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Scheme communication

PID-3523-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 617: ZC1PPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip output in any of the phase
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip output in Phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip output in Phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip output in Phase L3
CSL1 BOOLEAN Carrier Send in phase L1
CSL2 BOOLEAN Carrier Send in phase L2
CSL3 BOOLEAN Carrier Send in phase L3
CSMPH BOOLEAN carrier Send for multi phase fault
CRLL1 BOOLEAN Carrier signal received in Phase L1
CRLL2 BOOLEAN Carrier signal received in Phase L2
CRLL3 BOOLEAN Carrier signal received in Phase L3

16.2.5 Settings
PID-3523-SETTINGS v5

Table 618: ZC1PPSCH Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation On / Off
On
Scheme Type Off - - Permissive UR Scheme type
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
tCoord 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Trip coordinate time
tSendMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Minimum duration of Carrier Send signal

16.2.6 Operation principle

SEMOD141705-4 v2

Depending on whether a reverse or forward directed impedance zone is used to

issue the send signal, the communication schemes are divided into Blocking and
Permissive schemes, respectively.

A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false
tripping than a blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depends
on a received signal for a fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a
blocking scheme.

The Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection

(ZC1PPSCH) function is a logical function built-up from logical elements. It is a
supplementary function to the distance protection, requiring for its operation inputs
from the distance protection and the communication equipment.

1020 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 16
Scheme communication

The type of communication-aided scheme to be used can be selected by way of the

settings.

The ability to select which distance protection zone is assigned to which input of
ZC1PPSCH makes this logic able to support practically any scheme
communication requirements regardless of their basic operating principle. The
outputs to initiate tripping and sending of the teleprotection signal are given in
accordance with the type of communication-aided scheme selected and the zone(s)
and phase(s) of the distance protection which have operated.

When power line carrier communication channels are used for permissive schemes
communication, unblocking logic which uses the loss of guard signal as a receive
criteria is provided. This logic compensates for the lack of dependability due to the
transmission of the command signal over the faulted line.

16.2.6.1 Blocking scheme SEMOD141705-12 v2

The principle of operation for a blocking scheme is that an overreaching zone is

allowed to trip instantaneously after the settable co-ordination time tCoord has
elapsed, when no signal is received from the remote IED. The received signal (sent
by a reverse looking element in the remote IED), which shall be connected to
CRLx, is used to not release the zone to be accelerated to clear the fault
instantaneously (after time tCoord). The overreaching zone to be accelerated is
connected to the input CACCLx, see figure 507. In case of external faults, the
blocking signal (CRLx) must be received before the settable timer tCoord elapses,
to prevent an unneccesary trip, see figure 507.

ZC1PPSCH can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK, block of trip is
achieved by activating the input BLKTRLx, Block of carrier send is done by
activating the input BLKCSLx.

tCoord 25 ms
CACCLx
t t TRLx
CRLx AND

IEC06000310_2_en.vsd
IEC06000310 V2 EN-US

Figure 507: Basic logic for trip carrier in one phase of a blocking scheme

16.2.6.2 Permissive underreach scheme SEMOD141705-18 v1

In a permissive underreach scheme, a forward directed underreach measuring

element (normally zone1) sends a permissive signal CSLx to the remote end if a
fault is detected in forward direction. The received signal CRLx is used to allow an
overreaching zone (connected to CACCLx) to trip after the tCoord timer has
elapsed. The tCoord is in permissive underreach schemes normally set to zero. The
logic for trip carrier in permissive scheme is shown in figure 508. Three channels
for communication in each direction must be available.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1021

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Scheme communication

tCoord 25 ms
CACCLx t t TRLx
CRLx AND

IEC07000088_2_en.vsd
IEC07000088 V2 EN-US

Figure 508: Basic logic for trip carrier in one phase of a permissive underreach
scheme

16.2.6.3 Permissive overreach scheme SEMOD141705-26 v1

In a permissive overreach scheme, a forward directed overreach measuring element

(normally zone2) sends a permissive signal CSLx to the remote end if a fault is
detected in forward direction. The received signal CRLx is used to allow an
overreaching zone to trip after the settable tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord is
in permissive overreach schemes normally set to zero. The logic for trip carrier is
the same as for permissive underreach, see figure 507.

The permissive overreach scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned
for blocking scheme above. The blocking inputs are activated from the current
reversal logic when this function is included.

Three channels for communication in each direction must be available.

16.2.6.4 Unblocking scheme SEMOD141705-31 v2

In an unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is

overcome by using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to
locally create a carrier receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function
when older, less reliable, power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used. As
phase segregated communication schemes uses phases individually and the PLC is
typically connected single-phase or phase-to-phase it is not possible to evaluate
which of the phases to release and the unblocking scheme has thus not been
supported.

16.2.6.5 Intertrip scheme SEMOD141705-34 v1

In the direct intertrip scheme, the carrier send signal CS is sent from an
underreaching zone that is tripping the line.

The received signal per phase is directly transferred to the trip function block for
tripping without local criteria. The signal is not further processed in the phase
segregated communication logic. In case of single-pole tripping the phase selection
and logic for tripping the three phases is performed in the trip function block.

16.2.6.6 Simplified logic diagram SEMOD141705-38 v2

The simplified logic diagram for one phase is shown in figure 509.

1022 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 16
Scheme communication

SchemeType =
Intertrip

CSURLx

tSendMin AND
OR

BLOCK
AND
CSBLKLx OR
CRLx

Scheme Type =
Permissive UR AND CSLx
OR

tCoord
25 ms
AND t TRLx
OR t
CACCLx

Scheme Type =
Permissive OR

CSORLx OR AND

AND

tSendMin
OR

AND
Scheme Type =
Blocking
BLKCSx

AND

CSL1
CSL2 AND

CSL2
OR CSMPH
CSL3 AND

CSL3
CSL1 AND

CSL1
CSL2 GENERAL
OR
CSL3

IEC06000311_2_en.vsd
IEC06000311 V2 EN-US

Figure 509: Simplified logic diagram for one phase

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1023

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Scheme communication

16.2.7 Technical data

SEMOD166936-2 v7

Table 619: ZC1PPSCH technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Scheme type Intertrip -
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
Co-ordination time for blocking (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
communication scheme whichever is greater
Minimum duration of a carrier send (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
signal whichever is greater

16.3 Current reversal and Weak-end infeed logic for

distance protection 3-phase ZCRWPSCH IP15751-1 v4

16.3.1 Identification
M15073-1 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Current reversal and weak-end infeed ZCRWPSCH - 85
logic for distance protection 3-phase

16.3.2 Functionality M13896-3 v15

The ZCRWPSCH function provides the current reversal and weak end infeed logic
functions that supplement the standard scheme communication logic. It is not
suitable for standalone use as it requires inputs from the distance protection
functions and the scheme communications function included within the terminal.

On detection of a current reversal, the current reversal logic provides an output to

block the sending of the teleprotection signal to the remote end, and to block the
permissive tripping at the local end. This blocking condition is maintained long
enough to ensure that no unwanted operation will occur as a result of the current
reversal.

On verification of a weak end infeed condition, the weak end infeed logic provides
an output for sending the received teleprotection signal back to the remote sending
end and other output(s) for local tripping. For terminals equipped for single- and
two-pole tripping, outputs for the faulted phase(s) are provided. Undervoltage
detectors are used to detect the faulted phase(s).

1024 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 16
Scheme communication

16.3.3 Function block SEMOD53507-9 v6

ZCRWPSCH
U3P* IRVL
BLOCK TRWEI
IRVBLK TRWEIL1
IRV TRWEIL2
WEIBLK1 TRWEIL3
WEIBLK2 ECHO
VTSZ
CBOPEN
CRL

IEC06000287-2-en.vsd
IEC06000287 V2 EN-US

Figure 510: ZCRWPSCH function block

16.3.4 Signals
PID-3521-INPUTSIGNALS v8

Table 620: ZCRWPSCH Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IRVBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function
IRV BOOLEAN 0 Activation of current reversal logic
WEIBLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic
WEIBLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other
protections
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure
function
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL BOOLEAN 0 POR Carrier receive for WEI logic

PID-3521-OUTPUTSIGNALS v8

Table 621: ZCRWPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
IRVL BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic
TRWEI BOOLEAN Trip signal from weak end infeed logic
TRWEIL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from weak end infeed logic in phase
L1
TRWEIL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from weak end infeed logic in phase
L2
TRWEIL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from weak end infeed logic in phase
L3
ECHO BOOLEAN Carrier send by WEI logic

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1025

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Scheme communication

16.3.5 Settings
PID-3521-SETTINGS v8

Table 622: ZCRWPSCH Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CurrRev Off - - Off Operating mode of Current Reversal
On Logic
tPickUpRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Pickup time for current reversal logic
tDelayRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.060 Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and
local trip
WEI Off - - Off Operating mode of WEI logic
Echo
Echo & Trip
tPickUpWEI 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.010 Coordination time for the WEI logic
UPP< 10 - 90 %UB 1 70 Phase to Phase voltage for detection of
fault condition
UPN< 10 - 90 %UB 1 70 Phase to Neutral voltage for detection of
fault condition

Table 623: ZCRWPSCH Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

16.3.6 Operation principle

16.3.6.1 Current reversal logic M16679-3 v8

The current reversal logic can be enabled by setting the parameter CurrRev = On.
The current reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IRV to
recognize the fault on the parallel line in any of the phases.When the reverse zone
has been activated (even if only for a short time), it prevents sending of a
communication signal and tripping through the scheme communication logic after
a settable time tPickUpRev. The prevention will last for tPickUpRev + 10 ms +
tDelayRev after the IREV reset. This makes it possible for the receive signal to
reset before the carrier-aided trip signal is activated due to the current reversal by
the forward directed zone. The logic diagram for current reversal is shown in
Figure 511.

1026 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 16
Scheme communication

BLOCK

IRVBLK
tDelayRev
tPickUpRev 10 ms tPickUpRev IRVL
IRV AND t
t t t

CurrRev = On

IEC05000122-4-en.vsd
IEC05000122 V4 EN-US

Figure 511: Simplified logic diagram for current reversal

By connecting the output signal IRVL to input BLKCS in the ZCPSCH function,
the sending of the signal CS from the overreaching zone connected to CSOR in
ZCPSCH will be blocked. By connecting IRVL to input BLKTR in the ZCPSCH
function, the TRIP output from the ZCPSCH function will be blocked.

The function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which secure that the current
reversal logic will be activated for short input signals even if the pick-up timer is
set to zero.

16.3.6.2 Weak-end infeed logic M16679-8 v11

The weak-end infeed logic (WEI) function sends back (echoes) the received signal
under the condition that no fault has been detected on the weak-end by different
fault detection elements (distance protection in forward or reverse direction).

The WEI function returns the received signal, shown in Figure 512, when:

• The setting parameter WEI is set to either Echo or Echo & Trip.
• No active signal present on the input BLOCK.
• The functional input CRL is active for a time longer than the tPickUpWei
setting. This input is usually connected to the CRL output on the scheme
communication logic ZCPSCH.
• The WEI function is not blocked by the active signal connected to the
WEIBLK1 functional input or to the VTSZ functional input. The later is
usually configured to the VTSZ functional output of the fuse-failure function.
• No active signal has been present for at least 200 ms on the WEIBLK2
functional input. An OR combination of all fault detection functions (not
undervoltage) as present within the IED is usually used for this purpose.
• The weak-end infeed logic also echoes the received permissive signal when
local breaker opens, CBOPEN prior to faults appeared at the end of line.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1027

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Scheme communication

BLOCK
VTSZ
WEIBLK1 OR

tPickUpWEI
CRL AND 50 ms 200 ms
t AND
OR t t
ECHO
200 ms AND
WEIBLK2
t

AND

OR
1500 ms
CBOPEN
t

WEI = Echo

IEC05000123-3-en.vsd
IEC05000123 V3 EN-US

Figure 512: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic — Echo

When an echo function is used in both IEDs (should generally be avoided), a

spurious signal can be looped round by the echo logics. To avoid a continuous
lock-up of the system, the duration of the echoed signal is limited to 200 ms.

An undervoltage criteria is used as an additional tripping criteria, when the tripping

of the local breaker is selected, setting WEI = Echo&Trip. With this setting the
Echo and Trip are working in parallel as in logic shown in Figure 513.

BLOCK
VTSZ
WEIBLK1 OR
tPickUpWEI
CRL AND 50 ms 200 ms
t AND ECHO
OR t t AND
200 ms
WEIBLK2
t

AND

1500 ms
OR
CBOPEN
t
AND

U3P*
UL1<UPN<
UL2 < UPN<
UL3 < UPN<
UPN< 100 ms
OR
AND t
TRWEI
OR

15 ms
TRWEIL1
U3P*
AND t
UL1L2 <UPP< OR
UL2L3 < UPP<
UL3L1 < UPP<
15 ms
UPP< TRWEIL2
AND t
OR

15 ms
OR TRWEIL3
AND t

WEI = Echo & Trip

IEC00000551-TIFF V4 EN-US IEC00000551-TIFF.vsd

Figure 513: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic — Echo&Trip

1028 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 16
Scheme communication

16.3.7 Technical data

M16039-1 v16

Table 624: ZCRWPSCH technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Detection level phase-to-neutral (10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
voltage
Detection level phase-to-phase (10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
voltage
Operate time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
logic whichever is greater
Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
whichever is greater
Coordination time for weak-end (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
infeed logic whichever is greater

16.4 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for

phase segregated communication ZC1WPSCH SEMOD155635-1 v2

16.4.1 Identification
SEMOD156467-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Current reversal and weak-end infeed ZC1WPSCH - 85
logic for phase segregated
communication

16.4.2 Functionality SEMOD156473-5 v3

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication
(ZC1WPSCH) function is used to prevent unwanted operations due to current
reversal when using permissive overreach protection schemes in application with
parallel lines where the overreach from the two ends overlaps on the parallel line.

The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where the apparent power behind the
protection can be too low to activate the distance protection function. When
activated, received carrier signal together with local undervoltage criteria and no
reverse zone operation gives an instantaneous trip. The received signal is also
echoed back to accelerate the sending end.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1029

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Scheme communication

16.4.3 Function block SEMOD157994-5 v2

ZC1WPSCH
U3P* TRPWEI
BLOCK TRPWEIL1
BLKZ TRPWEIL2
CBOPEN TRPWEIL3
CRL1 IRVOP
CRL2 IRVOPL1
CRL3 IRVOPL2
IRVL1 IRVOPL3
IRVL2 ECHO
IRVL3 ECHOL1
IRVBLKL1 ECHOL2
IRVBLKL2 ECHOL3
IRVBLKL3
WEIBLK
WEIBLKL1
WEIBLKL2
WEIBLKL3
WEIBLKOP
WEIBLKO1
WEIBLKO2
WEIBLKO3

IEC06000477-2-en.vsd
IEC06000477 V2 EN-US

Figure 514: ZC1WPSCH function block

16.4.4 Signals
PID-3524-INPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 625: ZC1WPSCH Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic by the fuse-failure
function
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L1
CRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L2
CRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L3
IRVL1 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of current reversal logic in Phase L1
IRVL2 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of current reversal logic in Phase L2
IRVL3 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of current reversal logic in phase L3
IRVBLKL1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function in Phase L1
IRVBLKL2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function in Phase L2
IRVBLKL3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function in Phase L3
WEIBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic
WEIBLKL1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic in Phase L1
WEIBLKL2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic in Phase L2
WEIBLKL3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic in Phase L3
Table continues on next page

1030 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 16
Scheme communication

Name Type Default Description

WEIBLKOP BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other
protection
WEIBLKO1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic in Phase L1 due to operation
of other protection
WEIBLKO2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic in Phase L2 due to operation
of other protections
WEIBLKO3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic in Phase L3 due to operation
of other protections

PID-3524-OUTPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 626: ZC1WPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
TRPWEI BOOLEAN Trip of WEI logic
TRPWEIL1 BOOLEAN Trip of WEI logic in Phase L1
TRPWEIL2 BOOLEAN Trip of WEI logic in Phase L2
TRPWEIL3 BOOLEAN Trip of WEI logic in Phase L3
IRVOP BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic
IRVOPL1 BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic in Phase L1
IRVOPL2 BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic in Phase L2
IRVOPL3 BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic in Phase L3
ECHO BOOLEAN Carrier Send by WEI logic
ECHOL1 BOOLEAN Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase L1
ECHOL2 BOOLEAN Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase L2
ECHOL3 BOOLEAN Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase L3

16.4.5 Settings
PID-3524-SETTINGS v8

Table 627: ZC1WPSCH Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
OperCurrRev Off - - Off Operating mode of Current Reversal
On Logic
tPickUpRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Pickup time for current reversal logic
tDelayRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.060 Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and
local trip
OperationWEI Off - - Off Operating mode of WEI logic
Echo
Echo & Trip
UPE< 10 - 90 %UB 1 70 Phase to Earth voltage for detection of
fault condition
UPP< 10 - 90 %UB 1 70 Phase to Phase voltage for detection of
fault condition
tPickUpWEI 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.010 Coordination time for the WEI logic

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1031

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Scheme communication

Table 628: ZC1WPSCH Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

16.4.6 Operation principle

16.4.6.1 Current reversal logic SEMOD156478-5 v4

The current reversal logic can be enabled by setting the parameter OperCurrRev =
On. The current reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IRVLx to
recognize the fault on the parallel line in any of the phases. When the reverse zone
has been activated (even if only for a short time), it prevents sending of a
communication signal and tripping through the scheme communication logic after
a settable time tPickUpRev. The prevention will last for tPickUpRev + 10 ms +
tDelayRev after the IRVLx reset. This makes it possible for the receive signal to
reset before the trip signal is activated due to the current reversal by the forward
directed zone. The logic diagram for current reversal is shown in Figure 515.

BLOCK

IRVBLKLx
tDelayRev
tPickUpRev 10 ms tPickUpRev IRVOPLx
IRVLx & t
t t t

operCurrRev=On

IEC06000474-3-en.vsd
IEC06000474 V3 EN-US

Figure 515: Simplified logic diagram for current reversal

By connecting the IRVOPLx signal to input BLKCSLx in the ZC1PPSCH

function, the sending carrier send signal CSLx in ZC1PPSCH is blocked. By
connecting the IRVOPLx signal to input BLKTRLx in ZC1PPSCH, the TRIPLx
output in ZC1PPSCH is blocked.

The Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated
communication (ZC1WPSCH) function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which
secure that the current reversal logic will be activated for short input signals even if
the pickup timer is set to zero.

16.4.6.2 Weak end infeed logic GUID-CBFC8E60-748A-49F6-AF73-563E7CFC0653 v3

The WEI function sends back (echoes) the received carrier signal under the
condition that no fault has been detected at the weak end by different fault
detection elements (distance protection in forward and reverse direction).

1032 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 16
Scheme communication

BLOCK
BLKZ
WEIBLKLx 1 ECHOLx-contd
&
tPickUpWEI
CRLx & 50 ms 200 ms
t &
1 t t
ECHOLx
200 ms &
WEIBLKOx
t

&

1
1500 ms
CBOPEN
t

OperationWEI=Echo

IEC07000085-3-en.vsd
IEC07000085 V3 EN-US

Figure 516: Simplified logic for weak-end infeed logic — Echo

The WEI function returns the received carrier signal, shown in Figure 516, when:

• No active signal present on the input BLOCK.

• The input CRLx is active. This input is usually connected to the CRLx output
on the scheme communication logic for distance or Overcurrent protection
(ZCPSCH).
• The WEI function is not blocked by the active signal connected to the
WEIBLKLx input or to the BLKZ input. The latter is usually configured to the
STGEN output of the fuse-failure function.
• No active signal has been present for at least 200 ms on the WEIBLKOx input.
An OR combination of all fault detection functions (not undervoltage) as
present within the IED is usually used for this purpose.
• The weak-end infeed logic also echoes the received permissive signal when
local breaker opens, CBOPEN prior to faults appeared at the end of line.

When an echo function is used in both the IEDs on the protected line (should
generally be avoided), a spurious signal can be looped round by the echo logics. To
avoid a continuous lock-up of the system, the duration of the echoed signal is
limited to 200 ms.

An undervoltage criteria is used as an additional tripping criteria when the tripping

of the local breaker is selected. Setting OperationWEI = Echo &Trip together with
the WEI function and ECHOLx, trip signal TRPWEIx has been issued by the echo
and trip logic which is described in Figure 517.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1033

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Scheme communication

ECHOLx- contd

CBOPEN

U3P*
100 ms
=1
& t
Undervoltage TRPWEI
detection =1
UPE<

15 ms
UPP< TRPWEI1
& t

OperationWEI= Echo & Trip

15 ms
TRPWEI2
& t

15 ms
TRPWEI3
& t

IEC13000278-1-en.vsd

IEC13000278 V1 EN-US

Figure 517: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic – Echo & Trip

16.4.7 Technical data

SEMOD166938-2 v6

Table 629: ZC1WPSCH technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Detection level phase to neutral (10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
voltage
Detection level phase to phase (10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
voltage
Reset ratio <105% at (20-90)% of UBase -
Operate time for current (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
reversal whichever is greater
Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
whichever is greater
Coordination time for weak-end (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
infeed logic whichever is greater

16.5 Scheme communication logic for residual

overcurrent protection ECPSCH IP14711-1 v2

16.5.1 Identification
M14882-1 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Scheme communication logic for ECPSCH - 85
residual overcurrent protection

1034 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 16
Scheme communication

16.5.2 Functionality M13918-4 v11

To achieve fast fault clearance of earth faults on the part of the line not covered by
the instantaneous step of the residual overcurrent protection, the directional
residual overcurrent protection can be supported with a logic that uses
communication channels.

In the directional scheme, information of the fault current direction must be

transmitted to the other line end. With directional comparison, a short operate time
of the protection including a channel transmission time, can be achieved. This short
operate time enables rapid autoreclosing function after the fault clearance.

The communication logic module for directional residual current protection

enables blocking as well as permissive under/overreaching, and unblocking
schemes. The logic can also be supported by additional logic for weak-end infeed
and current reversal, included in Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for
residual overcurrent protection (ECRWPSCH) function.

16.5.3 Function block M13924-3 v5

ECPSCH
BLOCK TRIP
BLKTR CS
BLKCS CRL
CSBLK LCG
CACC
CSOR
CSUR
CR
CRG

IEC06000288-2-en.vsd
IEC06000288 V2 EN-US

Figure 518: ECPSCH function block

16.5.4 Signals
PID-3581-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 630: ECPSCH Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Signal for blocking trip due to communication
logic
BLKCS BOOLEAN 0 Signal for blocking CS in Overreach and Blocking
schemes
CSBLK BOOLEAN 0 Reverse residual overcurrent signal for Carrier
Send
CACC BOOLEAN 0 Signal to be used for tripping by Communication
Scheme
CSOR BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching residual overcurrent signal for
Carrier Send
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1035

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Scheme communication

Name Type Default Description

CSUR BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching residual overcurrent signal for
Carrier Send
CR BOOLEAN 0 Carrier Receive for Communication Scheme
Logic
CRG BOOLEAN 0 Carrier guard signal received

PID-3581-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 631: ECPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal by communication scheme logic
CS BOOLEAN Carrier Send by Communication Scheme Logic
CRL BOOLEAN Carrier Receive from Communication Scheme
Logic
LCG BOOLEAN loss of carrier guard signal

16.5.5 Settings
PID-3581-SETTINGS v6

Table 632: ECPSCH Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
SchemeType Off - - Permissive UR Scheme type, Mode of Operation
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
tCoord 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Communication scheme coordination
time
tSendMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Minimum duration of a carrier send
signal

Table 633: ECPSCH Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Unblock Off - - Off Operation mode of unblocking logic
NoRestart
Restart
tSecurity 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Security timer for loss of carrier guard
detection

1036 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 16
Scheme communication

16.5.6 Operation principle

M13922-4 v5

The four step directional residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC is configured to

give input information, that is directional fault detection signals, to the ECPSCH
logic:

• Input signal CACC is used for tripping of the communication scheme,

normally the start signal of a forward overreaching step of STFW.
• Input signal CSBLK is used for sending block signal in the blocking
communication scheme, normally the start signal of a reverse overreaching
step of STRV.
• Input signal CSUR is used for sending permissive signal in the underreaching
permissive communication scheme, normally the start signal of a forward
underreaching step of STINn, where n corresponds to the underreaching step.
• Input signal CSOR is used for sending permissive signal in the overreaching
permissive communication scheme, normally the start signal of a forward
overreaching step of STINn, where n corresponds to the overreaching step.

In addition to this a signal from the autoreclosing function should be configured to

the BLKCS input for blocking of the function at a single phase reclosing cycle.

16.5.6.1 Blocking scheme M13922-9 v5

In the blocking scheme a signal is sent to the other line end if the directional
element detects an earth fault in the reverse direction. When the forward directional
element operates, it trips after a short time delay if no blocking signal is received
from the opposite line end. The time delay, normally 30 – 40 ms, depends on the
communication transmission time and a chosen safety margin.

One advantage of the blocking scheme is that only one channel (carrier frequency)
is needed if the ratio of source impedances at both end is approximately equal for
zero and positive sequence source impedances, the channel can be shared with the
impedance measuring system, if that system also works in the blocking mode. The
communication signal is transmitted on a healthy line and no signal attenuation will
occur due to the fault.

Blocking schemes are particular favorable for three-terminal applications if there is

no zero-sequence outfeed from the tapping. The blocking scheme is immune to
current reversals because the received signal is maintained long enough to avoid
unwanted operation due to current reversal. There is never any need for weak-end
infeed logic, because the strong end trips for an internal fault when no blocking
signal is received from the weak end. The fault clearing time is however generally
longer for a blocking scheme than for a permissive scheme.

If the fault is on the line, the forward direction measuring element operates. If no
blocking signal comes from the other line end via the CR binary input (received
signal) the TRIP output is activated after the tCoord set time delay.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1037

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Scheme communication

IEC05000448 V1 EN-US

Figure 519: Simplified logic diagram for blocking scheme

16.5.6.2 Permissive under/overreaching scheme M13922-17 v6

In the permissive scheme the forward directed earth-fault measuring element sends
a permissive signal to the other end, if an earth fault is detected in the forward
direction. The directional element at the other line end must wait for a permissive
signal before activating a trip signal. Independent channels must be available for
the communication in each direction.

An impedance measuring IED, which works in the same type of permissive mode,
with one channel in each direction, can share the channels with the communication
scheme for residual overcurrent protection. If the impedance measuring IED works
in the permissive overreaching mode, common channels can be used in single line
applications. In case of double lines connected to a common bus at both ends, use
common channels only if the ratio Z1S/Z0S (positive through zero-sequence source
impedance) is about equal at both ends. If the ratio is different, the impedance
measuring and the directional earth-fault current system of the healthy line may
detect a fault in different directions, which could result in unwanted tripping.

Common channels cannot be used when the weak-end infeed function is used in
the distance or earth-fault protection.

In case of an internal earth-fault, the forward directed measuring element operates

and sends a permissive signal to the remote end via the CS output (sent signal).
Local tripping is permitted when the forward direction measuring element operates
and a permissive signal is received via the CR binary input (received signal).

The permissive scheme can be of either underreaching or overreaching type. In the

underreaching alternative, an underreaching directional residual overcurrent
measurement element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive input
signal CSUR.

1038 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 16
Scheme communication

In the overreaching alternative, an overreaching directional residual overcurrent

measurement element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive input
signal CSOR. Also the underreaching input signal CSUR can initiate sending.

BLOCK
CRL
CR AND
25 ms

t TRIP
0 - 60 s

CACC AND AND t

50 ms
tCoord
t

AND

BLKCS OR CS
AND
Overreach
CSOR AND 25 ms

CSUR OR t

IEC05000280.vsd

IEC05000280 V4 EN-US

16.5.6.3 Unblocking scheme M13922-45 v6

In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome

by using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally
create a receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less
reliable, power line carrier (PLC) communication is used.

The unblocking function uses a guard signal CRG, which must always be present,
even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal for a time
longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 520. This
also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal
transmission.

The received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the
security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for
signaling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard
signal is present again.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1039

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Scheme communication

CR
tSecurity CRL
t >1
1
CRG
200 ms 150 ms
t OR t AND
AND
LCG

en05000746.vsd
IEC05000746 V1 EN-US

Figure 520: Guard signal logic with unblocking scheme

The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):

Off: The unblocking function is out of operation

No restart: Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored
If CRG disappears, a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic
There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG)
Restart Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored
It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CRG signal
The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure
If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be recurrent
signaling

16.5.7 Technical data

M16049-1 v10

Table 634: ECPSCH technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Scheme type Permissive Underreaching -
Permissive Overreaching
Blocking
Communication scheme (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever
coordination time is greater

16.6 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for

residual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH IP14365-1 v4

16.6.1 Identification
M14883-1 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Current reversal and weak-end infeed ECRWPSCH - 85
logic for residual overcurrent protection

1040 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 16
Scheme communication

16.6.2 Functionality
M13928-3 v8

The Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection
(ECRWPSCH) is a supplement to Scheme communication logic for residual
overcurrent protection ECPSCH.

To achieve fast fault clearing for all earth faults on the line, the directional earth
fault protection function can be supported with logic that uses tele-protection
channels.

This is why the IEDs have available additions to the scheme communication logic.
M13928-6 v2

If parallel lines are connected to common busbars at both terminals, overreaching

permissive communication schemes can trip unselectively due to fault current
reversal. This unwanted tripping affects the healthy line when a fault is cleared on
the other line. This lack of security can result in a total loss of interconnection
between the two buses. To avoid this type of disturbance, a fault current reversal
logic (transient blocking logic) can be used.
M13928-8 v5

Permissive communication schemes for residual overcurrent protection can

basically operate only when the protection in the remote IED can detect the fault.
The detection requires a sufficient minimum residual fault current, out from this
IED. The fault current can be too low due to an opened breaker or high-positive
and/or zero-sequence source impedance behind this IED. To overcome these
conditions, weak-end infeed (WEI) echo logic is used. The weak-end infeed echo is
limited to 200 ms to avoid channel lockup.

16.6.3 Function block M13930-3 v6

ECRWPSCH
U3P* IRVL
BLOCK TRWEI
IRVBLK ECHO
IRV
WEIBLK1
WEIBLK2
VTSZ
CBOPEN
CRL

IEC06000289-3-en.vsd
IEC06000289 V3 EN-US

Figure 521: ECRWPSCH function block

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1041

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Scheme communication

16.6.4 Signals
PID-3522-INPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 635: ECRWPSCH Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IRVBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function
IRV BOOLEAN 0 Activation of current reversal logic
WEIBLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI Logic
WEIBLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other
protections
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure
function
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL BOOLEAN 0 POR Carrier receive for WEI logic

PID-3522-OUTPUTSIGNALS v8

Table 636: ECRWPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
IRVL BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic
TRWEI BOOLEAN Trip signal from weak end infeed logic
ECHO BOOLEAN Permissive signal transmitted as echo signal or in
case of weak end infeed

16.6.5 Settings
PID-3522-SETTINGS v9

Table 637: ECRWPSCH Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CurrRev Off - - Off Operating mode of Current Reversal
On Logic
tPickUpRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Pickup time for current reversal logic
tDelayRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.060 Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and
local trip
WEI Off - - Off Operating mode of WEI logic
Echo
Echo & Trip
tPickUpWEI 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Coordination time for the WEI logic
3U0> 5 - 70 %UB 1 25 Neutral voltage setting for fault
conditions measurement

1042 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 16
Scheme communication

Table 638: ECRWPSCH Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

16.6.6 Operation principle

16.6.6.1 Directional comparison logic function M13929-4 v6

The directional comparison function contains logic for blocking overreaching and
permissive overreaching schemes.

The circuits for the permissive overreaching scheme contain logic for current
reversal and weak-end infeed functions. These functions are not required for the
blocking overreaching scheme.

Use the independent or inverse time functions in the directional earth fault
protection module to get backup tripping in case the communication equipment
malfunctions and prevents operation of the directional comparison logic.

Connect the necessary signal from the autorecloser for blocking of the directional
comparison scheme, during a single-phase autoreclosing cycle, to the BLOCK
input of the directional comparison module.

16.6.6.2 Fault current reversal logic M13929-11 v8

The fault current reversal logic uses a reverse directed element, connected to the
input signal IRV, which recognizes that the fault is in reverse direction. When the
reverse direction element is activated the output signal IRVL is activated which is
shown in Figure 522. The logic is now ready to handle a current reversal without
tripping. The output signal IRVL will be connected to the block input on the
permissive overreaching scheme.

When the fault current is reversed on the healthy line, IRV is deactivated and
IRVBLK is activated. The tDelayRev timer delays the reset of the output signal.
The signal blocks operation of the overreach permissive scheme for residual
current and thus prevents unwanted operation caused by fault current reversal.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1043

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Scheme communication

BLOCK

IRVBLK
tDelayRev
tPickUpRev 10 ms tPickUpRev AND t
IRVL
IRV
t t t

CurrRev = On

IEC09000031-4-en.vsd
IEC09000031 V4 EN-US

Figure 522: Simplified logic diagram for current reversal

16.6.6.3 Weak-end infeed logic M13929-24 v10

The weak-end infeed function can be set to send only an echo signal (WEI=Echo)
or an echo signal and a trip signal (WEI=Echo & Trip). The corresponding logic
diagrams are depicted in Figure 523 and Figure 524.

The weak-end infeed logic uses normally a reverse and a forward direction
element, connected to WEIBLK2 via an OR-gate. If neither the forward nor the
reverse directional measuring element is activated during the last 200 ms, the
weak-end infeed logic echoes back the received permissive signal as shown in
Figure 523 and Figure 524. The weak-end infeed logic also echoes the received
permissive signal when CBOPEN is high (local breaker opens) prior to faults
appeared at the end of line.

If the forward or the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the
last 200 ms, the fault current is sufficient for the IED to detect the fault with the
earth fault function that is in operation.

1044 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 16
Scheme communication

CR
BLOCK AND

VTSZ
OR

tPickUpWEI
WEIBLK1
t AND 50 ms 200 ms
AND
OR t t ECHO
200 ms AND
CRL t

WEIBLK2

AND
1500 ms
CBOPEN OR
t

WEI = Echo

IEC09000032-6-en.vsd

IEC09000032 V6 EN-US

Figure 523: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic - Echo

With the WEI= Echo & Trip setting, the logic sends an echo according to the
diagram above. Further, it activates the TRWEI signal to trip the breaker if the echo
conditions are fulfilled and the neutral point voltage is above the set operate value
for 3U0>.

The voltage signal that is used to calculate the zero sequence voltage is set in the
earth fault function which is in operation.

BLOCK

VTSZ
OR

tPickUpWEI
WEIBLK1 t AND 50 ms 200 ms
AND
OR t t ECHO
200 ms AND
t
CRL

AND
WEIBLK2 1500 ms
OR
t

CBOPEN

AND
ST3U0
15 ms TRWEI
a>b AND
3U0> t

WEI = Echo&Trip

IEC09000020-6-en.vsd

IEC09000020 V6 EN-US

Figure 524: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic - Echo & Trip

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1045

Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Scheme communication

The weak-end infeed echo sent to the strong line end has a maximum duration of
200 ms. When this time period has elapsed, the conditions that enable the echo
signal to be sent are set to zero for a time period of 50 ms. This avoids ringing
action if the weak-end echo is selected for both line ends.

16.6.7 Technical data

M16051-2 v11

Table 639: ECRWPSCH technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate mode of WEI logic Off -
Echo
Echo & Trip
Operate voltage 3U0 for WEI trip (5-70)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Operate time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever

logic is greater
Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever
is greater
Coordination time for weak-end (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever
infeed logic is greater

1046 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

Section 17 Logic

17.1 Tripping logic SMPPTRC IP14576-1 v4

17.1.1 Identification
SEMOD56226-2 v7

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Tripping logic SMPPTRC 94

1 -> 0
IEC15000314 V1 EN-US

17.1.2 Functionality M12275-3 v12

A function block for protection tripping and general start indication is always
provided as a basic function for each circuit breaker. It provides a settable pulse
prolongation time to ensure a trip pulse of sufficient length, as well as all
functionality necessary for correct co-operation with autoreclosing functions.

The trip function block includes a settable latch function for the trip signal and
circuit breaker lockout.

The trip function can collect start and directional signals from different application
functions. The aggregated start and directional signals are mapped to the IEC
61850 logical node data model.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1047

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

17.1.3 Function block M12638-3 v7

SMPPTRC
BLOCK TRIP
BLKLKOUT TRL1
TRIN TRL2
TRINL1 TRL3
TRINL2 TR1P
TRINL3 TR2P
PSL1 TR3P
PSL2 CLLKOU T
PSL3 START
1PTRZ STL1
1PTREF STL2
P3PTR STL3
SETLKOUT STN
RSTLKOUT FW
STDI R REV
IEC05000707-4-en.vsdx
IEC05000707 V4 EN-US

Figure 525: SMPPTRC function block

17.1.4 Signals
GUID-2918ECA6-4D98-493F-A33C-2D33DE64AE3B v1

Table 640: SMPPTRC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Blocks circuit breaker lockout output (CLLKOUT)
TRIN BOOLEAN 0 Trip all phases
TRINL1 BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase L1
TRINL2 BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase L2
TRINL3 BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase L3
PSL1 BOOLEAN 0 Functional input for phase selection in phase L1
PSL2 BOOLEAN 0 Functional input for phase selection in phase L2
PSL3 BOOLEAN 0 Functional input for phase selection in phase L3
1PTRZ BOOLEAN 0 Input for phase selective carrier aided trip
1PTREF BOOLEAN 0 Input for phase selective earth fault trip
P3PTR BOOLEAN 0 Prepare all tripping to be three-phase
SETLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for setting the circuit breaker lockout
function
RSTLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout
function
STDIR INTEGER 0 General start direction input

1048 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

GUID-D6B3DFE3-F7DF-4602-B57E-764DC9EB0D4A v1

Table 641: SMPPTRC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip output signal
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
TR1P BOOLEAN Trip single-pole
TR2P BOOLEAN Trip two-pole
TR3P BOOLEAN Trip three-pole
CLLKOUT BOOLEAN Circuit breaker lockout output (set until reset)
START BOOLEAN General start signal
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
STN BOOLEAN Start signal from neutral
FW BOOLEAN General forward signal
REV BOOLEAN General reverse signal

17.1.5 Settings
GUID-6D6424B9-B676-4D9B-949A-33C74BDC5711 v1

Table 642: SMPPTRC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
Program 3 phase - - 1ph/3ph Three ph; single or three ph; single, two
1ph/3ph or three ph trip
1ph/2ph/3ph
tTripMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Minimum duration of trip output signal
tWaitForPHS 0.020 - 0.500 s 0.001 0.050 Secure 3-pole trip when phase selection
failed

Table 643: SMPPTRC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TripLockout Off - - Off Latch TRIP output when SETLKOUT
On input is activated
AutoLock Off - - Off Activate CLLKOUT output when TRIP
On output is activated
tEvolvingFault 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Secure 3-pole tripping at evolving faults

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1049

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

17.1.6 Operation principle M12255-3 v12

The duration of the trip output signal is settable (tTripMin). The pulse length
should be long enough to secure the opening of the circuit breaker.

There is a single input (TRIN) through which all trip output signals from the
protection functions within the IED or from external protection functions via one or
more of the IEDs' binary inputs are routed. It has a single three-phase trip output
(TRIP) to connect to one or more of the IEDs' binary outputs, as well as to other
functions within the IED requiring this signal.

1050 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

Simplified logic where setting

Program = 3 phase
BLKLKOUT

Final Tripping Circuits

3 phase BLKLKOUT TRIP
TRIP
BLOCK TRL1
BLOCK TRIPALL TRIPALL TRL1
TRIN TRL2
TRIN TRIPL1 TRL2
TRINL1 TRL3
TRINL1 TRIPL2 TRL3
TRINL2
TRINL2 TRIPL3 TR1P
TRINL3
TRINL3 SETLKOUT TR2P
1PTRZ TR3P
1PTRZ RSTLKOUT TR3P
1PTREF CLLKOUT
1PTREF CLLKOUT

SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT

Simplified logic where setting

Program = 1ph/3ph
BLKLKOUT
Final Tripping Circuits
BLOCK
TRIP
BLKLKOUT TRIP
1ph/3ph TRL1
TRIPALL TRL1
Phase Segregated TRL2
BLOCK TRIPL1 TRIPL1 TRL2
TRIN TRL3
TRIN L1TRIP L1TRIP TRIPL2 TRIPL2 TRL3
TRINL1 TR1P
TRINL1 L2TRIP L2TRIP TRIPL3 TRIPL3 TR1P
TRINL2
TRINL2 L3TRIP L3TRIP SETLKOUT TR2P
TRINL3 TR3P
TRINL3 P3PTR RSTLKOUT TR3P
PSL1 CLLKOUT
PSL1 CLLKOUT
PSL2
PSL2
PSL3
PSL3
1PTRZ
1PTRZ
1PTREF
1PTREF

P3PTR
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT

Simplified logic where setting

Program = 1ph/2ph/3ph
BLKLKOUT
Final Tripping Circuits
BLOCK
TRIP
BLKLKOUT TRIP
1ph/2ph/3ph TRL1
TRIPALL TRL1
Phase Segregated BLOCK TRIPL1 TRL2
TRIPL1 TRL2
TRIN TRL3
TRIN L1TRIP L1TRIP TRIPL2 TRIPL2 TRL3
TRINL1 TR1P
TRINL1 L2TRIP L2TRIP TRIPL3 TRIPL3 TR1P
TRINL2 TR2P
TRINL2 L3TRIP L3TRIP SETLKOUT TR2P
TRINL3 P3PTR TR3P
TRINL3 RSTLKOUT TR3P
PSL1 CLLKOUT
PSL1 CLLKOUT
PSL2
PSL2
PSL3
PSL3
1PTRZ
1PTRZ
1PTREF
1PTREF

P3PTR
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT

IEC10000266=2=en=Original.vsdx

IEC10000266 V2 EN-US

Figure 526: Simplified logic diagrams with different program modes

SMPPTRC function has separate inputs (TRINL1, TRINL2, TRINL3) which are
used for single-phase and two-phase tripping from the functions which offer phase
segregated trip outputs.

The inputs 1PTRZ and 1PTREF enable single- phase and two-phase tripping for
those functions which do not have their own phase selection capability (i.e. which
have just a single trip output). An example of such a protection function is the

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1051

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

residual overcurrent protection. The SMPPTRC function has two inputs for these
functions, one for impedance tripping (1PTRZ used for carrier-aided tripping
commands from the scheme communication logic), and one for earth fault tripping
(1PTREF used for tripping from a residual overcurrent protection). External phase
selection for these two trip signals shall be provided via inputs PSL1, PSL2 and
PSL3.

A timer tWaitForPHS, secures a three-phase trip command for these two trip
signals in the absence of the external phase selection signals.

The SMPPTRC function has three trip outputs TRL1, TRL2, TRL3 (besides the
three-phase trip output TRIP), one per phase, to connect to one or more of the
IEDs’ binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring these
signals. These three output signals shall be used as trip signals for individual circuit
breaker poles. These signals are important for cooperation with the autorecloser
SMBRREC function.

The SMPPTRC function is equipped with logic which secures correct operation for
evolving faults as well as for reclosing on to persistent faults. A binary input
P3PTR is provided which will force all tripping to be three-phase. This input is
required in order to cooperate with the SMBRREC function.

In multi-breaker arrangements, one SMPPTRC function block is used for each

circuit breaker.

The lockout function

A tripped circuit breaker can be locked out and prevented from closing by the
output close lockout (CLLKOUT). The reset lockout (RSTLKOUT) is the input for
deactivating and resetting the output close lockout CLLKOUT.

CLLKOUT can be set by an external trip signal from another protection function
via the input SETLKOUT or internally via a three-phase trip with the setting
AutoLock = On. If CLLKOUT is set by an external trip signal from another
protection function and setting TripLockout = On, all trip outputs are set true.

The BLKLKOUT input blocks the circuit breaker lockout output CLLKOUT.

Directional data
Merged directional data from application functions can be provided to the trip
function (SMPPTRC) via the start matrix function (SMAGAPC) connected to the
STDIR input.

The directional input signal STDIR is a coded integer signal which may contain up
to 14 individual Boolean signals; see Figure 531:

STDIRX=[b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7, b8, b9, b10, b11, b12, b13, b14]
b0= START (start)
b1= FW (forward)
Table continues on next page

1052 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

b2= REV (reverse)

b3= STL1 (start L1)
b4= FWL1 (forward L1)
b5= REVL1 (reverse L1)
b6= STL2 (start L2)
b7= FWL2 (forward L2)
b8= REVL2 (reverse L2)
b9= STL3 (start L3)
b10= FWL3 (forward L3)
b11= REVL3 (reverse L3)
b12= STN (start N)
b13= FWN (forward N)
b14= REVN (reverse N)

The indications for general start START and phase-wise starts STL1, STL2 and
STL3, and neutral STN and general directional forward FW and reverse REV are
all available as outputs on the trip function.

All start and directional outputs are mapped to the IEC 61850 logical node data
model of the trip function. The time stamping is updated each time an operate or
start signal is changed:
• The common DIR output (general) is mapped as:

dirGeneral
0 unknown
1 forward
2 backward (reverse)
3 both
• The phase wise directional outputs (DIRL1, DIRL2, DIRL3 and DIRN) are
mapped as:

dirPhsA, dirPhsB, dirPhsC, dirNeut

0 unknown
1 forward
2 backward (reverse)

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1053

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

17.1.6.1 Logic diagram M12258-7 v6

tTripMin
BLOCK TRIPALL
OR
AND t

TRINL1
TRINL2
TRINL3
TRIN OR
1PTREF
1PTRZ

IEC05000517=4=en=Original..vsdx
IEC05000517 V4 EN-US

Figure 527: Three-phase front logic — simplified logic diagram

TRIN
TRINL1
L1TRIP
OR
PSL1
AND

TRINL2
L2TRIP
OR
PSL2
AND

TRINL3
L3TRIP
OR
PSL3
AND

-LOOP

OR OR
OR

AND
AND

OR
tWaitForPHS
-LOOP t

OR

1PTREF AND
AND

1PTRZ OR

IEC10000056=4=en=Original.vsdx

IEC10000056 V4 EN-US

Figure 528: Phase segregated front logic

1054 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

tTripMin
BLOCK
OR TRIPL1
L1TRIP AND t OR

tEvolvingFault

t TRIP
AND

L2TRIP
L3TRIP
OR
P3PTR

IEC17000065-2-en.vsdx

IEC17000065 V2 EN-US

Figure 529: Simplified additional logic per phase, Program = 1ph/3ph or

1ph/2ph/3ph

BLKLKOUT

TRIPL1
TRL1
OR

TRIPL2
TRL2
OR

TRIPL3
TRL3
OR

TRIP
TRIPALL OR
OR
-LOOP

OR
AND
TR3P
AND

10 ms To ensure that the

AND fault is single phase TR1P
t

OR 5 ms To ensure that the

fault is two phase TR2P
t

AND

AND

AND OR
OR

-LOOP
AND

-LOOP
AND
AutoLock
CLKLKOUT
OR AND
SETLKOUT OR AND
3ms
RSTLKOUT t

AND
TripLockout

-LOOP

IEC17000066=1=en=Original.vsdx

IEC17000066 V1 EN-US

Figure 530: Final tripping circuits

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1055

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

Directional logic
IntToBits
STDIR START START
in b0
FW STL1
b1
REV STL2
b2
STL1 STL3
b3
FWL1 STN
b4
REVL1
b5
STL2
b6
FWL2 FW
b7
REVL2 BitsToInt
b8 dirGeneral (61850 Standard)
STL3
b9 0 = unknown
FWL3 b0 out
b10 DIR 1 = forward
REVL3 b1 2 = backward (reverse)
b11
STN 3 = both
b12
FWN REV
b13
REVN
b14
b15

BitsToInt dirPhsA (61850 Standard)

0 = unknown
AND b0 out DIRL1
b0 = START 1 = forward
b1 2 = backward (reverse)
b1 = FW
b2 = REV
b3 = STL1 XOR
b4 = FWL1
b5 = REVL1
b6 = STL2 AND
b7 = FWL2
b8 = REVL2
b9 = STL3 BitsToInt dirPhsB (61850 Standard)
b10 = FWL3
0 = unknown
b11 = REVL3 AND b0 out DIRL2
1 = forward
b12 = STN b1 2 = backward (reverse)
b13 = FWN
b14 = REVN
b15 = N/A XOR

AND

BitsToInt dirPhsC (61850 Standard)

0 = unknown
AND b0 out DIRL3
1 = forward
b1 2 = backward (reverse)

XOR

AND

BitsToInt dirNeut (61850 Standard)

0 = unknown
AND b0 out DIRN
1 = forward
b1 2 = backward (reverse)

XOR

AND

IEC16000179-2-en.vsdx

IEC16000179 V2 EN-US

Figure 531: The directional logic

17.1.7 Technical data

M12380-1 v12

Table 644: SMPPTRC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Trip action 3-ph, 1/3-ph, 1/2/3-ph -
Minimum trip pulse length (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever
is greater
3-pole trip delay (0.020-0.500) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever
is greater
Evolving fault delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever
is greater

1056 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

17.2 General start matrix block SMAGAPC

17.2.1 Identification GUID-C6D3DE50-03D2-4F27-82FF-623E81D019F4 v1

Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Generat start matrix block SMAGAPC - -

17.2.2 Functionality GUID-BA516165-96DE-4CD9-979B-29457C7653C0 v3

The Start Matrix (SMAGAPC) merges start and directional output signals from
different application functions and creates a common start and directional output
signal (STDIR) to be connected to the Trip function, see Figure 532.

The purpose of this functionality is to provide general start and directional

information for the IEC 61850 trip logic data model SMPPTRC.

17.2.3 Function block GUID-99B1DF71-F7C4-4954-8688-BC709C3C2A16 v1

SMAGAPC
BLOCK STDIR
STDIR1
STDIR2
STDIR3
STDIR4
STDIR5
STDIR6
STDIR7
STDIR8
STDIR9
STDIR10
STDIR11
STDIR12
STDIR13
STDIR14
STDIR15
STDIR16

IEC16000165-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000165 V1 EN-US

Figure 532: SMAGAPC function block

17.2.4 Signals
PID-6906-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 645: SMAGAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
STDIR1 INTEGER 0 Start direction input 1
STDIR2 INTEGER 0 Start direction input 2
STDIR3 INTEGER 0 Start direction input 3
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1057

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

Name Type Default Description

STDIR4 INTEGER 0 Start direction input 4
STDIR5 INTEGER 0 Start direction input 5
STDIR6 INTEGER 0 Start direction input 6
STDIR7 INTEGER 0 Start direction input 7
STDIR8 INTEGER 0 Start direction input 8
STDIR9 INTEGER 0 Start direction input 9
STDIR10 INTEGER 0 Start direction input 10
STDIR11 INTEGER 0 Start direction input 11
STDIR12 INTEGER 0 Start direction input 12
STDIR13 INTEGER 0 Start direction input 13
STDIR14 INTEGER 0 Start direction input 14
STDIR15 INTEGER 0 Start direction input 15
STDIR16 INTEGER 0 Start direction input 16

PID-6906-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 646: SMAGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
STDIR INTEGER Common start direction output

17.2.5 Settings
PID-6906-SETTINGS v2

Table 647: SMAGAPC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On

17.2.6 Operation principle GUID-02403756-5715-4D6B-9308-540D72979BD0 v2

Start matrix
The Start Matrix function requires that a protection function delivers the directional
output signals in a fixed order to Start Matrix.

A directional input signal STDIRX of the Start Matrix is of type word. Each input
contains 14 individual Boolean signals, which are positioned as, see Figure 534.

STDIRX=[b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7, b8, b9, b10, b11, b12, b13, b14]
b0= START (start)
b1= FW (forward)
b2= REV (reverse)
Table continues on next page

1058 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

b3= STL1 (startL1)

b4= FWL1 (forwardL1)
b5= REVL1 (reverseL1)
b6= STL2 (startL2)
b7= FWL2 (forwardL2)
b8= REVL2 (reverseL2)
b9= STL3 (startL3)
b10= FWL3 (forwardL3)
b11= REVL3 (reverseL3)
b12= STN (startN)
b13= FWN (forwardN)
b14= REVN (reverseN)

The StartMatrix function contains two function: the START criteria and the
DIRECTION criteria, see Figure 533.

The START criteria is to ensure that a forward and reverse signal shall come
together with a start signal to pass through the block. This is done individually for
each protection function connected to the StartMatrix via the STDIRX inputs, see
Figure 534.

All STDIROUT signals are then connected via an OR gate, see Figure 533.

The DIRECTION criteria allow either forward or reverse (phase-wise forward

FWLx or forward neutral FWN or phase-wise reverse REVLx or reverse neutral
REVN) to pass through to the general STDIR output. If both forward and reverse
are active phase-wise (e.g. REVLx=FWLx = True) or at neutral (e.g. FWN = REVN
= True) at the same time, none will be shown, see Figure 535.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1059

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

SMAGAPC
(StartMatrix)

START Criteria
STDIR1
STDIRX STDIROUT

START Criteria
STDIR2
STDIRX STDIROUT

START Criteria
STDIR3
STDIRX STDIROUT
DIRECTION Criteria
STDIR
≥1 STDIRIN STDIR
START Criteria
STDIR4
STDIRX STDIROUT

START Criteria
STDIR5
STDIRX STDIROUT

START Criteria
STDIR6
STDIRX STDIROUT

START Criteria
STDIR7
STDIRX STDIROUT

START Criteria
STDIR8
STDIRX STDIROUT

START Criteria
STDIR9
STDIRX STDIROUT

START Criteria
STDIR10
STDIRX STDIROUT

START Criteria
STDIR11
STDIRX STDIROUT

START Criteria
STDIR12
STDIRX STDIROUT

START Criteria
STDIR13
STDIRX STDIROUT

START Criteria
STDIR14
STDIRX STDIROUT

START Criteria
STDIR15
STDIRX STDIROUT

START Criteria
STDIR16
STDIRX STDIROUT

IEC16000161-2-en.vsdx

IEC16000161 V2 EN-US

Figure 533: The StartMatrix function

1060 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

START Criteria

START (in)
STL1 (in)
STL2 (in) ≥1 START (out)
STL3 (in)
IntToBits STN (in) BitsToint
STDIRX STDIROUT
in b0 START (in) STL1 (out) START (out) b0 out
b1 FW (in) STL2 (out) FW (out) b1
b2 REV (in) STL3 (out) REV (out) b2
b3 STL1 (in) STN (out) STL1 (out) b3
b4 FWL1 (in) FWL1 (out) b4
b5 REVL1 (in) REVL1 (out) b5
&
b6 STL2 (in) FW (in) STL2 (out) b6
b7 FWL2 (in) FWL2 (out) b7
≥1 FW (out)
b8 REVL2 (in) REVL2 (out) b8
b9 STL3 (in) STL3 (out) b9
b10 FWL3 (in) FWL3 (out) b10
b11 REVL3 (in) & REVL3 (out) b11
REV (in)
b12 STN (in) STN (out) b12
b13 FWN (in) ≥1 REV (out) FWN (out) b13
b14 REVN (in) REVN (out) b14
b15 N/A FALSE b15

& FWL1 (out)

FWL1 (in)

& REVL1 (out)

REVL1 (in)

& FWL2 (out)

FWL2 (in)

& REVL2 (out)

REVL2 (in)

& FWL3 (out)

FWL3 (in)

& REVL3 (out)

REVL3 (in)

& FWN (out)

FWN (in)

& REVN (out)

REVN (in)

IEC16000162-2-en.vsdx

IEC16000162 V2 EN-US

Figure 534: The START Criteria function

DIRECTION Criteria

START (in) START (out)

IntToBits STL1 (in) STL1 (out) BitsToint
STDIRIN STL2 (in) STL2 (out) STDIR
in b0 START (in) START (out) b0 out
STL3 (in) STL3 (out)
b1 FW (in) FW (out) b1
STN (in) STN (out)
b2 REV (in) REV (out) b2
b3 STL1 (in) STL1 (out) b3
FW (in)
b4 FWL1 (in) FWL1 (out) b4
b5 REVL1 (in) REVL1 (out) b5
≥1 FW (out)
b6 STL2 (in) STL2 (out) b6
b7 FWL2 (in) FWL2 (out) b7
b8 REVL2 (in) REVL2 (out) b8
b9 STL3 (in) STL3 (out) b9
REV (in)
b10 FWL3 (in) FWL3 (out) b10
b11 REVL3 (in) REVL3 (out) b11
≥1 REV (out)
b12 STN (in) STN (out) b12
b13 FWN (in) FWN (out) b13
b14 REVN (in) REVN (out) b14
b15 N/A FALSE b15
& FWL1 (out)

FWL1 (in)
=1
REVL1 (in)

& REVL1 (out)

& FWL2 (out)

FWL2 (in)
=1
REVL2 (in)

& REVL2 (out)

& FWL3 (out)

FWL3 (in)
=1
REVL3 (in)

& REVL3 (out)

& FWN (out)

FWN (in)
=1
REVN (in)

& REVN (out)

IEC16000163-2-en.vsdx

IEC16000163 V2 EN-US

Figure 535: The DIRECTION Criteria function

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1061

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

STARTCOMB
To make it possible to provide the directional information from a protection
function, a STARTCOMB block is used in between the application function and the
Start Matrix function.

The STARTCOMB function has one block input and 14 Boolean inputs that
convert the 14 Boolean inputs into a WORD output STDIR, see Figure 536.

STDIRX=[b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7, b8, b9, b10, b11, b12, b13, b14]
b0= START (start)
b1= FW (forward)
b2= REV (reverse)
b3= STL1 (startL1)
b4= FWL1 (forwardL1)
b5= REVL1 (reverseL1)
b6= STL2 (startL2)
b7= FWL2 (forwardL2)
b8= REVL2 (reverseL2)
b9= STL3 (startL3)
b10= FWL3 (forwardL3)
b11= REVL3 (reverseL3)
b12= STN (startN)
b13= FWN (forwardN)
b14= REVN (reverseN)

STARTCOMB
BLOCK STDI R
START
FW
REV
STL1
FWL1
REVL1
STL2
FWL2
REVL2
STL3
FWL3
REVL3
STN
FWN
REVN
IEC16000166-2-en.vsdx
IEC16000166 V2 EN-US

Figure 536: STARTCOMB

Protection functions
Some protection functions are provided with start and directional outputs, for
example:

1062 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

• Protection 1: General START, FW and REV

• Protection 2: Phase-wise STLx, FWLx and REVLx (where x = 1, 2 and 3)
• Protection 3: STN, FWN and REVN
• Protection 4: STDIR

Connection example
In Figure 537 below is an example how to connect start and directional signals
from protection functions via STARTCOMB and SMAGAPC to SMPPTRC.

SMAGAPC
STARTCOMB BLOCK STDIR
PROTECTION 1 BLOCK STDIR STDIR1
START START STDIR2
FW FW STDIR3
REV REV STDIR4
STL1 STDIR5
FWL1 STDIR6 SMPPTRC
REVL1 STDIR7 BLOCK TRIP
STL2 STDIR8 BLKLKOUT TRL1
FWL2 STDIR9 TRIN TRL2
REVL2 STDIR10 TRINL1 TRL3
STL3 STDIR11 TRINL2 TR1P
FWL3 STDIR12 TRINL3 TR2P
REVL3 STDIR13 PSL1 TR3P
STN STDIR14 PSL2 CLLKOUT
FWN STDIR15 PSL3 START
REVN STDIR16 1PTRZ STL1
1PTREF STL2
P3PTR STL3
STARTCOMB SETLKOUT STN
BLOCK STDIR RSTLKOUT FW
START STDIR REV
FW
PROTECTION 2 REV
STL1 STL1
FWL1 FWL1
REVL1 REVL1
STL2 STL2
FWL2 FWL2
REVL2 REVL2
STL3 STL3
FWL3 FWL3
REVL3 REVL3
STN
FWN
REVN

STARTCOMB
BLOCK STDIR
START
FW
REV
STL1
FWL1
REVL1
STL2
FWL2
REVL2
STL3
PROTECTION 4
FWL3
-
PROTECTION 3 REVL3
STDIR
STN STN
-
FWN FWN
-
REVN REVN
IEC16000164-2-en.vsdx

IEC16000164 V2 EN-US

Figure 537: Connection example of protection functions using STARTCOMB,

SMAGAPC to SMPPTRC

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1063

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

17.3 Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC IP15121-1 v4

17.3.1 Identification
SEMOD167882-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC - -

17.3.2 Functionality M15321-3 v12

The trip matrix logic TMAGAPC function is used to route trip signals and other
logical output signals to different output contacts on the IED.

The trip matrix logic function has 3 output signals and these outputs can be
connected to physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs
for settable pulse or steady output.

1064 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

17.3.3 Function block SEMOD54400-4 v6

TMAGAPC
BLOCK OUTPUT1
BLK1 OUTPUT2
BLK2 OUTPUT3
BLK3
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32

IEC13000197-1-en.vsd
IEC13000197 V1 EN-US

Figure 538: TMAGAPC function block

17.3.4 Signals
PID-6513-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 648: TMAGAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 1
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 2
BLK3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 3
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1065

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

Name Type Default Description

INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16
INPUT17 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 17
INPUT18 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 18
INPUT19 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 19
INPUT20 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 20
INPUT21 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 21
INPUT22 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 22
INPUT23 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 23
INPUT24 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 24
INPUT25 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 25
INPUT26 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 26
INPUT27 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 27
INPUT28 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 28
INPUT29 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 29
INPUT30 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 30
INPUT31 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 31
INPUT32 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 32

PID-6513-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 649: TMAGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN OR function between inputs 17 to 32
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN OR function between inputs 1 to 32

1066 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

17.3.5 Settings
PID-6513-SETTINGS v4

Table 650: TMAGAPC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
PulseTime 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Output pulse time
OnDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output on delay time
OffDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output off delay time
ModeOutput1 Steady - - Steady Mode for output ,1 steady or pulsed
Pulsed
ModeOutput2 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 2, steady or pulsed
Pulsed
ModeOutput3 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 3, steady or pulsed
Pulsed

17.3.6 Operation principle SEMOD52537-5 v8

The trip matrix logic (TMAGAPC) block is provided with 32 input signals and 3
output signals. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gates in order to
provide grouping of connected input signals to the three output signals from the
function block.

Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules:

1. when any one of first 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical
value 1 the first output signal (OUTPUT1) will get logical value 1.
2. when any one of second 16 inputs signals (INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical
value 1 the second output signal (OUTPUT2) will get logical value 1.
3. when any one of all 32 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value
1 the third output signal (OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1.

By use of the settings ModeOutput1, ModeOutput2, ModeOutput3, PulseTime,

OnDelay and OffDelay the behavior of each output can be customized. The
OnDelay is always active and will delay the input to output transition by the set
time. The ModeOutput for respective output decides whether the output shall be
steady with an drop-off delay as set by OffDelay or if it shall give a pulse with
duration set by PulseTime. Note that for pulsed operation and that the inputs are
connected in an OR-function, a new pulse will only be given on the output if all
related inputs are reset and then one is activated again. For steady operation the
OffDelay will start when all related inputs have reset. Detailed logical diagram is
shown in figure 539

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1067

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

PulseTime

t
&
ModeOutput1=Pulsed
INPUT 1
OUTPUT 1
Ondelay Offdelay
&
³1
³1 t t
INPUT 16

PulseTime

t
&
ModeOutput2=Pulsed

INPUT 17
OUTPUT 2
Ondelay Offdelay
&
³1
³1 t t
INPUT 32

PulseTime
t
&

ModeOutput3=Pulsed

OUTPUT 3
Ondelay Offdelay
&
³1
³1 t t

IEC09000612-3-en.vsd
IEC09000612 V3 EN-US

Figure 539: Trip matrix internal logic

Output signals from TMAGAPC are typically connected to other logic blocks or
directly to output contacts in the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit
breaker(s) the pulse time shall be set to at least 0.150 seconds in order to obtain
satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils.

17.3.7 Technical data

GUID-3AB1EE95-51BF-4CC4-99BD-F4ECDAACB75A v1

Table 651: Number of TMAGAPC instances

Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TMAGAPC 6 6 -

17.4 Logic for group alarm ALMCALH GUID-64EA392C-950F-486C-8D96-6E7736B592BF v1

17.4.1 Identification GUID-64EA392C-950F-486C-8D96-6E7736B592BF v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logic for group alarm ALMCALH - -

1068 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

17.4.2 Functionality GUID-16E60E27-F7A8-416D-8648-8174AAC49BB5 v4

The group alarm logic function (ALMCALH) is used to route several alarm signals
to a common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

17.4.3 Function block GUID-EA192656-71DD-4D44-A1D5-96B1B4937971 v1

ALMCALH
BLOCK ALARM
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16

IEC13000181-1-en.vsd
IEC13000181 V1 EN-US

17.4.4 Signals
PID-6510-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 652: ALMCALH Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1069

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

PID-6510-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 653: ALMCALH Output signals

Name Type Description
ALARM BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

17.4.5 Settings
PID-6510-SETTINGS v5

Table 654: ALMCALH Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On

17.4.6 Operation principle GUID-0405BB7B-7EF7-4546-92CD-F703AA0DD9F4 v2

The logic for group alarm ALMCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and
one ALARM output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate
in order to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output ALARM
signal from the function block.

When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the
ALARM output signal will get logical value 1.

The function has a drop-off delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a
steady signal.

Input 1
200 ms
ALARM
³1 t
Input 16

IEC13000191-1-en.vsd
IEC13000191 V1 EN-US

Figure 540: Group alarm logic

17.4.7 Technical data

GUID-A05AF26F-DC98-4E62-B96B-E75D19F20767 v1

Table 655: Number of ALMCALH instances

Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ALMCALH - - 5

1070 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

17.5 Logic for group warning WRNCALH

17.5.1 Identification GUID-3EBD3D5B-F506-4557-88D7-DFC0BD21C690 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logic for group warning WRNCALH - -

17.5.2 Functionality GUID-F7D9A012-3AD4-4D86-BE97-DF2A99BE5383 v4

The group warning logic function (WRNCALH) is used to route several warning
signals to a common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

17.5.3 Function block GUID-C909E4FB-3F7A-47F7-8988-36B159E2C7B2 v1

WRNCALH
BLOCK WARNING
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16

IEC13000182-1-en.vsd
IEC13000182 V1 EN-US

17.5.4 Signals
PID-4127-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 656: WRNCALH Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1071

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

Name Type Default Description

INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16

PID-4127-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 657: WRNCALH Output signals

Name Type Description
WARNING BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

17.5.5 Settings
PID-4127-SETTINGS v3

Table 658: WRNCALH Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On

17.5.6 Operation principle GUID-71C65C20-7B6C-499F-BFCD-E418AA55F7EC v2

The logic for group warning WRNCALH block is provided with 16 input signals
and 1 WARNING output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR
gate in order to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output
WARNING signal from the function block.

When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the
WARNING output signal will get logical value 1.

The function has a drop-off delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a
steady signal.

INPUT1
200 ms
WARNING
³1 t
INPUT16

IEC13000192-1-en.vsd
IEC13000192 V1 EN-US

1072 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

17.5.7 Technical data

GUID-70B7357D-F467-4CF5-9F73-641A82D334F5 v1

Table 659: Number of WRNCALH instances

Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
WRNCALH - - 5

17.6 Logic for group indication INDCALH

17.6.1 Identification GUID-3B5D4371-420D-4249-B6A4-5A168920D635 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logic for group indication INDCALH - -

17.6.2 Functionality GUID-D8D1A4EE-A87F-46C6-8529-277FC1ADA9B0 v4

The group indication logic function (INDCALH) is used to route several indication
signals to a common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

17.6.3 Function block GUID-9D89E183-449A-4016-AB83-E57C8DDBA843 v1

INDCALH
BLOCK IND
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16

IEC13000183-1-en.vsd
IEC13000183 V1 EN-US

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1073

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

17.6.4 Signals
PID-4128-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 660: INDCALH Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16

PID-4128-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 661: INDCALH Output signals

Name Type Description
IND BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

17.6.5 Settings
PID-4128-SETTINGS v4

Table 662: INDCALH Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On

17.6.6 Operation principle GUID-72B1B4E8-BC6C-4AF7-8B41-058241B944F8 v2

The logic for group indication INDCALH block is provided with 16 input signals
and 1 IND output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in
order to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output IND signal from
the function block.

1074 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the
IND output signal will get logical value 1.

The function has a drop-off delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a
steady signal.

INPUT1
200 ms
IND
³1 t
INPUT16

IEC13000193-1-en.vsd
IEC13000193 V1 EN-US

17.6.7 Technical data

GUID-EAA43288-01A5-49CF-BF5B-9ABF6DC27D85 v1

Table 663: Number of INDCALH instances

Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INDCALH - 5 -

17.7 Basic configurable logic blocks M11396-4 v16

The basic configurable logic blocks do not propagate the time stamp and quality of
signals (have no suffix QT at the end of their function name). A number of logic
blocks and timers are always available as basic for the user to adapt the
configuration to the specific application needs. The list below shows a summary of
the function blocks and their features.

These logic blocks are also available as part of an extension logic package with the
same number of instances.

• AND function block. The AND function is used to form general combinatory
expressions with boolean variables. The AND function block has up to four
inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.

• GATE function block is used for whether or not a signal should be able to pass
from the input to the output.

• INVERTER function block that inverts the input signal to the output.

• LLD function block. Loop delay used to delay the output signal one execution
cycle.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1075

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

• OR function block. The OR function is used to form general combinatory

expressions with boolean variables. The OR function block has up to six inputs
and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.

• PULSETIMER function block can be used, for example, for pulse extensions
or limiting of operation of outputs, settable pulse time.

• RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from
two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or
returns to the state it had before the power interruption. RESET input has
priority.

• SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from
two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or
returns to the state it had before the power interruption. The SET input has
priority.

• TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the
input signal. The timer has a settable time delay.

• XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions with boolean variables.

XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. The
output signal OUT is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are the
same.

17.7.1 AND function block AND IP11013-1 v2

M11453-3 v4

The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The AND function block has up to four inputs and two outputs. One of
the outputs is inverted.

17.7.1.1 Function block

M11452-3 v2

AND
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4

IEC14000071-1-en.vsd
IEC14000071 V1 EN-US

Figure 541: AND function block

1076 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

17.7.1.2 Signals
PID-3437-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 664: AND Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 4

PID-3437-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 665: AND Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

17.7.1.3 Technical data

GUID-D1179280-1D99-4A66-91AC-B7343DBA9F23 v2

Table 666: Number of AND instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
AND 60 60 160

17.7.2 Controllable gate function block GATE IP11021-1 v2

M11489-3 v2

The Controllable gate function block (GATE) is used for controlling if a signal
should be able to pass from the input to the output or not depending on a setting.

17.7.2.1 Function block

M11490-3 v2

GATE
INPUT OUT

IEC04000410-2-en.vsd
IEC04000410 V2 EN-US

Figure 542: GATE function block

17.7.2.2 Signals
PID-3801-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 667: GATE Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to gate

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1077

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

PID-3801-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 668: GATE Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output from gate

17.7.2.3 Settings
PID-3801-SETTINGS v6

Table 669: GATE Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

17.7.2.4 Technical data

GUID-45DF373F-DC39-4E1B-B45B-6B454E8E0E50 v2

Table 670: Number of GATE instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
GATE 10 10 20

17.7.3 Inverter function block INV IP11011-1 v2

17.7.3.1 Function block

M11445-3 v1

INV
INPUT OUT

IEC04000404_2_en.vsd
IEC04000404 V2 EN-US

Figure 543: INV function block

17.7.3.2 Signals
PID-3803-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 671: INV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input

PID-3803-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 672: INV Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output

1078 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

17.7.3.3 Technical data

GUID-0EC4192A-EF03-47C0-AEC1-09B68B411A98 v2

Table 673: Number of INV instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INV 90 90 240

17.7.4 Loop delay function block LLD GUID-05D959B5-A55B-437C-8E8F-831A4A357E24 v2

GUID-64B24094-010D-4B8F-8B7B-DDD49499AAE5 v3

The Logic loop delay function block (LLD) function is used to delay the output
signal one execution cycle, that is, the cycle time of the function blocks used.

17.7.4.1 Function block

GUID-EE44CFDF-C8F7-4870-BD1C-98D9CD91FD97 v4

LLD
INPUT OUT

IEC15000144.vsd
IEC15000144 V1 EN-US

Figure 544: LLD function block

17.7.4.2 Signals
PID-3805-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 674: LLD Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

PID-3805-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 675: LLD Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal delayed one execution cycle

17.7.4.3 Technical data

GUID-B2E6F510-8766-4381-9618-CE02ED71FFB6 v1

Table 676: Number of LLD instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
LLD 10 10 20

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1079

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

17.7.5 OR function block IP11012-1 v3

M11449-3 v2

The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean

variables. The OR function block has up to six inputs and two outputs. One of the
outputs is inverted.

17.7.5.1 Function block

M11448-3 v1

OR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6

IEC04000405_2_en.vsd
IEC04000405 V2 EN-US

Figure 545: OR function block

17.7.5.2 Signals
PID-3806-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 677: OR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 to OR gate
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 to OR gate
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 to OR gate
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 to OR gate
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 to OR gate
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 to OR gate

PID-3806-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 678: OR Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output from OR gate
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output from OR gate

17.7.5.3 Technical data

GUID-35A795D7-A6BD-4669-A023-43C497DBFB01 v3

Table 679: Number of OR instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
OR 78 60 160

1080 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

17.7.6 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER IP11016-1 v2

M11466-3 v3

The pulse (PULSETIMER) function can be used, for example, for pulse extensions
or limiting the operation time of outputs. The PULSETIMER has a settable length.
When the input is 1, the output will be 1 for the time set by the time delay
parameter t. Then it returns to 0.

17.7.6.1 Function block

M11465-3 v4

PULSETIMER
INPUT OUT

IEC04000407-3-en.vsd
IEC04000407 V3 EN-US

Figure 546: PULSETIMER function block

17.7.6.2 Signals
PID-6985-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 680: PULSETIMER Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to pulse timer

PID-6985-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 681: PULSETIMER Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output from pulse timer

17.7.6.3 Settings
PID-6985-SETTINGS v1

Table 682: PULSETIMER Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.010 Time delay of function

17.7.6.4 Technical data

GUID-E05E5FB1-23E7-4816-84F2-1FBFFDFF2B43 v1

Table 683: Number of PULSETIMER instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
PULSETIMER 10 10 20 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1081

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

17.7.7 Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY GUID-9C93669F-078B-49EA-85B8-C4BB6A434734 v1

GUID-4C804DEA-3C83-4C20-82C6-BAD03BD48242 v4

The Reset-set with memory function block (RSMEMORY) is a flip-flop with

memory that can reset or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each
RSMEMORY function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory
setting controls if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the
state it had before the power interruption. For a Reset-Set flip-flop, RESET input
has higher priority over SET input.
Table 684: Truth table for RSMEMORY function block
RESET SET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted last
value value
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1

17.7.7.1 Function block

GUID-50D5A4C0-59BF-44DE-86AC-47640ACD35A7 v3

RSMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC09000294-1-en.vsd
IEC09000294 V1 EN-US

Figure 547: RSMEMORY function block

17.7.7.2 Signals
PID-3811-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 685: RSMEMORY Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

PID-3811-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 686: RSMEMORY Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

1082 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

17.7.7.3 Settings
PID-3811-SETTINGS v5

Table 687: RSMEMORY Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

17.7.7.4 Technical data

GUID-BE6FD540-E96E-4F15-B2A2-12FFAE6C51DB v1

Table 688: Number of RSMEMORY instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
RSMEMORY 10 10 20

17.7.8 Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY IP11020-1 v2

M11485-3 v4

The Set-reset with memory function block (SRMEMORY) is a flip-flop with

memory that can set or reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each
SRMEMORY function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory
setting controls if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the
state it had before the power interruption. The input SET has priority.
Table 689: Truth table for SRMEMORY function block
SET RESET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted
value last value
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 0

17.7.8.1 Function block

M11484-3 v2

SRMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC04000408_2_en.vsd
IEC04000408 V2 EN-US

Figure 548: SRMEMORY function block

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1083

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

17.7.8.2 Signals
PID-3813-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 690: SRMEMORY Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

PID-3813-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 691: SRMEMORY Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

17.7.8.3 Settings
PID-3813-SETTINGS v5

Table 692: SRMEMORY Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

17.7.8.4 Technical data

GUID-7A0F4327-CA83-4FB0-AB28-7C5F17AE6354 v1

Table 693: Number of SRMEMORY instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
SRMEMORY 10 10 20

17.7.9 Settable timer function block TIMERSET IP11022-1 v2

M11494-3 v3

The Settable timer function block (TIMERSET) timer has two outputs for the delay
of the input signal at drop-out and at pick-up. The timer has a settable time delay. It
also has an Operation setting On and Off that controls the operation of the timer.

1084 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

Input
tdelay
On

Off
tdelay

t
IEC08000289-2-en.vsd

IEC08000289 V2 EN-US

Figure 549: TIMERSET status diagram

17.7.9.1 Function block

M11495-3 v3

TIMERSET
INPUT ON
OFF

IEC04000411-2-en.vsd
IEC04000411 V2 EN-US

Figure 550: TIMERSET function block

17.7.9.2 Signals
PID-6976-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 694: TIMERSET Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to timer

PID-6976-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 695: TIMERSET Output signals

Name Type Description
ON BOOLEAN Output from timer, pick-up delayed
OFF BOOLEAN Output from timer, drop-out delayed

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1085

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

17.7.9.3 Settings
PID-6976-SETTINGS v1

Table 696: TIMERSET Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n

17.7.9.4 Technical data

GUID-C6C98FE0-F559-45EE-B853-464516775417 v2

Table 697: Number of TIMERSET instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TIMERSET 15 15 30 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms

17.7.10 Exclusive OR function block XOR IP11018-1 v2

M11477-3 v4

The exclusive OR function (XOR) is used to generate combinatory expressions

with boolean variables. XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is
inverted. The output signal OUT is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they
are the same.
Table 698: Truth table for XOR function block
INPUT1 INPUT2 OUT NOUT
0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 1

17.7.10.1 Function block

M11476-3 v1

XOR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT

IEC04000409-2-en.vsd
IEC04000409 V2 EN-US

Figure 551: XOR function block

1086 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

17.7.10.2 Signals
PID-3817-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 699: XOR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 to XOR gate
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 to XOR gate

PID-3817-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 700: XOR Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output from XOR gate
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output from XOR gate

17.7.10.3 Technical data

GUID-0B07F78C-10BD-4070-AFF0-6EE36454AA03 v1

Table 701: Number of XOR instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
XOR 10 10 20

17.8 Configurable logic blocks Q/T GUID-0CA6511A-E8BD-416E-9B59-5C6BD98C60B7 v5

The configurable logic blocks QT propagate the time stamp and the quality of the
input signals (have suffix QT at the end of their function name).

The function blocks assist the user to adapt the IEDs' configuration to the specific
application needs. The list below shows a summary of the function blocks and their
features.

• ANDQT AND function block. The function also propagates the time stamp
and the quality of input signals. Each block has four inputs and two outputs
where one is inverted.

• INDCOMBSPQT combines single input signals to group signal. Single

position input is copied to value part of SP_OUT output. TIME input is copied
to time part of SP_OUT output. Quality input bits are copied to the
corresponding quality part of SP_OUT output.

• INDEXTSPQT extracts individual signals from a group signal input. The

value part of single position input is copied to SI_OUT output. The time part
of single position input is copied to TIME output. The quality bits in the

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1087

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

common part and the indication part of inputs signal are copied to the
corresponding quality output.

• INVALIDQT function which sets quality invalid of outputs according to a

"valid" input. Inputs are copied to outputs. If input VALID is 0, or if its quality
invalid bit is set, all outputs invalid quality bit will be set to invalid. The time
stamp of an output will be set to the latest time stamp of INPUT and VALID
inputs.

• INVERTERQT function block that inverts the input signal and propagates the
time stamp and the quality of the input signal.

• ORQT OR function block that also propagates the time stamp and the quality
of the input signals. Each block has six inputs and two outputs where one is
inverted.

• PULSETIMERQT Pulse timer function block can be used, for example, for
pulse extensions or limiting of operation of outputs. The function also
propagates the time stamp and the quality of the input signal.

• RSMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output

from two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is
inverted. The memory setting controls if the block after a power interruption
should return to the state before the interruption, or be reset. The function also
propagates the time stamp and the quality of the input signal.

• SRMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output

from two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is
inverted. The memory setting controls if the block after a power interruption
should return to the state before the interruption, or be reset. The function also
propagates the time stamp and the quality of the input signal.

• TIMERSETQT function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to

the input signal. The timer has a settable time delay. The function also
propagates the time stamp and the quality of the input signal.

• XORQT XOR function block. The function also propagates the time stamp
and the quality of the input signals. Each block has two outputs where one is
inverted.

17.8.1 ANDQT function block GUID-E3023D85-FDCC-4A5F-99B4-64DA7B4AC5BB v5

The ANDQT function is used to form general combinatory expressions with

boolean variables. The ANDQT function block has four inputs and two outputs.

1088 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

17.8.1.1 Function block GUID-4CEE3C76-A39D-4C33-AD55-88C570210F2B v2

ANDQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4

IEC09000297-1-en.vsd
IEC09000297 V1 EN-US

Figure 552: ANDQT function block

17.8.1.2 Signals GUID-4543C4C9-FAE2-4328-8DE2-4A5756A020E9 v1

PID-3800-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 702: ANDQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 4

PID-3800-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 703: ANDQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

17.8.1.3 Technical data

GUID-23D4121A-4C9A-4072-BBE3-6DB076EDAB79 v1

Table 704: Number of ANDQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ANDQT - 20 100

17.8.2 Single point indication related signals combining function

block INDCOMBSPQT GUID-13C9325D-D3A0-480F-9F3B-738A13E0ECF8 v3

GUID-EEBD65A5-394C-4ECD-BF6F-D556B610FC57 v3

The value of single point input (SP_IN) is copied to the value part of the SP_OUT
output. The TIME input is copied to the time part of the SP_OUT output. State
input bits are copied to the corresponding state part of the SP_OUT output. If the
state or value on the SP_OUT output changes, the Event bit in the state part is
toggled.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1089

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

INDCOMBSPQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the
signals via IEC 61850.

17.8.2.1 Function block GUID-55B49FC7-8239-4891-BE16-29296A8F40BE v1

INDCOMBSPQT
SP_IN* SP_OUT
TIME*
BLOCKED*
SUBST*
INVALID*
TEST*

IEC15000146.vsd
IEC15000146 V1 EN-US

Figure 553: INDCOMBSPQT function block

17.8.2.2 Signals GUID-4543C4C9-FAE2-4328-8DE2-4A5756A020E9 v1

PID-3792-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 705: INDCOMBSPQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SP_IN BOOLEAN 0 Single point indication
TIME GROUP 0 Timestamp
SIGNAL
BLOCKED BOOLEAN 0 Blocked for update
SUBST BOOLEAN 0 Substitued
INVALID BOOLEAN 0 Invalid value
TEST BOOLEAN 0 Testmode

PID-3792-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 706: INDCOMBSPQT Output signals

Name Type Description
SP_OUT BOOLEAN Single point indication

17.8.2.3 Technical data

GUID-27DF23C0-A0B2-4BB0-80B5-FC7B7F7FE448 v1

Table 707: Number of INDCOMBSPQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INDCOMBSPQT - 10 10

17.8.3 Single point input signal attributes converting function block

INDEXTSPQT GUID-9C3D6C45-6B3A-466C-86A1-3DBCD4809B33 v1

1090 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

GUID-9B700C69-4DAE-434A-BCE6-CE2D1139680A v3

The value part of the single point input signal SI_IN is copied to SI_OUT output.
The time part of single point input is copied to the TIME output. The state bits in
the common part and the indication part of the input signal are copied to the
corresponding state output.

INDEXTSPQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the
signals via IEC 61850.

17.8.3.1 Function block GUID-04AA5209-B919-4161-A585-336CE9618A89 v2

INDEXTSPQT
SI_IN* SI_OUT
TIME
BLOCKED
SUBST
INVALID
TEST

IEC14000067-1-en.vsd
IEC14000067 V1 EN-US

Figure 554: INDEXTSPQT function block

17.8.3.2 Signals GUID-4543C4C9-FAE2-4328-8DE2-4A5756A020E9 v1

PID-3821-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 708: INDEXTSPQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SI_IN BOOLEAN 0 Single indication

PID-3821-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 709: INDEXTSPQT Output signals

Name Type Description
SI_OUT BOOLEAN Single indication
TIME GROUP SIGNAL Timestamp of input
BLOCKED BOOLEAN Blocked for update
SUBST BOOLEAN Substituted
INVALID BOOLEAN Invalid value
TEST BOOLEAN Testmode

17.8.3.3 Technical data

GUID-C1E61AE5-22CF-4198-97CF-8C8043EE96D2 v1

Table 710: Number of INDEXTSPQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INDEXTSPQT - 10 10

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1091

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

17.8.4 Invalid logic function block INVALIDQT GUID-66C6DCEE-1F0E-4EB8-9ADB-97F8B41E53DF v4

Component which sets quality invalid of outputs according to a "valid" input.

The values of the input signals INPUTx (where 1<x<16) are copied to the outputs
OUTPUTx (where 1<x<16). If the input VALID is 0 or if its quality bit is set
invalid, all outputs OUTPUTx (where 1<x<16) quality bit will be set to invalid.
The time stamp of any output OUTPUTx (where 1<x<16) will be set to the latest
time stamp of any input and the input VALID.

INVALIDQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the
signals via IEC 61850.

17.8.4.1 Function block GUID-0BD84306-0965-4702-8D5C-9570A70168EA v1

INVALIDQT
INPUT1 OUTPUT1
INPUT2 OUTPUT2
INPUT3 OUTPUT3
INPUT4 OUTPUT4
INPUT5 OUTPUT5
INPUT6 OUTPUT6
INPUT7 OUTPUT7
INPUT8 OUTPUT8
INPUT9 OUTPUT9
INPUT10 OUTPUT10
INPUT11 OUTPUT11
INPUT12 OUTPUT12
INPUT13 OUTPUT13
INPUT14 OUTPUT14
INPUT15 OUTPUT15
INPUT16 OUTPUT16
VALID

iec08000169.vsd
IEC08000169 V1 EN-US

Figure 555: INVALIDQT function block

17.8.4.2 Signals GUID-4543C4C9-FAE2-4328-8DE2-4A5756A020E9 v1

PID-3822-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 711: INVALIDQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 8
Table continues on next page

1092 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

Name Type Default Description

INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 16
VALID BOOLEAN 1 Inputs are valid or not

PID-3822-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 712: INVALIDQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Indication output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Indication output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Indication output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Indication output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Indication output 5
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Indication output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Indication output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Indication output 8
OUTPUT9 BOOLEAN Indication output 9
OUTPUT10 BOOLEAN Indication output 10
OUTPUT11 BOOLEAN Indication output 11
OUTPUT12 BOOLEAN Indication output 12
OUTPUT13 BOOLEAN Indication output 13
OUTPUT14 BOOLEAN Indication output 14
OUTPUT15 BOOLEAN Indication output 15
OUTPUT16 BOOLEAN Indication output 16

17.8.4.3 Technical data

GUID-77FEBE9B-0882-4E85-8B1A-7671807BFC02 v2

Table 713: Number of INVALIDQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INVALIDQT 10 6 6

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1093

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

17.8.5 Inverter function block INVERTERQT GUID-502064E0-FE2F-43C0-AA40-79D058FC3E1C v4

The INVERTERQT function block inverts one binary input signal to the output. It
can propagate the quality, value and the time stamps of the signals via IEC 61850.

17.8.5.1 Function block GUID-06C5C594-E00B-4FD5-8B0F-4ED05DB348B6 v2

INVERTERQT
INPUT OUT

IEC09000299-1-en.vsd
IEC09000299 V1 EN-US

Figure 556: INVERTERQT function block

17.8.5.2 Signals GUID-4543C4C9-FAE2-4328-8DE2-4A5756A020E9 v1

PID-3804-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 714: INVERTERQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

PID-3804-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 715: INVERTERQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

17.8.5.3 Technical data

GUID-F25B94C6-9CC9-48A0-A7A3-47627D2B56E2 v1

Table 716: Number of INVERTERQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INVERTERQT - 20 100

17.8.6 ORQT function block GUID-F8F8D591-F895-4BCB-ADBD-5F95E7B70FEB v2

GUID-F8AECD9C-83FC-4025-9AB5-809D88122277 v4

The ORQT function block (ORQT) is used to form general combinatory

expressions OR with boolean variables. ORQT function block has up to six inputs
and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. It can propagate the quality, value
and the timestamps of the signals via IEC 61850.

1094 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

17.8.6.1 Function block GUID-BCDFD5F0-4F30-4012-BA49-2E5C2115912E v2

ORQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6

IEC09000298-1-en.vsd
IEC09000298 V1 EN-US

Figure 557: ORQT function block

17.8.6.2 Signals GUID-4543C4C9-FAE2-4328-8DE2-4A5756A020E9 v1

PID-3807-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 717: ORQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 6

PID-3807-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 718: ORQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

17.8.6.3 Technical data

GUID-88B27B3C-26D2-47AF-9878-CC19018171B1 v1

Table 719: Number of ORQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ORQT - 20 100

17.8.7 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMERQT GUID-5CB71BD1-58A0-4A06-9207-6DAE389B5288 v2

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1095

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

GUID-D930E5A7-C564-4464-B97F-C72B4801C917 v4

The pulse timer function block (PULSETIMERQT) can be used, for example, for
pulse extensions or for limiting the operation time of the outputs.
PULSETIMERQT has a settable output pulse length.

When the input goes to 1, the output will be 1 for the time set by the time delay
parameter t. Then it returns to 0.

When the output changes value, the time stamp of the output signal is updated.

The supported “quality” state bits are propagated from the input to the output at
each execution cycle. A change of these bits will not lead to an updated time stamp
on the output.

PULSETIMERQT can propagate the quality, value and the time stamps of the
signals via IEC 61850.

17.8.7.1 Function block GUID-C0490ECF-5C4E-4F17-B628-482694C590D2 v1

PULSETIMERQT
INPUT OUT

IEC15000145.vsd
IEC15000145 V1 EN-US

Figure 558: PULSETIMERQT function block

17.8.7.2 Signals GUID-4543C4C9-FAE2-4328-8DE2-4A5756A020E9 v1

PID-3810-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 720: PULSETIMERQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

PID-3810-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 721: PULSETIMERQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

17.8.7.3 Settings
PID-3810-SETTINGS v5

Table 722: PULSETIMERQT Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.010 Pulse time length

1096 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

17.8.7.4 Technical data

GUID-61263951-53A8-4113-82B5-3DB3BF0D9449 v1

Table 723: Number of PULSETIMERQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
PULSETIMERQT - 10 30 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms

17.8.8 Reset/Set function block RSMEMORYQT GUID-095B2670-610E-47AE-A5D3-F3E7C0A56B65 v2

GUID-32A1B759-2ED8-45B3-8385-762167626CE2 v5

The Reset-set function (RSMEMORYQT) is a flip-flop with memory that can reset
or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORYQT function
block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if, after
a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had before the
power interruption. For a Reset-Set flip-flop, the RESET input has higher priority
than the SET input.

RSMEMORYQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the
signals via IEC 61850.
Table 724: Truth table for RSMEMORYQT function block
RESET SET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted last
value value
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1

17.8.8.1 Function block GUID-BDBFD8BA-9253-4277-96D8-0FF7EE93B56E v1

RSMEMORYQT
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC14000069-1-en.vsd
IEC14000069 V1 EN-US

Figure 559: RSMEMORYQT function block

17.8.8.2 Signals GUID-4543C4C9-FAE2-4328-8DE2-4A5756A020E9 v1

PID-3812-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 725: RSMEMORYQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1097

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

PID-3812-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 726: RSMEMORYQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

17.8.8.3 Settings
PID-3812-SETTINGS v5

Table 727: RSMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

17.8.8.4 Technical data

GUID-94C803B4-6C5A-4072-AB5C-20DDE98C9A70 v1

Table 728: Number of RSMEMORYQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
RSMEMORYQT - 10 30

17.8.9 Set/Reset function block SRMEMORYQT GUID-D910BA2D-07FA-44C5-A820-E0413AD7FD91 v2

GUID-39060D4B-9AA7-4505-9487-88B2CBC534F0 v5

The Set-reset function (SRMEMORYQT) is a flip-flop with memory that can set or
reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORYQT function block
has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if, after a
power interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had before the
power interruption. The SET input has priority.

SRMEMORYQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the
signals via IEC 61850.

Table 729: Truth table for SRMEMORYQT function block

SET RESET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted
value last value
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 0

If Memory parameter is On, the output result is stored in semi-retained memory.

1098 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

17.8.9.1 Function block GUID-8B04BA86-9685-4E73-9C04-3AE74752CDBF v1

SRMEMORYQT
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC14000070-1-en.vsd
IEC14000070 V1 EN-US

Figure 560: SRMEMORYQT function block

17.8.9.2 Signals GUID-4543C4C9-FAE2-4328-8DE2-4A5756A020E9 v1

PID-3814-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 730: SRMEMORYQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

PID-3814-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 731: SRMEMORYQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

17.8.9.3 Settings
PID-3814-SETTINGS v5

Table 732: SRMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

17.8.9.4 Technical data

GUID-341562FB-6149-495B-8A63-200DF16A5590 v1

Table 733: Number of SRMEMORYQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
SRMEMORYQT - 10 30

17.8.10 Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT GUID-582D9F19-9974-40D6-95EB-7BAD72910748 v2

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1099

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

GUID-3830BCA7-4876-481E-B5AC-2104675232E7 v5

The Settable timer function block (TIMERSETQT) has two outputs for delay of the
input signal at pick-up and drop-out. The timer has a settable time delay (t). It also
has an Operation setting On/Off that controls the operation of the timer.

When the output changes value, the timestamp of the output signal is updated. The
supported “quality” state bits are propagated from the input to the output at each
execution cycle. A change of these bits will not lead to an updated timestamp on
the output.

TIMERSETQT can propagate the quality, value and the timestamps of the signals
via IEC 61850.

17.8.10.1 Function block GUID-13589BAE-38AE-46A1-8E9F-94BCD1CBCBF1 v1

TIMERSETQT
INPUT ON
OFF

IEC14000068-1-en.vsd
IEC14000068 V1 EN-US

Figure 561: TIMERSETQT function

17.8.10.2 Signals GUID-4543C4C9-FAE2-4328-8DE2-4A5756A020E9 v1

PID-3816-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 734: TIMERSETQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

PID-3816-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 735: TIMERSETQT Output signals

Name Type Description
ON BOOLEAN Output signal, pick-up delayed
OFF BOOLEAN Output signal, drop-out delayed

17.8.10.3 Settings
PID-3816-SETTINGS v5

Table 736: TIMERSETQT Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n

17.8.10.4 Technical data

GUID-B6231B97-05ED-40E8-B735-1E1A50FDB85F v1

1100 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

Table 737: Number of TIMERSETQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TIMERSETQT - 10 30 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms

17.8.11 Exclusive OR function block XORQT GUID-76ADACC1-A273-4100-BE62-99BCDABFEB7A v2

GUID-62986D87-1690-499E-B8D3-1F51D2DA191E v4

The exclusive OR function (XORQT) function is used to generate combinatory

expressions with boolean variables. XORQT function has two inputs and two
outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. The output signal OUT is 1 if the input
signals are different and 0 if they are equal.
Table 738: Truth table for XORQT function block
INPUT1 INPUT2 OUT NOUT
0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 1

XORQT can propagate the quality, value and time stamps of the signals via IEC
61850.

17.8.11.1 Function block GUID-A685524C-DF12-4BA8-A29C-A027CEAC75E5 v2

XORQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT

IEC09000300-1-en.vsd
IEC09000300 V1 EN-US

Figure 562: XORQT function block

17.8.11.2 Signals GUID-4543C4C9-FAE2-4328-8DE2-4A5756A020E9 v1

PID-3818-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 739: XORQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1101

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

PID-3818-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 740: XORQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

17.8.11.3 Technical data

GUID-1C381E02-6B9E-44DC-828F-8B3EA7EDAA54 v1

Table 741: Number of XORQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
XORQT - 10 30

17.9 Extension logic package IP11362-1 v2

When extra configurable logic blocks are required, an additional package can be
ordered.
GUID-19810098-1820-4765-8F0B-7D585FFC0C78 v7

Table 742: Number of instances in the extension logic package

Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
SLGAPC 10 10 54
VSGAPC 10 10 100
AND 40 40 100
OR 40 40 100
PULSETIMER 20 20 49
GATE — — 49
TIMERSET 30 30 49
XOR 10 10 69
LLD — — 49
SRMEMORY 10 10 110
INV 40 40 100
RSMEMORY 10 10 20

1102 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

17.10 Fixed signals FXDSIGN

17.10.1 Identification
SEMOD167904-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Fixed signals FXDSIGN - -

17.10.2 Functionality M15322-3 v12

The Fixed signals function (FXDSIGN) has nine pre-set (fixed) signals that can be
used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in other
function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating certain logic. Boolean,
integer, floating point, string types of signals are available.

One FXDSIGN function block is included in all IEDs.

17.10.3 Function block SEMOD54909-4 v4

FXDSIGN
OFF
ON
INTZERO
INTONE
INTALONE
REALZERO
STRNULL
ZEROSMPL
GRP_OFF

IEC05000445-3-en.vsd
IEC05000445 V3 EN-US

Figure 563: FXDSIGN function block

17.10.4 Signals
PID-6191-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 743: FXDSIGN Output signals

Name Type Description
OFF BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed off
ON BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed on
INTZERO INTEGER Integer signal fixed zero
INTONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed one
INTALONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed all ones
REALZERO REAL Real signal fixed zero
STRNULL STRING String signal with no characters
ZEROSMPL GROUP SIGNAL Channel id for zero sample
GRP_OFF GROUP SIGNAL Group signal fixed off

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1103

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

17.10.5 Settings
PID-1325-SETTINGS v11

The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

17.10.6 Operation principle SEMOD54827-5 v6

There are nine outputs from FXDSIGN function block:

• OFF is a boolean signal, fixed to OFF (boolean 0) value
• ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value
• INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0
• INTONE is an integer number, fixed to integer value 1
• INTALONE is an integer value FFFF (hex)
• REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed to 0.0 value
• STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value
• ZEROSMPL is a channel index, fixed to 0 value
• GRP_OFF is a group signal, fixed to 0 value

17.11 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I SEMOD175715-1 v1

17.11.1 Identification
SEMOD175721-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I - -

17.11.2 Functionality SEMOD175725-4 v5

Boolean to integer conversion, 16 bit (B16I) is used to transform a set of 16

boolean (logical) signals into an integer.

1104 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

17.11.3 Function block SEMOD175798-5 v4

B16I
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16

IEC07000128-2-en.vsd
IEC07000128 V2 EN-US

Figure 564: B16I function block

17.11.4 Signals
PID-3606-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 744: B16I Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1105

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

PID-3606-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 745: B16I Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT INTEGER Output value

17.11.5 Monitored data

PID-3606-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 746: B16I Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT INTEGER - - Output value

17.11.6 Settings ABBD8E283673 v3

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

17.11.7 Operation principle SEMOD175737-4 v5

The Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) will transfer a combination

of up to 16 binary inputs INx, where 1≤x≤16, to an integer. Each INx represents a
value according to the table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general
formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16. The sum of all the values on the activated INx
will be available on the output OUT as a sum of the integer values of all the inputs
INx that are activated. OUT is an integer. When all INx (where 1≤x≤16) are
activated, that is = Boolean 1, it corresponds to that integer 65535 is available on
the output OUT. The B16I function is designed for receiving up to 16 booleans
input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the output at the last
value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block B16I for 1≤x≤16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the
output OUT on the function block B16I
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
Table continues on next page

1106 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where
1≤x≤16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can
be converted to an integer by the B16I function block.

17.11.8 Technical data

GUID-65A2876A-F779-41C4-ACD7-7662D1E7F1F2 v2

Table 747: Number of B16I instances

Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
B16I 6 4 8

17.12 Boolean to integer conversion with logical node

representation, 16 bit BTIGAPC SEMOD175753-1 v4

17.12.1 Identification
SEMOD175757-2 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Boolean to integer conversion with BTIGAPC - -
logical node representation, 16 bit

17.12.2 Functionality SEMOD175781-4 v8

Boolean to integer conversion with logical node representation, 16 bit (BTIGAPC)

is used to transform a set of 16 boolean (logical) signals into an integer. The block
input will freeze the output at the last value.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1107

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

17.12.3 Function block SEMOD175801-5 v4

BTIGAPC
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16

IEC13000303-1-en.vsd
IEC13000303 V1 EN-US

Figure 565: BTIGAPC function block

17.12.4 Signals
PID-6944-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 748: BTIGAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16

PID-6944-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 749: BTIGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT INTEGER Output value

1108 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

17.12.5 Settings ABBD8E283673 v3

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

17.12.6 Monitored data

PID-6944-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 750: BTIGAPC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT INTEGER - - Output value

17.12.7 Operation principle SEMOD158425-4 v6

The Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function

(BTIGAPC) will transfer a combination of up to 16 binary inputs INx, where
1≤x≤16, to an integer. Each INx represents a value according to the table below
from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16. The
sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available on the output OUT as a
sum of the integer values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an integer.
When all INx (where 1≤x≤16) are activated, that is = Boolean 1, it corresponds to
that integer 65535 is available on the output OUT. If the BLOCK input is activated,
it will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block BTIGAPC for 1≤x≤16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the
output OUT on the function block BTIGAPC.
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1109

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where
1≤x≤16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can
be converted to an integer by the BTIGAPC function block.

17.12.8 Technical data

GUID-3820F464-D296-4CAD-8491-F3F997359D79 v1

Table 751: Number of BTIGAPC instances

Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
BTIGAPC 4 4 8

17.13 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16

17.13.1 Identification
SEMOD167941-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16 - -

17.13.2 Functionality SEMOD158373-5 v6

Integer to boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) is used to transform an integer

into a set of 16 boolean (logical) signals.

1110 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

17.13.3 Function block SEMOD158389-4 v4

IB16
BLOCK OUT1
INP OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16

IEC06000501-3-en.vsdx

IEC06000501 V3 EN-US

Figure 566: IB16 function block

17.13.4 Signals
PID-6938-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 752: IB16 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INP INTEGER 0 Integer Input

PID-6938-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 753: IB16 Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1111

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

Name Type Description

OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16

17.13.5 Setting parameters ABBD8E242451 v3

The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection
and Control IED Manager (PCM600)

17.13.6 Operation principle SEMOD158385-4 v4

With integer 15 on the input INP the OUT1 = OUT2 = OUT3= OUT4 =1 and the
remaining OUTx = 0 for (5≤x≤16).

OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in
accordance with the table IB16_1. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.

In the above example when integer 15 is on the input INP the OUT1 has a value
=1, OUT2 has a value =2, OUT3 has a value =4 and OUT4 has a value =8. The
sum of these OUTx is equal to 1 + 2 + 4 + 8 = 15.

This follows the general formulae: The sum of the values of all OUTx = 2x-1 where
1≤x≤16 will be equal to the integer value on the input INP.

The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) will transfer an integer with
a value between 0 to 65535 connected to the input INP to a combination of
activated outputs OUTx where 1≤x≤16. The sum of the values of all OUTx will
then be equal to the integer on input INP. The values of the different OUTx are
according to the table below. When an OUTx is not activated, its value is 0.

When all OUTx where 1≤x≤16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to
that integer 65535 is connected to input INP. The IB16 function is designed for
receiving the integer input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze
the logical outputs at the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block IB16 for 1≤x≤16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the
output OUT on the function block IB16.
Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 2 0
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 4 0
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 8 0
Table continues on next page

1112 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 16 0
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 32 0
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 64 0
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 128 0
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 256 0
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10 512 0
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11 1024 0
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 2048 0
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 4096 0
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14 8192 0
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15 16384 0
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all OUTx (where
x = 1 to 16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest integer that can be
converted by the IB16 function block.

17.13.7 Technical data

GUID-B45901F4-B163-4696-8220-7F8CAC84D793 v1

Table 754: Number of IB16 instances

Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
IB16 6 4 8

17.14 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node

representation ITBGAPC SEMOD158419-1 v3

17.14.1 Identification
SEMOD167944-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion with ITBGAPC - -
logic node representation

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1113

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

17.14.2 Functionality SEMOD158421-5 v9

Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function (ITBGAPC)

is used to transform an integer which is transmitted over IEC 61850 and received
by the function to 16 boolean (logic) output signals.

ITBGAPC function can only receive remote values over IEC 61850 when the R/L
(Remote/Local) push button on the front HMI indicates that the control mode for
the operator is in position R (Remote i.e. the LED adjacent to R is lit), and the
corresponding signal is connected to the input PSTO ITBGAPC function block.
The input BLOCK will freeze the output at the last received value and blocks new
integer values to be received and converted to binary coded outputs.

17.14.3 Function block SEMOD158435-4 v4

ITBGAPC
BLOCK OUT1
PSTO OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16

IEC14000012-1-en.vsd
IEC14000012 V1 EN-US

Figure 567: ITBGAPC function block

17.14.4 Signals
PID-3627-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 755: ITBGAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 1 Operator place selection

PID-3627-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 756: ITBGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
Table continues on next page

1114 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

Name Type Description

OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16

17.14.5 Settings
GUID-F573CA16-4821-4203-970A-F7D01AF5E63B v1

This function does not have any setting parameters.

17.14.6 Operation principle SEMOD176587-4 v6

An example is used to explain the principle of operation: With integer 15 sent to

and received by the ITBGAPC function on the IEC 61850 the OUTx changes from
0 to 1 on each of the OUT1; OUT2 OUT3 and OUT4. All other OUTx (5≤x≤16)
remains 0. The boolean interpretation of this is represented by the assigned values
of each of the outputs OUT1 = 1; and OUT2 = 2; and OUT3= 4; and OUT4 = 8.
The sum of these OUTx (1≤x≤4) is equal to the integer 15 received via the IEC
61850 network. The remaining OUTx = 0 for (5≤x≤16).

OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in
accordance with the Table 757. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.

The value of each OUTx for 1≤x≤16 (1≤x≤16) follows the general formulae:
OUTx = 2x-1 The sum of the values of all activated OUTx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16
will be equal to the integer value received over IEC 61850 to the ITBGAPC_1
function block.

The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function

(ITBGAPC) will transfer an integer with a value between 0 to 65535
communicated via IEC 61850 and connected to the ITBGAPC function block to a
combination of activated outputs OUTx where 1≤x≤16. The values represented by
the different OUTx are according to Table 757. When an OUTx is not activated, its
value is 0.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1115

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

The ITBGAPC function is designed for receiving the integer input from a station
computer - for example, over IEC 61850. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will
freeze the logical outputs at the last value.
Table 757: Outputs and their values when activated
Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 2 0
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 4 0
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 8 0
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 16 0
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 32 0
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 64 0
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 128 0
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 256 0
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10 512 0
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11 1024 0
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 2048 0
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 4096 0
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14 8192 0
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15 16384 0
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all OUTx
(1≤x≤16) are active equals 65535. This is the highest integer that can be converted
to boolean by the ITBGAPC function block.

The operator position input (PSTO) determines the operator place. The integer
number that is communicated to the ITBGAPC can only be written to the block
while the PSTO is in position “Remote”. If PSTO is in position ”Off” or ”Local”,
then no changes are applied to the outputs.

17.14.7 Technical data

GUID-A339BBA3-8FD0-429D-BB49-809EAC4D53B0 v1

Table 758: Number of ITBGAPC instances

Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ITBGAPC 4 4 8

1116 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

17.15 Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and

overflow supervision TEIGAPC

17.15.1 Identification GUID-1913E066-37D1-4689-9178-5B3C8B029815 v3

Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device

identification identification number
Elapsed time integrator TEIGAPC - -

17.15.2 Functionality GUID-390D7433-0C1C-48B4-9A90-71AA148C3C35 v3

Elapsed Time Integrator (TEIGAPC) function is a function that accumulates the

elapsed time when a given binary signal has been high, see also Figure 568.

BLOCK
RESET
IN Time Integration ACCTIME
with Retain

q-1

a
OVERFLOW
AND
a>b
999 999 s b

a
WARNING
AND
a>b
tWarning b

a
ALARM
AND
a>b
tAlarm b

q-1 = unit delay IEC13000290-2-en.vsd

IEC13000290 V2 EN-US

Figure 568: TEIGAPC logics

The main features of TEIGAPC

• Applicable to long time integration up to 999 999.9 seconds

• Supervision of overflow
• Possibility to define a warning and an alarm with the resolution of 10
milliseconds
• Retain the integration value
• Possibilities for blocking and reset of the total integrated time
• Report of the integrated time

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1117

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

17.15.3 Function block GUID-6D50A060-7751-405B-AEC1-FAE942EBDA64 v2

TEIGAPC
BLOCK WARNING
IN ALARM
RESET OVERFLOW
ACCTIME

IEC14000014-1-en.vsd
IEC14000014 V1 EN-US

Figure 569: TEIGAPC function block

17.15.4 Signals
PID-6836-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 759: TEIGAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Freeze the integration and block the other outputs
IN BOOLEAN 0 The input signal that is used to measure the
elapsed time, when its value is high
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset the integration time

PID-6836-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 760: TEIGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
WARNING BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the
warning limit
ALARM BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the
alarm limit
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the
overflow limit
ACCTIME REAL Integrated elapsed time in seconds

17.15.5 Settings
PID-6836-SETTINGS v2

Table 761: TEIGAPC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
tWarning 1.00 - 999999.00 s 0.01 600.00 Time limit for warning supervision
tAlarm 1.00 - 999999.00 s 0.01 1200.00 Time limit for alarm supervision

17.15.6 Operation principle GUID-04CC8365-DCDE-4DC7-BEF0-6EF8382305DD v3

The elapsed time integrator (TEIGAPC) provides

1118 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

• time integration, accumulating the elapsed time when a given binary signal has
been high
• blocking and reset of the total integrated time
• supervision of limit transgression and overflow, the overflow limit is fixed to
999999.9 seconds
• retaining of the integrated value

Figure 570 describes the simplified logic of the function where the block “Time
Integration“ covers the logics for the first two items listed above while the block
“Transgression Supervision Plus Retain“ contains the logics for the last two.

Loop Delay

tWarning
OVERFLOW
tAlarm
Transgression Supervision WARNING
Plus Retain
ALARM

BLOCK
RESET ACCTIME
Time Integration
IN

Loop Delay

IEC12000195-4-en.vsd

IEC12000195 V4 EN-US

Figure 570: TEIGAPC Simplified logic

TEIGAPC main functionalities

• integration of the elapsed time when IN has been high
• applicable to long time integration (≤999 999.9 seconds)
• output ACCTIME presents integrated value in seconds
• integrated value is retained in nonvolatile memory
• any retained value with a warning/alarm/overflow is used as initiation
value for the integration following by a restart
• RESET: Reset of the integration value. Consequently all other outputs are also
reset
• unconditionally on the input IN value
• reset the value of the nonvolatile memory to zero
• BLOCK: Freeze the integration and block/reset the other outputs
• unconditionally on the signal value
• BLOCK request overrides RESET request
• Monitor and report the conditions of limit transgression

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1119

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

• overflow if output ACCTIME >999999.9 seconds

• alarm if ACCTIME > tAlarm
• warning if ACCTIME > tWarning

The ACCTIME output represents the integrated time in seconds while tOverflow,
tAlarm and tWarning are the time limit parameters in seconds.

tAlarm and tWarning are user settable limits. They are also independent, that is,
there is no check if tAlarm > tWarning.

tAlarm and tWarning are possible to be defined with a resolution of 10 ms,

depending on the level of the defined values for the parameters.

The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 999999.9 seconds. The outputs
freeze if an overflow occurs.

17.15.6.1 Operation accuracy GUID-E0772193-9F6E-43DA-B642-2923565E5D4C v3

The accuracy of TEIGAPC depends on essentially three factors

• function cycle time
• the pulse length
• the number of pulses, that is, the number of rising and falling flank pairs

In principle, a shorter function cycle time, longer integrated time length or more
pulses may lead to reduced accuracy.

17.15.6.2 Memory storage GUID-6FDD6590-30F9-4CC1-AC9D-945544AB8688 v3

The value of the integrated elapsed time is retained in a non-volatile memory.

17.15.7 Technical data

GUID-B258726E-1129-47C9-94F9-BE634A2085FA v3

Table 762: TEIGAPC Technical data

Function Cycle time (ms) Range or value Accuracy
Elapsed time 3 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±20 ms
integration whichever is greater
8 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±100 ms
whichever is greater
100 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±250 ms
whichever is greater

Table 763: Number of TEIGAPC instances

Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TEIGAPC 4 4 4

1120 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

17.16 Comparator for integer inputs INTCOMP

17.16.1 Identification GUID-5992B0F2-FC1B-4838-9BAB-2D2542BB264D v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Comparison of integer values INTCOMP Int<=>

17.16.2 Functionality GUID-A93564FA-0017-4939-A9C1-095DA0FD9832 v1

The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of integer values in the
system relative to each other or to a fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function
that can be used for monitoring, supervision, interlocking and other logics.

17.16.3 Function block GUID-EB28F45B-B1D0-452F-98B4-F96D7FA34069 v1

INTCOMP
INPUT INEQUAL
REF INHIGH
INLOW

IEC15000052-1-en.vsdx
IEC15000052 V1 EN-US

17.16.4 Signals
PID-6928-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 764: INTCOMP Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT INTEGER 0 Input value to be compared with reference value
REF INTEGER 0 Reference value to be compared with input value

PID-6928-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 765: INTCOMP Output signals

Name Type Description
INEQUAL BOOLEAN Input value is equal to the reference value
INHIGH BOOLEAN Input value is higher than the reference value
INLOW BOOLEAN Input value is lower than the reference value

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1121

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

17.16.5 Settings
PID-6928-SETTINGS v2

Table 766: INTCOMP Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
EnaAbs Signed - - Signed Selection for absolute or signed
Absolute comparison
RefSource Set Value - - Set Value Selection for reference value either input
Input REF or setting
SetValue -2000000000 - - 1 100 Set value for reference
2000000000

17.16.6 Monitored data

PID-6928-MONITOREDDATA v1

Table 767: INTCOMP Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
INEQUAL BOOLEAN - - Input value is equal to
the reference value
INHIGH BOOLEAN - - Input value is higher
than the reference value
INLOW BOOLEAN - - Input value is lower than
the reference value

17.16.7 Operation principle GUID-E9C1B863-ACA7-45C0-91F1-A51FE38755FE v2

The comparison can be done in two ways,

• Between 2 inputs, INPUT and REF

• Between INPUT and the value set by the user SetValue.

The selection of reference value for comparison can be done through setting
RefSource. If RefSource is selected as Input REF then the reference value for
comparison is taken from second input signal (REF). If RefSource is selected as Set
Value then the reference value for comparison is taken from setting (SetValue).

The comparison can be done either between absolute values or signed values and it
depends on the setting EnaAbs. If EnaAbs is selected as Absolute then both input
and reference value is converted into absolute values and comparison is done. If
EnaAbs is selected as Signed then the comparison is done without any conversion.

The function has three state outputs high, low and equal to condition. It will check
the following condition and give corresponding outputs.

• If the input is above the reference value then INHIGH is set HIGH
• If the input is below the reference value then INLOW is set HIGH
• If the input is equal to reference value then INEQUAL is set HIGH

1122 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

EnaAbs
INPUT ABS T a
F
INHIGH
a>b
b

a INEQUAL
a=b
b
RefSource

REF ABS T
T
SetValue
F a INLOW
F a<b
b

IEC15000129-3-en.vsdx
IEC15000129 V4 EN-US

Figure 571: Function logic diagram for INTCOMP

17.16.8 Technical data GUID-CEA332FF-838D-42B7-AEFC-C1E87809825E v2

Table 768: Number of INTCOMP instances

Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INTCOMP 10 10 10

17.17 Comparator for real inputs REALCOMP

17.17.1 Identification GUID-0D68E846-5A15-4C2C-91A2-F81A74034E81 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Comparator for real inputs REALCOMP Real<=>

17.17.2 Functionality GUID-E17A88D7-D095-4F36-9CD5-64EBFD2A1DEA v1

The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of real value signals in the
system relative to each other or to a fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function
that can be used for monitoring, supervision, interlocking and other logics.

17.17.3 Function block GUID-8752DF2A-D131-4461-80C6-C52F9980D228 v1

REALCOMP
INPUT INEQUAL
REF INHIGH
INLOW

IEC15000053-1-en.vsdx
IEC15000053 V1 EN-US

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1123

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

17.17.4 Signals
PID-6897-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 769: REALCOMP Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT REAL 0.000 Input value to be compared with reference value
REF REAL 0.000 Reference value to be compared with input value

PID-6897-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 770: REALCOMP Output signals

Name Type Description
INEQUAL BOOLEAN Input value is equal to the reference value
INHIGH BOOLEAN Input value is higher than the reference value
INLOW BOOLEAN Input value is lower than the reference value

17.17.5 Settings
PID-6897-SETTINGS v2

Table 771: REALCOMP Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
EnaAbs Signed - - Signed Selection for absolute or signed
Absolute comparison
RefSource Set Value - - Set Value Selection for reference value either input
Input REF or setting
SetValue -999.999 - 999.999 - 0.001 0.001 Set value for reference
SetValPrefix milli - - unit Multiplication factor for SetValue
unit
kilo
Mega
Giga
EqualBandHigh 0.10 - 10.00 % 0.01 0.50 Equal band high limit in % of reference
value
EqualBandLow 0.10 - 10.00 % 0.01 0.50 Equal band low limit in % of reference
value

17.17.6 Operation principle GUID-3FA699A8-D076-4E5E-BCB8-C6B7907573D1 v2

The comparison can be done in two ways,

1. Between 2 inputs, INPUT and REF

2. Between INPUT and the SetValue setting

The selection of reference value for comparison can be done through setting
RefSource. If RefSource is selected as Input REF then the reference value for

1124 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 17
Logic

comparison is taken from second input signal (REF). If RefSource is selected as Set
Value then the reference value for comparison is taken from setting (SetValue).

Generally the inputs to the function are in SI units, but when the comparison is to
be done with respect to set level, then the user can set a value in any unit out of
Milli to Giga range in setting SetValue. The unit can be separately set with setting
RefPrefix. Internally the function handles the reference value for comparator as
SetValue*RefPrefix.

Additionally the comparison can be done either between absolute values or signed
values and it depends on the setting EnaAbs. If EnaAbs is selected as Absolute then
both input and reference value is converted into absolute values and then
comparison is done. If EnaAbs is selected as Signed then the comparison is done
without absolute conversion.

EnaAbs
INPUT
ABS T
F
High
Comparator
EqualBandHigh INHIGH

RefSource XOR INEQUAL

REF ABS T
T
F Low
SetValue F comparator
INLOW
SetValPrefix

EqualBandLow

IEC15000130-2-en.vsdx
IEC15000130 V2 EN-US

Figure 572: Logic diagram for REALCOMP

This function has two settings EqualBandHigh and EqualBandLow to provide

margins from reference value for equal to condition. When the INPUT value is
within high and low band, output INEQUAL will get set.

In order to avoid oscillations at boundary conditions of equal band low limit and
high limit, hysteresis has been provided. If the INPUT is above the equal high level
margin including hysteresis, then INHIGH will set. Similarly if the INPUT is
below the equal low level margin including hysteresis, then INLOW will set.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1125

Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Logic

INEQUAL Reset / INHIGH Set INEQUAL Set / INHIGH Reset

EqualBandHigh

Internal
Equal Band REF or SetValue Hysteresis for
equal band

EqualBandLow

INEQUAL Reset / INLOW Set INEQUAL Set / INLOW Reset

IEC15000261-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000261 V1 EN-US

Figure 573: Operation principle of REALCOMP

When EnaAbs is set as absolute comparison and SetValue is set less

than 0.2% of the set unit then INLOW output will never pickups.
During the above mentioned condition, due to marginal value for
avoiding oscillations of function outputs, the INLOW output will
never set.

17.17.7 Technical data

GUID-62792FCB-B436-4034-9A08-C9FF918FF547 v1

REALCOMP function can compare the values from milli value level to giga value
level and the maximum expectable accuracy level from the function is 10 µ.
GUID-3FDD7677-1D86-42AD-A545-B66081C49B47 v3

Table 772: Number of REALCOMP instances

Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
REALCOMP 10 10 10

1126 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Section 18 Monitoring

18.1 Measurements IP14593-1 v3

18.1.1 Identification
SEMOD56123-2 v8

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Power system measurements CVMMXN -
P, Q, S, I, U, f

SYMBOL-RR V1 EN-US

Phase current measurement CMMXU -

SYMBOL-SS V1 EN-US

Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU -

SYMBOL-UU V1 EN-US

Current sequence component CMSQI -

measurement
I1, I2, I0

SYMBOL-VV V1 EN-US

Voltage sequence component VMSQI -

measurement
U1, U2, U0

SYMBOL-TT V1 EN-US

Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU -

SYMBOL-UU V1 EN-US

18.1.2 Functionality SEMOD54488-4 v12

Measurement functions are used for power system measurement, supervision and
reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for
example, via IEC 61850. The possibility to continuously monitor measured values
of active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is
vital for efficient production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1127

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

provides to the system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the
power system. Additionally, it can be used during testing and commissioning of
protection and control IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of
instrument transformers (CTs and VTs). During normal service by periodic
comparison of the measured value from the IED with other independent meters the
proper operation of the IED analog measurement chain can be verified. Finally, it
can be used to verify proper direction orientation for distance or directional
overcurrent protection function.

The available measured values from an IED are depending on the

actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in
PCM600.

All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low
limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also
supported, that is, the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which
reduces the impact of noise in the inputs.

Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level
when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all
changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure
value can also be based on periodic reporting.

Main menu/Measurement/Monitoring/Service values/CVMMXN

The measurement function, CVMMXN, provides the following power system

quantities:

• P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power

• PF: power factor
• U: phase-to-phase voltage amplitude
• I: phase current amplitude
• F: power system frequency

,
The measuring functions CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU provide physical
quantities:

• I: phase currents (amplitude and angle) (CMMXU)

• U: voltages (phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase voltage, amplitude and angle)
(VMMXU, VNMMXU)

The CVMMXN function calculates three-phase power quantities by using

fundamental frequency phasors (DFT values) of the measured current and voltage
signals. The measured power quantities are available either, as instantaneously
calculated quantities or, averaged values over a period of time (low pass filtered)
depending on the selected settings.

1128 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5
presentation. This is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30
and 100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.

The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual

hardware, (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequence component

quantities:

• I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, amplitude and angle)

• U: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, amplitude and
angle).

18.1.3 Function block SEMOD130334-4 v7

The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware
(TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

CVMMXN
I3P* S
U3P* S_RANGE
P_INST
P
P_RANGE
Q_INST
Q
Q_RANGE
PF
PF_RANGE
ILAG
ILEAD
U
U_RANGE
I
I_RANGE
F
F_RANGE

IEC10000016-1-en.vsd
IEC10000016 V1 EN-US

Figure 574: CVMMXN function block

CMMXU
I3P* IL1
IL1RANG
IL1ANGL
IL2
IL2RANG
IL2ANGL
IL3
IL3RANG
IL3ANGL

IEC05000699-2-en.vsd
IEC05000699 V2 EN-US

Figure 575: CMMXU function block

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1129

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

VMMXU
U3P* UL12
UL12RANG
UL12ANGL
UL23
UL23RANG
UL23ANGL
UL31
UL31RANG
UL31ANGL

IEC05000701-2-en.vsd
IEC05000701 V2 EN-US

Figure 576: VMMXU function block

CMSQI
I3P* 3I0
3I0RANG
3I0ANGL
I1
I1RANG
I1ANGL
I2
I2RANG
I2ANGL

IEC05000703-2-en.vsd
IEC05000703 V2 EN-US

Figure 577: CMSQI function block

VMSQI
U3P* 3U0
3U0RANG
3U0ANGL
U1
U1RANG
U1ANGL
U2
U2RANG
U2ANGL

IEC05000704-2-en.vsd
IEC05000704 V2 EN-US

Figure 578: VMSQI function block

VNMMXU
U3P* UL1
UL1RANG
UL1ANGL
UL2
UL2RANG
UL2ANGL
UL3
UL3RANG
UL3ANGL

IEC09000850-1-en.vsd
IEC09000850 V1 EN-US

Figure 579: VNMMXU function block

1130 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

18.1.4 Signals
PID-6713-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 773: CVMMXN Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL

PID-6713-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 774: CVMMXN Output signals

Name Type Description
S REAL Apparent Power magnitude of deadband value
S_RANGE INTEGER Apparent Power range
P_INST REAL Active Power
P REAL Active Power magnitude of deadband value
P_RANGE INTEGER Active Power range
Q_INST REAL Reactive Power
Q REAL Reactive Power magnitude of deadband value
Q_RANGE INTEGER Reactive Power range
PF REAL Power Factor magnitude of deadband value
PF_RANGE INTEGER Power Factor range
ILAG BOOLEAN Current is lagging voltage
ILEAD BOOLEAN Current is leading voltage
U REAL Calculated voltage magnitude of deadband value
U_RANGE INTEGER Calculated voltage range
I REAL Calculated current magnitude of deadband value
I_RANGE INTEGER Calculated current range
F REAL System frequency magnitude of deadband value
F_RANGE INTEGER System frequency range

PID-6735-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 775: CMMXU Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1131

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

PID-6735-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 776: CMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
IL1 REAL IL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL1RANG INTEGER IL1 Amplitude range
IL1ANGL REAL IL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
IL2 REAL IL2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL2RANG INTEGER IL2 Amplitude range
IL2ANGL REAL IL2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
IL3 REAL IL3 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL3RANG INTEGER IL3 Amplitude range
IL3ANGL REAL IL3 Angle, magnitude of reported value

PID-6738-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 777: VMMXU Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL

PID-6738-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 778: VMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
UL12 REAL UL12 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL12RANG INTEGER UL12 Amplitude range
UL12ANGL REAL UL12 Angle, magnitude of reported value
UL23 REAL UL23 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL23RANG INTEGER UL23 Amplitude range
UL23ANGL REAL UL23 Angle, magnitude of reported value
UL31 REAL UL31 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL31RANG INTEGER UL31 Amplitude range
UL31ANGL REAL UL31 Angle, magnitude of reported value

PID-6736-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 779: CMSQI Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL

1132 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

PID-6736-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 780: CMSQI Output signals

Name Type Description
3I0 REAL 3I0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
3I0RANG INTEGER 3I0 Amplitude range
3I0ANGL REAL 3I0 Angle, magnitude of reported value
I1 REAL I1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I1RANG INTEGER I1 Amplitude range
I1ANGL REAL I1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
I2 REAL I2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I2RANG INTEGER I2 Amplitude range
I2ANGL REAL I2 Angle, magnitude of reported value

PID-6739-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 781: VMSQI Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL

PID-6739-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 782: VMSQI Output signals

Name Type Description
3U0 REAL 3U0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
3U0RANG INTEGER 3U0 Amplitude range
3U0ANGL REAL 3U0 Angle, magnitude of reported value
U1 REAL U1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U1RANG INTEGER U1 Amplitude range
U1ANGL REAL U1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
U2 REAL U2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U2RANG INTEGER U2 Amplitude range
U2ANGL REAL U2 Angle, magnitude of reported value

PID-6737-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 783: VNMMXU Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1133

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

PID-6737-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 784: VNMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
UL1 REAL UL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL1RANG INTEGER UL1 Amplitude range
UL1ANGL REAL UL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
UL2 REAL UL2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL2RANG INTEGER UL2 Amplitude range
UL2ANGL REAL UL2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
UL3 REAL UL3 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL3RANG INTEGER UL3 Amplitude range
UL3ANGL REAL UL3 Angle, magnitude of reported value

18.1.5 Settings SEMOD130322-4 v7

The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are
depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in
PCM600.

These six functions are not handled as a group, so parameter settings are only
available in the first setting group.

The following terms are used in the Unit and Description columns:

• UBase (UB): Base voltage in primary kV. This voltage is used as reference for
voltage setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary
voltage supervised object.
• IBase (IB): Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for
current setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary
current of the supervised object.
• SBase (SB): Base setting for power values in MVA.

PID-6713-SETTINGS v3

Table 785: CVMMXN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of SBase
SLowLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
SMin 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
SMax 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
SRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
Table continues on next page

1134 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

PMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
PMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
PRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
QMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
QMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
QRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
PFMin -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Minimum value
PFMax -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Maximum value
PFRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
UMin 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UMax 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
URepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
IMin 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 5.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IMax 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
FrMin 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
FrMax 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 70.000 Maximum value
FrRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1135

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Mode L1, L2, L3 - - L1, L2, L3 Selection of measured current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3
PowAmpFact 0.000 - 6.000 - 0.001 1.000 Amplitude factor to scale power
calculations
PowAngComp -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Angle compensation for phase shift
between measured I & U
k 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 0.000 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, U and I

Table 786: CVMMXN Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
of range, Int Db: In 0,001%s
SZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
SHiHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
SHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
SLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
PDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
of range, Int Db: In 0,001%s
PZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
PHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
PHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
PLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
PLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
PLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
QDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
of range, Int Db: In 0,001%s
QZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
QHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
QHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
QLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
QLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
QLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
Table continues on next page

1136 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

PFDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
of range, Int Db: In 0,001%s
PFZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 100 500 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
PFHiHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 High High limit (physical value)
PFHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 0.800 High limit (physical value)
PFLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -0.800 Low limit (physical value)
PFLowLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
PFLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
UDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
of range, Int Db: In 0,001%s
UZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
UHiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
ULowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
ULowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
ULimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
IDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
of range, Int Db: In 0,001%s
IZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
IHiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
ILowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
ILowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
ILimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
FrDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
of range, Int Db: In 0,001%s
FrZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 10 100 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
FrHiHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 65.000 High High limit (physical value)
FrHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 63.000 High limit (physical value)
FrLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 47.000 Low limit (physical value)
FrLowLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 45.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
FrLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
UGenZeroDb 1 - 100 %UB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of UBase
IGenZeroDb 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of IBase
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at
5% of Ur
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1137

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at
30% of Ur
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at
100% of Ur
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
5% of Ir
IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
30% of Ir
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
100% of Ir
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir

PID-6735-SETTINGS v3

Table 787: CMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IL1DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
of range, Int Db: In 0,001%s
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
IL1Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IL1Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
IL1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
IL1AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
IL2DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
of range, Int Db: In 0,001%s
IL2Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IL2Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IL2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
IL2AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
IL3DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
of range, Int Db: In 0,001%s
IL3Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
Table continues on next page

1138 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IL3Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IL3RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
IL3AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)

Table 788: CMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IL1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
IL1HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IL1HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
5% of Ir
IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
30% of Ir
IL1LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
IL1LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
100% of Ir
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir
IL1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
IL2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
IL2HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IL2HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
IL2LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
IL2LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
IL2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
IL3ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
IL3HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IL3HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
IL3LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
IL3LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
IL3LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1139

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

PID-6738-SETTINGS v2

Table 789: VMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UL12DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
of range, Int Db: In 0,001%s
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
UL12ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
UL12Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UL12Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL12RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
UL12AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
UL23DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
of range, Int Db: In 0,001%s
UL23ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
UL23Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UL23Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL23RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
UL23AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
UL31DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
of range, Int Db: In 0,001%s
UL31ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
UL31Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UL31Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL31RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
UL31AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)

1140 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Table 790: VMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UL12HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL12HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL12LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL12LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at
100% of Ur
UL12LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
UL23HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL23HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL23LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL23LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UL23LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
UL31HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL31HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL31LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL31LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UL31LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits

PID-6736-SETTINGS v3

Table 791: CMSQI Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3I0DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
of range, Int Db: In 0,001%s
3I0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
3I0Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
3I0Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
3I0RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
3I0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
3I0AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1141

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

I1DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
of range, Int Db: In 0,001%s
I1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
I1Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
I1Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
I1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
I1AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
I2DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
of range, Int Db: In 0,001%s
I2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
I2Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
I2Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
I2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
I2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
I2AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)

Table 792: CMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3I0HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
3I0HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
3I0LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
3I0LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
I1HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
I1HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
I1LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
I1LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
I1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
I2HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
I2HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
I2LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
I2LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase

1142 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

PID-6739-SETTINGS v2

Table 793: VMSQI Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3U0DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
of range, Int Db: In 0,001%s
3U0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
3U0Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
3U0Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
3U0RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
3U0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
3U0AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
U1DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
of range, Int Db: In 0,001%s
U1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
U1Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
U1Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
U1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
U1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
U1AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
U2DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
of range, Int Db: In 0,001%s
U2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
U2Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
U2Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
U2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
U2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1143

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

U2AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
UAmpPreComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage
at 5% of Ur
UAmpPreComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage
at 30% of Ur
UAmpPreComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage
at 100% of Ur

Table 794: VMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3U0HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
3U0HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
3U0LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
3U0LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
U1HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
U1HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
U1LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
U1LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
U2HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
U2HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
U2LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
U2LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase

PID-6737-SETTINGS v2

Table 795: VNMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UL1DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
of range, Int Db: In 0,001%s
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
UL1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
UL1Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UL1Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
UL1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
UL1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
Table continues on next page

1144 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UL1AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
UL2DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
of range, Int Db: In 0,001%s
UL2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
UL2Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UL2Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
UL2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
UL2AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
UL3DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
of range, Int Db: In 0,001%s
UL3ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
UL3Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UL3Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL3RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
UL3LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
UL3AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)

Table 796: VNMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UL1HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL1HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL1LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL1LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at
100% of Ur
UL2HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL2HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL2LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL2LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UL3HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1145

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UL3HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL3LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL3LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase

18.1.6 Monitored data

PID-6713-MONITOREDDATA v3

Table 797: CVMMXN Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
S REAL - MVA Apparent Power
magnitude of deadband
value
P REAL - MW Active Power magnitude
of deadband value
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive Power
magnitude of deadband
value
PF REAL - - Power Factor magnitude
of deadband value
U REAL - kV Calculated voltage
magnitude of deadband
value
I REAL - A Calculated current
magnitude of deadband
value
F REAL - Hz System frequency
magnitude of deadband
value

PID-6735-MONITOREDDATA v3

Table 798: CMMXU Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A IL1 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
IL1ANGL REAL - deg IL1 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
IL2 REAL - A IL2 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
IL2ANGL REAL - deg IL2 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
IL3 REAL - A IL3 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
IL3ANGL REAL - deg IL3 Angle, magnitude of
reported value

1146 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

PID-6738-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 799: VMMXU Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL12 REAL - kV UL12 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
UL12ANGL REAL - deg UL12 Angle, magnitude
of reported value
UL23 REAL - kV UL23 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
UL23ANGL REAL - deg UL23 Angle, magnitude
of reported value
UL31 REAL - kV UL31 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
UL31ANGL REAL - deg UL31 Angle, magnitude
of reported value

PID-6736-MONITOREDDATA v3

Table 800: CMSQI Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3I0 REAL - A 3I0 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
3I0ANGL REAL - deg 3I0 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
I1 REAL - A I1 Amplitude, magnitude
of reported value
I1ANGL REAL - deg I1 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
I2 REAL - A I2 Amplitude, magnitude
of reported value
I2ANGL REAL - deg I2 Angle, magnitude of
reported value

PID-6739-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 801: VMSQI Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3U0 REAL - kV 3U0 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
3U0ANGL REAL - deg 3U0 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
U1 REAL - kV U1 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1147

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

U1ANGL REAL - deg U1 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
U2 REAL - kV U2 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
U2ANGL REAL - deg U2 Angle, magnitude of
reported value

PID-6737-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 802: VNMMXU Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1 REAL - kV UL1 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
UL1ANGL REAL - deg UL1 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
UL2 REAL - kV UL2 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
UL2ANGL REAL - deg UL2 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
UL3 REAL - kV UL3 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
UL3ANGL REAL - deg UL3 Angle, magnitude of
reported value

18.1.7 Operation principle

18.1.7.1 Measurement supervision SEMOD54417-130 v4

The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and
further process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-
processing blocks. The number of processed alternate measuring quantities
depends on the type of IED and built-in options.

The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different

locations:

• Locally by means of the local HMI

• Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM600 or over the station bus
• Internally by connecting the analogue output signals to the Disturbance Report
function

1148 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Phase angle reference SEMOD54417-303 v5

All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The
General setting parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference, see section
"Analog inputs".

Zero point clamping SEMOD54417-137 v4

Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the
noise in the input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general
setting (XZeroDb where X equals S, P, Q, PF, U, I, F, IL1-3, UL1-3, UL12-31, I1,
I2, 3I0, U1, U2 or 3U0). Observe that this measurement supervision zero point
clamping might be overridden by the zero point clamping used for the
measurement values within CVMMXN.

Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity SEMOD54417-140 v5

Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in the function
block by means of four defined operating thresholds, see figure 580. The
monitoring has two different modes of operating:

• Overfunction, when the measured quantity exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or
High-high limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
• Underfunction, when the measured quantity decreases under the Low limit
(XLowLim) or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.

X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 580.

Y = Magnitude of the Measured Quantity

X_RANGE = 3
High-high limit

X_RANGE= 1 Hysteresis
High limit

X_RANGE=0

X_RANGE=0 t

Low limit

X_RANGE=2

Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4

IEC05000657-3-en.vsdx
IEC05000657 V3 EN-US

Figure 580: Presentation of operating limits

Each analogue output has one corresponding supervision level output

(X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1:
High limit exceeded, 3: High-high limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below
Low-low limit).

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1149

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 580.

The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference
between the operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for
each measuring channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating
values within one channel.

Actual value of the measured quantity SEMOD54417-150 v4

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The
measurement is continuous for each measured quantity separately, but the reporting
of the value to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The
following basic reporting modes are available:

• Cyclic reporting (Cyclic)

• Amplitude dead-band supervision (Dead band)
• Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)
• Amplitude Deadband and 5s cyclic
• Amplitude Deadband and 30s cyclic
• Amplitude Deadband and 1min cyclic

Cyclic reporting SEMOD54417-158 v3

The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting

(XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of amplitude or
integral dead-band reporting.

In addition to the normal cyclic reporting the IED also report spontaneously when
measured value passes any of the defined threshold limits.

1150 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Y
Value Reported Value Reported
Value Reported Value Reported
(1st)

Y3 Value Reported
Y2 Y4

Y1 Y5

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)

t
Value 1

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

Value 5
(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt IEC05000500-2-en.vsdx

IEC05000500 V2 EN-US

Figure 581: Periodic reporting

Amplitude dead-band supervision SEMOD54417-163 v6

If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the
change is larger than the ±ΔY pre-defined limits that are set by user (XDbRepInt),
then the measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level. This limits the
information flow to a minimum necessary. Figure 582 shows an example with the
amplitude dead-band supervision. The picture is simplified: the process is not
continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle
from each other.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1151

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

Value Reported
Y

Value Reported Value Reported

Value Reported
(1st)
Y3 Y
Y
Y2 Y
Y
Y
Y
Y1

IEC99000529-2-en.vsdx

IEC99000529 V2 EN-US

Figure 582: Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting

After the new value is reported, the ±ΔY limits for dead-band are automatically set
around it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more
than defined by the ±ΔY set limits.

Integral dead-band reporting SEMOD54417-167 v4

The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-
set limit (XDbRepInt), figure 583, where an example of reporting with integral
dead-band supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not
continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle
from each other.

The last value reported, Y1 in figure 583 serves as a basic value for further
measurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly
measured value and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The
absolute values of these integral values are added until the pre-set value is
exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base for
the following measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).

The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals

with small variations that can last for relatively long periods.

1152 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Y A1 >=
A >= pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value pre-set value
Y3 A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
Y2 A1 A2
A4 A6
Value Reported Y4 A3 A5 A7
Value
(1st) Value
A Reported Y5
Reported Value
Reported Value
Y1 Reported

t
IEC99000530-2-en.vsdx

IEC99000530 V2 EN-US

Figure 583: Reporting with integral dead-band supervision

Amplitude deadband and xx cyclic (xx: 5 sec, 30 sec, 1 min) GUID-297D6481-EDFA-4A38-BC9D-29538491254D v1

In this mode of operation, the reporting interval will be cyclic like in reporting type
cyclic. This cyclic time has three options: 5sec, 30 sec and 1 min.

Additionally, if a measuring value has changed from the last reported value, and
the change is larger than ±ΔY predefined limits that are set by user (XDbRepInt),
then the measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level immediately
irrespective of cyclic trigger. See Figure 584 for example.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1153

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

Value

Y1...Y7 : Cyclic reported values, depending upon time Δt.

Y’ and Y” : Deadband reported value, change is greater than setting

Value
Reported

Y5
Y6

Y’ -ΔY

+ΔY
Y1 Y7
Y2 Y4 Y”

Y3

Δt Δt Δt Δt Δt Δt

Time
IEC16000109-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000109 V1 EN-US

Figure 584: Example of value reporting in mode dead band and xx cyclic (xx : 5
sec , 30 sec, 1 min)

18.1.7.2 Measurements CVMMXN SEMOD54417-172 v3

Mode of operation SEMOD54417-174 v7

The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-

phase voltage input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to
measure and calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending
on the available VT inputs connected to the IED. The end user can freely select by
a parameter setting, which one of the nine available measuring modes shall be used
within the function. Available options are summarized in the following table:

1154 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Set value for Formula used for complex, three- Formula used for voltage and Comment
parameter phase power calculation current magnitude calculation
“Mode”
1 L1, L2, L3 Used when
* * *
S = U L1 × I L1 + U L 2 × I L 2 + U L 3 × I L 3 U = ( U L1 + U L 2 + U L 3 ) / 3 three phase-
(Equation 223) to-earth
EQUATION1385 V1 EN-US
I = ( I L1 + I L 2 + I L 3 ) / 3
voltages are
EQUATION1386 V1 EN-US (Equation 224) available

2 Arone Used when

S = U L1 L 2 × I L*1 - U L 2 L 3 × I L* 3 U = ( U L1 L 2 + U L 2 L 3 ) / 2 two phase-
to-phase
(Equation 225) voltages are
EQUATION1387 V1 EN-US
I = ( I L1 + I L 3 ) / 2
available
EQUATION1388 V1 EN-US (Equation 226)
3 PosSeq Used when
S = 3 × U PosSeq × I PosSeq
*
U = 3 × U PosSeq only
symmetrical
(Equation 227) three phase
EQUATION1389 V1 EN-US
I = I PosSeq
power shall
EQUATION1390 V1 EN-US (Equation 228) be measured

4 L1L2 Used when

S = U L1 L 2 × ( I L*1 - I L* 2 ) U = U L1 L 2 only UL1L2
phase-to-
(Equation 229)
I = ( I L1 + I L 2 ) / 2 phase
EQUATION1391 V1 EN-US

voltage is
EQUATION1392 V1 EN-US (Equation 230) available

5 L2L3 Used when

S = U L 2 L 3 × ( I L* 2 - I L* 3 ) U = U L2 L3 only UL2L3
phase-to-
(Equation 231)
I = ( I L2 + I L3 ) / 2 phase
EQUATION1393 V1 EN-US

voltage is
EQUATION1394 V1 EN-US (Equation 232) available

6 L3L1 Used when

S = U L 3 L1 × ( I L* 3 - I L*1 ) U = U L 3 L1 only UL3L1
phase-to-
(Equation 233)
I = ( I L 3 + I L1 ) / 2 phase
EQUATION1395 V1 EN-US

voltage is
EQUATION1396 V1 EN-US (Equation 234) available

7 L1 Used when
S = 3 × U L1 × I L*1 U = 3 × U L1 only UL1
phase-to-
(Equation 235) earth voltage
I = I L1
EQUATION1397 V1 EN-US

is available
EQUATION1398 V1 EN-US (Equation 236)
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1155

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

Set value for Formula used for complex, three- Formula used for voltage and Comment
parameter phase power calculation current magnitude calculation
“Mode”
8 L2 Used when
S = 3 × U L 2 × I L* 2 U = 3 × U L2 only UL2
phase-to-
(Equation 237) earth voltage
I = IL2
EQUATION1399 V1 EN-US

is available
EQUATION1400 V1 EN-US (Equation 238)
9 L3 Used when
S = 3 × U L 3 × I L* 3 U = 3 × U L3 only UL3
phase-to-
(Equation 239) earth voltage
I = I L3
EQUATION1401 V1 EN-US

is available
EQUATION1402 V1 EN-US (Equation 240)
* means complex conjugated value

It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes that is, 1 & 2 the
measurement function calculates the three-phase power accurately. In other
operating modes that is, from 3 to 9 it calculates the three-phase power under
assumption that the power system is fully symmetrical. Once the complex apparent
power is calculated then the P, Q, S, & PF are calculated in accordance with the
following formulas:

P = Re( S )
EQUATION1403 V1 EN-US (Equation 241)

Q = Im( S )
EQUATION1404 V1 EN-US (Equation 242)

S = S = P2 + Q2
EQUATION1405 V1 EN-US (Equation 243)

PF = cosj = P
S
EQUATION1406 V1 EN-US (Equation 244)

Additionally to the power factor value, the two binary output signals from the
function are provided which indicates the angular relationship between the current
and voltage phasors. Binary output signal ILAG is set TRUE when current phasor
is lagging behind voltage phasor. Binary output signal ILEAD is set TRUE when
current phasor is leading the voltage phasor.

Each analogue output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE).

The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement
supervision".

1156 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Calibration of analog inputs SEMOD54417-293 v5

Measured currents and voltages used in the CVMMXN function can be calibrated
to get 0.5 class measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle
compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation
below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in
figure 585.

IEC05000652 V2 EN-US

Figure 585: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase signal, in the group signals will be used as
reference. The amplitude and angle compensation will be used for other related
input signals.

Low pass filtering SEMOD54417-233 v4

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is

possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P,
Q, S, U, I and power factor. This will make slower measurement response to the
step changes in the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with
the following recursive formula:

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1157

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

X = k × X Old + (1 - k ) × X Calculated
EQUATION1407 V1 EN-US (Equation 245)

where:
X is a new measured value (that is P, Q, S, U, I or PF) to be given out from the function
XOld is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle

XCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k
shall be determined separately for every application. Some typical value for k
=0.14.

Zero point clamping SEMOD54417-250 v5

In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is

not present, it is possible for the end user to set the amplitudeIGenZeroDb level for
current and voltage measurement UGenZeroDb is forced to zero. When either
current or voltage measurement is forced to zero automatically the measured values
for power (P, Q and S) and power factor are forced to zero as well. Since the
measurement supervision functionality, included in CVMMXN, is using these
values the zero clamping will influence the subsequent supervision (observe the
possibility to do zero point clamping within measurement supervision, see
section "Measurement supervision").

Compensation facility SEMOD54417-253 v5

In order to compensate for small amplitude and angular errors in the complete
measurement chain (CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors and so on.) it
is possible to perform on site calibration of the power measurement. This is
achieved by setting the complex constant which is then internally used within the
function to multiply the calculated complex apparent power S. This constant is set
as amplitude (setting parameter PowAmpFact, default value 1.000) and angle
(setting parameter PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for
these two parameters are done in such way that they do not influence internally
calculated value (complex constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for
specific operating range (for example, around rated power) can be done at site.
However, to perform this calibration it is necessary to have an external power
meter with high accuracy class available.

Directionality SEMOD54417-256 v7

If CT earthing parameter is set as described in section "Analog inputs", active and

reactive power will be always measured towards the protected object. This is
shown in the following figure 586.

1158 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Busbar

IED

P Q

Protected
Object
IEC09000038-1-en.vsd
IEC09000038-1-EN V1 EN-US

Figure 586: Internal IED directionality convention for P & Q measurements

Practically, it means that active and reactive power will have positive values when
they flow from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative
values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.

In some application, for example, when power is measured on the secondary side
of the power transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to
have actually opposite directional convention for active and reactive power
measurements. This can be easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to
value of 180.0 degrees. With such setting the active and reactive power will have
positive values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.

Frequency SEMOD54417-261 v2

Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply

obtained from the pre-processing block and then just given out from the
measurement block as an output.

18.1.7.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU SEMOD54417-264 v7

The Phase current measurement (CMMXU) function must be connected to three-

phase current input in the configuration tool to be operable. Currents handled in the
function can be calibrated to get better then 0.5 class measuring accuracy for
internal use, on the outputs and IEC 61850. This is achieved by amplitude and
angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current. The compensation below
5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see figure 585.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1159

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

Phase currents (amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each
amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (ILx_RANG). The
supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see
section "Measurement supervision".

18.1.7.4 Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU,

VNMMXU SEMOD54417-268 v6

The voltage function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the

configuration tool to be operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents
when it comes to class 0.5 calibrations, see above.

The voltages (phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase voltage, amplitude and angle) are

available on the outputs and each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision
level output (ULxy_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in the
interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

18.1.7.5 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI SEMOD54417-299 v6

The measurement functions must be connected to three-phase current (CMSQI) or

voltage (VMSQI) input in the configuration tool to be operable. No outputs, other
than X_RANG, are calculated within the measuring blocks and it is not possible to
calibrate the signals. Input signals are obtained from the pre-processing block and
transferred to corresponding output.

Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the
outputs (voltage and current, amplitude and angle). Each amplitude output has a
corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an
integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

18.1.8 Technical data

M12386-1 v15

Table 803: Power system measurement CVMMXN technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Frequency (0.95-1.05) x fr ±2.0 mHz

Voltage (10 to 300) V ±0.3% of U at U≤ 50 V

±0.2% of U at U> 50 V
Current (0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.8% of I at 0.1 x Ir< I < 0.2 x Ir
± 0.5% of I at 0.2 x Ir< I < 0.5 x Ir
±0.2% of I at 0.5 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir

Active power, P (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of Sr at S ≤0.5 x Sr

(0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.5% of S at S > 0.5 x Sr

(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of P

(0.5-2.0) x Ir
cos φ< 0.7
Table continues on next page

1160 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Function Range or value Accuracy

Reactive power, Q (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of Sr at S ≤0.5 x Sr
(0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.5% of S at S > 0.5 x Sr

(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of Q

(0.5-2.0) x Ir
cos φ> 0.7
Apparent power, S (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of Sr at S ≤0.5 x Sr
(0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.5% of S at S >0.5 x Sr

(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of S

(0.5-2.0) x Ir

Power factor, cos (φ) (10 to 300) V <0.02

(0.1-4.0) x Ir

(100 to 220) V <0.01

(0.5-2.0) x Ir

GUID-5E04B3F9-E1B7-4974-9C0B-DE9CD4A2408F v6

Table 804: CMMXU technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Current at symmetrical load (0.1-4.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir
±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir

Phase angle at symmetrical load (0.1-4.0) × Ir ±1.0 degrees at 0.1 × Ir < I ≤

0.5 × Ir
±0.5 degrees at 0.5 × Ir < I ≤
4.0 × Ir

GUID-374C2AF0-D647-4159-8D3A-71190FE3CFE0 v5

Table 805: VMMXU technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V
±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Phase angle (10 to 300) V ±0.5 degrees at U ≤ 50 V
±0.2 degrees at U > 50 V

GUID-9B8A7FA5-9C98-4CBD-A162-7112869CF030 v5

Table 806: CMSQI technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Current positive sequence, I1 (0.1–4.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir
Three phase settings ±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir

Current zero sequence, 3I0 (0.1–1.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

Three phase settings ±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir

Current negative sequence, I2 (0.1–1.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

Three phase settings ±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir

Phase angle (0.1–4.0) × Ir ±1.0 degrees at 0.1 × Ir < I ≤

0.5 × Ir
±0.5 degrees at 0.5 × Ir < I ≤
4.0 × Ir

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1161

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

GUID-47094054-A828-459B-BE6A-D7FA1B317DA7 v6

Table 807: VMSQItechnical data

Function
Voltage positive sequence, U1
Voltage zero sequence, 3U0
Voltage negative sequence, U2
Phase angle
Range or value Accuracy
(10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V
±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
(10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V
±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
(10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V
±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
(10 to 300) V ±0.5 degrees at U ≤ 50 V
±0.2 degrees at U > 50 V

GUID-ED634B6D-9918-464F-B6A4-51B78129B819 v6

Table 808: VNMMXU technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage (5 to 175) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V
±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Phase angle (5 to 175) V ±0.5 degrees at U ≤ 50 V
±0.2 degrees at U > 50 V

18.2 Gas medium supervision SSIMG GUID-358AD8F8-AE06-4AEA-9969-46E5299D5B4B v3

18.2.1 Identification
GUID-AD96C26E-C3E5-4B21-9ED6-12E540954AC3 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG - 63

18.2.2 Functionality GUID-0692CD0D-F33E-4370-AC91-B216CAAAFC28 v6

Insulation supervision for gas medium (SSIMG) is used for monitoring the circuit
breaker condition. Binary information based on the gas pressure in the circuit
breaker is used as input signals to the function. In addition, the function generates
alarms based on received information.

1162 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

18.2.3 Function block

GUID-94B75A6D-973D-4F1F-8643-F2128AD31CC4 v3

SSIMG
BLOCK LOCKOUT
BLKALM PRESLO
SENPRES TEMPLO
SENTEMP ALARM
SENPRESALM PRESALM
SENPRESLO TEMPALM
SETPLO PRESSURE
SETTLO TEMP
RESETLO
IEC09000129-2-en.vsdx
IEC09000129 V2 EN-US

Figure 587: SSIMG function block

18.2.4 Signals
GUID-89749F71-CAEB-4A57-A1F0-148CCF68E97E v2

PID-6950-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 809: SSIMG Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
SENPRES REAL 0.0 Pressure input from CB
SENTEMP REAL 0.0 Temperature of the insulation medium from CB
SENPRESALM BOOLEAN 0 Pressure alarm signal
SENPRESLO BOOLEAN 0 Pressure lockout signal
SETPLO BOOLEAN 0 Set pressure lockout
SETTLO BOOLEAN 0 Set temperature lockout
RESETLO BOOLEAN 0 Reset pressure and temperature lockout

PID-6950-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 810: SSIMG Output signals

Name Type Description
LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level or temperature
above lockout level
PRESLO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level
TEMPLO BOOLEAN Temperature above lockout level
ALARM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level or temperature above
alarm level
PRESALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level
TEMPALM BOOLEAN Temperature above alarm level
PRESSURE REAL Pressure service value
TEMP REAL Temperature of the insulation medium

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1163

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

18.2.5 Settings
PID-6950-SETTINGS v6

Table 811: SSIMG Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
PresAlmLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 5.00 Alarm setting for pressure
PresLOLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 3.00 Pressure lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature alarm level setting of the
medium
TempLOLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature lockout level of the medium
tPressureAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for pressure alarm
tPressureLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for pressure lockout
indication
tTempAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperature alarm
tTempLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperture lockout
tResetPresAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for pressure alarm
tResetPresLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for pressure lockout
tResetTempLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture lockout
tResetTempAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture alarm

18.2.6 Monitored data

PID-6950-MONITOREDDATA v5

Table 812: SSIMG Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
PRESSURE REAL - - Pressure service value
TEMP REAL - deg Temperature of the
insulation medium

18.2.7 Operation principle GUID-359458EA-FFAA-4A44-A8E8-9469CA069C80 v7

Gas medium supervision SSIMG is used to monitor the gas pressure in the circuit
breaker. Binary inputs of gas density SENPRESALM, SENPRESLO, and gas
pressure signal SENPRES, are taken into account to initiate the alarm PRESALM
and the lockout PRESLO. When SENPRES is less than PresAlmLimit or binary
signal from CB SENPRESALM is high, the gas pressure alarm PRESALM will be
initiated. Similarly, if pressure input SENPRES is less than PresLOLimit or binary
signal from CB SENPRESLO is high, PRESLO will be initiated.

There may be sudden change in pressure of the gas for a very small time, for which
the function need not to initiate any alarm. To avoid the intermittent alarm, two
time delays tPressureAlarm or tPressureLO have been included. If the pressure

1164 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

goes below the settings for more than these time delays, the corresponding alarm
PRESALM or lockout PRESLO will be initiated. The SETPLO binary input is
used for setting the gas pressure lockout PRESLO. The PRESLO output retains the
last value until it is reset by using the binary input RESETLO. The binary input
BLKALM can be used to block the alarms, and the BLOCK input can block both
alarm and the lockout indications.

Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature. The
signal is monitored to detect high temperature.

When temperature input SENTEMP is above TempAlarmLimit, temperature alarm

TEMPALM will be initiated. Similarly, if temperature input SENTEMP is above
TempLOLimit, temperature lockout TEMPLO will be initiated.

There may be sudden change in temperature of the medium for a very small time,
for which the function need not to initiate any alarm. To avoid the intermittent
alarm, two time delays tTempAlarm or tTempLockOut have been included. If the
temperature goes above the settings for more than these time delays, the
corresponding alarm TEMPALM or lockout TEMPLO will be initiated. The
SETTLO binary input is used for setting the temperature lockout TEMPLO. The
TEMPLO output retains the last value until it is reset by using the binary input
RESETLO. The binary input BLKALM can be used to block the alarms, and the
BLOCK input can block both alarm and the lockout indications.

The output ALARM goes high if the pressure alarm condition or the temperature
alarm condition exists inside the circuit breaker. The output ALARM can be
blocked by activating BLOCK or BLKALM inputs.

The output LOCKOUT goes high if the pressure lockout condition or the
temperature lockout condition exists inside the circuit breaker and it resets by using
the binary input RESETLO. The output LOCKOUT can be blocked by activating
BLOCK input.

18.2.8 Technical data

GUID-F034B396-6600-49EF-B0A5-8ED96766A6A0 v7

Table 813: SSIMG Technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Pressure alarm level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value
Pressure lockout level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value
Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value
Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value
Time delay for pressure alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for pressure (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
alarm greater
Time delay for pressure lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1165

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

Function Range or value Accuracy

Time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
alarm greater
Reset time delay for (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
temperature alarm greater
Time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
lockout greater

18.3 Liquid medium supervision SSIML GUID-37669E94-4830-4C96-8A67-09600F847F23 v3

18.3.1 Identification
GUID-4CE96EF6-42C6-4F2E-A190-D288ABF766F6 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML - 71

18.3.2 Functionality GUID-3B1A665F-60A5-4343-85F4-AD9C066CBE8D v6

Insulation supervision for liquid medium (SSIML) is used for monitoring the
transformer condition. Binary information based on the oil level in the transformer
is used as input signals to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms
based on received information.

18.3.3 Function block GUID-AC82A86C-495D-4CBD-9BF9-3CC760591AA9 v3

SSIML
BLOCK LOCKOUT
BLKALM LVLLO
SENLEVEL TEMPLO
SENTEMP ALARM
SENLVLALM LVLALM
SENLVLLO TEMPALM
SETLLO LEVEL
SETTLO TEMP
RESETLO
IEC09000128-2-en.vsdx
IEC09000128 V2 EN-US

Figure 588: SSIML function block

18.3.4 Signals
GUID-0C378BB3-2104-417F-94B5-16EFC55151FE v2

1166 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

PID-6951-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 814: SSIML Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
SENLEVEL REAL 0.0 Level input from CB
SENTEMP REAL 0.0 Temperature of the insulation medium from CB
SENLVLALM BOOLEAN 0 Level alarm signal
SENLVLLO BOOLEAN 0 Level lockout signal
SETLLO BOOLEAN 0 Set level lockout
SETTLO BOOLEAN 0 Set temperature lockout
RESETLO BOOLEAN 0 Reset level and temperature lockout

PID-6951-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 815: SSIML Output signals

Name Type Description
LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Level below lockout level or temperature above
lockout level
LVLLO BOOLEAN Level below lockout level
TEMPLO BOOLEAN Temperature above lockout level
ALARM BOOLEAN Level below alarm level or temperature above
alarm level
LVLALM BOOLEAN Level below alarm level
TEMPALM BOOLEAN Temperature above alarm level
LEVEL REAL Level service value
TEMP REAL Temperature of the insulation medium

18.3.5 Settings
PID-6951-SETTINGS v7

Table 816: SSIML Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
LevelAlmLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 5.00 Alarm setting for level
LevelLOLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 3.00 Level lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature alarm level setting of the
medium
TempLOLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature lockout level of the medium
tLevelAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for level alarm
tLevelLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for level lockout indication
tTempAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperature alarm
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1167

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tTempLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperture lockout
tResetLevelAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for level alarm
tResetLevelLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for level lockout
tResetTempLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture lockout
tResetTempAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture alarm

18.3.6 Monitored data

PID-6951-MONITOREDDATA v5

Table 817: SSIML Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
LEVEL REAL - - Level service value
TEMP REAL - deg Temperature of the
insulation medium

18.3.7 Operation principle GUID-F4340B59-90D0-4EA7-9FD8-F21D425C884A v7

Liquid medium supervision SSIML is used to monitor the oil level in the
transformer. Binary inputs of oil level SENLVLALM, SENLVLLO and oil level
signal SENLEVEL are taken into account to initiate the alarm LVLALM and the
lockout LVLLO. When SENLEVEL is less than LevelAlmLimit or binary signal
from transformer SENLVLALM is high, the oil level indication alarm LVLALM
will be initiated. Similarly, if oil level input SENLEVEL is less than LevelLOLimit
or binary signal from transformer SENLVLLO is high, the oil level indication
lockout LVLLO will be initiated.

There may be sudden change in oil level for a very small time, for which the
function need not to initiate any alarm. To avoid the intermittent alarm, two time
delays tLevelAlarm or tLevelLockOut have been included. If the oil level goes
below the settings for more than these time delays, the corresponding alarm
LVLALM or lockout LVLLO will be initiated. The SETLLO binary input is used
for setting the liquid level lockout LVLLO. The LVLLO output retains the last
value until it is reset by using the binary input RESETLO. The binary input
BLKALM can be used for blocking the alarms, and the BLOCK input can block
both alarms and the lockout indication.

Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature. The
signal is monitored to detect high temperature.

When temperature input SENTEMP is above TempAlarmLimit, temperature alarm

TEMPALM will be initiated. Similarly, if temperature input SENTEMP is above
TempLOLimit, temperature lockout TEMPLO will be initiated.

There may be sudden change in temperature of the medium for a very small time,
for which the function need not to initiate any alarm. To avoid the intermittent

1168 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

alarm, two time delays tTempAlarm or tTempLockOuthave been included. If the

temperature goes above the settings for more than these time delays, the
corresponding alarm TEMPALM or lockout TEMPLO will be initiated. The
SETTLO binary input is used for setting the temperature lockout TEMPLO. The
TEMPLO output retains the last value until it is reset by using the binary input
RESETLO. The binary input BLKALM can be used for blocking the alarms, and
the BLOCK input can block both alarm and the lockout indications.

The output ALARM goes high if the level alarm condition or the temperature
alarm condition exists in the transformer. The output ALARM can be blocked by
activating BLOCK or BLKALM inputs.

The output LOCKOUT goes high if the pressure lockout condition or the
temperature lockout condition exists in the transformer and it resets by using the
binary input RESETLO. The output LOCKOUT can be blocked by activating
BLOCK input.

18.3.8 Technical data

GUID-83B0F607-D898-403A-94FD-7FE8D45C73FF v7

Table 818: SSIMLTechnical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Oil alarm level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value
Oil lockout level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value
Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value
Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value
Time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for oil lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
alarm greater
Reset time delay for (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
temperature alarm greater
Time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
lockout greater

18.4 Breaker monitoring SSCBR

18.4.1 Identification GUID-0FC081B2-0BC8-4EB8-9529-B941E51F18EE v7

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Breaker monitoring SSCBR - -

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1169

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

18.4.2 Functionality GUID-E1FD74C3-B9B6-4E11-AA1B-7E7F822FB4DD v11

The circuit breaker condition monitoring function (SSCBR) is used to monitor

different parameters of the breaker condition. The breaker requires maintenance
when the number of operations reaches a predefined value. For a proper
functioning of the circuit breaker, it is essential to monitor the circuit breaker
operation, spring charge indication or breaker wear, travel time, number of
operation cycles and estimate the accumulated energy during arcing periods.

18.4.3 Function block GUID-B002ED61-5092-4E9E-AEB6-E4A4310BDAF2 v11

SSCBR
I3P* OPENPOS
BLOCK CLOSEPOS
BLKALM INVDPOS
TRIND TRCMD
POSOPEN TRVTOPAL
POSCLOSE TRVTCLAL
PRESALM OPERALM
PRESLO OPERLO
SPRCHRST CBLIFEAL
SPRCHRD MONALM
RSTCBWR IPOWALPH
RSTTRVT IPOWLOPH
RSTIPOW SPCHALM
RSTSPCHT GPRESALM
GPRESLO

IEC13000231-2-en.vsd
IEC13000231 V2 EN-US

Figure 589: SSCBR function block

18.4.4 Signals
PID-3267-INPUTSIGNALS v10

Table 819: SSCBR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarm and lockout indication
BLKALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
TRIND BOOLEAN 0 Trip command from trip circuit
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
PRESALM BOOLEAN 0 Pressure alarm indication from CB
PRESLO BOOLEAN 0 Pressure lockout indication from CB
SPRCHRST BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charging started indication signal
SPRCHRD BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charged indication signal
RSTCBWR BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB remaining life and operation counter
Table continues on next page

1170 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Name Type Default Description

RSTTRVT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB closing and opening travel times
RSTIPOW BOOLEAN 0 Reset of accumulated I^CurrExponent
RSTSPCHT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB spring charging time

PID-3267-OUTPUTSIGNALS v10

Table 820: SSCBR Output signals

Name Type Description
OPENPOS BOOLEAN CB is in open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN CB is in closed position
INVDPOS BOOLEAN CB is in Invalid Position
TRCMD BOOLEAN Open command issued to CB
TRVTOPAL BOOLEAN CB open travel time exceeded set value
TRVTCLAL BOOLEAN CB close travel time exceeded set value
OPERALM BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds alarm limit
OPERLO BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds lockout limit
CBLIFEAL BOOLEAN Remaining life of CB reduced to Life alarm level
MONALM BOOLEAN CB 'not operated for long time' alarm
IPOWALPH BOOLEAN Accum I^CurrExponent integr over CB open
travel time exceeds alarm limit
IPOWLOPH BOOLEAN Accum I^CurrExponent integr over CB open
travel time exceeds lockout limit
SPCHALM BOOLEAN Spring charging time has crossed the set value
GPRESALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level
GPRESLO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level

18.4.5 Settings
PID-3267-SETTINGS v10

Table 821: SSCBR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
PhSel Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Phase selection
Phase L2
Phase L3
RatedOperCurr 100.00 - 5000.00 A 0.01 1000.00 Rated operating current of the breaker
OperNoRated 1 - 99999 - 1 10000 Number of operations possible at rated
current
RatedFltCurr 500.00 - 99999.99 A 0.01 5000.00 Rated fault current of the breaker
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1171

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OperNoFault 1 - 10000 - 1 1000 Number of operations possible at rated
fault current
tTrOpenAlm 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.040 Alarm level for open travel time
tTrCloseAlm 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.040 Alarm level for close travel time
OperAlmLevel 0 - 9999 - 1 200 Alarm level for number of operations
OperLOLevel 0 - 9999 - 1 300 Lockout level for number of operations
AccSelCal Aux Contact - - Trip Signal Accumulated energy calculation
Trip Signal selection
CurrExponent 0.50 - 3.00 - 0.01 2.00 Current exponent value used for energy
calculation
AccStopCurr 5.00 - 100.00 %IB 0.01 10.00 RMS current level below which energy
accumulation stops
AlmAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 2500.00 Alarm level for accumulated
I^CurrExponent integrated over CB open
travel time
LOAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 2500.00 Lockout level for accumulated
I^CurrExponent integrated over CB open
travel time
SpChAlmTime 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 1.00 Alarm level for spring charging time
InitCBRemLife 1 - 99999 - 1 10000 Initial value for remaining life estimates
InactiveAlDays 0 - 9999 Day 1 2000 Alarm level for inactive days counter

Table 822: SSCBR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
OpenTimeCorr -0.100 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.010 Correction for open travel time
CloseTimeCorr -0.100 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.010 Correction for close travel time
DirCoef -3.00 - -0.50 - 0.01 -1.50 Directional coefficient for CB life
calculation
CBLifeAlmLevel 1 - 99999 - 1 5000 Alarm level for CB remaining life
ContTrCorr -0.010 - 0.010 s 0.001 0.005 Correction for time difference in auxiliary
and main contacts open time
OperTimeDelay 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.020 Time delay between change of status of
trip output and start of main contact
separation
tDGasPresAlm 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for gas pressure alarm
tDGasPresLO 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for gas pressure lockout
InitCounterVal 0 - 9999 - 1 0 Initial value for number of operations
InitAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 9999.99 - 0.01 0.00 Initial value for accum I^CurrExponent
integr over CB open travel time value
InitInactDays 0 - 9999 Day 1 0 Initial value for inactive days
InactiveAlHrs 0 - 23 Hour 1 0 Alarm time for inactive days counter in
hours

1172 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

18.4.6 Monitored data

PID-3267-MONITOREDDATA v7

Table 823: SSCBR Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TTRVOP REAL - ms Travel time of the CB
during opening operation
TTRVCL REAL - ms Travel time of the CB
during closing operation
NOOPER INTEGER - - Number of CB operation
cycle
CBLIFEPH INTEGER - - CB Remaining life of
respective phase
INADAYS INTEGER - - The number of days CB
has been inactive
IPOWPH REAL - - Accumulated
I^CurrExponent
integrated over CB open
travel time
SPCHT REAL - s The charging time of the
CB spring

18.4.7 Operation principle GUID-3902D69C-1858-40DD-AD63-C33C381697BA v12

The breaker monitoring function includes metering and monitoring subfunctions.

The subfunctions can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are On and Off.

The operation of the subfunctions is described by the module diagram as shown in

figure 590. All the modules in the diagram are explained in subsequent sections.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1173

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

I3P-ILRMSPH
POSCLOSE TTRVOP
POSOPEN CB Contact Travel TTRVCL
BLOCK Time TRVTOPAL
BLKALM TRVTCLAL
RSTTRVT

OPENPOS

CB Status CLOSEPOS
INVDPOS

CBLIFEAL
Remaining Life of CB
CBLIFEPH
RSTCBWR

TRCMD

Accumulated IPOWALPH
energy
I3P-IL IPOWLOPH
TRIND
IPOWPH
RSTIPOW

CB Operation OPERALM
Cycles NOOPER

CB Operation MONALM
Monitoring INADAYS

SPCHALM
SPRCHRST CB Spring Charge SPCHT
SPRCHRD Monitoring
RSTSPCHT

CB Gas Pressure GPRESALM

PRESALM Indication GPRESLO
PRESLO
IEC12000624-3-en.vsd
IEC12000624 V3 EN-US

Figure 590: Functional module diagram of breaker monitoring

1174 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

18.4.7.1 Circuit breaker contact travel time GUID-3AF0EE8D-AA8E-4F83-9916-61B5D0D6B05B v12

The circuit breaker contact travel time subfunction calculates the breaker contact
travel time for opening and closing operations. The operation of the breaker contact
travel time measurement is described in figure591.

POSCLOSE TTRVOP
Contact travel
POSOPEN time TTRVCL
calculation
RSTTRVT

TRVTOPAL
Alarm limit
BLOCK check TRVTCLAL
BLKALM
IEC12000615-2-en.vsd
IEC12000615 V2 EN-US

Figure 591: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker contact travel time

Contact travel time calculation

The contact travel time of the breaker is calculated from the time between the state
of change of auxiliary contacts. The opening travel time is measured between the
opening of the POSCLOSE and closing of the POSOPEN auxiliary contacts.
Similarly, the closing travel time is measured between the opening of the
POSOPEN and closing of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts. A compensation
factor has been added to consider the time difference between auxiliary contact
operation and the actual physical opening of the breaker main contact.

Main Contact
1

0
POSCLOSE

POSOPEN
1

t1 tOpen t2 t3 tClose t4

tTravelOpen = tOpen + t1 + t2 tTravelClose = tClose + t3 + t4

IEC12000616_2_en.vsd

IEC12000616 V2 EN-US

Figure 592: Travel time calculation

There is a time difference t1 between the start of the main contact opening and the
opening of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact. Similarly, there is a time difference t2
between the time when the POSOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact
is completely open. Therefore, a correction factor needs to be added to get the
actual opening time. This factor is added with the OpenTimeCorr (t1+t2) setting.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1175

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

The closing time is calculated by adding the value set with the CloseTimeCorr
(t3+t4) setting to the measured closing time.

The last measured opening travel time (TTRVOP) and the closing travel time
(TTRVCL) are given as service values.

The values can be reset using the Clear menu on the LHMI or by activation the
input RSTCBWR.

Alarm limit check

When the measured opening travel time is longer than the value set in the
tTrOpenAlm setting, the TRVTOPAL output is activated. Similarly, when the
measured closing travel time is longer than the value set in the tTrCloseAlm setting,
the TRVTCLAL output is activated.

It is also possible to block the TRVTCLAL and TRVTOPAL alarm signals by

activating the BLKALM input.

18.4.7.2 Circuit breaker status GUID-390A1250-B258-4023-9A7D-0D7E19E13A6C v12

The circuit breaker status subfunction monitors the position of the circuit breaker,
that is, whether the breaker is in the open, closed or error position. The operation is
described in figure 593.

Phase current
I3P-ILRMSPH
check

OPENPOS
Contact
POSCLOSE position CLOSEPOS
indicator
POSOPEN INVDPOS

IEC12000613-3-en.vsd
IEC12000613 V3 EN-US

Figure 593: Functional module diagram for monitoring circuit breaker status

Phase current check

The module compares the phase current I3P-ILRMSPH to the AccStopCurr setting.
If the current in the selected phase exceeds the set level, it is reported to the contact
position indicator module as closed circuit breaker.

Contact position indicator

The circuit breaker status is open when the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is
low, the POSOPEN input is high and the phase current is less than the setting
AccStopCurr value. The circuit breaker is closed when the POSOPEN input is low
and the POSCLOSE input is high. The breaker is in the error state if both auxiliary

1176 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

contacts have the same value or if the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low
and the POSOPEN input is high but the current is above the setting AccStopCurr.

The status of the breaker is indicated with the binary outputs OPENPOS,
CLOSEPOS and INVDPOS for open, closed and error position respectively.

18.4.7.3 Remaining life of circuit breaker GUID-C347406A-2B6F-42BD-B70B-51489AB51EAE v12

The Remaining life of circuit breaker subfunction is used to give an indication on

the wear and tear of the circuit breaker. Every time the breaker operates, the life of
the circuit breaker reduces due to wear. The breaker wear depends on the
interrupted current. The remaining life of the breaker is estimated from the circuit
breaker trip curve provided by the manufacturer. The remaining life is decreased by
at least one when the circuit breaker is opened. The operation of the remaining life
of circuit breaker subfunction is described in figure 594.

I3P-ILRMSPH
CB remaining CBLIFEPH
POSCLOSE life estimation

RSTCBWR

Alarm limit
BLOCK CBLIFEAL
Check
BLKALM

IEC12000620-3-en.vsd
IEC12000620 V3 EN-US

Figure 594: Functional module diagram for estimating the life of the circuit
breaker

Circuit breaker remaining life estimation

If the interrupted current is less than the rated operating current set using the
RatedOperCurr setting, the remaining operations of the breaker are reduced by one
operation. If the interrupted current is more than the rated fault current set using the
RatedFltCurr setting, the remaining operations of the circuit breaker are reduced
by the set OperNoRated divided by the set OperNoFault value. If the tripping
current is between these two values, the remaining life of the circuit breaker is
calculated based on the maintenance curve equation given by the manufacturer.
The OperNoRated parameter sets the number of operations the breaker can perform
at the rated current. The OperNoFault parameter sets the number of operations the
breaker can perform at the rated fault current.

Alarm limit check

When the remaining life of a circuit breaker phase drops below the
CBLifeAlmLevel setting, the life alarm CBLIFEAL is activated.

It is possible to deactivate the CBLIFEAL alarm signal by activating the binary

input BLKALM.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1177

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

The old circuit breaker operation counter value can be used by adding the value to
the InitCBRemLife parameter. The value can be reset using the Clear menu from
LHMI or by activating the input RSTCBWR.

18.4.7.4 Accumulated energy GUID-0163FF0F-6E18-4CDC-87AA-578304E0872E v11

The Accumulated energy subfunction calculates the accumulated energy (Iyt) based
on current samples, where the setting CurrExponent (y) ranges from 0.5 to 3.0. The
operation is described in figure 595.

The TRCMD output is enabled when either of the trip indications from the trip coil
circuit TRIND is high or the breaker status is OPENPOS.

I3P-IL
TRCMD
I3P-ILRMSPH Accumulated
POSCLOSE energy
calculation IPOWPH
TRIND

LRSTIPOW

IPOWALPH
Alarm limit
BLOCK Check IPOWLOPH
BLKALM

IEC12000619-3-en.vsd
IEC12000619 V3 EN-US

Figure 595: Functional module diagram for estimating accumulated energy

Accumulated energy calculation

Accumulated energy can be calculated either with TRIND or POSCLOSE by
selecting the AccSelCal parameter value accordingly.

The calculation is initiated with the POSCLOSE or TRIND input events. It ends
when the RMS current is lower than the AccStopCurr setting.

The ContTrCorr setting is used to determine the accumulated energy in relation to

the time the main contact opens. If the setting is positive, the calculation of energy
starts after the auxiliary contact has opened and the delay equal to the value of the
ContTrCorr setting has passed. When the setting is negative, the calculation starts
in advance by the correction time in relation to when the auxiliary contact opened.

1178 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Main Contact Main Contact

close close

open open
POSCLOSE 1 POSCLOSE 1

0 0

Energy Energy
Accumulation Accumulation
starts starts

ContTrCorr ContTrCorr
(Negative) (Positive)
IEC12000618_1_en.vsd
IEC12000618 V1 EN-US

Figure 596: Significance of correction factor setting

Accumulated energy can also be calculated by using the change of state of the trip
output. TRIND is used to get the instance of the trip output and the time delay
between the trip initiation and the opening of the main contact is introduced by the
setting OperTimeDelay.

The accumulated energy output IPOWPH is provided as a service value. The value
can be reset by enabling RSTIPOW through LHMI or by activating the input
RSTIPOW.

Alarm limit check

The IPOWALPH alarm is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the set
value AlmAccCurrPwr.

IPOWLOPH is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the limit of the
LOAccCurrPwr setting.

The IPOWALPH and IPOWLOPH outputs can be blocked by activating the binary
input BLKALM.

18.4.7.5 Circuit breaker operation cycles GUID-D3481D26-2E42-455E-8DB2-91538421F3B1 v9

The circuit breaker operation cycles subfunction counts the number of closing-
opening sequences of the breaker. The operation counter value is updated after
each closing-opening sequence. The operation is described in figure597.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1179

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

POSCLOSE
Operation
POSOPEN NOOPER
counter
RSTCBWR

OPERALM
Alarm limit
BLOCK
Check
OPERLO
BLKALM
IEC12000617 V2 EN-US

Figure 597: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation cycles

Operation counter
The operation counter counts the number of operations based on the state of change
of the auxiliary contact inputs POSCLOSE and POSOPEN.

The number of operations NOOPER is given as a service value. The old circuit
breaker operation counter value can be used by adding the value to the
InitCounterVal parameter and can be reset by Clear CB wear in the Clear menu on
the LHMI or activating the input RSTCBWR.

Alarm limit check

OPERALM is generated when the number of operations exceeds the set value of the
OperAlmLevel threshold setting.

If the number of operations increases and exceeds the limit value set with the
OperLOLevel setting, the OPERLO output is activated.

The binary outputs OPERALM and OPERALO are deactivated when the BLKALM
input is activated.

18.4.7.6 Circuit breaker operation monitoring GUID-6DAE4C6B-BD66-49CD-817D-08E4EBF47DE0 v9

The circuit breaker operation monitoring subfunction indicates the inactive days of
the circuit breaker and gives an alarm when the number of days exceed the set
level. The operation of the circuit breaker operation monitoring is shown in figure
598.

POSCLOSE
Inactive timer INADAYS
POSOPEN

Alarm limit MONALM

BLOCK
Check
BLKALM
IEC12000614 V2 EN-US

Figure 598: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation monitoring

1180 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Inactive timer
The Inactive timer module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has
remained in the same open or closed state. The value is calculated by monitoring
the states of the POSOPEN and POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts.

The number of inactive days INADAYS is available as a service value. The initial
number of inactive days is set using the InitInactDays parameter.

Alarm limit check

MONALM is initiated when the number of inactive days and hours exceed the limit
value defined by the InactiveAlDays and InactivAlHrs setting. The alarm signal
MONALM can be blocked by activating the binary input BLKALM.

18.4.7.7 Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring GUID-F850A940-7890-4C37-8B31-6C7D5B30E582 v11

The circuit breaker spring charge monitoring subfunction calculates the spring
charging time. The operation is described in figure 599.

SPRCHRST
Spring charging
SPRCHRD time SPCHT
measurement
RSTSPCHT

Alarm limit
BLOCK SPCHALM
Check
BLKALM
IEC12000621 V2 EN-US

Figure 599: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker spring charge
indication

Spring charging time measurement

Spring charging time calculation will be initiated as soon as the circuit breaker is
closed and charging motor starts (NO contact of the device is connected to
SPRCHRST) to store the energy in the close spring. An indicator provided in the
circuit breaker is displayed when the spring is completely charged. This status is
taken through NO contact and then connected to SPRCHRD.

The binary input SPRCHRST indicates the start of circuit breaker spring charging
time. SPRCHRD indicates that the circuit breaker spring is charged. The spring
charging time is calculated from the difference of these two signal timings. Spring
charging indication is described in figure 599.

The last measured spring charging time SPCHT is provided as a service value. The
spring charging time SPCHT can be reset on the LHMI or by activating the input
RSTSPCHT.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1181

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

Alarm limit check

If the time taken by the spring to charge is more than the value set with the
SpChAlmTime setting, the subfunction generates the SPCHALM alarm.

It is possible to block the SPCHALM alarm signal by activating the BLKALM binary
input.

18.4.7.8 Circuit breaker gas pressure indication GUID-9D070D52-B499-4D45-9195-60181819184E v10

The circuit breaker gas pressure indication subfunction monitors the gas pressure
inside the arc chamber. The operation is described in figure 600.

PRESALM
tDGasPresAlm
BLOCK AND t GPRESALM

BLKALM

tDGasPresLO
PRESLO AND t GPRESLO
IEC12000622 V3 EN-US

Figure 600: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker gas pressure
indication

When the PRESALM binary input is activated, the GPRESALM output is activated
after a time delay set with the tDGasPresAlm setting. The GPRESALM alarm can be
blocked by activating the BLKALM input.

If the pressure drops further to a very low level, the PRESLO binary input goes
high, activating the lockout alarm GPRESLO after a time delay set with the
tDGasPresLO setting. The GPRESLO alarm can be blocked by activating the
BLKALM input.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The alarm signals
from the function can be blocked by activating the binary input BLKALM.

18.4.8 Technical data

GUID-B6799420-D726-460E-B02F-C7D4F1937432 v8

Table 824: SSCBR Technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Alarm level for open and close (0 – 200) ms ±3 ms
travel time
Alarm level for number of (0 – 9999) -
operations
Independent time delay for (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
spring charging time alarm greater
Table continues on next page

1182 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Function Range or value Accuracy

Independent time delay for gas (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
pressure alarm greater
Independent time delay for gas (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
pressure lockout greater
CB Contact Travel Time, ±3 ms
opening and closing
Remaining Life of CB ±2 operations
Accumulated Energy ±1.0% or ±0.5 whichever is
greater

18.5 Event function EVENT SEMOD120002-1 v2

18.5.1 Identification
SEMOD167950-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Event function EVENT -
S00946 V1 EN-US

18.5.2 Functionality M12805-6 v11

When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication,

time-tagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station
level. These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is
connected to the Event function (EVENT). The EVENT function block is used for
LON and SPA communication.

Analog, integer and double indication values are also transferred through the
EVENT function.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1183

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

18.5.3 Function block SEMOD116030-4 v2

EVENT
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16

IEC05000697-2-en.vsd
IEC05000697 V2 EN-US

Figure 601: EVENT function block

18.5.4 Signals IP11335-1 v2

PID-4145-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 825: EVENT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 GROUP 0 Input 1
SIGNAL
INPUT2 GROUP 0 Input 2
SIGNAL
INPUT3 GROUP 0 Input 3
SIGNAL
INPUT4 GROUP 0 Input 4
SIGNAL
INPUT5 GROUP 0 Input 5
SIGNAL
INPUT6 GROUP 0 Input 6
SIGNAL
INPUT7 GROUP 0 Input 7
SIGNAL
INPUT8 GROUP 0 Input 8
SIGNAL
INPUT9 GROUP 0 Input 9
SIGNAL
INPUT10 GROUP 0 Input 10
SIGNAL
INPUT11 GROUP 0 Input 11
SIGNAL
INPUT12 GROUP 0 Input 12
SIGNAL
Table continues on next page

1184 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Name Type Default Description

INPUT13 GROUP 0 Input 13
SIGNAL
INPUT14 GROUP 0 Input 14
SIGNAL
INPUT15 GROUP 0 Input 15
SIGNAL
INPUT16 GROUP 0 Input 16
SIGNAL

18.5.5 Settings IP11336-1 v2

PID-4145-SETTINGS v6

Table 826: EVENT Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SPAChannelMask Off - - Off SPA channel mask
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
LONChannelMask Off - - Off LON channel mask
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
EventMask1 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 1
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask2 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 2
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask3 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 3
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask4 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 4
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask5 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 5
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask6 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 6
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1185

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

EventMask7 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 7
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask8 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 8
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask9 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 9
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask10 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 10
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask11 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 11
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask12 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 12
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask13 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 13
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask14 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 14
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask15 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 15
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask16 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 16
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
MinRepIntVal1 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 1
MinRepIntVal2 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 2
MinRepIntVal3 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 3
MinRepIntVal4 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 4
MinRepIntVal5 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 5
Table continues on next page

1186 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

MinRepIntVal6 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 6
MinRepIntVal7 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 7
MinRepIntVal8 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 8
MinRepIntVal9 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 9
MinRepIntVal10 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 10
MinRepIntVal11 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 11
MinRepIntVal12 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 12
MinRepIntVal13 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 13
MinRepIntVal14 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 14
MinRepIntVal15 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 15
MinRepIntVal16 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 16

18.5.6 Operation principle M12807-6 v6

The main purpose of the Event function (EVENT) is to generate events when the
state or value of any of the connected input signals is in a state, or is undergoing a
state transition, for which event generation is enabled.

Each EVENT function has 16 inputs INPUT1 - INPUT16. Each input can be given
a name from the Application Configuration tool. The inputs are normally used to
create single events, but are also intended for double indication events. For double
indications, only the first eight inputs, 1–8, must be used. Inputs 9–16 can be used
for other types of events in the same EVENT block.

The EVENT function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events.

Events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical signals
and binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main
processing module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly on the
input module. Time-tagging of the events that are originated from internal logical
signals have a resolution corresponding to the execution cycle-time of the source
application. Time-tagging of the events that are originated from binary input
signals have a resolution of 1 ms.

The outputs from the EVENT function are formed by the reading of status, events
and alarms by the station level on every single input. The user-defined name for
each input is intended to be used by the station level.

All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to
1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the
oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.

Events are produced according to set event masks. The event masks are treated
commonly for both the LON and SPA communication. An EventMask can be set
individually for each input channel. These settings are available:

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1187

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

• NoEvents
• OnSet
• OnReset
• OnChange
• AutoDetect

It is possible to define which part of the EVENT function generates the events.
This can be performed individually for communication types SPAChannelMask and
LONChannelMask. For each communication type these settings are available:

• Off
• Channel 1-8
• Channel 9-16
• Channel 1-16

For LON communication, events are normally sent to station level at change. It is
also possible to set a time for cyclic sending of the events individually for each
input channel.

To protect the SA system from signals with a high change rate that can easily
saturate the EVENT function or the communication subsystems behind it, a quota
limiter is implemented. If an input creates events at a rate that completely consume
the granted quota then further events from the channel will be blocked. This block
will be removed when the input calms down and the accumulated quota reach 66%
of the maximum burst quota. The maximum burst quota per input channel is 45
events per second.

18.6 Disturbance report DRPRDRE IP14584-1 v2

18.6.1 Identification
M16055-1 v8

Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification device number
Disturbance report DRPRDRE - -
Disturbance report A1RADR - A4RADR - -
Disturbance report B1RBDR - B22RBDR - -

18.6.2 Functionality M12153-3 v13

Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the
secondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the
disturbance report functionality.

1188 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Disturbance report (DRPRDRE), always included in the IED, acquires sampled

data of all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function block
with a maximum of 40 analog and 352 binary signals.

The Disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions:

• Event list
• Indications
• Event recorder
• Trip value recorder
• Disturbance recorder
• Fault locator
• Settings information

The Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility regarding

configuration, starting conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity.

A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to the AnRADR or BnRBDR

function blocks, which are set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All connected
signals from start of pre-fault time to the end of post-fault time will be included in
the recording. Disturbance record will have visible settings from all function
instances that are configured in the application configuration tool.

Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade
format as a reader file HDR, a configuration file CFG, and a data file DAT. The
same applies to all events, which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. The local
HMI is used to get information about the recordings. The disturbance report files
can be uploaded to PCM600 for further analysis using the disturbance handling
tool.

18.6.3 Function block IP806-1 v1

M12510-3 v3

DRPRDRE
DRPOFF
RECSTART
RECMADE
CLEARED
MEMUSED

IEC05000406-3-en.vsd
IEC05000406 V3 EN-US

Figure 602: DRPRDRE function block

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1189

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

SEMOD54837-4 v4

A1RADR
^GRP INPUT1
^GRP INPUT2
^GRP INPUT3
^GRP INPUT4
^GRP INPUT5
^GRP INPUT6
^GRP INPUT7
^GRP INPUT8
^GRP INPUT9
^GRP INPUT10

IEC05000430-4-en.vsdx

IEC05000430 V4 EN-US

Figure 603: A1RADR function block example for A1RADR-A3RADR

SEMOD54843-4 v3

A4RADR
^INPUT31
^INPUT32
^INPUT33
^INPUT34
^INPUT35
^INPUT36
^INPUT37
^INPUT38
^INPUT39
^INPUT40

IEC05000431-3-en.vsd
IEC05000431 V3 EN-US

Figure 604: A4RADR function block, derived analog inputs

SEMOD54845-4 v6

B1RBDR
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16

IEC05000432-3-en.vsd
IEC05000432 V3 EN-US

Figure 605: B1RBDR function block, binary inputs, example for B1RBDR -
B22RBDR

1190 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

18.6.4 Signals
PID-3949-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 827: DRPRDRE Output signals

Name Type Description
DRPOFF BOOLEAN Disturbance report function turned off
RECSTART BOOLEAN Disturbance recording started
RECMADE BOOLEAN Disturbance recording made
CLEARED BOOLEAN All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared
MEMUSED BOOLEAN More than 80% of memory used

PID-4014-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 828: A1RADR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
GRPINPUT1 GROUP - Group signal for input 1
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT2 GROUP - Group signal for input 2
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT3 GROUP - Group signal for input 3
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT4 GROUP - Group signal for input 4
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT5 GROUP - Group signal for input 5
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT6 GROUP - Group signal for input 6
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT7 GROUP - Group signal for input 7
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT8 GROUP - Group signal for input 8
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT9 GROUP - Group signal for input 9
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT10 GROUP - Group signal for input 10
SIGNAL

GUID-D025D5D9-A0F3-4A00-891A-63AD5F609A77 v2

A2RADR and A3RADR functions have the same input signal specifications as
A1RADR but with different numbering:
• A2RADR: GRPINPUT11 to GRPINPUT20 (group signal for inputs 11 to 20)
• A3RADR: GRPINPUT21 to GRPINPUT30 (group signal for inputs 21 to 30)

A4RADR block is used to record the calculated analog values of any type, not
related to hardware devices (e.g. difference currents, power factors etc.).

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1191

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

PID-4017-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 829: A4RADR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT31 REAL 0 Analog channel 31
INPUT32 REAL 0 Analog channel 32
INPUT33 REAL 0 Analog channel 33
INPUT34 REAL 0 Analog channel 34
INPUT35 REAL 0 Analog channel 35
INPUT36 REAL 0 Analog channel 36
INPUT37 REAL 0 Analog channel 37
INPUT38 REAL 0 Analog channel 38
INPUT39 REAL 0 Analog channel 39
INPUT40 REAL 0 Analog channel 40

PID-3798-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 830: B1RBDR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 16

GUID-D3A8067F-80F8-4174-BD2D-4C43F4B99020 v3

B2RBDR to B22RBDR functions have the same input signal specifications as

B1RBDR but with different numbering:

• B2RBDR: INPUT17 to INPUT32 (binary channels 17 to 32)

• B3RBDR: INPUT33 to INPUT48 (binary channels 33 to 48)
• B4RBDR: INPUT49 to INPUT64 (binary channels 49 to 64)
• B5RBDR: INPUT65 to INPUT80 (binary channels 65 to 80)

1192 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

• B6RBDR: INPUT81 to INPUT96 (binary channels 81 to 96)

• B7RBDR: INPUT97 to INPUT112 (binary channels 97 to 112)
• B8RBDR: INPUT113 to INPUT128 (binary channels 113 to 128)
• B9RBDR: INPUT129 to INPUT144 (binary channels 129 to 144)
• B10RBDR: INPUT145 to INPUT160 (binary channels 145 to 160)
• B11RBDR: INPUT161 to INPUT176 (binary channels 161 to 176)
• B12RBDR: INPUT177 to INPUT192 (binary channels 177 to 192)
• B13RBDR: INPUT193 to INPUT208 (binary channels 193 to 208)
• B14RBDR: INPUT209 to INPUT224 (binary channels 209 to 224)
• B15RBDR: INPUT225 to INPUT240 (binary channels 225 to 240)
• B16RBDR: INPUT241 to INPUT256 (binary channels 241 to 256)
• B17RBDR: INPUT257 to INPUT272 (binary channels 257 to 272)
• B18RBDR: INPUT273 to INPUT288 (binary channels 273 to 288)
• B19RBDR: INPUT289 to INPUT304 (binary channels 289 to 304)
• B20RBDR: INPUT305 to INPUT320 (binary channels 305 to 320)
• B21RBDR: INPUT321 to INPUT336 (binary channels 321 to 336)
• B22RBDR: INPUT337 to INPUT352 (binary channels 337 to 352)

18.6.5 Settings
PID-7068-SETTINGS v1

Table 831: DRPRDRE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
PreFaultRecT 0.05 - 9.90 s 0.01 0.10 Pre-fault recording time
PostFaultRecT 0.1 - 10.0 s 0.1 0.5 Post-fault recording time
TimeLimit 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.0 Fault recording time limit
PostRetrig Off - - Off Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not (Off)
On
MaxNoStoreRec 10 - 100 - 1 100 Maximum number of stored disturbances
ZeroAngleRef 1 - 30 Ch 1 1 Trip value recorder, phasor reference
channel
OpModeTest Off - - Off Operation mode during test mode
On
SetInfoInDRep Disable - - Enable Enable Disturbance report settings
Enable functionality

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1193

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

PID-4014-SETTINGS v7

Table 832: A1RADR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation01 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation02 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation03 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation04 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation05 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation06 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation07 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation08 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation09 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation10 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On

Table 833: A1RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NomValue01 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 1
UnderTrigOp01 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 1 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe01 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 1
in % of signal
OverTrigOp01 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 1 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe01 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 1 in
% of signal
NomValue02 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 2
UnderTrigOp02 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 2 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe02 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 2
in % of signal
OverTrigOp02 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 2 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe02 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 2 in
% of signal
NomValue03 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 3
UnderTrigOp03 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 3 (on) or not (off)
Table continues on next page

1194 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UnderTrigLe03 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 3
in % of signal
OverTrigOp03 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 3 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe03 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 3 in
% of signal
NomValue04 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 4
UnderTrigOp04 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 4 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe04 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 4
in % of signal
OverTrigOp04 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 4 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe04 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 4 in
% of signal
NomValue05 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 5
UnderTrigOp05 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 5 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe05 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 5
in % of signal
OverTrigOp05 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 5 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe05 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 5 in
% of signal
NomValue06 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 6
UnderTrigOp06 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 6 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe06 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 6
in % of signal
OverTrigOp06 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 6 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe06 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 6 in
% of signal
NomValue07 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 7
UnderTrigOp07 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 7 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe07 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 7
in % of signal
OverTrigOp07 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 7 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe07 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 7 in
% of signal
NomValue08 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 8
UnderTrigOp08 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 8 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe08 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 8
in % of signal
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1195

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OverTrigOp08 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 8 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe08 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 8 in
% of signal
NomValue09 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 9
UnderTrigOp09 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 9 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe09 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 9
in % of signal
OverTrigOp09 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 9 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe09 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 9 in
% of signal
NomValue10 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 10
UnderTrigOp10 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 10 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe10 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 10
in % of signal
OverTrigOp10 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 10 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe10 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 10
in % of signal

GUID-E05EEC82-CB90-4E73-B9C9-4C16FD95FCBF v1

A2RADR to A4RADR functions have the same Non group settings (basic) as
A1RADR but with different numbering:

• A2RADR: Operation11 to Operation20

• A3RADR: Operation21 to Operation30
• A4RADR: Operation31 to Operation40

A2RADR to A4RADR functions have the same Non group settings (advanced) as
A1RADR but with different numbering (examples given in brackets):

• A2RADR: 11 to 20 (NomValue11, nominal value for analog channel 11)

• A3RADR: 21 to 30 (NomValue21, nominal value for analog channel 21)
• A4RADR: 31 to 40 (NomValue31, nominal value for analog channel 31)

1196 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

PID-3798-SETTINGS v6

Table 834: B1RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigDR01 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED01 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 1
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR02 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED02 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 2
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR03 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED03 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 3
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR04 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED04 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 4
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR05 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED05 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 5
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR06 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED06 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 6
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR07 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED07 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 7
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR08 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED08 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 8
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR09 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1197

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SetLED09 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 9
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR10 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED10 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 10
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR11 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED11 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 11
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR12 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED12 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 12
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR13 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED13 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 13
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR14 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED14 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 14
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR15 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED15 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 15
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR16 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED16 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 16
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
FunType1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 1
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 2 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

1198 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 2
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 3 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 3
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 4 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 4
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 5 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 5
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 6 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 6
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 7 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 7
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 8 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 8
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 9 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 9
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 10 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
10 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType11 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 11 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo11 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
11 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType12 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 12 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo12 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
12 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType13 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 13 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo13 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
13 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType14 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 14 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1199

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo14 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
14 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType15 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 15 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo15 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
15 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType16 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 16 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo16 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
16 (IEC -60870-5-103)

Table 835: B1RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigLevel01 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 1
IndicationMa01 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 1
Show
TrigLevel02 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 2
IndicationMa02 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 2
Show
TrigLevel03 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 3
IndicationMa03 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 3
Show
TrigLevel04 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 4
IndicationMa04 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 4
Show
TrigLevel05 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 5
IndicationMa05 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 5
Show
TrigLevel06 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 6
IndicationMa06 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 6
Show
TrigLevel07 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 7
IndicationMa07 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 7
Show
TrigLevel08 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 8
IndicationMa08 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 8
Show
TrigLevel09 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 9
Table continues on next page

1200 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IndicationMa09 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 9
Show
TrigLevel10 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 10
IndicationMa10 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 10
Show
TrigLevel11 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 11
IndicationMa11 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 11
Show
TrigLevel12 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 12
IndicationMa12 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 12
Show
TrigLevel13 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 13
IndicationMa13 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 13
Show
TrigLevel14 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 14
IndicationMa14 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 14
Show
TrigLevel15 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 15
IndicationMa15 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 15
Show
TrigLevel16 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 16
IndicationMa16 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 16
Show

GUID-8702C5B9-05A3-4E61-8952-C66483FFDFE2 v3

B2RBDR to B22RBDR functions have the same Non group settings (basic) as
B1RBDR but with different numbering (examples given in brackets):
• B2RBDR: 17 to 32 (SetLED17, set LED on HMI for binary channel 17)
• B3RBDR: 33 to 48 (SetLED33, set LED on HMI for binary channel 33)
• B4RBDR: 49 to 64 (SetLED49, set LED on HMI for binary channel 49)
• B5RBDR: 65 to 80 (SetLED65, set LED on HMI for binary channel 65)
• B6RBDR: 81 to 96 (SetLED81, set LED on HMI for binary channel 81)
• B7RBDR: 97 to 112 (SetLED97, set LED on HMI for binary channel 97)
• B8RBDR: 113 to 128 (SetLED113, set LED on HMI for binary channel 113)
• B9RBDR: 129 to 144 (SetLED129, set LED on HMI for binary channel 129)
• B10RBDR: 145 to 160 (SetLED145, set LED on HMI for binary channel 145)
• B11RBDR: 161 to 176 (SetLED161, set LED on HMI for binary channel 161)
• B12RBDR: 177 to 192 (SetLED177, set LED on HMI for binary channel 177)
• B13RBDR: 193 to 208 (SetLED193, set LED on HMI for binary channel 193)
• B14RBDR: 209 to 224 (SetLED209, set LED on HMI for binary channel 209)

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1201

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

• B15RBDR: 225 to 240 (SetLED225, set LED on HMI for binary channel 225)
• B16RBDR: 241 to 256 (SetLED241, set LED on HMI for binary channel 241)
• B17RBDR: 257 to 272 (SetLED257, set LED on HMI for binary channel 257)
• B18RBDR: 273 to 288 (SetLED273, set LED on HMI for binary channel 273)
• B19RBDR: 289 to 304 (SetLED289, set LED on HMI for binary channel 289)
• B20RBDR: 305 to 320 (SetLED305, set LED on HMI for binary channel 305)
• B21RBDR: 321 to 336 (SetLED321, set LED on HMI for binary channel 321)
• B22RBDR: 337 to 352 (SetLED337, set LED on HMI for binary channel 337)

B2RBDR to B22RBDR functions have the same Non group settings (advanced) as
B1RBDR but with different numbering (examples given in brackets):
• B2RBDR: 17 to 32 (IndicationMa17, indication mask for binary channel 17)
• B3RBDR: 33 to 48 (IndicationMa33, indication mask for binary channel 33)
• B4RBDR: 49 to 64 (IndicationMa49, indication mask for binary channel 49)
• B5RBDR: 65 to 80 (IndicationMa65, indication mask for binary channel 65)
• B6RBDR: 81 to 96 (IndicationMa81, indication mask for binary channel 81)
• B7RBDR: 97 to 112 (IndicationMa97, indication mask for binary channel 97)
• B8RBDR: 113 to 128 (IndicationMa113, indication mask for binary channel
113)
• B9RBDR: 129 to 144 (IndicationMa129, indication mask for binary channel
129)
• B10RBDR: 145 to 160 (IndicationMa145, indication mask for binary channel
145)
• B11RBDR: 161 to 176 (IndicationMa161, indication mask for binary channel
161)
• B12RBDR: 177 to 192 (IndicationMa177, indication mask for binary channel
177)
• B13RBDR: 193 to 208 (IndicationMa193, indication mask for binary channel
193)
• B14RBDR: 209 to 224 (IndicationMa209, indication mask for binary channel
209)
• B15RBDR: 225 to 240 (IndicationMa225, indication mask for binary channel
225)
• B16RBDR: 241 to 256 (IndicationMa241, indication mask for binary channel
241)
• B17RBDR: 257 to 272 (IndicationMa257, indication mask for binary channel
257)
• B18RBDR: 273 to 288 (IndicationMa273, indication mask for binary channel
273)
• B19RBDR: 289 to 304 (IndicationMa289, indication mask for binary channel
289)
• B20RBDR: 305 to 320 (IndicationMa305, indication mask for binary channel
305)
• B21RBDR: 321 to 336 (IndicationMa321, indication mask for binary channel
321)
• B22RBDR: 337 to 352 (IndicationMa337, indication mask for binary channel
337)

1202 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

18.6.6 Monitored data

PID-3949-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 836: DRPRDRE Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MemoryUsed INTEGER - % Memory usage (0-100%)
UnTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 1
activated
OvTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 1 activated
UnTrigStatCh2 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 2
activated
OvTrigStatCh2 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 2 activated
UnTrigStatCh3 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 3
activated
OvTrigStatCh3 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 3 activated
UnTrigStatCh4 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 4
activated
OvTrigStatCh4 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 4 activated
UnTrigStatCh5 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 5
activated
OvTrigStatCh5 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 5 activated
UnTrigStatCh6 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 6
activated
OvTrigStatCh6 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 6 activated
UnTrigStatCh7 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 7
activated
OvTrigStatCh7 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 7 activated
UnTrigStatCh8 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 8
activated
OvTrigStatCh8 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 8 activated
UnTrigStatCh9 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 9
activated
OvTrigStatCh9 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 9 activated
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1203

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UnTrigStatCh10 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 10
activated
OvTrigStatCh10 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 10 activated
UnTrigStatCh11 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 11
activated
OvTrigStatCh11 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 11 activated
UnTrigStatCh12 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 12
activated
OvTrigStatCh12 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 12 activated
UnTrigStatCh13 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 13
activated
OvTrigStatCh13 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 13 activated
UnTrigStatCh14 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 14
activated
OvTrigStatCh14 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 14 activated
UnTrigStatCh15 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 15
activated
OvTrigStatCh15 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 15 activated
UnTrigStatCh16 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 16
activated
OvTrigStatCh16 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 16 activated
UnTrigStatCh17 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 17
activated
OvTrigStatCh17 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 17 activated
UnTrigStatCh18 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 18
activated
OvTrigStatCh18 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 18 activated
UnTrigStatCh19 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 19
activated
OvTrigStatCh19 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 19 activated
Table continues on next page

1204 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UnTrigStatCh20 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 20
activated
OvTrigStatCh20 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 20 activated
UnTrigStatCh21 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 21
activated
OvTrigStatCh21 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 21 activated
UnTrigStatCh22 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 22
activated
OvTrigStatCh22 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 22 activated
UnTrigStatCh23 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 23
activated
OvTrigStatCh23 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 23 activated
UnTrigStatCh24 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 24
activated
OvTrigStatCh24 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 24 activated
UnTrigStatCh25 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 25
activated
OvTrigStatCh25 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 25 activated
UnTrigStatCh26 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 26
activated
OvTrigStatCh26 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 26 activated
UnTrigStatCh27 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 27
activated
OvTrigStatCh27 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 27 activated
UnTrigStatCh28 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 28
activated
OvTrigStatCh28 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 28 activated
UnTrigStatCh29 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 29
activated
OvTrigStatCh29 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 29 activated
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1205

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UnTrigStatCh30 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 30
activated
OvTrigStatCh30 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 30 activated
UnTrigStatCh31 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 31
activated
OvTrigStatCh31 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 31 activated
UnTrigStatCh32 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 32
activated
OvTrigStatCh32 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 32 activated
UnTrigStatCh33 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 33
activated
OvTrigStatCh33 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 33 activated
UnTrigStatCh34 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 34
activated
OvTrigStatCh34 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 34 activated
UnTrigStatCh35 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 35
activated
OvTrigStatCh35 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 35 activated
UnTrigStatCh36 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 36
activated
OvTrigStatCh36 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 36 activated
UnTrigStatCh37 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 37
activated
OvTrigStatCh37 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 37 activated
UnTrigStatCh38 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 38
activated
OvTrigStatCh38 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 38 activated
UnTrigStatCh39 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 39
activated
OvTrigStatCh39 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 39 activated
Table continues on next page

1206 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UnTrigStatCh40 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 40
activated
OvTrigStatCh40 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 40 activated
FaultNumber INTEGER - - Disturbance fault
number

18.6.7 Operation principle

M12155-6 v10

Disturbance report DRPRDRE is a common name for several functions to supply

the operator, analysis engineer, and so on, with sufficient information about events
in the system.

The functions included in the disturbance report are:

• Event list (EL)

• Indications (IND)
• Event recorder (ER)
• Trip value recorder (TVR)
• Disturbance recorder (DR)
• Fault locator (FL)
• Settings information

Figure 606 shows the relations between Disturbance Report, included functions
and function blocks. Event list (EL), Event recorder (ER) and Indications (IND)
uses information from the binary input function blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value
recorder (TVR) uses analog information from the analog input function blocks
(AxRADR) which is used by FL after estimation by TVR. Disturbance recorder
DRPRDRE acquires information from both AxRADR and BxRBDR.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1207

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

AxRADR Disturbance Report

DRPRDRE FL
Analog signals
Trip value rec Fault locator

BxRBDR Disturbance
recorder

Binary signals

Event list

Event recorder

Indications

IEC09000336-3-en.vsdx

IEC09000336 V3 EN-US

Figure 606: Disturbance report functions and related function blocks

The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings,
each with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The event list
function is working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording
time, and so on. Settings information function contains all the visible settings,
parameter information of components configured in ACT, runtime status and
IEC61850 behavior that is added to the disturbance record header file. These
settings information is recorded in XML format and then grouped for each function
instance in the HDR file. The function, setting names and Enum values are same as
in the HMI and can be translated to the selected HMI language. All setting values
are updated along with the units. If the setting values are related to the global base
value, then the setting value is scaled and updated with corresponding global base
unit. All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash
memories. This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary
power. Each report will get an identification number in the interval from 0-999.

1208 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Disturbance report

Record no. N Record no. N+1 Record no. N+100

General dist.
Trip Event Disturbance
Information & Setting Indications Fault locator Event list
values recordings recording
infotrmation

IEC05000125-2-en.vsdx
IEC05000125 V2 EN-US

Figure 607: Disturbance report structure

Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded

when the memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is overwritten by the new
one. The total recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of
sampling frequency, number of analog and binary channels and recording time and
settings information. Figure 608 shows the number of recordings versus the total
recording time tested for a typical configuration, that is, in a 50 Hz system it is
possible to record 100 where the average recording time is 3.4 seconds. The
memory limit does not affect the rest of the disturbance report (Event list (EL),
Event recorder (ER), Indications (IND) and Trip value recorder (TVR)).

Number of recordings
100
3,4 s

80 3,4 s 20 analog
96 binary
40 analog
96 binary
60 6,3 s
6,3 s

6,3 s 50 Hz
40
60 Hz
Total recording time

250 300 350 400 s

en05000488.vsd
IEC05000488 V1 EN-US

Figure 608: Example of number of recordings versus the total recording time

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1209

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings

total recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of
recordings to less than 100.

The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This
might cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk
space.

Disturbance information M12155-175 v3

Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip
values are available on the local HMI. To acquire a complete disturbance report the
user must use a PC and - either the PCM600 Disturbance handling tool - or a FTP
or MMS (over 61850) client. The PC can be connected to the IED front, rear or
remotely via the station bus (Ethernet ports).

Indications (IND) M12155-87 v5

Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of
the disturbance (not time-tagged).

Event recorder (ER) M12155-89 v5

The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have
occurred during the disturbance. The information is available via the local HMI or
PCM600.

Event list (EL) M12155-177 v6

The event list may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list
information is continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The
oldest data is overwritten. The logged signals may be presented via local HMI or
PCM600.

Trip value recorder (TVR) M12155-91 v5

The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the fault
and during the fault.

Disturbance recorder (DR) M12155-97 v5

Disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after
the fault.

Settings information GUID-892F72ED-CC6C-469B-90CA-73E9E1181187 v1

For each disturbance recording, the setting values of the configured components
are read twice; once during the trigger of disturbance record and again during post
processing of the disturbance record.

During post processing of the disturbance record, the header file is updated with a
section called Settings . Settings has complete setting values of the configured
components that are read during the trigger time. The setting values, runtime status

1210 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

and the behavior of each component are compared between the trigger and the post
processing time. If there are any differences, then it will be added in the header file
under section Changed_settings.

In the HDR file, section tag Settings has an attribute tag called function which
includes parameters that are grouped based on the function instance. The function
tag has content called name which is the function name provided together with the
user-defined name in brackets similar to the HMI. Status content will indicate the
runtime status of the function and beh content will indicate the IEC61850 behavior
of the components, if supported. Non runtime components will not have status and
beh tag contents.

Parameters of the function are listed as a child tag Set with contents name, value
and unit:
• name — parameter name same as HMI
• value — actual parameter value
• unit — parameter unit

The changed_settings attribute tag is similar to the settings section. It contains

functions which have changes in parameter value or runtime status or IEC61850
behavior when compared with trigger and post-processing settings values.

Fault locator (FL) M12155-186 v4

The fault location function calculates the distance to fault.

Time tagging M12155-194 v1

The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all
time tagging within the disturbance report

Recording times M12155-99 v5

Disturbance report DRPRDRE records information about a disturbance during a

settable time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report.
Disturbance recorder (DR), event recorder (ER) and indication function register
disturbance data and events during tRecording, the total recording time.

The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:

tRecording = PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on

which criterion stops the current disturbance recording

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1211

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

Trig point
TimeLimit

PreFaultRecT PostFaultRecT

1 2 3

en05000487.vsd
IEC05000487 V1 EN-US

Figure 609: The recording times definition

PreFaultRecT, 1 Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the
operate time of the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.
tFault, 2 Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as
any valid trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit
the limit time).
PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all
activated triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.
TimeLimit Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording
was triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger
that does not reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum
recording time of a recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already
stored disturbances. Use the setting TimeLimit to set this time.

Analog signals M12155-160 v8

Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder

and triggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved
for external analog signals from analog input modules (TRM) and line data
communication module (LDCM) via preprocessing function blocks (SMAI) and
summation block (3PHSUM). The last 10 channels may be connected to internally
calculated analog signals available as function block output signals (mA input
signals, phase differential currents, bias currents and so on).

1212 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

SMAI A1RADR
Block AI3P A2RADR
^GRP2L1 AI1 INPUT1 A3RADR
External
analogue ^GRP2L2 AI2 INPUT2
signals ^GRP2L3 AI3 INPUT3
^GRP2N AI4 INPUT4
Type AIN INPUT5
INPUT6
...

A4RADR

INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
Internal analogue signals INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36

...

INPUT40

IEC10000029-1-en.vsd
IEC10000029 V1 EN-US

Figure 610: Analog input function blocks

The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after
configuration) available as an input signal on the AxRADR function block via the
SMAI function block. The information is saved at the Disturbance report base
sampling rate (1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals are updated
according to the cycle time of the specific function. If a function is running at
lower speed than the base sampling rate, Disturbance recorder will use the latest
updated sample until a new updated sample is available.

If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analog configuration of the
Disturbance report is the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT, external signal configuration).
In case of modification of a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration the
Application Configuration tool within PCM600 is used.

The preprocessor function block (SMAI) calculates the residual quantities in cases
where only the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). SMAI makes the
information available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated
residual output (AIN-output). In situations where AI4-input is used as an input
signal the corresponding information is available on the non-calculated output
(AI4) on the SMAI function block. Connect the signals to the AxRADR
accordingly.

For each of the analog signals, Operation = On means that it is recorded by the
disturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and
triggers even if operation is set to Off. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be
used as trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1213

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

If Operation = Off, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in graph.

However, Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported. The
input channel can still be used to trig the disturbance recorder.

If Operation = On, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in

graph.

The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect
the entire disturbance report when being used as triggers.

Binary signals M12155-162 v9

Up to 352 binary signals can be selected to be handled by disturbance report. The

signals can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary
signal is selected to be recorded when:

• the corresponding function block is included in the configuration

• the signal is connected to the input of the function block

Each of the 352 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report
(Operation = On). A binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED on the
local HMI (SetLED = On).

The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, event list and the
disturbance recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are
used as triggers. The indications are also selected from these 352 signals with local
HMI IndicationMask = Show/Hide.

Trigger signals M12155-164 v2

The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the event list,
which runs continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a
complete disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition
is fulfilled, there is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies
the importance of choosing the right signals as trigger conditions.

A trigger can be of type:

• Manual trigger
• Binary-signal trigger
• Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)

Manual trigger M12155-167 v4

A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, PCM600 or
via station bus (IEC 61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger
signal is generated. This feature is especially useful for testing. Refer to the
operator's manual for procedure.

Binary-signal trigger M12155-169 v4

Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a
trigger (Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to

1214 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

generate a trigger from a logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the
indications list of the disturbance report.

Analog-signal trigger M12155-171 v6

All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded
in the disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp,
OverTrigLe and UnderTrigLe.

The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is
found, the absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the
average value is above the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger,
this trigger is indicated with a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name.

If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or
undercurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name.
The procedure is separately performed for each channel.

This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which is
insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operate time for this start is typically in
the range of one cycle, 20 ms for a 50 Hz network.

All under/over trig signal information is available on the local HMI and PCM600.

18.6.8 Technical data

M12760-1 v10

Table 837: DRPRDRE technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Pre-fault time (0.05–9.90) s -
Post-fault time (0.1–10.0) s -
Limit time (0.5–10.0) s -
Maximum number of recordings 100, first in - first out -
Time tagging resolution 1 ms See table 1035
Maximum number of analog inputs 30 + 10 (external + internally -
derived)
Maximum number of binary inputs 352 -
Maximum number of phasors in the 30 -
Trip Value recorder per recording
Maximum number of indications in a 352 -
disturbance report
Maximum number of events in the 150 -
Event recording per recording
Maximum number of events in the 1000, first in - first out -
Event list
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1215

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

Function Range or value Accuracy

Maximum total recording time (3.4 s 340 seconds (100 recordings) -
recording time and maximum number at 50 Hz, 280 seconds (80
of channels, typical value) recordings) at 60 Hz
Sampling rate 1 kHz at 50 Hz -
1.2 kHz at 60 Hz
Recording bandwidth (5-300) Hz -

18.7 Logical signal status report BINSTATREP GUID-E7A2DB38-DD96-4296-B3D5-EB7FBE77CE07 v2

18.7.1 Identification GUID-E0247779-27A2-4E6C-A6DD-D4C31516CA5C v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP - -

18.7.2 Functionality GUID-A72E490D-01F7-4874-B010-8BDE38391D88 v3

The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function makes it possible for a
SPA master to poll signals from various other functions.

18.7.3 Function block GUID-BA0A5BC3-493B-4FE3-B4A9-14F60A88A22F v2

BINSTATREP
BLOCK OUTPUT1
^INPUT1 OUTPUT2
^INPUT2 OUTPUT3
^INPUT3 OUTPUT4
^INPUT4 OUTPUT5
^INPUT5 OUTPUT6
^INPUT6 OUTPUT7
^INPUT7 OUTPUT8
^INPUT8 OUTPUT9
^INPUT9 OUTPUT10
^INPUT10 OUTPUT11
^INPUT11 OUTPUT12
^INPUT12 OUTPUT13
^INPUT13 OUTPUT14
^INPUT14 OUTPUT15
^INPUT15 OUTPUT16
^INPUT16

IEC09000730-1-en.vsd
IEC09000730 V1 EN-US

Figure 611: BINSTATREP function block

1216 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

18.7.4 Signals
PID-4144-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 838: BINSTATREP Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 16

PID-4144-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 839: BINSTATREP Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 5
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 8
OUTPUT9 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 9
OUTPUT10 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 10
OUTPUT11 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 11
OUTPUT12 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 12
OUTPUT13 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 13
OUTPUT14 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 14
OUTPUT15 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 15
OUTPUT16 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 16

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1217

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

18.7.5 Settings
PID-4144-SETTINGS v6

Table 840: BINSTATREP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 10.0 Time delay of function

18.7.6 Operation principle GUID-537921CA-82B9-4A02-BAD1-67E3AC61AE96 v3

The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function has 16 inputs and 16
outputs. The output status follows the inputs and can be read from the local HMI or
via SPA communication.

When an input is set, the respective output is set for a user defined time. If the
input signal remains set for a longer period, the output will remain set until the
input signal resets.

INPUTn

OUTPUTn
t t

IEC09000732-1-en.vsd
IEC09000732 V1 EN-US

Figure 612: BINSTATREP logical diagram

18.8 Measured value expander block RANGE_XP SEMOD52451-1 v2

18.8.1 Identification
SEMOD113212-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP - -

18.8.2 Functionality SEMOD52450-4 v7

The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU

and VNMMXU), current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI
and VMSQI) and IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGAPC) are
provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be

1218 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

supervised with four settable limits: low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-
high limit. The measure value expander block (RANGE_XP) has been introduced
to enable translating the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5
binary signals: below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high limit or
above high-high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the
configurable logic or for alarming purpose.

18.8.3 Function block SEMOD54336-4 v3

RANGE_XP
RANGE* HIGHHIGH
HIGH
NORMAL
LOW
LOWLOW

IEC05000346-2-en.vsd
IEC05000346 V2 EN-US

Figure 613: RANGE_XP function block

18.8.4 Signals SEMOD53803-1 v2

PID-3819-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 841: RANGE_XP Input signals

Name Type Default Description
RANGE INTEGER 0 Measured value range

PID-3819-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 842: RANGE_XP Output signals

Name Type Description
HIGHHIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is above high-high limit
HIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and high-high
limit
NORMAL BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and low limit
LOW BOOLEAN Measured value is between low and low-low limit
LOWLOW BOOLEAN Measured value is below low-low limit

18.8.5 Operation principle SEMOD52462-4 v5

The input signal must be connected to a range output of a measuring function block
(CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, VNMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQ or MVGAPC).
The function block converts the input integer value to five binary output signals
according to table 843.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1219

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

Table 843: Input integer value converted to binary output signals

Measured supervised below low-low between low‐ between low between high- above high-
value is: limit low and low and high limit high and high high limit
Output: limit limit
LOWLOW High
LOW High
NORMAL High
HIGH High
HIGHHIGH High

18.9 Fault locator LMBRFLO IP14592-1 v2

18.9.1 Identification
M14892-1 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Fault locator LMBRFLO - -

18.9.2 Functionality M13970-3 v13

The accurate fault locator is an essential component to minimize the outages after a
persistent fault and/or to pin-point a weak spot on the line.

The fault locator is an impedance measuring function giving the distance to the
fault in km, miles or % of line length. The main advantage is the high accuracy
achieved by compensating for load current and for the mutual zero-sequence effect
on double circuit lines.

The compensation includes setting of the remote and local sources and calculation
of the distribution of fault currents from each side. This distribution of fault
current, together with recorded load (pre-fault) currents, is used to exactly calculate
the fault position. The fault can be recalculated with new source data at the actual
fault to further increase the accuracy.

Especially on heavily loaded long lines, where the source voltage angles can be up
to 35-40 degrees apart, the accuracy can be still maintained with the advanced
compensation included in fault locator.

1220 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

18.9.3 Function block M16684-3 v6

LMBRFLO
PHSELL1* CALCMADE
PHSELL2* FLT_X
PHSELL3* BCD_80
CALCDIST* BCD_40
BCD_20
BCD_10
BCD_8
BCD_4
BCD_2
BCD_1

IEC05000679-4-en.vsd

IEC05000679 V4 EN-US

Figure 614: FLO function block

18.9.4 Signals
PID-3906-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 844: LMBRFLO Input signals

Name Type Default Description
PHSELL1 BOOLEAN 0 Phase selecton L1
PHSELL2 BOOLEAN 0 Phase selecton L2
PHSELL3 BOOLEAN 0 Phase selecton L3
CALCDIST BOOLEAN 0 Do calculate fault distance (release)

PID-3906-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 845: LMBRFLO Output signals

Name Type Description
CALCMADE BOOLEAN Fault calculation made
FLT_X REAL Reactive distance to fault
BCD_80 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 80%
BCD_40 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 40%
BCD_20 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 20%
BCD_10 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 10%
BCD_8 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 8%
BCD_4 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 4%
BCD_2 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 2%
BCD_1 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 1%

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1221

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

18.9.5 Settings
PID-3906-SETTINGS v2

Table 846: LMBRFLO Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
R1A 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 2.000 Source resistance A (near end)
X1A 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 12.000 Source reactance A (near end)
R1B 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 2.000 Source resistance B (far end)
X1B 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 12.000 Source reactance B (far end)
R1L 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 2.000 Positive sequence line resistance
X1L 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 12.500 Positive sequence line reactance
R0L 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 8.750 Zero sequence line resistance
X0L 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 50.000 Zero sequence line reactance
R0M 0.000 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 0.000 Zero sequence mutual resistance
X0M 0.000 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 0.000 Zero sequence mutual reactance
LineLengthUnit kilometer - - kilometer Line length unit
miles
LineLength 0.0 - 10000.0 - 0.1 40.0 Length of line

Table 847: LMBRFLO Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DrepChNoIL1 1 - 30 Ch 1 1 Recorder input number recording phase
current, IL1
DrepChNoIL2 1 - 30 Ch 1 2 Recorder input number recording phase
current, IL2
DrepChNoIL3 1 - 30 Ch 1 3 Recorder input number recording phase
current, IL3
DrepChNoIN 0 - 30 Ch 1 4 Recorder input number recording
residual current, IN
DrepChNoIP 0 - 30 Ch 1 0 Recorder input number recording 3I0 on
parallel line
DrepChNoUL1 1 - 30 Ch 1 5 Recorder input number recording phase
voltage, UL1
DrepChNoUL2 1 - 30 Ch 1 6 Recorder input number recording phase
voltage, UL2
DrepChNoUL3 1 - 30 Ch 1 7 Recorder input number recording phase
voltage, UL3
UL1Gain 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 1.000 Scale factor for fine tuning of voltage
magnitude L1
UL2Gain 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 1.000 Scale factor for fine tuning of voltage
magnitude L2
UL3Gain 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 1.000 Scale factor for fine tuning of voltage
magnitude L3

1222 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

18.9.6 Monitored data

PID-3906-MONITOREDDATA v1

Table 848: LMBRFLO Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
FLT_REL REAL - - Distance to fault, relative
FLT_DIST REAL - - Distance to fault in line
length unit
FLT_X REAL - Ohm Reactive distance to
fault
FLT_R REAL - Ohm Resistive distance to
fault
FLT_LOOP INTEGER 1=L1-N - Fault loop
2=L2-N
3=L3-N
4=L1-L2
5=L2-L3
6=L3-L1
7=Others

18.9.7 Operation principle

M14982-4 v7

The Fault locator (LMBRFLO) in the IED is an essential complement to other

monitoring functions, since it measures and indicates the distance to the fault with
high accuracy.

When calculating distance to fault, pre-fault and fault phasors of currents and
voltages are selected from the Trip value recorder data, thus the analog signals used
by the fault locator must be among those connected to the disturbance report
function. The analog configuration (channel selection) is performed using the
parameter setting tool within PCM600.

The calculation algorithm considers the effect of load currents, double-end infeed
and additional fault resistance.

R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L

R1A+jX1A R1B+jX1B
Z0m=Z0m+jX0m

R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L
DRPRDRE
LMBRFLO

IEC05000045_2_en.vsd
IEC05000045 V2 EN-US

Figure 615: Simplified network configuration with network data, required for
settings of the fault location-measuring function

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1223

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

If source impedance in the near and far end of the protected line have changed in a
significant manner relative to the set values at fault location calculation time (due
to exceptional switching state in the immediate network, power generation out of
order, and so on), new values can be entered via the local HMI and a recalculation
of the distance to the fault can be ordered using the algorithm described below. It’s
also possible to change fault loop. In this way, a more accurate location of the fault
can be achieved.

The function indicates the distance to the fault as a percentage of the line length, in
kilometers or miles according to the setting LineLengthUnit. The fault location is
stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL)
and managed via the local HMI or PCM600.

18.9.7.1 Measuring Principle M14983-4 v2

For transmission lines with voltage sources at both line ends, the effect of double-
end infeed and additional fault resistance must be considered when calculating the
distance to the fault from the currents and voltages at one line end. If this is not
done, the accuracy of the calculated figure will vary with the load flow and the
amount of additional fault resistance.

The calculation algorithm used in the fault locator in compensates for the effect of
double-end infeed, additional fault resistance and load current.

M14983-5 v1

18.9.7.2 Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault M14983-7 v5

Figure 616 shows a single-line diagram of a single transmission line, that is fed
from both ends with source impedances ZA and ZB. Assume that the fault occurs at
a distance F from IED A on a line with the length L and impedance ZL. The fault
resistance is defined as RF. A single-line model is used for better clarification of
the algorithm.

1224 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

A B
ZA IA pZL IB (1-p).ZL ZB

IF

UA RF

xx01000171.vsd
IEC01000171 V1 EN-US

Figure 616: Fault on transmission line fed from both ends

From figure 616 it is evident that:

U A = I A × p × Z L + IF × R F
EQUATION95 V1 EN-US (Equation 246)

Where:
IA is the line current after the fault, that is, pre-fault current plus current change due to the fault,

IF is the fault current and

p is a relative distance to the fault

The fault current is expressed in measurable quantities by:

IF A
IF = --------
DA
EQUATION96 V1 EN-US (Equation 247)

Where:
IFA is the change in current at the point of measurement, IED A and

DA is a fault current-distribution factor, that is, the ratio between the fault current at line end A
and the total fault current.

For a single line, the value is equal to:

( 1 – p ) × Z L + ZB
DA = -----------------------------------------
Z A + Z L + ZB
EQUATION97 V1 EN-US (Equation 248)

Thus, the general fault location equation for a single line is:

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1225

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

I FA
U A = I A × p × Z L + -------
- × RF
DA
EQUATION98 V1 EN-US (Equation 249)

Table 849: Expressions for UA, IA and IFA for different types of faults

Fault type: UA IA IFA

L1-N UL1A IL1A + KN x INA 3
--- ´ D ( I L 1 A – I 0A )
2
EQUATION110 V1 EN-US

L2-N UL2A IL2A + KN x INA

3
--- ´ D ( I L2A – I 0A )
2
EQUATION111 V1 EN-US

L3-N UL3A IL3A + KN x INA 3

--- ´ D ( I L3A – I0A )
2
EQUATION112 V1 EN-US

L1-L2-L3, L1-L2,L1-L2- UL1A-UL2A IL1A - IL2A

DIL 1 L 2 A
N
EQUATION113 V1 EN-US

L2-L3, L2-L3-N UL2A-UL3A IL2A - IL3A DIL2L3A

EQUATION114 V1 EN-US

L3-L1, L3-L1-N UL3A-UL1A IL3A - IL1A

DIL3L1A
EQUATION115 V1 EN-US

The KN complex quantity for zero-sequence compensation for the single line is
equal to:

Z0L – Z 1L
K N = ------------------------
3 × Z1L
EQUATION99 V1 EN-US (Equation 250)

DI is the change in current, that is the current after the fault minus the current
before the fault.

In the following, the positive sequence impedance for ZA, ZB and ZL is inserted
into the equations, because this is the value used in the algorithm.

For double lines, the fault equation is:

I FA
U A = I A × p × Z 1L + -------- × RF + I 0P × Z 0M
DA
EQUATION100 V1 EN-US (Equation 251)

Where:
I0P is a zero sequence current of the parallel line,

Z0M is a mutual zero sequence impedance and

DA is the distribution factor of the parallel line, which is:

1226 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

( 1 – p ) × ( ZA + ZA L + ZB ) + Z B
DA = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
2 × ZA + Z L + 2 × Z B
EQUATION101 V1 EN-US (Equation 252)

The KN compensation factor for the double line becomes:

Z0L – Z 1L Z 0M I 0P
K N = ------------------------ + ----------------- × -------
3 × Z1L 3 × Z1L I 0A
EQUATION102 V1 EN-US (Equation 253)

From these equations it can be seen, that, if Z0m = 0, then the general fault location
equation for a single line is obtained. Only the distribution factor differs in these
two cases.

Because the DA distribution factor according to equation 249 or 251 is a function

of p, the general equation 251 can be written in the form:
2
p – p × K1 + K2 – K3 × RF = 0
EQUATION103 V1 EN-US (Equation 254)

Where:

UA ZB
K 1 = ---------------- + --------------------------- + 1
I A × ZL Z L + ZA DD

EQUATION104 V1 EN-US (Equation 255)

UA ZB
K2 = --------------- × æè --------------------------- + 1öø
IA × Z L Z L + Z A DD

EQUATION105 V1 EN-US (Equation 256)

I F A æ Z A + ZB
- × --------------------------- + 1ö
K 3 = ---------------
I A × Z L è Z 1 + ZA DD ø
EQUATION106 V1 EN-US (Equation 257)

and:

• ZADD = ZA + ZB for parallel lines.

• IA, IFA and UA are given in the above table.
• KN is calculated automatically according to equation 253.
• ZA, ZB, ZL, Z0L and Z0M are setting parameters.

For a single line, Z0M = 0 and ZADD = 0. Thus, equation 254 applies to both single
and parallel lines.

Equation 254 can be divided into real and imaginary parts:

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1227

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

2
p – p × Re ( K 1 ) + Re ( K 2 ) – R F × Re ( K 3 ) = 0
EQUATION107 V1 EN-US (Equation 258)

– p × Im × ( K1 ) + Im × ( K 2 ) – R F × Im × ( K3 ) = 0
EQUATION108 V1 EN-US (Equation 259)

If the imaginary part of K3 is not zero, RF can be solved according to equation 259,
and then inserted to equation 258. According to equation 258, the relative distance
to the fault is solved as the root of a quadratic equation.

Equation 258 gives two different values for the relative distance to the fault as a
solution. A simplified load compensated algorithm, which gives an unequivocal
figure for the relative distance to the fault, is used to establish the value that should
be selected.

If the load compensated algorithms according to the above do not give a reliable
solution, a less accurate, non-compensated impedance model is used to calculate
the relative distance to the fault.

18.9.7.3 The non-compensated impedance model M14983-121 v3

In the non-compensated impedance model, IA line current is used instead of IFA

fault current:

U A = p × Z 1 L × IA + R F × IA
EQUATION109 V1 EN-US (Equation 260)

Where:
IA is according to table 849.

The accuracy of the distance-to-fault calculation, using the non-compensated

impedance model, is influenced by the pre-fault load current. So, this method is
only used if the load compensated models do not function.

18.9.7.4 IEC 60870-5-103 M14983-135 v2

The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 may be used to poll fault location
information from the IED to a master (that is station HSI). There are two outputs
that must be connected to appropriate inputs on the function block I103StatFltDis,
FLTDISTX gives distance to fault (reactance, according the standard) and
CALCMADE gives a pulse (100 ms) when a result is obtainable on FLTDISTX
output.

1228 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

18.9.8 Technical data

M14987-1 v6

Table 850: LMBRFLO technical data

Function
Reactive and resistive reach
Value or range Accuracy
(0.001-1500.000) Ω/phase ±2.0% static accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir

Phase selection According to input signals -

Maximum number of fault 100 -
locations

18.10 Limit counter L4UFCNT GUID-22E141DB-38B3-462C-B031-73F7466DD135 v1

18.10.1 Identification

18.10.1.1 Identification GUID-F3FB7B33-B189-4819-A1F0-8AC7762E9B7E v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Limit counter L4UFCNT -

18.10.2 Functionality GUID-13157EAB-1686-4D2E-85DF-EC89768F3572 v6

The Limit counter (L4UFCNT) provides a settable counter with four independent
limits where the number of positive and/or negative flanks on the input signal are
counted against the setting values for limits. The output for each limit is activated
when the counted value reaches that limit.

Overflow indication is included for each up-counter.

18.10.3 Operation principle

GUID-4D58423F-329C-4553-9FAF-E55A368849A5 v2

Limit counter (L4UFCNT) counts the number of positive and/or negative flanks on
the binary input signal depending on the function settings. L4UFCNT also checks
if the accumulated value is equal or greater than any of its four settable limits. The
four limit outputs will be activated relatively on reach of each limit and remain
activated until the reset of the function. Moreover, the content of L4UFCNT is
stored in flash memory and will not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1229

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

18.10.3.1 Design GUID-B643C994-D0BA-4BE9-BACB-ADEA0197CAE4 v1

Figure 617 illustrates the general logic diagram of the function.

BLOCK

INPUT
Operation
Counter
RESET
VALUE
Overflow
CountType Detection OVERFLOW

OnMaxValue

Limit LIMIT1 … 4
MaxValue Check

CounterLimit1...4

Error ERROR
Detection
InitialValue

IEC12000625_1_en.vsd
IEC12000625 V1 EN-US

Figure 617: Logic diagram

The counter can be initialized to count from a settable non-zero value after reset of
the function. The function has also a maximum counted value check. The three
possibilities after reaching the maximum counted value are:

• Stops counting and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
• Rolls over to zero and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
• Rolls over to zero and activates a pulsed overflow indication for the next count

The pulsed overflow output lasts up to the first count after rolling over to zero, as
illustrated in figure 618.

Overflow indication

Actual value ... Max value -1® Max value ® Max value +1 ® Max value +2 ® Max value +3 ...

Counted value ... Max value -1 ® Max value ® 0 ® 1 ® 2 ...

IEC12000626_1_en.vsd
IEC12000626 V1 EN-US

Figure 618: Overflow indication when OnMaxValue is set to rollover pulsed

The Error output is activated as an indicator of setting the counter limits and/or
initial value setting(s) greater than the maximum value. The counter stops counting

1230 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

the input and all the outputs except the error output remains at zero state. The error
condition remains until the correct settings for counter limits and/or initial value
setting(s) are applied.

The function can be blocked through a block input. During the block time, input is
not counted and outputs remain in their previous states. However, the counter can
be initialized after reset of the function. In this case the outputs remain in their
initial states until the release of the block input.

18.10.3.2 Reporting GUID-7DF874A7-F7DA-48DD-8760-5E4CF05FD870 v1

The content of the counter can be read on the local HMI.

Reset of the counter can be performed from the local HMI or via a binary input.

Reading of content and resetting of the function can also be performed remotely,
for example from a IEC 61850 client. The value can also be presented as a
measurement on the local HMI graphical display.

18.10.4 Function block GUID-C90E7375-F3CC-414A-93FC-9AC4A9156FFC v1

L4UFCNT
BLOCK ERROR
INPUT OVERFLOW
RESET LIMIT1
LIMIT2
LIMIT3
LIMIT4
VALUE

IEC12000029-1-en.vsd
IEC12000029 V1 EN-US

Figure 619: L4UFCNT function block

18.10.5 Signals
PID-6966-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 851: L4UFCNT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1231

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

PID-6966-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 852: L4UFCNT Output signals

Name Type Description
ERROR BOOLEAN Error indication on counter limit and/or initial
value settings
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Overflow indication on count of greater than
MaxValue
LIMIT1 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to
CounterLimit1
LIMIT2 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to
CounterLimit2
LIMIT3 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to
CounterLimit3
LIMIT4 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to
CounterLimit4
VALUE INTEGER Counted value

18.10.6 Settings
PID-6966-SETTINGS v2

Table 853: L4UFCNT Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
CountType Positive edge - - Positive edge Select counting on positive and/or
Negative edge negative flanks
Both edges
CounterLimit1 1 - 65535 - 1 100 Value of the first limit
CounterLimit2 1 - 65535 - 1 200 Value of the second limit
CounterLimit3 1 - 65535 - 1 300 Value of the third limit
CounterLimit4 1 - 65535 - 1 400 Value of the fourth limit
MaxValue 1 - 65535 - 1 500 Maximum count value
OnMaxValue Stop - - Stop Select if counter stops or rolls over after
Rollover Steady reaching maxValue with steady or
Rollover Pulsed pulsed overflow flag
InitialValue 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Initial count value after reset of the
function

18.10.7 Monitored data

PID-6966-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 854: L4UFCNT Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VALUE INTEGER - - Counted value

1232 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

18.10.8 Technical data

GUID-C43B8654-60FE-4E20-8328-754C238F4AD0 v3

Table 855: L4UFCNT technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Counter value 0-65535 -
Max. count up speed 30 pulses/s (50% duty cycle) -

18.11 Running hour-meter TEILGAPC

18.11.1 Identification GUID-3F9EF4FA-74FA-4D1D-88A0-E948B722B64F v1

Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device

identification identification number
Running hour-meter TEILGAPC - -

18.11.2 Functionality GUID-464FB24F-B367-446C-963A-A14841943B87 v2

The Running hour-meter (TEILGAPC) function is a function that accumulates the

elapsed time when a given binary signal has been high, see also figure 620.

BLOCK
RESET
IN Time Accumulation ACC_HOUR
ADDTIME with Retain
ACC_DAY
tAddToTime

q-1

OVERFLOW
a
&
a>b
99 999.9 h b

WARNING
a
&
a>b
tWarning b

ALARM
a
&
a>b
tAlarm b

q-1 = unit delay IEC15000321-1-en.vsd

IEC15000321 V1 EN-US

Figure 620: TEILGAPC logics

The main features of TEILGAPC are:

• Applicable to very long time accumulation (≤ 99999.9 hours)

• Supervision of limit transgression conditions and rollover/overflow
• Possibility to define a warning and alarm with the resolution of 0.1 hours
• Retain any saved accumulation value at a restart

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1233

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

• Possibilities for blocking and reset

• Possibility for manual addition of accumulated time
• Reporting of the accumulated time

18.11.3 Function block GUID-D0E9688B-C9D9-44B7-BD95-81132CCA5E4F v1

TEILGAPC
BLOCK ALARM
IN WARNING
ADDTIME OVERFLOW
RESET ACC_HOUR
ACC_DAY

IEC15000323.vsdx

IEC15000323 V1 EN-US

Figure 621: TEILGAPC function block

18.11.4 Signals
PID-6998-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 856: TEILGAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Freeze the accumulation and block the outputs
IN BOOLEAN 0 The input signal that is used to measure the
elapsed time, when its value is high
ADDTIME BOOLEAN 0 Add time to the accumulation
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset accumulated time

PID-6998-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 857: TEILGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
ALARM BOOLEAN Indicator that accumulated time has reached
alarm limit
WARNING BOOLEAN Indicator that accumulated time has reached
warning limit
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Indicator that accumulated time has reached
overflow limit
ACC_HOUR REAL Accumulated time in hours
ACC_DAY REAL Accumulated time in days

1234 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

18.11.5 Settings
PID-6998-SETTINGS v1

Table 858: TEILGAPC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
tAlarm 1.0 - 99999.9 Hour 0.1 90000.0 Time limit for alarm supervision
tWarning 1.0 - 99999.9 Hour 0.1 50000.0 Time limit for warning supervision
tAddToTime 0.0 - 99999.9 Hour 0.1 0.0 Time to add to the accumulation

18.11.6 Operation principle GUID-C7F91D4E-5942-4006-B7C8-4F499E7DC49D v3

Figure 622 describes the simplified logic of the function.

Loop Delay

tWarning
OVERFLOW
tAlarm
Transgression Supervision WARNING
Plus Retain
ALARM

BLOCK
RESET ACC_HOUR
Time Accumulation
IN
ADDTIME ACC_DAY

tAddToTime

Loop Delay

IEC15000322.vsd

IEC15000322 V1 EN-US

Figure 622: TEILGAPC Simplified logic

TEILGAPC main functionalities

• IN: Accumulation of the elapsed time when input IN is high

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1235

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

• applicable to very long time accumulation (≤99999.9 hours)

• output ACC_HOUR presents accumulated value in hours and ACC_DAY
presents accumulated value in days
• accumulated value is retained in a non-volatile memory
• any retained value is used as initiation value for the integration following
by a restart
• RESET: Reset of the accumulated value. Consequently all other outputs are
also reset
• independent of the input IN value
• reset the value of the nonvolatile memory to zero.
Note that the nonvolatile memory will not reset to zero if the input IN is
high during the reset.
• reset can be made by activation of input RESET or from LHMI or with
IEC 61850 command
• ADDTIME: Manually add time to the currently accumulated time
• the amount of time to be added is defined by a setting tAddToTime
• time is added through activation of input ADDTIME or from LHMI or
with IEC 61850 command
• BLOCK: Freeze the accumulation and block/reset the other outputs
• independent of the input IN value
• BLOCK request overrides RESETrequest
• Monitor and report the conditions of limit transgression
• overflow if output ACC_HOUR > 99 999.9 hours
• alarm if output ACC_HOUR > tAlarm
• warning if output ACC_HOUR > tWarning

The ACC_HOURoutput represents the accumulated time in hours and the

ACC_DAY output represents the accumulated time in days.

tAlarm and tWarning are user settable time limit parameters in hours. They are also
independent of each other, that is, there is no check if tAlarm > tWarning.

tAddToTime is a user settable time parameter in hours.

tAlarm, tWarning and tAddToTime are possible to be defined with a resolution of

0.1 hours (6 minutes).

The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 99999.9 hours. The outputs will
reset and the accumulated time will reset and start from zero if an overflow occurs.

18.11.6.1 Operation accuracy GUID-B6FBEFD7-17C8-41C6-B5D5-32E1205E6752 v1

The accuracy of TEILGAPC depends on essentially two factors

1236 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

• the pulse length

• the number of pulses, that is, the number of rising and falling flank pairs

In principle, more pulses may lead to reduced accuracy.

18.11.6.2 Memory storage GUID-B49698FF-0AB2-4792-A7CB-5534313B6CA0 v2

The value of the accumulated time is retained in a non-volatile memory,

• at every falling edge of the input IN

• at every even 6 minutes, after a rising edge of the input IN
• after a manual addition of time

Consequently in case of a power failure, there is a risk of losing the difference in

time between actual time and last time stored in the non-volatile memory.

18.11.7 Technical data

GUID-F5E124E3-0B85-41AC-9830-A2362FD289F2 v1

Table 859: TEILGAPC Technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Time limit for alarm (0 - 99999.9) hours ±0.1% of set value
supervision, tAlarm
Time limit for warning (0 - 99999.9) hours ±0.1% of set value
supervision, tWarning
Time limit for overflow Fixed to 99999.9 hours ±0.1%
supervision

18.12 Estimation of transformer insulation life LOLSPTR GUID-D9D1F036-EC75-40A8-860F-192CF1F6F759 v1

18.12.1 Identification
GUID-A3D72F4B-9567-4DF0-867A-9F657A7E9291 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Estimation of transformer winding LOLSPTR 26/49HS
insulation life 3Ihp>T

18.12.2 Functionality GUID-CDE89397-8E99-4873-9701-FF642101A308 v2

Estimation of transformer winding insulation life (LOLSPTR) is used to calculate

transformer winding hot spot temperature using the empirical formulae. It is also
used to estimate transformer loss of life from the winding hot spot temperature
value. The transformer winding insulation is degraded when the winding hot spot

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1237

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

temperature exceeds certain limit. LOLSPTR gives warning and alarm signals
when the winding hot spot temperature reaches a set value.

Hot spot temperature calculation requires top oil temperature at a given time. This
value can either be a measured value taken through sensors or the one calculated by
the function. This decision is made based on the top oil temperature sensor quality.
Top oil temperature calculation is done using the method explained in IEC 60076-7
standard.

Inputs required for hot spot temperature calculation are:

• Transformer oil time constant
• Winding time constant
• Loss ratio at different tap positions
• Ambient temperature around the transformer

The oil and winding time constants can be calculated by the function based on
transformer parameters if the inputs are not available from the transformer
manufacturer.

Ambient temperature to the function can either be provided through the sensor or
monthly average ambient temperature settings. This decision is made based on the
ambient temperature sensor quality. Additionally, LOLSPTR function provides
difference between measured value and calculated value of the top oil temperature.

Additionally, the function calculates loss of life in form of days and years. This
information is updated at settable intervals, for example, hourly or daily.
Transformer winding percentage loss of life is calculated every day and the
information is provided as total percentage loss of life from the installation date
and yearly percentage loss of life.

18.12.3 Function block GUID-AFF859BC-6D00-4874-A0A6-4981C04168C6 v1

LOLSPTR
I3PW1* ALARM1
I3PW2* ALARM2
I3PW3* WARNING1
BLOCK WARNING2
BLKALM HPCALERR
BLKWRN
TOTVALID
AMBVALID
TCPOS
COOLTYPE
TOTEMP
AMBTEMP
LOLRST
REFRESH
IEC15000442-1-en.vsdx
IEC15000442 V1 EN-US

Figure 623: LOLSPTR function block

1238 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

18.12.4 Signals
PID-6645-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 860: LOLSPTR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3PW1 GROUP - Group signal for winding 1 currents
SIGNAL
I3PW2 GROUP - Group signal for winding 2 currents
SIGNAL
I3PW3 GROUP - Group signal for winding 3 currents
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKALM BOOLEAN 0 Forces the alarm binary outputs to Zero
BLKWRN BOOLEAN 0 Forces the warning binary outputs to Zero
TOTVALID BOOLEAN 0 Status of top oil temperature sensor
AMBVALID BOOLEAN 0 Status of ambient temperature sensor
TCPOS INTEGER 1 Tap changer position
COOLTYPE INTEGER 1 Type of transformer cooling method (1 - ONAN, 2
- ONAF, 3 - OFAF/OFWF, 4 - ODAF/ODWF)
TOTEMP REAL 0.0 Measured top oil temperature
AMBTEMP REAL 0.0 Measured ambient temperature
LOLRST BOOLEAN 0 Resets to initial loss of life value
REFRESH BOOLEAN 0 Refreshes the loss of life output values

PID-6645-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 861: LOLSPTR Output signals

Name Type Description
ALARM1 BOOLEAN Hot spot temperature level 1 alarm signal
ALARM2 BOOLEAN Hot spot temperature level 2 alarm signal
WARNING1 BOOLEAN Hot spot temperature level 1 warning signal
WARNING2 BOOLEAN Hot spot temperature level 2 warning signal
HPCALERR BOOLEAN Status of hot spot temperature calculation

18.12.5 Settings
PID-6645-SETTINGS v4

Table 862: LOLSPTR Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
WrnHPTempLev1 50.0 - 700.0 - 0.1 100.0 Hot spot temperature set level for
warning 1
tDelayToAlarm1 0.0 - 60000.0 s 0.1 1800.0 Time delay to generate level 1 alarm
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1239

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

WrnHPTempLev2 50.0 - 700.0 - 0.1 105.0 Hot spot temperature set level for
warning 2
tDelayToAlarm2 0.0 - 60000.0 s 0.1 900.0 Time delay to generate level 2 alarm
EnaAgeCalc Disable - - Enable Activate ageing calculation
Enable
AgeingRateMeth IEEE - - IEC Ageing rate calculation method
IEC
TimeToUpdate 1 Hour - - 1 Hour Loss of life calculation outputs update
2 Hour time interval
4 Hour
8 Hour
12 Hour
24 Hour
JanAmbTemp -150.0 - 150.0 - 0.1 30.0 Ambient temperature in January month
FebAmbTemp -150.0 - 150.0 - 0.1 30.0 Ambient temperature in February month
MarchAmbTemp -150.0 - 150.0 - 0.1 30.0 Ambient temperature in March month
AprilAmbTemp -150.0 - 150.0 - 0.1 30.0 Ambient temperature in April month
MayAmbTemp -150.0 - 150.0 - 0.1 30.0 Ambient temperature in May month
JuneAmbTemp -150.0 - 150.0 - 0.1 30.0 Ambient temperature in June month
JulyAmbTemp -150.0 - 150.0 - 0.1 30.0 Ambient temperature in July month
AugAmbTemp -150.0 - 150.0 - 0.1 30.0 Ambient temperature in August month
SepAmbTemp -150.0 - 150.0 - 0.1 30.0 Ambient temperature in September
month
OctAmbTemp -150.0 - 150.0 - 0.1 30.0 Ambient temperature in October month
NovAmbTemp -150.0 - 150.0 - 0.1 30.0 Ambient temperature in November
month
DecAmbTemp -150.0 - 150.0 - 0.1 30.0 Ambient temperature in December
month

Table 863: LOLSPTR Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrafoRating 0.001 - 9999.999 MVA 0.001 40.000 Rated power of the transformer
TrafoType Single Phase Trafo - - Three Phase Number of phases in transformer
Three Phase Trafo Trafo
NoOfWindings Two winding - - Three winding Number of windings in transformer
Three winding
AvailableCT Winding 1 - - All Windings Available CT connection for the
Winding 2 transformer
Winding 1&2
Winding 1&3
Winding 2&3
All Windings
PowerInWinding Winding 1 - - Winding 1 Winding which has input power
Winding 2
Winding 3
Table continues on next page

1240 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TapWinding No Tap changer - - No Tap changer Winding which has tap changer
Winding 1
Winding 2
Winding 3
TopOilTempRise 0.0 - 500.0 - 0.1 27.5 Top oil temperature rise from the heat
run test
RatedVoltTap 1 - 63 - 1 1 Number of tap position at rated voltage
HighVoltTap 1 - 63 - 1 33 Number of tap position at maximum
voltage
LowVoltTap 1 - 63 - 1 1 Number of tap position at minimum
voltage
UPerTap 0.01 - 50.00 kV 0.01 2.25 Voltage increment/decrement per tap
position
ConstSelection IEEE - - IEC Transformer parameter selection
IEC
CurrSelectMode Average Method - - Maximum Method Current selection method
Maximum Method
OilTmConstMode Standard - - Standard Oil time constant selection mode
User defined
Calculated
OilTimeConst 100.0 - 20000.0 s 0.1 8000.0 User defined oil time constant
AvgOilTempRise 0.0 - 500.0 - 0.1 25.0 Average oil temperature rise from the
heat run test
WdgTmConstMode Standard - - Standard Winding time constant selection mode
User defined
Calculated
ConductorType Aluminum - - Copper Transformer conductor material selection
Copper
TempUnitMode Deg F - - Deg C Temperature unit selection
Deg C
LoadLoss 0.1 - 1000.0 kW 0.1 50.0 Transformer rated load losses
NoLoadLoss 0.1 - 500.0 kW 0.1 25.0 Transformer no-load losses
TTLoadLoss 0.1 - 1000.0 kW 0.1 50.0 Transformer load losses from the type
test
TTNoloadLoss 0.1 - 500.0 kW 0.1 25.0 Transformer no-load losses from the
type test
RLRated 0.1 - 100.0 - 0.1 6.0 Load to no load ratio at rated voltage tap
RLHighRated 0.1 - 100.0 - 0.1 7.0 Load to no load ratio at next higher tap
to rated voltage tap
RLMaxTap 0.1 - 100.0 - 0.1 8.0 Load to no load ratio at maximum
voltage tap
RLMinTap 0.1 - 100.0 - 0.1 11.0 Load to no load ratio at minimum voltage
tap
RatedCurrW1 0.1 - 10000.0 A 0.1 105.0 RMS value of the rated current for the
winding 1
RatedVoltW1 0.01 - 1000.00 kV 0.01 150.00 Rated voltage of winding 1
CurrTypeTestW1 0.1 - 10000.0 A 0.1 105.0 RMS value of the current applied for the
winding 1 during type test
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1241

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

HPTempRiseW1 0.0 - 500.0 - 0.1 38.0 Winding 1 hot spot temperature rise
value from the heat run test
CuLossW1 0.01 - 1000.00 kW 0.01 95.00 Copper loss of winding 1
MassW1 0.0 - 999.9 t 0.1 10.0 Mass of winding 1
WdgToOilGrad1 0.1 - 500.0 - 0.1 20.0 Winding 1 to oil gradient at rated load
WdgTimeConst1 10.0 - 5000.0 s 0.1 500.0 User defined winding time constant for
winding 1
RatedCurrW2 0.1 - 10000.0 A 0.1 700.0 RMS value of the rated current for the
winding 2
RatedVoltW2 0.01 - 1000.00 kV 0.01 20.00 Rated voltage of winding 2
CurrTypeTestW2 0.1 - 10000.0 A 0.1 700.0 RMS value of the current applied for the
winding 2 during type test
HPTempRiseW2 0.0 - 500.0 - 0.1 38.0 Winding 2 hot spot temperature rise
value from the heat run test
CuLossW2 0.01 - 1000.00 kW 0.01 95.00 Copper loss of winding 2
MassW2 0.0 - 999.9 t 0.1 10.0 Mass of winding 2
WdgToOilGrad2 0.1 - 500.0 - 0.1 20.0 Winding 2 to oil gradient at rated load
WdgTimeConst2 10.0 - 5000.0 s 0.1 500.0 User defined winding time constant for
winding 2
RatedCurrW3 0.1 - 10000.0 A 0.1 2100.0 RMS value of the rated current for the
winding 3
RatedVoltW3 0.01 - 1000.00 kV 0.01 10.00 Rated voltage of winding 3
CurrTypeTestW3 0.1 - 10000.0 A 0.1 2100.0 RMS value of the current applied for the
winding 3 during type test
HPTempRiseW3 0.0 - 500.0 - 0.1 38.0 Winding 3 hot spot temperature rise
value from the heat run test
CuLossW3 0.01 - 1000.00 kW 0.01 95.00 Copper loss of winding 3
MassW3 0.0 - 999.9 t 0.1 10.0 Mass of winding 3
WdgToOilGrad3 0.1 - 500.0 - 0.1 20.0 Winding 3 to oil gradient at rated load
WdgTimeConst3 10.0 - 5000.0 s 0.1 500.0 User defined winding time constant for
winding 3
CoilCoreMass 0.0 - 999.9 t 0.1 45.0 Coil and core mass of the transformer
OilMass 0.0 - 999.9 t 0.1 21.0 Oil mass of the transformer
TankMass 0.0 - 999.9 t 0.1 10.0 Mass of the tank in contact with the
heated oil
ThermalUpgrade Normal - - Normal Thermally upgraded paper insulation for
Upgraded transformer
ExpectedLife 1.0 - 50000.0 Days 0.1 7300.0 Expected life duration of transformer
InitialLife 0.0 - 50000.0 Days 0.1 0.0 Initial value for transformer loss of life

1242 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

18.12.6 Monitored data

PID-6645-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 864: LOLSPTR Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MAXHPWDG INTEGER - - Indicates winding
number which has
maximum hot spot
temperature
TOTCALC REAL - - Calculated transformer
top oil temperature
HPTEMPW1 REAL - - Calculated winding 1 hot
spot temperature
HPTEMPW2 REAL - - Calculated winding 2 hot
spot temperature
HPTEMPW3 REAL - - Calculated winding 3 hot
spot temperature
HPTEMPMAX REAL - - Maximum hot spot
temperature
AGERATE REAL - - Insulation ageing rate
LOLINDAY REAL - - Transformer loss of life
in days
LOLINYRS REAL - - Transformer loss of life
in years
REMLIFE REAL - - Transformer remaining
life in hours
PLOLINYR REAL - % Percent loss of life
calculated for the last
year
PLOLTOT REAL - % Total percent loss of life
TEMPAMP REAL - - Ambient temperature
used
TEMPTO REAL - - Top oil temperature used
for hot spot temperature
calculation
W1CURR REAL - A Winding 1 current used
W2CURR REAL - A Winding 2 current used
W3CURR REAL - A Winding 3 current used

18.12.7 Operation principle GUID-50A9C14B-D224-46F1-A8BF-90577371262B v1

LOLSPTR function is used to calculate the transformer winding hot spot

temperature using the empirical formulae provided in IEC 60076-7 standard.
Additionally, LOLSPTR is used to estimate the transformer loss of life from the
winding hot spot temperature value.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1243

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

When the winding hot spot temperature exceeds certain limit, it causes degradation
of the transformer winding insulation. The function gives warning and alarm
signals when the winding hot spot temperature reaches the set value.

18.12.7.1 Hot spot temperature calculation GUID-31E07C98-C9DC-4ED3-98C6-89D51D304112 v1

Transformer thermal model using heat transfer differential equations are designed
by the IEC 60076–7 standard. This thermal model can be applied to time varying
load factor (K) and time varying ambient temperature (θa). The differential
equations computation is required at each time step (n) and the hot spot
temperature rise for the nth time step is solved using:

h( n)  h1( n)  h 2( n)

IECEQUATION16005 V1 EN-US (Equation 261)

Where:

K = Load factor

θa = Ambient temperature

n = Time step

 h1( n )   h1( n1)  D h1( n)

IECEQUATION16006 V1 EN-US (Equation 262)

 h 2( n)   h 2( n1)  D h 2( n )
IECEQUATION16007 V1 EN-US (Equation 263)

Differential equation 262 represents the fundamental hot spot temperature rise
before the effect of oil flow varying rate past the hot spot of the winding and the
time derivative function is:

D h1( n ) 
Dt

 k    K y   h1( n1)
k22  w  21 hr

IECEQUATION16008 V1 EN-US (Equation 264)

Differential equation 263 represents the oil flow varying rate past the hot spot of
the winding and the time derivative function is:

D h 2( n ) 
Dt
 1  

 k21  1  hr  K y   h 2( n1) 
  k   o 
  22  
IECEQUATION16009 V1 EN-US (Equation 265)

Where:

τw = Winding time constant

τo = Oil time constant

1244 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Δθhr = Hot spot to top oil temperature gradient

y = Empirically derived exponent account for the effect of change in resistance and
oil viscosity with change in load.

K11, K21 and K22 are constants.

Combined effect of differential equations 262 and 263 represents the hot spot
temperature rise after sudden change in the load. The initial conditions are
calculated by setting the time derivative equal to zero in DΔθh1(n) and DΔθh2(n)
equations.

The winding hot spot temperature depends on:

• Oil temperature inside the winding
• Load losses in the winding
• Cooling type
• Ambient temperature

Oil temperature inside a winding is difficult to measure for most transformers in

service. On the other hand, top oil temperature at top of the tank is well known,
either by measurement or by calculation. The winding hot spot temperature is
calculated as:
h( n)  o( n)  h( n)
IECEQUATION16010 V1 EN-US (Equation 266)

Where:

θh(n) = Hot spot temperature at nth time step

θo(n) = Top oil temperature at nth time step

Δθh(n) = Hot spot temperature rise above top oil temperature at nth time step

The hot spot temperature rise above top oil temperature (Δθh) is calculated from the
hot spot to top oil temperature gradient (Δθhr) and it should be calculated for each
winding. Equation for the hot spot to top oil temperature gradient calculation is:

 hr  THR  TTOR  it ir 

y

IECEQUATION16011 V1 EN-US (Equation 267)

Where:

THR = Hot spot temperature rise (HPTmpRiseWX)

TTOR = Top oil temperature rise (TopOilTmpRise)

it = Current measured in the winding during type test (CurrTypeTestWX). Here, X

indicates the winding number.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1245

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

ir = Winding rated current (RatedCurrWX)

Top oil temperature rise and hot spot temperature values are taken
from heat run test.

Hot spot temperature calculations for loading should be made on both low voltage
and high voltage windings since test data indicates that the time constants are
different. Hence, LOLSPTR function calculates the hot spot temperature
(HPTEMPWx) winding wise.

The maximum winding hot spot temperature is used for calculation of winding
insulation loss of life and also for warning and alarm signals. The winding with
maximum hot spot temperature is provided by the output MAXHPWDG in the
form of winding number. If the given transformer is a two winding transformer,
then HPTEMPW3 will be zero.

18.12.7.2 Top oil temperature calculation GUID-C2E9B6F6-AB75-4A55-9A2F-2B6D2A9194A6 v1

Hot spot temperature is calculated by measuring the top oil temperature using
sensors or otherwise the function will use the calculated top oil temperature. IEC
standard has developed a differential equation for the top oil temperature
calculation. Equation for the nth time step is:
 0( n)   0( n 1)  D 0( n)
IECEQUATION16012 V1 EN-US (Equation 268)

and,

D 0( n ) 
Dt
  
 1  K 2  R
tap x


  or   o ( n1)   a


k11  o    1  Rtap 
 
IECEQUATION16013 V1 EN-US (Equation 269)

Where,

R(tap) = Loss ratio at the current tap position

Δθor = Top oil temperature rise

x = Empirically derived exponent account for the effect of change in resistance

with change in load.

LOLSPTR function can be sensor usage less function based on the following
logics:

Input logic for the calculation of hot spot temperature:

1. If the top oil temperature sensor status TOTVALID is high, then the direct
measured top oil temperature TOTEMP will be used for hot spot temperature

1246 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

calculation. Status of hot spot temperature calculation HPCALERR will be

low.
2. If the top oil temperature sensor status TOTVALID is low, then the calculated
top oil temperature TOTCALC will be used for hot spot temperature
calculation. Status of hot spot temperature calculation HPCALERR will be
high.
3. If the status binary input of the top oil temperature sensor TOTVALID goes
back to high from low, then the direct measured top oil temperature TOTEMP
will be used for calculation.

Input logic for the calculation of top oil temperature:

1. If the ambient temperature sensor input status AMBVALID is high, then the
direct measured ambient temperature AMBTEMP will be used for top oil
temperature calculation.
2. If the ambient temperature sensor input status AMBVALID is low, then the
monthly model (average) ambient temperature will be used for top oil
temperature calculation.
3. If the ambient temperature sensor status AMBVALID goes back to high from
low, then the sensed ambient temperature AMBTEMP will be used to calculate
the top oil temperature.

The ambient temperatures are defined every month using the JanAmbTmp to
DecAmbTmp settings. This monthly model of ambient temperature is taken for the
top oil temperature calculation based on the month of the year.

LOLSPTR handles top oil temperature calculation even though the direct
measurement of top oil temperature is available.

18.12.7.3 Transformer parameters selection GUID-956B41AB-F446-424F-9562-A0CEEB7BD9D8 v1

Transformer parameters for the entire calculation of the function are selected
according to:
• Transformer type
• Rated power
• Cooling medium used

Transformer type can be selected as either Three Phase Trafo or Single Phase Trafo
using TrafoType setting. Rated power can be set using the TrafoRating setting.

Cooling medium of the transformer is available to the function as an integer input

COOLTYPE. The cooling medium can be any of the following:
• ONAN
• ONAF
• ODAF

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1247

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

• OFAF
• OFWF
• ODWF

User can select the transformer parameters either from IEC 60076-7 standard or
IEEE C57.96-1995 standard using ConstSelection setting to IEC or IEEE
respectively.

18.12.7.4 Calculation of constants and losses GUID-8F9461C8-8AC5-4AE4-8F42-5945F7F826AD v1

Winding time constant, oil time constant and loss ratios at different tap positions
are calculated internally to improve the accuracy of the temperature calculations
based on the user selection.

Winding time constant selection GUID-DB0D77CB-8D30-44D9-8506-A7D82DD37283 v1

LOLSPTR has three options to select the winding time constant using
WdgTmConstMode setting:
• If WdgTmConstMode setting is selected as Standard, then the time constant is
taken from either IEC or IEEE standard based on ConstSelection setting.
• If WdgTmConstMode setting is selected as User defined, then the time
constant is taken from user through WdgTimeConstx setting. This is different
for each winding.
• If WdgTmConstMode setting is selected as Calculated, then the time constant
is calculated by the function for each winding.

Winding time constant at rated load is calculated as:

W 
mw  C  g 
1000  Pw
IECEQUATION16014 V1 EN-US (Equation 270)

where,

mw = Winding mass (MassWX)

C = Conductor material specific heat

g = Winding to oil gradient (WdgToOilGradX) at rated load

Pw = I2R loss (CuLossX) of a winding at rated load and rated temperature

The conductor specific heat is based on conductor type. The conductor type
selection, either Aluminum or Copper, can be done through ConductorType setting.

Oil time constant selection GUID-A378369E-5E08-4C85-AAC0-9DE49AADCF7C v1

LOLSPTR has three options to select the oil time constant using OilTmConstMode
setting:

1248 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

• If OilTmConstMode setting is selected as Standard, then the time constant is

taken from either IEC or IEEE standard based on ConstSelection setting.
• If OilTmConstMode setting is selected as User defined, then the time constant
is taken from user through OilTimeConst setting.
• If OilTmConstMode setting is selected as Calculated, then the time constant is
calculated by the function.

Oil time constant at rated load is calculated as:

o 
3.6  C  om 
P
IECEQUATION16015 V1 EN-US (Equation 271)

where,

C = Thermal capacity based on the cooling medium

Δθom = Average oil temperature rise at the load considered

P = Supplied losses (NoloadLoss + LoadLoss)

Average oil temperature rise (Δθom) at the load considered is calculated using
settings:
• Average oil temperature (AvgOilTmpRise) from the heat run test
• Transformer rated no-load and load losses (NoloadLoss and LoadLoss)
• No-load and load losses from type test (TTNoloadLoss and TTLoadLoss)

Thermal capacity for different cooling mediums are calculated using settings:
• Mass of the coil and core (CoilCoreMass)
• Mass of the oil (OilMass)
• Mass of the tank (TankMass) in contact with heated oil.

Ratio loss calculation GUID-A5C83CF6-3766-484B-B49D-D87EFC82EFA8 v1

Changes in the oil temperature rise, losses and winding gradients values are
depends on the transformer tap position. Transformer top oil temperature rise is a
function of the ratio loss (R) and ratio loss is a function of the tap position.

The tap changer position from TCPOS input is used to calculate the ratio loss using
linear approximation model. This calculation requires:
• Tap positions at rated voltage (RatedVoltTap)
• Minimum voltage (LowVoltTap)
• Maximum voltage (HighVoltTap)
• Related loss ratios (RLRated, RLMinTap and RLMaxTap)

Tap changer position input is also required to get the ratio loss at next higher
voltage tap position after rated voltage tap position (RLHighRated).

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1249

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

Tap changer position can be made available to the LOLSPTR function from the
TCLYLTC function block, see Figure 624.

TCLYLTC LOLSPTR

TCPOS TCPOS

IEC15000438-1-en.vsd
IEC15000438 V1 EN-US

Figure 624: Tap changer position from TCLYLTC function to LOLSPTR

function

18.12.7.5 Load factor calculation GUID-D48FB2EA-D161-4DF4-90D5-5108D450D7D0 v1

Top oil temperature and hot spot temperature calculations are based on transformer
loading. Load factor is the ratio between actual current and rated current. The
function takes only one phase current from each windings as inputs to calculate
load factor.

Rated current for each winding is set through RatedCurrWX setting. Selection of
one phase current from each winding for load factor calculation is decided using
CurrSelectMode setting.

If CurrSelectMode setting is set to Average, then average of all phase currents is

considered for load factor calculation. If CurrSelectMode is set to Maximum, then
the maximum current out of the all phase current is considered for calculation.

LOLSPTR can be used for the following transformer types:

• Two and three winding transformers (is selected using NoOfWindings) setting
• Single phase and three phase transformers (is selected using TrafoType) setting

18.12.7.6 Function handling with less CT’s GUID-B5EEEA35-6BD3-47DF-8B3B-0C8B249B5B85 v1

LOLSPTR can work with (n-1) winding CT availability. That is, if the given
transformer has three windings and it has CT’s only in two windings, then the
function will calculate the missing winding current based on voltage transformation
ratio. The CT availability can be set using AvailableCT setting.

Table 865 shows options available for CT selection:

1250 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

Table 865: CT selection options

Transformer type Available options
• Winding 1
• Winding 2
Two winding transformer
• All Windings

• Winding 1&2
• Winding 1&3
Three winding transformer • Winding 2&3
• All Windings

The voltage transformation ratio is calculated from winding voltages by

considering the primary winding set by the user in PowerInWinding setting.
PowerInWinding setting has three options to select which winding is primary. The
winding voltages are taken from WindingXNkV setting. This calculation is valid
when the winding has tap changer and the user can set the winding which has tap
changer using TapWinding setting.

Voltage rise between two adjacent tap winding is also considered in the calculation
and it is set using UPerTap setting.

18.12.7.7 Temperature unit selection GUID-87F83046-3E7A-49B7-84EA-10D141AAF78D v1

The user can select temperature unit to be used for function interface by the
TempeUnitMode setting.

If the selection is °F, then all temperature inputs are converted into °C and used for
calculation, since all calculation formulae needs temperature values in °C and
finally the temperature outputs will be converted to °F.

If the selection is °C, then all temperature inputs will be taken as it is and the
output is given in °C.

18.12.7.8 Insulation loss of life calculation GUID-2601EEC8-84EF-4F20-9C23-49A2696B4BC3 v1

The temperature distribution in transformer is not uniform and the part which is
operating at the highest temperature will normally deteriorate more. Therefore, rate
of ageing is referred to winding hot-spot temperature (HPTMPMAX). When
EnaAgeCalc is set to high, LOLSPTR will calculate the ageing rate of the
transformer winding insulation and accumulates the transformer loss of life.

Ageing rate calculation can be done using two formulas derived by IEEE (VIEEE)
and IEC (VIEC) standards. The calculation method selection is based on
ThermalUpgrade and AgeingRateMeth settings. The ThermalUpgrade Setting has
two options, Normal and Upgraded. Similarly, AgeingRateMeth setting has two
options, IEEE and IEC.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1251

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

IEC standard (Equation 272) is used for ageing rate calculation only when the
ThermalUpgrade setting is set to Normal and AgeingRateMeth setting is set to IEC.
IEEE standard (Equation 273) is used for all other combinations.

VIEC  2 h max 98 6

IECEQUATION16016 V1 EN-US (Equation 272)

 15, 000 15, 000 

 
 110 273   
h max  273 
VIEEE  e 
IECEQUATION16017 V1 EN-US (Equation 273)

where,

θhmax = Maximum winding hot spot temperature in °C irrespective of

TempeUnitMode setting.

The computed loss of life over a certain period from aging rate is added to the
initial loss of life. Transformer loss of life value information is provided in days
and years and presented in LOLINDAY and LOLINYRS outputs respectively.
Hence, total transformer loss of life value should be considered from both outputs.
The updating time of the outputs depends on TimeToUpdate setting. These values
can be viewed at any time by activating REFRESH from local HMI reset menu
without affecting the set update time.

Initial condition for the loss of life is taken from InitialLife setting. If the
calculation purpose is to find out the loss of life for a particular overload
occurrence or new transformer installation, then InitialLife value for the
transformer should be chosen as zero. The user should pre-determine the consumed
transformer life in hours and the value should be filled in InitialLife setting in case
of previously installed transformers. The user can reset the initial loss of life value
by activating LOLRST from local HMI reset menu. Transformer winding
insulation remaining life REMLIFE is calculated from the transformer loss of life
and expected life value (ExpectedLife).

LOLSPTR calculates the percent loss of life from the relative ageing rate. Percent
loss of life in a day is calculated with time period of 24 hours. Daily rate of percent
loss of life is summarized at 00:00 h and displayed for the next 24 hour period in
PLOLTOT. Cumulative sum of percent loss of life in a day is calculated up to the
year end and it is updated at every year end in the output PLOLINYR. All the latest
calculated loss of life values and percentage loss of life values are stored in non-
volatile memory. Therefore, the values can be restored even after a power loss.

18.12.7.9 Warning and alarm GUID-81F811FA-F49B-4EEB-928B-657B6360DCC4 v1

LOLSPTR provides warnings and alarms for the transformer thermal overload, if
the maximum hot spot temperature (HPTMPMAX) exceeds the set value. There
are two settable warning levels of the hot spot temperature with separate outputs. If
warning level exceeds for the set time, an alarm is generated. Criteria for warning
and alarm are:

1252 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 18
Monitoring

• If HPTMPMAX is greater than or equal to WrnHPTmpLev1 setting, then

output WARNING1 is high. If the WARNING1 becomes high and sustained
for a time which is given by tDelayToAlarm1 setting, then ALARM1 becomes
high.
• If HPTMPMAX is greater than or equal to WrnHPTmpLev2 setting, then
output WARNING2 is high. If the WARNING2 becomes high and sustained
for a time which is given by tDelayToAlarm2 setting, then ALARM2 becomes
high.
• If input BLKWRN is activated, then the above warning signals will be blocked
until it is deactivated. If input BLKALM is activated, then the above alarm
signals will be blocked until it is deactivated.

To avoid oscillations of the warning and alarm outputs, a hysteresis has been added
with HPTMPMAX value for comparison with the set value.

18.12.7.10 Blocking the function GUID-6DA73EF3-428E-42A9-B335-760CC39DD822 v1

The functionality can be blocked using BLOCK input. When the BLOCK input is
activated, the binary outputs from the function will reset and all analogue outputs
will hold the previous values till BLOCK input is deactivated. During blocking, all
the calculations (Loss of life, percentage loss of life, etc.) will be stopped. Once the
block input is deactivated, the calculations will start from previous calculated
values.

Hot spot tempera ture

I3P1 calculation
I3P2 HPCALERR
Hot spot to to p oi l
I3P3 temperature WARNING1
grad ient
calculation ALARM1
MAX/AVG Top oil tempe ratu re WARNING2
calculation
ALARM2
Ratio lo ss
AMBVALID
calculation Oil time constant MAXHPWDG
calculation
AMBTEMP Top oil HPTEMPW1
temperature
TCPOS calculation using HPTEMPW2
monthly mode l of
ambien t
HPTEMPW3
BLOCK Windin g time
temperture
constan t TOTCALC
calculation
BLKWRN
HPTMPMAX
BLKALM
Transfo rmer
TOTVALID Warnin g a nd alarm AGERATE
winding lo ss o f life
TOTEMP logi c calculation
LOLIDAY
Loss of life
esti mation
LOLINYRS
REMLIFE
LOLRST Per cen t loss of PLOLINYR
life calcula tion
REFRESH PLOLTOT

IEC15000439-1-en.vsdx
IEC15000439 V1 EN-US

Figure 625: Simplified logic diagram for transformer loss of life

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1253

Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Monitoring

18.12.8 Technical data

GUID-F6B6ED6B-2488-483C-B068-3F4631F34DC8 v1

Table 866: LOLSPTR technical data

Function
Service value, hot spot
temperature
Service value, top oil
temperature
Service value, loss of life
Operate level , Warning level 1
and 2
Operate time, Warning level 1
and 2
Operate time, definite time
function (ALARMx)
Range or value Accuracy
– ±2.0% of expected value
– ±2.0% of expected value
– ±2.0% of expected value
(50 - 700)°C/°F of hot spot ±2.0% of hot spot temperature
temperature
(50 - 700)°C/°F of hot spot ±200 ms typically
temperature
(0.0 - 6000.0) s ±250 ms typically

1254 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 19
Metering

Section 19 Metering

19.1 Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT IP14600-1 v3

19.1.1 Identification
M14879-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT -

S00947 V1 EN-US

19.1.2 Functionality M13394-3 v7

Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function counts externally generated binary pulses,

for instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy
consumption values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module and then
read by the PCFCNT function. A scaled service value is available over the station
bus. The special Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities
must be ordered to achieve this functionality.

19.1.3 Function block M13400-3 v5

PCFCNT
BLOCK INVALID
READ_VAL RESTART
BI_PULSE* BLOCKED
RS_CNT NEW_VAL
SCAL_VAL

IEC14000043-1-en.vsd
IEC09000335 V3 EN-US

Figure 626: PCFCNT function block

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1255

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Metering

19.1.4 Signals
PID-6509-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 867: PCFCNT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BI_PULSE BOOLEAN 0 Connect binary input channel for metering
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
READ_VAL BOOLEAN 0 Initiates an additional pulse counter reading
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets pulse counter value

PID-6509-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 868: PCFCNT Output signals

Name Type Description
INVALID BOOLEAN The pulse counter value is invalid
RESTART BOOLEAN The reported value does not comprise a complete
integration cycle
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The pulse counter function is blocked
NEW_VAL BOOLEAN A new pulse counter value is generated
SCAL_VAL REAL Scaled value with time and status information

19.1.5 Settings
PID-6509-SETTINGS v4

Table 869: PCFCNT Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
EventMask NoEvents - - NoEvents Report mask for analog events from
ReportEvents pulse counter
CountCriteria Off - - RisingEdge Pulse counter criteria
RisingEdge
Falling edge
OnChange
Scale 1.000 - 90000.000 - 0.001 1.000 Scaling value for SCAL_VAL output to
unit per counted value
Quantity Count - - Count Measured quantity for SCAL_VAL output
ActivePower
ApparentPower
ReactivePower
ActiveEnergy
ApparentEnergy
ReactiveEnergy
tReporting 0 - 3600 s 1 60 Cycle time for reporting of counter value

1256 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 19
Metering

19.1.6 Monitored data

PID-6509-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 870: PCFCNT Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
SCAL_VAL REAL - - Scaled value with time
and status information

19.1.7 Operation principle IP14087-1 v2

M13397-3 v5

The registration of pulses is done for positive transitions (0->1) on one of the 16
binary input channels located on the Binary Input Module (BIM). Pulse counter
values are sent to the station HMI with predefined cyclicity without reset.

The reporting time period can be set in the range from 1 second to 60 minutes and
is synchronized with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse
counter values can be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single
counter. All active counters can also be read by the LON General Interrogation
command (GI) or IEC 61850.

Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function in the IED supports unidirectional

incremental counters. That means only positive values are possible. The counter
uses a 32 bit format, that is, the reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with a
range 0...+2147483647. The counter is reset at initialization of the IED.

The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Scaled
Value (pulse count x scale), Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter
Quality consists of:

• Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error)

• Wrapped around
• Blocked
• Adjusted

The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a service value, that
is, the value frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the
database. PCFCNT updates the value in the database when an integration cycle is
finished and activates the NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can
be connected to an Event function block, be time tagged, and transmitted to the
station HMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value was frozen by the
function.

The pulse-counter logic function requires a binary input card,

BIMp, that is specially adapted to the pulse-counter logic function.

M13399-3 v9

Figure 627 shows the pulse-counter logic function block with connections of the
inputs and outputs.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1257

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Metering

SingleCmdFunc PulseCounter EVENT

OUTx BLOCK
INVALID INPUT1
SingleCmdFunc Pulse RESTART INPUT2
OUTx INPUT OUT READ_VAL
Pulse length >1s BLOCKED INPUT3
I/O-module NEW_VAL INPUT4
BI_PULSE
”Reset counter” RS_CNT
NAME
SCAL_VAL IEC EVENT

SMS settings Database

1.Operation = Off/On Pulse counter value:
2.tReporting = 0s...60min 0...2147483647
3.Event Mask = No Events/Report Events
4.Scale = 1-90000
en05000744.vsd
IEC05000744 V1 EN-US

Figure 627: Overview of the pulse-counter logic function

The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Command logics,
which are intended to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local
HMI. As long as the BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal
connected to READ_VAL performs one additional reading per positive flank. The
signal must be a pulse with a length >1 second.

The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the
Binary Input Module (BIM).

The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter.

Each pulse-counter logic function block has four binary output signals that can be
connected to an Event function block for event recording: INVALID, RESTART,
BLOCKED and NEW_VAL. The SCAL_VAL signal can be connected to the IEC
Event function block.

The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Module, where
the pulse counter input is located, fails or has wrong configuration.

The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not
comprise a complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED start-
up, in the first message after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around
during last integration cycle.

The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked.
There are two reasons why the counter is blocked:

• The BLOCK input is set, or

• The Binary Input Module, where the counter input is situated, is inoperative.

1258 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 19
Metering

The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was
updated since last report.

Note, the pulse is short, one cycle.

The SCAL_VAL signal consists of scaled value (according to parameter Scale),

time and status information.

19.1.8 Technical data IP14092-1 v1

M13404-2 v5

Table 871: PCFCNT technical data

Function Setting range Accuracy
Input frequency See Binary Input Module (BIM) -
Cycle time for report of (1–3600) s -
counter value

19.2 Function for energy calculation and demand

handling ETPMMTR SEMOD153638-1 v2

19.2.1 Identification
SEMOD175537-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Function for energy calculation and ETPMMTR W_Varh -
demand handling

19.2.2 Functionality GUID-6898E29B-DA70-421C-837C-1BBED8C63A7A v3

Power system measurement (CVMMXN) can be used to measure active as well as

reactive power values. Function for energy calculation and demand handling
(ETPMMTR) uses measured active and reactive power as input and calculates the
accumulated active and reactive energy pulses, in forward and reverse direction.
Energy values can be read or generated as pulses. Maximum demand power values
are also calculated by the function. This function includes zero point clamping to
remove noise from the input signal. As output of this function: periodic energy
calculations, integration of energy values, calculation of energy pulses, alarm
signals for limit violation of energy values and maximum power demand, can be
found.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1259

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Metering

The values of active and reactive energies are calculated from the input power
values by integrating them over a selected time tEnergy. The integration of active
and reactive energy values will happen in both forward and reverse directions.
These energy values are available as output signals and also as pulse outputs.
Integration of energy values can be controlled by inputs (STARTACC and
STOPACC) and EnaAcc setting and it can be reset to initial values with RSTACC
input.

The maximum demand for active and reactive powers are calculated for the set
time interval tEnergy and these values are updated every minute through output
channels. The active and reactive maximum power demand values are calculated
for both forward and reverse direction and these values can be reset with RSTDMD
input.

19.2.3 Function block SEMOD175502-4 v5

ETPMMTR
P* ACCINPRG
Q* EAFPULSE
STARTACC EARPULSE
STOPACC ERFPULSE
RSTACC ERRPULSE
RSTDMD EAFALM
EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
EAFACC
EARACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
MAXPAFD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
MAXPRRD

IEC14000019-1-en.vsd
IEC14000019 V1 EN-US

Figure 628: ETPMMTR function block

19.2.4 Signals
PID-6872-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 872: ETPMMTR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
P REAL 0 Measured active power
Q REAL 0 Measured reactive power
STARTACC BOOLEAN 0 Start to accumulate energy values
STOPACC BOOLEAN 0 Stop to accumulate energy values.
RSTACC BOOLEAN 0 Reset of accumulated enery reading
RSTDMD BOOLEAN 0 Reset of maximum demand reading

1260 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 19
Metering

PID-6872-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 873: ETPMMTR Output signals

Name Type Description
ACCINPRG BOOLEAN Accumulation of energy values in progress
EAFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward active energy pulse
EARPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse active energy pulse
ERFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward reactive energy pulse
ERRPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse reactive energy pulse
EAFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active forward energy exceed limit in
set interval
EARALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active reverse energy exceed limit in
set interval
ERFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive forward energy exceed limit in
set interval
ERRALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive reverse energy exceed limit in
set interval
EAFACC REAL Accumulated forward active energy value
EARACC REAL Accumulated reverse active energy value
ERFACC REAL Accumulated forward reactive energy value
ERRACC REAL Accumulated reverse reactive energy value
MAXPAFD REAL Maximum forward active power demand value for
set interval
MAXPARD REAL Maximum reverse active power demand value for
set interval
MAXPRFD REAL Maximum forward reactive power demand value
for set interval
MAXPRRD REAL Maximum reverse reactive power demand value
for set interval

19.2.5 Settings
PID-6872-SETTINGS v3

Table 874: ETPMMTR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
EnaAcc Off - - Off Activate the accumulation of energy
On values
tEnergy 1 Minute - - 1 Minute Time interval for energy calculation
5 Minutes
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
30 Minutes
60 Minutes
180 Minutes
tEnergyOnPls 0.100 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Energy accumulated pulse ON time in
secs
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1261

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Metering

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tEnergyOffPls 0.100 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 Energy accumulated pulse OFF time in
secs
EAFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for active forward
accumulated energy value
EARAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for active reverse
accumulated energy value
ERFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for reactive forward
accumulated energy value
ERRAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for reactive reverse
accumulated energy value

Table 875: ETPMMTR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
EALim 0.001 - MWh 0.001 1000000.000 Active energy limit
10000000000.000
ERLim 0.001 - MVArh 0.001 1000.000 Reactive energy limit
10000000000.000
EnZeroClamp Off - - On Enable of zero point clamping detection
On function
LevZeroClampP 0.001 - 10000.000 MW 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at active
Power
LevZeroClampQ 0.001 - 10000.000 MVAr 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at reactive
Power
DirEnergyAct Forward - - Forward Direction of active energy flow Forward/
Reverse Reverse
DirEnergyReac Forward - - Forward Direction of reactive energy flow
Reverse Forward/Reverse
EAFPrestVal 0.000 - MWh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for forward active
100000000.000 energy
EARPrestVal 0.000 - MWh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for reverse active
100000000.000 energy
ERFPresetVal 0.000 - MVArh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for forward reactive
100000000.000 energy
ERRPresetVal 0.000 - MVArh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for reverse reactive
100000000.000 energy

1262 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 19
Metering

19.2.6 Monitored data

PID-6872-MONITOREDDATA v3

Table 876: ETPMMTR Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
EAFACC REAL - MWh Accumulated forward
active energy value
EARACC REAL - MWh Accumulated reverse
active energy value
ERFACC REAL - MVArh Accumulated forward
reactive energy value
ERRACC REAL - MVArh Accumulated reverse
reactive energy value
MAXPAFD REAL - MW Maximum forward active
power demand value for
set interval
MAXPARD REAL - MW Maximum reverse active
power demand value for
set interval
MAXPRFD REAL - MVAr Maximum forward
reactive power demand
value for set interval
MAXPRRD REAL - MVAr Maximum reverse
reactive power demand
value for set interval

19.2.7 Operation principle GUID-4A46757C-EC5D-4BCE-9D09-C8152B062CE1 v3

The instantaneous output values of active and reactive power from the
Measurements function CVMMXN are used and integrated over a selected time
tEnergy to measure the integrated energy. Figure 629 shows the overall
functionality of the energy calculation and demand handling function ETPMMTR.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1263

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Metering

MAXPAFD
RSTDMD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
P
MAXPRRD
Zero Clamping Maximum Power
EAFALM
Detection Demand Calculation
Q EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM

ACCINPRG
EAFPULSE
EARPULSE
ERFPULSE
Energy Accumulation ERRPULSE
STARTACC
Calculation EAFACC
EARACC
STOPACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
RSTACC

IEC13000185-2-en.vsd
IEC13000185 V2 EN-US

Figure 629: ETPMMTR Functional overview logical diagram

The integration of energy values is enabled by the setting EnaAcc and controlled by
the STARTACC and STOPACC inputs. If the integration is in progress, the output
ACCINPRG is high. Otherwise, it is low. Figure 630 shows the logic of the
ACCINPRG output. ACCINPRG is active when the STARTACC input is active and
the EnaAcc setting is enabled. When the RSTACC input is in the active state, the
output ACCINPRG is low even if the integration of energy is enabled. ACCINPRG
is deactivated by activating the STOPACC input.

STOPACC

FALSE
STARTACC T
³1
& F ACCINPRG
EnaAcc &

q-1

RSTACC

q-1 = unit delay IEC13000186-4-en.vsd

IEC13000186 V4 EN-US

Figure 630: ACCINPRG Logic diagram

The accumulated energy values (in MWh and MVArh) are available as service
values and also as pulsed output depending on the ExxAccPlsQty setting, which can
be connected to a pulse counter. Accumulated energy outputs are available for
forward as well as reverse direction. The accumulated energy values can be reset to
initial accumulated energy values (ExxPrestVal) from the local HMI reset menu or
with the input signal RSTACC. Figure 631 shows the logic for integration of energy
in active forward direction. Similarly, the integration of energy in active reverse,
reactive forward and reactive reverse is done.

1264 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 19
Metering

RSTACC

EAFPrestVal

ACCINPRG

P* (ACTIVE FORWARD)
X
 T
T EAFACC
60.0
F
F

&

q-1

1000 GWh T

q-1 0.0 F

a
a>b
b
-1
q = unit delay
IEC13000187-5-en.vsdx
IEC13000187 V5 EN-US

Figure 631: Logic for integration of active forward energy

The energy pulses generated by using internally calculated accumulated energy

values and energy per pulse (ExxAccPlsQty) setting. The accumulated energy
values are divided by the energy-per-pulse value to get the number of pulses. The
number of pulses can be reset to zero by activating RSTACC input or by using the
local HMI reset menu. The pulse on and off time duration is set by the settings
tEnergyOnPls and tEnergyOffPls. Figure 632 shows the logic for pulse output
generation for the integrated energy in the active forward direction. Similarly, the
pulse generation for integrated energy in the active reverse, reactive forward and
reactive reverse is done.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1265

Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Metering

tEnergyOffPls
EAFACC

a Counter q-1
a>b CU
1000 GWh b CV
Rst
tOff
t
R I q-1

0
÷ X
 R I T
EAFPULSE
a TP
a>b F
b
EAFAccPlsQty ÷ 0
Counter
CU
CV
RSTACC
Rst

q-1

tEnergyOnPls

q-1 = unit delay

IEC13000188-5-en.vsdx
IEC13000188 V5 EN-US

Figure 632: Logic for pulse generation of integrated active forward energy

The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the
set time interval tEnergy. The maximum values are updated every minute and
stored in a register available over communication and from outputs MAXPAFD,
MAXPARD, MAXPRFD and MAXPRRD for the active and reactive power forward
and reverse direction. When the RSTDMD input is active from the local HMI reset
menu, these outputs are reset to zero. The energy alarm is activated once the
periodic energy value crosses the energy limit ExLim. Figure 633 shows the logic
of alarm for active forward energy exceeds limit and Maximum forward active
power demand value. Similarly, the maximum power calculation and energy alarm
outputs in the active reverse, reactive forward and reactive reverse is implemented.

P (ACTIVE FORWARD)
Average Power
X a EAFALM
tEnergy Calculation a>b
b

EALim

RSTMAXD

0.0 T MAXPAFD
MAX F

q-1
q-1 = unit delay
IEC13000189-4-en.vsd
IEC13000189 V4 EN-US

Figure 633: Logic for maximum power demand calculation and energy alarm

1266 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 19
Metering

19.2.8 Technical data

19.2.8.1 Technical data GUID-DA0A8AB5-755D-4F35-8C69-FFAA951FE374 v1

Table 877:
Function Range or value Accuracy
Energy metering MWh Export/Import, MVarh Input from MMXU. No extra
Export/Import error at steady load

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1267

Technical manual
1268
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 20
Ethernet

Section 20 Ethernet

20.1 Access point

20.1.1 Introduction GUID-6E5D2696-A8EE-43E7-A94B-69C3D0612127 v1

An access point is an Ethernet communication interface for single or redundant

station communication. Each access point is allocated with one physical Ethernet
port, two physical Ethernet ports are allocated if redundant communication is
activated for the access point.

Device 1 Device 1

AP1 AP2 AP3 AP1 AP2 AP3

SFP_301 SFP_302 SFP_303 SFP_301 SFP_302 SFP_303

IEC16000092-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000092 V1 EN-US

Figure 634: Access points, non redundant (left) and redundant communication
(right)

DHCP is available for the front port, and a device connected to it can thereby
obtain an automatically assigned IP-address.

20.1.2 Settings
PID-6775-SETTINGS v4

Table 878: AP_1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation on/off of the access point
On
Redundancy None - - None Ethernet redundancy mode
PRP-0
PRP-1
HSR
IPAddress 0 - 18 IP 1 192.168.1.10 IP address of the access point
Address
SubnetMask 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.0 Subnet mask of the access point
Address
Description 1 - 18 - 1 Station bus User editable access point description
[1-18 char]
PTP Off - - Off Precision time protocol
On
Slave only
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1269

Technical manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Ethernet

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

PCM600Access Off - - On PCM600 access
On
FTP Off - - On FTP and FTPS access
On
MMS Off - - On IEC61850-8-1 MMS
On
GOOSE Off - - On IEC61850-8-1 GOOSE
On
DNP3 Off - - On DNP3 slave
On
SNTPServer Off - - On SNTP server
On
FSTAccess Off - - On Field Service Tool access
On
C37.118TCP Off - - On IEEE 1344 and C37.118 TCP server
On
C37.118UDP1 Off - - On IEEE 1344 and C37.118 UDP stream
On and the TCP control server
C37.118UDP2 Off - - On IEEE 1344 and C37.118 UDP stream
On and the TCP control server
C37.118UDP3 Off - - On IEEE 1344 and C37.118 UDP stream
On and the TCP control server
C37.118UDP4 Off - - On IEEE 1344 and C37.118 UDP stream
On and the TCP control server
C37.118UDP5 Off - - On IEEE 1344 and C37.118 UDP stream
On and the TCP control server
C37.118UDP6 Off - - On IEEE 1344 and C37.118 UDP stream
On and the TCP control server
DefaultGateway 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Default gateway IP address
Address

PID-6637-SETTINGS v3

Table 879: AP_FRONT Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IPAddress 0 - 18 IP 1 10.1.150.3 IP address of the access point
Address
SubnetMask 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.0 Subnet mask of the access point
Address
Description 1 - 18 - 1 FrontPort User editable access point description
[1-18 char]
PCM600Access Off - - On PCM600 access
On
FTP Off - - On FTP and FTPS access
On
MMS Off - - On IEC61850-8-1 MMS
On
GOOSE Off - - On IEC61850-8-1 GOOSE
On
Table continues on next page

1270 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 20
Ethernet

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

DNP3 Off - - On DNP3 slave
On
SNTPServer Off - - On SNTP Server
On
FSTAccess Off - - On Field Service Tool access
On
C37.118TCP Off - - On IEEE 1344 and C37.118 TCP server
On
C37.118UDP1 Off - - On IEEE 1344 and C37.118 UDP stream
On and the TCP control server
C37.118UDP2 Off - - On IEEE 1344 and C37.118 UDP stream
On and the TCP control server
C37.118UDP3 Off - - On IEEE 1344 and C37.118 UDP stream
On and the TCP control server
C37.118UDP4 Off - - On IEEE 1344 and C37.118 UDP stream
On and the TCP control server
C37.118UDP5 Off - - On IEEE 1344 and C37.118 UDP stream
On and the TCP control server
C37.118UDP6 Off - - On IEEE 1344 and C37.118 UDP stream
On and the TCP control server
DefaultGateway 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Default gateway IP address
Address

PID-6811-SETTINGS v3

Table 880: DHCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DHCPServer Off - - Off Access point front DHCP server
On operation

20.2 Access point diagnostics

20.2.1 Functionality GUID-20F64A6D-AA8C-47D7-AA7D-4810996B2FF2 v1

The access point diagnostics function blocks (RCHLCCH, SCHLCCH and

FRONTSTATUS) supervise communication. SCHLCCH is used for
communication over the rear Ethernet ports, RCHLCCH is used for redundant
communications over the rear Ethernet ports and FRONTSTATUS is used for
communication over the front port. All access point function blocks include output
signal for denial of service.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1271

Technical manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Ethernet

20.2.2 Function block GUID-727BF536-1D60-4060-A674-5D73F252CCB7 v1

SCHLCCH
LINKUP
DOSALARM

IEC16000044-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000044 V1 EN-US

Figure 635: SCHLCCH Function block

RCHLCCH
REDLINKA
REDLINKB
DOSALARM

IEC16000045-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000045 V1 EN-US

Figure 636: RCHLCCH Function block

FRONTSTATUS
LINKUP
DOSALARM

IEC16000085-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000085 V1 EN-US

Figure 637: FRONTSTATUS Function block

20.2.3 Signals
PID-6818-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 881: SCHLCCH Output signals

Name Type Description
LINKUP BOOLEAN Access point link status
DOSALARM BOOLEAN Denial of service alarm

PID-6819-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 882: RCHLCCH Output signals

Name Type Description
REDLINKA BOOLEAN Channel A redundancy status
REDLINKB BOOLEAN Channel B redundancy status
DOSALARM BOOLEAN Denial of service alarm (A + B)

PID-6813-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 883: FRONTSTATUS Output signals

Name Type Description
LINKUP BOOLEAN Link status
DOSALARM BOOLEAN Denial of service alarm

1272 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 20
Ethernet

20.2.4 Monitored data

PID-6818-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 884: SCHLCCH Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
GatewayConfig INTEGER 0=Ok - Gateway configuration
1=Error status
-1=Off
2=Invalid

PID-6819-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 885: RCHLCCH Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
GatewayConfig INTEGER 0=Ok - Gateway configuration
1=Error status
-1=Off
2=Invalid

PID-6813-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 886: FRONTSTATUS Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
GatewayConfig INTEGER 0=Ok - Gateway configuration
1=Error status
-1=Off
2=Invalid

20.3 Redundant communication

20.3.1 Identification
GUID-B7AE0374-0336-42B8-90AF-3AE1C79A4116 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
IEC 62439-3 Parallel redundancy PRP - -
protocol
IEC 62439-3 High-availability seamless HSR - -
redundancy
Access point diagnostic for redundant RCHLCCH - -
Ethernet ports

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1273

Technical manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Ethernet

20.3.2 Functionality GUID-494FACF7-4BE0-4B9F-A18F-47CD1E92C0F9 v1

PRP IEC 62439-3 redundant communication

Redundant communication according to IEC 62439-3 PRP-0 and IEC 62439-3
PRP-1 parallel redundancy protocol (PRP) is available as an option when ordering
IEDs. PRP according to IEC 62439-3 uses two optical Ethernet ports.

IEC 62439-3 High-availabillity Seamless Redundancy (HSR)

Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 Edition 1 and
IEC 62439-3 Edition 2 High-availability seamless redundancy (HSR) is available
as an option when ordering IEDs. Redundant station bus communication according
to 62439-3 uses two optical Ethernet ports.

20.3.3 Operation principle GUID-73DB23CD-A924-4B89-8AAB-1E79D44DE429 v1

PRP IEC 62439-3 redundant communication

The communication is performed in parallel, that is the same data package is
transmitted on both channels simultaneously. The received package identity from
one channel is compared with data package identity from the other channel, if they
are the same, the last package is discarded.

The RCHLCCH function block supervise the redundant communication on the two
channels. If no data package has been received on one (or both) channels within the
last 10 s, the output LinkAUp and/or LinkBUp is set to 0 which indicates an error.

1274 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 20
Ethernet

Device 1 Device 2

AP1 AP1
PhyPortA PhyPortB PhyPortA PhyPortB

Switch A Switch B

PhyPortA PhyPortB PhyPortA PhyPortB

AP1 AP1

Device 3 Device 4

IEC09000758-4-en.vsd
IEC09000758 V4 EN-US

Figure 638: Redundant station bus

IEC 62439-3 High-availabillity Seamless Redundancy (HSR)

HSR applies the principle of parallel operation to a single ring.

For each message sent, the node sends two frames, one through each port. Both the
frames circulate in opposite directions over the ring. Every node forwards the
frames it receives from one port to another to reach the next node. When the
originating sender node receives the frame it sent, the sender node discards the
frame to avoid loops

The RCHLCCH function block supervise the redundant communication on the two
channels. If no data package has been received on one (or both) channels within the
last 10 s, the output LinkAUp and/or LinkBUp is set to 0 which indicates an error.

If IEEE1588 (PTP) is used an accuracy of 1 µs can be guaranteed for up to 15

devices in one HSR-ring.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1275

Technical manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Ethernet

Device 1 Device 2

AP1 AP1
PhyPortA PhyPortB PhyPortA PhyPortB

PhyPortB PhyPortA PhyPortB PhyPortA

AP1 AP1

Device 3 Device 4

IEC16000038-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000038 V1 EN-US

Figure 639: HSR ring

20.4 Merging unit

20.4.1 Introduction GUID-E630C16F-EDB8-40AE-A8A2-94189982D15F v1

The IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE process bus communication protocol enables an IED

to communicate with devices providing measured values in digital format,
commonly known as Merging Units (MU). The rear access points are used for the
communication.

The merging units (MU) are called so because they can gather analog values from
one or more measuring transformers, sample the data and send the data over
process bus to other clients (or subscribers) in the system. Some merging units are
able to get data from classical measuring transformers, others from non-
conventional measuring transducers and yet others can pick up data from both
types.

1276 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 20
Ethernet

20.4.2 Settings
PID-6770-SETTINGS v2

Table 887: MU1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SampleValueID 0 - 34 - 1 ABB_MU0101 Sample Value ID (SVID) for the merging
unit [0-34 char]
APConnection None - - None Access point connection for the merging
AP1 unit
AP2
AP3
AP4

PID-6850-SETTINGS v3

Table 888: MU1_HW Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite

20.4.3 Monitored data

PID-6850-MONITOREDDATA v3

Table 889: MU1_HW Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MUDATA BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Fatal error, data not
1=Error received, transmission
errors, time-sync issues
or inconsistent sample
rate
SYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - High when IED clock is
1=Error not within configured
accuracy or time domain
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Fatal error or recovery
0=No state after fatal error.
High if any subscribed
channel has bad quality
or TEST while IED not in
test mode.
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - MU not synced or MU
1=Error clock not synced to
same clock as IED
TESTMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Quality of one or more
0=No subscribed analogue
channels is TEST
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1277

Technical manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Ethernet

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

SIMMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - MU delivers simulated
0=No data accepted by IED
BadReference BOOLEAN 1=Yes - BadReference indication
0=No output for I1
Derived BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Derived indication output
0=No for I1
Failure BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Failure indication output
0=No for I1
Inaccurate BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inaccurate indication
0=No output for I1
Inconsistent BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inconsistent indication
0=No output for I1
OldData BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OldData indication
0=No output for I1
OperatorBlocked BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OperatorBlocked
0=No indication output for I1
Oscillatory BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Oscillatory indication
0=No output for I1
OutOfRange BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OutOfRange indication
0=No output for I1
Overflow BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Overflow indication
0=No output for I1
Source BOOLEAN 0=Process - Source indication output
1=Substituted for I1
Test BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Test indication output for
0=No I1
Validity INTEGER 0=Good - Validity indication output
2=Reserved I1
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
BadReference BOOLEAN 1=Yes - BadReference indication
0=No output for I2
Derived BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Derived indication output
0=No for I2
Failure BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Failure indication output
0=No for I2
Inaccurate BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inaccurate indication
0=No output for I2
Inconsistent BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inconsistent indication
0=No output for I2
OldData BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OldData indication
0=No output for I2
OperatorBlocked BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OperatorBlocked
0=No indication output for I2
Oscillatory BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Oscillatory indication
0=No output for I2
OutOfRange BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OutOfRange indication
0=No output for I2
Overflow BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Overflow indication
0=No output for I2
Table continues on next page

1278 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 20
Ethernet

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

Source BOOLEAN 0=Process - Source indication output
1=Substituted for I2
Test BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Test indication output for
0=No I2
Validity INTEGER 0=Good - Validity indication output
2=Reserved I2
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
BadReference BOOLEAN 1=Yes - BadReference indication
0=No output for I3
Derived BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Derived indication output
0=No for I3
Failure BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Failure indication output
0=No for I3
Inaccurate BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inaccurate indication
0=No output for I3
Inconsistent BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inconsistent indication
0=No output for I3
OldData BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OldData indication
0=No output for I3
OperatorBlocked BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OperatorBlocked
0=No indication output for I3
Oscillatory BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Oscillatory indication
0=No output for I3
OutOfRange BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OutOfRange indication
0=No output for I3
Overflow BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Overflow indication
0=No output for I3
Source BOOLEAN 0=Process - Source indication output
1=Substituted for I3
Test BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Test indication output for
0=No I3
Validity INTEGER 0=Good - Validity indication output
2=Reserved I3
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
BadReference BOOLEAN 1=Yes - BadReference indication
0=No output for I4
Derived BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Derived indication output
0=No for I4
Failure BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Failure indication output
0=No for I4
Inaccurate BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inaccurate indication
0=No output for I4
Inconsistent BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inconsistent indication
0=No output for I4
OldData BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OldData indication
0=No output for I4
OperatorBlocked BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OperatorBlocked
0=No indication output for I4
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1279

Technical manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Ethernet

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

Oscillatory BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Oscillatory indication
0=No output for I4
OutOfRange BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OutOfRange indication
0=No output for I4
Overflow BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Overflow indication
0=No output for I4
Source BOOLEAN 0=Process - Source indication output
1=Substituted for I4
Test BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Test indication output for
0=No I4
Validity INTEGER 0=Good - Validity indication output
2=Reserved I4
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
BadReference BOOLEAN 1=Yes - BadReference indication
0=No output for U1
Derived BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Derived indication output
0=No for U1
Failure BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Failure indication output
0=No for U1
Inaccurate BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inaccurate indication
0=No output for U1
Inconsistent BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inconsistent indication
0=No output for U1
OldData BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OldData indication
0=No output for U1
OperatorBlocked BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OperatorBlocked
0=No indication output for U1
Oscillatory BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Oscillatory indication
0=No output for U1
OutOfRange BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OutOfRange indication
0=No output for U1
Overflow BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Overflow indication
0=No output for U1
Source BOOLEAN 0=Process - Source indication output
1=Substituted for U1
Test BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Test indication output for
0=No U1
Validity INTEGER 0=Good - Validity indication output
2=Reserved U1
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
BadReference BOOLEAN 1=Yes - BadReference indication
0=No output for U2
Derived BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Derived indication output
0=No for U2
Failure BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Failure indication output
0=No for U2
Inaccurate BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inaccurate indication
0=No output for U2
Table continues on next page

1280 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 20
Ethernet

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

Inconsistent BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inconsistent indication
0=No output for U2
OldData BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OldData indication
0=No output for U2
OperatorBlocked BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OperatorBlocked
0=No indication output for U2
Oscillatory BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Oscillatory indication
0=No output for U2
OutOfRange BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OutOfRange indication
0=No output for U2
Overflow BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Overflow indication
0=No output for U2
Source BOOLEAN 0=Process - Source indication output
1=Substituted for U2
Test BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Test indication output for
0=No U2
Validity INTEGER 0=Good - Validity indication output
2=Reserved U2
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
BadReference BOOLEAN 1=Yes - BadReference indication
0=No output for U3
Derived BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Derived indication output
0=No for U3
Failure BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Failure indication output
0=No for U3
Inaccurate BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inaccurate indication
0=No output for U3
Inconsistent BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inconsistent indication
0=No output for U3
OldData BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OldData indication
0=No output for U3
OperatorBlocked BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OperatorBlocked
0=No indication output for U3
Oscillatory BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Oscillatory indication
0=No output for U3
OutOfRange BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OutOfRange indication
0=No output for U3
Overflow BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Overflow indication
0=No output for U3
Source BOOLEAN 0=Process - Source indication output
1=Substituted for U3
Test BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Test indication output for
0=No U3
Validity INTEGER 0=Good - Validity indication output
2=Reserved U3
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
BadReference BOOLEAN 1=Yes - BadReference indication
0=No output for U4
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1281

Technical manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Ethernet

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

Derived BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Derived indication output
0=No for U4
Failure BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Failure indication output
0=No for U4
Inaccurate BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inaccurate indication
0=No output for U4
Inconsistent BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inconsistent indication
0=No output for U4
OldData BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OldData indication
0=No output for U4
OperatorBlocked BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OperatorBlocked
0=No indication output for U4
Oscillatory BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Oscillatory indication
0=No output for U4
OutOfRange BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OutOfRange indication
0=No output for U4
Overflow BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Overflow indication
0=No output for U4
Source BOOLEAN 0=Process - Source indication output
1=Substituted for U4
Test BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Test indication output for
0=No U4
Validity INTEGER 0=Good - Validity indication output
2=Reserved U4
1=Invalid
3=Questionable

20.5 Routes

20.5.1 Introduction GUID-95F9C7BA-92F8-489F-AD0A-047410B5E66F v1

A route is a specified path for data to travel between the source device in a
subnetwork to the destination device in a different subnetwork. A route consists of
a destination address and the address of the gateway to be used when sending data
to the destination device, see Figure 640.

1282 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 20
Ethernet

Default gateway

Gateway

Source Destination
IEC16000095-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000095 V1 EN-US

Figure 640: Route from source to destination through gateway

20.5.2 Settings
PID-6761-SETTINGS v2

Table 890: ROUTE_1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation on/off of the route
On
IPAddress 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 IP address of the gateway
Address
DestIPAddress 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Destination IP address
Address
DestSubnetMask 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.255 Destination IP subnet mask
Address
Name 1 - 18 - 1 Route1 User configurable name of the route
[1-18 char]

20.5.3 Monitored data

PID-6761-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 891: ROUTE_1 Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
RouteConfig INTEGER 0=Ok - Route configuration
1=Error status
-1=Off

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1283

Technical manual
1284
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 21
Station communication

Section 21 Station communication

21.1 Communication protocols M14815-3 v13

Each IED is provided with several communication interfaces enabling it to connect

to one or many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation
Automation (SA) bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus.

Available communication protocols are:

• IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

• IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication protocol
• LON communication protocol
• SPA communication protocol
• IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
• DNP 3.0 communication protocol
• C37.118 communication protocol

Several protocols can be combined in the same IED.

21.2 Communication protocol diagnostics GUID-6BC4671F-6D06-4BBD-B1FF-2F03FF16A856 v1

Status of the protocols can be viewed in the LHMI under Main menu/
Diagnostics/IED status/Protocol diagnostics. The diagnostic values are:
Diagnostic value Description
Off Protocol is turned off
Error An error has occured, refer to event list for more
information
Warning Configuration inconsistency. Unable to locate
data point.
Ready Protocol is ready

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1285

Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Station communication

IEC15000400-1-en.vsd
IEC15000400 V1 EN-US

Figure 641: Protocol diagnostic screen in LHMI

21.3 DNP3 protocol GUID-54A54716-23BD-4E7C-8245-DE2B4C75E8DC v1

DNP3 (Distributed Network Protocol) is a set of communications protocols used to

communicate data between components in process automation systems. For a
detailed description of the DNP3 protocol, see the DNP3 Communication protocol
manual.

21.4 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol IP14616-1 v2

21.4.1 Functionality M14787-3 v15

IEC 61850 Ed.1 or Ed.2 can be chosen by a setting in PCM600. The IED is
equipped with up to six (order dependent) optical Ethernet rear ports for IEC
61850-8-1 station bus communication. The IEC 61850-8-1 communication is also
possible from the electrical Ethernet front port. IEC 61850-8-1 protocol allows
intelligent electrical devices (IEDs) from different vendors to exchange information
and simplifies system engineering. IED-to-IED communication using GOOSE and
client-server communication over MMS are supported. Disturbance recording file
(COMTRADE) uploading can be done over MMS or FTP.

1286 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 21
Station communication

The front port is only intended for PCM600 communication,

maintenance, training and test purposes due to risk of interference
during normal operation.

21.4.2 Communication interfaces and protocols GUID-35C845D3-574A-40D1-AEF1-9E0D330E31DE v7

Table 892: Supported station communication interfaces and protocols

Protocol Ethernet Serial
100BASE-FX (ST Glass fibre (ST
EIA-485
connector) connector)
IEC 61850–8–1 ● - -
DNP3 ● ● ●
IEC 60870-5-103 - ● ●
● = Supported

When double Ethernet ports are activated, make sure that all ports
are connected to different subnets. For example: port 1 has IP
address 198.168.101.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0, and port
2 has IP address 198.168.102.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0.

21.4.3 Settings
PID-6702-SETTINGS v3

Table 893: IEC61850-8-1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
GOOSEPortEd1 AP_FRONT - - AP_1 Selection of GOOSE port (only for
AP_1 IEC61850 Ed1)
AP_2
AP_3
AP_4
AP_5
AP_6
ProtocolEdition Ed 1 - - Ed 1 Protocol Edition
Ed 2
RemModControl Off - - Off Remote Mode Control
Maintenance
All levels
AllowSimulation No - - No Allow simulated GOOSE values or
Yes simulated sampled measurand values
RemSetControlEd2 Disabled - - Disabled Changing settings over 61850 enabled
Enabled (only for IEC61850 Ed2)
ResvTmsEd2 1 - 3600 s 1 60 Reservation time (only for IEC61850
Ed2)

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1287

Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Station communication

21.4.4 Technical data IP14434-1 v1

M15031-1 v8

Table 894: Communication protocols

Function Value
Protocol IEC 61850-8-1
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
Protocol IEC 60870–5–103
Communication speed for the IEDs 9600 or 19200 Bd
Protocol DNP3.0
Communication speed for the IEDs 300–115200 Bd
Protocol TCP/IP, Ethernet
Communication speed for the IEDs 100 Mbit/s
Protocol LON
Communication speed for the IEDs 1.25 Mbit/s
Protocol SPA
Communication speed for the IEDs 300–38400 Bd

21.4.5 Generic communication function for Single Point indication

SPGAPC, SP16GAPC SEMOD55999-1 v4

21.4.5.1 Functionality SEMOD55713-5 v8

Generic communication function for Single Point indication (SPGAPC) is used to

send one single logical signal to other systems or equipment in the substation.

21.4.5.2 Function block SEMOD54714-4 v4

SPGAPC
BLOCK
^IN

IEC14000021-1-en.vsd
IEC14000021 V1 EN-US

Figure 642: SPGAPC function block

1288 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 21
Station communication

SP16GAPC
BLOCK
^IN1
^IN2
^IN3
^IN4
^IN5
^IN6
^IN7
^IN8
^IN9
^IN10
^IN11
^IN12
^IN13
^IN14
^IN15
^IN16

IEC14000020-1-en.vsd
IEC14000020 V1 EN-US

Figure 643: SP16GAPC function block

21.4.5.3 Signals SEMOD55830-1 v2

PID-3780-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 895: SPGAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN BOOLEAN 0 Input status

PID-3781-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 896: SP16GAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 status
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 status
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 status
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 status
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 status
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 status
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 status
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 status
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 status
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 status
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 status
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 status
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 status
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 status
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 status
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 status

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1289

Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Station communication

21.4.5.4 Settings ABBD8E283673 v3

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

21.4.5.5 Monitored data

PID-3780-MONITOREDDATA v3

Table 897: SPGAPC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT GROUP - - Output status
SIGNAL

PID-3781-MONITOREDDATA v3

Table 898: SP16GAPC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT1 GROUP - - Output 1 status
SIGNAL
OUT2 GROUP - - Output 2 status
SIGNAL
OUT3 GROUP - - Output 3 status
SIGNAL
OUT4 GROUP - - Output 4 status
SIGNAL
OUT5 GROUP - - Output 5 status
SIGNAL
OUT6 GROUP - - Output 6 status
SIGNAL
OUT7 GROUP - - Output 7 status
SIGNAL
OUT8 GROUP - - Output 8 status
SIGNAL
OUT9 GROUP - - Output 9 status
SIGNAL
OUT10 GROUP - - Output 10 status
SIGNAL
OUT11 GROUP - - Output 11 status
SIGNAL
OUT12 GROUP - - Output 12 status
SIGNAL
OUT13 GROUP - - Output 13 status
SIGNAL
OUT14 GROUP - - Output 14 status
SIGNAL
OUT15 GROUP - - Output 15 status
SIGNAL
OUT16 GROUP - - Output 16 status
SIGNAL
OUTOR GROUP - - Output status logic OR
SIGNAL gate for input 1 to 16

1290 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 21
Station communication

21.4.5.6 Operation principle SEMOD55725-5 v7

Upon receiving a signal at its input, Generic communication function for Single
Point indication (SPGAPC) function sends the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the
equipment or system that requests this signal. Additional configuration is needed
with PCM600 or IET600 to get the IEC 61850-8-1 communication established For
more information refer to the Engineering manual.

21.4.6 Generic communication function for Measured Value

MVGAPC SEMOD55402-1 v3

21.4.6.1 Functionality SEMOD55872-5 v10

Generic communication function for measured values (MVGAPC) function is used

to send the instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment
in the substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE
aspect to an analog value and to permit measurement supervision on that value.

21.4.6.2 Function block SEMOD54712-4 v4

MVGAPC
BLOCK ^VALUE
^IN RANGE

IEC14000022-1-en.vsd
IEC14000022 V1 EN-US

Figure 644: MVGAPC function block

21.4.6.3 Signals SEMOD55948-1 v2

PID-6753-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 899: MVGAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN REAL 0 Analog input value

PID-6753-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 900: MVGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
VALUE REAL Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE INTEGER Range

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1291

Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Station communication

21.4.6.4 Settings SEMOD55954-1 v2

PID-6753-SETTINGS v1

Table 901: MVGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
BasePrefix micro - - unit Base prefix (multiplication factor)
milli
unit
kilo
Mega
Giga
Tera
MV db 1 - 100000 Type 1 10000 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
MV zeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
MV hhLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 900.00 High High limit multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV hLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 800.00 High limit multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
MV lLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -800.00 Low limit multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
MV llLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -900.00 Low Low limit multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV min -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -1000.00 Minimum value multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV max -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 1000.00 Maximum value multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV dbType Cyclic - - Deadband Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
MV limHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)

21.4.6.5 Monitored data

PID-6753-MONITOREDDATA v1

Table 902: MVGAPC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VALUE REAL - - Magnitude of deadband
value
RANGE INTEGER 1=High - Range
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
0=Normal

1292 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 21
Station communication

21.4.6.6 Operation principle SEMOD55936-5 v7

Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, Generic communication function for
Measured Value (MVGAPC) will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the
range, as output values. Additional configuration is needed with PCM600 or
IET600 to get the IEC 61850-8-1 communication established. For more
information see the Engineering manual.

21.4.7 GOOSE function block to receive a double point value

GOOSEDPRCV

21.4.7.1 Identification
GUID-8C11DB9A-7844-4E1F-A6BB-D97ECE350FC1 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEDPRCV - -
double point value

21.4.7.2 Functionality GUID-1D2DBC22-4F04-4809-B34E-8939D442C185 v3

GOOSEDPRCV is used to receive a double point value using IEC 61850 protocol
via GOOSE.

21.4.7.3 Function block GUID-ED277880-FB5D-4630-872F-9F343D449FFE v1

GOOSEDPRCV
BLOCK ^DPOUT
^SRCDPOUT DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000249-2-en.vsdx
IEC10000249 V2 EN-US

Figure 645: GOOSEDPRCV function block

21.4.7.4 Signals
GUID-2DC54788-86AF-4B4B-8E57-A89E30F0C433 v1

Except for the BLOCK input, the rest of the inputs of this GOOSE
function block are used for GOOSE connections. These
connections are visible and possible to make only if Easy GOOSE
engineering is enabled. For instructions on how to enable Easy
GOOSE engineering in PCM600, refer to the Engineering Manual.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1293

Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Station communication

PID-6828-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 903: GOOSEDPRCV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
SRCDPOUT INTEGER 0 Source to double point output

PID-6828-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 904: GOOSEDPRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
DPOUT INTEGER Double point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for double point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for double point output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

21.4.7.5 Settings
PID-6828-SETTINGS v3

Table 905: GOOSEDPRCV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

21.4.7.6 Operation principle GUID-82A1C8A2-827A-40EF-8E58-F573E29E468E v4

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not
happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
Data Value Data Valid Comm Valid Test
Incoming data with q=Normal Updated 1 1 0
Incoming data with q=oldData 0 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=Invalid 0 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=test 0 0 1 1
Incoming data with q=test+oldData 0 0 1 1

Receiver in block 0 0 1 0
Receiver in block and 0 0 0 0
communication error
Table continues on next page

1294 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 21
Station communication

Data Value Data Valid Comm Valid Test

Receiver in test mode and incoming Updated 1 1 0
data with q= Normal
Receiver in test mode and incoming Updated 1 1 1
data with q= Test
Communication Error 0 0 0 0

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked either in SMT by

means of a cross or in ACT by means of a GOOSE connection (if
easy GOOSE engineering is enabled) to receive the double point
values.

The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is

restricted to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then
the DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is
INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

21.4.8 GOOSE function block to receive an integer value

GOOSEINTRCV

21.4.8.1 Identification
GUID-93A1E81B-1DE8-483A-BB3B-DB771EE66DC1 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive an GOOSEINTRCV - -
integer value

21.4.8.2 Functionality GUID-27B1ED7A-C8E8-499E-89C1-C656FB0337F8 v3

GOOSEINTRCV is used to receive an integer value using IEC 61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

21.4.8.3 Function block GUID-56F0C9F7-98F3-4091-B071-53CA5074DC8F v1

GOOSEINTRCV
BLOCK ^INTOUT
^SRCINTOUT DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC10000250-2-en.vsd
IEC10000250 V2 EN-US

Figure 646: GOOSEINTRCV function block

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1295

Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Station communication

21.4.8.4 Signals
GUID-2DC54788-86AF-4B4B-8E57-A89E30F0C433 v1

Except for the BLOCK input, the rest of the inputs of this GOOSE
function block are used for GOOSE connections. These
connections are visible and possible to make only if Easy GOOSE
engineering is enabled. For instructions on how to enable Easy
GOOSE engineering in PCM600, refer to the Engineering Manual.
PID-6829-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 906: GOOSEINTRCV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
SRCINTOUT INTEGER 0 Source to integer output

PID-6829-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 907: GOOSEINTRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
INTOUT INTEGER Integer output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for integer output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for integer output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

21.4.8.5 Settings
PID-6829-SETTINGS v3

Table 908: GOOSEINTRCV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

21.4.8.6 Operation principle GUID-5BBDF772-3B3E-4F7C-ABE9-18CE3C1A2E2D v4

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not
happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

1296 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 21
Station communication

Data Value Data Valid Comm Valid Test

Incoming data with q=Normal Updated 1 1 0
Incoming data with q=oldData Freeze 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=Invalid Freeze 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=test Freeze 0 1 1
Incoming data with q=test+oldData Freeze 0 1 1

Receiver in block Freeze 0 1 0

Receiver in block and communication Freeze 0 0 0
error
Receiver in test mode and incoming Updated 1 1 0
data with q= Normal
Receiver in test mode and incoming Updated 1 1 1
data with q= Test
Communication Error Freeze 0 0 0

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked either in SMT by

means of a cross or in ACT by means of a GOOSE connection (if
easy GOOSE engineering is enabled) to receive the integer values.

The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is

restricted to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then
the DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is
INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

21.4.9 GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value

GOOSEMVRCV

21.4.9.1 Identification
GUID-B1FFBE08-C823-4A58-9FE0-A9A20DA6BB44 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEMVRCV - -
measurand value

21.4.9.2 Functionality GUID-759CB016-2B4D-4D98-82E1-592044983D53 v3

GOOSEMVRCV is used to receive measured value using IEC 61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1297

Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Station communication

21.4.9.3 Function block GUID-A0B333CC-AEF4-40EA-B152-364648AB78D3 v1

GOOSEMVRCV
BLOCK ^MVOUT
^SRCMVOUT DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC10000251-2-en.vsd
IEC10000251 V2 EN-US

Figure 647: GOOSEMVRCV function block

21.4.9.4 Signals
GUID-2DC54788-86AF-4B4B-8E57-A89E30F0C433 v1

Except for the BLOCK input, the rest of the inputs of this GOOSE
function block are used for GOOSE connections. These
connections are visible and possible to make only if Easy GOOSE
engineering is enabled. For instructions on how to enable Easy
GOOSE engineering in PCM600, refer to the Engineering Manual.
PID-6830-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 909: GOOSEMVRCV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
SRCMVOUT REAL 0 Source to measurand value output

PID-6830-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 910: GOOSEMVRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
MVOUT REAL Measurand value output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for measurand value output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for measurand value output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

21.4.9.5 Settings
PID-6830-SETTINGS v3

Table 911: GOOSEMVRCV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

21.4.9.6 Operation principle GUID-7B24A6D3-2E5F-4961-A0A6-86436373809E v5

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

1298 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 21
Station communication

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not
happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
Data Value Data Valid Comm Valid Test
Incoming data with q=Normal Updated 1 1 0
Incoming data with q=oldData Freeze 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=Invalid Freeze 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=test Freeze 0 1 1
Incoming data with q=test+oldData Freeze 0 1 1

Receiver in block Freeze 0 1 0

Receiver in block and communication Freeze 0 0 0
error
Receiver in test mode and incoming Updated 1 1 0
data with q= Normal
Receiver in test mode and incoming Updated 1 1 1
data with q= Test
Communication Error Freeze 0 0 0

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked either in SMT by

means of a cross or in ACT by means of a GOOSE connection (in
case easy GOOSE engineering is enabled) to receive the measured
value.

The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is

restricted to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then
the DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is
INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

21.4.10 GOOSE function block to receive a single point value

GOOSESPRCV

21.4.10.1 Identification
GUID-F2B30A70-842E-435E-8FAB-B1E58B9C0164 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSESPRCV - -
single point value

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1299

Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Station communication

21.4.10.2 Functionality GUID-0C99A106-C131-45D3-9B81-6B188E35EB34 v3

GOOSESPRCV is used to receive a single point value using IEC 61850 protocol
via GOOSE.

21.4.10.3 Function block GUID-A414F31A-323F-4684-BADA-46F9C5E2B0E8 v1

GOOSESPRCV
BLOCK ^SPOUT
^SRCSPOUT DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC10000248-2-en.vsd
IEC10000248 V2 EN-US

Figure 648: GOOSESPRCV function block

21.4.10.4 Signals
GUID-2DC54788-86AF-4B4B-8E57-A89E30F0C433 v1

Except for the BLOCK input, the rest of the inputs of this GOOSE
function block are used for GOOSE connections. These
connections are visible and possible to make only if Easy GOOSE
engineering is enabled. For instructions on how to enable Easy
GOOSE engineering in PCM600, refer to the Engineering Manual.
PID-6832-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 912: GOOSESPRCV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
SRCSPOUT BOOLEAN 0 Source to single point output

PID-6832-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 913: GOOSESPRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
SPOUT BOOLEAN Single point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for single point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for single point output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

21.4.10.5 Settings
PID-6832-SETTINGS v3

Table 914: GOOSESPRCV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

1300 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 21
Station communication

21.4.10.6 Operation principle GUID-0E25A3FB-41BD-4EFE-9CA0-1262B9CD14CD v4

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not
happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
Data Value Data Valid Comm Valid Test
Incoming data with q=Normal Updated 1 1 0
Incoming data with q=oldData 0 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=Invalid 0 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=test 0 0 1 1
Incoming data with q=test+oldData 0 0 1 1

Receiver in block 0 0 1 0
Receiver in block and 0 0 0 0
communication error
Receiver in test mode and incoming Updated 1 1 0
data with q= Normal
Receiver in test mode and incoming Updated 1 1 1
data with q= Test
Communication Error 0 0 0 0

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked either in SMT by

means of a cross or in ACT by means of a GOOSE connection (if
easy GOOSE engineering is enabled) to receive the binary single
point values.

The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is

restricted to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then
the DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is
INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1301

Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Station communication

21.4.11 GOOSE VCTR configuration for send and receive

GOOSEVCTRCONF

21.4.11.1 Identification
GUID-CD59C2EE-F937-4CCA-83C1-181F925B8A40 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
GOOSE VCTR configuration for send GOOSEVCTRC - -
and receive ONF

21.4.11.2 Functionality GUID-39C8760B-E4C2-4158-98D3-B3336364A10B v3

GOOSEVCTRCONF function is used to control the rate (in seconds) at which

voltage control information from TR8ATCC is transmitted/received to/from other
IEDs via GOOSE communication. GOOSEVCTRCONF function is visible in PST.

The following voltage control information can be sent from TR8ATCC via GOOSE
communication:
• BusV
• LoadAIm
• LoadARe
• PosRel
• SetV
• VCTRStatus
• X2

21.4.11.3 Settings
PID-2537-SETTINGS v14

Table 915: GOOSEVCTRCONF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SendOperation Off - - On Send operation
On
SendInterval 0.1 - 5.0 s 0.1 0.3 Send interval
ReceiveOperation Off - - On Receive operation
On
ReceiveInterval 0.1 - 10.0 s 0.1 0.8 Receive interval

1302 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 21
Station communication

21.4.12 GOOSE voltage control receiving block GOOSEVCTRRCV

21.4.12.1 Identification
GUID-470735CB-59CE-4935-85A1-48E9947817DF v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
GOOSE voltage control receiving block GOOSEVCTRR - -
CV

21.4.12.2 Functionality GUID-F733AE23-C2C7-4DEF-8629-EC89984C9F4B v3

GOOSEVCTRRCV component receives the voltage control data from GOOSE

network at the user defined rate.

This component also checks the received data validity, communication validity and
test mode. Communication validity will be checked upon the rate of data reception.
Data validity also depends upon the communication. If communication is invalid
then data validity will also be invalid. IEC 61850 also checks for data validity
using internal parameters which will also be passed to the DATAVALID output.
Data Value Data Valid Comm Valid Test
Incoming data with q=Normal Updated 1 1 0
Incoming data with q=oldData Freeze 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=Invalid Freeze 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=test Freeze 0 1 1
Incoming data with q=test+oldData Freeze 0 1 1

Receiver in block Freeze 0 1 0

Receiver in block and communication Freeze 0 0 0
error
Receiver in test mode and incoming Updated 1 1 0
data with q= Normal
Receiver in test mode and incoming Updated 1 1 1
data with q= Test
Communication Error Freeze 0 0 0

21.4.12.3 Function block GUID-14AF9617-BDEB-4C97-8FCB-7357F47BF37B v1

GOOSEVCTRRCV
BLOCK VCTR_RCV
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000252-1-en.vsd
IEC10000252 V1 EN-US

Figure 649: GOOSEVCTRRCV function block

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1303

Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Station communication

21.4.12.4 Signals
PID-4108-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 916: GOOSEVCTRRCV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block function

PID-4108-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 917: GOOSEVCTRRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
VCTR_RCV GROUP SIGNAL Output group connection to voltage control
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for output signals
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for output signals
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

21.4.13 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking

GOOSEINTLKRCV SEMOD173197-1 v2

21.4.13.1 Functionality GUID-92ECE152-892C-4214-95DE-B92718689434 v2

GOOSE communication can be used for exchanging information between IEDs via
the IEC 61850-8-1 station communication bus. This is typically used for sending
apparatus position indications for interlocking or reservation signals for 1-of-n
control. GOOSE can also be used to exchange any boolean, integer, double point
and analog measured values between IEDs.

1304 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 21
Station communication

21.4.13.2 Function block SEMOD173210-4 v5

GOOSEINTLKRCV
BLOCK ^RESREQ
^SRCRESREQ ^RESGRANT
^SRCRESGR ^APP1_OP
^SRCAPP1 ^APP1_CL
^SRCAPP2 APP1VAL
^SRCAPP3 ^APP2_OP
^SRCAPP4 ^APP2_CL
^SRCAPP5 APP2VAL
^SRCAPP6 ^APP3_OP
^SRCAPP7 ^APP3_CL
^SRCAPP8 APP3VAL
^SRCAPP9 ^APP4_OP
^SRCAPP10 ^APP4_CL
^SRCAPP11 APP4VAL
^SRCAPP12 ^APP5_OP
^SRCAPP13 ^APP5_CL
^SRCAPP14 APP5VAL
^SRCAPP15 ^APP6_OP
^APP6_CL
APP6VAL
^APP7_OP
^APP7_CL
APP7VAL
^APP8_OP
^APP8_CL
APP8VAL
^APP9_OP
^APP9_CL
APP9VAL
^APP10_OP
^APP10_CL
APP10VAL
^APP11_OP
^APP11_CL
APP11VAL
^APP12_OP
^APP12_CL
APP12VAL
^APP13_OP
^APP13_CL
APP13VAL
^APP14_OP
^APP14_CL
APP14VAL
^APP15_OP
^APP15_CL
APP15VAL
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC07000048-4-en.vsd
IEC07000048 V4 EN-US

Figure 650: GOOSEINTLKRCV function block

21.4.13.3 Signals SEMOD173205-1 v2

GUID-2DC54788-86AF-4B4B-8E57-A89E30F0C433 v1

Except for the BLOCK input, the rest of the inputs of this GOOSE
function block are used for GOOSE connections. These
connections are visible and possible to make only if Easy GOOSE
engineering is enabled. For instructions on how to enable Easy
GOOSE engineering in PCM600, refer to the Engineering Manual.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1305

Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Station communication

PID-6831-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 918: GOOSEINTLKRCV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals
SRCRESREQ BOOLEAN 0 Source to reservation request
SRCRESGR BOOLEAN 0 Source to reservation granted
SRCAPP1 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 1 position
SRCAPP2 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 2 position
SRCAPP3 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 3 position
SRCAPP4 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 4 position
SRCAPP5 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 5 position
SRCAPP6 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 6 position
SRCAPP7 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 7 position
SRCAPP8 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 8 position
SRCAPP9 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 9 position
SRCAPP10 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 10 position
SRCAPP11 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 11 position
SRCAPP12 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 12 position
SRCAPP13 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 13 position
SRCAPP14 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 14 position
SRCAPP15 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 15 position

PID-6831-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 919: GOOSEINTLKRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
RESREQ BOOLEAN Reservation request
RESGRANT BOOLEAN Reservation granted
APP1_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is open
APP1_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is closed
APP1VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is valid
APP2_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is open
APP2_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is closed
APP2VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is valid
APP3_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is open
APP3_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is closed
APP3VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is valid
APP4_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is open
APP4_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is closed
APP4VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is valid
APP5_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is open
Table continues on next page

1306 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 21
Station communication

Name Type Description

APP5_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is closed
APP5VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is valid
APP6_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is open
APP6_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is closed
APP6VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is valid
APP7_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is open
APP7_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is closed
APP7VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is valid
APP8_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is open
APP8_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is closed
APP8VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is valid
APP9_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is open
APP9_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is closed
APP9VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is valid
APP10_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is open
APP10_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is closed
APP10VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is valid
APP11_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is open
APP11_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is closed
APP11VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is valid
APP12_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is open
APP12_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is closed
APP12VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is valid
APP13_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is open
APP13_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is closed
APP13VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is valid
APP14_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is open
APP14_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is closed
APP14VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is valid
APP15_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is open
APP15_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is closed
APP15VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is valid
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication Valid
TEST BOOLEAN Test Output

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1307

Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Station communication

21.4.13.4 Settings SEMOD173168-1 v2

PID-6831-SETTINGS v3

Table 920: GOOSEINTLKRCV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

21.4.13.5 Operation principle GUID-7275CFBA-F1FE-496A-A9A1-724139DB2081 v1

The APPxVAL output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not
happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
Data Value Data Valid Comm Valid Test
Incoming data with q=Normal Updated 1 1 0
Incoming data with q=oldData 0 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=Invalid 0 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=test 0 0 1 1
Incoming data with q=test+oldData 0 0 1 1

Receiver in block 0 0 1 0
Receiver in block and 0 0 0 0
communication error
Receiver in test mode and incoming Updated 1 1 0
data with q= Normal
Receiver in test mode and incoming Updated 1 1 1
data with q= Test
Communication Error 0 0 0 0

At least one of the inputs of this GOOSE block must be linked

either in SMT by means of a cross or in ACT by means of a
GOOSE connection (if easy GOOSE engineering is enabled) to
receive any data. Only those outputs whose source input is linked/
connected will be updated.

The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is

restricted to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then
the APPxVAL output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is

1308 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 21
Station communication

INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD

DATA then the APPxVAL output will be LOW.

21.4.14 GOOSE binary receive GOOSEBINRCV SEMOD173158-1 v3

21.4.14.1 Function block SEMOD173175-4 v2

GOOSEBINRCV
BLOCK ^OUT1
^SRCOUT1 DVALID1
^SRCOUT2 ^OUT2
^SRCOUT3 DVALID2
^SRCOUT4 ^OUT3
^SRCOUT5 DVALID3
^SRCOUT6 ^OUT4
^SRCOUT7 DVALID4
^SRCOUT8 ^OUT5
^SRCOUT9 DVALID5
^SRCOUT10 ^OUT6
^SRCOUT11 DVALID6
^SRCOUT12 ^OUT7
^SRCOUT13 DVALID7
^SRCOUT14 ^OUT8
^SRCOUT15 DVALID8
^SRCOUT16 ^OUT9
DVALID9
^OUT10
DVALID10
^OUT11
DVALID11
^OUT12
DVALID12
^OUT13
DVALID13
^OUT14
DVALID14
^OUT15
DVALID15
^OUT16
DVALID16
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC07000047-4-en.vsd
IEC07000047 V4 EN-US

Figure 651: GOOSEBINRCV function block

21.4.14.2 Signals SEMOD173166-1 v2

GUID-2DC54788-86AF-4B4B-8E57-A89E30F0C433 v1

Except for the BLOCK input, the rest of the inputs of this GOOSE
function block are used for GOOSE connections. These
connections are visible and possible to make only if Easy GOOSE
engineering is enabled. For instructions on how to enable Easy
GOOSE engineering in PCM600, refer to the Engineering Manual.

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1309

Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Station communication

PID-6827-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 921: GOOSEBINRCV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals
SRCOUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 1
SRCOUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 2
SRCOUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 3
SRCOUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 4
SRCOUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 5
SRCOUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 6
SRCOUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 7
SRCOUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 8
SRCOUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 9
SRCOUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 10
SRCOUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 11
SRCOUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 12
SRCOUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 13
SRCOUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 14
SRCOUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 15
SRCOUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 16

PID-6827-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 922: GOOSEBINRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Binary output 1
DVALID1 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Binary output 2
DVALID2 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Binary output 3
DVALID3 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Binary output 4
DVALID4 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Binary output 5
DVALID5 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Binary output 6
DVALID6 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Binary output 7
DVALID7 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Binary output 8
DVALID8 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 8
Table continues on next page

1310 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 21
Station communication

Name Type Description

OUT9 BOOLEAN Binary output 9
DVALID9 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Binary output 10
DVALID10 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Binary output 11
DVALID11 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Binary output 12
DVALID12 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Binary output 13
DVALID13 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Binary output 14
DVALID14 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Binary output 15
DVALID15 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Binary output 16
DVALID16 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 16
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication Valid
TEST BOOLEAN Test Output

21.4.14.3 Settings SEMOD173168-1 v2

PID-6827-SETTINGS v3

Table 923: GOOSEBINRCV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

21.4.14.4 Operation principle GUID-950F2501-9183-43C0-A193-7D15124F6CCE v1

The DVALIDx output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not
happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
Data Value Data Valid Comm Valid Test
Incoming data with q=Normal Updated 1 1 0
Incoming data with q=oldData 0 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=Invalid 0 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=test 0 0 1 1
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1311

Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Station communication

Data Value Data Valid Comm Valid Test

Incoming data with q=test+oldData 0 0 1 1

Receiver in block
Receiver in block and
communication error
Receiver in test mode and incoming
data with q= Normal
Receiver in test mode and incoming
data with q= Test
Communication Error
0 0 1 0
0 0 0 0
Updated 1 1 0
Updated 1 1 1
0 0 0 0

At least one of the inputs of this GOOSE block must be linked

either in SMT by means of a cross or in ACT by means of a
GOOSE connection (if easy GOOSE engineering is enabled) to
receive any data. Only those outputs whose source input is linked/
connected will be updated.

The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is

restricted to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then
the DVALIDx output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is
INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the DVALIDx output will be LOW.

21.4.15 GOOSE function block to receive a switching device

GOOSEXLNRCV

21.4.15.1 Identification
GUID-4B23D0CF-F298-4BBC-B833-1B8CC98D1604 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEXLNRCV - -
switching device

21.4.15.2 Functionality GUID-5AC7DE11-CB95-4565-A8AE-FB23D59FD717 v1

The GOOSE XLN Receive component is used to collect information from another
device’s XCBR/XSWI logical node sent over process bus via GOOSE. The
GOOSE XLN Receive component includes 12 different outputs (and their
respective channel valid bits) with defined names to ease the 61850 mapping of the
GOOSE signals in the configuration process.

1312 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 21
Station communication

21.4.15.3 Function block GUID-690FD935-5344-4D6F-AB94-F9FD5FD35B23 v1

GOOSEXLNRCV
BLOCK ^BEH
^SRCBEH BEH_VALID
^SRCLOC ^LOC
^SRCBLKOPN LOC_VALID
^SRCBLKCLS ^BLKOPN
^SRCPOS BLKOPN_VALID
^SRCOPCNT ^BLKCLS
^SRCBLK BLKCLS_VALID
^SRCSTSELD ^POSVAL
^SRCOPRCVD POSVAL_VALID
^SRCOPOK ^OPCNT
^SRCEEHLT OPCNT_VALID
^SRCOPCAP ^BLK
BLK_VALID
^STSELD
STSELD_VALID
^OPRCVD
OPRCVD_VALID
^OPOK
OPOK_VALID
^EEHEALTH
EEHEALTH_VALID
^OPCAP
OPCAP_VALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC16000036-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000036 V1 EN-US

Figure 652: GOOSEXLNRCV function block

21.4.15.4 Signals
GUID-2DC54788-86AF-4B4B-8E57-A89E30F0C433 v1

Except for the BLOCK input, the rest of the inputs of this GOOSE
function block are used for GOOSE connections. These
connections are visible and possible to make only if Easy GOOSE
engineering is enabled. For instructions on how to enable Easy
GOOSE engineering in PCM600, refer to the Engineering Manual.
PID-6643-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 924: GOOSEXLNRCV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals
SRCBEH INTEGER 0 Source to behaviour output
SRCLOC BOOLEAN 0 Source to local control behaviour output
SRCBLKOPN BOOLEAN 0 Source to block opening
SRCBLKCLS BOOLEAN 0 Source to block closing
SRCPOS INTEGER 0 Source to switch position
SRCOPCNT INTEGER 0 Source to operation counter
SRCBLK BOOLEAN 0 Source to dynamic blocking of function described
by the LN
SRCSTSELD BOOLEAN 0 Source to the controllable data is in the status
"selected”
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1313

Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Station communication

Name Type Default Description

SRCOPRCVD BOOLEAN 0 Source to operate command for a controllable
data object received
SRCOPOK BOOLEAN 0 Source to operate command for a controllable
data object accepted
SRCEEHLT INTEGER 0 Source to external equipment health
SRCOPCAP INTEGER 0 Source to operating capability

PID-6643-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 925: GOOSEXLNRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
BEH INTEGER Behaviour
BEH_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on Beh output
LOC BOOLEAN Local control behaviour
LOC_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on Loc output
BLKOPN BOOLEAN Block opening
BLKOPN_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on BlkOpn output
BLKCLS BOOLEAN Block closing
BLKCLS_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on BlkCls output
POSVAL INTEGER Switch position
POSVAL_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on PosVal output
OPCNT INTEGER Operation counter
OPCNT_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on OpCnt output
BLK BOOLEAN Dynamic blocking of function described by the LN
BLK_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on Blk output
STSELD BOOLEAN The controllable data is in the status "selected”
STSELD_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on stSeld output
OPRCVD BOOLEAN Operate command for a controllable data object
received
OPRCVD_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on opRcvd output
OPOK BOOLEAN Operate command for a controllable data object
accepted
OPOK_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on opOk output
EEHEALTH INTEGER External equipment health
EEHEALTH_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on EEHealth output
OPCAP INTEGER Operating capability
OPCAP_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on OpCap output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

1314 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 21
Station communication

21.4.15.5 Settings
PID-6643-SETTINGS v3

Table 926: GOOSEXLNRCV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

21.4.15.6 Operation principle GUID-903B5E3F-DC92-4D0A-B4D5-59DD01F36458 v1

The xxx_VALID outputs will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not
happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

At least one of the inputs of this GOOSE block must be linked

either in SMT by means of a cross or in ACT by means of a
GOOSE connection (if easy GOOSE engineering is enabled) to
receive any data. Only those outputs whose source input is linked/
connected will be updated.

The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is

restricted to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then
the xxx_VALID output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is
INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the xxx_VALID output will be LOW.

21.5 IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication protocol GUID-6814F62B-8D99-4679-A11E-68048D1AC424 v2

21.5.1 Introduction GUID-FE2AC08A-2E04-4E73-8CA4-905522B1026A v2

The IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE process bus communication protocol enables an IED

to communicate with devices providing measured values in digital format,
commonly known as Merging Units (MU). The rear access points are used for the
communication.

21.5.2 Function block GUID-2581F3AD-7487-4C80-BDF3-9C6EC9F2E43C v3

The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool.

The signals appear only in the SMT tool when merging units (MU)

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1315

Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Station communication

are included in the configuration with the Ethernet configuration

tool. In the SMT tool they can be mapped to the desired virtual
input (SMAI) of the IED and used internally in the configuration.

21.5.3 Signals

21.5.3.1 Output signals SEMOD166622-1 v1

GUID-942C81AD-22D9-438F-95FA-1972BA2BE2E5 v1

The output signals are the same for all MUs so only the table for MU1_HW is
included in this manual.
PID-6850-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 927: MU1_HW Output signals

Name Type Description
I1 STRING Analogue input I1
I2 STRING Analogue input I2
I3 STRING Analogue input I3
I4 STRING Analogue input I4
U1 STRING Analogue input U1
U2 STRING Analogue input U2
U3 STRING Analogue input U3
U4 STRING Analogue input U4
MUDATA BOOLEAN Fatal error, data not received, transmission
errors, time-sync issues or inconsistent sample
rate
SYNCH BOOLEAN High when IED clock is not within configured
accuracy or time domain
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN Fatal error or recovery state after fatal error. High
if any subscribed channel has bad quality or
TEST while IED not in test mode.
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN MU not synced or MU clock not synced to same
clock as IED
TESTMODE BOOLEAN Quality of one or more subscribed analogue
channels is TEST
SIMMODE BOOLEAN MU delivers simulated data accepted by IED
I1QUALITY INTEGER Binary coded quality information for I1
I2QUALITY INTEGER Binary coded quality information for I2
I3QUALITY INTEGER Binary coded quality information for I3
I4QUALITY INTEGER Binary coded quality information for I4
U1QUALITY INTEGER Binary coded quality information for U1
U2QUALITY INTEGER Binary coded quality information for U2
U3QUALITY INTEGER Binary coded quality information for U3
U4QUALITY INTEGER Binary coded quality information for U4

1316 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 21
Station communication

21.5.4 Settings SEMOD166625-1 v2

PID-6850-SETTINGS v3

Table 928: MU1_HW Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite

21.5.5 Monitored data

PID-6850-MONITOREDDATA v3

Table 929: MU1_HW Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MUDATA BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Fatal error, data not
1=Error received, transmission
errors, time-sync issues
or inconsistent sample
rate
SYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - High when IED clock is
1=Error not within configured
accuracy or time domain
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Fatal error or recovery
0=No state after fatal error.
High if any subscribed
channel has bad quality
or TEST while IED not in
test mode.
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - MU not synced or MU
1=Error clock not synced to
same clock as IED
TESTMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Quality of one or more
0=No subscribed analogue
channels is TEST
SIMMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - MU delivers simulated
0=No data accepted by IED
BadReference BOOLEAN 1=Yes - BadReference indication
0=No output for I1
Derived BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Derived indication output
0=No for I1
Failure BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Failure indication output
0=No for I1
Inaccurate BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inaccurate indication
0=No output for I1
Inconsistent BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inconsistent indication
0=No output for I1
Table continues on next page

Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC 1317

Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 164-UEN B
Station communication

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

OldData BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OldData indication
0=No output for I1
OperatorBlocked BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OperatorBlocked
0=No indication output for I1
Oscillatory BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Oscillatory indication
0=No output for I1
OutOfRange BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OutOfRange indication
0=No output for I1
Overflow BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Overflow indication
0=No output for I1
Source BOOLEAN 0=Process - Source indication output
1=Substituted for I1
Test BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Test indication output for
0=No I1
Validity INTEGER 0=Good - Validity indication output
2=Reserved I1
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
BadReference BOOLEAN 1=Yes - BadReference indication
0=No output for I2
Derived BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Derived indication output
0=No for I2
Failure BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Failure indication output
0=No for I2
Inaccurate BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inaccurate indication
0=No output for I2
Inconsistent BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inconsistent indication
0=No output for I2
OldData BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OldData indication
0=No output for I2
OperatorBlocked BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OperatorBlocked
0=No indication output for I2
Oscillatory BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Oscillatory indication
0=No output for I2
OutOfRange BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OutOfRange indication
0=No output for I2
Overflow BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Overflow indication
0=No output for I2
Source BOOLEAN 0=Process - Source indication output
1=Substituted for I2
Test BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Test indication output for
0=No I2
Validity INTEGER 0=Good - Validity indication output
2=Reserved I2
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
BadReference BOOLEAN 1=Yes - BadReference indication
0=No output for I3
Derived BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Derived indication output
0=No for I3
Table continues on next page

1318 Transformer protection RET670 2.2 IEC

Technical manual
1MRK 504 164-UEN B Section 21
Station communication

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

Failure BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Failure indication output
0=No for I3
Inaccurate BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inaccurate indication
0=No output for I3
Inconsistent BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inconsistent indication
0=No output for I3
OldData BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OldData indication
0=No output for I3
OperatorBlocked BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OperatorBlocked
0=No indication output for I3
Oscillatory BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Oscillatory indication
0=No output for I3
OutOfRange BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OutOfRange indication
0=No output for I3
Overflow BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Overflow indication
0=No output for I3
Source BOOLEAN 0=Process - Source indication output
1=Substituted for I3
Test BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Test indication output for
0=No I3
Validity INTEGER 0=Good - Validity indication output
2=Reserved I3
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
BadReference BOOLEAN 1=Yes - BadReference indication
0=No output for I4
Derived BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Derived indication output
0=No for I4
Failure BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Failure indication output
0=No for I4
Inaccurate BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inaccurate indication
0=No output for I4
Inconsistent BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inconsistent indication
0=No output for I4
OldData BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OldData indication
0=No output for I4
OperatorBlocked BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OperatorBlocked